Bid Package 08 North Well Field - Garney Construction

BIDDING DOCUMENTS 

for the 

Ward County Water Supply Expansion 

Project – Raw Water Well Sites Ward 

County North Well Field, Bid Package 

#8 – Raw Water Supply Well Sites- 

North Well Field 

May 24 th , 2012 

400 East 24 th Street P.O. Box 869 Big Spring, Texas 79721-0869 

432-267-6341 www.crmwd.org Fax 432-267-3121

CMAR’s TABLE OF CONTENTS 

Division / 

Section 

Title 

00 01 10 Table of Contents 

00 03 00 Advertisement for Bids 

00 10 00 Instructions To Bidders 

BP 

Bid Proposal Form 

00 43 43 Wage Rates 

00 52 23 Agreement (Sample) 

00 61 13.13 Performance Bond (Sample) 

00 61 13.16 Payment Bond (Sample) 

00 62 13 Certificate of Insurance 

00 72 00 Standard General Conditions 

00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions (Revised by Garney) 

Division 1 General Requirements 

01 11 00 

01 29 00 

01 31 00 

Summary of Work 

Payment Procedures 

Project Management and Coordination 

01 31 13 Project Coordination 

01 32 16 Construction Progress Schedule (see attached Preliminary Schedule in section) 

01 33 00 

01 40 00 

01 50 00 

Submittal Procedures 

Quality Requirements 

Temporary Facilities and Controls 

01 57 00 Temporary Controls 

01 60 00 Product Requirements 

01 70 00 

01 74 23 

Execution and Closeout Requirements 

Final Cleaning 

01 75 00 Starting and Adjusting 

01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data 

Appendix A 

Appendix B 

Technical Contract Documents for Raw Water Well Sites – Ward County North Well 

Field (Daniel B. Stephens & Associates, Inc. and Freese And Nichols) 

Project Manual for Vertical Turbine Submersible Pumping Units Ward County North 

Well Field (Daniel B. Stephens & Associates, Inc.) 

Table of Contents – Bid Package #8 00 01 10-1 

Colorado River Municipal Water District 

Ward County Water Supply Expansion Project – North Well Field 

5/24/2012

Advertisement for Bids

ADVERTISEMENT FOR BID PACKAGE #8, RAW WATER SUPPLY WELL SITES - WARD COUNTY - 

NORTH WELL FIELD 

Sealed proposals for the Ward County Water Supply Expansion Project–North Well Field will be received 

at Colorado River Municipal Water District, 400 East 24 th Street, Big Spring, Texas 79721. Proposals 

are to be turned in by 3:30 p.m., prevailing time on June 7 th , 2012. Said construction shall include 

work for Bid Package #8, Raw Water Supply Well Sites-Ward County-North Well Field as 

described in the contract documents. The value of this package is estimated to be from $4.0 to 

$6.0 million. 

Proposals shall be addressed to Mr. Nicholas Lester, P.E., Freese and Nichols. Bids shall be submitted in 

sealed envelopes marked “Proposal” and the project name “Ward County Water Supply Expansion 

Project – North Well Field”. “Bid Package #8, Raw Water Supply Well Sites-Ward County-North Well 

Field”. For further details refer to CMAR section 00 10 00 Instructions To Bidders, 8. Submissions of 

Bids. Any bid proposal received after 3:30 p.m., prevailing time on June 7 th , 2012, will be returned 

unopened. 

No bid may be changed, amended or modified after the above time and date. A bid may be, however, 

withdrawn and resubmitted any time prior to the time set for receipt of bids. 

Bid documents will be made available on May 24 th , 2012 at the following web address: 

https://team.garney.com/4378 

You will need to add your contact information to the Bidder’s List. At that point you will be emailed a link 

and password to access the bid documents. 

Please be aware that the website password will be case sensitive. 

No Pre-bid conference will be held for Bid Package #8. 

Bid Documents may be downloaded from the above mentioned website for free or a CD containing the 

documents can be requested from Garney Companies, Inc. No hard copies of plans or specifications will 

be sent out. It is the responsibility of the interested party to download and print the bid documents. Please 

contact Marcus Grace by email: mgrace@garney.com or phone at 816-536-6485 with any questions. 

Colorado River Municipal Water District and Freese and Nichols/Daniel B. Stephens & Associates, Inc. 

will receive and open all proposals in a manner which does not disclose the contents to the respondents 

or the public during the selection process. Bids will be turned into the Colorado River Municipal Water 

District’s Big Spring, Texas office previously mentioned. All bids shall be made public after award of the 

agreement or not later than the fourteenth day after the date of the final selection of bids or proposals, 

whichever is later. In addition to price, proposals will be evaluated and selected on the basis of 

responses to the Statement of Bidders Experience and overall value added to the project. Garney 

Companies, Inc., Colorado River Municipal Water District, Freese and Nichols and Daniel B. Stephens & 

Associates, Inc. reserve the right to make an award to other than the lowest-priced bidder. Award is 

subject to the discretion and final approval of the Colorado River Municipal Water District. All bids shall be 

valid for a period of ninety (90) days from the date bids are open and no bid may be withdrawn until after 

the expiration date. 

Qualifications as stated in the instructions to bidders will be strictly enforced and any bidder not meeting 

Advertisements for Bids – Bid Package #8 00 03 00-1 



5/24/2012 (Revised)

these qualifications will be disqualified. 

Anticipated Publish Dates: May 24 th , 2012 through June 7 th , 2012. 

All prices quoted shall be F.O.B destination, Project Construction Site. 

Neither the State of Texas nor any of its departments, agencies, or employees are or will be a party to 

this Invitation for Bids or any resulting contract. 

Although this Contract is not subject to the EPA Established Minority Business Enterprise 

(MBE)/Women’s Business Enterprise (WBE) “fair share” goals or the TWDB Document Guidance for 

Utilization of Small Minority and Women Owned Businesses. A good faith effort to utilize disadvantaged 

businesses is suggested and may be a factor in the evaluation process of contractors for this project. 

Equal Opportunity in Employment - All qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment 

without regard to race, color, religion, sex, age, handicap or national origin. Bidders on this work will be 

required to comply with the President's Executive Order No. 11246, as amended by Executive Order No. 

11375, and as supplemented in Department of Labor regulations 41 CFR Part 60. 

Performance Bonds Rates are required as part of the bid form and will be used as part of the evaluation 

process. 

No Bid Bonds will be required. 

End of Section 

Advertisements for Bids – Bid Package #8 00 03 00-2 



5/24/2012 (Revised)

Instructions to Bidders

00 10 00 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 

1. Qualifications of Bidders 

A. Submit documentation with Bids to demonstrate that the Bidder is qualified by experience 

and capability to successfully construct the project within the Contract Time and for the 

Contract Amount. Include the following information: 

1. Bid Proposal Package 

2. Attachment A – Bid Proposal. 

3. Attachment B – Bidder’s Profile. 

4. Attachment C – Bidder’s Statement of Experience. 

5. Attachment D – Subcontractor’s Safety Performance Questionnaire. 

6. Attachment E – Bidder’s Scope of Work/Supply. 

7. Attachment F – List of Subcontractors 

8. Attachment G – List of Suppliers 

B. Colorado River Municipal Water District (Owner), Daniel B. Stephens & Associates, Inc. 

(Engineer), Freese and Nichols (Engineer) and Garney Companies, Inc (CMAR). may 

conduct investigations as considered necessary to establish the responsibility, 

qualifications and financial ability of the Bidders, proposed Subcontractors and other 

persons and organizations to do the work in accordance with the Contract Documents to 

Owner/Engineers/CMAR’s satisfaction, and within the prescribed time. 

Owner/Engineers/CMAR may reject the Bid of any Bidder who does not meet any such 

evaluation to Owner's satisfaction. 

2. Copies of Bidding Documents 

A. Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids; neither Owner nor 

Engineers nor CMAR assume any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from 

the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. 

B. Owner/Engineers/CMAR in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above 

terms do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and do not confer a license or 

grant for any other use. 

3. Examination of Contract Documents and Site 

A. It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract 

Documents thoroughly, (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may 

affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work, (c) consider federal, state and 

local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the 

Work, (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder’s observations with Contract Documents, and 

(e) notify CMAR of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. 

B. Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder’s own expense, make or obtain any 

additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any 

additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface 

and underground facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, 

progress, performance or furnishing of the Work which Bidder deems necessary to determine 

Instructions To Bidders – Bid Package #8 


Ward County Water Supply Expansion Project – North Well Field 00 10 00 - 1 

5/24/2012

its bid for performing and finishing the Work in accordance with the time, price and other 

terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 

C. The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access 

thereto and other lands designated for use by Bidder in performing the Work are identified in 

the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary 

construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by Bidder. 

Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be 

obtained and paid for by Owner unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 

D. The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontestable representation by Bidder that Bidder 

has complied with every requirement of this Article, that without exception the Bid is premised 

upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents and such 

means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated 

in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in 

scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for 

performance and furnishing of the Work. 

E. No pre-bid conference will be held for Bid Package #8. 

4. Technical Specifications 

All technical specifications are issued by: 

Daniel B. Stephens & Associates, Inc. 

6020 Academy Road NE 

Suite 100 

Albuquerque, NM 87109 

Freese and Nichols 

4055 International Plaza 

Suite 200 

Fort Worth, TX 76109 

817-735-7393 

5. Questions and Interpretations and Addenda 

A. All questions about the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed via 

email to Mr. Marcus Grace, Garney Companies, Inc. at mgrace@garney.com. Technical 

interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by CMAR and Engineer in response to 

such questions will be issued by Addenda. Questions received less than five (5) days prior to 

the date for opening of Bids may not be answered. Only questions answered by formal 

written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without 

legal effect. 

B. Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by 

CMAR, Owner or Engineers. 




5/24/2012

6. Substitutions or "equivalent" Items 

A. The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment described in the 

Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "orequivalent" 

items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specification 

that a substitute or "or-equivalent" item of material or equipment may be furnished or used by 

Bidder if acceptable to Engineers/CMAR, application for such acceptance will not be 

considered by Engineers/CMAR until after the Effective Date of the Agreement unless the 

Engineers/CMAR at their option, elect to issue an Addenda naming a substitute or "orequivalent" 

item prior to receipt of bids. For EQUIPMENT PROPOSALS only the 

Manufacturers listed in the Specifications will be accepted. The procedure for submission of 

any such application by Bidder and consideration by Engineers/CMAR as set forth in 

Paragraph 6.05 of the General Conditions and in CMAR’s Specification Section 01 33 00, 

Submittal Procedures. 

7. Bid Form 

A. All blanks on the Bid Form must be completed in ink or by typewriter. Bidder shall indicate 

with “N/A” any Bid Packages not being proposed on. 

B. Bids by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vicepresident 

(or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the 

corporate seal must be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The 

corporate address and state of incorporation must be shown below the signature. 

C. Bids by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name signed by a partner, whose 

title must appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership must be 

shown below the signature. 

D. All names must be typed or printed below the signature. 

E. The Bid shall contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda (the numbers of which 

must be filled in on the Bid Form). 

F. The address and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid must be shown. 

G. Bids must be priced as indicated on the Bid Form for the Bid Packages as applicable to the 

Bidder. If applicable the price of the alternative bids for each Bid Package will be the amount 

to be added to or deducted from the price of the Package’s Base Bid if the alternate is 

selected. 

8. Submission of Bids 

A. Submission of Bid shall include: 

1. Bid Proposal Package 

2. Attachment A – Bid Proposal 

3. Attachment B – Bidder’s Profile 

4. Attachment C – Bidder’s Statement of Experience. 

5. Attachment D – Subcontractor’s Safety Performance Questionnaire. 

6. Attachment E - Bidder’s Scope of Work/Supply. 

7. Attachment F – List of Subcontractors 

8. Attachment G – List of Suppliers 




5/24/2012

B. Bids shall be submitted at the time and place indicated in the Invitation to Bid and shall be 

enclosed in an opaque sealed envelope, marked with: 

WARD COUNTY WATER SUPPLY EXPANSION PROJECT – NORTH WELL FIELD 

BID PACKAGE #8 - RAW WATER SUPPLY WELL SITES – WARD COUNTY – NORTH WELL FIELD 

FOR 

COLORADO RIVER MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT 

(Bidder’s Name) 

(Bidder’s Address) 

and accompanied by all required documents. Bidder will acknowledge on outside of envelope 

any addenda. 

Any Bid received after the time indicated in the invitation will be considered ineligible and 

returned unopened. 

C. Bids may be rejected that are qualified with conditions, clauses, or alterations, or items not 

called for in the proposal, or irregularities of any kind in which the Owner / Engineers/ 

CMAR’s opinion may disqualify the Bidder. 

9. Modifications and Withdrawal of Bids 

A. Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed and delivered 

to the place where Bids are to be submitted at any time prior to the opening of Bids. 

10. Bids to Remain Subject to Acceptance 

A. All bids will remain subject to acceptance for sixty (60) days after the day of the Bid opening, 

but Owner, Engineers and CMAR may, in their sole discretion, release any Bid prior to that 

date. 

11. Award of Contract 

A. Owner and Engineers reserve the right to reject any and all Bids, to waive any and all 

informalities not involving price, time or changes in the Work and to negotiate contract terms with 

the Successful Bidder and the right to disregard all nonconforming, nonresponsive, unbalanced or 

conditional Bids. In the event that there is a conflict in the statement of a price within the bid the 

Owner and Engineers reserve the right to select the amount most advantageous to the Owner. 

Also, Owner and/or Engineers reserve the right to reject the Bid of any Bidder if Owner and/or 

Engineers believe that it would not be in the best interest of the Project to make an award to that 

Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful 

financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by Owner / 

Engineers. 




5/24/2012

B. In evaluating Bids, Owner / Engineers will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether 

or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices and 

other data, as may be requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award. 

The following criteria will be used in the evaluation process when selecting Bidders. 

BID PACKAGE #8 ‐ CONTRACTOR EVALUATION 

Weighting 

Description 

Value 

Proposed Cost 35 

Safety Index/History 10 

Experience/Past Performance/Qualifications/ On Time Performance 30 

Project Team (ie self perform% , subcontractors used) 15 

Financial Capability 10 

TOTAL 100 

C. Owner / Engineers may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, 

Suppliers, and other persons and organizations proposed for those portions of the Work as to 

which the identity of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations must be 

submitted as requested in “List of Subcontractors”, “List of Suppliers” and with Bid Proposal 

Form. Owner also may consider the operating costs, maintenance requirements, 

performance data and guarantees of major items of materials and equipment proposed for 

incorporation in the Work when such data is required to be submitted prior to the Notice of 

Award. 

D. Owner / Engineers / CMAR may conduct such investigations as they deem necessary to 

assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and 

financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and 

organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to 

Owner / Engineers / CMAR’s satisfaction within the prescribed time. 

E. If the contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the Bidder whose evaluation is 

considered to be of best value and of the best interests of the Project by Owner /Engineers. 

F. Point of Clarification - All Bid Proposals will be turned into CRMWD and Daniel B. 

Stephens & Associates, Inc./Freese & Nichols representatives at the designated 

time and place as indicated in the bidding documents. Although this will not be a 

public bid opening, proposal pricing will be recorded by the CRMWD and Daniel B. 

Stephens & Associates, Inc./Freese & Nichols representatives at that time. Since 

the CMAR will be submitting a proposal on Bid Package #8, they will not be present 

at this opening nor will they participate in the final selection of the successful 

proposer. 

12. Signing of Agreement 

A. After award by Owner and Engineers, the Successful Bidder will be given the required 

number of unsigned counterparts of the Agreement with all other written Contract Documents 

attached. The Bidder shall sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the 

Agreement and attached documents to CMAR and the Owner with the required Bonds. 

Thereafter CMAR shall deliver one fully signed counterpart to Bidder. The tentatively 

schedule is for the evaluation meeting to occur on June 14 th and then the issuing of 

the Notice of Award to the successful BIDDER will follow immediately with the goal of 

getting the BIDDER mobilized by July 5 th , 2012. 




5/24/2012

13. Trench Safety – (Construction Phase Only) 

A. The successful Bidder if applicable to their scope of work or supply will be required to provide 

a trench safety plan in accordance with state law at the time contracts are signed and within 

the fifteen (15) day time period after Notice of Award. All costs for providing and implementing 

the trench safety plan shall be included in the bid package that is being proposed on. 

14. Sales and Use Taxes 

15. Wages 

A. This project is sales tax exempt, if any, for any equipment and material that is incorporated 

into or become part of this project. 

B. The Bidder is responsible for obtaining the latest information from the State Comptroller's 

Office and/or other appropriate entities, regarding tax laws and exemptions, and bidding 

accordingly. 

A. Wage rates paid on this project must not be less than indicated on the Wage Rate Schedule 

included in the CMAR documents which is established by the Owner in compliance with 

statutory requirements and prevailing wages in the locality of the project. Davis-Bacon wage 

rates shall be utilized. David-Bacon Wage sheets are provided in the bidding documents but 

are provided as a guideline only. The bidder is responsible to verify that the most 

current one is utilized in the compiling of the attached proposal. 

16. Contract Time 

A. This project is to be substantially complete (ready for operation) November 1 st , 2012. The 

Project is to be at final completion by November 30 th . Liquidated damages are set forth in the 

“Bid Proposal Package #8” but are $2,000 for every calendar day that surpasses the 

Substantial Complete dates and $1,000 for every calendar day that surpasses the Final 

Completion date as previously identified. Anticipated pump delivery dates are tabulated on 

the “Bid Proposal Package #8” form. A calendar day will be awarded for every day that 

the pump delivery slips but no extra monetary means will be awarded, only a one for 

one calendar day to extend the contract dates. 

17. Subcontractors 

A. Only contractors licensed in the state of Texas will be allowed to perform the following 

scopes of work: 

1. Submersible Pump Installation 

2. Electrical 




5/24/2012

Bid Proposal Form



Bid Proposal Package #8 

Project Name: Ward County Water Supply Expansion Project – North Well Field (Bid 

Package #8 – Raw Water Supply Well Sites-Ward County-North Well Field) 

Bidder must answer all questions in the following Attachments clearly and comprehensively. If 

necessary, answers may be continued on separately attached sheets. 

In order to submit a responsive bid, Bidder must complete and submit the Attachments as 

indicated in the chart below with the Bid. Bidder agrees that in determining the Best Value Bid 

Colorado River Municipal Water District (Owner) and Daniel B. Stephens & Associates, 

Inc./Freese and Nichols (Engineers) will consider the Bidder’s information provided to this 

questionnaire in awarding a Contract for this Project. Anything in Attachments A, B, C, D, E, F 

and G that might negatively impact a Bidder’s ability to complete the Work within the specified 

Time and for the proposed price may result in the Bid being rejected. 

Acceptance of Evaluation Methodology: By submitting a bid, Bidder accepts the evaluation 

process and acknowledges and accepts that determination of the “best value” firms will require 

subjective judgments by the Owner / Engineer s. See “Instructions to Bidders’ section for 

additional information regarding the bid evaluation process. 

Attachment A – Bid Proposal 

Attachment B – Bidder’s Profile 

Attachment C – Bidder’s Statement of Experience 

Attachment D – Contractor’s Safety Performance Questionnaire 

Attachment E – Bidder’s Scope of Work/Supply 

Attachment F – List of Subcontractors 

Attachment G – List of Suppliers 

(X) – Required with Bid Submittal 

(N/A) – Not Applicable For Supply Only Packages 

Attachments 

Bid Package A B C D E F G 

8 X X X X X X X 

Bid Proposal Form – Bid Package #8 


Ward County Water Supply Expansion Project – North Well Field BP - 1 

5/24/2012



***Point of Clarification - All Bid Proposals will be turned into CRMWD and Daniel B. 

Stephens & Associates, Inc./Freese & Nichols representatives at the designated time 

and place as indicated in the bidding documents. Although this will not be a public bid 

opening, proposal pricing will be recorded by the CRMWD and Daniel B. Stephens & 

Associates, Inc./Freese & Nichols representatives at that time. Since the CMAR will be 

submitting a proposal on Bid Package #8 they will not be present at this opening nor 

will they participate in the final selection of the successful proposer.*** 




5/24/2012



ATTACHMENT A 

BID PROPOSAL – Package #8, Raw Water Supply Well Sites-Ward County-North Well 

Field 

Colorado River Municipal Water District (CRMWD) 


Proposal of _________________________ 

Address ___________________________ 

TO CRMWD and Garney Companies, Inc.: 

___________________________ 

City State Zip 

June 7 th , 2012 at 3:30 PM (local time) 

Bid Due Date 

The undersigned hereby proposes to furnish the equipment, fuel, labor, materials, power, tools, supervision and 

transportation as needed to perform the work required for the construction of the Ward County Water Supply 

Expansion Project – North Well Field, Bid Package #8 that the Bidder may submit. 

Bid 

Package 

Description and Price in Words 

Total Cost in Figures 

8a 

Furnish and install all items necessary to complete the construction of the 21 Well 

Sites as indicated in contract documents. This includes all earthwork improvements, 

concrete construction, misc. metals, coatings and linings, submersible pump 

installation (refer to Appendix B for details concerning pre-purchased pumps), column 

piping and accessories, conveyance piping and accessories, electrical, 

instrumentation, installation of pre-purchased SCADA (refer to section 40 90 02.01 for 

clarification), plumbing and fencing to complete the 21 well sites complete. 

$___________________________________________________________dollars and 

_______________________________________________________________cents. $ 




5/24/2012

Bid 

Package 



Description and Price in Words 

Total Cost in Figures 

**If the length of Column Piping changes during the final pump design from the size 

and length as indicated in Specification Section 11 97 00, Attachment A they will be 

changed by Change Order per VLF (includes only the pipe, no drop check valves) as 

follows:** 

Adder for 6” column pipe installed will be $__________________ per VLF 

Deduct for 6” column pipe not installed will be 

Adder for 8” column pipe installed will be 

Deduct for 8” column pipe not installed will be 

$__________________ per VLF 

$__________________ per VLF 

$__________________ per VLF 

** The base bid for each well’s transducer cable is 25 feet longer than the column pipe 

length for each well as indicated in Specification Section 11 97 00, Attachment A. If 

the column piping changes during the final pumping design the cable will be changed 

accordingly by a Change Order per VLF as follows:** 

Adder for Transducer Cable installed will be $__________________ per VLF 

Deduct for Transducer Cable not installed will be 

$__________________ per VLF 

**If the Conveyance Piping changes during the final pump design from the size and 

length as indicated in Specification Section 11 97 00, Attachment A, they will be 

changed by Change Order per VLF (includes pipe and all accessories as detailed on 

DWG No. M-1) as follows:** 

Adder for 8” conveyance pipe installed will be $__________________ per VLF 

Deduct for 8” conveyance pipe not installed will be $__________________ per VLF 

Adder for 10” conveyance pipe installed will be 

$__________________ per VLF 

Deduct for 10” conveyance pipe not installed will be $__________________ per VLF 

**If the Column Piping changes during the final pump design from the size and length 

as indicated in Specification Section 11 97 00, Attachment A the drop check valves will 

change accordingly. All other items will be adjusted accordingly with the Column 

Piping VLF as indicated above but the unit prices below will be used to adjust the drop 

check valves: 

Drop Check Valve – 6” $__________________ each 

Drop Check Valve – 8” 

$__________________ each 




5/24/2012



**If the length of the duct bank from the service entrance disconnect to the equipment 

rack disconnect changes during final design from the lengths indicated on sheet E-3, 

Appendix A, it will be adjusted by Change Order per LF (includes the pipe and 

installation, no drop check valves) as follows:** 

Adder for the electrical power cable installed will be 

$__________________ per LF 

Deduct for the electrical power cable not installed will be $________________ per LF 

8b 

Submersible Pump Allowance (refer to Specification Section 11 97 00, Appendix B for 

clarifications). This contract will then be assigned to the successful bidder. The drop 

check valves, column piping and all other appurtenances as indicated in the contract 

documents are included with Bid Item 8a. Once the final design has been completed a 

change order will be issued for the final value of the 21 pumps. This allowance is for 

the supplying of the pumps only. 

$ 1,000,000.00 

Total Lump Sum (including only Bid Items 8a and 8b) for the lump sum price of: 

$________________________________________________________dollars and 

________________________________________________________cents $ 

DELIVERY SCHEDULE 

Bid Package Description Base Bid Delivery Date Amount of Liquidated Damages 

8 Raw Water Supply Well Sites Substantial Completion – 11/1/2012 $2,000 / Calendar Day 

8 Raw Water Supply Well Sites Final Completion – 11/30/2012 $1,000 / Calendar Day 

It is understood that Bidders are responsible for all costs associated with their respective Bid Packages including 

but not limited to the following: 

Provide general daily cleanup of their scope of work. 

Costs to provide and maintain trash dumpsters for the specific purpose of debris removal of their scope of 

work. 

All dewatering costs including power, material, labor and equipment shall be the responsibility of the 

contractor whose work is being impacted by any infiltrated water. 

Adhere to the Project Schedule requirements identified above. 

DO NOT Include Cost of Performance Bond in Total Cost. 

Amount of liquidated damages listed are for late delivery of any and all milestone dates presented as 

above 




5/24/2012



 

 

 

 

 

All equipment shall be shipped by the Vendor and delivered to the Owner at the job site in sound 

condition, free from any damage. Equipment, which has been damaged, may be rejected. 

Within fifteen (10) days after receipt of Purchase Order, the undersigned will execute the Purchase Order 

Agreement. 

The undersigned agrees to substantially complete all work covered by these Contract Documents within 

the time set forth in the Delivery Schedule above. 

Receiving, unloading and installation of the following pre-purchased submersible pumps as follows: 

o Section 11 97 00 – Submersible Pumps 

• Equipment Designation: D4, 9, 10-15, 17-19 and 22-24 

• Expected Delivery on or about 07/31/12 (if pumps are delivered later than this date 

the contract dates will be extended one calendar day for each calendar day delay, 

but no additional funds will be awarded, only days). 

o Section 11 07 00 – Submersible Pumps 

• Equipment Designation: D1-3 and 5-8 

• Expected Delivery on or about 09/28/12 (if pumps are delivered later than this date 

the contract dates will be extended one calendar day for each calendar day delay, 

but no additional funds will be awarded, only days). 

Receiving, unloading and installation of pre-purchased SCADA Equipment: 

o Section 40 90 02.01 – Installation of Pre-Purchased SCADA Equipment 

• Equipment Designation: RTUs, Antenna Towers and Radio Antennas for each of the 21 

well sites. 

• Expected Delivery to be determined. 

The undersigned agrees to substantially complete all work covered by these Contract Documents within the time 

set forth in the Delivery Schedule above. 

The undersigned certifies that he has carefully examined these specifications and: 

Signature of Bidder’s Agent 

Requests exceptions to the Specifications. 

Signature of Bidder’s Agent 

Does Not request exceptions to the Specifications. 

Statement of Exceptions to Specifications. (What do you take exception to and why?) 

__________________________________ 

_____________________________________ 

________________________________________________________________________________________ 

________________________________________________________________________________________ 




5/24/2012



The undersigned Bidder agrees to begin work within five (5) days after date of written notice to do so, and 

The undersigned acknowledges receipt of the following addendum: 

Addendum No. Dated ______________ Addendum No. _____ Dated _______________ 

Addendum No. _____ Dated 

Company:_________________________________________ 

By:________________________________________ 

Please print 

Signature:_______________________________________ 

(Seal if Corporation) 

Title:_______________________________________ 

Please print 

_________________________________________ 

Address 

__________________________________________ 

City State Zip 

END OF ATTACHMENT A 




5/24/2012

1. Legal / Financial 



Attachment B 

BIDDER’S PROFILE 

(Return with the Bid) 

Full Legal Name: 

Business Address: 

Mailing Address: ( if different) 

Phone: Fax: 

1a.Type of Organization - Select your organization type and complete the related questions: 

Corporation Yes No 

State of Incorporation: 

Date of Incorporation: 

President’s Name: 

Vice President Name: 

Secretary’s Name: 

Treasurer’s Name: 

Partnership Yes No 

Type of Partnership: 

Date of Organization: 

Name general partner (s): 

LLC or Joint-Venture Yes No 

State of Formation: 

Date of Formation: 

Name of Principals: 

Individual Yes No 

1b. Federal Taxpayer ID Number ( provide either your EIN or SSN as 

applicable): 

1c. Does your company require a 1099 tax form at the end of the year? 




5/24/2012



Yes 

No 

1d. How many years has your organization been in business as a supplier / contractor under your 

present business name and license number: 

(years) 

1e. Has there been any change in ownership of the firm at any time during the last three years? 

NOTE: A corporation whose shares are publicly traded is not required to answer this question. 

Yes 

No 

If “yes”, explain on a separate signed page. 

1f. Is the firm a subsidiary, parent, holding company or affiliate of another construction firm? 

NOTE: Include information about other firms if one firm owns 50% or more of another, or if an 

owner, partner, or officer of your firm holds a similar position in another firm. 

Yes 

No 

If “yes”, explain on a separate signed page. 

1g. Where applicable, Contractor possesses a valid and current Contractor’s license for the project in 

which it intends to submit a bid and is qualified to do business and is in good standing in the state 

where the project is located. 

Yes 

No 

If “yes” please provide the state in which your organization is legally qualified to do business and 

indicate below registration or license numbers, if applicable. Attach separate sheet if necessary. 

State / Jurisdiction License Number Trade Category 

1h. Has your contractor’s license, where required, been revoked or suspended at any time in the last 

five years? 

Yes No N/A 

If “yes” please explain on a separate signed sheet. 

1i. Bank Reference: 

Financial Institution: 

Address: 

Telephone Number: 




5/24/2012



Point of Contact: 

1j. Bankruptcy/Litigation 

Is your firm currently the debtor in a bankruptcy case? 

Yes 

If “yes”, please attach a copy of the bankruptcy petition, showing the case number and the date 

on which the petition was filed. 

No 

List all bankruptcy actions against you, your company or related companies in the last seven 

years. Attach separate sheet as necessary. 

List any litigation against your firm in the last three years. Attached separate sheet as necessary. 

2. Certifications 

2a. Business Classification: (Please attach any applicable state certificates). 

Large Business Enterprise 

Small Business Enterprise 

Disadvantaged Business Enterprise 

Women Business Enterprise 

Minority Business Enterprise 

Veteran Business Enterprise 

Other ( Please Specify) 




5/24/2012



2b. If applicable, Bidder has liability insurance and workman’s compensation policies with the current 

coverage limits: 

Coverage 

Limits 

Yes No 

Workman’s Compensation 

Statutory 

Employer’s Liability $ 

Commercial General Liability $ 

Automobile Liability $ 

Professional Liability $ 

Umbrella $ 

Pollution Liability $ 

Other (Specify)_______________ $ 

2c. In the last five years has any insurance carrier, for any type of coverage, refused to renew the 

insurance policy for your firm? 

Yes 

No 

If “yes” explain on a separate signed page. Name the insurance carrier, the form of insurance and 

the year of the refusal. 

2d. Bonding Rate: __________________________________________________ 

Bonding Capacity: $ 

Bonding / Surety 

Company: 

Name of Surety Agent: 

Address of Surety Agent: 

Telephone Number: 

2e. Has any other surety company(s) written bonds for your firm in the last five years? 

Yes 

No 

If “yes” please provide the same above information, including dates on a separate signed sheet. 




5/24/2012



2f. At any time during the past five years, has any surety company made any payments on your 

firm’s behalf as a result of a default to satisfy any claims made against a performance or 

payment bond issued on your firm’s behalf in connection with a construction project, either public 

or private? 

Yes 

No 

If “yes”, explain on a separate signed page the date and amount of each such claim, the name 

and telephone number of the claimant, and the grounds for the claim. The present status of the 

claim, the date of resolution if resolved, the method by which such claim was resolved if 

resolved, the nature of the resolution and the amount, if any, at which the claim was resolved. 

2g. State the total worth of work in progress and under contract: 

3. Work Type Categories 

3a. What percentage of work do you normally perform with your own forces? ________________ 

3b. If you do use lower tier subs to complete any of your work, list the types of work that you 

normally subcontract out: 

________________________________________________________________________________ 

3c.Do you require bonds from your lower-tier subcontractors? 

Yes 

No 

3d. Do you normally obtain lien releases when paying subcontractors and suppliers? 

________________________________________________________________________________ 

END OF ATTACHMENT B 




5/24/2012



Attachment C 

BIDDER’S STATEMENT OF EXPERIENCE 


BIDDER’S DATA SHEET 

BIDDER’S EXPERIENCE 

Bidder must list and describe Bidder’s construction experience as a supplier / contractor for a minimum of three 

(3) projects of comparable size, scope and complexity for the Work described in the Contract Documents within 

the past five (5) years. These requirements may be individually satisfied with three (3) projects listed below (e.g. 

Project 1 may be in progress and at least 50% complete, Project 2 may demonstrate comparable scope and size 

of a successfully completed project, and Project 3 may demonstrate comparable complexity, etc). Bidder should 

refer to the Project scope of work to determine what is reasonably comparable. 

Responses should: 

1. Demonstrate experience and ability to staff this type and size of project 

2. Demonstrate ability to work safely and manage safety on a project such as this. 

3. Demonstrate experience successfully working with multiple independent contractors on separate contracts on the 

same site as part of a larger project. 

4. Demonstrate experience coordinating schedules for the scenario of the preceding item. 

General Information 

Bidder’s Name: 

Address: 

Bidder’s volume of work performed for the last three years. 

2011: __________________ 

2010: __________________ 

2009: __________________ 

Bidder’s Related Work Experience 

Reference No. 1 Ongoing Projects (at least 50% complete) 

Owner or Prime Contractor (as applicable): 

Contact Person: 

Phone No.: 

Engineer: 

Phone No.: 




5/24/2012



Initial Contract Price: $________________ 

Final Contract Price: $_________________ 

Project Description: 

Reference No. 2 Completed Projects within last 5 years 



Phone No.: 

Engineer: 

Phone No.: 







5/24/2012



Reference No. 3 Completed Projects within last 5 years 



Phone No.: 

Engineer: 

Phone No.: 




END OF ATTACHMENT C 




5/24/2012



Attachment D 

CONTRACTOR’S SAFETY PERFORMANCE QUESTIONNAIRE 

Garney Companies, Inc. is dedicated to providing a safe and healthy work environment for its employees as well as our 

contractors and their employees working on our project site. 

Contractors proposing to provide services for the project must submit the following information for review. The questions 

below relate to the 

safety and health standards, including, but not limited to the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 and the 29 CFR 1926 

Standards for Construction. 

This questionnaire has been developed by Garney Companies, Inc. to allow us to better understand your company's safety 

and health program and performance. The information submitted must be factual and verifiable. This information shall be 

used to determine eligibility of your company to perform services on this upcoming project. Your response / lack of 

response may result in disqualification from the evaluation process. 

Completion of this questionnaire in no way relieves your company of its obligation to comply with all applicable OSHA 

standards for the work your company may perform. 

1.0 Contractor Identification 

Legal Company Name: ________________________________________________________________ Date__________________ 

Street Address_______________________________________________________________________________________________ 

City:____________________________________________________ State____________________ Zip Code__________________ 

Contact Name___________________________________________ Title:_______________________________________________ 

Telephone:______________________ Fax:______________________ Email:___________________________________________ 

North American Industry Classification System (NAICS) Code(s):_________________________________________________ 

Confined Spaces Structural Steel Demolition Painting / Coatings 

Plumbing Excavation / Site Work Electrical Reinforcing Steel 

HVAC Yard Piping Surveying Drilling 

Concrete Tilt-Up Roofing Cast In-Place Concrete Masonry 

Misc Metals Carpentry Doors & Windows Insulation 

Paving (Asphalt / Concrete) Architectural Finishes Specialties Process Mech. Equipment 

Chemical Storage Tanks Instrumentation Elevators / Escalators Conveyors / Hoists 




5/24/2012



Fencing 

Other: ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

Has your company previously performed work on a Garney Companies, Inc. Project? Yes No If Yes, Provide Information Below: 

Project Name Date of Work (mm/yyyy) Project Location (city, state) Garney Project Manager 

Has your company previously performed work for the CRMWD? Yes No If Yes, Provide Information Below: 

Project Name Date of Work (mm/yyyy) Project Location (city, state) Owner Contact 

2.0 Safety Performance 

The sections below relate to your company's overall safety performance for the past Five (5) years. 

2.1 Experience Modification Rate (EMR) 

Please provide in the spaces below your company's Experience Modification Rate (EMR) for the last Five (5) years. Please attach a copy of your EMR 

Verification letter from your insurance carrier for the last Five (5) years. 

Experience Modification Rate 

20_____ 20_____ 20_____ 20_____ 20_____ 

2.2 OSHA Statistics 

Please provide your company's injury and illness data for the last Five (5) years and complete the table below. Please attach a copy of 

your OSHA Form 300 & 300A for the last Five (5) years. 

Category 20_____ 20_____ 20_____ 20_____ 20_____ 

A. Average Number of Employees 

B. Total Employee Hours Worked 

C. Total Number of Recordable Injury 

Cases 

(OSHA Form 300 A – Totals Form Column M) 




5/24/2012



Category 20_____ 20_____ 20_____ 20_____ 20_____ 

D. Number of fatalities 

(OSHA Form 300A Column G) 

E. Total Number of Cases with Days 

Away From Work / Restricted Duty 

(OSHA Form 300A – Total From Column H & I) 

F. OSHA Incidence Rate 

(Line C Above x 200,000) 

Line B Above 

G. OSHA DART Rate 

(Line E Above x 200,000) 

Line B Above 

H. Number of Restricted Days 

(OSHA Form 300A – Column K) 

I. Number of Lost Work Days 

(OSHA Form 300A – Column L) 

2.3 Regulatory Citations 

Has your company received any state or government citations in the last 5 years? Yes No 

If Yes, Please mark the box of the Agency from Which the Citations Were Received Below: 

OSHA MSHA DOT EPA State / Local Other: ____________________________________ 

Please attach the citation information and an explanation of any citation (s) for all the boxes checked above. 

3.0 Company Safety and Health Program 

1. Does your company maintain a written Safety and Health Program? Yes No 

If Yes, Please attach a copy of your Safety and Health Program 

2. Does your company maintain a written Hazard Communication Program? Yes No 

3. Does your company have a Safety and Health Leader? Yes No 

If Yes, Please provide the contact information below 

Name: ___________________________________ 

Telephone:________________________________________ 

Title:______________________________________ Email:_________________________________________________________ 




5/24/2012



4. Does your company have a written procedure for informing all Yes No 

employees of their right to stop work that is unsafe? 

5. Does your company prepare site-specific Safety and Health plans? Yes No 

6. Does your company conduct site-specific Job Hazard Analysis (JHA’s) Yes No 

And / or Job Safety Analysis (JSA’s) 

7. Does your company hold job site safety meetings (i.e. Tool Box Talks)? Yes No 

If Yes, Please indicate how often below 

Daily Weekly Bi-Weekly Monthly As Needed 

8. Does your company hold regularly safety meetings for its employees? Yes No 



9. Does your company perform field safety inspections? Yes No 



10. Does your company have a follow-up procedure to track items identified during safety Yes No 

inspections? 

11. Does your company have a reporting system for incidents, near misses, hazard Yes No 

identification, and / or occupational injuries? 

If Yes, Please provide the person (s) who receives / reviews these reports below. 

Name:_____________________________________ Title:_________________________________________ 

Name:_____________________________________ Title:_________________________________________ 

12. Does your company have a safety incentive program? Yes No 

13. Does your company use safety as a criterion during performance reviews? Yes No 

14. Does your company have a disciplinary action program for unsafe acts or behaviors? Yes No 

4.0 Safety and Health Training 




5/24/2012



1. Does your company have a documented pre-job or new employee Safety and Health Yes No 

Orientation? 

If Yes, Please attach an outline or the table of contents for the program. Also 

please provide the person (s) providing the training below. 

Name:_____________________________________ Title:_________________________________________ 

Name:_____________________________________ Title:_________________________________________ 

If No, Please explain how new employees are informed of the safety policies, procedures, and expectations below. 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

2. Does your company provide its employees Safety and Health Training (in-house or Yes No 

by a third party)? 

If Yes, Please indicate all of those that apply. Documented Training Records may be required prior to the start of work. 

Asbestos Blasting / Demolition Boom / Scissor Lifts Concrete / Masonry 

Confined Spaces Crane Operators Crane Signals Drilling 

Driving Safety Electrical Emergency Action Excavation 

Fall Protection Fire Protection First Aid & CPR Forklift Operation 

Hazard Communication HAZWOPER (40 Hrs) Hearing Conservation Heavy Equipment Oper 

Ladders & Stairs Lead Lock-Out / Tag Out OSHA 10 Hr Const. 

OSHA 30 Hr. Const. Powder Actuated Tools Power Tool Safety Power Trans / Distribution 

Radiation Protection Respiratory Protection Rigging Scaffolding 

Steel Erection Toxic Substances Traffic Control Welding & Cutting 

Other________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 




5/24/2012

5.0 Medical and Drug Testing 



1. Does your company have a medical surveillance program? Yes No 

If yes, Please indicate those that apply. 

Pre-Employment Pre-Job Placement Annually / Bi-Annually 

2. Does your company have a Drug & Alcohol Policy or Program? Yes No 

If yes, Please indicate those that apply. 

Pre-Employment Post Incident DOT As Required Return to Work Random 

I the undersigned certify that the information provided in this questionnaire is current and 

correct to the best of my knowledge. 

Name______________________________________________ Signature____________________________________________ 

Title________________________________________________ Date _____________________________________________ 

END OF ATTACHMENT D 




5/24/2012



Attachment E 

BIDDER’S SCOPE OF WORK/SUPPLY 


Attach a detailed scope of work and/or supply letter to this sheet. Provide as much 

detail as possible and as many sheets as needed. 

End of Attachment E 




5/24/2012



Attachment F 

LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS 


In compliance with the Instructions to Bidders the undersigned submits the following names of 

Subcontractors to be used in performing the work for the Ward County Water supply Expansion Project 

– North Well Field, Bid Package #8, Raw Water Supply Well Sites-Ward County-North Well Field. At 

a minimum, licensed pump installers and licensed electricians will be required. Subcontractors may be 

used to satisfy this requirement. 

Bidder certifies that all Subcontractors listed are eligible to perform the Work. 

Subcontractor’s Work 

Subcontractor’s Name 

Concrete 

Submersible Pumps Installer 

(licensed in Texas) 

Electrical (licensed in Texas) 

Fencing 

Painting 

Mechanical 

__________________________ 

___________________________ 

___________________________ 

___________________________ 

___________________________ 

___________________________ 

? ___________________________ 

? ____________________________ 

_______________________________ 

Bidder’s Signature 

End of Attachment F 




5/24/2012



Attachment G 

LIST OF SUPPLIERS 


In compliance with the Instructions to Bidders the undersigned submits the following 

names of Suppliers to be used in performing the work for the Ward County Water 

supply Expansion Project – North Well Field, Bid Package #8, Raw Water Supply Well 

Sites-Ward County-North Well Field. 

Bidder certifies that all Suppliers listed are eligible to perform the Work. 

Supplier’s Scope of Work 

Supplier’s (Brand) Name 

Column Pipe 

Mechanical Pipe & Fittings 

Flow Meters 

Transducers & Accessories 

Pressure Transmitter 

__________________________ 

___________________________ 

___________________________ 

___________________________ 

___________________________ 

_______________________________ 

Bidder’s Signature 

End of Attachment G 




5/24/2012

Wage Rates

Performance Bond (sample)

00 61 13.13 Performance Bond 

Contractor as Principal 

Surety 

Name: . Name: 

Mailing address (principal place of business): 


Owner 

Name: 


Contract 

Project name and location: 

Effective Date of the Agreement: 

Contract Amount: 

Bond 

Date of Bond 

(Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Effective Date of 

Agreement) 

Bond Amount: 

Physical address(principal place of business): 

Surety is a corporation organized and existing under 

the laws of the state of: _______________ 

By submitting this bond, Surety affirms their authority 

to do business in the State of Texas and their license 

to execute bonds in the State of Texas. 

Telephone (main number): 

Telephone (for notice of claim): 

Local Agent for Surety 

Name: 

Address: 

Telephone: 

The address of the surety company to which any notice 

of claim should be sent may be obtained from the 

Texas Department of Insurance by calling the 

following toll-free telephone number: 1-800-252-3439 

Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound and obligated to Owner do each cause this Performance Bond 

to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind 

themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally to this bond. 

The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal faithfully performs the work required by 

the Contract then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise the obligation is to remain in full force and effect. 

Provisions of the bond shall be pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code 

as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to 

the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Venue shall lie exclusively in Howard County, Texas for any 

legal action. 


Signature: 

Name and 

Title: 

Surety 

Signature: 

Name and 

Title: 

(Attach Power of Attorney) 

Performance Bond - Bid Package #8 00 61 13.13-1 



5/24/2012

Payment Bond (sample)

00 61 13.16 Payment Bond 


Surety 

Name: . Name: 



Owner 

Name: 


Contract 

Project name and location: 

Effective Date of the Agreement: 

Contract Amount: 

Bond 

Date of Bond 

(Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Effective Date of 

Agreement) 

Bond Amount: 

Physical address(principal place of business): 

Surety is a corporation organized and existing under 

the laws of the state of: _______________ 

By submitting this bond, Surety affirms their authority 

to do business in the State of Texas and their license 

to execute bonds in the State of Texas. 

Telephone (main number): 

Telephone (for notice of claim): 

Local Agent for Surety 

Name: 

Address: 

Telephone: 

The address of the surety company to which any notice 

of claim should be sent may be obtained from the 

Texas Department of Insurance by calling the 

following toll-free telephone number: 1-800-252-3439 

Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound and obligated to Owner do each cause this Payment Bond to 

be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind 

themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally to this bond. 

The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal pays all claimants providing labor or 

materials to him or to a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work required by the Contract then this obligation 

shall be null and void; otherwise the obligation is to remain in full force and effect. Provisions of the bond shall be 

pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities 

on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were 

copied at length herein. Venue shall lie exclusively in Howard County, Texas for any legal action. 


Signature: 

Name and 

Title: 

Surety 

Signature: 

Name and 

Title: 

(Attach Power of Attorney) 

Payment Bond – Bid Package #8 00 61 13.16-1 



5/24/2012

Certificate of Insurance (sample)

00 62 13 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE 

The Certificate of Insurance shall be provided to the CMAR by the successful bidder prior to conforming 

of documents. Certificate will be included in the documents to be executed by the Owner and in the 

conformed construction contract documents. 

Certificate of Insurance – Bid Package #8 00 62 13-1 



5/24/2012

Standard General Conditions

STANDARD 

GENERAL CONDITIONS 

OF THE 

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT 

Prepared by 

ENGINEERS JOINT CONTRACT DOCUMENTS COMMITTEE 

and 

Issued and Published Jointly By 

PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS IN PRIVATE PRACTICE 

a practice division of the 

NATIONAL SOCIETY OF PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS 

___________________ 

AMERICAN CONSULTING ENGINEERS COUNCIL 

___________________ 

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS 

This document has been approved and endorsed by 

The Associated General Contractors of America 

Construction Specifications Institute 

EJCDC No. 1910-8 (1996 Edition) 

00700 - 1

Copyright ©1996 

National Society of Professional Engineers 

1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314 

American Consulting Engineers Council 

1015 15th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005 

American Society of Civil Engineers 

345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017 

00700 - 2

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

Page 

ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY .............................................00700 - 6 

1.01 Defined Terms ..............................................................00700 - 6 

1.02 Terminology ................................................................00700 - 8 

ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS ......................................................00700 - 9 

2.01 Delivery of Bonds ...........................................................00700 - 9 

2.02 Copies of Documents .........................................................00700 - 9 

2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed ................................00700 - 9 

2.04 Starting the Work ............................................................00700 - 9 

2.05 Before Starting Construction ...................................................00700 - 9 

2.06 Preconstruction Conference ...................................................00700 - 10 

2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules ................................................00700 - 10 

ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE ..........................00700 - 10 

3.01 Intent ....................................................................00700 - 10 

3.02 Reference Standards ........................................................00700 - 11 

3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ..........................................00700 - 11 

3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents .................................00700 - 11 

3.05 Reuse of Documents .........................................................00700 - 11 

ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 

...............................................................................00700 - 12 

4.01 Availability of Lands ........................................................00700 - 12 

4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions .............................................00700 - 12 

4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ......................................00700 - 12 

4.04 Underground Facilities ......................................................00700 - 13 

4.05 Reference Points ...........................................................00700 - 14 

4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site .......................................00700 - 14 

ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE .....................................................00700 - 15 

5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds .........................................00700 - 15 

5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers ................................................00700 - 15 

5.03 Certificates of Insurance .....................................................00700 - 15 

5.04 CONTRACTOR’s Liability Insurance ............................................00700 - 16 

5.05 OWNER’s Liability Insurance .................................................00700 - 16 

5.06 Property Insurance .........................................................00700 - 17 

5.07 Waiver of Rights ...........................................................00700 - 17 

5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds ....................................00700 - 18 

5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace ..............................00700 - 18 

5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer .............................00700 - 18 

ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES ...........................................00700 - 19 

6.01 Supervision and Superintendence ...............................................00700 - 19 

6.02 Labor; Working Hours .......................................................00700 - 19 

6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment .............................................00700 - 19 

6.04 Progress Schedule ..........................................................00700 - 19 

6.05 Substitutes and “Or-Equals” ..................................................00700 - 19 

6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others .................................00700 - 21 

00700 - 3

6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties ....................................................00700 - 22 

6.08 Permits ..................................................................00700 - 22 

6.09 Laws and Regulations .......................................................00700 - 22 

6.10 Taxes ....................................................................00700 - 22 

6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas ...................................................00700 - 22 

6.12 Record Documents ..........................................................00700 - 23 

6.13 Safety and Protection ........................................................00700 - 23 

6.14 Safety Representative ........................................................00700 - 23 

6.15 Hazard Communication Programs ..............................................00700 - 24 

6.16 Emergencies ..............................................................00700 - 24 

6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples ..................................................00700 - 24 

6.18 Continuing the Work ........................................................00700 - 25 

6.19 CONTRACTOR’s General Warranty and Guarantee ................................00700 - 25 

6.20 INDEMNIFICATION ........................................................00700 - 25 

ARTICLE 7 - OTHER WORK ..............................................................00700 - 26 

7.01 Related Work at Site ........................................................00700 - 26 

7.02 Coordination ..............................................................00700 - 27 

ARTICLE 8 - OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES .................................................00700 - 27 

8.01 Communications to Contractor ................................................00700 - 27 

8.02 Replacement of ENGINEER ...................................................00700 - 27 

8.03 Furnish Data ..............................................................00700 - 27 

8.04 Pay Promptly When Due .....................................................00700 - 27 

8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests .........................................00700 - 27 

8.06 Insurance .................................................................00700 - 27 

8.07 Change Orders .............................................................00700 - 27 

8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals ...............................................00700 - 27 

8.09 Limitations on OWNER’s Responsibilities ........................................00700 - 27 

8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition ..................................00700 - 27 

8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements ............................................00700 - 27 

ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION .................................00700 - 28 

9.01 OWNER’S Representative ....................................................00700 - 28 

9.02 Visits to Site ...............................................................00700 - 28 

9.03 Project Representative .......................................................00700 - 28 

9.04 Clarifications and Interpretations ..............................................00700 - 28 

9.05 Authorized Variations in Work .................................................00700 - 28 

9.06 Rejecting Defective Work .....................................................00700 - 28 

9.07 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments .....................................00700 - 28 

9.08 Determinations for Unit Price Work .............................................00700 - 29 

9.09 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work ............00700 - 29 

9.10 Limitations on ENGINEER’s Authority and Responsibilities ..........................00700 - 29 

ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS ............................................00700 - 29 

10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work ...............................................00700 - 29 

10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work .............................................00700 - 30 

10.03 Execution of Change Orders ..................................................00700 - 30 

10.04 Notification to Surety ........................................................00700 - 30 

10.05 Claims and Disputes ........................................................00700 - 30 

ARTICLE 11 - COST OF THE WORK; CASH ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK ...................00700 - 31 

11.01 Cost of the Work ...........................................................00700 - 31 

00700 - 4

11.02 Cash Allowances ...........................................................00700 - 32 

11.03 Unit Price Work ............................................................00700 - 33 

ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES ..................00700 - 33 

12.01 Change of Contract Price ....................................................00700 - 33 

12.02 Change of Contract Times ....................................................00700 - 34 

12.03 Delays Beyond CONTRACTOR’s Control ........................................00700 - 34 

12.04 Delays Within CONTRACTOR’s Control .........................................00700 - 34 

12.05 Delays Beyond OWNER’s and CONTRACTOR’s Control .............................00700 - 34 

12.06 Delay Damages ............................................................00700 - 34 

ARTICLE 13 - TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 

...............................................................................00700 - 34 

13.01 Notice of Defects ...........................................................00700 - 35 

13.02 Access to Work .............................................................00700 - 35 

13.03 Tests and Inspections ........................................................00700 - 35 

13.04 Uncovering Work ...........................................................00700 - 35 

13.05 OWNER May Stop the Work ...................................................00700 - 35 

13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work ........................................00700 - 36 

13.07 Correction Period ..........................................................00700 - 36 

13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work .................................................00700 - 36 

13.09 OWNER May Correct Defective Work ...........................................00700 - 36 

ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION ..............................00700 - 37 

14.01 Schedule of Values ..........................................................00700 - 37 

14.02 Progress Payments ..........................................................00700 - 37 

14.03 CONTRACTOR’s Warranty of Title .............................................00700 - 39 

14.04 Substantial Completion ......................................................00700 - 39 

14.05 Partial Utilization ..........................................................00700 - 39 

14.06 Final Inspection ............................................................00700 - 40 

14.07 Final Payment .............................................................00700 - 40 

14.08 Final Completion Delayed ....................................................00700 - 40 

14.09 Waiver of Claims ...........................................................00700 - 41 

ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION ...................................00700 - 41 

15.01 OWNER May Suspend Work ..................................................00700 - 41 

15.02 OWNER May Terminate for Cause ..............................................00700 - 41 

15.03 OWNER May Terminate For Convenience ........................................00700 - 41 

15.04 CONTRACTOR May Stop Work or Terminate .....................................00700 - 42 

ARTICLE 16 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION ......................................................00700 - 42 

16.01 Methods and Procedures .....................................................00700 - 42 

ARTICLE 17 - MISCELLANEOUS ..........................................................00700 - 42 

17.01 Giving Notice ..............................................................00700 - 42 

17.02 Computation of Times .......................................................00700 - 42 

17.03 Cumulative Remedies ........................................................00700 - 42 

17.04 Survival of Obligations ......................................................00700 - 42 

17.05 Controlling Law ............................................................00700 - 43 

00700 - 5

GENERAL CONDITIONS 

ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 

1.01 Defined Terms 

A. Wherever used in the Contract Documents and 

printed with initial or all capital letters, the terms listed 

below will have the meanings indicated which are 

applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. 

1. Addenda--Written or graphic instruments 

issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, 

correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the 

Contract Documents. 

2. Agreement--The written instrument which is 

evidence of the agreement between OWNER and 

CONTRACTOR covering the Work. 

3. Application for Payment--The form acceptable 

to ENGINEER which is to be used by CONTRACTOR 

during the course of the Work in requesting progress or 

final payments and which is to be accompanied by such 

supporting documentation as is required by the Contract 

Documents. 

4. Asbestos--Any material that contains more than 

one percent asbestos and is friable or is releasing 

asbestos fibers into the air above current action levels 

established by the United States Occupational Safety 

and Health Administration. 

5. Bid--The offer or proposal of a bidder submitted 

on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for 

the Work to be performed. 

6. Bidding Documents--The Bidding 

Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents 

(including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). 

7. Bidding Requirements--The Advertisement or 

Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid security 

form, if any, and the Bid form with any supplements. 

8. Bonds--Performance and payment bonds and 

other instruments of security. 

9. Change Order--A document recommended by 

ENGINEER which is signed by CONTRACTOR and 

OWNER and authorizes an addition, deletion, or 

revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract 

Price or the Contract Times, issued on or after the 

Effective Date of the Agreement. 

10. Claim--A demand or assertion by OWNER or 

CONTRACTOR seeking an adjustment of Contract 

Price or Contract Times, or both, or other relief with 

respect to the terms of the Contract. A demand for 

money or services by a third party is not a Claim. 

11. Contract--The entire and integrated written 

agreement between the OWNER and CONTRACTOR 

concerning the Work. The Contract supersedes prior 

negotiations, representations, or agreements, whether 

written or oral. 

12. Contract Documents--The Contract Documents 

establish the rights and obligations of the parties and 

include the Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the 

Contract Documents), CONTRACTOR’s Bid (including 

documentation accompanying the Bid and any post Bid 

documentation submitted prior to the Notice of Award) 

when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the 

Notice to Proceed, the Bonds, these General Conditions, 

the Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and 

the Drawings as the same are more specifically 

identified in the Agreement, together with all Written 

Amendments, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, 

Field Orders, and ENGINEER’s written interpretations 

and clarifications issued on or after the Effective Date 

of the Agreement. Approved Shop Drawings and the 

reports and drawings of subsurface and physical 

conditions are not Contract Documents. Only printed 

or hard copies of the items listed in this paragraph are 

Contract Documents. Files in electronic media format 

of text, data, graphics, and the like that may be 

furnished by OWNER to CONTRACTOR are not 


13. Contract Price--The moneys payable by OWN- 

ER to CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work in 

accordance with the Contract Documents as stated in 

the Agreement (subject to the provisions of paragraph 

11.03 in the case of Unit Price Work). 

14. Contract Times--The number of days or the 

dates stated in the Agreement to: (i) achieve Substantial 

Completion; and (ii) complete the Work so that it is 

ready for final payment as evidenced by ENGINEER’s 

written recommendation of final payment. 

00700 - 6

15. CONTRACTOR--The individual or entity with 

whom OWNER has entered into the Agreement. 

16. Cost of the Work--See paragraph 11.01.A for 

definition. 

17. Drawings--That part of the Contract 

Documents prepared or approved by ENGINEER which 

graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the 

Work to be performed by CONTRACTOR. Shop 

Drawings and other CONTRACTOR submittals are not 

Drawings as so defined. 

18. Effective Date of the Agreement--The date 

indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effective, 

but if no such date is indicated, it means the date 

on which the Agreement is signed and delivered by the 

last of the two parties to sign and deliver. 

19. ENGINEER--The individual or entity named as 

such in the Agreement. 

20. ENGINEER's Consultant--An individual or 

entity having a contract with ENGINEER to furnish 

services as ENGINEER’s independent professional 

associate or consultant with respect to the Project and 

who is identified as such in the Supplementary 

Conditions. 

21. Field Order--A written order issued by ENGI- 

NEER which requires minor changes in the Work but 

which does not involve a change in the Contract Price 

or the Contract Times. 

22. General Requirements--Sections of Division 1 

of the Specifications. The General Requirements 

pertain to all sections of the Specifications. 

23. Hazardous Environmental Condition--The 

presence at the Site of Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, 

Hazardous Waste, or Radioactive Material in such 

quantities or circumstances that may present a 

substantial danger to persons or property exposed 

thereto in connection with the Work. 

24. Hazardous Waste--The term Hazardous Waste 

shall have the meaning provided in Section 1004 of the 

Solid Waste Disposal Act (42 USC Section 6903) as 

amended from time to time. 

25. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations-- 

Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, 

ordinances, codes, and orders of any and all governmental 

bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having 

jurisdiction. 

26. Liens--Charges, security interests, or 

encumbrances upon Project funds, real property, or 

personal property. 

27. Milestone--A principal event specified in the 

Contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion 

date or time prior to Substantial Completion of all 

the Work. 

28. Notice of Award--The written notice by OWN- 

ER to the apparent successful bidder stating that upon 

timely compliance by the apparent successful bidder 

with the conditions precedent listed therein, OWNER 

will sign and deliver the Agreement. 

29. Notice to Proceed--A written notice given by 

OWNER to CONTRACTOR fixing the date on which 

the Contract Times will commence to run and on which 

CONTRACTOR shall start to perform the Work under 

the Contract Documents. 

30. OWNER--The individual, entity, public body, 

or authority with whom CONTRACTOR has entered 

into the Agreement and for whom the Work is to be 

performed. 

31. Partial Utilization--Use by OWNER of a 

substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose 

for which it is intended (or a related purpose) prior to 

Substantial Completion of all the Work. 

32. PCBs--Polychlorinated biphenyls. 

33. Petroleum--Petroleum, including crude oil or 

any fraction thereof which is liquid at standard conditions 

of temperature and pressure (60 degrees Fahrenheit 

and 14.7 pounds per square inch absolute), such as 

oil, petroleum, fuel oil, oil sludge, oil refuse, gasoline, 

kerosene, and oil mixed with other non-Hazardous 

Waste and crude oils. 

34. Project--The total construction of which the 

Work to be performed under the Contract Documents 

may be the whole, or a part as may be indicated 

elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 

35. Project Manual--The bound documentary 

information prepared for bidding and constructing the 

Work. A listing of the contents of the Project Manual, 

which may be bound in one or more volumes, is 

contained in the table(s) of contents. 

36. Radioactive Material--Source, special nuclear, 

or byproduct material as defined by the Atomic Energy 

00700 - 7

Act of 1954 (42 USC Section 2011 et seq.) as amended 

from time to time. 

37. Resident Project Representative--The authorized 

representative of ENGINEER who may be 

assigned to the Site or any part thereof. 

38. Samples--Physical examples of materials, 

equipment, or workmanship that are representative of 

some portion of the Work and which establish the 

standards by which such portion of the Work will be 

judged. 

39. Shop Drawings--All drawings, diagrams, 

illustrations, schedules, and other data or information 

which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for 

CONTRACTOR and submitted by CONTRACTOR to 

illustrate some portion of the Work. 

40. Site--Lands or areas indicated in the Contract 

Documents as being furnished by OWNER upon which 

the Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way 

and easements for access thereto, and such other lands 

furnished by OWNER which are designated for the use 

of CONTRACTOR. 

41. Specifications--That part of the Contract 

Documents consisting of written technical descriptions 

of materials, equipment, systems, standards, and 

workmanship as applied to the Work and certain 

administrative details applicable thereto. 

42. Subcontractor--An individual or entity having 

a direct contract with CONTRACTOR or with any other 

Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work 

at the Site. 

43. Substantial Completion--The time at which the 

Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the 

point where, in the opinion of ENGINEER, the Work 

(or a specified part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in 

accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the 

Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the 

purposes for which it is intended. The terms 

“substantially complete” and “substantially completed” 

as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial 

Completion thereof. 

44. Supplementary Conditions--That part of the 

Contract Documents which amends or supplements 

these General Conditions. 

45. Supplier--A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, 

distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct 

contract with CONTRACTOR or with any Subcontractor 

to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated 

in the Work by CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor. 

46. Underground Facilities--All underground 

pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, 

vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or 

attachments, and any encasements containing such 

facilities, including those that convey electricity, gases, 

steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other 

communications, cable television, water, wastewater, 

storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or 

other control systems. 

47. Unit Price Work--Work to be paid for on the 

basis of unit prices. 

48. Work--The entire completed construction or the 

various separately identifiable parts thereof required to 

be provided under the Contract Documents. Work 

includes and is the result of performing or providing all 

labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce 

such construction, and furnishing, installing, and 

incorporating all materials and equipment into such 

construction, all as required by the Contract Documents. 

49. Work Change Directive--A written statement to 

CONTRACTOR issued on or after the Effective Date of 

the Agreement and signed by OWNER and recommended 

by ENGINEER ordering an addition, deletion, 

or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or 

unforeseen subsurface or physical conditions under 

which the Work is to be performed or to emergencies. 

A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract 

Price or the Contract Times but is evidence that the 

parties expect that the change ordered or documented by 

a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a 

subsequently issued Change Order following 

negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the 

Contract Price or Contract Times. 

50. Written Amendment--A written statement 

modifying the Contract Documents, signed by OWNER 

and CONTRACTOR on or after the Effective Date of 

the Agreement and normally dealing with the 

nonengineering or nontechnical rather than strictly 

construction-related aspects of the Contract Documents. 

1.02 Terminology 

A. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives 

1. Whenever in the Contract Documents the terms 

“as allowed,” “as approved,” or terms of like effect or 

import are used, or the adjectives “reasonable,” 

“suitable,” “acceptable,” “proper,” “satisfactory,” or 

00700 - 8

adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe an 

action or determination of ENGINEER as to the Work, 

it is intended that such action or determination will be 

solely to evaluate, in general, the completed Work for 

compliance with the requirements of and information in 

the Contract Documents and conformance with the 

design concept of the completed Project as a functioning 

whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents 

(unless there is a specific statement indicating 

otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective shall 

not be effective to assign to ENGINEER any duty or 

authority to supervise or direct the performance of the 

Work or any duty or authority to undertake 

responsibility contrary to the provisions of paragraph 

9.10 or any other provision of the Contract Documents. 

B. Day 

1. The word “day” shall constitute a calendar day 

of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next 

midnight. 

C. Defective 

1. The word “defective,” when modifying the 

word “Work,” refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, 

faulty, or deficient in that it does not conform to the 

Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements 

of any inspection, reference standard, test, or approval 

referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been 

damaged prior to ENGINEER’s recommendation of 

final payment (unless responsibility for the protection 

thereof has been assumed by OWNER at Substantial 

Completion in accordance with paragraph 14.04 or 

14.05). 

D. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide 

1. The word “furnish,” when used in connection 

with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to 

supply and deliver said services, materials, or 

equipment to the Site (or some other specified location) 

ready for use or installation and in usable or operable 

condition. 

2. The word “install,” when used in connection 

with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to 

put into use or place in final position said services, 

materials, or equipment complete and ready for 

intended use. 

3. The words “perform” or “provide,” when used 

in connection with services, materials, or equipment, 

shall mean to furnish and install said services, 

materials, or equipment complete and ready for 

intended use. 

4. When “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” or “provide” 

is not used in connection with services, materials, 

or equipment in a context clearly requiring an 

obligation of CONTRACTOR, “provide” is implied. 

E. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, 

words or phrases which have a well-known technical or 

construction industry or trade meaning are used in the 

Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized 

meaning. 

ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS 

2.01 Delivery of Bonds 

A. When CONTRACTOR delivers the executed 

Agreements to OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall also deliver 

to OWNER such Bonds as CONTRACTOR may be 

required to furnish. 

2.02 Copies of Documents 

A. OWNER shall furnish to CONTRACTOR up to ten 

copies of the Contract Documents. Additional copies will 

be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction. 

2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to 

Proceed 

A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the 

thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement or, if 

a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the 

Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at 

any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the 

Agreement. In no event will the Contract Times commence 

to run later than the sixtieth day after the day of Bid 

opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the 

Agreement, whichever date is earlier. 

2.04 Starting the Work 

A. CONTRACTOR shall start to perform the Work on 

the date when the Contract Times commence to run. No 

Work shall be done at the Site prior to the date on which 

the Contract Times commence to run. 

2.05 Before Starting Construction 

00700 - 9

A. CONTRACTOR’s Review of Contract Documents: 

Before undertaking each part of the Work, CONTRACTOR 

shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents 

and check and verify pertinent figures therein and all 

applicable field measurements. CONTRACTOR shall 

promptly report in writing to ENGINEER any conflict, 

error, ambiguity, or discrepancy which CONTRACTOR 

may discover and shall obtain a written interpretation or 

clarification from ENGINEER before proceeding with any 

Work affected thereby; however, CONTRACTOR shall not 

be liable to OWNER or ENGINEER for failure to report 

any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the 

Contract Documents unless CONTRACTOR knew or 

reasonably should have known thereof. 

B. Preliminary Schedules: Within ten days after the 

Effective Date of the Agreement (unless otherwise specified 

in the General Requirements), CONTRACTOR shall 

submit to ENGINEER for its timely review: 

1. a preliminary progress schedule indicating the 

times (numbers of days or dates) for starting and 

completing the various stages of the Work, including 

any Milestones specified in the Contract Documents; 

2. a preliminary schedule of Shop Drawing and 

Sample submittals which will list each required submittal 

and the times for submitting, reviewing, and processing 

such submittal; and 

3. a preliminary schedule of values for all of the 

Work which includes quantities and prices of items 

which when added together equal the Contract Price 

and subdivides the Work into component parts in 

sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress 

payments during performance of the Work. Such prices 

will include an appropriate amount of overhead and 

profit applicable to each item of Work. 

C. Evidence of Insurance: Before any Work at the 

Site is started, CONTRACTOR and OWNER shall each 

deliver to the other, with copies to each additional insured 

identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of 

insurance (and other evidence of insurance which either of 

them or any additional insured may reasonably request) 

which CONTRACTOR and OWNER respectively are 

required to purchase and maintain in accordance with 

Article 5. 

2.06 Preconstruction Conference 

A. Within 20 days after the Contract Times start to 

run, but before any Work at the Site is started, a conference 

attended by CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER, and others as 

appropriate will be held to establish a working 

understanding among the parties as to the Work and to 

discuss the schedules referred to in paragraph 2.05.B, 

procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other 

submittals, processing Applications for Payment, and 

maintaining required records. 

2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules 

A. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, 

at least ten days before submission of the first 

Application for Payment a conference attended by CON- 

TRACTOR, ENGINEER, and others as appropriate will be 

held to review for acceptability to ENGINEER as provided 

below the schedules submitted in accordance with 

paragraph 2.05.B. CONTRACTOR shall have an 

additional ten days to make corrections and adjustments 

and to complete and resubmit the schedules. No progress 

payment shall be made to CONTRACTOR until acceptable 

schedules are submitted to ENGINEER. 

1. The progress schedule will be acceptable to 

ENGINEER if it provides an orderly progression of the 

Work to completion within any specified Milestones 

and the Contract Times. Such acceptance will not 

impose on ENGINEER responsibility for the progress 

schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or progress of the 

Work nor interfere with or relieve CONTRACTOR 

from CONTRACTOR’s full responsibility therefor. 

2. CONTRACTOR’s schedule of Shop Drawing 

and Sample submittals will be acceptable to 

ENGINEER if it provides a workable arrangement for 

reviewing and processing the required submittals. 

3. CONTRACTOR’s schedule of values will be 

acceptable to ENGINEER as to form and substance if it 

provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to 

component parts of the Work. 

ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, 

AMENDING, REUSE 

3.01 Intent 

A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what 

is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. 

B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe 

a functionally complete Project (or part thereof) to be 

constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any 

labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that 

may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or 

from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to 

00700 - 10

produce the intended result will be provided whether or not 

specifically called for at no additional cost to OWNER. 

C. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract 

Documents shall be issued by ENGINEER as provided in 

Article 9. 

3.02 Reference Standards 

A. Standards, Specifications, Codes, Laws, and 

Regulations 

1. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals, 

or codes of any technical society, organization, or 

association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such 

reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the 

standard, specification, manual, code, or Laws or Regulations 

in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the 

Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids), 

except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the 


2. No provision of any such standard, specification, 

manual or code, or any instruction of a Supplier shall be 

effective to change the duties or responsibilities of 

OWNER, CONTRACTOR, or ENGINEER, or any of 

their subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employees 

from those set forth in the Contract Documents, nor shall 

any such provision or instruction be effective to assign to 

OWNER, ENGINEER, or any of ENGINEER’s 

Consultants, agents, or employees any duty or authority to 

supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any 

duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent 

with the provisions of the Contract Documents. 

3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies 

A. Reporting Discrepancies 

1. If, during the performance of the Work, 

CONTRACTOR discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, 

or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between 

the Contract Documents and any provision of any Law or 

Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or 

of any standard, specification, manual or code, or of any 

instruction of any Supplier, CONTRACTOR shall report 

it to ENGINEER in writing at once. CONTRACTOR 

shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except 

in an emergency as required by paragraph 6.16.A) until 

an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents 

has been issued by one of the methods indicated in 

paragraph 3.04; provided, however, that CONTRACTOR 

shall not be liable to OWNER or ENGINEER for failure 

to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy 

unless CONTRACTOR knew or reasonably 

should have known thereof. 

B. Resolving Discrepancies 

1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in 

the Contract Documents, the provisions of the Contract 

Documents shall take precedence in resolving any 

conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between the 

provisions of the Contract Documents and: 

a. the provisions of any standard, specification, 

manual, code, or instruction (whether or not specifically 

incorporated by reference in the Contract 

Documents); or 

b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations 

applicable to the performance of the Work (unless 

such an interpretation of the provisions of the 

Contract Documents would result in violation of such 

Law or Regulation). 

3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents 

A. The Contract Documents may be amended to provide 

for additions, deletions, and revisions in the Work or to 

modify the terms and conditions thereof in one or more of the 

following ways: (i) a Written Amendment; (ii) a Change 

Order; or (iii) a Work Change Directive. 

B. The requirements of the Contract Documents may be 

supplemented, and minor variations and deviations in the 

Work may be authorized, by one or more of the following 

ways: (i) a Field Order; (ii) ENGINEER’s approval of a Shop 

Drawing or Sample; or (iii) ENGINEER’s written interpretation 

or clarification. 

3.05 Reuse of Documents 

A. CONTRACTOR and any Subcontractor or Supplier 

or other individual or entity performing or furnishing any of 

the Work under a direct or indirect contract with OWNER: (i) 

shall not have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in 

any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other documents (or 

copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of 

ENGINEER or ENGINEER’s Consultant, including 

electronic media editions; and (ii) shall not reuse any of such 

Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof 

on extensions of the Project or any other project without 

written consent of OWNER and ENGINEER and specific 

written verification or adaption by ENGINEER. This 

prohibition will survive final payment, completion, and 

acceptance of the Work, or termination or completion of the 

Contract. Nothing herein shall preclude CONTRACTOR 

00700 - 11

from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record 

purposes. 

ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; 

SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; 

REFERENCE POINTS 

4.01 Availability of Lands 

A. OWNER shall furnish the Site. OWNER shall notify 

CONTRACTOR of any encumbrances or restrictions not of 

general application but specifically related to use of the Site 

with which CONTRACTOR must comply in performing the 

Work. OWNER will obtain in a timely manner and pay for 

easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in 

existing facilities. If CONTRACTOR and OWNER are 

unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, 

if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract 

Times, or both, as a result of any delay in OWNER’s 

furnishing the Site, CONTRACTOR may make a Claim 

therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. 

B. Upon reasonable written request, OWNER shall 

furnish CONTRACTOR with a current statement of record 

legal title and legal description of the lands upon which the 

Work is to be performed and OWNER’s interest therein as 

necessary for giving notice of or filing a mechanic's or 

construction lien against such lands in accordance with 

applicable Laws and Regulations. 

C. CONTRACTOR shall provide for all additional lands 

and access thereto that may be required for temporary 

construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment. 

4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions 

A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary 

Conditions identify: 

1. those reports of explorations and tests of 

subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site that 

ENGINEER has used in preparing the Contract Documents; 

and 

2. those drawings of physical conditions in or 

relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or 

contiguous to the Site (except Underground Facilities) that 

ENGINEER has used in preparing the Contract 

Documents. 

B. Limited Reliance by CONTRACTOR on Technical 

Data Authorized: CONTRACTOR may rely upon the 

general accuracy of the “technical data” contained in such 

reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not 

Contract Documents. Such “technical data” is identified in 

the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on 

such “technical data,” CONTRACTOR may not rely upon or 

make any Claim against OWNER, ENGINEER, or any of 

ENGINEER’s Consultants with respect to: 

1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for 

CONTRACTOR’s purposes, including, but not limited to, 

any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, 

and procedures of construction to be employed by 

CONTRACTOR, and safety precautions and programs 

incident thereto; or 

2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and 

information contained in such reports or shown or 

indicated in such drawings; or 

3. any CONTRACTOR interpretation of or 

conclusion drawn from any "technical data" or any such 

other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. 

4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions 

A. Notice: If CONTRACTOR believes that any subsurface 

or physical condition at or contiguous to the Site that is 

uncovered or revealed either: 

1. is of such a nature as to establish that any 

“technical data” on which CONTRACTOR is entitled to 

rely as provided in paragraph 4.02 is materially 

inaccurate; or 

2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the 

Contract Documents; or 

3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in 

the Contract Documents; or 

4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially 

from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally 

recognized as inherent in work of the character provided 

for in the Contract Documents; 

then CONTRACTOR shall, promptly after becoming aware 

thereof and before further disturbing the subsurface or 

physical conditions or performing any Work in connection 

therewith (except in an emergency as required by paragraph 

6.16.A), notify OWNER and ENGINEER in writing about 

such condition. CONTRACTOR shall not further disturb 

such condition or perform any Work in connection therewith 

(except as aforesaid) until receipt of written order to do so. 

00700 - 12

B. ENGINEER’s Review: After receipt of written notice 

as required by paragraph 4.03.A, ENGINEER will promptly 

review the pertinent condition, determine the necessity of 

OWNER's obtaining additional exploration or tests with 

respect thereto, and advise OWNER in writing (with a copy 

to CONTRACTOR) of ENGINEER’s findings and 

conclusions. 

C. Possible Price and Times Adjustments 

1. The Contract Price or the Contract Times, or 

both, will be equitably adjusted to the extent that the 

existence of such differing subsurface or physical 

condition causes an increase or decrease in 

CONTRACTOR’s cost of, or time required for, performance 

of the Work; subject, however, to the following: 

a. such condition must meet any one or more of 

the categories described in paragraph 4.03.A; and 

b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a 

Unit Price Basis, any adjustment in Contract Price 

will be subject to the provisions of paragraphs 9.08 

and 11.03. 

2. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to any 

adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times if: 

a. CONTRACTOR knew of the existence of 

such conditions at the time CONTRACTOR made a 

final commitment to OWNER in respect of Contract 

Price and Contract Times by the submission of a Bid 

or becoming bound under a negotiated contract; or 

b. the existence of such condition could 

reasonably have been discovered or revealed as a 

result of any examination, investigation, exploration, 

test, or study of the Site and contiguous areas required 

by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents 

to be conducted by or for CONTRACTOR prior to 

CONTRACTOR's making such final commitment; or 

c. CONTRACTOR failed to give the written 

notice within the time and as required by paragraph 

4.03.A. 

3. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to 

agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, 

of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract 

Times, or both, a Claim may be made therefor as provided 

in paragraph 10.05. However, OWNER, ENGINEER, 

and ENGINEER’s Consultants shall not be liable to 

CONTRACTOR for any claims, costs, losses, or damages 

(including but not limited to all fees and charges of 

engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals 

and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution 

costs) sustained by CONTRACTOR on or in connection 

with any other project or anticipated project. 

4.04 Underground Facilities 

A. Shown or Indicated: The information and data shown 

or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to 

existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site is 

based on information and data furnished to OWNER or 

ENGINEER by the owners of such Underground Facilities, 

including OWNER, or by others. Unless it is otherwise 

expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions: 

1. OWNER and ENGINEER shall not be 

responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such 

information or data; and 

2. the cost of all of the following will be included in 

the Contract Price, and CONTRACTOR shall have full 

responsibility for: 

a. reviewing and checking all such information 

and data, 

b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or 

indicated in the Contract Documents, 

c. coordination of the Work with the owners of 

such Underground Facilities, including OWNER, 

during construction, and 

d. the safety and protection of all such Underground 

Facilities and repairing any damage thereto 

resulting from the Work. 

B. Not Shown or Indicated 

1. If an Underground Facility is uncovered or 

revealed at or contiguous to the Site which was not shown 

or indicated, or not shown or indicated with reasonable 

accuracy in the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR 

shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before 

further disturbing conditions affected thereby or 

performing any Work in connection therewith (except in 

an emergency as required by paragraph 6.16.A), identify 

the owner of such Underground Facility and give written 

notice to that owner and to OWNER and ENGINEER. 

ENGINEER will promptly review the Underground 

Facility and determine the extent, if any, to which a 

change is required in the Contract Documents to reflect 

and document the consequences of the existence or 

location of the Underground Facility. During such time, 

00700 - 13

CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the safety and 

protection of such Underground Facility. 

2. If ENGINEER concludes that a change in the 

Contract Documents is required, a Work Change 

Directive or a Change Order will be issued to reflect and 

document such consequences. An equitable adjustment 

shall be made in the Contract Price of Contract Times, or 

both, to the extent that they are attributable to the 

existence or location of any Underground Facility that was 

not shown or indicated or not shown or indicated with 

reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents and that 

CONTRACTOR did not know of and could not reasonably 

have been expected to be aware of or to have anticipated. 

If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree on 

entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any 

such adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, 

OWNER or CONTRACTOR may make a Claim therefor 

as provided in paragraph 10.05. 

4.05 Reference Points 

A. OWNER shall provide engineering surveys to 

establish reference points for construction which in 

ENGINEER’s judgment are necessary to enable CON- 

TRACTOR to proceed with the Work. CONTRACTOR shall 

be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and 

preserve the established reference points and property 

monuments, and shall make no changes or relocations 

without the prior written approval of OWNER. 

CONTRACTOR shall report to ENGINEER whenever any 

reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or 

requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or 

locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate 

replacement or relocation of such reference points or property 

monuments by professionally qualified personnel. 

4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site 

A. Reports and Drawings: Reference is made to the 

Supplementary Conditions for the identification of those 

reports and drawings relating to a Hazardous Environmental 

Condition identified at the Site, if any, that have been utilized 

by the ENGINEER in the preparation of the Contract 

Documents. 

B. Limited Reliance by CONTRACTOR on Technical 

Data Authorized: CONTRACTOR may rely upon the general 

accuracy of the “technical data” contained in such reports and 

drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract 

Documents. Such “technical data” is identified in the 

Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such 

“technical data,” CONTRACTOR may not rely upon or make 

any Claim against OWNER, ENGINEER or any of 

ENGINEER’s Consultants with respect to: 

1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for 

CONTRACTOR’s purposes, including, but not limited to, 

any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences 

and procedures of construction to be employed by 

CONTRACTOR and safety precautions and programs 

incident thereto; or 

2. other data, interpretations, opinions and 

information contained in such reports or shown or 

indicated in such drawings; or 

3. any CONTRACTOR interpretation of or 

conclusion drawn from any “technical data” or any such 

other data, interpretations, opinions or information. 

C. CONTRACTOR shall not be responsible for any 

Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed 

at the Site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or 

Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be 

within the scope of the Work. CONTRACTOR shall be 

responsible for a Hazardous Environmental Condition created 

with any materials brought to the Site by CONTRACTOR, 

Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom CON- 

TRACTOR is responsible. 

D. If CONTRACTOR encounters a Hazardous 

Environmental Condition or if CONTRACTOR or anyone for 

whom CONTRACTOR is responsible creates a Hazardous 

Environmental Condition, CONTRACTOR shall immediately: 

(i) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (ii) stop 

all Work in connection with such condition and in any area 

affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by 

paragraph 6.16); and (iii) notify OWNER and ENGINEER 

(and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing). 

OWNER shall promptly consult with ENGINEER concerning 

the necessity for OWNER to retain a qualified expert to 

evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. 

E. CONTRACTOR shall not be required to resume Work 

in connection with such condition or in any affected area 

until after OWNER has obtained any required permits related 

thereto and delivered to CONTRACTOR written notice: (i) 

specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has 

been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or (ii) specifying 

any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed 

safely. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR cannot agree 

as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any 

adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as 

a result of such Work stoppage or such special conditions 

under which Work is agreed to be resumed by 

CONTRACTOR, either party may make a Claim therefor as 

provided in paragraph 10.05. 

F. If after receipt of such written notice CONTRACTOR 

does not agree to resume such Work based on a reasonable 

00700 - 14

elief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work 

under such special conditions, then OWNER may order the 

portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such condition 

to be deleted from the Work. If OWNER and CON- 

TRACTOR cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the 

amount or extent, if any, of an adjustment in Contract Price 

or Contract Times as a result of deleting such portion of the 

Work, then either party may make a Claim therefor as 

provided in paragraph 10.05. OWNER may have such 

deleted portion of the Work performed by OWNER’s own 

forces or others in accordance with Article 7. 

G. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and 

Regulations, OWNER shall indemnify and hold harmless 

CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER, ENGINEER’s 

Consultants and the officers, directors, partners, employees, 

agents, other consultants, and subcontractors of each and any 

of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and 

damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of 

engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and 

all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) 

arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental 

Condition, provided that such Hazardous Environmental 

Condition: (i) was not shown or indicated in the Drawings or 

Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be 

included within the scope of the Work, and (ii) was not 

created by CONTRACTOR or by anyone for whom 

CONTRACTOR is responsible. Nothing in this paragraph 

4.06.E shall obligate OWNER to indemnify any individual or 

entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s 

or entity’s own negligence. 

H. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and 

Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold 

harmless OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER’s Consultants, 

and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, other 

consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from 

and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including 

but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, 

attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration 

or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to 

a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by 

CONTRACTOR or by anyone for whom CONTRACTOR is 

responsible. Nothing in this paragraph 4.06.F shall obligate 

CONTRACTOR to indemnify any individual or entity from 

and against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s 

own negligence. 

I. The provisions of paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and 4.04 are 

not intended to apply to a Hazardous Environmental 

Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. 

ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE 

5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds 

A. CONTRACTOR shall furnish performance and 

payment Bonds, each in an amount at least equal to the 

Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and 

payment of all CONTRACTOR’s obligations under the 

Contract Documents. These Bonds shall remain in effect at 

least until one year after the date when final payment becomes 

due, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations or 

by the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall also 

furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Contract 

Documents. 

B. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the 

Contract Documents except as provided otherwise by Laws or 

Regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are 

named in the current list of “Companies Holding Certificates 

of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as 

Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” as published in Circular 

570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety 

Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. All Bonds 

signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy 

of such agent’s authority to act. 

C. If the surety on any Bond furnished by CON- 

TRACTOR is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its 

right to do business is terminated in any state where any part 

of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements 

of paragraph 5.01.B, CONTRACTOR shall within 20 days 

thereafter substitute another Bond and surety, both of which 

shall comply with the requirements of paragraphs 5.01.B and 

5.02. 

5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers 

A. All Bonds and insurance required by the Contract 

Documents to be purchased and maintained by OWNER or 

CONTRACTOR shall be obtained from surety or insurance 

companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the 

jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue Bonds or 

insurance policies for the limits and coverages so required. 

Such surety and insurance companies shall also meet such 

additional requirements and qualifications as may be provided 

in the Supplementary Conditions. 

5.03 Certificates of Insurance 

A. CONTRACTOR shall deliver to OWNER, with copies 

to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary 

Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of 

insurance requested by OWNER or any other additional 

insured) which CONTRACTOR is required to purchase and 

00700 - 15

maintain. OWNER shall deliver to CONTRACTOR, with 

copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary 

Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence 

of insurance requested by CONTRACTOR or any other 

additional insured) which OWNER is required to purchase 

and maintain. 

5.04 CONTRACTOR’s Liability Insurance 

A. CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain such 

liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work 

being performed and as will provide protection from claims 

set forth below which may arise out of or result from 

CONTRACTOR’s performance of the Work and 

CONTRACTOR’s other obligations under the Contract 

Documents, whether it is to be performed by 

CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone 

directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any 

of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be 

liable: 

1. claims under workers’ compensation, disability 

benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts; 

2. claims for damages because of bodily injury, 

occupational sickness or disease, or death of 

CONTRACTOR’s employees; 

3. claims for damages because of bodily injury, 

sickness or disease, or death of any person other than 

CONTRACTOR’s employees; 

4. claims for damages insured by reasonably 

available personal injury liability coverage which are sustained: 

(i) by any person as a result of an offense directly 

or indirectly related to the employment of such person by 

CONTRACTOR, or (ii) by any other person for any other 

reason; 

5. claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, 

because of injury to or destruction of tangible property 

wherever located, including loss of use resulting 

therefrom; and 

6. claims for damages because of bodily injury or 

death of any person or property damage arising out of the 

ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. 

B. The policies of insurance so required by this 

paragraph 5.04 to be purchased and maintained shall: 

1. with respect to insurance required by paragraphs 

5.04.A.3 through 5.04.A.6 inclusive, include as additional 

insureds (subject to any customary exclusion in respect of 

professional liability) OWNER, ENGINEER, 

ENGINEER's Consultants, and any other individuals or 

entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of 

whom shall be listed as additional insureds, and include 

coverage for the respective officers, directors, partners, 

employees, agents, and other consultants and 

subcontractors of each and any of all such additional 

insureds, and the insurance afforded to these additional 

insureds shall provide primary coverage for all claims 

covered thereby; 

2. include at least the specific coverages and be 

written for not less than the limits of liability provided in 

the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or 

Regulations, whichever is greater; 

3. include completed operations insurance; 

4. include contractual liability insurance covering 

CONTRACTOR’s indemnity obligations under paragraphs 

6.07, 6.11, and 6.20; 

5. contain a provision or endorsement that the 

coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially 

changed or renewal refused until at least thirty days prior 

written notice has been given to OWNER and 

CONTRACTOR and to each other additional insured 

identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a 

certificate of insurance has been issued (and the 

certificates of insurance furnished by the CONTRACTOR 

pursuant to paragraph 5.03 will so provide); 

6. remain in effect at least until final payment and 

at all times thereafter when CONTRACTOR may be 

correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work in 

accordance with paragraph 13.07; and 

7. with respect to completed operations insurance, 

and any insurance coverage written on a claims-made 

basis, remain in effect for at least two years after final 

payment (and CONTRACTOR shall furnish OWNER and 

each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary 

Conditions, to whom a certificate of insurance 

has been issued, evidence satisfactory to OWNER and any 

such additional insured of continuation of such insurance 

at final payment and one year thereafter). 

5.05 OWNER’s Liability Insurance 

A. In addition to the insurance required to be provided by 

CONTRACTOR under paragraph 5.04, OWNER, at 

OWNER’s option, may purchase and maintain at OWNER’s 

expense OWNER’s own liability insurance as will protect 

OWNER against claims which may arise from operations 

under the Contract Documents. 

00700 - 16

5.06 Property Insurance 

A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary 

Conditions, OWNER shall purchase and maintain property 

insurance upon the Work at the Site in the amount of the full 

replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible amounts 

as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or 

required by Laws and Regulations). This insurance shall: 

1. include the interests of OWNER, CONTRAC- 

TOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER, ENGINEER’s 

Consultants, and any other individuals or entities identified 

in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, 

directors, partners, employees, agents, and other 

consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, 

each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and 

shall be listed as an additional insured; 

2. be written on a Builder’s Risk “all-risk” or open 

peril or special causes of loss policy form that shall at 

least include insurance for physical loss or damage to the 

Work, temporary buildings, false work, and materials and 

equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the 

following perils or causes of loss: fire, lightning, extended 

coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, 

earthquake, collapse, debris removal, demolition 

occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations, 

water damage, and such other perils or causes of loss as 

may be specifically required by the Supplementary 

Conditions; 

3. include expenses incurred in the repair or 

replacement of any insured property (including but not 

limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects); 

4. cover materials and equipment stored at the Site 

or at another location that was agreed to in writing by 

OWNER prior to being incorporated in the Work, 

provided that such materials and equipment have been 

included in an Application for Payment recommended by 

ENGINEER; 

5. allow for partial utilization of the Work by 

OWNER; 

6. include testing and startup; and 

7. be maintained in effect until final payment is 

made unless otherwise agreed to in writing by OWNER, 

CONTRACTOR, and ENGINEER with 30 days written 

notice to each other additional insured to whom a certificate 

of insurance has been issued. 

B. OWNER shall purchase and maintain such boiler and 

machinery insurance or additional property insurance as may 

be required by the Supplementary Conditions or Laws and 

Regulations which will include the interests of OWNER, 

CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER, ENGINEER’s 

Consultants, and any other individuals or entities identified 

in the Supplementary Conditions, each of whom is deemed to 

have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured or 

additional insured. 

C. All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or 

other evidence thereof) required to be purchased and 

maintained in accordance with paragraph 5.06 will contain a 

provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not 

be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at 

least 30 days prior written notice has been given to OWNER 

and CONTRACTOR and to each other additional insured to 

whom a certificate of insurance has been issued and will 

contain waiver provisions in accordance with paragraph 5.07. 

D. OWNER shall not be responsible for purchasing and 

maintaining any property insurance specified in this 

paragraph 5.06 to protect the interests of CONTRACTOR, 

Subcontractors, or others in the Work to the extent of any 

deductible amounts that are identified in the Supplementary 

Conditions. The risk of loss within such identified deductible 

amount will be borne by CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, or 

others suffering any such loss, and if any of them wishes 

property insurance coverage within the limits of such 

amounts, each may purchase and maintain it at the 

purchaser’s own expense. 

E. If CONTRACTOR requests in writing that other 

special insurance be included in the property insurance 

policies provided under paragraph 5.06, OWNER shall, if 

possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof will be 

charged to CONTRACTOR by appropriate Change Order or 

Written Amendment. Prior to commencement of the Work at 

the Site, OWNER shall in writing advise CONTRACTOR 

whether or not such other insurance has been procured by 

OWNER. 

5.07 Waiver of Rights 

A. OWNER and CONTRACTOR intend that all policies 

purchased in accordance with paragraph 5.06 will protect 

OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER, 

ENGINEER’s Consultants, and all other individuals or 

entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be 

listed as insureds or additional insureds (and the officers, 

directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants 

and subcontractors of each and any of them) in such policies 

and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages 

caused by the perils or causes of loss covered thereby. All 

such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the 

event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have 

no rights of recovery against any of the insureds or additional 

insureds thereunder. OWNER and CONTRACTOR waive all 

rights against each other and their respective officers, 

00700 - 17


and subcontractors of each and any of them for all losses and 

damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the 

perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other 

property insurance applicable to the Work; and, in addition, 

waive all such rights against Subcontractors, ENGINEER, 

ENGINEER’s Consultants, and all other individuals or 

entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be 

listed as insureds or additional insureds (and the officers, 


and subcontractors of each and any of them) under such 

policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above 

waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such 

waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance held by 

OWNER as trustee or otherwise payable under any policy so 

issued. 

B. OWNER waives all rights against CONTRACTOR, 

Subcontractors, ENGINEER, ENGINEER’s Consultants, and 

the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other 

consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them for: 

1. loss due to business interruption, loss of use, or 

other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical 

loss or damage to OWNER’s property or the Work caused 

by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other peril 

whether or not insured by OWNER; and 

2. loss or damage to the completed Project or part 

thereof caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or 

other insured peril or cause of loss covered by any 

property insurance maintained on the completed Project 

or part thereof by OWNER during partial utilization 

pursuant to paragraph 14.05, after Substantial Completion 

pursuant to paragraph 14.04, or after final payment 

pursuant to paragraph 14.07. 

C. Any insurance policy maintained by OWNER covering 

any loss, damage or consequential loss referred to in 

paragraph 5.07.B shall contain provisions to the effect that in 

the event of payment of any such loss, damage, or 

consequential loss, the insurers will have no rights of recovery 

against CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER, or 

ENGINEER’s Consultants and the officers, directors, 

partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and 

subcontractors of each and any of them. 

5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds 

A. Any insured loss under the policies of insurance 

required by paragraph 5.06 will be adjusted with OWNER 

and made payable to OWNER as fiduciary for the insureds, as 

their interests may appear, subject to the requirements of any 

applicable mortgage clause and of paragraph 5.08.B. OWN- 

ER shall deposit in a separate account any money so received 

and shall distribute it in accordance with such agreement as 

the parties in interest may reach. If no other special 

agreement is reached, the damaged Work shall be repaired or 

replaced, the moneys so received applied on account thereof, 

and the Work and the cost thereof covered by an appropriate 

Change Order or Written Amendment. 

B. OWNER as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and 

settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the parties in 

interest shall object in writing within 15 days after the 

occurrence of loss to OWNER’s exercise of this power. If 

such objection be made, OWNER as fiduciary shall make 

settlement with the insurers in accordance with such 

agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no such 

agreement among the parties in interest is reached, OWNER 

as fiduciary shall adjust and settle the loss with the insurers 

and, if required in writing by any party in interest, OWNER 

as fiduciary shall give bond for the proper performance of 

such duties. 

5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to 

Replace 

A. If either OWNER or CONTRACTOR has any 

objection to the coverage afforded by or other provisions of 

the Bonds or insurance required to be purchased and 

maintained by the other party in accordance with Article 5 on 

the basis of non-conformance with the Contract Documents, 

the objecting party shall so notify the other party in writing 

within 10 days after receipt of the certificates (or other 

evidence requested) required by paragraph 2.05.C. OWNER 

and CONTRACTOR shall each provide to the other such 

additional information in respect of insurance provided as the 

other may reasonably request. If either party does not 

purchase or maintain all of the Bonds and insurance required 

of such party by the Contract Documents, such party shall 

notify the other party in writing of such failure to purchase 

prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain 

prior to any change in the required coverage. Without 

prejudice to any other right or remedy, the other party may 

elect to obtain equivalent Bonds or insurance to protect such 

other party's interests at the expense of the party who was 

required to provide such coverage, and a Change Order shall 

be issued to adjust the Contract Price accordingly. 

5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property 

Insurer 

A. If OWNER finds it necessary to occupy or use a 

portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial 

Completion of all the Work as provided in paragraph 14.05, 

no such use or occupancy shall commence before the insurers 

providing the property insurance pursuant to paragraph 5.06 

have acknowledged notice thereof and in writing effected any 

changes in coverage necessitated thereby. The insurers 

00700 - 18

providing the property insurance shall consent by endorsement 

on the policy or policies, but the property insurance 

shall not be canceled or permitted to lapse on account of any 

such partial use or occupancy. 

ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES 

6.01 Supervision and Superintendence 

A. CONTRACTOR shall supervise, inspect, and direct 

the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention 

thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be 

necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the 

Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall be solely 

responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, 

and procedures of construction, but CONTRACTOR shall not 

be responsible for the negligence of OWNER or ENGINEER 

in the design or specification of a specific means, method, 

technique, sequence, or procedure of construction which is 

shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract 

Documents. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to see that 

the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract 

Documents. 

B. At all times during the progress of the Work, 

CONTRACTOR shall assign a competent resident superintendent 

thereto who shall not be replaced without written 

notice to OWNER and ENGINEER except under 

extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be 

CONTRACTOR’s representative at the Site and shall have 

authority to act on behalf of CONTRACTOR. All 

communications given to or received from the superintendent 

shall be binding on CONTRACTOR. 

6.02 Labor; Working Hours 

A. CONTRACTOR shall provide competent, suitably 

qualified personnel to survey, lay out, and construct the Work 

as required by the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR 

shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the 

Site. 

B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or 

protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or 

adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the 

Contract Documents, all Work at the Site shall be performed 

during regular working hours, and CONTRACTOR will not 

permit overtime work or the performance of Work on 

Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without OWNER’s 

written consent (which will not be unreasonably withheld) 

given after prior written notice to ENGINEER. 

6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment 

A. Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, 

CONTRACTOR shall provide and assume full 

responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, 

transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, 

appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary 

facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and 

incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, 

and completion of the Work. 

B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the 

Work shall be as specified or, if not specified, shall be of good 

quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract 

Documents. All warranties and guarantees specifically called 

for by the Specifications shall expressly run to the benefit of 

OWNER. If required by ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall 

furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required 

tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and 

equipment. All materials and equipment shall be stored, 

applied, installed, connected, erected, protected, used, 

cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of 

the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided 

in the Contract Documents. 

6.04 Progress Schedule 

A. CONTRACTOR shall adhere to the progress schedule 

established in accordance with paragraph 2.07 as it may be 

adjusted from time to time as provided below. 

1. CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for 

acceptance (to the extent indicated in paragraph 2.07) 

proposed adjustments in the progress schedule that will 

not result in changing the Contract Times (or Milestones). 

Such adjustments will conform generally to the progress 

schedule then in effect and additionally will comply with 

any provisions of the General Requirements applicable 

thereto. 

2. Proposed adjustments in the progress schedule 

that will change the Contract Times (or Milestones) shall 

be submitted in accordance with the requirements of 

Article 12. Such adjustments may only be made by a 

Change Order or Written Amendment in accordance with 

Article 12. 

6.05 Substitutes and “Or-Equals” 

A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is 

specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the 

name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular 

Supplier, the specification or description is intended to 

establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. 

Unless the specification or description contains or is followed 

00700 - 19

y words reading that no like, equivalent, or “or-equal” item 

or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or 

equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may 

be submitted to ENGINEER for review under the circumstances 

described below. 

1. “Or-Equal” Items: If in ENGINEER’s sole 

discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by 

CONTRACTOR is functionally equal to that named and 

sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will 

be required, it may be considered by ENGINEER as an 

“or-equal” item, in which case review and approval of the 

proposed item may, in ENGINEER’s sole discretion, be 

accomplished without compliance with some or all of the 

requirements for approval of proposed substitute items. 

For the purposes of this paragraph 6.05.A.1, a proposed 

item of material or equipment will be considered 

functionally equal to an item so named if: 

a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment 

ENGINEER determines that: (i) it is at least equal in 

quality, durability, appearance, strength, and design 

characteristics; (ii) it will reliably perform at least 

equally well the function imposed by the design 

concept of the completed Project as a functioning 

whole, and; 

b. CONTRACTOR certifies that: (i) there is no 

increase in cost to the OWNER; and (ii) it will 

conform substantially, even with deviations, to the 

detailed requirements of the item named in the 


2. Substitute Items 

a. If in ENGINEER’s sole discretion an item of 

material or equipment proposed by CONTRACTOR 

does not qualify as an “or-equal” item under 

paragraph 6.05.A.1, it will be considered a proposed 

substitute item. 

b. CONTRACTOR shall submit sufficient 

information as provided below to allow ENGINEER 

to determine that the item of material or equipment 

proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and 

an acceptable substitute therefor. Requests for review 

of proposed substitute items of material or equipment 

will not be accepted by ENGINEER from anyone 

other than CONTRACTOR. 

c. The procedure for review by ENGINEER 

will be as set forth in paragraph 6.05.A.2.d, as 

supplemented in the General Requirements and as 

ENGINEER may decide is appropriate under the 

circumstances. 

d. CONTRACTOR shall first make written 

application to ENGINEER for review of a proposed 

substitute item of material or equipment that 

CONTRACTOR seeks to furnish or use. The 

application shall certify that the proposed substitute 

item will perform adequately the functions and 

achieve the results called for by the general design, be 

similar in substance to that specified, and be suited to 

the same use as that specified. The application will 

state the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed 

substitute item will prejudice 

CONTRACTOR’s achievement of Substantial 

Completion on time, whether or not use of the 

proposed substitute item in the Work will require a 

change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the 

provisions of any other direct contract with OWNER 

for work on the Project) to adapt the design to the 

proposed substitute item and whether or not 

incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in 

connection with the Work is subject to payment of 

any license fee or royalty. All variations of the proposed 

substitute item from that specified will be 

identified in the application, and available 

engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and 

replacement services will be indicated. The 

application will also contain an itemized estimate of 

all costs or credits that will result directly or indirectly 

from use of such substitute item, including 

costs of redesign and claims of other contractors 

affected by any resulting change, all of which will be 

considered by ENGINEER in evaluating the proposed 

substitute item. ENGINEER may require CON- 

TRACTOR to furnish additional data about the proposed 

substitute item. 

B. Substitute Construction Methods or Procedures: If a 

specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of 

construction is shown or indicated in and expressly required 

by the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR may furnish or 

utilize a substitute means, method, technique, sequence, or 

procedure of construction approved by ENGINEER. CON- 

TRACTOR shall submit sufficient information to allow 

ENGINEER, in ENGINEER’s sole discretion, to determine 

that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that expressly 

called for by the Contract Documents. The procedure for 

review by ENGINEER will be similar to that provided in subparagraph 

6.05.A.2. 

C. Engineer’s Evaluation: ENGINEER will be allowed 

a reasonable time within which to evaluate each proposal or 

submittal made pursuant to paragraphs 6.05.A and 6.05.B. 

ENGINEER will be the sole judge of acceptability. No 

“or-equal” or substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized 

until ENGINEER’s review is complete, which will be 

evidenced by either a Change Order for a substitute or an 

00700 - 20

approved Shop Drawing for an “or equal.” ENGINEER will 

advise CONTRACTOR in writing of any negative 

determination. 

D. Special Guarantee: OWNER may require CON- 

TRACTOR to furnish at CONTRACTOR’s expense a special 

performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any 

substitute. 

E. ENGINEER’s Cost Reimbursement: ENGINEER will 

record time required by ENGINEER and ENGINEER’s 

Consultants in evaluating substitute proposed or submitted by 

CONTRACTOR pursuant to paragraphs 6.05.A.2 and 6.05.B 

and in making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the 

provisions of any other direct contract with OWNER for work 

on the Project) occasioned thereby. Whether or not 

ENGINEER approves a substitute item so proposed or 

submitted by CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR shall 

reimburse OWNER for the charges of ENGINEER and 

ENGINEER’s Consultants for evaluating each such proposed 

substitute. 

F. CONTRACTOR’s Expense: CONTRACTOR shall 

provide all data in support of any proposed substitute or 

“or-equal” at CONTRACTOR’s expense. 

6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others 

A. CONTRACTOR shall not employ any Subcontractor, 

Supplier, or other individual or entity (including those 

acceptable to OWNER as indicated in paragraph 6.06.B), 

whether initially or as a replacement, against whom OWNER 

may have reasonable objection. CONTRACTOR shall not be 

required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other 

individual or entity to furnish or perform any of the Work 

against whom CONTRACTOR has reasonable objection. 

B. If the Supplementary Conditions require the identity 

of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or 

entities to be submitted to OWNER in advance for acceptance 

by OWNER by a specified date prior to the Effective Date of 

the Agreement, and if CONTRACTOR has submitted a list 

thereof in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, 

OWNER’s acceptance (either in writing or by failing to make 

written objection thereto by the date indicated for acceptance 

or objection in the Bidding Documents or the Contract 

Documents) of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other 

individual or entity so identified may be revoked on the basis 

of reasonable objection after due investigation. CON- 

TRACTOR shall submit an acceptable replacement for the 

rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, 

and the Contract Price will be adjusted by the difference in 

the cost occasioned by such replacement, and an appropriate 

Change Order will be issued or Written Amendment signed. 

No acceptance by OWNER of any such Subcontractor, 

Supplier, or other individual or entity, whether initially or as 

a replacement, shall constitute a waiver of any right of 

OWNER or ENGINEER to reject defective Work. 

C. CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible to OWNER 

and ENGINEER for all acts and omissions of the 

Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities 

performing or furnishing any of the Work just as 

CONTRACTOR is responsible for CONTRACTOR’s own 

acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall 

create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or 

other individual or entity any contractual relationship between 

OWNER or ENGINEER and any such Subcontractor, 

Supplier or other individual or entity, nor shall it create any 

obligation on the part of OWNER or ENGINEER to pay or to 

see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, 

Supplier, or other individual or entity except as may 

otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations. 

D. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for 

scheduling and coordinating the Work of Subcontractors, 

Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or 

furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract 

with CONTRACTOR. 

E. CONTRACTOR shall require all Subcontractors, 

Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities performing 

or furnishing any of the Work to communicate with ENGI- 

NEER through CONTRACTOR. 

F. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and 

the identifications of any Drawings shall not control 

CONTRACTOR in dividing the Work among Subcontractors 

or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any 

specific trade. 

G. All Work performed for CONTRACTOR by a 

Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate 

agreement between CONTRACTOR and the Subcontractor or 

Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or 

Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the 

Contract Documents for the benefit of OWNER and 

ENGINEER. Whenever any such agreement is with a 

Subcontractor or Supplier who is listed as an additional 

insured on the property insurance provided in paragraph 5.06, 

the agreement between the CONTRACTOR and the 

Subcontractor or Supplier will contain provisions whereby the 

Subcontractor or Supplier waives all rights against OWNER, 

CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER, ENGINEER’s Consultants, 

and all other individuals or entities identified in the 

Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insureds or 

additional insureds (and the officers, directors, partners, 

employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors 

of each and any of them) for all losses and damages caused 

by, arising out of, relating to, or resulting from any of the 

00700 - 21

perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other 

property insurance applicable to the Work. If the insurers on 

any such policies require separate waiver forms to be signed 

by any Subcontractor or Supplier, CONTRACTOR will obtain 

the same. 

6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties 

A. CONTRACTOR shall pay all license fees and 

royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the 

performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of 

any invention, design, process, product, or device which is the 

subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a 

particular invention, design, process, product, or device is 

specified in the Contract Documents for use in the 

performance of the Work and if to the actual knowledge of 

OWNER or ENGINEER its use is subject to patent rights or 

copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or 

royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be 

disclosed by OWNER in the Contract Documents. To the 

fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, 

CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER, 

ENGINEER, ENGINEER’s Consultants, and the officers, 

directors, partners, employees or agents, and other consultants 

of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, 

losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and 

charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other 

professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute 

resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement 

of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the 

performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation 

in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or 

device not specified in the Contract Documents. 

6.08 Permits 

A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary 

Conditions, CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all 

construction permits and licenses. OWNER shall assist 

CONTRACTOR, when necessary, in obtaining such permits 

and licenses. CONTRACTOR shall pay all governmental 

charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of 

the Work which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids, 

or, if there are no Bids, on the Effective Date of the 

Agreement. CONTRACTOR shall pay all charges of utility 

owners for connections to the Work, and OWNER shall pay 

all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related 

thereto, such as plant investment fees. 

6.09 Laws and Regulations 

A. CONTRACTOR shall give all notices and comply 

with all Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance 

of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by 

applicable Laws and Regulations, neither OWNER nor 

ENGINEER shall be responsible for monitoring 

CONTRACTOR’s compliance with any Laws or Regulations. 

B. If CONTRACTOR performs any Work knowing or 

having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or 

Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall bear all claims, costs, 

losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and 

charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other 


resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work; 

however, it shall not be CONTRACTOR’s primary 

responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and 

Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but 

this shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of CONTRACTOR’s 

obligations under paragraph 3.03. 

C. Changes in Laws or Regulations not known at the 

time of opening of Bids (or, on the Effective Date of the 

Agreement if there were no Bids) having an effect on the cost 

or time of performance of the Work may be the subject of an 

adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times. If OWNER 

and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree on entitlement to or 

on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment, a 

Claim may be made therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. 

6.10 Taxes 

A. CONTRACTOR shall pay all sales, consumer, use, 

and other similar taxes required to be paid by CONTRAC- 

TOR in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the 

place of the Project which are applicable during the 

performance of the Work. 

6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas 

A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas 

1. CONTRACTOR shall confine construction 

equipment, the storage of materials and equipment, and 

the operations of workers to the Site and other areas 

permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not 

unreasonably encumber the Site and other areas with 

construction equipment or other materials or equipment. 

CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for any 

damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or 

occupant thereof, or of any adjacent land or areas 

resulting from the performance of the Work. 

2. Should any claim be made by any such owner or 

occupant because of the performance of the Work, 

CONTRACTOR shall promptly settle with such other 

party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by 

arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at 

law. 

00700 - 22

3. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and 

Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold 

harmless OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER’s 

Consultant, and the officers, directors, partners, 

employees, agents, and other consultants of each and any 

of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and 

damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges 

of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals 


costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, 

legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant 

against OWNER, ENGINEER, or any other party 

indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based 

upon CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work. 

B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: 

During the progress of the Work CONTRACTOR shall keep 

the Site and other areas free from accumulations of waste 

materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal 

of such waste materials, rubbish, and other debris shall conform 

to applicable Laws and Regulations. 

C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the 

Work CONTRACTOR shall clean the Site and make it ready 

for utilization by OWNER. At the completion of the Work 

CONTRACTOR shall remove from the Site all tools, 

appliances, construction equipment and machinery, and 

surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all 

property not designated for alteration by the Contract 

Documents. 

D. Loading Structures: CONTRACTOR shall not load 

nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any 

manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall 

CONTRACTOR subject any part of the Work or adjacent 

property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it. 

6.12 Record Documents 

A. CONTRACTOR shall maintain in a safe place at the 

Site one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, 

Addenda, Written Amendments, Change Orders, Work 

Change Directives, Field Orders, and written interpretations 

and clarifications in good order and annotated to show 

changes made during construction. These record documents 

together with all approved Samples and a counterpart of all 

approved Shop Drawings will be available to ENGINEER for 

reference. Upon completion of the Work, these record 

documents, Samples, and Shop Drawings will be delivered to 

ENGINEER for OWNER. 

6.13 Safety and Protection 

A. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for 

initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions 

and programs in connection with the Work. CONTRACTOR 

shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall 

provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or 

loss to: 

1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by 

the Work; 

2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be 

incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site; 

and 

3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, 

including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, 

roadways, structures, utilities, and Underground Facilities 

not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in 

the course of construction. 

B. CONTRACTOR shall comply with all applicable 

Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of persons or 

property, or to the protection of persons or property from 

damage, injury, or loss; and shall erect and maintain all 

necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. 

CONTRACTOR shall notify owners of adjacent property and 

of Underground Facilities and other utility owners when 

prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate 

with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and 

replacement of their property. All damage, injury, or loss to 

any property referred to in paragraph 6.13.A.2 or 6.13.A.3 

caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by CON- 

TRACTOR, any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other 

individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of 

them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts 

any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by 

CONTRACTOR (except damage or loss attributable to the 

fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions 

of OWNER or ENGINEER or ENGINEER’s Consultant, or 

anyone employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts 

any of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or 

indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of 

CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other 

individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of 

them). CONTRACTOR’s duties and responsibilities for 

safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such 

time as all the Work is completed and ENGINEER has issued 

a notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR in accordance with 

paragraph 14.07.B that the Work is acceptable (except as 

otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial 

Completion). 

6.14 Safety Representative 

A. CONTRACTOR shall designate a qualified and 

experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and 

responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the 

00700 - 23

maintaining and supervising of safety precautions and 

programs. 

6.15 Hazard Communication Programs 

A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordinating 

any exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard 

communication information required to be made available to 

or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in 

accordance with Laws or Regulations. 

6.16 Emergencies 

A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of 

persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent 

thereto, CONTRACTOR is obligated to act to prevent 

threatened damage, injury, or loss. CONTRACTOR shall 

give ENGINEER prompt written notice if CONTRACTOR 

believes that any significant changes in the Work or 

variations from the Contract Documents have been caused 

thereby or are required as a result thereof. If ENGINEER 

determines that a change in the Contract Documents is 

required because of the action taken by CONTRACTOR in 

response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or 

Change Order will be issued. 

6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples 

A. CONTRACTOR shall submit Shop Drawings to 

ENGINEER for review and approval in accordance with the 

acceptable schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample 

submittals. All submittals will be identified as ENGINEER 

may require and in the number of copies specified in the 

General Requirements. The data shown on the Shop 

Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, 

specified performance and design criteria, materials, 

and similar data to show ENGINEER the services, materials, 

and equipment CONTRACTOR proposes to provide and to 

enable ENGINEER to review the information for the limited 

purposes required by paragraph 6.17.E. 

B. CONTRACTOR shall also submit Samples to 

ENGINEER for review and approval in accordance with the 

acceptable schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample 

submittals. Each Sample will be identified clearly as to 

material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers, 

and the use for which intended and otherwise as ENGINEER 

may require to enable ENGINEER to review the submittal for 

the limited purposes required by paragraph 6.17.E. The 

numbers of each Sample to be submitted will be as specified 

in the Specifications. 

C. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the 

Contract Documents or the schedule of Shop Drawings and 

Sample submittals acceptable to ENGINEER as required by 

paragraph 2.07, any related Work performed prior to 

ENGINEER’s review and approval of the pertinent submittal 

will be at the sole expense and responsibility of 

CONTRACTOR. 

D. Submittal Procedures 

1. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, 

CONTRACTOR shall have determined and verified: 

a. all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, 

specified performance criteria, installation 

requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar 

information with respect thereto; 

b. all materials with respect to intended use, 

fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, 

and installation pertaining to the performance of the 

Work; 

c. all information relative to means, methods, 

techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction 

and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; 

and 

d. CONTRACTOR shall also have reviewed 

and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with 

other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the 

requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. 

2. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific 

written indication that CONTRACTOR has satisfied 

CONTRACTOR’s obligations under the Contract 

Documents with respect to CONTRACTOR’s review and 

approval of that submittal. 

3. At the time of each submittal, CONTRACTOR 

shall give ENGINEER specific written notice of such 

variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample 

submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract 

Documents, such notice to be in a written communication 

separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause 

a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and 

Sample submitted to ENGINEER for review and approval 

of each such variation. 

E. ENGINEER’s Review 

1. ENGINEER will timely review and approve Shop 

Drawings and Samples in accordance with the schedule of 

Shop Drawings and Sample submittals acceptable to 

ENGINEER. ENGINEER’s review and approval will be 

only to determine if the items covered by the submittals 

will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform 

to the information given in the Contract Documents 

00700 - 24

and be compatible with the design concept of the completed 

Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract 

Documents. 

2. ENGINEER’s review and approval will not 

extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or 

procedures of construction (except where a particular 

means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction 

is specifically and expressly called for by the 

Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs 

incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate 

item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in 

which the item functions. 

3. ENGINEER’s review and approval of Shop 

Drawings or Samples shall not relieve CONTRACTOR 

from responsibility for any variation from the requirements 

of the Contract Documents unless CONTRACTOR 

has in writing called ENGINEER’s attention to each such 

variation at the time of each submittal as required by 

paragraph 6.17.D.3 and ENGINEER has given written 

approval of each such variation by specific written 

notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the 

Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval 

by ENGINEER relieve CONTRACTOR from 

responsibility for complying with the requirements of 

paragraph 6.17.D.1. 

F. Resubmittal Procedures 

1. CONTRACTOR shall make corrections required 

by ENGINEER and shall return the required number of 

corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required 

new Samples for review and approval. CONTRACTOR 

shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other 

than the corrections called for by ENGINEER on previous 

submittals. 

6.18 Continuing the Work 

A. CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work and adhere 

to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements 

with OWNER. No Work shall be delayed or postponed 

pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except 

as permitted by paragraph 15.04 or as OWNER and 

CONTRACTOR may otherwise agree in writing. 

6.19 CONTRACTOR’s General Warranty and Guarantee 

A. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees to 

OWNER, ENGINEER, and ENGINEER’s Consultants that 

all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents 

and will not be defective. CONTRACTOR’s warranty and 

guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by: 

1. abuse, modification, or improper maintenance or 

operation by persons other than CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, 

Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for 

whom CONTRACTOR is responsible; or 

2. normal wear and tear under normal usage. 

B. CONTRACTOR’s obligation to perform and complete 

the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be 

absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance 

of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract 

Documents or a release of CONTRACTOR’s obligation to 

perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: 

1. observations by ENGINEER; 

2. recommendation by ENGINEER or payment by 

OWNER of any progress or final payment; 

3. the issuance of a certificate of Substantial 

Completion by ENGINEER or any payment related 

thereto by OWNER; 

4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof 

by OWNER; 

so; 

5. any acceptance by OWNER or any failure to do 

6. any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or 

Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of acceptability 

by ENGINEER; 

7. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or 

8. any correction of defective Work by OWNER. 

6.20 INDEMNIFICATION 

A. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY 

LAWS AND REGULATIONS, CONTRACTOR SHALL 

INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS OWNER, 

ENGINEER, ENGINEER’S CONSULTANTS, AND THE 

OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, PARTNERS, EMPLOYEES, 

AGENTS, AND OTHER CONSULTANTS AND 

SUBCONTRACTORS OF EACH AND ANY OF THEM 

FROM AND AGAINST ALL CLAIMS, COSTS, LOSSES, 

AND DAMAGES (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO 

ALL FEES AND CHARGES OF ENGINEERS, 

ARCHITECTS, ATTORNEYS, AND OTHER 

PROFESSIONALS AND ALL COURT OR ARBITRATION 

OR OTHER DISPUTE RESOLUTION COSTS) ARISING 

OUT OF OR RELATING TO THE PERFORMANCE OF 

THE WORK, PROVIDED THAT ANY SUCH CLAIM, 

COST, LOSS, OR DAMAGE: 

00700 - 25

1. IS ATTRIBUTABLE TO BODILY INJURY, 

SICKNESS, DISEASE, OR DEATH, OR TO INJURY 

TO OR DESTRUCTION OF TANGIBLE PROPERTY 

(OTHER THAN THE WORK ITSELF), INCLUDING 

THE LOSS OF USE RESULTING THEREFROM; AND 

2. IS CAUSED IN WHOLE OR IN PART BY ANY 

NEGLIGENT ACT OR OMISSION OF CONTRACTOR, 

ANY SUBCONTRACTOR, ANY SUPPLIER, OR ANY 

INDIVIDUAL OR ENTITY DIRECTLY OR INDIRECT- 

LY EMPLOYED BY ANY OF THEM TO PERFORM 

ANY OF THE WORK OR ANYONE FOR WHOSE 

ACTS ANY OF THEM MAY BE LIABLE, 

REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT CAUSED IN 

PART BY ANY NEGLIGENCE OR OMISSION OF AN 

INDIVIDUAL OR ENTITY INDEMNIFIED 

HEREUNDER OR WHETHER LIABILITY IS IMPOSED 

UPON SUCH INDEMNIFIED PARTY BY LAWS AND 

REGULATIONS REGARDLESS OF THE 

NEGLIGENCE OF ANY SUCH INDIVIDUAL OR 

ENTITY. 

B. IN ANY AND ALL CLAIMS AGAINST OWNER 

OR ENGINEER OR ANY OF THEIR RESPECTIVE 

CONSULTANTS, AGENTS, OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, 

PARTNERS, OR EMPLOYEES BY ANY EMPLOYEE (OR 

THE SURVIVOR OR PERSONAL REPRESENTATIVE OF 

SUCH EMPLOYEE) OF CONTRACTOR, ANY 

SUBCONTRACTOR, ANY SUPPLIER, OR ANY 

INDIVIDUAL OR ENTITY DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY 

EMPLOYED BY ANY OF THEM TO PERFORM ANY OF 

THE WORK, OR ANYONE FOR WHOSE ACTS ANY OF 

THEM MAY BE LIABLE, THE INDEMNIFICATION 

OBLIGATION UNDER PARAGRAPH 6.20.A SHALL NOT 

BE LIMITED IN ANY WAY BY ANY LIMITATION ON 

THE AMOUNT OR TYPE OF DAMAGES, 

COMPENSATION, OR BENEFITS PAYABLE BY OR FOR 

CONTRACTOR OR ANY SUCH SUBCONTRACTOR, 

SUPPLIER, OR OTHER INDIVIDUAL OR ENTITY 

UNDER WORKERS’ COMPENSATION ACTS, 

DISABILITY BENEFIT ACTS, OR OTHER EMPLOYEE 

BENEFIT ACTS. 

C. The indemnification obligations of CONTRACTOR 

under paragraph 6.20.a shall not extend to the liability of 

ENGINEER and ENGINEER’S consultants or to the officers, 


and subcontractors of each and any of them arising out of: 

1. The preparation or approval of, or the failure to 

prepare or approve, maps, drawings, opinions, reports, 

surveys, change orders, designs, or specifications; or 

2. Giving directions or instructions, or failing to 

give them, if that is the primary cause of the injury or 

damage. 

ARTICLE 7 - OTHER WORK 

7.01 Related Work at Site 

A. OWNER may perform other work related to the 

Project at the Site by OWNER’s employees, or let other direct 

contracts therefor, or have other work performed by utility 

owners. If such other work is not noted in the Contract 

Documents, then: 

1. written notice thereof will be given to CON- 

TRACTOR prior to starting any such other work; and 

2. if OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to 

agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, 

of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times 

that should be allowed as a result of such other work, a 

Claim may be made therefor as provided in paragraph 

10.05. 

B. CONTRACTOR shall afford each other contractor 

who is a party to such a direct contract and each utility owner 

(and OWNER, if OWNER is performing the other work with 

OWNER’s employees) proper and safe access to the Site and 

a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of 

materials and equipment and the execution of such other 

work and shall properly coordinate the Work with theirs. 

Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, CON- 

TRACTOR shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the 

Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise 

make its several parts come together and properly integrate 

with such other work. CONTRACTOR shall not endanger 

any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise 

altering their work and will only cut or alter their work with 

the written consent of ENGINEER and the others whose work 

will be affected. The duties and responsibilities of 

CONTRACTOR under this paragraph are for the benefit of 

such utility owners and other contractors to the extent that 

there are comparable provisions for the benefit of 

CONTRACTOR in said direct contracts between OWNER 

and such utility owners and other contractors. 

C. If the proper execution or results of any part of 

CONTRACTOR’s Work depends upon work performed by 

others under this Article 7, CONTRACTOR shall inspect 

such other work and promptly report to ENGINEER in 

writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work 

that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper 

execution and results of CONTRACTOR’s Work. 

00700 - 26

CONTRACTOR’s failure to so report will constitute an 

acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration 

with CONTRACTOR’s Work except for latent defects and 

deficiencies in such other work. 

7.02 Coordination 

A. If OWNER intends to contract with others for the 

performance of other work on the Project at the Site, the 

following will be set forth in Supplementary Conditions: 

1. the individual or entity who will have authority 

and responsibility for coordination of the activities among 

the various contractors will be identified; 

2. the specific matters to be covered by such 

authority and responsibility will be itemized; and 

3. the extent of such authority and responsibilities 

will be provided. 

B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary 

Conditions, OWNER shall have sole authority and responsibility 

for such coordination. 

ARTICLE 8 - OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES 

8.01 Communications to Contractor 

A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, 

OWNER shall issue all communications to 

CONTRACTOR through ENGINEER. 

8.02 Replacement of ENGINEER 

A. In case of termination of the employment of ENGI- 

NEER, OWNER shall appoint an engineer to whom 

CONTRACTOR makes no reasonable objection, whose status 

under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former 

ENGINEER. 

8.03 Furnish Data 

A. OWNER shall promptly furnish the data required of 

OWNER under the Contract Documents. 

8.04 Pay Promptly When Due 

A. OWNER shall make payments to CONTRACTOR 

promptly when they are due as provided in paragraphs 

14.02.C and 14.07.C. 

A. OWNER’s duties in respect of providing lands and 

easements and providing engineering surveys to establish 

reference points are set forth in paragraphs 4.01 and 4.05. 

Paragraph 4.02 refers to OWNER’s identifying and making 

available to CONTRACTOR copies of reports of explorations 

and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical 

conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface 

structures at or contiguous to the Site that have been utilized 

by ENGINEER in preparing the Contract Documents. 

8.06 Insurance 

A. OWNER’s responsibilities, if any, in respect to purchasing 

and maintaining liability and property insurance are 

set forth in Article 5. 

8.07 Change Orders 

A. OWNER is obligated to execute Change Orders as 

indicated in paragraph 10.03. 

8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals 

A. OWNER’s responsibility in respect to certain inspections, 

tests, and approvals is set forth in paragraph 13.03.B. 

8.09 Limitations on OWNER’s Responsibilities 

A. The OWNER shall not supervise, direct, or have 

control or authority over, nor be responsible for, 

CONTRACTOR’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or 

procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and 

programs incident thereto, or for any failure of CON- 

TRACTOR to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable 

to the performance of the Work. OWNER will not be 

responsible for CONTRACTOR’s failure to perform the 

Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 

8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition 

A. OWNER’s responsibility in respect to an undisclosed 

Hazardous Environmental Condition is set forth in paragraph 

4.06. 

8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements 

A. If and to the extent OWNER has agreed to furnish 

CONTRACTOR reasonable evidence that financial 

arrangements have been made to satisfy OWNER’s 

obligations under the Contract Documents, OWNER’s 

responsibility in respect thereof will be as set forth in the 

Supplementary Conditions. 

8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests 

00700 - 27

ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING 

CONSTRUCTION 

9.01 OWNER’S Representative 

A. ENGINEER will be OWNER’s representative during 

the construction period. The duties and responsibilities and 

the limitations of authority of ENGINEER as OWNER’s 

representative during construction are set forth in the 

Contract Documents and will not be changed without written 

consent of OWNER and ENGINEER. 

9.02 Visits to Site 

A. ENGINEER will make visits to the Site at intervals 

appropriate to the various stages of construction as 

ENGINEER deems necessary in order to observe as an 

experienced and qualified design professional the progress 

that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of 

CONTRACTOR’s executed Work. Based on information 

obtained during such visits and observations, ENGINEER, for 

the benefit of OWNER, will determine, in general, if the 

Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract 

Documents. ENGINEER will not be required to make 

exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to check the 

quality or quantity of the Work. ENGINEER’s efforts will be 

directed toward providing for OWNER a greater degree of 

confidence that the completed Work will conform generally 

to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and 

observations, ENGINEER will keep OWNER informed of the 

progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard OWNER 

against defective Work. 

B. ENGINEER’s visits and observations are subject to all 

the limitations on ENGINEER’s authority and responsibility 

set forth in paragraph 9.10, and particularly, but without 

limitation, during or as a result of ENGINEER's visits or 

observations of CONTRACTOR's Work ENGINEER will not 

supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be 

responsible for CONTRACTOR’s means, methods, 

techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the 

safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any 

failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with Laws and 

Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. 

9.03 Project Representative 

A. If OWNER and ENGINEER agree, ENGINEER will 

furnish a Resident Project Representative to assist 

ENGINEER in providing more extensive observation of the 

Work. The responsibilities and authority and limitations 

thereon of any such Resident Project Representative and 

assistants will be as provided in paragraph 9.10 and in the 

Supplementary Conditions. If OWNER designates another 

representative or agent to represent OWNER at the Site who 

is not ENGINEER’s Consultant, agent or employee, the 

responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of such 

other individual or entity will be as provided in the Supplementary 

Conditions. 

9.04 Clarifications and Interpretations 

A. ENGINEER will issue with reasonable promptness 

such written clarifications or interpretations of the requirements 

of the Contract Documents as ENGINEER may determine 

necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of 

and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents. Such 

written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on 

OWNER and CONTRACTOR. If OWNER and CON- 

TRACTOR are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the 

amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract 

Price or Contract Times, or both, that should be allowed as a 

result of a written clarification or interpretation, a Claim may 

be made therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. 

9.05 Authorized Variations in Work 

A. ENGINEER may authorize minor variations in the 

Work from the requirements of the Contract Documents 

which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or 

the Contract Times and are compatible with the design 

concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as 

indicated by the Contract Documents. These may be 

accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on 

OWNER and also on CONTRACTOR, who shall perform the 

Work involved promptly. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR 

are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or 

extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or 

Contract Times, or both, as a result of a Field Order, a Claim 

may be made therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. 

9.06 Rejecting Defective Work 

A. ENGINEER will have authority to disapprove or 

reject Work which ENGINEER believes to be defective, or 

that ENGINEER believes will not produce a completed 

Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will 

prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed 

Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract 

Documents. ENGINEER will also have authority to require 

special inspection or testing of the Work as provided in 

paragraph 13.04, whether or not the Work is fabricated, 

installed, or completed. 

9.07 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments 

A. In connection with ENGINEER’s authority as to Shop 

Drawings and Samples, see paragraph 6.17. 

00700 - 28

B. In connection with ENGINEER’s authority as to 

Change Orders, see Articles 10, 11, and 12. 

C. In connection with ENGINEER’s authority as to 

Applications for Payment, see Article 14. 

9.08 Determinations for Unit Price Work 

A. ENGINEER will determine the actual quantities and 

classifications of Unit Price Work performed by 

CONTRACTOR. ENGINEER will review with CON- 

TRACTOR the ENGINEER’s preliminary determinations on 

such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by 

recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). 

ENGINEER’s written decision thereon will be final and 

binding (except as modified by ENGINEER to reflect changed 

factual conditions or more accurate data) upon OWNER and 

CONTRACTOR, subject to the provisions of paragraph 

10.05. 

9.09 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents 

and Acceptability of Work 

A. ENGINEER will be the initial interpreter of the 

requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the 

acceptability of the Work thereunder. Claims, disputes and 

other matters relating to the acceptability of the Work, the 

quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work, the 

interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents 

pertaining to the performance of the Work, and Claims 

seeking changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times will 

be referred initially to ENGINEER in writing, in accordance 

with the provisions of paragraph 10.05, with a request for a 

formal decision. 

B. When functioning as interpreter and judge under this 

paragraph 9.09, ENGINEER will not show partiality to 

OWNER or CONTRACTOR and will not be liable in 

connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in 

good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by 

ENGINEER pursuant to this paragraph 9.09 with respect to 

any such Claim, dispute, or other matter (except any which 

have been waived by the making or acceptance of final 

payment as provided in paragraph 14.07) will be a condition 

precedent to any exercise by OWNER or CONTRACTOR of 

such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under 

the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect 

of any such Claim, dispute, or other matter. 

9.10 Limitations on ENGINEER’s Authority and Responsibilities 

A. Neither ENGINEER’s authority or responsibility 

under this Article 9 or under any other provision of the 

Contract Documents nor any decision made by ENGINEER 

in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority 

or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or performance 

of any authority or responsibility by ENGINEER shall create, 

impose, or give rise to any duty in contract, tort, or otherwise 

owed by ENGINEER to CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, 

any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or to any surety 

for or employee or agent of any of them. 

B. ENGINEER will not supervise, direct, control, or 

have authority over or be responsible for CONTRACTOR’s 

means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of 

construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident 

thereto, or for any failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with 

Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the 

Work. ENGINEER will not be responsible for 

CONTRACTOR’s failure to perform the Work in accordance 

with the Contract Documents. 

C. ENGINEER will not be responsible for the acts or 

omissions of CONTRACTOR or of any Subcontractor, any 

Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any 

of the Work. 

D. ENGINEER’s review of the final Application for 

Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance 

and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, 

Bonds, certificates of inspection, tests and approvals, and 

other documentation required to be delivered by paragraph 

14.07.A will only be to determine generally that their content 

complies with the requirements of, and in the case of 

certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals that the results 

certified indicate compliance with, the Contract Documents. 

E. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set 

forth in this paragraph 9.10 shall also apply to ENGINEER’s 

Consultants, Resident Project Representative, and assistants. 

ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS 

10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work 

A. Without invalidating the Agreement and without 

notice to any surety, OWNER may, at any time or from time 

to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work by 

a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change 

Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, 

CONTRACTOR shall promptly proceed with the Work 

involved which will be performed under the applicable 

conditions of the Contract Documents (except as otherwise 

specifically provided). 

B. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree 

on entitlement to, or on the amount or extent, if any, of an 

adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, 

00700 - 29

that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change 

Directive, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in 

paragraph 10.05. 

10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work 

A. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to an increase 

in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times 

with respect to any work performed that is not required by the 

Contract Documents as amended, modified, or supplemented 

as provided in paragraph 3.04, except in the case of an emergency 

as provided in paragraph 6.16 or in the case of 

uncovering Work as provided in paragraph 13.04.B. 

10.03 Execution of Change Orders 

A. OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall execute 

appropriate Change Orders recommended by ENGINEER (or 

Written Amendments) covering: 

1. changes in the Work which are: (i) ordered by 

OWNER pursuant to paragraph 10.01.A, (ii) required 

because of acceptance of defective Work under paragraph 

13.08.A or OWNER’s correction of defective Work 

under paragraph 13.09, or (iii) agreed to by the parties; 

2. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times 

which are agreed to by the parties, including any 

undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually 

performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; 

and 

3. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times 

which embody the substance of any written decision 

rendered by ENGINEER pursuant to paragraph 10.05; 

provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change 

Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in 

accordance with the provisions of the Contract 

Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but 

during any such appeal, CONTRACTOR shall carry on 

the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as 

provided in paragraph 6.18.A. 

10.04 Notification to Surety 

A. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of 

the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents 

(including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract 

Times) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given 

to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be 

CONTRACTOR’s responsibility. The amount of each 

applicable Bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of any 

such change. 

10.05 Claims and Disputes 

A. Notice: Written notice stating the general nature of 

each Claim, dispute, or other matter shall be delivered by the 

claimant to ENGINEER and the other party to the Contract 

promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of 

the event giving rise thereto. Notice of the amount or extent 

of the Claim, dispute, or other matter with supporting data 

shall be delivered to the ENGINEER and the other party to 

the Contract within 60 days after the start of such event 

(unless ENGINEER allows additional time for claimant to 

submit additional or more accurate data in support of such 

Claim, dispute, or other matter). A Claim for an adjustment 

in Contract Price shall be prepared in accordance with the 

provisions of paragraph 12.01.B. A Claim for an adjustment 

in Contract Time shall be prepared in accordance with the 

provisions of paragraph 12.02.B. Each Claim shall be accompanied 

by claimant's written statement that the adjustment 

claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant 

believes it is entitled as a result of said event. The opposing 

party shall submit any response to ENGINEER and the 

claimant within 30 days after receipt of the claimant’s last 

submittal (unless ENGINEER allows additional time). 

B. ENGINEER’s Decision: ENGINEER will render a 

formal decision in writing within 30 days after receipt of the 

last submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the 

opposing party, if any. ENGINEER’s written decision on 

such Claim, dispute, or other matter will be final and binding 

upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR unless: 

1. an appeal from ENGINEER’s decision is taken 

within the time limits and in accordance with the dispute 

resolution procedures set forth in Article 16; or 

2. if no such dispute resolution procedures have 

been set forth in Article 16, a written notice of intention 

to appeal from ENGINEER’s written decision is 

delivered by OWNER or CONTRACTOR to the other 

and to ENGINEER within 30 days after the date of such 

decision, and a formal proceeding is instituted by the 

appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction 

within 60 days after the date of such decision or within 

60 days after Substantial Completion, whichever is later 

(unless otherwise agreed in writing by OWNER and 

CONTRACTOR), to exercise such rights or remedies as 

the appealing party may have with respect to such Claim, 

dispute, or other matter in accordance with applicable 

Laws and Regulations. 

C. If ENGINEER does not render a formal decision in 

writing within the time stated in paragraph 10.05.B, a 

decision denying the Claim in its entirety shall be deemed to 

have been issued 31 days after receipt of the last submittal of 

00700 - 30

the claimant or the last submittal of the opposing party, if 

any. 

D. No Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price or 

Contract Times (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted 

in accordance with this paragraph 10.05. 

ARTICLE 11 - COST OF THE WORK; CASH 

ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 

11.01 Cost of the Work 

A. Costs Included: The term Cost of the Work means 

the sum of all costs necessarily incurred and paid by CON- 

TRACTOR in the proper performance of the Work. When 

the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a 

Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on 

the basis of Cost of the Work, the costs to be reimbursed to 

CONTRACTOR will be only those additional or incremental 

costs required because of the change in the Work or because 

of the event giving rise to the Claim. Except as otherwise 

may be agreed to in writing by OWNER, such costs shall be 

in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of 

the Project, shall include only the following items, and shall 

not include any of the costs itemized in paragraph 11.01.B. 

1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ 

of CONTRACTOR in the performance of the Work 

under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by 

OWNER and CONTRACTOR. Such employees shall 

include without limitation superintendents, foremen, and 

other personnel employed full time at the Site. Payroll 

costs for employees not employed full time on the Work 

shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on 

the Work. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited 

to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, 

which shall include social security contributions, unemployment, 

excise, and payroll taxes, workers’ 

compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, 

sick leave, vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto. 

The expenses of performing Work outside of regular 

working hours, on Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, 

shall be included in the above to the extent authorized by 

OWNER. 

2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished 

and incorporated in the Work, including costs of 

transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers’ field 

services required in connection therewith. All cash 

discounts shall accrue to CONTRACTOR unless 

OWNER deposits funds with CONTRACTOR with 

which to make payments, in which case the cash 

discounts shall accrue to OWNER. All trade discounts, 

rebates and refunds and returns from sale of surplus 

materials and equipment shall accrue to OWNER, and 

CONTRACTOR shall make provisions so that they may 

be obtained. 

3. Payments made by CONTRACTOR to 

Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. 

If required by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall obtain 

competitive bids from subcontractors acceptable to 

OWNER and CONTRACTOR and shall deliver such 

bids to OWNER, who will then determine, with the 

advice of ENGINEER, which bids, if any, will be 

acceptable. If any subcontract provides that the 

Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the 

Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor’s Cost of the Work 

and fee shall be determined in the same manner as 

CONTRACTOR’s Cost of the Work and fee as provided 

in this paragraph 11.01. 

4. Costs of special consultants (including but not 

limited to engineers, architects, testing laboratories, 

surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed for 

services specifically related to the Work. 

5. Supplemental costs including the following: 

a. The proportion of necessary transportation, 

travel, and subsistence expenses of 

CONTRACTOR’s employees incurred in discharge 

of duties connected with the Work. 

b. Cost, including transportation and maintenance, 

of all materials, supplies, equipment, 

machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities 

at the Site, and hand tools not owned by the 

workers, which are consumed in the performance of 

the Work, and cost, less market value, of such items 

used but not consumed which remain the property of 

CONTRACTOR. 

c. Rentals of all construction equipment and 

machinery, and the parts thereof whether rented 

from CONTRACTOR or others in accordance with 

rental agreements approved by OWNER with the 

advice of ENGINEER, and the costs of 

transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, 

dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs 

shall be in accordance with the terms of said rental 

agreements. The rental of any such equipment, machinery, 

or parts shall cease when the use thereof is 

no longer necessary for the Work. 

d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar 

taxes related to the Work, and for which CON- 

00700 - 31

TRACTOR is liable, imposed by Laws and Regulations. 

e. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence 

of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, or 

anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of 

them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, 

and royalty payments and fees for permits and 

licenses. 

f. Losses and damages (and related expenses) 

caused by damage to the Work, not compensated by 

insurance or otherwise, sustained by 

CONTRACTOR in connection with the performance 

of the Work (except losses and damages within the 

deductible amounts of property insurance established 

in accordance with paragraph 5.06.D), provided 

such losses and damages have resulted from causes 

other than the negligence of CONTRACTOR, any 

Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly 

employed by any of them or for whose acts any of 

them may be liable. Such losses shall include 

settlements made with the written consent and 

approval of OWNER. No such losses, damages, and 

expenses shall be included in the Cost of the Work 

for the purpose of determining CONTRACTOR’s 

fee. 

g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary 

facilities at the Site. 

h. Minor expenses such as telegrams, long 

distance telephone calls, telephone service at the 

Site, expressage, and similar petty cash items in 

connection with the Work. 

i. When the Cost of the Work is used to 

determine the value of a Change Order or of a 

Claim, the cost of premiums for additional Bonds 

and insurance required because of the changes in the 

Work or caused by the event giving rise to the 

Claim. 

j. When all the Work is performed on the 

basis of cost-plus, the costs of premiums for all 

Bonds and insurance CONTRACTOR is required by 

the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain. 

B. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work shall not 

include any of the following items: 

1. Payroll costs and other compensation of 

CONTRACTOR’s officers, executives, principals (of 

partnerships and sole proprietorships), general managers, 

engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, 

accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, 

timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed 

by CONTRACTOR, whether at the Site or in 

CONTRACTOR’s principal or branch office for general 

administration of the Work and not specifically included 

in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred 

to in paragraph 11.01.A.1 or specifically covered by 

paragraph 11.01.A.4, all of which are to be considered 

administrative costs covered by the CONTRACTOR’s 

fee. 

2. Expenses of CONTRACTOR’s principal and 

branch offices other than CONTRACTOR’s office at the 

Site. 

3. Any part of CONTRACTOR’s capital expenses, 

including interest on CONTRACTOR’s capital employed 

for the Work and charges against CONTRACTOR for 

delinquent payments. 

4. Costs due to the negligence of CONTRACTOR, 

any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly 

employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them 

may be liable, including but not limited to, the correction 

of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment 

wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to 

property. 

5. Other overhead or general expense costs of any 

kind and the costs of any item not specifically and 

expressly included in paragraphs 11.01.A and 11.01.B. 

C. CONTRACTOR’s Fee: When all the Work is 

performed on the basis of cost-plus, CONTRACTOR’s fee 

shall be determined as set forth in the Agreement. When the 

value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a 

Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on 

the basis of Cost of the Work, CONTRACTOR’s fee shall be 

determined as set forth in paragraph 12.01.C. 

D. Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the Work for 

any purpose is to be determined pursuant to paragraphs 

11.01.A and 11.01.B, CONTRACTOR will establish and 

maintain records thereof in accordance with generally 

accepted accounting practices and submit in a form acceptable 

to ENGINEER an itemized cost breakdown together with 

supporting data. 

11.02 Cash Allowances 

A. It is understood that CONTRACTOR has included 

in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract 

Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be 

performed for such sums as may be acceptable to OWNER 

and ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR agrees that: 

00700 - 32

1. the allowances include the cost to 

CONTRACTOR (less any applicable trade discounts) of 

materials and equipment required by the allowances to be 

delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and 

2. CONTRACTOR’s costs for unloading and 

handling on the Site, labor, installation costs, overhead, 

profit, and other expenses contemplated for the 

allowances have been included in the Contract Price and 

not in the allowances, and no demand for additional 

payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. 

B. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order 

will be issued as recommended by ENGINEER to reflect 

actual amounts due CONTRACTOR on account of Work 

covered by allowances, and the Contract Price shall be 

correspondingly adjusted. 

11.03 Unit Price Work 

A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or 

part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the 

Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price 

Work an amount equal to the sum of the unit price for each 

separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the 

estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. 

The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work 

are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of 

comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. 

Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of 

Unit Price Work performed by CONTRACTOR will be made 

by ENGINEER subject to the provisions of paragraph 9.08. 

B. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount 

considered by CONTRACTOR to be adequate to cover 

CONTRACTOR’s overhead and profit for each separately 

identified item. 

C. OWNER or CONTRACTOR may make a Claim for 

an adjustment in the Contract Price in accordance with 

paragraph 10.05 if: 

1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work 

performed by CONTRACTOR differs materially and 

significantly from the estimated quantity of such item 

indicated in the Agreement; and 

2. there is no corresponding adjustment with 

respect any other item of Work; and 

3. if CONTRACTOR believes that 

CONTRACTOR is entitled to an increase in Contract 

Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or 

OWNER believes that OWNER is entitled to a decrease 

in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as 

to the amount of any such increase or decrease. 

ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; 

CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES 

12.01 Change of Contract Price 

A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a 

Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any Claim for 

an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on written 

notice submitted by the party making the Claim to the 

ENGINEER and the other party to the Contract in accordance 

with the provisions of paragraph 10.05. 

B. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order 

or of any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will 

be determined as follows: 

1. where the Work involved is covered by unit 

prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application 

of such unit prices to the quantities of the items 

involved (subject to the provisions of paragraph 11.03 ); 

or 

2. where the Work involved is not covered by unit 

prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a 

mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an 

allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in 

accordance with paragraph 12.01.C.2); or 

3. where the Work involved is not covered by unit 

prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement 

to a lump sum is not reached under paragraph 

12.01.B.2, on the basis of the Cost of the Work 

(determined as provided in paragraph 11.01) plus a 

CONTRACTOR’s fee for overhead and profit (determined 

as provided in paragraph 12.01.C). 

C. CONTRACTOR’s Fee: The CONTRACTOR’s fee 

for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows: 

1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 

2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based 

on the following percentages of the various portions of 

the Cost of the Work: 

a. for costs incurred under paragraphs 

11.01.A.1 and 11.01.A.2, the CONTRACTOR’s fee 

shall be 15 percent; 

b. for costs incurred under paragraph 

11.01.A.3, the CONTRACTOR’s fee shall be five 

percent; 

00700 - 33

c. where one or more tiers of subcontracts are 

on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and no 

fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of paragraph 

12.01.C.2.a is that the Subcontractor who actually 

performs the Work, at whatever tier, will be paid a 

fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred by such 

Subcontractor under paragraphs 11.01.A.1 and 

11.01.A.2 and that any higher tier Subcontractor and 

CONTRACTOR will each be paid a fee of five 

percent of the amount paid to the next lower tier 

Subcontractor; 

d. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs 

itemized under paragraphs 11.01.A.4, 11.01.A.5, 

and 11.01.B; 

e. the amount of credit to be allowed by 

CONTRACTOR to OWNER for any change which 

results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of 

the actual net decrease in cost plus a deduction in 

CONTRACTOR’s fee by an amount equal to five 

percent of such net decrease; and 

f. when both additions and credits are involved 

in any one change, the adjustment in 

CONTRACTOR’s fee shall be computed on the 

basis of the net change in accordance with paragraphs 

12.01.C.2.a through 12.01.C.2.e, inclusive. 

12.02 Change of Contract Times 

A. The Contract Times (or Milestones) may only be 

changed by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. 

Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times (or 

Milestones) shall be based on written notice submitted by the 

party making the claim to the ENGINEER and the other party 

to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of 


B. Any adjustment of the Contract Times (or 

Milestones) covered by a Change Order or of any Claim for 

an adjustment in the Contract Times (or Milestones) will be 

determined in accordance with the provisions of this 

Article 12. 

12.03 Delays Beyond CONTRACTOR’s Control 

A. Where CONTRACTOR is prevented from 

completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times 

(or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of 

CONTRACTOR, the Contract Times (or Milestones) will be 

extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such 

delay if a Claim is made therefor as provided in paragraph 

12.02.A. Delays beyond the control of CONTRACTOR shall 

include, but not be limited to, acts or neglect by OWNER, acts 

or neglect of utility owners or other contractors performing 

other work as contemplated by Article 7, fires, floods, 

epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, or acts of God. 

12.04 Delays Within CONTRACTOR’s Control 

A. The Contract Times (or Milestones) will not be 

extended due to delays within the control of CONTRACTOR. 

Delays attributable to and within the control of a 

Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within 

the control of CONTRACTOR. 

12.05 Delays Beyond OWNER’s and CONTRACTOR’s 

Control 

A. Where CONTRACTOR is prevented from completing 

any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or 

Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both OWNER 

and CONTRACTOR, an extension of the Contract Times (or 

Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such 

delay shall be CONTRACTOR’s sole and exclusive remedy 

for such delay. 

12.06 Delay Damages 

A. In no event shall OWNER or ENGINEER be liable 

to CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any 

other person or organization, or to any surety for or employee 

or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or 

resulting from: 

1. delays caused by or within the control of CON- 

TRACTOR; or 

2. delays beyond the control of both OWNER and 

CONTRACTOR including but not limited to fires, 

floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of 

God, or acts or neglect by utility owners or other 

contractors performing other work as contemplated by 

Article 7. 

B. Nothing in this paragraph 12.06 bars a change in 

Contract Price pursuant to this Article 12 to compensate 

CONTRACTOR due to delay, interference, or disruption 

directly attributable to actions or inactions of OWNER or 

anyone for whom OWNER is responsible. 

ARTICLE 13 - TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; 

CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF 

DEFECTIVE WORK 

00700 - 34

13.01 Notice of Defects 

A. Prompt notice of all defective Work of which 

OWNER or ENGINEER has actual knowledge will be given 

to CONTRACTOR. All defective Work may be rejected, 

corrected, or accepted as provided in this Article 13. 

13.02 Access to Work 

A. OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER’s Consultants, 

other representatives and personnel of OWNER, independent 

testing laboratories, and governmental agencies with 

jurisdictional interests will have access to the Site and the 

Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspecting, 

and testing. CONTRACTOR shall provide them proper and 

safe conditions for such access and advise them of 

CONTRACTOR’s Site safety procedures and programs so 

that they may comply therewith as applicable. 

13.03 Tests and Inspections 

A. CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER timely 

notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, 

tests, or approvals and shall cooperate with inspection and 

testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. 

B. OWNER shall employ and pay for the services of an 

independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, 

tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents 

except: 

1. for inspections, tests, or approvals covered by 

paragraphs 13.03.C and 13.03.D below; 

2. that costs incurred in connection with tests or 

inspections conducted pursuant to paragraph 13.04.B 

shall be paid as provided in said paragraph 13.04.B; and 

3. as otherwise specifically provided in the Contract 

Documents. 

C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having 

jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to 

be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other 

representative of such public body, CONTRACTOR shall 

assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such 

inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection 

therewith, and furnish ENGINEER the required certificates 

of inspection or approval. 

D. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for arranging 

and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any 

inspections, tests, or approvals required for OWNER’s and 

ENGINEER’s acceptance of materials or equipment to be 

incorporated in the Work; or acceptance of materials, mix 

designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to 

CONTRACTOR’s purchase thereof for incorporation in the 

Work. Such inspections, tests, or approvals shall be 

performed by organizations acceptable to OWNER and 

ENGINEER. 

E. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be 

inspected, tested, or approved is covered by CONTRACTOR 

without written concurrence of ENGINEER, it must, if 

requested by ENGINEER, be uncovered for observation. 

F. Uncovering Work as provided in paragraph 13.03.E 

shall be at CONTRACTOR’s expense unless CONTRACTOR 

has given ENGINEER timely notice of CONTRACTOR’s 

intention to cover the same and ENGINEER has not acted 

with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 

13.04 Uncovering Work 

A. If any Work is covered contrary to the written 

request of ENGINEER, it must, if requested by ENGINEER, 

be uncovered for ENGINEER’s observation and replaced at 

CONTRACTOR’s expense. 

B. If ENGINEER considers it necessary or advisable 

that covered Work be observed by ENGINEER or inspected 

or tested by others, CONTRACTOR, at ENGINEER’s 

request, shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available 

for observation, inspection, or testing as ENGINEER may 

require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all 

necessary labor, material, and equipment. If it is found that 

such Work is defective, CONTRACTOR shall pay all Claims, 

costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all 

fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other 


resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such uncovering, 

exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of 

satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not 

limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); 

and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in 

the Contract Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the 

amount thereof, OWNER may make a Claim therefor as 

provided in paragraph 10.05. If, however, such Work is not 

found to be defective, CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an 

increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract 

Times (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such 

uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, 

replacement, and reconstruction. If the parties are unable to 

agree as to the amount or extent thereof, CONTRACTOR 

may make a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. 

13.05 OWNER May Stop the Work 

A. If the Work is defective, or CONTRACTOR fails to 

supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or 

00700 - 35

equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that 

the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, 

OWNER may order CONTRACTOR to stop the Work, or any 

portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; 

however, this right of OWNER to stop the Work shall 

not give rise to any duty on the part of OWNER to exercise 

this right for the benefit of CONTRACTOR, any 

Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or 

any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them. 

13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work 

A. CONTRACTOR shall correct all defective Work, 

whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if the 

Work has been rejected by ENGINEER, remove it from the 

Project and replace it with Work that is not defective. 

CONTRACTOR shall pay all Claims, costs, losses, and 




arising out of or relating to such correction or removal 

(including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement 

of work of others). 

13.07 Correction Period 

A. If within one year after the date of Substantial 

Completion or such longer period of time as may be 

prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any 

applicable special guarantee required by the Contract 

Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract 

Documents, any Work is found to be defective, or if the repair 

of any damages to the land or areas made available for 

CONTRACTOR’s use by OWNER or permitted by Laws and 

Regulations as contemplated in paragraph 6.11.A is found to 

be defective, CONTRACTOR shall promptly, without cost to 

OWNER and in accordance with OWNER’s written 

instructions: (i) repair such defective land or areas, or (ii) 

correct such defective Work or, if the defective Work has been 

rejected by OWNER, remove it from the Project and replace 

it with Work that is not defective, and (iii) satisfactorily 

correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other 

Work, to the work of others or other land or areas resulting 

therefrom. If CONTRACTOR does not promptly comply 

with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where 

delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, OWNER 

may have the defective Work corrected or repaired or may 

have the rejected Work removed and replaced, and all Claims, 




resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction 

or repair or such removal and replacement (including but not 

limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) 

will be paid by CONTRACTOR. 

B. In special circumstances where a particular item of 

equipment is placed in continuous service before Substantial 

Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that 

item may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the 

Specifications or by Written Amendment. 

C. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work 

resulting therefrom) has been corrected or removed and 

replaced under this paragraph 13.07, the correction period 

hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an 

additional period of one year after such correction or removal 

and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. 

D. CONTRACTOR’s obligations under this paragraph 

13.07 are in addition to any other obligation or warranty. The 

provisions of this paragraph 13.07 shall not be construed as 

a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable 

statute of limitation or repose. 

13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work 

A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and 

replacement of defective Work, OWNER (and, prior to 

ENGINEER’s recommendation of final payment, 

ENGINEER) prefers to accept it, OWNER may do so. 

CONTRACTOR shall pay all Claims, costs, losses, and 




attributable to OWNER’s evaluation of and determination to 

accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by 

ENGINEER as to reasonableness) and the diminished value 

of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by 

CONTRACTOR pursuant to this sentence. If any such 

acceptance occurs prior to ENGINEER’s recommendation of 

final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating 

the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with 

respect to the Work, and OWNER shall be entitled to an 

appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the 

diminished value of Work so accepted. If the parties are 

unable to agree as to the amount thereof, OWNER may make 

a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. If the 

acceptance occurs after such recommendation, an appropriate 

amount will be paid by CONTRACTOR to OWNER. 

13.09 OWNER May Correct Defective Work 

A. If CONTRACTOR fails within a reasonable time 

after written notice from ENGINEER to correct defective 

Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by 

ENGINEER in accordance with paragraph 13.06.A, or if 

CONTRACTOR fails to perform the Work in accordance 

with the Contract Documents, or if CONTRACTOR fails to 

comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, 

00700 - 36

OWNER may, after seven days written notice to 

CONTRACTOR, correct and remedy any such deficiency. 

B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this 

paragraph, OWNER shall proceed expeditiously. In 

connection with such corrective and remedial action, 

OWNER may exclude CONTRACTOR from all or part of the 

Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend 

CONTRACTOR’s services related thereto, take possession of 

CONTRACTOR’s tools, appliances, construction equipment 

and machinery at the Site, and incorporate in the Work all 

materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which 

OWNER has paid CONTRACTOR but which are stored 

elsewhere. CONTRACTOR shall allow OWNER, OWNER’s 

representatives, agents and employees, OWNER’s other 

contractors, and ENGINEER and ENGINEER’s Consultants 

access to the Site to enable OWNER to exercise the rights and 

remedies under this paragraph. 

C. All Claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but 

not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, 

attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration 

or other dispute resolution costs) incurred or sustained by 

OWNER in exercising the rights and remedies under this 

paragraph 13.09 will be charged against CONTRACTOR, 

and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the 

necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect 

to the Work; and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate 

decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable to 

agree as to the amount of the adjustment, OWNER may make 

a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. Such 

claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be 

limited to all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others 

destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement 

of CONTRACTOR’s defective Work. 

D. CONTRACTOR shall not be allowed an extension 

of the Contract Times (or Milestones) because of any delay in 

the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by 

OWNER of OWNER’s rights and remedies under this 


ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND 

COMPLETION 

14.01 Schedule of Values 

A. The schedule of values established as provided in 

paragraph 2.07.A will serve as the basis for progress 

payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application 

for Payment acceptable to ENGINEER. Progress payments 

on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number 

of units completed. 

14.02 Progress Payments 

A. Applications for Payments 

1. At least 20 days before the date established for 

each progress payment (but not more often than once a 

month), CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for 

review an Application for Payment filled out and signed 

by CONTRACTOR covering the Work completed as of 

the date of the Application and accompanied by such 

supporting documentation as is required by the Contract 

Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of 

materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work 

but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another 

location agreed to in writing, the Application for 

Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, 

invoice, or other documentation warranting that 

OWNER has received the materials and equipment free 

and clear of all Liens and evidence that the materials and 

equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance 

or other arrangements to protect OWNER’s interest 

therein, all of which must be satisfactory to OWNER. 

2. Beginning with the second Application for 

Payment, each Application shall include an affidavit of 

CONTRACTOR stating that all previous progress 

payments received on account of the Work have been 

applied on account to discharge CONTRACTOR’s 

legitimate obligations associated with prior Applications 

for Payment. 

3. The amount of retainage with respect to progress 

payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement. 

B. Review of Applications 

1. ENGINEER will, within 10 days after receipt of 

each Application for Payment, either indicate in writing 

a recommendation of payment and present the 

Application to OWNER or return the Application to 

CONTRACTOR indicating in writing ENGINEER’s 

reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the 

latter case, CONTRACTOR may make the necessary 

corrections and resubmit the Application. 

2. ENGINEER’s recommendation of any payment 

requested in an Application for Payment will constitute 

a representation by ENGINEER to OWNER, based on 

ENGINEER’s observations on the Site of the executed 

Work as an experienced and qualified design professional 

and on ENGINEER's review of the Application for 

Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that 

to the best of ENGINEER’s knowledge, information and 

belief: 

00700 - 37

a. the Work has progressed to the point 

indicated; 

b. the quality of the Work is generally in 

accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to 

an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole 

prior to or upon Substantial Completion, to the 

results of any subsequent tests called for in the 

Contract Documents, to a final determination of 

quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work 

under paragraph 9.08, and to any other 

qualifications stated in the recommendation); and 

c. the conditions precedent to 

CONTRACTOR’s being entitled to such payment 

appear to have been fulfilled in so far as it is 

ENGINEER’s responsibility to observe the Work. 

3. By recommending any such payment ENGI- 

NEER will not thereby be deemed to have represented 

that: (i) inspections made to check the quality or the 

quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been 

exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in 

progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work 

beyond the responsibilities specifically assigned to 

ENGINEER in the Contract Documents; or (ii) that there 

may not be other matters or issues between the parties 

that might entitle CONTRACTOR to be paid additionally 

by OWNER or entitle OWNER to withhold payment 

to CONTRACTOR. 

4. Neither ENGINEER’s review of 

CONTRACTOR’s Work for the purposes of recommending 

payments nor ENGINEER’s recommendation 

of any payment, including final payment, will impose 

responsibility on ENGINEER to supervise, direct, or 

control the Work or for the means, methods, techniques, 

sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety 

precautions and programs incident thereto, or for CON- 

TRACTOR’s failure to comply with Laws and Regulations 

applicable to CONTRACTOR’s performance of 

the Work. Additionally, said review or recommendation 

will not impose responsibility on ENGINEER to make 

any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes 

CONTRACTOR has used the moneys paid on account of 

the Contract Price, or to determine that title to any of the 

Work, materials, or equipment has passed to OWNER 

free and clear of any Liens. 

5. ENGINEER may refuse to recommend the whole 

or any part of any payment if, in ENGINEER’s opinion, 

it would be incorrect to make the representations to 

OWNER referred to in paragraph 14.02.B.2. ENGI- 

NEER may also refuse to recommend any such payment 

or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the 

results of subsequent inspections or tests, revise or revoke 

any such payment recommendation previously made, to 

such extent as may be necessary in ENGINEER’s 

opinion to protect OWNER from loss because: 

a. the Work is defective, or completed Work 

has been damaged, requiring correction or replacement; 

b. the Contract Price has been reduced by 

Written Amendment or Change Orders; 

c. OWNER has been required to correct defective 

Work or complete Work in accordance with 

paragraph 13.09; or 

d. ENGINEER has actual knowledge of the 

occurrence of any of the events enumerated in paragraph 

15.02.A. 

C. Payment Becomes Due 

1. Ten days after presentation of the Application 

for Payment to OWNER with ENGINEER’s recommendation, 

the amount recommended will (subject to the 

provisions of paragraph 14.02.D) become due, and when 

due will be paid by OWNER to CONTRACTOR. 

D. Reduction in Payment 

1. OWNER may refuse to make payment of the full 

amount recommended by ENGINEER because: 

a. claims have been made against OWNER on 

account of CONTRACTOR’s performance or furnishing 

of the Work; 

b. Liens have been filed in connection with the 

Work, except where CONTRACTOR has delivered 

a specific Bond satisfactory to OWNER to secure the 

satisfaction and discharge of such Liens; 

c. there are other items entitling OWNER to a 

set-off against the amount recommended; or 

d. OWNER has actual knowledge of the occurrence 

of any of the events enumerated in paragraphs 

14.02.B.5.a through 14.02.B.5.c or paragraph 

15.02.A. 

2. If OWNER refuses to make payment of the full 

amount recommended by ENGINEER, OWNER must 

give CONTRACTOR immediate written notice (with a 

copy to ENGINEER) stating the reasons for such action 

and promptly pay CONTRACTOR any amount 

00700 - 38

emaining after deduction of the amount so withheld. 

OWNER shall promptly pay CONTRACTOR the 

amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to 

by OWNER and CONTRACTOR, when CONTRAC- 

TOR corrects to OWNER’s satisfaction the reasons for 

such action. 

3. If it is subsequently determined that OWNER’s 

refusal of payment was not justified, the amount 

wrongfully withheld shall be treated as an amount due as 

determined by paragraph 14.02.C.1. 

14.03 CONTRACTOR’s Warranty of Title 

A. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees that title 

to all Work, materials, and equipment covered by any 

Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project 

or not, will pass to OWNER no later than the time of payment 

free and clear of all Liens. 

14.04 Substantial Completion 

A. When CONTRACTOR considers the entire Work 

ready for its intended use CONTRACTOR shall notify 

OWNER and ENGINEER in writing that the entire Work is 

substantially complete (except for items specifically listed by 

CONTRACTOR as incomplete) and request that ENGINEER 

issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. Promptly 

thereafter, OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and ENGINEER shall 

make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of 

completion. If ENGINEER does not consider the Work 

substantially complete, ENGINEER will notify 

CONTRACTOR in writing giving the reasons therefor. If 

ENGINEER considers the Work substantially complete, 

ENGINEER will prepare and deliver to OWNER a tentative 

certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date 

of Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the 

certificate a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected 

before final payment. OWNER shall have seven days after 

receipt of the tentative certificate during which to make 

written objection to ENGINEER as to any provisions of the 

certificate or attached list. If, after considering such 

objections, ENGINEER concludes that the Work is not 

substantially complete, ENGINEER will within 14 days after 

submission of the tentative certificate to OWNER notify 

CONTRACTOR in writing, stating the reasons therefor. If, 

after consideration of OWNER’s objections, ENGINEER 

considers the Work substantially complete, ENGINEER will 

within said 14 days execute and deliver to OWNER and 

CONTRACTOR a definitive certificate of Substantial 

Completion (with a revised tentative list of items to be 

completed or corrected) reflecting such changes from the 

tentative certificate as ENGINEER believes justified after 

consideration of any objections from OWNER. At the time of 

delivery of the tentative certificate of Substantial Completion 

ENGINEER will deliver to OWNER and CONTRACTOR a 

written recommendation as to division of responsibilities 

pending final payment between OWNER and 

CONTRACTOR with respect to security, operation, safety, 

and protection of the Work, maintenance, heat, utilities, 

insurance, and warranties and guarantees. Unless OWNER 

and CONTRACTOR agree otherwise in writing and so 

inform ENGINEER in writing prior to ENGINEER’s issuing 

the definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, 

ENGINEER’s aforesaid recommendation will be binding on 

OWNER and CONTRACTOR until final payment. 

B. OWNER shall have the right to exclude 

CONTRACTOR from the Site after the date of Substantial 

Completion, but OWNER shall allow CONTRACTOR 

reasonable access to complete or correct items on the tentative 

list. 

14.05 Partial Utilization 

A. Use by OWNER at OWNER’s option of any 

substantially completed part of the Work which has 

specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or 

which OWNER, ENGINEER, and CONTRACTOR agree 

constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the 

Work that can be used by OWNER for its intended purpose 

without significant interference with CONTRACTOR’s 

performance of the remainder of the Work, may be 

accomplished prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work 

subject to the following conditions. 

1. OWNER at any time may request CON- 

TRACTOR in writing to permit OWNER to use any such 

part of the Work which OWNER believes to be ready for 

its intended use and substantially complete. If 

CONTRACTOR agrees that such part of the Work is 

substantially complete, CONTRACTOR will certify to 

OWNER and ENGINEER that such part of the Work is 

substantially complete and request ENGINEER to issue 

a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the 

Work. CONTRACTOR at any time may notify OWNER 

and ENGINEER in writing that CONTRACTOR 

considers any such part of the Work ready for its 

intended use and substantially complete and request 

ENGINEER to issue a certificate of Substantial 

Completion for that part of the Work. Within a 

reasonable time after either such request, OWNER, 

CONTRACTOR, and ENGINEER shall make an 

inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status 

of completion. If ENGINEER does not consider that part 

of the Work to be substantially complete, ENGINEER 

will notify OWNER and CONTRACTOR in writing 

giving the reasons therefor. If ENGINEER considers 

that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the 

provisions of paragraph 14.04 will apply with respect to 

00700 - 39

certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the 

Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof 

and access thereto. 

2. No occupancy or separate operation of part of the 

Work may occur prior to compliance with the 

requirements of paragraph 5.10 regarding property 

insurance. 

14.06 Final Inspection 

A. Upon written notice from CONTRACTOR that the 

entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, 

ENGINEER will promptly make a final inspection with 

OWNER and CONTRACTOR and will notify CON- 

TRACTOR in writing of all particulars in which this 

inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. 

CONTRACTOR shall immediately take such measures as are 

necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 

14.07 Final Payment 

A. Application for Payment 

1. After CONTRACTOR has, in the opinion of 

ENGINEER, satisfactorily completed all corrections 

identified during the final inspection and has delivered, 

in accordance with the Contract Documents, all maintenance 

and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, 

Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance 

certificates of inspection, marked-up record documents 

(as provided in paragraph 6.12), and other documents, 

CONTRACTOR may make application for final payment 

following the procedure for progress payments. 

2. The final Application for Payment shall be 

accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (i) all 

documentation called for in the Contract Documents, 

including but not limited to the evidence of insurance 

required by subparagraph 5.04.B.7; (ii) consent of the 

surety, if any, to final payment; and (iii) complete and 

legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to 

OWNER) of all Lien rights arising out of or Liens filed 

in connection with the Work. 

3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens 

specified in paragraph 14.07.A.2 and as approved by 

OWNER, CONTRACTOR may furnish receipts or 

releases in full and an affidavit of CONTRACTOR that: 

(i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, 

material, and equipment for which a Lien could be filed; 

and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and 

other indebtedness connected with the Work for which 

OWNER or OWNER's property might in any way be 

responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any 

Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release 

or receipt in full, CONTRACTOR may furnish a Bond or 

other collateral satisfactory to OWNER to indemnify 

OWNER against any Lien. 

B. Review of Application and Acceptance 

1. If, on the basis of ENGINEER’s observation of 

the Work during construction and final inspection, and 

ENGINEER’s review of the final Application for 

Payment and accompanying documentation as required 

by the Contract Documents, ENGINEER is satisfied that 

the Work has been completed and CONTRACTOR’s 

other obligations under the Contract Documents have 

been fulfilled, ENGINEER will, within ten days after 

receipt of the final Application for Payment, indicate in 

writing ENGINEER’s recommendation of payment and 

present the Application for Payment to OWNER for 

payment. At the same time ENGINEER will also give 

written notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR that the 

Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of paragraph 

14.09. Otherwise, ENGINEER will return the 

Application for Payment to CONTRACTOR, indicating 

in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final 

payment, in which case CONTRACTOR shall make the 

necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for 

Payment. 

C. Payment Becomes Due 

1. Thirty days after the presentation to OWNER of 

the Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, 

the amount recommended by ENGINEER 

will become due and, when due, will be paid by OWNER 

to CONTRACTOR. 

14.08 Final Completion Delayed 

A. If, through no fault of CONTRACTOR, final 

completion of the Work is significantly delayed, and if 

ENGINEER so confirms, OWNER shall, upon receipt of 

CONTRACTOR’s final Application for Payment and 

recommendation of ENGINEER, and without terminating the 

Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion 

of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining 

balance to be held by OWNER for Work not fully completed 

or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the 

Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in 

paragraph 5.01, the written consent of the surety to the 

payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully 

completed and accepted shall be submitted by CON- 

TRACTOR to ENGINEER with the Application for such 

payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and 

conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not 

constitute a waiver of Claims. 

00700 - 40

14.09 Waiver of Claims 

A. The making and acceptance of final payment will 

constitute: 

1. a waiver of all Claims by OWNER against 

CONTRACTOR, except Claims arising from unsettled 

Liens, from defective Work appearing after final 

inspection pursuant to paragraph 14.06, from failure to 

comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any 

special guarantees specified therein, or from 

CONTRACTOR’s continuing obligations under the 

Contract Documents; and 

2. a waiver of all Claims by CONTRACTOR 

against OWNER other than those previously made in 

writing which are still unsettled. 

ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND 

TERMINATION 

15.01 OWNER May Suspend Work 

A. At any time and without cause, OWNER may 

suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not 

more than 90 consecutive days by notice in writing to CON- 

TRACTOR and ENGINEER which will fix the date on which 

Work will be resumed. CONTRACTOR shall resume the 

Work on the date so fixed. CONTRACTOR shall be allowed 

an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the 

Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such 

suspension if CONTRACTOR makes a Claim therefor as 

provided in paragraph 10.05. 

15.02 OWNER May Terminate for Cause 

A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following 

events will justify termination for cause: 

1. CONTRACTOR’s persistent failure to perform 

the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents 

(including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient 

skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or 

failure to adhere to the progress schedule established 

under paragraph 2.07 as adjusted from time to time 

pursuant to paragraph 6.04); 

2. CONTRACTOR’s disregard of Laws or Regulations 

of any public body having jurisdiction; 

3. CONTRACTOR’s disregard of the authority of 

ENGINEER; or 

4. CONTRACTOR’s violation in any substantial 

way of any provisions of the Contract Documents. 

B. If one or more of the events identified in paragraph 

15.02.A occur, OWNER may, after giving CONTRACTOR 

(and the surety, if any) seven days written notice, terminate 

the services of CONTRACTOR, exclude CONTRACTOR 

from the Site, and take possession of the Work and of all 

CONTRACTOR’s tools, appliances, construction equipment, 

and machinery at the Site, and use the same to the full extent 

they could be used by CONTRACTOR (without liability to 

CONTRACTOR for trespass or conversion), incorporate in 

the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for 

which OWNER has paid CONTRACTOR but which are 

stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as OWNER may deem 

expedient. In such case, CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled 

to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If 

the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, 




resolution costs) sustained by OWNER arising out of or 

relating to completing the Work, such excess will be paid to 

CONTRACTOR. If such claims, costs, losses, and damages 

exceed such unpaid balance, CONTRACTOR shall pay the 

difference to OWNER. Such claims, costs, losses, and 

damages incurred by OWNER will be reviewed by 

ENGINEER as to their reasonableness and, when so approved 

by ENGINEER, incorporated in a Change Order. When 

exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph 

OWNER shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for 

the Work performed. 

C. Where CONTRACTOR’s services have been so 

terminated by OWNER, the termination will not affect any 

rights or remedies of OWNER against CONTRACTOR then 

existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or 

payment of moneys due CONTRACTOR by OWNER will not 

release CONTRACTOR from liability. 

15.03 OWNER May Terminate For Convenience 

A. Upon seven days written notice to CONTRACTOR 

and ENGINEER, OWNER may, without cause and without 

prejudice to any other right or remedy of OWNER, elect to 

terminate the Contract. In such case, CONTRACTOR shall 

be paid (without duplication of any items): 

1. for completed and acceptable Work executed in 

accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the 

effective date of termination, including fair and 

reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; 

2. for expenses sustained prior to the effective date 

of termination in performing services and furnishing 

00700 - 41

labor, materials, or equipment as required by the 

Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted 

Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and 

profit on such expenses; 

3. for all claims, costs, losses, and damages 

(including but not limited to all fees and charges of 

engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals 


costs) incurred in settlement of terminated contracts 

with Subcontractors, Suppliers, and others; and 

4. for reasonable expenses directly attributable to 

termination. 

B. CONTRACTOR shall not be paid on account of loss 

of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss 

arising out of or resulting from such termination. 

15.04 CONTRACTOR May Stop Work or Terminate 

A. If, through no act or fault of CONTRACTOR, the 

Work is suspended for more than 90 consecutive days by 

OWNER or under an order of court or other public authority, 

or ENGINEER fails to act on any Application for Payment 

within 30 days after it is submitted, or OWNER fails for 30 

days to pay CONTRACTOR any sum finally determined to be 

due, then CONTRACTOR may, upon seven days written 

notice to OWNER and ENGINEER, and provided OWNER 

or ENGINEER do not remedy such suspension or failure 

within that time, terminate the Contract and recover from 

OWNER payment on the same terms as provided in 

paragraph 15.03. In lieu of terminating the Contract and 

without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if ENGINEER 

has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 

days after it is submitted, or OWNER has failed for 30 days 

to pay CONTRACTOR any sum finally determined to be due, 

CONTRACTOR may, seven days after written notice to 

OWNER and ENGINEER, stop the Work until payment is 

made of all such amounts due CONTRACTOR, including 

interest thereon. The provisions of this paragraph 15.04 are 

not intended to preclude CONTRACTOR from making a 

Claim under paragraph 10.05 for an adjustment in Contract 

Price or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damage 

directly attributable to CONTRACTOR’s stopping the Work 

as permitted by this paragraph. 

ARTICLE 16 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION 

16.01 Methods and Procedures 

method and procedure has been set forth, and subject to the 

provisions of paragraphs 9.09 and 10.05, OWNER and CON- 

TRACTOR may exercise such rights or remedies as either 

may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by 

Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute. 

ARTICLE 17 - MISCELLANEOUS 

17.01 Giving Notice 

A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents 

requires the giving of written notice, it will be deemed to have 

been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or 

to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for 

whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or 

certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address 

known to the giver of the notice. 

17.02 Computation of Times 

A. When any period of time is referred to in the 

Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to exclude 

the first and include the last day of such period. If the last 

day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a 

day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable 

jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation. 

17.03 Cumulative Remedies 

A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General 

Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder 

to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be 

construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and 

remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise 

imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special 

warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract 

Documents, and the provisions of this paragraph will be as 

effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents 

in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and 

remedy to which they apply. 

17.04 Survival of Obligations 

A. All representations, indemnifications, warranties, 

and guarantees made in, required by, or given in accordance 

with the Contract Documents, as well as all continuing 

obligations indicated in the Contract Documents, will survive 

final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or 

termination or completion of the Agreement. 

A. Dispute resolution methods and procedures, if any, 

shall be as set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. If no 

00700 - 42

17.05 Controlling Law 

A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the 

state in which the Project is located. 

00700 - 43

Supplementary Conditions 

(Revised by Garney)

00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 

The terms in the Supplementary Conditions will have the same meaning as in the General Conditions of 

the Construction Contract (EJCDC No. 1910‐8, 1996) 

SC‐1.01 Make the following modifications to 1.01 Defined Terms 

SC‐1.01 

Make the following modifications to 1.01 Defined Term 

A. Delete Paragraph 1.01 A. 5 entirely and insert the following in its place: 

“5. Bid ‐ The offer or proposal of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth 

the prices and schedule for the Work to be performed to the Construction Manager at 

Risk, including proposals submitted by the Construction Manager at Risk for selfperformed 

Work.” 

B. Delete Paragraph 1.01 A. 6. entirely and insert the following in its place: 

“6. Bidder ‐ The Subcontractor, Supplier, individual or entity that submits a bid directly to 

the Construction Manager at Risk.” 

C. Delete Paragraph 1.01 A. 15. entirely and insert the following in its place: 

“15. CMAR means Construction Manager at Risk 

D. Modify 1.01 A. 19. Add the following: 

“For this Agreement the Engineer is Freese Nichols. 

E. Add the following to 1.01 A. 20. 

The Engineer's Consultants are: 

1. Villalobos and Associates 

2. Gregory Geotechnical 

3. Foster Wheeler USA Corporation 

4. Gorrondona and Associates 

5. William Stackhouse 

F. Add a new paragraph 1.01 A. 52: 

“52. Construction Manager at Risk or CMAR – The individual or entity with whom 

Owner has entered into the Agreement. The term “CMAR” means the Construction 

Manager at Risk in these Contact Documents. 

Supplementary Conditions (Revised per Garney) 


Ward County Water Supply Expansion Project - Pump Stations 00 73 00 - 1 

12/28/2011

G. Add a new paragraph 1.01 A. 53: 

“53. Owner's Budget– The amounted budgeted by the Owner for the Construction of 

the Project, which is to include all fees paid to the Construction Manager for preconstruction, 

procurement and construction of the project. The Guaranteed Maximum 

Price cannot exceed the Owner's Budget unless Owner issues a Change Order to modify 

the Owner's Budget. 

H. Add a new paragraph 1.01 A. 54: 

“54. Guaranteed Maximum Price –.Total compensation which the Construction 

Manager will be paid for the construction of the project 

I. Add a new paragraph 1.01 A. 55: 

“55. Offeror – The individual or entity who submits a Proposal directly to Owner for 

providing Construction Manager at Risk services.” 

J. Add a new paragraph 1.01 A. 56: 

“56. Proposal– The offer or proposal of an Offeror submitted on the prescribed forms 

setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed. 

K. Add a new paragraph 1.01 A. 57: 

“57. Proposal Security – The financial security in the form of a bid bond provided by 

Offerors at the time the Proposal is submitted until Performance, Payment and other 

bonds required by the Contract document in the amount of 100% of the Owner's Budget 

or Guaranteed Maximum Price are provided. 

C. Add the following to 1.01 A.: 

58. Modification ‐ (a) Written Amendment; (b) Change Order; (c) Field Order; (d) Work 

Change Directive 

SC‐1.02 Make the following modifications to 1.02 Terminology. 

A. Add a new paragraph “B.2” as follows: 

"2. At no additional cost to Owner", "With no extra compensation to Bidder", "At Bidder's 

own expense", or similar words mean that the Bidder will perform or provide specified 

operation of work without any increase in the Contract Amount. It is understood that 




12/28/2011

the cost for performing all work is included in the amount bid and will be performed 

at no additional cost to the Owner unless specifically stated otherwise." 

B. Delete Paragraph C. Add the following: 

“C. Day 

1. A “calendar day” shall be a day of twenty‐four hours measured from midnight to 

the next midnight, and is any day of the year, with no days being excluded. 

2. A “working day” shall be a day which permits construction of the principal units of 

the work for a period of not less than seven hours between 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 

p.m. Working days do not include days on which weather or other conditions not 

under the control of the Bidder prevent Bidder from working the seven hours 

defining a working day. Working days do not include Saturdays, Sundays or any of 

the following holidays: New Year, President’s Day, Good Friday, Memorial Day, 

Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, the day after Thanksgiving and 

Christmas Eve and Christmas Day. 

C. Add new paragraphs “E.5 and E.6” as follows: 

“5. Specifications are written in modified brief style. Requirements apply to all Work of 

the same kind, class, and type even though the word "all" is not stated. 

6. Simple imperative sentence structure is used which places a verb as the first word in 

the sentence. It is understood that the words "furnish", "install", "provide", or similar 

words include the meaning of the phrase "The Bidder shall..." before these words.” 

SC‐2.02 Make the following modifications to 2.02 Copies of Documents. 

A. Amend the first sentence of paragraph GC‐2.02 A. by deleting “ten copies” and replacing it 

with “five copies”. 

B. Delete Paragraph 2.02.A. entirely and insert the following in its place: 

“A. Bidder may make as many prints of the documents downloaded for bidding as they 

require for construction. CMAR will not provide printed or hard copies to the Bidder.” 

SC‐2.03 Make the following modifications to 2.03 General Conditions: 

A. Amend the third (last) sentence of paragraph 2.03.A of the General Conditions to read as 

follows: 

“In no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than the thirtieth day after 

the Effective Date of the Agreement.” 

SC‐2.05 Make the following modifications to 2.05 Before Starting Construction 




12/28/2011

A. Delete Paragraph 2.05 A. of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following 

in its place: 

“2.05 A. Bidder’s Review of Construction Documents: Before undertaking each part of the 

Work, Bidder shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and 

verify pertinent figures therein and all applicable field measurements. Bidder shall 

promptly report in writing to CMAR/Engineer any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy 

which Bidder may discover and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from 

Engineer before proceeding with any work affected thereby. In the event of a conflict in 

the Drawings, Specifications, or other portions of the Contract Documents which were not 

reported prior to the submitting of a Bid Proposal, the Bidder shall be deemed to have 

included the most expensive item in the Bid Proposal.” 

SC‐2.07 Make the following modifications to 2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules 

A. Amend Paragraph 2.07 A. by adding the following: 

“Such acceptance of the contract completion schedule in no way affects the Contract 

Times.” 

SC‐2.08 Make the following modifications to 2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules 

A. Add a new paragraph immediately after paragraph 2.07 of the General Conditions which is 

to read as follows: 

“2.08 The Contract Times may be changed only as set forth in Article 12 of the General 

Conditions, and a progress schedule shall not constitute a change in the Contract Times.” 

SC‐3.01 

Make the following modifications to 3.01 Intent 

A. Add the following to 3.01 A 

“Drawings and specifications do not indicate or describe all of the work required to 

complete the project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected 

products are to be provided by the Bidder and coordinated with the CMAR/Engineer. 

Provide any work, materials or equipment required for a complete and functional system 

even if they are not detailed or specified.” 

1. The contract requirements described in the General Conditions, Supplementary 

Conditions and General Requirements apply to each and all specification sections 

unless specifically noted otherwise. 

2. Organization of Contract Documents is not intended to control or to lessen the 

responsibility of the Bidder when dividing work among Subcontractors, or to establish 

the extent of work to be performed by any trade, Subcontractor or Supplier. 




12/28/2011

Specifications or details do not need to be indicated or specified in each specification 

or drawing. Items shown in the contract documents are applicable regardless of 

location in the Contract Documents. 

3. Standard paragraph titles and other identifications of subject matter in the 

specifications are intended to aid in locating and recognizing various requirements of 

the specifications. Titles do not define, limit, or otherwise restrict specification text.” 

B. Add new paragraphs “D ‐ F” as follows: 

“D. Comply with the most stringent requirements where compliance with two or more 

standards is specified, and they establish different or conflicting requirements for 

minimum quantities or quality levels, unless Contract Documents indicate otherwise. 

1. Quantity or quality level shown or indicated shall be the minimum to be provided 

or performed in every instance. 

2. Actual installation must meet or exceed the minimum quality indicated. 

3. In complying with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or 

maximum values, as noted, or appropriate for context of requirements. 

4. Refer instances of uncertainty to the CMAR/Engineer for a decision before 

proceeding. 

E. Provide materials and equipment comparable in quality to similar materials and 

equipment incorporated in the project or as required to meet the minimum 

requirements of the application if the materials and equipment are shown in the 

drawings but are not included in the specifications. 

F. The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Bidderr and CMAR. 

The Contract Documents may be modified only by Field Order, Change Order or 

Written Amendment.” 

SC‐3.02 

Make the following modifications to 3.02 Reference Standards 

A. Add a new paragraph “B” as follows: 

“B. Comply with applicable construction industry standards as if bound or copied directly 

into the Contract Documents regardless of lack of reference in the Contract 

Documents. Apply provisions of the Contract Documents where Contract Documents 

include more stringent requirements than these referenced standards. 

1. Standards referenced directly in the Contract Documents take precedence over 

standards that are not referenced but recognized in the construction industry as 

applicable. 

2. Comply with standards not referenced but recognized in the construction industry 

as applicable for performance of the work except as otherwise limited by the 

Contract Documents. The Engineer determines whether code or standard is 

applicable, or which of several are applicable. 




12/28/2011

3. Make copies of reference standards available as requested by Engineer/ 

Owner/CMAR.” 

SC‐3.03 

Make the following modifications to 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies 

A. Delete Paragraph 3.03.A.3 entirely and insert the following in its place: 

3. “In the event of a conflict in the Drawings, Specifications, or other portions of the 

Contract Documents which were not reported prior to the Bidding of the Bid Proposal, 

the Bidder shall be deemed to have included the most expensive item, system, 

procedure, etc. in his Bid Proposal.” 

SC‐3.03 Make the following modifications to 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies 

A. Amend paragraph 3.03. A.1. of the General Conditions by striking out the following words: 

"; provided , however, that CMAR shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to 

report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless CMAR knew or reasonably 

should have known thereof." and add the following: 

“In the event of a conflict in the Drawings, Specifications, or other portions of the Contract 

Documents which were not reported prior to the Bidding of the Bid Proposal, the Bidder 

shall be deemed to have included the most expensive in his the Bid Proposal.” 

SC‐4.01 

Make the following modifications to 4.01 Availability of Lands 

A. Add the following to Paragraph 4.01.C: 

“A copy of the written agreements for the use of such land shall be provided to the Owner 

for record purposes.” 

SC‐4.02 Make the following modifications to 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions 

As set forth in paragraph 4.02, Engineer OR Engineer's Consultants in the preparation of 

Drawings and Specifications have relied upon: 

A. Geotechnical Investigation Report by Freese and Nichols, Inc. 

“4.02.A.1 The following reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or 

contiguous to the site of the Work. 

4.02.A1.1 The report is in progress. The technical data contained in the report upon which 

the Bidder may rely is boring depth, boring logs, water levels. Bidder recognizes that the 

technical data listed reflect only the conditions for the day the data was collected and 

reflects only conditions existing at the exact location of Samples. 

B. Add the following paragraph. 




12/28/2011

“4.02.A.3 Copies of these reports and Drawings may be downloaded at the Project 

website when available. These reports and Drawings are not part of the Contract 

Documents, but the technical data contained therein upon which the Bidder is entitled to 

rely as provided in GC‐4.02B and as identified and established above are incorporated 

therein by reference. Bidder is not entitled to rely upon other information and data 

utilized by Engineer and Engineer's Consultants in preparation of Drawings and 

Specifications.” 

SC‐4.03 Make the following modifications to 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions. 

A. Amend paragraph 4.03 A. by deleting “promptly” and inserting “within three (3) days.” 

SC‐4.04 Make the following modifications to 4.04 Underground Facilities. 

A. Amend the first sentence of paragraph 4.04 B.1.as follows: 

“......accuracy in the Contract Documents, Bidder shall, within three days after becoming 

aware thereof ......” 

B. Amend the second sentence of paragraph 4.04 B.2.as follows: 

“An equitable adjustment shall be made in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, 

to the extent ....” 

SC‐4.06 Make the following modifications to 4.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site 

A. Amend paragraph 4.06 G. by changing reference to paragraph 4.06 E. to paragraph 4.06 G. 

B. Amend paragraph 4.06 H. by changing reference to paragraph 4.06 F. to paragraph 4.06 H. 

SC‐5.01 Make the following modifications to 5.01 Performance, Payment and Other Bonds 

A. Amend paragraph 5.01 A. by deleting “These Bonds shall remain in effect at least until one 

year after the date.” and adding the following: 

The Maintenance Bond shall remain in effect at least until 2 years after that date.” 

B. Add new paragraphs immediately after paragraph 5.01C 

“D. Amounts owed by Owner/CMAR to Bidder under the Contract shall be used for the 

performance of the Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any performance bond or 

payment bond. By Bidder furnishing and Owner/CMAR accepting these bonds, they agree 

that all funds earned by Bidder in the performance of the Contract are dedicated to satisfy 




12/28/2011

obligations of Bidder under these bonds, subject to Owner’s priority to use the funds for 

the completion of the Work. 

E. Bidder or surety on behalf of Bidder shall promptly notify the CMAR/Owner of all 

claims filed against the Payment Bond. When a claimant has satisfied the conditions 

prescribed by Texas Government Code 2253, the Bidder or surety on behalf of Bidder 

shall, with reasonable promptness, notify the claimant and CMAR/Owner of the amounts 

that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed, 

including, but not limited to, the lack of substantiating documentation to support the 

claim as to entitlement or amount, and the Bidder or surety on behalf of Bidder shall, with 

reasonable promptness, pay or make arrangements for payment of any undisputed 

amount; provided, however, that the failure of the Bidder or surety on behalf of Bidder to 

timely discharge its obligations under this paragraph or to dispute or identify any specific 

defense to all or any part of a claim shall not be deemed to be an admission of liability by 

the Bidder or surety as to such claim or otherwise constitute a waiver of the Bidder’s or 

surety’s defenses to, or right to dispute, such claim. 

F. CMAR/Owner shall not be liable for payment of any costs or expenses of any claimant 

under Payment Bonds, and shall have no obligations to make payments to, give notices on 

behalf of, or otherwise have obligations to claimants under Payment Bonds.” 

SC‐5.02 

Make the following modifications to 5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers 

A. Add a new paragraph “B.” as follows: 

“B. Insurance companies providing insurance required by Contract Documents shall have 

a minimum rating of A‐VIII according to A.M. Best Company.” 

SC‐5.03 Make the following modifications to 5.03 Certificates of Insurance 

A. Delete the following from Paragraph 5.03 A.: 

“Owner shall deliver to CMAR, with copies to each additional insured identified in the 

Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance 

requested by CMAR or any other additional insured) which Owner is required to purchase 

and maintain.” 

SC‐5.04 The following additional information is provided as required by paragraph 5.04 CMAR’s Liability 

Insurance and will be required by the Bidder as applicable. 

“A. The limits of liability for the insurance required by Paragraph 5.04 of the General 

Conditions shall provide the following coverage for not less than the following amounts or 

greater where required by Laws and Regulations. 




12/28/2011

Workers' Compensation, etc., under Paragraphs 5.04.A.1 and A.2. of the General 

Conditions: 

1) State: Statutory 

2) Applicable Federal (e.g., Longshore) Statutory 

3) Employers' Liability: 

Bodily Injury by Accident $500,000 

Bodily Injury by Disease ‐ Each Employee $500,000 

Bodily Injury by Disease ‐ Policy Limit $500,000 

4) Maritime Coverage Endorsement 

Insurance shall include a waiver of subrogation in favor of the Owner and Engineer, 

its officers, employees, agents and subconsultants. 

B. Bidder's Liability Insurance required by Paragraph 5.04.A.3, 5.04.A.4 and 5.04.A.5 is to 

provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by Laws 

and Regulations. Bidder's Liability Insurance shall also include completed operations and 

product liability coverage, and eliminate the exclusion with respect to property under the 

care, custody and control of Bidder: 

(1) General Aggregate 

(Except Products ‐ Completed Operations) 

(2) Products ‐ Completed Operations 

Aggregate 

(3) Personal and Advertising Injury 

(One Person/Organization) 

(4) Each Occurrence 

(Bodily Injury and Property Damage) 

$1,000,000 / Occurrence 

$2,000,000 / Aggregate 

$1,000,000 / Occurrence 

$2,000,000 / Aggregate 

$1,000,000 

$1,000,000 

(5) Limit Per Person ‐ Medical Expense $5,000 

(6) Personal Injury Liability coverage will 

include claims arising out of Employment 

Practices Liability, limited to coverage 

provided under standard contract 

(7) Property Damage Liability insurance will 

provide explosion, collapse and 

$1,000,000 

$1,000,000 




12/28/2011

underground coverage where applicable 

(8) Watercraft Liability Policy: Coverage shall 

apply to all self propelled vessels 

(9) Excess Liability, Umbrella Form to include 

coverage of Watercraft Liability. General 

Aggregate ‐ Each Occurrence 

$1,000,000 

$1,000,000 

C. Bidder's Automobile Liability Insurance required by Paragraph 5.04.A.6 is to provide 

coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by Laws and 

Regulations. 

(1) Bodily Injury: 

Each Person $1,000,000 

or 

Each Accident $1,000,000 

Property Damage ‐ Each Accident: $1,000,000 

(2) Combined Single Limit (Bodily Injury and 

Property Damage) 

$1,000,000 

D. Additional insured on all insurance policies in accordance with Paragraph 5.04 B.1 include: 


Garney Companies, inc. 

Freese and Nichols, Inc 

Villalobos and Associates 

Gregory Geotechnical 

Foster Wheeler USA Corporation 

Gorrondona and Associates 

William Stackhouse 

E. Add paragraph 5.04.A.8 ‐ In addition to the insurance listed above, Bidder shall provide 

the following insurance: 

F. Add to paragraph 5.04.B.4 ‐ The Contractual Liability coverage shall provide coverage for 

not less than the following amounts:” 




12/28/2011

(1) General Aggregate $1,000,000 

(2) Each Occurrence (Bodily Injury and Property 

Damage) 

$1,000,000 

SC‐5.06 Make the following modifications to 5.06 Before Property Insurance 

A. Delete Paragraph 5.06 A. of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following 

in its place: 

“5.06 A. BIDDER shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the work at the site 

on a replacement cost basis with a limit not less than 100% of the Work‐Put‐In‐Place’s (for 

the applicable Bid Package) replacement value thereof (subject to such deductible 

amounts as may be provided in these Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and 

Regulations). This limit should include “soft cost,” or expenses relating to the construction 

project(s) over and above those costs which would have been incurred if there had been 

no loss. These soft costs should include, but not be limited to, interest, additional taxes, 

advertising/promotional expenses, additional commissions, loss of rents, architects or 

engineering fees. This insurance shall: 

1. include the interests of BIDDER, Owner, CMAR, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's 

Consultants and any other persons or entities identified in paragraph 5.04 B.1 (SC‐18) of 

these Supplementary Conditions, each of whom shall have an insurable interest and shall 

be listed as an additional insured; 

2. be written on a Builder's Risk "all risk" or open peril or special causes of loss policy 

form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss and damage to the Work, 

temporary buildings, false work and Work in transit and shall insure against at least the 

following perils; fire lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious 

mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, demolition occasioned by enforcement of 

Laws and Regulations, water damage, and such other causes of loss as may be specifically 

required by the Supplementary Conditions. 

3. include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property 

(including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects); 

4. cover materials and equipment in transit to the Project site, and materials that the 

BIDDER has taken possession of whether stored at the Project site, or 

5. allow for Partial Utilization of the Work by Owner; 

6. include testing and startup; and 




12/28/2011

7. be maintained in effect until final payment is made unless otherwise agreed to in 

writing by BIDDER, Owner, CMAR, and Engineer with thirty days written notice to each 

other additional insured to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued. 

The policies of insurance required to be purchased and maintained by BIDDER in 

accordance with this paragraph 5.06 shall comply with the requirements of paragraph 

5.06C.” 

B. Delete Paragraph 5.06B. of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following 

in its place: 

“5.06 B. BIDDER shall purchase and maintain such boiler and machinery insurance or 

additional property insurance as may be required by the Supplementary Conditions or 

Laws and Regulations which will include the interests of BIDDER, Owner, CMAR, 

Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and any other persons or entities 

identified in paragraph 5.04 B.1 (SC‐18) of these Supplementary Conditions, each of 

whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured or 

additional insured.” 

C. Delete Paragraph 5.06 D. of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following 

in its place: 

“D. Owner/CMAR shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any insurance 

to protect the interest of the Bidders, Subcontractors, or others in the Work. The stated 

limits of insurance required are minimum only. Bidder shall determine the limits that are 

adequate . These limits may be basic policy limits or any combination of basic limits and 

umbrella limits. In any event, Bidder is fully responsible for all losses arising out of, 

resulting from or connected with operations under this contract whether or not said 

losses are covered by insurance. The acceptance of certificates or other evidence of 

insurance by the Owner, Engineer, CMAR and/or others listed as additional insured in 

Paragraph 5.04 B.1 (SC‐18) that in any respect do not comply with the Contract 

requirements does not release the Bidder from compliance herewith.” 

D. Delete Paragraph 5.06 E. of the General Conditions in its entirety. 

SC‐6.05 Make the following modifications to 6.05 Substitutes and “Or Equals” 

A. Delete paragraph 6.05 A. in its entirety and add the following: 

“6.05 Substitutes and “Or Equals” 

A. Where equipment and products are specified by name, no substitutes or “or‐equal” 

will be considered or approved unless the term “or‐equal” is included in the acceptable 

manufacturer section of that Specification. 




12/28/2011

1. If substitutes or “or equals” are specifically permitted for consideration by the 

individual Specifications, they must be submitted and will be reviewed and evaluated in 

accordance with the provisions established in General Condition paragraph 6.05 and in 

Division 1 of the Specifications.” 

B. Amend paragraph 6.05 B. by changing the reference in the last sentence from 6.05.A.2 to 

6.05.A.1 

C. Amend paragraph 6.05 C. by deleting the third sentence and replacing it with the 

following sentence: 

“No “or‐equal” or substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized until Engineer’s review is 

complete, which will be evidenced by either a Change Order or Field Order.” 

D. Amend paragraph 6.05 E. by changing the reference in the first sentence from 6.05.A.2 to 

6.05.A.1. In addition, amend paragraph 6.05 E. by deleting the word “substitute” in all 

locations and replacing it with the phrase “substitute or “or‐equal””. 

SC‐6.06 Make the following modifications to 6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others 

A. Amend paragraph 6.06 A. by adding the following to the last sentence: 

“unless called for in the Contract Documents.” 

B. Amend paragraph 6.06 B. by deleting the words “Supplementary Conditions” in two places 

and replacing them with the words “Contract Documents”. 

C. Add a new paragraph immediately after paragraph 6.06 G of the General Conditions which 

is to read as follows: 

“6.06 H. Owner or Engineer or CMAR may furnish to any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or 

other person or organization, to the extent practicable, information about amounts paid 

to Bidder in accordance with Bidder's Application for Payment on account of the particular 

Subcontractor's, Supplier's, other person's or other organization's Work.” 

SC‐6.09 Make the following modifications to 6.09 Laws and Regulations 

A. Add a new paragraph immediately after paragraph 6.09 C. of the General Conditions 

which is to read as follows: 

“6.09 D. All Bidders are required to complete and submit with their Bid the Vendor 

Compliance to State Law form, which follows the proposal.” 




12/28/2011

B. Add a new paragraph immediately after paragraph 6.09 D. (SC‐30) of the General 

Conditions. Definitions included in this paragraph pertain only to this paragraph which is 

included verbatim as a statutory requirement of the State of Texas. The paragraph is to read 

as follows: 

“6.09 E. Workers Compensation Statement for Building or Construction Projects for 

Government entities in Texas 

A. Definitions: 

Certificate of coverage ("certificate") ‐ A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate 

of authority to self‐insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC‐ 

81, TWCC‐82, TWCC‐83, or TWCC‐84), showing statutory workers' compensation 

insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a 

project for the duration of the project. 

Duration of the project ‐ includes the time from the beginning of the work on the 

project until the Bidder's/person's work on the project has been completed and 

accepted by the governmental entity. 

Persons providing services on the project ("Subcontractor" in 406.096) ‐ includes all 

persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Bidder has undertaken to 

perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with 

the Bidder and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, 

without limitation, independent Bidders, Subcontractors, leasing companies, motor 

carriers, owner‐operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity 

which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, 

without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or 

providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does 

not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office 

supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 

B. The Bidder shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification 

codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the 

statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of 

the Bidder providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. 

C. The Bidder must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior 

to being awarded the contract. 

D. If the coverage period shown on the Bidder's current certificate of coverage ends 

during the duration of the project, the Bidder must, prior to the end of the coverage 

period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that 

coverage has been extended. 




12/28/2011

E. The Bidder shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and 

provide to the governmental entity: 

(1) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so 

the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for 

all persons providing services on the project; and 

(2) no later than seven days after receipt by the Bidder, a new certificate of coverage 

showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current 

certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. 

F. The Bidder shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the 

project and for one year thereafter. 

G. The Bidder shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or 

personal delivery, within 10 days after the Bidder knew or should have known, of any 

change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing 

services on the project. 

H. The Bidder shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner 

prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons 

providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating 

how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. 

I. The Bidder shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to 

provide services on a project, to: 

(1) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll 

amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory 

requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees 

providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; 

(2) provide to the Bidder, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a 

certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of 

the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; 

(3) provide the Bidder, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of 

coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current 

certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; 

(4) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Bidder: 

(a) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; 

and 




12/28/2011

(b) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of 

the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of 

coverage ends during the duration of the project; 

(5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project 

and for one year thereafter; 

(6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, 

within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that 

materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the 

project; and 

(7) contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required 

by paragraphs (1) ‐ (7), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person 

for whom they are providing services. 

J. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of 

coverage, the Bidder is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of 

the Bidder who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers' 

compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be 

based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all 

coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the 

case of a self‐insured, with the commission's Division of Self‐Insurance Regulation. 

Providing false or misleading information may subject the Bidder to administrative 

penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. 

K. The Bidder's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract 

by the Bidder which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if 

the Bidder does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of 

breach from the governmental entity. “ 

SC‐6.10 Make the following modifications to 6.10 Taxes 

A. Add the following language at the end of the first sentence of paragraph 6.10 A. of the 

General Conditions: 

“The Owner qualifies as an exempt agency as defined by the statutes of the State of Texas. 

The Bidder shall comply with all statutes and rulings of the State Comptroller. “ 

SC‐6.16 

Make the following modifications to 6.16 Emergencies 

A. Amend paragraph 6.16 by revising the last sentence to read: 




12/28/2011

“If Engineer/CMAR determines that the incident giving rise to the emergency action was 

not the responsibility of the Bidder and that a change in the Contract Documents is 

required because of the action taken by Bidder in response to such an emergency, a Work 

Change Directive or Change Order maybe issued. “ 

SC‐6.17 

Make the following modifications to 6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples 

A. Delete paragraph 6.17.C.3 entirely and insert the following in its place: 

“3. With each submittal, Contractor shall give CMAR/Engineer specific written notice of 

any variations that the Shop Drawing or Sample may have from the requirements of 

the Contract Documents on a Shop Drawing Deviation Request form provided by the 

CMAR/Engineer and request that a Field Order or Change Order be issued for each of 

the specific variations submitted for approval. This notice shall be both a written 

communication separate from the Shop Drawings or Sample submittal; and, in 

addition, by a specific notation made on each Shop Drawing or Sample submitted to 

Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. “ 

B. Delete paragraph 6.17.D.3 entirely and insert the following in its place: 

“3. CMAR/Engineer’s review and approval shall not relieve Bidder from responsibility for 

any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Bidder has 

complied with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.3 and CMAR/Engineer has given 

written approval of each such variation issuing a Field Order or Change Order. If the 

proposed modification is approved by the CMAR/Engineer, the submittal will be 

considered to be in strict compliance with the Contract Documents and it will be 

reviewed in accordance with the Contract Documents. If the proposed Modification is 

not approved, the submittal will be returned to the Bidder with appropriate 

comments. CMAR/Engineer’s review and approval shall not relieve Bidder from 

responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.1.” 

C. Delete paragraph 6.17 E.1 entirely and insert the following in its place: 

“1. Bidder shall make corrections required by CMAR/Engineer and shall return the 

required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required, new 

Samples for review and approval. Re‐submittals shall reference and respond directly 

to Engineer’s previous comments. Any variations from strict compliance with the 

Contract Documents will be identified in the same manner as required in paragraph 

6.17.C.3 and will require the same approvals.” 

D. Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 6.17.E: 

“F. Bidder shall furnish required submittals with sufficient information and accuracy in 

order to obtain required approval of an item with no more than two submittals. 

CMAR/Engineer will record CMAR/Engineer’s time for reviewing subsequent 

submittals of Shop Drawings, samples, or other items requiring approval and Bidder 

shall reimburse CMAR for CMAR/Engineer’s charges for such time. 




12/28/2011

SC‐6.18 

G. In the event that Bidder requests a change of a previously approved item, Bidder shall 

reimburse CMAR forCMAR/ Engineer’s charges for its review time unless the need for 

such change is beyond the control of Bidder.” 

Make the following modifications to 6.18 Continuing the Work 

A. Delete the following from paragraph 6.18 – “or as Owner and CMAR may otherwise agree 

in writing.” Add the following language at the end of the second sentence of paragraph 6.18 

of the General Conditions: 

“Bidder assumes and bears responsibility for all costs and time delays associated with any 

variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents. “ 

SC‐6.20 

Make the following modifications to 6.20 INDEMNIFICATION 

A. Add new paragraphs immediately after paragraph 6.20 A.2: 

“3. FROM ALL CLAIMS, DEMANDS, LIENS, OR SUITS ALLEGING NON‐PAYMENT BY CMAR 

BY ANY PERSON OR ENTITY WHO FURNISHED LABOR, MATERIALS, OR EQUIPMENT FOR 

USE IN THE PERFORMANCE OF THE CONTRACT, PROVIDED THERE IS NO Owner DEFAULT.” 

SC‐9.03 

Make the following modifications to 9.03 Project Representative 

A. Delete paragraph 9.03 in its entirety. Add the following: 

“9.03 Project Representative 

A. The Engineer will have a Resident Project Representative on the Site. The 

duties, responsibilities and the limitations of authority of the Resident Project 

Representative, and designated assistants, are as follows: 

1. Resident Project Representative is Engineer's agent at the site, will act as 

directed by and under the supervision of Engineer, and will confer with 

Engineer regarding Resident Project Representative's actions. Resident 

Project Representative's dealings in matters pertaining to the on‐site Work 

shall in general be with Engineer and CMAR, keeping Owner advised as 

necessary. Resident Project Representative's dealings with Subcontractors 

shall only be through or with full knowledge and approval of CMAR. Resident 

Project Representative shall generally communicate with Owner with the 

knowledge of and under the direction of Engineer. 

B. Duties and Responsibilities of Resident Project Representative: 




12/28/2011

1. Schedules: Review the progress schedule, schedule of Shop Drawing 

submittals and schedules of values prepared by CMAR and consult with 

Engineer concerning acceptability. 

2. Conferences and Meetings: Attend meetings with CMAR, such as 

preconstruction conferences, progress meetings, job conferences and other 

project‐related meetings, and prepare and circulate copies of minutes 

thereof. 

3. Liaison: 

a. Serve as Engineer's liaison with CMAR, working principally through 

CMAR's superintendent and assist in understanding the intent of Contract 

Documents; and assist Engineer in serving as Owner's liaison with CMAR 

when CMAR's operations affect Owner's on‐site operations. 

b. Assist in obtaining from Owner additional details or information, 

when required for proper execution of the Work. 

4. Shop Drawings and Samples: 

a. Record date of receipt of Shop Drawings and Samples. 

b. Receive Samples which are furnished at the Site by CMAR, and notify 

Engineer of availability of Samples for examination. 

c. Advise Engineer and CMAR of the commencement of any Work 

requiring a Shop Drawing or Sample if the submittal has not been 

approved by Engineer. 

5. Review of Work, Rejection of Defective Work, Inspections and Tests: 

a. Conduct on‐site observations of the Work in progress to determine if 

the Work is in general proceeding in accordance with the Contract 

Documents. 

b. Report to Engineer whenever Resident Project Representative 

believes that any Work will not produce a completed Project that 

conforms generally to the Contract Documents or will prejudice the 

integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning 

whole as indicated in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged, or 

does not meet the requirements of any inspection, test or approval 

required to be made; and advise Engineer of Work the Resident Project 

Representative believes should be corrected or rejected or should be 




12/28/2011

uncovered for observation, or requires special testing, inspection or 

approval. 

c. Verify that tests, equipment and systems start‐up and operating and 

maintenance training are conducted in the presence of appropriate 

personnel, and the CMAR maintains adequate records thereof; and 

observe record and report to Engineer appropriate details relative to the 

test procedures and start‐ups. 

d. Accompany visiting inspectors representing public or other agencies 

having jurisdiction over the Project, record the results of these inspections 

and report to Engineer. 

6. Interpretation of Contract Documents: Report to Engineer when 

clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents are needed and 

transmit to CMAR clarifications and interpretations as issued by Engineer. 

7. Request for Revisions: Consider and evaluate CMAR's suggestions for 

revisions to Drawings or Specifications and report with Resident Project 

Representative's recommendations to Engineer. Transmit to CMAR in writing 

decisions as issued by Engineer. 

8. Records: 

a. Maintain at the job site orderly files for correspondence, reports of 

job conferences, Shop Drawings and Samples, reproductions of original 

Contract Documents, including all Work Change Directives, Addenda, 

Change Orders, Field Orders, Written Amendments, additional Drawings 

issued subsequent to the execution of the Contract, Engineer's 

clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents, progress 

reports, submittals and correspondence received from and delivered to 

CMAR and other Project related documents. 

9. Reports: 

a. Furnish to Engineer periodic reports as required of progress of the 

work and of CMAR's compliance with the progress schedule and schedule 

of Shop Drawings and Sample submittals. 

b. Consult with Engineer in advance of scheduled major tests, 

inspections or start of important phases of the Work. 

c. Draft proposed Written Amendments, Change Orders and Work 

Change Directives, obtaining backup material from CMAR and recommend 




12/28/2011

to Engineer Written Amendments, Change Orders, Work Change 

Directives, and Field Orders. 

d. Report immediately to Engineer and Owner the occurrence of any 

accident. 

10. Payment Requests: Review Applications for Payment with CMAR for 

compliance with the established procedure for their submission and forward 

with recommendations to Owner, noting particularly the relationship of the 

payment requested to the schedule of values, Work completed and materials 

and equipment at the Site but not incorporated in the Work. 

11. Certificates, Maintenance and Operation Manuals: During the course of 

the Work, verify that certificates, maintenance and operation manuals and 

other data required to be assembled and furnished by CMAR are applicable to 

the items actually installed and in accordance with the Contract Documents, 

and have this material delivered to Engineer for review and forwarding to 

Owner prior to final payment for the Work. 

12. Completion: 

a. Before Engineer issues a Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit 

to CMAR a list of observed items requiring completion or correction. 

b. Observe whether CMAR has performed inspections required by laws 

or regulations, ordinances, codes or order applicable to the Work, 

including but not limited to those to be performed by public agencies 

having jurisdiction over the Work. 

c. Conduct a final inspection in the company of Engineer, Owner and 

CMAR and prepare a final list of items to be completed or corrected. 

d. Observe whether all items on final list have been completed or 

corrected and make recommendations to Engineer concerning 

acceptance. 

C. Limitations of Authority of Resident Project Representative: 

1. Shall not authorize any deviation from the Contract Documents or substitution of 

materials or equipment (including "or‐equal" items), unless authorized by 

Engineer. 

2. Shall not exceed limitations of Engineer's authority as set forth in Agreement or 





12/28/2011

3. Shall not undertake any of the responsibilities of CMAR, Subcontractor, Suppliers, 

or CMAR's superintendent. 

4. Shall not advise on, issue directions relative to or assume control over any aspect 

of the means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction 

unless such advice or directions are specifically required by the Contract 

Documents. 

5. Shall not advise on, issue directions regarding or assume control over safety 

precautions and programs in connection with the Work or any activities or 

operations of Owner or CMAR. 

6. Shall not accept shop drawing or sample submittals from anyone other than the 

CMAR. 

7. Shall not participate in specialized field or laboratory tests or inspections 

conducted by others, except as specifically authorized by Engineer. “ 

SC‐9.05 Make the following modifications to 9.05 Authorized Variations in Work 

A. Amend paragraph 9.05 by inserting the following sentence prior to the last sentence of 

the paragraph: 

“The Bidder shall notify the CMAR/Engineer in writing prior to beginning any Work 

addressed in a Field Order if the Bidder does not agree that the Work involved represents 

no additional cost and/or time change in the Contract Documents. “ 

SC‐10.05 

Make the following modifications to 10.05 Claims and Disputes 

A. Amend paragraph 10.05 as follows: 

“Change the reference in the first sentence from “30 days” to “7 days.” 

SC‐11.01 

Make the following modifications to 11.01 Cost of the Work 

A. Amend paragraph 11.01 A. of the General Conditions by striking out the following words 

in the third sentence: "those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall include only the 

following items, and shall not include any of the costs itemized in paragraph 11.01 B." and 

adding the following: 

"those paid for the Work included in the Contract Price, shall include only the following 

items, and shall not include any of the costs itemized in paragraph 11.01 B. Bidder shall 

provide certified payroll records listing personnel classifications and salaries for all 




12/28/2011

individuals involved in additional Work. Salaries for those not included in the certified 

payroll will be considered as being compensated under paragraph 11.01 B.”. 

B. Amend paragraph 11.01 A.1 of the General Conditions by striking out the following words 

in the second sentence: "without limitation superintendents, foreman" and adding the 

following: 

"one foreman (unless agreed upon prior to beginning Work)”. 

C. Amend paragraph 11.01 A.1 of the General Conditions by striking out the following words 

in the last sentence: "be included in the above" and adding the following: 

"not exceed 1.5 times regular pay and shall be included in the above" 

D. Amend paragraph 11.01 B.1 by adding the following to the list of excluded personnel in 

the first sentence: 

“superintendents” 

E. Amend paragraph 11.01 D. by modifying the sentence to read as follows; 

“..... and submit in a form and at intervals acceptable to Engineer ...” 

SC‐11.03 

Make the following modifications to 11.03 Unit Price Work 

A. Delete Paragraph 11.03 C. of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following 

in its place: 

“11.03 C. The unit price of an item of Unit Price Work shall be subject to reevaluation and 

adjustment in accordance with paragraph 10.05 under the following conditions: 

11.03 C.1. if the total cost of a particular item of Unit Price Work amounts to twenty 

percent (20%) or more of the Contract Price and the variation in the quantity of that 

particular item of Unit Price Work performed by the Bidder differs by more than twenty 

percent (20%) from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and 

11.03 C.2. if there is not corresponding adjustments with respect to any other item of 

Work; and 

11.03 C.3. if Bidder believes that Bidder has incurred additional expense as a result 

thereof; or if Owner/CMAR believes that the quantity variation entitles Owner/CMAR to 

an adjustment in the Unit Price, either the Owner/CMAR or Bidder may make a claim for 

an adjustment in the Contract Price in accordance with Article 11.01 if the parties are 




12/28/2011

unable to agree as to the effect of any such variation in the quantity of the Unit Price 

Work performed. “ 

B. Add new paragraph following 11.03 

“11.04 The Bidder agrees to make no claims for damage for delay in the performance of 

the Contract occasioned by any act or omission to act of the Owner, CMAR, Engineer, or 

any of the CMAR’s, Engineer’s or Owner’s agents, and agrees that any such claim shall be 

fully compensated by an extension of time, as set forth in a Change Order, to complete 

performance of the work as provided herein. “ 

SC‐12.03 

Make the following modifications to 12.03 Delays Beyond CMAR’S Control 

A. Amend paragraph 12.03 A. by deleting “abnormal weather condition.” Add following: No 

time extensions will be allowed for weather conditions for Projects using calendar days for the 

Contract Time. 

SC‐13.07 

Make the following modifications to 13.07 Correction Period 

A. Add the following to paragraph 13.07 A.: 

“When early acceptance of a Substantially Completed portion of the Work is accomplished 

in the manner indicated, the correction period for that portion of the Work shall 

commence at the time of substantial completion of that Work. “ 

SC‐14.02 

Make the following modifications to 14.02 Progress Payments 

A. Amend the first sentence of paragraph 14.02 C.1. to read as follows: 

“Thirty days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner” 

B. Add new paragraphs immediately after paragraph 14.02 D.1.d. of the General Conditions 

which are to read as follows: 

“e. Owner/CMAR has been notified of failure to make payments to Subcontractors or 

Suppliers or for labor, or 

f. failure to submit up‐to‐date record documents as required by GC‐6.12, or 

g. failure to submit monthly progress schedule updates or revised schedules as 

requested by the Owner or CMAR or Engineer. “ 

D. Add new paragraph immediately after 14.02 D. 3. 




12/28/2011

“4. Owner may permanently withhold payment from Contract Price for 

a. liquidated damages incurred by CMAR, or 

b. compensation for Engineer for overtime charges of Resident Project 

Representative, third review of submittals, review of substitutions, reinspection fees, 

inspections or designs related to correction of defective Work, or other Services 

identified as requiring payment by the CMAR. Compensation will be based on the 

following rates: 

Position 

Hourly Rate 

Principal in Charge $270.00 

Project Manager $185.00 

Project Engineer $145.00 

Construction Manager $150.00 

Resident Engineer $145.00 

Resident Project Representative $100.00 

Senior Resident Representative $115.00 

Design Engineer $125.00 

Engineering Technician $200.00 

Clerk $105.00 

Expenses will be billed at the actual cost multiplied by 1.15. 

c. Costs for tests performed by the Owner to verify that work previously tested and 

found to be defective has been corrected. Verification testing is to be provided at the 

CMAR's expense to verify products or constructed works are in compliance after 

corrections have been made. “ 

SC‐14.04 

Make the following modifications to 14.04 Substantial Completion 

A. Add a new paragraph immediately after paragraph 14.04B. 

“C. The following items must be fully functional and suitable for Substantial Completion: 

All Work must be completed.” 

SC‐14.07 

Make the following modifications to 14.07 Final Payment 




12/28/2011

A. Add the following to paragraph 14.07 A.2 

“If any claims were filed against the Payment Bond for the project, or if any liens were 

filed in connection with the work, Bidder shall provide a summary report indicating the 

disposition of these claims or liens with the releases or waivers. This report shall include a 

tabulation of the name of claimants, a description of the claim, amount of claim, date 

claim was filed, and date claim was settled.” 

B. Add the following after paragraph 14.07 C. 

“In the event the CMAR fails to attain Substantial Completion of the entire Project (all bid 

items) within the Contract Time, the Owner may withhold money permanently from the 

CMAR's total compensation a sum of $2,000.00 per day as liquidated damages and for 

added expenses including engineering services, etc. In the event the CMAR fails to attain 

Final Completion of the entire Project (all bid items) within the Contract Time, the Owner 

may withhold money permanently from the CMAR's total compensation a sum of 

$2,000.00 per day as liquidated damages and for added expenses including engineering 

services, etc. The Owner will be the sole judge as to whether the work has been 

completed within the allotted time. Accordingly, it is agreed and understood that said 

amount is to be assessed by the Owner, not as a penalty, but as a predetermined and 

agreed upon liquidated damage. Additionally, assessment of liquidated damages by the 

Owner shall not constitute a waiver of the Owner’s right to sue and collect additional 

damages which Owner may sustain by the failure of the CMAR to perform in accordance 

with the terms of its Contract. Bidders will be held accountable to the same standards.“ 

SC‐17.05 

Make the following modifications to 17.05 Controlling Law: 

A. Add the following paragraph after paragraph 17.05: 

“17.06 All references and conditions for a "calendar day contract" in the General Conditions and 

Supplementary Conditions shall apply for a "Fixed Date Contract." A “Fixed Date Contract” is one in which 

the calendar dates for reaching substantial completion and/or final completion are specified in lieu of 

identifying the actual calendar days involved.” 

END OF SECTION 




12/28/2011

Summary of Work

01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK 

1.00 GENERAL 

1.01 WORK TO BE INCLUDED 

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and perform all excavation, 

construction, installation, and testing of all improvements and additions as shown on the 

Drawings and specified in the Bid Documents and Technical Specifications for “Bid Package #8, 

Raw Water Supply Well Sites-Ward County-North Well Field as described below and in the 

Contract Documents. The following items shall be included in the Bid Proposal’s COST OF 

WORK. 

1 BIDDER’S Material Suppliers shall include all required materials, accessories and 

incidentals required for complete field installation. 

2 All materials shall be delivered to the project site FOB Jobsite. Any claims for damaged 

materials shall be the responsibility of the BIDDER and the material supplier. All materials 

shall be inspected onsite at time of delivery prior to offloading from delivery vans. 

3 BIDDER shall include all supervision, material, labor, equipment, tools, cleanup and 

consumable supplies required to complete project as described in Bid Package #8 bidding 

documents and Technical Specifications. 

4 BIDDER shall include in their bid costs for all pressure testing per specifications for their 

portion of the work. 

5 BIDDER shall include the costs to provide materials inclusive and other items necessary for 

startup of equipment (if necessary), Operation and Maintenance Manuals, special tools (if 

required), spare parts, lubricants for startup, supplies, or other materials as indicated in 

Contract Documents for the operation and maintenance of the Project. 

6 Drawings and specifications do not indicate or describe all of the work required to complete 

the project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to 

be provided by the BIDDER and coordinated with the Project Team. 

1.02 JOB CONDITIONS 

A. The General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, and General Requirements apply to 

each Bid Package, where applicable and each technical specification section. 

B. Comply with all applicable state and local codes and regulations pertaining to the nature and 

character of the work being performed. In case of conflicts, the more stringent specification 

shall govern. 

1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK TO BE INCLUDED IN BID PACKAGE #8, RAW WATER SUPPLY 

WELL SITES-WARD COUNTY-NORTH WELL FIELD at the North Well Field location. 

A. Project Description: The Colorado River Municipal Water District (CRMWD) requires 

completion of 21 new supply well sites for its Ward County North Well Field, near Monahans, 

Texas. Work of the project that will be required at each of the 21 separate locations includes 

installation of: 

1. Earthwork including mobilization, mass excavation, compact sub-grade material, import, 

backfill, compact and fine grade under all structures and slabs on grade. 

2. Concrete construction of all of the site concrete at the 21 well sites. Including but not 

limited to fine grading, furnish and installation of any necessary under slab piping, 

providing and installing all formwork, reinforcing, water-stops, structural concrete, 

applicable pipe encasements, embeds or block outs, pipe penetrations or pipe sleeves, 

Summary of Work – Bid Package #8 01 11 00-1 



5/24/2012

finishing, curing, patching, grinding, sacking and grout fill required to accommodate the 

installation. 

3. Fencing. 

4. Furnish and install miscellaneous metals. 

5. Paintings and coatings for ferrous metals, piping and valves as required. 

6. Unload, store and install submersible pumps supplied under separate contract by OWNER 

and as directed by supplier and per the stipulations detailed on the contract documents. 

7. Furnish and install all column pipe, drop check valve and pressure transducer in supply 

wells that are currently under construction. 

8. Above and below ground piping, valves, fittings and appurtenances totaling approximately 

100 linear feet for each well site. 

9. Provide and install Electrical, instrumentation and controls to provide complete and fully 

functional well sites. Coordinate new utility requirements with local utility (electrical) 

company. 

10. This project is tax exempt only for materials that are built into the project. Formwork 

materials, rental equipment small tools, etc. are not tax exempt. 

11. All excess materials including excavation spoils shall be the property of the owner 

and shall remain onsite. 

12. Any survey location pins provided by registered Land Surveyor damaged as a result 

of contractor operations shall be replaced by a registered Land Surveyor. Cost of 

replacement shall be paid by BIDDER causing the damage. 

13. Temporary security fencing is required at all areas where existing fencing is 

temporarily removed. Contractor performing work in the area shall provide all 

temporary fencing required as part of the Construction Safety Plan developed for the 

project, as described in the Job Safety Requirements. 

14. It shall be the BIDDER’s obligation to coordinate construction activities through the 

CMAR. 

15. It shall be the BIDDER’s obligation to pay claims for damages which result from 

damage to owner’s property, ongoing or completed work of other crafts or late 

completion of the project or any specified milestones that may impact the completion 

of the entire project. 

1.05 WORK BY OWNER 

A. The Owner shall be given unlimited project access to perform plant operations and 

routine maintenance at all times including working hours. 

B. The Owner awarded a construction contract on December 31, 2011, fopr drilling and 

installation of 21 supply wells. Well installation is not a part of the work for this 

project. 

C. The Owner awarded a procurement contract to Clowe & Cowan of El Paso (Pedro 

Rascon, 915-593-8833) on March 30, 2012, for supply of vertical turbine 

submersible pumping units, consisting of pump, motor, power cable, startup 

services (BIDDER to verify that enough days are included to satisfy their 

construction sequencing), testing (manufacturing and field), and appurtenances 

resulting in a complete, functional pumping unit. It is the intent of the Owner to 

assign this procurement contract to successful BIDDER, who will then be 

responsible for receipt of the equipment and payment to the supplier. 

1.07 WORK BY OTHERS 

A. The following work will be performed by others concurrently with the Work of this contract, 

that may impact construction scheduling, testing and startup: 

1. The Owner/CMAR will provide and program the SCADA system. The system will 

provided by Prime Controls (Scott Ogletree, 214-221-4849). The successful Bidder 




5/24/2012

shall install the SCADA equipment and provide all the equipment that may be required 

for the complete installation, such as concrete pad, bolts, wiring, conduit, and other 

appurtenances as necessary. Refer to Section 40 90 02.01, “Installation of Pre- 

Purchased SCADA Equipment” for additional information. 

2. Bid Package#1, Pumps and Motors. Supply of vertical turbine and horizontal 

centrifugal pumping units for the Transmission, Odessa and Well Field Transfer Pump 

Stations. All pumping units will be installed in Bid Package #6 except that the vertical 

turbine pump cans will be installed in Bid Package #5. 

3. Bid Package #2, Valves and Hydraulic Power Unit. Supply of pump station’s valves 18” 

and larger. 

4. Bid Package #3, Well Pads and Roads. Construct well pads and roads at the North 

Well Field. 

5. Bid Package #4, Pre-Purchase of Electrical Equipment. Furnishing of the necessary 

medium voltage transformers, medium voltage metal enclosed switchgear, 600 volt 

switchboards, standalone low voltage solid state starters, medium voltage variable 

frequency drives and power factor correction equipment as indicated for the 

Transmission, Odessa and Well Field Transfer Pump Stations yet will be installed by Bid 

Package #6 successful Bidder. 

6. Bid Package #5, Slab and Below Construction. Furnish and install all items necessary 

to complete the construction of the Transmission, Odessa and Well Field Transfer Pump 

Stations from the slabs and below. This includes all earthwork improvements, concrete 

construction, furnish and install misc. metals, coatings and linings, piping and 

accessories, drilled concrete piers, precast wire wound pre-stressed concrete storage 

tanks, plumbing and fencing to complete the three pump stations’ below slab 

construction. This includes the installation of pump cans supplied via Bid Package #1 

and any below slab valves supplied via Bid Package #2. 

7. Bid Package #6, Above Slab Construction. Furnish and install all items necessary to 

complete the construction of the Transmission, Odessa and Well Field Transfer Pump 

Stations from the slabs and above. This includes all earthwork improvements, concrete 

construction, furnish and install misc. metals, coatings and linings, piping and 

accessories, metal building systems, plumbing, HVAC, electrical and SCADA to 

complete the three pump stations’ above slab construction. This includes the 

installation of pumps supplied via Bid Package #1, any above slab valves supplied via 

Bid Package #2 and all Electrical Equipment supplied via Bid Package #4. 

8. Bid Package #7, Big Spring Pump Station. Furnish and install all items necessary to 

complete the construction of the Big Spring Pump Station, except for the 

SCADA/Instrumentation items contained in Bid Package #6. This includes the 

unloading and installation of booster pump skid provided by the CMAR. 

B. Successful BIDDER shall commit to, and attend weekly coordination and planning meetings 

hosted by CMAR to keep all bidders from impacting work activities of other trades during the 

entire project duration. 

C. Construction schedule may need to be adjusted around the vertical turbine submersible 

pumping unit’s lead time. Pump Orders will be coordinated by the Engineers/CMAR based on 

progress of the 21 new water supply wells currently under construction. The BIDDER will be 

responsible for Contract Milestones regardless of pump availability and encouraged to 

complete other components of the Work when the pumping units are not available. 




5/24/2012

1.08 CONSTRUCTION UTILITIES 

A. Cost for Temporary Facilities, Controls as described in this section and provided by 

BIDDER’S Suppliers and Subcontractors as described in this section are to be included in the 

Cost of Work. 

1. Temporary power connections shall be provided by BIDDER and shall not adversely 

affect existing CMRWD operations. 

2. Potable water must be provided by BIDDER. Non-potable will be provided by owner 

and may be used for hydraulic testing of pipelines but any cost associated with the 

transporting of water is the responsibility of the BIDDER. 

3. BIDDER shall include cost for construction, testing, disinfection, and startup in cost of 

their work. 

4. Daily cleanup of work areas shall be the responsibility of BIDDER and costs shall be 

included in bid price. 

B. Onsite staging areas will be provided to the successful BIDDER. 





5/24/2012

Payment Procedures

01 29 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 

1.00 GENERAL 

1.01 WORK INCLUDED 

A. Payments for Work shall conform to the provisions of the General Conditions, the 

Supplementary Conditions, the Agreement, and this Section. Apply provisions for payments 

in the section to all Subcontractors and Suppliers. 

B. Submit Applications for Payment at the amounts indicated in the Agreement 

1. Amounts for each item in the Agreement shall include but not be limited to cost for: 

a. Mobilization, demobilization, cleanup, bonds, and insurance, 

b. Professional services including but not limited to engineering and legal fees, 

c. The products to be permanently incorporated into the project, 

d. The products consumed during the construction of the project, 

e. The labor and supervision to complete the project, 

f. The equipment, including tools, machinery, and appliances required to complete the 

project. 

2. Payment will be made for materials on hand. 

a. Store materials properly on site per Section 01 31 00, Project Management And 

Coordination. 

1) Payment will be made for the invoice amount less the specified retainage of 10 

percent. 

2) Provide invoices at the time materials are included on the materials-on-hand 

tabulation. 

b. Provide documentation of payment for materials-on-hand with the next Application 

for Payment. Adjust payment to the amount actually paid if this differs from the 

invoice amount. Remove items from the materials on hand tabulation if this 

documentation is not provided so payment will not be made. 

c. Payment for materials-on-hand is provided for the convenience of the Bidder and 

does not constitute acceptance of the product. 

3. The Work covered by progress payments becomes the property of the Owner at the 

time of payment. 

1.02 SCHEDULE OF VALUES AND PAYMENTS 

A. Submit a detailed Schedule of Values for the Work to be performed on the project. 

1. Submit schedule within 10 days prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. 

2. Line items in the Agreement are to be used as line items in the schedule. 

3. Payment will be made on the quantity of Work completed per Contract Documents 

during the payment period and as measured per this section. 

a. Payment amount is the Work quantity measured multiplied by the unit prices for 

that line item in the Agreement. 

b. Partial payments will be made for lump sum line items in the Agreement. 

1) Lump sum line items in the Agreement are to be divided into smaller unit prices 

to allow more accurate determination of the percentage of the item that has 

been completed. 

a) Provide adequate detail to allow more accurate determination of the 

percentage of Work completed for each item. 

Payment Procedures – Bid Package #8 01 29 00-1 


Ward County Supply Expansion Project – North Well Field 

5/24/2012

) Provide amounts for items that do not exceed $50,000.00. An exception 

may be made for equipment packages that cannot be subdivided into units 

or subassemblies. 

c) Separate product costs and installation costs. 

1. Product costs include cost for products, delivery and unloading costs, 

royalties and patent fees, taxes, and other cost paid directly to the 

Subcontractor or Supplier. 

2. Installation costs (if applicable) include cost for the supervision, labor 

and equipment for field fabrication, erection, installation, start-up, 

initial operation and overhead and profit. 

d) Lump sum items may be divided into an estimated number of units. 

1. The estimated number of units times the cost per unit must equal the 

lump sum amount for that line item. 

2. Payment will be made for all of the lump sum line item amount. 

e) Include a directly proportional amount of overhead and profit for each line 

item. 

f) Divide principal subcontract amounts into an adequate number of line items 

to allow determination of the percentage of Work completed for each item. 

2) These line items may be used to establish the value of Work to be added or 

deleted from the project. 

3) Correlate line items with other administrative schedules and forms: 

a) Progress schedule, 

b) List of Subcontractors, 

c) Schedule of allowances, 

d) Schedule of alternatives, 

e) List of products and principal Suppliers, and 

f) Schedule of Submittals 

4) Costs for mobilization (if applicable) shall be listed as a separate line items and 

shall be actual cost for: 

a) Bonds and insurance, 

b) Transportation and setup for equipment, 

c) Transportation and/or erection of all field offices, sheds and storage 

facilities, 

d) Salaries for preparation of submittals required before the first Application 

for Payment, 

5) The sum of all values listed in the schedule must equal the total contract 

amount. 

4. Submit a schedule indicating the anticipated schedule of payments to be made by the 

Owner. Schedule shall indicate: 

a. The Application for Payment number, 

b. Date the request is to be submitted, and 

c. Anticipated amount of payment to be requested. 

5. Update the Schedule of Values quarterly or more often if necessary to provide a 

reasonably accurate indication of the funds that the Owner will need to have available 

to make payment to the CMAR for the Work performed. 

B. Provide written approval of the Schedule of Values, Application for Payment form, and 

method of payment by the Surety Company providing performance, and bonds (if 




5/24/2012

applicable) prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. Payment will not be made 

without this approval. 

1.03 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 

A. Submit Applications for Payment per the procedures indicated in Section 01 33 00, 

Submittal Procedures. Submit a Schedule of Values in the Application for Payment format 

to be used. 

B. Applications for Payment may be submitted on a pre -printed form as indicated in Section 

01 31 13 13, Forms or may be generated by computer. Computer generated payment 

requests must have the same format and information indicated in the pre-printed form and 

be approved by the Engineer. 

a. Indicate the total contract amount and the Work completed to date on the Tabulation 

of Values for Original Contract Performed (Attachment "A".) 

b. Include only approved Change Order items in the Tabulation of Extra Work on Approved 

Change Orders (Attachment "B".) 

c. List all materials on hand that are presented for payment on the Tabulation of Materials 

on Hand (Attachment "C".) Once an item has been entered on the tabulation it is not to 

be removed. 

d. Include the Project Summary Report (Attachment "D") with each Application for 

Payment. Data included in the Project Summary Report are to be taken from the other 

tabulations. Include a completed summary as indicated in with each Application for 

Payment submitted. 

1) Number each application sequentially and indicate the payment period. 

2) Show the total amounts for value of original contract performed, extra Work on 

approved Change Orders, and materials on hand on the Project Summary Report. 

Show total amounts that correspond to totals indicated on the attached tabulation 

for each. 

3) Note the number of pages in tabulations in the blank space on the Project Summary 

Report to allow a determination that all sheets have been submitted. 

4) Execute CMAR's certification by the CMAR's agent of authority and notarize for each 

Application for Payment. 

5. Do not alter the schedule of values and the form for the submission of requests without 

the written approval of the Engineer once these have been approved by the Engineer. 

6. Final payment requires additional procedures and documentation per Section 01 70 00, 

Execution and Closeout Requirements. 

C. Progress payments shall be made as the Work progresses on a monthly basis. 

1. End the payment period on the day indicated in the Agreement and submit an 

Application for Payment for Work completed and materials received since the end of 

the last payment period. 

2. At the end of the payment period, submit a draft copy of the Application for Payment 

for that month to the CMAR. Agreement is to be reached on: 

a) The percentage of Work completed for each lump sum item, 

b) The quantity of Work completed for each unit price item, 

c) The percentage of Work completed for each approved Change Order item, and 

d) The amount of materials on hand. 




5/24/2012

3. On the basis of these agreements the CMAR is to prepare a final copy of the Application 

for Payment and submit it to the Engineer for approval. 

4. The Engineer will review the Application for Payment and if appropriate will recommend 

payment of the application to the Owner. 

1.04 MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES 

A. Measure the Work described in the Agreement for payment. Payment will be made only for 

the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight, 

unless otherwise specifically provided. No extra or customary measurements of any kind will 

be allowed. 

1.05 BASIS OF PAYMENT 

A. The Basis of Payment will be established with the Accepted Bid Proposal. 





5/24/2012

Project Management 

and Coordination

01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 

1.00 GENERAL 


A. Furnish equipment, manpower, products, and other items necessary to complete the 

Project with an acceptable standard of quality and within the contract time. Construct 

Project in accordance with current safety practices. 

B. Manage Site to allow access to Site and control construction operations. 

C. Provide labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to construct temporary 

facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove 

temporary facilities when no longer needed. 

D. Construct temporary impounding works, channels, diversions, furnishing and operation of 

pumps, installing piping and fittings, and other construction for control of conditions at the 

Site. Remove temporary controls at the end of the Project. 

E. Provide temporary controls for pollutions, management of water and management of 

excess earth as required in Section 01 57 00 Temporary Controls. 

F. Cost for Project Management and Coordination as described in this section are to be 

included in the BIDDER’s fee for Bid Package #8. 

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 

A. Employ competent workmen, skilled in the occupation for which they are employed. 

Provide Work meeting quality requirements of the Contract Documents as determined by 

the Owner/CMAR/Engineer . 

B. Remove defective Work from the Site immediately unless provisions have been made and 

approved by the CMAR/Engineer to allow repair of the product at the Site. Clearly mark the 

Work as "Defective" until it is removed or allowable repairs have been completed. 

1.03 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 

C. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures: 

1.04 STANDARDS 

1. Provide copies of Supplier’s printed storage instructions prior to furnishing materials or 

products and installation instructions prior to beginning the installation. Maintain one 

copy of these documents at the Site until the Project is complete. Incorporate this 

information into submittals. 

2. Incorporate field notes, sketches, recordings, and computations made by the 

CMAR/Engineer in Record Drawings. 

A. Perform Work to comply Laws and Regulations. 

B. Provide materials and equipment that has National Science Foundation 60/61 approval for 

use in potable water supply systems. Advise the Engineer of any material requirements in 

these Contract Documents that conflict with National Science Foundation 60/61 

requirements. 

Project Management and Coordination – Bid Package #8 01 31 00-1 



5/24/2012

1.05 PERMITS 

A. Building Permit will be obtained by CMAR, if necessary but any special permits associated 

with Bid Package #6 should be included in the Cost of Work for Bid Package #6. 

B. Retain copies of permits and licenses at the Site and observe and comply with all regulations 

and conditions of the permit or license, including additional insurance requirements. 

C. Obtain and pay for all other necessary permits including any and all necessary highway, 

street and road permits for transporting construction materials and/or heavy equipment 

necessary for fulfilling the any and all construction associated with Bid Package #8. 

D. Obtain and pay for other permits necessary to conduct any part of the Work. 

E. Arrange and pay for inspections and certifications by agencies having jurisdiction over the all 

work associated with Bid Package #8. 

1.06 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 

A. Assume sole responsibility for safety at the Site. Protect the safety and welfare of persons 

at the Site. 

B. Provide safe access to move through the Site. Provide and maintain barricades, guard rails, 

covered walkways, and other protective devices to warn and protect from hazards at the 

Site. 

C. Comply with latest provisions of the Occupational Health and Safety Administration (OSHA) 

and other regulatory agencies in performing Work. 

D. Cooperate with accident investigations related to the Site. Provide two copies of all reports 

prepared concerning accidents, injury, or death on the Site to the CMAR/Engineer as Record 

Data per Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures. 

1.07 COORDINATION 

A. Coordinate the Work of various trades having interdependent responsibilities for installing, 

connecting to, and placing equipment in service. 

B. Coordinate requests for substitutions to provide compatibility of space, operating elements, 

effect on the Work of other trades, and on the Work scheduled for early completion. 

C. Coordinate the use of Project space and the sequence of installation of equipment, 

elevators, walks, mechanical, electrical, plumbing, or other Work that is indicated 

diagrammatically on the Drawings. 

1. Follow routings shown for tubes, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other items as closely as 

practical, with due allowance for available physical space. 

2. Use space efficiently to maximize accessibility for Owner's maintenance and repairs. 

3. Schematics are diagrammatic in nature. Adjust routing of piping, ductwork, utilities, and 

location of equipment as needed to resolve spatial conflicts between the various trades. 

Document the actual routing on the Record Drawings. 

D. Conceal ducts, pipes, wiring, and other non-finish items in finished areas, except as 

otherwise shown. Coordinate locations of concealed items with finish elements. 




5/24/2012

E. Coordinate with architectural reflected ceiling plans the exact location and dimensioning of 

items which occur within hung ceilings. Request clarification from the Engineer prior to 

proceeding with fabrication or installation if a conflict exists. 

F. Schedule construction activities in sequence required to obtain best results where 

installation of one part of the Work is dependent on installation of other components, either 

before or after its own installation. 

G. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation, including: 

1. Accepted alternates, 

2. Installation of products purchased with allowances, 

3. Work by others, 

4. Owner-supplied, BIDDER-installed items. 

H. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of mechanical, electrical, and 

other systems, materials, and equipment if applicable. Comply with the following 

requirements: 

1. Coordinate mechanical and electrical systems, equipment, and materials installation 

with other building components. 

2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 

3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of 

construction. 

4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in castin-place 

concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. 

5. Install systems, materials, and equipment as permitted by codes to provide the 

maximum headroom possible where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned. 

6. Coordinate the connection of systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities 

and services. Comply with the requirements of governing regulations, franchised 

service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each 

service. 

7. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, 

including coordination drawings, to the greatest extent possible. Conform to 

arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the 

Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Adjust routing of piping, ductwork, utilities, 

and location of equipment as needed to resolve spatial conflicts between the various 

trades. Document changes in the indicated routings on the Record Drawings. 

8. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to 

other building systems and components. 

9. Install systems, materials, and equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair 

or replacement of components. As much as practical, connect for ease of disconnecting, 

with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to 

accessible locations. 

10. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. 

11. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems 

required to be installed at a specified slope. 

1.08 BIDDER'S USE OF SITE 

A. Limit the use of Site for Work and storage to those areas designated on the Drawings or 

approved by the Engineer. Coordinate the use of the premises with the CMAR/Engineer. 




5/24/2012

B. Repair or correct any damage to existing facilities, including contamination, caused by the 

BIDDER's personnel, visitors, materials, or equipment. 

C. Do not permit alcoholic beverages or illegal substances on the Site. Do not allow persons 

under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances to enter or remain on the 

Site at any time. Persons on Site under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal 

substances will be permanently prohibited from returning to the Site. Criminal or civil 

penalties may also apply. 

D. Park construction equipment in designated areas only and provide spill control measures as 

discussed in Section 01 57 00 Temporary Controls. 

E. Park employees' vehicles in designated areas only. 

F. Obtain written permission of the Owner before entering privately-owned land outside of the 

Owner's property, rights-of-way, or easements. 

G. Do not allow the use of loud audio devices, obnoxious, vulgar or abusive language, or sexual 

harassment in any form. These actions will cause immediate and permanent removal of the 

offender from the premises. Criminal or civil penalties may apply. 

H. Require Workers to wear clothing that is inoffensive and meets safety requirements. Do not 

allow sleeveless shirts, shorts, exceedingly torn, ripped or soiled clothing to be worn on the 

project. 

I. Do not allow firearms or weapons of any sort to be brought on to the Site under any 

conditions. No exception is to be made for persons with concealed handgun permits. 

Remove any firearms or weapons and the person possessing these firearms or weapons 

permanently and immediately from the Site. 

1.09 ACCESS TO THE SITE 

A. Maintain access to the facilities at all times. Do not obstruct roads, pedestrian walks, or 

access to the various buildings, structures, stairways, or entrances. Provide safe temporary 

walks or other structures to allow access for normal operations during construction. 

B. Provide adequate and safe access for inspections. Leave ladders, bridges, scaffolding and 

protective equipment in place until inspections have been completed. Construct additional 

safe access if required for inspections. 

C. Provide security at the Site as necessary to protect against vandalism and loss by theft. 

D. Use State, County, or City roadways for construction traffic only with written approval of the 

appropriate representatives of each entity. State, County, or City roadways may not all be 

approved for construction traffic. Obtain written approval to use State, County, City or 

private roads to deliver pipe and/or heavy equipment to the Site. Copies of the written 

approvals must be furnished to the Owner as Record Data before Work begins. No 

additional compensation will be paid because the BIDDER is unable to gain access to the 

easement from public roadways. 

1.10 PROPERTY PROVISIONS 

A. Make adequate provisions to maintain the flow of storm sewers, sanitary sewers, drains and 

water courses encountered during the construction. Provide temporary service around the 

construction or otherwise construct the structure in a manner that the flow is not curtailed. 




5/24/2012

Restore structures which may have been disturbed during construction to their original 

position as soon as construction in the area is completed. 

B. Protect trees, fences, signs, poles, guy wires, and all other property unless their removal is 

authorized. Restore any property damaged to equal or better condition per Paragraph 1.11 

of this Section. 

1.11 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES 

A. Examine the project site and review the available information concerning the site. Locate 

utilities, streets, driveways, fences, drainage structures, sidewalks, curbs, and gutters. 

Verify the elevations of the structures adjacent to excavations. Report these to the 

CMAR/Engineer before beginning construction. 

B. Determine if existing structures, poles, piping, or other utilities at excavations will require 

relocation or replacement. Prepare a Plan of Action. Coordinate Work with 

Owner/CMAR/Engineer, local utility company and others. Include cost of demolition and 

replacement, restoration or relocation of these structures in the Cost of Work. 

C. Protect buildings, utilities, street surfaces, driveways, sidewalks, curb and gutter, fences, 

wells, drainage structures, piping, valves, manholes, electrical conduits, and other systems 

or structures unless they are shown to be replaced or relocated on the Drawings. Restore 

damage to items to be protected to the satisfaction of the CMAR/Engineer, utility owner 

and Owner without additional compensation from the Owner. 

D. Carefully support and protect all structures and/or utilities so that there will be no failure or 

settlement where excavation or demolition endangers adjacent structures and utilities. Do 

not take existing utilities out of service unless show in the Contract Documents or approved 

by the Engineer. Notify and cooperate with the utility owner if it is necessary to move 

services, poles, guy wires, pipelines or other obstructions. Include the cost of relocation and 

permits require to move existing utilities in the Cost of Work. 

E. Protect existing trees and landscaping at the site, if applicable. 

1. Visit site with CMAR/Engineer to identify trees that may be removed during 

construction. 

2. Mark trees to be removed with paint. 

3. Protect trees to remain from damage by wrapping trunks with 2 x 4 timbers around the 

perimeter, securely wired in place, where machinery must operate around existing 

trees. Protect branches and limbs from damage by equipment. 

F. Protect buildings from damage when handling material or equipment. Protect finished 

surfaces, including floors, doors, and jambs. Remove doors and install temporary wood 

protective coverings over jambs. 

1.12 DISRUPTION TO SERVICES / CONTINUED OPERATIONS 

A. Existing facilities are to continue in service as usual during the construction unless noted 

otherwise. Owner or utilities must be able to operate and maintain the facilities. 

Disruptions to existing utilities, piping, process piping, or electrical services shall be kept to a 

minimum. 

1. Do not restrict access to critical valves, operators, or electrical panels. 

2. Do not store material or products inside structures. 




5/24/2012

3. Limit operations to the minimum amount of space needed to complete the specified 

Work. 

4. Maintain storm sewers and sanitary sewers in service at all times. Provide temporary 

service around the construction or otherwise construct the structure in a manner that 

the flow is not restricted. 

B. Provide a Plan of Action if facilities must be taken out of operation. 

1.13 FIELD MEASUREMENTS 

A. Perform complete field measurements for products required to fit existing conditions prior 

to purchasing products or beginning construction. 

B. Verify property lines, control lines, grades, and levels indicated on the Drawings. 

C. Verify pipe class, equipment capacities, existing electrical systems and power sources for 

existing conditions. 

D. Check Shop Drawings and indicate the actual dimensions available where products are to be 

installed. 

E. Include field measurements in record drawings as required in Section 01 31 13, Project 

Coordination. 

1.14 REFERENCE DATA AND CONTROL POINTS 

A. The Engineer will provide the following control points: 

1. Reference data provided on the contract drawings. 

B. Locate and protect control points prior to starting the Work and preserve permanent 

reference points during construction. Do not change or relocate points without prior 

approval of the Engineer. Notify CMAR/Engineer when the reference point is lost, 

destroyed, or requires relocation. Replace Project control points on the basis of the original 

survey. 

C. Provide complete engineering layout of the work needed for construction. 

1. Provide competent personnel. Provide equipment including accurate surveying 

instruments, stakes, platforms, tools, and materials. 

2. Provide surveying with accuracy meeting the requirements established for Category 5 

Construction Surveying as established in the Manual of Practice of Land Surveying in 

Texas published by the Texas Society of Professional Surveyors, latest revision. 

3. Record data and measurements per standards. 

1.15 DELIVERY AND STORAGE 

A. Deliver products and materials to the Site in time to prevent delays in construction. 

B. Deliver packaged products to Site in original undamaged containers with identifying labels 

attached. Open cartons as necessary to check for damage and to verify invoices. Reseal 

cartons and store properly until used. Leave products in packages or other containers until 

installed. 

C. Deliver products that are too large to fit through openings to the Site in advance of the time 

enclosing walls and roofs are erected. Set in place, raised above floor on cribs. 




5/24/2012

D. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products stored at the Site. 

E. Store products at locations acceptable to the CMAR/Engineer and to allow Owner access to 

maintain and operate existing facilities. 

F. Store products in accordance with the Supplier's storage instructions immediately upon 

delivery. Leave seals and labels intact. Arrange storage to allow access for maintenance of 

stored items and for inspection. Store unpacked and loose products on shelves, in bins, or 

in neat groups of like items. 

G. Obtain and pay for the use of any additional storage areas as needed for construction. Store 

products subject to damage by elements in substantial weather-tight enclosures or storage 

sheds. Provide and maintain storage sheds as required for the protection of products. 

Provide temperature, humidity control and ventilation within the ranges stated in the 

Supplier's instructions. Remove storage facilities at the completion of the Project. 

H. Protect the pipe interior. Keep all foreign materials such as dirt, debris, animals, or other 

objects out of the pipe during the Work. Cap or plug ends of installed pipe in an approved 

manner when pipe is not being installed. Clean or wash out pipe sections that become 

contaminated before continuing with installation. Take precautions to prevent the pipe 

from floating or moving out of the proper position during or after laying operations. 

Immediately correct any pipe that moves from its correct position. 

I. Provide adequate exterior storage for products that may be stored out-of-doors. 

1. Provide substantial platforms, blocking, or skids to support materials and products 

above ground; slope to provide drainage. Protect products from soiling or staining. 

2. Cover products subject to dislocation or deterioration from exposure to the elements, 

with impervious sheet materials. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation below 

covering. 

3. Store loose, granular materials on clean, solid surfaces, or on rigid sheet materials, to 

prevent mixing with foreign matter. 

4. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of water. 

5. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids with stored 

materials. 

6. Pipes and conduits stored outdoors are to have open ends sealed to prevent the 

entrance of dirt, moisture, and other injurious materials. Protect PVC pipe from 

ultraviolet light exposure. 

7. Store light weight products to prevent wind damage. 

J. Protect and maintain mechanical and electrical equipment in storage. 

1. Provide Supplier's service instructions on the exterior of the package. 

2. Service equipment on a regular basis as recommended by the Supplier. Maintain a log 

of maintenance services. Submit the log as Record Data at the completion of the 

Project. 

3. Provide power to and energize space heaters for all equipment for which these devices 

are provided. 

4. Provide temporary enclosures for all electrical equipment, including electrical systems 

on mechanical devices. Provide and maintain heat in the enclosures until equipment is 

energized. 




5/24/2012

K. Maintain storage facilities. Inspect stored products on a weekly basis and after periods of 

severe weather to verify that: 

1. Storage facilities continue to meet specified requirements. 

2. Supplier's required environmental conditions are continually maintained. 

3. Surfaces of products exposed to the elements are not adversely affected. 

L. Replace any stored item damaged by inadequate protection or environmental controls. 

M. Payment may be withheld for any products not properly stored. 

1.16 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION 

A. Provide positive methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations and provide 

positive means to prevent air-borne dust from disbursing into the atmosphere. Control dust 

and dirt from demolition, cutting, and patching operations. 

B. Clean the Project as Work progresses and dispose of waste materials, keeping the Site free 

from accumulations of waste or rubbish. Provide containers on Site for waste collection. Do 

not allow waste materials or debris to blow around or off of the Site. Control dust from 

waste materials. Transport waste materials with as few handlings as possible. 

C. Comply with codes, ordinances, regulations, and anti-pollution laws. Do not burn or bury 

waste materials. Remove waste materials, rubbish and debris from the Site and legally 

dispose of these at public or private dumping areas. 

1.17 MAINTENANCE OF ROADS, DRIVEWAYS, AND ACCESS 

A. Maintain roads and streets in a manner that is suitable for safe operations of public vehicle 

during all phases of construction unless the Owner approves a street closing. Submit a 

written request for Owner's approval of a street closing. The request shall state: 

1. The reason for closing the street. 

2. How long the street will remain closed. 

3. Procedures to be taken to maintain the flow of traffic. 

4. Do not close public roads overnight. 

B. Construct temporary detours, including by-pass roads around construction, with adequately 

clear width to maintain the free flow of traffic at all times. Maintain barricades, signs, and 

safety features around the detour and excavations. 

C. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the Work in accordance with all 

provisions of the latest edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD.) 

D. Assume responsibility for any damage resulting from construction along roads or drives. 

1.18 BLASTING 

A. Blasting for excavations is not allowed. 

1.19 ARCHAEOLOGICAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. Cease operations immediately and contact the Owner for instructions if an historical or 

archaeological find is made during construction. 




5/24/2012

B. Conduct all construction activities to avoid adverse impact on the Sites where significant 

historical or archaeological Sites have been identified at the Site. 

1. Obtain details for Working in these areas. 

2. Maintain confidentiality regarding the Site. 

3. Adhere to the requirements of the Texas Historical Commission. 

4. Notify the Owner and the Texas Historical Commission. 

C. Do not disturb Archaeological Sites. 

1. Obtain the services of a qualified archaeological specialist to instruct construction 

personnel on how to identify and protect archaeological finds on an emergency basis. 

2. Coordinate activities to permit Archaeological Work to take place within the area. 

a. Attempt to archaeologically clear areas needed for construction as soon as possible. 

b. Provide a determination of priority for such areas. 

D. Assume responsibility for any unauthorized destruction that might result to such Sites by 

construction personnel, and pay all penalties assessed by the State or Federal agencies for 

non-compliance with these requirements. 

E. Contract time will be modified to compensate for delays caused by such archaeological 

finds. No additional compensation shall be paid for delays. 

1.20 CUTTING AND PATCHING 

A. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching required to complete the work or to: 

1. Uncover work to provide for installation of new work or the correction of defective 

work. 

2. Provide routine penetrations of non-structural surfaces for installation of mechanical, 

electrical, and plumbing work. 

3. Uncover work that has been covered prior to observation by the Engineer. 

B. Submit written notification to the CMAR/Engineer in advance of performing any cutting 

which affects: 

1. Work of any other contractor, CMAR or the Owner. 

2. Structural integrity of any structure or system of the project. 

3. Integrity or effectiveness of weather exposed or moisture resistant structure or systems. 

4. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance, or safety of any structure or system. 

5. Appearance of any structure or surfaces exposed occasionally or constantly to view. 

C. The notification shall include: 

1. Identification of the project. 

2. Location and description of affected work. 

3. Reason for cutting, alteration, or excavation. 

4. Effect on the work of any separate contractor, CMAR or Owner. 

5. Effect on the structural or weatherproof integrity of the project. 

6. Description of proposed work, including: 

a. Scope of cutting, patching, or alteration. 

b. Trades that will perform the work. 

c. Products proposed for use. 

d. Extent of refinishing to be performed. 




5/24/2012

e. Cost proposal, when applicable. 

7. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 

8. Written authorization from any separate contractor whose work would be affected. 

9. Date and time work will be uncovered or altered. 

D. Examine the existing conditions, including structures subject to damage or to movement 

during cutting or patching. 

1. Inspect conditions affecting installation of products or performance of the work after 

uncovering the work. 

2. Provide a written report of unacceptable or questionable conditions to the 

CMAR/Engineer. The BIDDER shall not proceed with work until CMAR/Engineer has 

provided further instructions. Beginning work will constitute acceptance of existing 

conditions by the BIDDER. 

E. Protect the structure and other parts of the work and provide adequate support to maintain 

the structural integrity of the affected portions of the work. Provide devices and methods 

to protect adjacent work and other portions of the project from damage. Provide 

protection from the weather for portions of the project that may be exposed by cutting and 

patching work. 

F. Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other work, and 

will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs. 

G. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with 

specified products, functions, tolerances, and finishes. 

H. Cut, remove, and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and 

materials as indicated, including but not limited to, the removal of mechanical piping, 

heating units, plumbing fixtures and trim, and other mechanical items made obsolete by the 

modified work. 

I. Restore work which has been cut or removed. Install new products to provide completed 

work per the Contract Documents. 

J. Fit work air-tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through the 

surfaces. Where fire rated separations are penetrated, fill the space around the pipe or 

insert with materials with physical characteristics equivalent to fire resistance requirements 

of penetrated surface. 

K. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new products specified for the 

original installation. 

L. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes: 

1. For continuous surfaces, refinish to the nearest intersection. 

2. For an assembly, refinish the entire unit. 

1.21 PRELIMINARY OCCUPANCY 

A. Owner may deliver, install and connect equipment, furnishings, or other apparatus in 

buildings or other structures. These actions do not indicate acceptance of any part of the 

building or structure and does not affect the start of warranties or correction periods. 

B. Protect the Owner's property after installation is complete. 




5/24/2012

C. Owner, CMAR or Engineer may use any product for testing or determine that the product 

meets the requirements of the Contract Documents. This use does not constitute 

acceptance by either the Owner, CMAR or Engineer. These actions do not indicate 

acceptance of any part of the product and does not affect the start of warranties or 

correction periods. 

1.22 INITIAL MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION 

A. Maintain equipment until the project is accepted by the Owner. Ensure that mechanical 

equipment is properly maintained as recommended by the Supplier. 

B. Do not operate air handling equipment unless filters are in place and are clean. Change 

filters weekly during construction. 

C. Provide maintenance and start-up services prior to acceptance of equipment, per Section 01 

75 00, Starting and Adjusting (Where applicable to Bid Package #8). 

D. Remove and clean screens and strainers in piping systems. 

E. Clean insects from intake louver screens. 

F. Provide documentation of maintenance and operations when Owner takes over operation 

and control of the Project. 

1.23 ENDANGERED SPECIES RESOURCES 

A. No activity is authorized that is likely to jeopardize the continued existence of a threatened 

or endangered species as listed or proposed for listing under the Federal Endangered 

Species Act (ESA), and/or the State of Texas Parks and Wildlife Code on Endangered Species, 

or to destroy or adversely modify the habitat of such species. 

B. If a threatened or endangered species is encountered during construction, the BIDDER shall 

immediately cease work in the area of the encounter and notify the CMAR/Owner, who will 

immediately implement actions in accordance with the ESA and applicable State statutes. 

These actions shall include reporting the encounter to the TWDB, the U. S. Fish and Wildlife 

Service, and the Texas Parks and Wildlife Department, obtaining any necessary approvals or 

permits to enable the work to continue, or implement other mitigative actions. The BIDDER 

shall not resume construction in the area of the encounter until authorized to do so by the 

CMAR/Owner. 

2.00 PRODUCTS 

2.01 MATERIALS 

A. Provide materials in accordance with the requirements of the individual Sections. 

3.00 EXECUTION 

3.01 PERFORMANCE OF WORK 

A. Perform the Work per the Supplier's published instructions. Do not omit any preparatory 

step or installation procedure unless specifically exempted or modified by Field Order. 




5/24/2012





5/24/2012

Project Coordination

01 31 13 PROJECT COORDINATION 

1.00 GENERAL 


A. Administer contract requirements to construct the project. Provide documentation per the 

requirements of this Section. Provide information as requested by the CMAR, Engineer or 

Owner. 


A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures. 

1.03 COMMUNICATION DURING THE PROJECT 

A. The CMAR is to be the first point of contact for all parties on matters concerning this 

project. 

B. The CMAR will coordinate correspondence concerning: 

1. Submittals, including Applications for Payment, 

2. Clarification and interpretation of the Contract Documents, 

3. Contract modifications, 

4. Observation of work and testing, 

5. Claims. 

C. The CMAR will normally communicate only with the Bidder. Any required communication 

with Subcontractors or Suppliers will only be with the direct involvement of the Bidder. 

D. Direct written communications to the CMAR at the address indicated at the Preconstruction 

Conference. Include the following with communications as a minimum: 

1. Name of the Owner 

2. Project name 

3. Contract title 

4. Project number 

5. Date 

6. A reference statement 

E. Submit communications on the forms referenced in this Section or in Section 01 33 00, 

Submittal Procedures. 

1.04 PROJECT MEETINGS 

A. Pre-construction Conference 

1. Attend a pre-construction meeting. 

2. The location of the conference will be determined by the CMAR. 

3. The time of the meeting will be determined by the CMAR but will be after the Notice of 

Award is issued and not later than fifteen days after the Notice to Proceed is issued. 

4. The Owner, Engineer, CMAR, representatives of utility companies, the Bidder's project 

manager and superintendent, and representatives from major Subcontractors and 

Suppliers. 

5. Provide and be prepared to discuss: 

Project Coordination – Bid Package #8 01 31 13-1 



5/24/2012

a. Preliminary construction schedule per Section 01 32 16 Construction Progress 

Schedule (if applicable). 

b. Preliminary submittal schedule per Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures. 

c. Schedule of values and anticipated schedule of payments per Section 01 29 00, 

Payment Procedures. 

d. List of Subcontractors and Suppliers. 

e. Bidder's organizational chart as it relates to this project. 

f. Letter indicating the agents of authority for the Bidder’s and the limit of that 

authority with respect to the execution of legal documents, contract modifications 

and payment requests. 

B. Progress Meetings 

1. Attend meetings with the CMAR, Engineer and Owner as required. 

a. Meet on a monthly basis or as requested by the CMAR to discuss the project. 

b. Meet at the project site or other location as designated by the CMAR. 

c. Bidder's superintendent and other key personnel are to attend the meeting. Other 

individuals may be requested to attend to discuss specific matters. 

d. Notify the CMAR of any specific items to be discussed a minimum of one week prior 

to the meeting. 

2. Provide information as requested by the CMAR, Engineer or Owner concerning this 

project. Prepare to discuss: 

a. Status of overall project schedule. 

b. CMAR's detailed schedule for the next month. 

c. Anticipated delivery dates for equipment. 

d. Coordination with the Owner/Engineer/CMAR. 

e. Status of submittals. 

f. Information or clarification of the Contract Documents. 

g. Claims and proposed modifications to the contract. 

h. Field observations, problems, or conflicts. 

i. Maintenance of quality standards. 

3. Engineer/CMAR will prepare minutes of meetings. Review the minutes of the meeting 

and notify the Engineer/CMAR of any discrepancies within ten days of the date of the 

meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the ten days have 

expired. Corrections will be reflected in the minutes of the following meeting or as an 

attachment to the minutes. 

C. Pre-submittal and Pre-installation Meetings 

1. Conduct pre-submittal and pre-installation meetings as required in the individual 

technical Specifications or as determined necessary by the CMAR/Engineer (for 

example, instrumentation, roofing, concrete mix design, etc.). 

2. Attend the meeting and require the participation of appropriate Subcontractors and 

Suppliers in the meeting. 

3. CMAR will prepare minutes of the meeting for review. Bidder will review the minutes of 

the meeting and notify the CMAR of any discrepancies within ten days of the date of the 

meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the ten days have 

expired. Corrections will be reflected in a revised set of meeting minutes. 

1.05 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION 




5/24/2012

A. Submit Request for Information (RFI) to the CMAR to obtain additional information or 

clarification of the Contract Documents. 

1. Submit a separate RFI for each item on the form provided by the Engineer (provided 

after Notice of Award). 

2. Attach adequate information to permit a written response without further clarification. 

CMAR will return requests that do not have adequate information to the Bidder for 

additional information. Bidder is responsible for all delays resulting from multiple 

submittals due to inadequate information. 

3. A response will be made when adequate information is provided. Response will be 

made on the RFI form or in attached information. 

B. Response to an RFI is given to provide additional information, interpretation, or clarification 

of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and does not modify the Contract 

Documents. 

C. CMAR/Engineer will initiate a Contract Modification Request per Paragraph 1.08 if the RFI 

indicates that a contract modification is required. 

D. Use the Project Issues Log to document decisions made at meetings and actions to be taken 

in Accordance with Paragraph 1.06. 

1.06 PROJECT ISSUES LOG 

A. CMAR/Engineer will maintain a project issues log to document key decisions made at 

meeting and track action on these issues: 

1. Review the log prior to each regular meeting. 

2. Report actions taken subsequent to the previous progress meeting on items in the log 

assigned to the Bidder or through the Bidder to a Subcontractor or Supplier to the 

CMAR/Engineer. Report on status of progress one week prior to each progress meeting 

established in Paragraph 1.04 to allow CMAR/Engineer to update the log prior to the 

Progress meetings. 

3. Be prepared to discuss the status at each meeting. 

B. Decisions or action items in the log that require a change in the Contract Documents will 

have the preparation of a contract modification as an action items if appropriate. The 

Contract Documents can only be changed by a Change Order or Field Order. 

1.07 NOTIFICATION BY BIDDER 

A. Notify the CMAR of: 

1. Need for testing. 

2. Intent to work outside regular working hours. 

3. Request to shut down facilities or utilities. 

4. Proposed utility connections. 

5. Required observation by CMAR/Engineer or inspection agencies prior to covering work. 

6. Training. 

B. Provide notification a minimum of two (2) weeks in advance in order to allow CMAR, Owner 

and Engineer time to respond appropriately to the notification. 

C. Use "Notification By Contractor" form provided by the CMAR/Engineer (provided after 

Notice of Award). 




5/24/2012

1.08 REQUESTS FOR MODIFICATIONS 

A. Submit a request to the CMAR for any change in the Contract Documents. 

1. Use the "Contract Modification Request" (Contract Modification Request) form provided 

by the CMAR/Engineer (provided after Notice of Award). 

2. Assign a number to the Contract Modification Request when issued. 

3. Include with the Contract Modification Request: 

a. A complete description of the proposed modification. 

b. The reason the modification is requested. 

c. A detailed breakdown of the cost of the change (necessary only if the modification 

requires a change in contract amount). The itemized breakdown is to include: 

1) list of materials and equipment to be installed, 

2) man hours for labor by classification, 

3) equipment used in construction, 

4) consumable supplies, fuels, and materials, 

5) royalties and patent fees, 

6) bonds and insurance, 

7) overhead and profit, 

8) field office costs, and 

9) home office cost, 

10) other items of cost. 

d. Provide the level of detail outline in the paragraph above for each Subcontractor or 

Supplier actually performing the Work if work is to be provided by a Subcontractor 

or Supplier. Indicate appropriate Bidder mark ups for Work provided through 

Subcontractors and Suppliers. Provide the level of detail outline in the paragraph 

above for self performed Work. 

e. Provide a revised schedule indicating the effect on the critical path for the project 

and a statement of the number of days the project may be delayed by the 

modification. 

4. Submit a Contract Modification Request to the CMAR to request a field change. 

5. A Contract Modification Request is required for all substitutions or deviations from the 


6. CMAR will evaluate the request for a contract modification. 

B. Owner will initiate changes through the CMAR. 

1. CMAR will prepare a description of proposed modifications to the Contract Documents. 

2. CMAR will use the Contract Modification Request form. CMAR will assign a number to 

the Contract Modification Request when issued. 

3. Return the Contract Modification Request with a proposal to incorporate the requested 

change. Include a breakdown of costs into materials and labor in detail outline above to 

allow evaluation by the CMAR. 

C. CMAR will issue a Field Order or a Change Order per the General Conditions if a contract 

modification is appropriate. 

1. Modifications to the contract can only be made by a Field Order or a Change Order. 

2. Changes in the project will be documented by a Field Order or by a Change Order. 




5/24/2012

3. Field Orders may be issued by the Engineer for contract modifications that do not 

change the Contract Price or Contract Time. 

4. Any modifications that require a change in Contract Price or Contract Time can only be 

approved by Change Order. 

a. Proposals issued by the Bidder in response to a Contract Modification Request will 

be evaluated by the CMAR. 

b. If a Change Order is recommended, the CMAR will prepare the Change Order. 

c. The Change Order will be sent to the Bidder for execution with a copy to the Owner 

recommending approval. 

d. Change Orders can only be approved by the Owner. 

1) Work performed on the proposed contract modifications prior to the approval 

of the Change Order will be performed at the Bidder's risk. 

2) No payment will be made for work on Change Orders until approved by the 

Owner. 

D. The Bidder may be informed that the Contract Modification Request is not approved and 

construction is to proceed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 

1.09 RECORD DRAWINGS 

A. Maintain at the site one complete record copy of: 

1. Drawings, 

2. Specifications, 

3. Addenda, 

4. Contract modifications, 

5. Approved Shop Drawings and record data, 

6. One set of construction photographs, 

7. Test records, 

8. Clarifications and other information provided in Request for Information responses, and 

9. Reference standards 

B. Store documents and samples in the CMAR's field office. 

1. Documents are to remain separate from documents used for construction. Do not use 

these documents for construction. 

2. Provide files and racks for the storage of documents. 

3. Provide a secure storage space for the storage of samples. 

4. Maintain documents in clean, dry, legible conditions, and in good order. 

5. Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by the CMAR, 

Engineer and Owner. 

C. Marking Drawings 

1. Label each document as "Project Record" in large printed letters. 

2. Record information as construction is being performed. 

a. Do not conceal any Work until the required information is recorded. 

b. Mark drawings to record actual construction, including the following: 

1) Depths of various elements of the foundation in relation to finished first floor 

datum or the top of walls. 




5/24/2012

2) Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances 

constructed and existing utilities encountered during construction. 

3) Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the construction. 

Refer measurements to permanent structure on the surface. Include the 

following equipment: 

a) Piping 

b) Ductwork 

c) Equipment and control devices requiring periodic maintenance or repair 

d) Valves, unions, traps, and tanks 

e) Services entrance 

f) Feeders 

g) Outlets 

4) Changes of dimension and detail 

5) Changes made by Field Order and Change Order 

6) Details not on the original Drawings. Include field verified dimensions and 

clarifications, interpretations, and additional information issued in response to 

RFI’s. 

c. Mark Specifications and Addenda to identify products provided. 

1) Record product name, trade name, catalog number, and each Supplier (with 

address and phone number) of each product and item of equipment actually 

installed. 

2) Record changes made by Field Order and Change Order. 

d. Mark additional Work or information in erasable pencil. 

1) Use red for new or revised indication. 

2) Use purple for Work deleted or not installed (lines to be removed). 

3) Highlight items constructed per the Contract Documents in yellow. 

e. Submit record documents to CMAR for review and acceptance 30 days prior to final 

completion of the project. 

1) Provide one (1) set of marked up drawings. 

2) Provide six (6) sets of specifications. 

D. Applications for Payment will not be recommended for payment if record documents are 

found to be incomplete or not in order. Final payment will not be recommended without 

complete record documents. 

1.10 REVIEW BY CMAR, ENGINEER AND OWNER 

A. The Owner and authorized representatives and agents of the Owner shall have access to 

and be permitted to observe and review all work, materials, equipment, payrolls, personnel 

records, employment conditions, material invoices, and other relevant data and records 

pertaining to this Contract at all times, provided, however that all instructions and approval 

with respect to the Work will be given to the Bidder only by the Owner through authorized 

representatives or agents. 





5/24/2012

Construction Progress Schedule 

(See Attached Preliminary Schedule in Section)

01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 

1.00 GENERAL 

1.01 REQUIREMENTS 

A. Using the attached Preliminary Schedule prepare and submit a progress schedule for the 

Work and update the schedule on a monthly basis for the duration of the Project. The 

attached Preliminary Schedule is to help identify Milestone Dates that must be adhered 

and is not intended to instruct the BIDDER as to how to plan the applicable construction 

sequence to complete the construction project within the timer frames. 

B. Provide schedule in adequate detail to allow CMAR/Owner/Engineer to monitor the Work 

progress, to anticipate the time and amount of Applications for Payment, and to relate 

submittal processing to sequential activities of the work. 

C. Incorporate and specifically designate the dates of anticipated submission of submittals and 

the dates when submittals must be returned to the BIDDER into the schedule. 

D. Assume complete responsibility for maintaining the progress of the Work per the schedule 

submitted. 


A. Submit progress schedules in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures. 

Submit schedules within the following times: 

1. Detailed schedule within 10 days after the Bid Date and notification of intent to award. 

The schedule is to be available at the pre-construction conference. 

B. Submit progress schedules with Applications for Payment. Schedules may be used to 

evaluate the Applications for Payment. Failure to submit the schedule may cause delay in 

the review and approval of Applications for Payment. 

1.03 SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Schedule is to be in adequate detail to: 

1. Assure adequate planning, scheduling, and reporting during the execution of the Work. 

2. Assure the coordination of the Work of the BIDDER and the various Subcontractors and 

Suppliers. 

3. Assist in monitoring the progress of the work. 

4. Assist in evaluating proposed changes to Contract Time and project schedule. 

5. Assist the CMAR/Engineer/Owner in review of Contractor's Application for Payment. 

B. Provide the schedule in the form of a time scaled horizontal bar chart which indicates 

graphically the Work scheduled at any time during the Project. The graph is to indicate: 

1. Complete sequence of construction by activity. 

2. Identification of the activity by structure, location, and type of Work. 

3. Chronological order of the start of each item of work. 

4. The activity start and stop dates. 

5. The activity duration. 

Construction Process Schedule – Bid Package #8 01 32 16-1 


Ward County Water Supply Expansion Project – North Well Fields 

5/24/2012

6. Successor and predecessor relationships for each activity. Group related activities or 

use lines to indicate relationships. 

7. A clearly indicated critical path. Indicate only one critical path on the schedule. The 

subsystem with the longest time of completion is the critical path where several 

subsystems each have a critical path. Float time is to be assigned to other subsystems. 

8. Projected percentage of completion, based on dollar value of the Work included in each 

activity to the last day of the pay period for each Applications for Payment. 

C. Submit a separate submittal schedule indicating the dates when the submittals are to be 

sent to the CMAR/Engineer. 

1. List specific dates submittal is to be sent to the CMAR/Engineer. 

2. List specific dates submittal must be processed in order to meet the proposed schedule. 

3. Allow a reasonable time to review submittals, taking into consideration the size and 

complexity of the submittal, the submission of other submittals, and other factors that 

may affect review time. 

4. Allow time for re-submission of the submittals for each item. BIDDER is responsible for 

delays associated with additional time required to review incomplete or erroneous 

submittals and for the time lost when submittals are submitted for products that do not 

meet specification requirements. 

D. Update the schedule at the end of each monthly partial payment period to indicate the 

progress made on the project to that date. 

1.04 SCHEDULE REVISIONS 

A. Submit a written report if the schedule indicates that the Project is more than thirty days 

behind schedule. The report is to include: 

1. Number of days Project is behind schedule. 

2. Narrative description of the steps to be taken to bring the Project back on schedule. 

3. Anticipated time required to bring the Project back on schedule. 

Submit a revised schedule indicating the action that the BIDDER proposes to take to bring 

the Project back on schedule. 

B. Revise the schedule to indicate any adjustments in Contract Time approved by Change 

Order. 

1. Revised schedule is to be included with Contract Modification Request for which an 

extension of time is requested. 

2. Failure to submit a revised schedule indicates that the modification shall have no impact 

on the ability of the BIDDER to complete the project on time and that the cost 

associated with the change of additional plant or work force have been included in the 

cost proposed for the modification. 

C. Updating the project schedule to reflect actual progress is not considered a revision to the 

project schedule. 

D. Applications for Payment will not be recommended for payment without a revised schedule 

and if required, the report indicating the BIDDER's plan for bringing the project back on 

schedule. 




5/24/2012

1.05 FLOAT TIME 

A. Define float time as the amount of time between the earliest start date and the latest start 

date of a chain of activities on the construction schedule. 

B. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the BIDDER, CMAR or Owner. 

C. Contract time cannot be changed by the submission of this schedule. Contract Time can 

only be modified by approved Change Order. 

D. Schedule completion date must be the same as the contract completion date. Time 

between the end of construction and the contract final completion date is to be indicated as 

float time. 





5/24/2012

Bid Package #8 ‐ Raw Water Supply Well Sites ‐ Ward County ‐ North Well Field 

Legend B = Begin Activity X = Activity C = Complete Activity 

Site Description of Work Start Date Finish Date 

May 

August September October November 

29‐5 6‐12 13‐19 20‐26 27‐2 3‐9 10‐16 17‐23 24‐30 1‐7 8‐14 15‐21 22‐28 29‐4 5‐11 12‐18 19‐25 26‐1 2‐8 9‐15 16‐22 23‐29 30‐6 7‐13 14‐20 21‐27 28‐3 4‐10 11‐17 18‐24 25‐1 

NWF 

NWF Procure Pumps D 4, 9, 10‐15, 17‐19, 22‐24 5/1/2012 

BXXXX 

7/31/2012 

XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XCXXX 

NWF Procure Pumps D 1‐3, 5‐8 6/8/2012 9/28/2012 

BXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXCX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXC 

NWF Deliver SCADA Equipment TBD TBD 

NWF Well Field Construction 7/31/2012 11/1/2012 

BXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXC 

NWF Substantial Completion 11/1/2012 11/1/2012 

XXXXC 

NWF Final Completion 11/1/2012 11/30/2012 

XXXXB XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXC 

NWF 

June 

July

Submittal Procedures

01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 

1.00 GENERAL 


A. Submit documentation as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested 

by the CMAR, Owner and Engineer to: 

1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner. 

2. Provide information for operation and maintenance of the Project. 

3. Provide information for the administration of the Contract. 

4. Allow the CMAR/Engineer to advise the Owner if products proposed for the project by 

the Bidder conform, in general, to the design concepts of the Contract Documents. 

B. Bidder's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by 

the CMAR/Engineer's review of submittals. Contract modifications can only be approved by 

Change Order or Field Order. 

1.02 BIDDER'S RESPONSIBILITIES 

A. Review and certify all submittals prior to submission. 

B. Determine and verify: 

1. Field measurements. 

2. Field construction requirements. 

3. Location of all existing structures, utilities and equipment related to the submittals. 

4. Submittals are complete for their intended purpose. 

5. Conflicts between the submittals related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers 

have been resolved. 

6. Quantities and dimensions shown on the submittals. 

C. Submit information per the procedures described in this section and the detailed 

specifications. 

D. Furnish the following submittals: 

1. As specified in the Submittal Schedule to be provided with Contract Documents when 

the design in complete. 

2. Schedules, data and other documentation as described in detail in this section or 

referenced in the Contract Documents. 

3. Documentation required for the administration of the Contract per Section 01 31 13, 

Project Coordination. 

4. Shop Drawings required for consideration of a contract modification per Paragraph 1.08. 

5. Submittals as required in the detailed specifications. 

6. Submittals not required will be returned without CMAR/Engineer's review. 

E. Submit a schedule indicating the date submittals will be sent to the CMAR and proposed 

dates that the product will be incorporated into the project. Make submittals promptly in 

accordance with the schedule to cause no delay in the Project. 

1. Send submittals to the CMAR allowing a reasonable time for delivery, review and 

marking submittals. Include time for review of a resubmission if necessary. Allow 

Submittal Procedures – Bid Package #8 01 33 00-1 



5/24/2012

adequate time for the submittal review process, ordering, fabrication, and delivery of 

the product to not delay progress on the Project. 

2. Schedule submittal to provide all information for interrelated work at one time. No 

review will be performed on submittals requiring coordination with other submittals. 

CMAR will return submittals for resubmission as a complete package. 

F. Submit information for all of the components and related equipment required for a 

complete and operational system in the same submittal. 

1. Include electrical, mechanical, and other information required to indicate how the 

various components of the system function. 

2. Provide certifications, warranties, and written guarantees with the submittal package 

for review when they are required. 

G. Fabrication or installation of any products prior to the approval of Shop Drawings is done at 

the Bidder's risk. Products not meeting the requirements of Contract Documents are 

defective and may be rejected at the CMAR/Owner's option. 

H. Payment will not be made for products for which submittals are required until the 

submittals have been received. Payment will not be made for products for which Shop 

Drawings or Samples are required until these are approved by the CMAR/Engineer. 


A. Submit legible, accurate, complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood 

manner. Submittals not meeting these criteria will be returned without review. 

B. Demonstrate that the proposed products are in full and complete compliance with the 

design criteria and requirements of the Contract Documents including Drawings and 

Specifications as modified by Addenda, Field Orders, and Change Orders. 

C. Furnish and install products that fully comply with the information included in the submittal. 

D. Review and approve submittals prior to submitting them to the CMAR for review. 

Submittals will not be accepted anyone other than the Bidder. 


A. Submit an electronic copy of each submittal through the Project portal (web site) provided 

by the CMAR/Engineer. The Bidder will be provided access to log onto the website to post 

submittal documents and check the status of submittals. 

1. The complete contents of each submittal, including associated drawings product data, 

etc., shall be submitted in Portable Document Format (PDF.) Submit PDF document 

with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the 

document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 81/2 x 

11 or 11 x 17 papers. 

2. Create and submit color PDF documents where color is important to the evaluation of 

the submittal and / or where comments will be lost if only black and white PDF 

documents are provided. Submit sample and color charts per Paragraph 1.04 H 

B. Transmit all submittals, with a properly completed Submittal Transmittal Form as provided 

by the CMAR/Engineer (provided after Notice of Award). 




5/24/2012

1. Use a separate transmittal form for each specific product, class of material, and 

equipment system. 

2. Submit items specified in different sections of the Specifications separately unless they 

are part of an integrated system. 

C. Assign a submittal number to the documents originated to allow tracking of the submittal 

during the review process. 

1. Assign the number consisting of a prefix, a sequence number, and a letter suffix. 

Prefixes shall be as follows: 

Prefix Description Originator 

AP Application for Payment Bidder 

CO Change Order CMAR 

CMR Contract Modification Request Bidder or CMAR 

CTR Certified Test Report Bidder 

EIR Equipment Installation Report Bidder 

FO Field Order CMAR 

NBC Notification by CMAR Bidder 

O&M Operation & Maintenance Manuals Bidder 

PD Photographic Documentation Bidder 

RD Record Data Bidder 

RFI Request for Information Bidder 

SAM Sample Bidder 

SD Shop Drawing Bidder 

SCH Schedule of Progress Bidder 

2. Issue sequence numbers in chronological order for each type of submittal. 

3. Issue numbers for resubmittals that have the same number as the original submittal 

followed by an alphabetical suffix indicating the number of times the same submittal 

has been sent to the Bidder for processing. For example: SD-025-A represents Shop 

Drawing 25 and the letter "A" designates that this is the second time this submittal has 

been sent for review. 

4. Clearly note the submittal number on each page or sheet of the submittal. 

5. Correct assignment of numbers is essential since different submittal types are processed 

in different ways. 

D. Submit documents with uniform markings 

1. Mark submittals to: 

a. Indicate Bidder's corrections in blue. CMAR will use green to indicate corrections. 

b. Highlight items pertinent to the products being furnished in yellow and delete items 

that are not when the Supplier's standard drawings or information sheets are 

provided. 

c. Cloud items and highlight in yellow where selections by the CMAR, Engineer or 

Owner are required. 

d. Mark dimensions with the prefix FD to indicate field verified dimensions on the Shop 

Drawings. 

e. Provide a blank space 8" x 3" for Bidder’s, CMAR's and Engineer's stamp. Bidder 

may use a digital certification if this is preferred. The certification must bear a 

digital signature. 




5/24/2012

2. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Shop Drawings. 

a. Use terms and symbols in Shop Drawings consistent with the Contract Drawings. 

b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Shop Drawings. 

c. Provide a legend for symbols used on Shop Drawings. 

E. Mark submittals to reference the Drawing number and/or section of the Specifications, 

detail designation, schedule or location that corresponds with the data submitted. Other 

identification may also be required, such as layout drawings or schedules to allow the 

reviewer to determine where a particular product is to be used. 

F. Deliver samples required by the Specifications to the project site. Provide a minimum of 

two samples. 

G. Construct mock-ups from the actual products to be used in construction per detailed 

Specifications. 

H. Submit color charts and Samples for every product requiring color, texture or finish 

selection. 

1. Submit all color charts and Samples at one time. 

2. Do not submit color charts and Samples until all record data have been submitted or 

Shop Drawings for the products have been approved. 

3. Submit color charts and Samples not less than thirty days prior to when these products 

are to be ordered or released for fabrication to comply with the schedule for 

construction of the Project. 

I. Submit Contract Modification Request per Section 01 31 13, Project Coordination to request 

modifications to the Contract Documents. 

1.05 REVIEW PROCEDURES 

A. Shop drawings are reviewed in the order received, unless Bidder request that a different 

priority be assigned. 

B. Mark a submittal as "Priority" to place the review for this submittal ahead of submittals 

previously delivered. Priority submittals will be reviewed before other submittals for this 

Project which have been received but not reviewed. Use discretion in the use of "Priority" 

submittals as this may delay the review of submittals previously submitted. Revise the 

Schedule of Bidder's Submittals for substantial deviations from the previous schedule. 

C. Review procedures vary with the type of submittal as described in Paragraph 1.06. 

1.06 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. Shop Drawings are required for those products that cannot adequately be described in the 

Contract Documents to allow fabrication, erection or installation of the product without 

additional detailed information from the Supplier. 

1. Shop Drawings are requested so that the CMAR/Engineer can: 

a. Assist the Owner in selecting colors, textures or other aesthetic features. 

b. Compare the proposed features of the product with the specified features so as to 

advise the Owner that the product does, in general, conform to the Contract 

Documents. 




5/24/2012

c. Compare the performance features of the proposed product with those specified so 

as to advise the Owner that it appears that the product will meet the designed 

performance criteria. 

d. Review required certifications, guarantees, warranties, and service agreements for 

compliance with the Contract Documents. 

2. Certify that Bidder has reviewed the Shop Drawings and made all necessary corrections 

such that the products, when installed, will be in full compliance with the Contract 

Documents. Shop Drawings submitted without this certification will be returned 

without review. 

3. Submit Shop Drawings for: 

a. Products indicated in the submittal schedule following this section. 

b. When a substitution or equal product is proposed in accordance with Paragraph 

1.08 of this Section. 

4. Include a complete description of the material or equipment to be furnished. 

Information is to include: 

a. Type, dimensions, size, arrangement, model number, and operational parameters of 

the components. 

b. Weights, gauges, materials of construction, external connections, anchors, and 

supports required. 

c. Performance characteristics, capacities, engineering data, motor curves, and other 

information necessary to allow a complete evaluation of mechanical components. 

d. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers. 

e. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, 

templates, patterns, and coordination drawings. 

f. Wiring and piping diagrams and related controls. 

g. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt, or other materials proportioned for the Project. 

h. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing 

conditions. Indicate on the submittal that the measurements represent actual 

dimensions obtained at the site. 

5. Provide all required statements of certification, guarantees, extended service 

agreements, and other related documents with the Shop Drawing. The effective date of 

these documents shall be the date of acceptance of the work by the Owner. 

6. Comments will be made on items called to the attention of the CMAR/Engineer for 

review and comment. Any marks made by the CMAR/Engineer do not constitute a 

blanket review of the submittal or relieve the Bidder from responsibility for errors or 

deviations from the Contract Documents. 

a. Submittals that are reviewed will be returned with one or more of the following 

designations: 

1) Approved - Submittal is found to be acceptable as submitted. 

2) Approved as Noted - Submittal is acceptable with corrections or notations made 

by Engineer and may be used as corrected. 

3) Revise and Resubmit - Submittal has deviations from the Contract Documents, 

significant errors, or is inadequate and must be revised and resubmitted for 

subsequent review. 

4) Not Approved - Products are not acceptable. 

b. Drawings with a significant or substantial number of markings by the Bidder may be 

marked "Approved as Noted" and "Revise and Resubmit.” These drawings are to be 

revised to provide a clean record of the submittal. 




5/24/2012

c. Dimensions or other data that do not appear to conform to the Contract Documents 

will be marked as "At Variance With" (AVW) the Contract Documents or other 

information provided. The Bidder is to make revisions as appropriate to comply 

with Contract Documents. 

B. Certifications, Warranties and Service Agreements include documents as specified in the 

detailed specifications, as shown in the submittal schedule or as follows: 

1. Certified Test Reports (CTR) - A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving 

results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the 

specifications. Refer to Section 01 40 00, Quality Requirements. 

2. Certification of Local Field Service (CLS) - A certified letter stating that field service is 

available from a factory or supplier approved service organization located within a 300 

mile radius of the project site. List names, addresses, and telephone numbers of 

approved service organizations on or attach it to the certificate. 

3. Extended Warranty (EW) - A guarantee of performance for the product or system 

beyond the normal one year warranty described in the General Conditions. Issue the 

warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. 

4. Extended Service Agreement (ESA) - A contract to provide maintenance beyond that 

required to fulfill requirements for warranty repairs, or to perform routine maintenance 

for a definite period beyond the warranty period. Issue the service agreement in the 

name of the Owner. 

5. Certification of Adequacy of Design (CAD) - A certified letter from the manufacturer of 

the equipment stating that they have designed the equipment to be structurally stable 

and to withstand all imposed loads without deformation, failure, or adverse effects to 

the performance and operational requirements of the unit. The letter shall state that 

mechanical and electrical equipment is adequately sized to be fully operational for the 

conditions specified or normally encountered by the product's intended use. 

6. Certification of Applicator/Subcontractor (CSQ) - A certified letter stating that the 

Applicator or Subcontractor proposed to perform a specified function is duly designated 

as factory authorized and trained for the application of the specified product. 

C. Submit record data to provide information to allow the Owner to adequately identify the 

products incorporated into the project and allow replacement or repair at some future date. 

1. Provide record data for all products per the submittal schedule. Record data is not 

required for items for which Shop Drawings and/or operations and maintenance 

manuals are required. 

2. Provide information only on the specified products. Submit a Contract Modification 

Request for approval of deviations or substitutions and obtain approval by Field Order 

or Change Order prior to submitting record data. 

3. Provide the same information required for Shop Drawings. 

4. Record data will be received by the CMAR/Engineer, logged, and provided to Owner for 

the Project record. 

a. Record data may be reviewed to see that the information provided is adequate for 

the purpose intended. Inadequate drawings may be returned as unacceptable. 

b. Record data is not reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents. 

Comments may be returned if deviations from the Contract Documents are noted 

during the cursory review performed to see that the information is adequate. 




5/24/2012

D. Provide Samples for comparison with products delivered to the Site for use on the Project. 

1. Samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate the functional 

characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 

2. Indicate the full range of color, texture, and patterns. 

3. Dispose of Samples when related Work has been completed and approved, and disposal 

is requested by the Engineer. At Owner's option Samples will become the property of 

the Owner. 

E. Construct mock-ups for comparison with the Work being performed. 

1. Construct mock-ups of the size or area indicated in the detailed Specifications. 

2. Construct mock-ups complete with texture and finish to represent the finished product. 

3. Protect mock-ups until Work has been completed and accepted by the Owner. 

4. Dispose of mock-ups when related Work has been completed and disposal is approved 

by the Engineer. 

F. Submit Operation and Maintenance manuals (O&M) for all equipment, mechanical devices, 

or components described in the Contract Documents per Section 01 78 23, Operation And 

Maintenance Data. Include copies of approved Shop Drawings in the manual. 

G. Submit Request for Information (RFI) in accordance with Section 01 31 13, Project 

Coordination. 

H. Submit a Schedule of Values and Application for Payment (AP) in accordance with Section 

01130, Payment Procedures. 

I. Submit Progress Schedules (SCH) in accordance with Section 01 32 16 Construction Progress 

Schedules. 

J. Submit Certified Test Reports (CTR) from independent testing laboratories in accordance 

with Section 01 40 00, Quality Requirements. 

1. Submit test reports for material fabricated for this project with Shop Drawings for that 

product. 

2. Submit test reports produced at the point of production for standard production 

products with the record data for that product. 

K. Submit Equipment Installation Reports (EIR) in accordance with Section 01 75 00, Starting 

And Adjusting. 

L. Submit Notifications by Bidder (NBC) in accordance with Section 01 31 13, Project 

Coordination. 

M. Submit Process Performance Bonds (PPB) in accordance with Section 00 73 00, 

Supplementary Conditions and the detailed equipment specifications. These bonds will not 

be required until notified by the CMAR. 

1.07 REQUESTS FOR DEVIATION 

A. Submit requests for deviation from the Contract Documents for any product that does not 

fully comply with the Contract Documents. 

B. Submit request by Contract Modification Request (CMR) per Section 01 31 13, Project 

Coordination. Identify the deviations and the reason the change is requested. 




5/24/2012

C. Include the amount if cost savings to the Owner for deviations that result in a reduction in 

cost. 

D. A Change Order or Field Order will be issued by the CMAR/Engineer for deviations approved 

by the Owner. Deviations from the Contract Documents may only be approved by Change 

Order or Field Order. 

1.08 SUBMITTALS FOR EQUAL NON-SPECIFIED PRODUCTS 

A. The products of the listed suppliers are to be furnished where detailed specifications list 

several manufacturers but do not specifically list "or equal" or "or approved equal" 

products. Use of any products other than those specifically listed is a substitution and 

must be approved per Paragraph 1.09. 

B. Bidder may submit other manufacturers' products that are in full compliance with the 

specification where detailed specifications list one or more manufacturers followed by the 

phase "or equal" or "or approved equal.” 

1. Submit Shop Drawings of adequate detail to document that the proposed product is 

equal or superior to the specified product. 

2. Prove that the product is equal. It is not the CMAR/Engineer's responsibility to prove 

the product is not equal. 

a. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is equal 

to the Contract Document requirements. 

b. Make a direct comparison with the specified manufacturer's published data sheets 

and available information. Provide this printed material with the submittal. 

c. The decision of the CMAR/Engineer regarding the acceptability of the proposed 

product is final. 

3. Provide a typewritten certification that, in furnishing the proposed product as an equal, 

the Bidder: 

a. Has thoroughly examined the proposed product and has determined that it is equal 

or superior in all respects to the product specified. 

b. Has determined that the product will perform in the same manner and result in the 

same process as the specified product. 

c. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds as for the product specified. 

d. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary 

to incorporate the product into the construction and will waive all claims for 

additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the product into the Project 

which may subsequently become apparent. 

e. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. 

4. A modification request is not required for any product that is in complete compliance 


1.09 SUBMITTALS FOR SUBSTITUTIONS 

A. Substitutions are defined as any product that the Bidder proposes to provide for the 

Project in lieu of the specified product. 

B. Submit the following for consideration of approval of a Supplier or product which is not 

specified:: 




5/24/2012

1. Contract Modification Request for deviation from the Contract Documents per 

Paragraph 1.07. 

2. Prove that the product is acceptable as a substitute. It is not the CMAR/Engineer's 

responsibility to prove the product is not acceptable as a substitute. 

a. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is 

acceptable to meet the intent of the Contract Documents requirements. 

b. Make a direct comparison with the specified Suppliers published data sheets and 

available information. Provide this printed material with the submittal. 

c. The decision of the CMAR/Engineer regarding the acceptability of the proposed 

substitute product is final. 

3. Provide a written certification that, in making the substitution request, the Bidder: 

a. Has determined that the substituted product will perform in substantially the same 

manner and result in the same ability to meet the specified performance as the 

specified product. 

b. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds for the substituted product as 

specified or as would be provided by the Manufacturer of the specified product. 

c. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary 

to incorporate the substituted product into the project and will waive all claims for 

additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product 

into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. 

d. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. 

C. Pay engineering cost for review of substitutions. 

1. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Engineer for the actual 

hours required for the review and marking of Shop Drawings by Engineer and in 

accordance with the rates listed in Paragraph SC-14.02, Section 00 73 00, 

Supplementary Conditions: 

2. Cost for the additional review shall be paid to the Owner by the Bidder on a monthly 

basis. 

1.10 WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES 

A. Submit warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents with the Shop 

Drawings or record data. 

B. Provide additional copies for equipment and include this additional copy in the Operation 

and Maintenance Manuals. Refer to Section 01 78 23, Operation And Maintenance Data. 

C. Provide a separate manual for warranties and guarantees. 

1. Provide a log of all products for which warranties or guarantees are provided, and for all 

equipment. Index the log by Specification section number on forms provided by the 

Engineer. 

2. Indicate the start date, warranty or guarantee period and the date upon which the 

warranty or guarantee expires for products or equipment for which a warranty or 

guarantee is required. 

3. Indicate the date for the start of the correction period specified in the General 

Conditions for each piece of equipment and the date on which the specified correction 

period expires. 

4. Provide a copy of the warranty or guarantee under a tab indexed to the log. 




5/24/2012

1.11 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS 

A. Make all corrections or changes in the submittals required by the CMAR/Engineer and 

resubmit until approved. 

B. For Shop Drawings: 

1. Revise initial drawings or data and resubmit as specified for the original submittal. 

2. Highlight in yellow those revisions which have been made in response to the first review 

by the CMAR/Engineer. 

3. Highlight in blue any new revisions which have been made or additional details of 

information that has been added since the previous review by the CMAR/Engineer. 

C. For Samples: 

1. Submit new Samples as required for the initial Sample. 

2. Remove Samples which have been rejected. 

D. For mock-ups: 

1. Construct a new mock-up as initially required. 

2. Dispose of mock-ups which have been rejected. 

E. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 

1. Excessive review of Shop Drawings is defined as any review required after the original 

review has been made and the first resubmittal has been checked to see that 

corrections have been made. 

2. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Engineer for the actual 

hours required for the review and marking of shop drawings by Engineer and in 

accordance with the rates listed in Paragraph SC-14.02, Section 00 73 00, 


3. Pay cost for the additional review to the Owner on a monthly basis as billed by the 

Owner. 

4. Need for more than one resubmission or any other delay of obtaining CMAR/Engineer's 

review of submittals, will not entitle the Bidder to an extension of Contract Time. All 

costs associated with such delays shall be at the Bidder's expense. 

1.12 ENGINEER'S DUTIES 

A. Review the submittals and return with reasonable promptness but not more than 21 

calendar days. 

B. Affix stamp, indicate approval, rejection, and the need for resubmittal. 

C. Distribute documents 





5/24/2012

Quality Requirements

01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIRMENTS 

1.00 GENERAL 

1.01 BIDDER'S RESPONSIBILITIES 

A. Bidder is solely responsible for implementing a quality control (QC) program on the Project 

to determine that the Project will meet the requirements of the Contract Documents when 

completed. The Owner/CMAR will conduct quality assurance (QA) testing independently of 

the Bidder to determine that the Bidder’s quality control is effective in meeting the 

requirements of the Contract Documents. The Owner/CMAR will provide or contract for, 

independently of the Bidder, the inspection services, the testing of construction materials 

engineering, and the verification testing services necessary for acceptance of the facility by 

the Owner/CMAR. 

B. Control the quality of the Work and verify that the Work meets the standards of quality 

established in the Contract Documents. 

1. Inspect the Work of the Bidder, Subcontractors and Suppliers. Correct defective Work. 

2. Inspect products and materials to be incorporated into the Project. Ensure that 

Suppliers of raw materials, parts, components, assemblies, and other products have 

adequate quality control system to ensure that quality products are produced. Provide 

only products that comply with the Contract Documents. 

3. Provide and pay for the services of an approved professional materials testing 

laboratory acceptable to the Owner/CMAR to insure that products proposed for use 

fully comply with the Contract Documents. 

4. Provide all facilities and calibrated equipment required for quality control tests. 

5. Provide consumable construction materials of adequate quality to provide a finished 

product that complies with the Contract Documents. 

6. Perform tests as indicated in this and other sections of the specifications. Schedule the 

time and sequence of testing with the CMAR/Engineer. All quality control testing is to 

be observed by the CMAR/Engineer or designated representative. 

7. Maintain complete inspection and testing records at the site and make them available 

to Owner, CMAR and Engineer. 

C. Should requirements of this Section of the specification conflict with the requirements of 

the technical specifications, the technical specifications shall govern. 

F. Cost for Quality Management as described in this section, with the exception of Owner 

provided Materials Testing are to be included in the Bidder’s Proposal for construction of 

Bid Package #8. 

1. 

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE ACTIVITIES BY THE OWNER 

A. Owner will provide and pay for resident representation services and for the services of an 

approved professional materials testing laboratory to insure that Work fully complies with 

the Contract Documents. The Owner will provide services of a testing laboratory capable of 

performing a full range of testing procedures complying with the standards for testing 

procedures specified and as identified. 

Quality Requirements – Bid Package #8 01 40 00‐1 



5/28/2012

B. Provide labor, materials, tools, equipment, and related items for testing by the Owner, the 

CMAR, the Engineer or their Materials Testing laboratory including, but not limited to 

temporary construction required for testing and operation of new and existing utilities. 

Assist the Owner, CMAR, Engineer, and testing organizations in performing quality 

assurance activities. 

1. Provide access to the Work and to Subcontractor’s and Supplier's operations at all times 

Work is in progress. 

2. Cooperate fully in the performance of sampling, inspection, and testing. 

3. Furnish labor and facilities to: 

a. Provide access to the work to be tested. 

b. Obtain and handle samples for testing at the project site or at the source of the 

product to be tested. 

c. Facilitate inspections and tests. 

d. Provide adequate lighting to allow Owner observations. 

e. Store and cure test samples. 

4. Furnish copies of the tests performed on materials and products. 

5. Provide adequate quantities of representative product to be tested to the laboratory at 

the designated location. 

6. Give the CMAR/Engineer adequate notice before proceeding with work that would 

interfere with testing. 

7. Notify the CMAR/Engineer and the testing laboratory prior to the time that testing is 

required. Lead time is to be adequate to allow arrangements to be made for testing. 

8. Do not proceed with any work until testing services have been performed and results of 

tests indicate that the work is acceptable. 

9. Provide complete access to the Site and make Contract Documents available. 

10. Provide personnel and equipment needed to perform sampling or to assist in making 

the field tests. 

11. Quality assurance testing performed by the Owner will be paid for by the Owner, except 

for verification testing performed by the Owner, which shall be paid for by the Bidder as 

described in Paragraph 1.06. 

C. Quality assurance activities of the Owner, CMAR or Engineer through their own forces or 

through contracts with materials testing laboratories and survey crews are for the purpose 

of monitoring the results of the Bidder's work to see that it is in compliance with the 

requirements of the Contract Documents. 

D. Bidder may rely on the technical results of all tests provided, but interpretation of those test 

results will be provided by the CMAR/Engineer. Quality assurance activities of the Owner, 

CMAR and Engineer or non‐performance of quality assurance activities: 

1. Do not relieve the Bidder of its responsibility to perform Work and furnish materials and 

products and constructed Work conforming to the requirements of the Contract 

Documents. 

2. Do not relieve the Bidder of its responsibility for providing adequate quality control 

measures. 

3. Do not relieve the Bidder of responsibility for damage to or loss of the material, product 

or Work before Owner's acceptance. 

4. Do not constitute or imply Owner's acceptance. 




5/28/2012

5. Do not affect the continuing rights of the Owner after Owner's acceptance of the 

completed Work. 

E. The presence or absence of the Owner's Resident Representative, CMAR or Engineer does 

not relieve the Bidder from any contract requirement, nor is the Owner's Resident 

Representative, CMAR or Engineer authorized to change any term or condition of the 

Contract Documents without the Owner's written authorization in a Field Order or Change 

Order. 

F. Failure on the part of the Owner, CMAR or Engineer to perform or test products or 

constructed works in no way relieves the Bidder of the obligation to perform work and 

furnish materials conforming to the Contract Documents. 

G. All materials and products are subject to CMAR/Owner's quality assurance observations or 

testing at any time during preparation or use. Material or products which have been tested 

or observed or approved by CMAR/Owner at a supply source or staging area may be reobserved 

or re‐tested by CMAR/Owner before or during or after incorporation into the 

Work, and rejected if they do not comply with the Contract Documents. 


A. Submittal Procedures shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures, 

and shall include: 


1. A written Quality Management Plan that establishes the methods of assuring 

compliance with the Contract Documents. Submit this program as Record Data 

2. A Statement of Qualification for the proposed testing laboratory. The statement of 

qualifications is to include a list of the engineers and technical staff that will provide 

testing services on the Project, descriptions of the qualifications of these individuals, list 

of tests that can be performed, equipment used with date of last certification and a list 

of recent projects for which testing has been performed with references for those 

projects. 

3. Test reports per Paragraph 1.07, Test Reports of this specification. Reports are to certify 

that products or constructed Works are in full compliance with the Contract Documents 

or indicate that they are not in compliance and describe how they are not in 

compliance. 

4. Provide Certified Test Reports on materials or products to be incorporated into the 

Project. Reports are to indicate that material or products are in full compliance with the 

Contract Documents or indicate that they are not in compliance and describe how they 

are not in compliance. 

A. Provide a testing laboratory that complies with the ACIL (American Council of Independent 

Laboratories) "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualifications". 

B. Perform testing per recognized test procedures as listed in the various sections of the 

specifications, standards of the State Department of Highways and Public Transportation, 

American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM), or other testing associations. Perform tests 

in accordance with published procedures for testing issued by these organizations. 




5/28/2012


A. Handle and protect test specimens of products and construction materials at the Site in 

accordance with recognized test procedures. 

1.06 VERIFICATION TESTING 

B. Provide verification testing when tests indicate that materials or the results of construction 

activities are not in conformance with Contract Documents. 

C. Verification testing is to be provided at the Bidder's expense to verify products or 

constructed works are in compliance after corrections have been made. 

D. Tests must comply with recognized methods or with methods recommended by the testing 

laboratory and approved by the CMAR/Engineer. 

1.07 TEST REPORTS 

A. Test reports are to be prepared for all tests. 

1. Tests performed by testing laboratories may be submitted on their standard test report 

forms. These reports must include the following: 

a. Name of the Owner, project title and number, equipment installer and Bidder. 

b. Name of the laboratory, address, and telephone number. 

c. Name and signature of the laboratory personnel performing the test. 

d. Description of the product being sampled or tested. 

e. Date and time of sampling, inspection, and testing. 

f. Date the report was issued. 

g. Description of the test performed. 

h. Weather conditions and temperature at time of test or sampling. 

i. Location at the site or structure where the test was taken. 

j. Standard or test procedure used in making the test. 

k. A description of the results of the test. 

l. Statement of compliance or non‐compliance with the Contract Documents. 

m. Interpretations of test results, if appropriate. 

2. Submit reports on tests performed by Bidder or his suppliers or vendors on the forms 

provided by the CMAR. 

3. CMAR will provide test reports for tests provided by the Owner’s materials testing 

laboratory or by Engineer. 

B. Distribute copies of the test reports to the CMAR within 24 hours of completing the test. 

Flag tests reports with results that do not comply with Contract Documents for immediate 

attention. 

C. Payment for Work subject to testing may be withheld until the Bidder's quality control test 

reports of the Work are submitted to the CMAR/Owner's Resident Representative. 

1.08 NON‐CONFORMING WORK 

A. Immediately correct any Work that is not in compliance with the Contract Documents or 

submit a written explanation of why the Work is not to be corrected immediately and when 

corrective to the Work will be performed. 




5/28/2012

B. Payment for non‐conforming Work shall be withheld until Work is brought into compliance 


1.09 LIMITATION OF AUTHORITY OF THE TESTING LABORATORY 

A. The testing laboratory representatives are limited to providing consultation on the test 

performed and in an advisory capacity. 

B. The testing laboratory is not authorized to: 

1. Alter the requirements of the Contract Documents. 

2. Accept or reject any portion of the Work. 

3. Perform any of the duties of the Bidder. 

4. Stop the work. 

1.10 QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLAN 

A. Submit Bidder’s Quality Management Plan that identifies personnel, procedures, control, 

instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used. Construction will be permitted to begin 

only after acceptance of the Quality Management Plan or acceptance of an interim plan 

applicable to the particular feature of work to be started. Work outside of the features of 

work included in an accepted interim plan will not be permitted to begin until acceptance of 

a Quality Management Plan or another interim plan containing the additional features of 

work to be started. 

B. Coordination Meeting. After the Pre‐construction Meeting and before start of construction, 

the Bidder shall meet with the CMAR to discuss the CMAR's Quality Management Plan. 

During the meeting, a mutual understanding of the system details shall be developed, 

including the forms for recording the Quality Control operations, testing, administration of 

the system for both onsite and offsite work, and the interrelationship of CMAR's 

management and control with the Owner's Quality Assurance. Revise the Quality 

Management Plan to reflect comments and recommended changes resulting from this 

meeting. 

2.00 PRODUCTS 

2.01 TESTING APPARATUS 

A. Furnish testing apparatus and related accessories necessary to perform the tests. 


3.01 QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM 

A. Perform quality control observations and testing as required in each section of the 

specifications and where indicated on the drawings. 

B. Provide a quality control program that includes the following phases for each definable 

Work task. A definable Work task one which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has 

separate control requirements, may be provided by different trades or disciplines, or may 

be work by the same trade in a different environment. 




5/28/2012

1. Planning Phase. Perform the following before beginning each definable Work task: 

a. Review the contract drawings. 

b. Review submittals and determine that they are complete in accordance with the 


c. Check to assure that all materials and/or equipment have been tested, submitted, 

and approved. 

d. Examine the work area to assure that all required preliminary work has been 

completed and complies with the Contract Documents. 

e. Examine required materials, equipment, and sample work to assure that they are on 

hand, conform to submittals, and are properly stored. 

f. Review requirements for quality control inspection and testing. 

g. Discuss procedures for controlling quality of the work. Document construction 

tolerances and workmanship standards for the Work task. 

h. Check that the portion of the plan for the Work to be performed incorporates 

submittal comments. 

i. Discuss results of planning with the CMAR/Engineer. Conduct a meeting attended 

by the CMAR’s quality control manager, the Engineer, superintendent, other quality 

control personnel as applicable, and the supervisor responsible for the Work task. 

Instruct applicable workers as to the acceptable level of workmanship required in 

order to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Document the results 

of the preparatory phase actions by separate meeting minutes prepared by the 

quality control manager and attached to the quality control report. 

j. Do not move to the next phase unless results of investigations required for the 

planning phase indicate that requirements have been met. 

2. Work Phase. Complete this phase after the Planning Phase: 

a. Notify the CMAR at least 24 hours in advance of beginning the Work and discuss the 

review of the planning effort to indicate that requirements have been met. 

b. Check the Work to ensure that it is in full compliance with the Contract Documents. 

c. Verify adequacy of controls to ensure full compliance with Contract Documents. 

Verify required control inspection and testing is performed. 

d. Verify that established levels of workmanship meet acceptable workmanship 

standards. Compare with required sample panels as appropriate. 

e. Repeat the initial phase for each new crew to work onsite, or any time acceptable 

specified quality standards are not being met. 

3. Follow‐up Phase. Perform daily checks to assure control activities, including control 

testing, are providing continued compliance with contract requirements: 

a. Make checks daily and record observations in the quality control documentation. 

b. Conduct follow‐up checks to correct all deficiencies prior to the start of additional 

Work tasks that may be affected by the defective Work. Do not build upon nor 

conceal non‐conforming work. 

c. Conduct a review of the Work one month prior to the expiration of the correction 

period prescribed in the General Conditions with the CMAR. Correct defects noted 

during the review. 

C. Conduct additional planning and review if: 

1. The quality of on‐going work is unacceptable 




5/28/2012

2. Changes are made in applicable quality control staff, onsite production supervision or 

work crew 

3. Work on a task is resumed after a substantial period of inactivity 

4. Other quality problems develop. 

3.02 CAST‐IN‐PLACE CONCRETE TESTING 

A. Test cast‐in‐place concrete in accordance with Section 03 30 00 Cast‐In‐Place Concrete. 

3.03 PROTECTIVE COATINGS 

A. Test protective coatings per Section 09 91 00, Architectural Painting, 09 96 00.01, High‐ 

Performance Coatings and Section 09 97 13, Pipeline Coatings and Linings 

3.04 LEAKAGE TESTS FOR STRUCTURES 

A. Test structures that will contain water on a full time or intermittent basis for leaks. Perform 

tests prior to installing equipment or materials within the structure. In the event that the 

structure fails to pass the test, drain the structure, repair the leaks, re‐fill, and re‐test the 

structure. Repeat tests until the structure passes the test. The CMAR/Owner may repeat 

the test at any time during the correction period established in the General Conditions. 

B. Test the structure for leakage using the following procedure: 

1. Determine the evaporation allowance for loss of water. 

a. Use a standard circular pan procedure established by the U.S. Weather Bureau to 

measure evaporation rate. 

b. Calculate evaporation allowance by multiplying the evaporation rate in gallons per 

24 hours per square foot of surface area by the open surface area of the water in 

the structure. 

2. Calculate the allowable leakage for the structure. Allowable leakage is calculated as 

0.03 gallons per square foot of concrete area in contact with the water per 24 hours. 

3. Fill the structure to the overflow level with water at a rate not to exceed 2 feet per hour. 

4. Allow the structure to set for a minimum of 72 hours. 

5. Observe the perimeter of the structure and identify all leaks. 

6. Repair structure walls and floors where leaks have been identified. 

7. Mark the water level at the structure wall. Measure the fall in water level over a 24‐ 

hour period to the nearest 1/8 inch at least twice a day to determine the quantity of 

water lost. Provide a stilling well for measurement if required to allow accurate 

measurement. 

8. Calculate the amount of water lost during this time. 

9. Compare the amount of water lost to the allowable loss. 

C. Drain the structure, determine the sources of leakage and repair if the amount of water lost 

exceeds the allowable leakage plus the evaporation allowance. 

3.05 PIPING SYSTEMS 

A. Test Requirements 

1. Perform test on piping systems including piping installed between or connected to 

existing pipe. 




5/28/2012

2. Conduct tests on buried pipe to be hydrostatically tested after the trench is completely 

backfilled. If field conditions permit and if approved by the CMAR/Engineer, partially 

backfill the trench and leave the joints open for inspection and conducting of the initial 

service leak test. Do not conduct the acceptance test until backfilling is complete. 

3. Pneumatically test the buried piping and expose joints of the buried piping for the 

acceptance test. 

4. Conduct the test on exposed piping after the piping is completely installed, including 

supports, hangers, and anchors, but prior to insulation and coating application. 

5. Do not perform testing on pipe with concrete thrust blocking until the concrete has 

cured at least five days. 

6. Determine and remedy the cause of the excessive leakage for any pipe failing to meet 

the specified requirements for water or air tightness. 

7. Tests must be successfully completed and reports filed before piping is accepted. 

8. Submit a comprehensive plan and schedule for testing to the CMAR/Engineer for review 

at least 10 days prior to starting each type of testing. 

9. Remove and dispose of temporary blocking material and equipment after completion 

and acceptance of the piping test. 

10. Repair any damage to the pipe coating. 

11. Clean pipelines so they are totally free flowing prior to final acceptance. 

12. Test piping independently from tests on structures. 

13. Test method and test pressure depend upon the application of the piping. 

a. Pressure pipe is defined as piping that is part of a pumped or pressurized system. 

Perform test for pressure pipe per the procedures indicated in Paragraph B of this 

section. 

b. Gravity pipe is defined as piping that depends upon the force of gravity for flow 

through the pipe, with the exception of process piping described in paragraph d. 

Perform test for gravity pipe per the procedures indicated in Paragraph C, D, or E of 

this section. 

c. Chemical processing lines are to be tested as pressure pipe regardless of the 

operating conditions. The test pressure is to be 1.5 times the pressure rating of the 

pipe. 

d. Process piping between hydraulic structures is to be considered as pressure pipe. 

Perform the test for this pipe per Paragraph B of this section. The test pressure is to 

be the maximum hydrostatic head plus 10 feet. The maximum hydrostatic head is 

the difference in elevation of the pipe at its lowest point and the maximum top of 

the wall 

B. Pressure And Leakage Tests Of Pressure Piping 

1. Perform hydrostatic pressure and leakage tests using methods, and per performance 

requirements of Section 5 of AWWA C600 regardless of pipe material tested. 

a. The pressure required for hydrostatic pressure test shall be 50 percent above the 

normal working pressure. If the normal working pressure cannot be determined, 

use the pipe pressure rating as the normal working pressure. 

b. Provide temporary plugs and blocking necessary to maintain the required test 

pressure. Where piping is cast in the walls for a structure, brace the walls prior to 

testing as required to prevent load of test pressure from being imposed upon the 

structure. 




5/28/2012

c. Provide corporation cocks at least 3/4 inch in diameter, pipe riser, and angle globe 

valves at each pipe dead‐end in order to bleed air from the line. 

d. Duration of pressure test shall be at least 24 hours. 

e. Repair any visible leaks regardless of the total leakage shown by the test. 

f. Repair pipelines which fail to meet the test and retest as necessary until the results 

conform to the test requirements. 

g. Remove and replace defective materials, pipes, valves, and accessories. 

h. Test the pipelines in sections by shutting valves or installing temporary plugs as 

necessary. 

i. Fill the pipeline with water and remove the air. 

j. Maintain the test pressure in the pipe for the entire test period by means of a force 

pump. 

k. Accurately measure the water required to maintain the pressure. The amount of 

water required is a measure of the leakage. 

2. The maximum allowable leakage is determined by the following formula: 

⁄ 

 

Equation 

Term 

Represents 

Measure 

L Maximum allowable leakage gallons per hour 

S Length of pipe tested feet 

D Nominal diameter of the pipe inches 

P Test pressure pounds per square inch gauge 

F 

Pipe factor 

Use 148,000 Ductile Iron Pipe and PVC Pipe. 

Use 133,200 for all other pipe types. 

a. Leakage is defined as the volume of water provided to maintain the test pressure 

after the pipe has been filled with water, the air expelled and the pipe brought to 

test pressure. 

b. Pipe with visible leaks or leakage exceeding the maximum allowable leakage is 

considered defective and must be corrected. 

C. Hydrostatic Leak Test‐Gravity Flow Sewer Lines 

1. Perform hydrostatic leak tests after backfilling. 

2. The length of the pipe to be tested shall be such that the head over the crown of the 

upstream end is not less than 2 feet or 2 feet above the ground water level whichever is 

higher and the head over the downstream crown is not more than 6 feet. 

3. Plug the pipe by pneumatic bags or mechanical plugs so that the air can be released 

from the pipe while it is being filled with water. 




5/28/2012

4. Continue the test for one hour and make provisions for measuring the amount of water 

required to maintain the water at a constant level during this period. 

5. Remove the jointing material, and remake the joint if any joint shows any visible leakage 

or infiltration. 

6. Remove and replace any defective or broken pipes. 

7. Determine the maximum allowable leakage or infiltration by the following formula: 

 

 

126720 

Equation 

Term 

Represents 

Measure 

L Maximum allowable leakage gallons per hour 

S Length of pipe tested feet 

D Nominal diameter of the pipe inches 

C 

Infiltration / exfiltration rate 

Use 50 for C outside of 25 year floodplain. 

Use 10 for C within 25 year floodplain. 

8. Determine the rates of infiltration by means of V‐Notch weirs, pipe spigot, or plugs in 

the end of the pipe. Methods, times, and locations are subject to the Engineer's 

approval. 

9. Pipe with visible leaks or infiltration or exceeds the maximum allowable leakage or 

infiltration is considered defective and must be corrected. 

D. Low Pressure Air Test‐ Gravity Flow Sewer Lines 

1. Use air test in lieu of the hydrostatic test if desired, or if pipeline grades do not allow 

filling the entire pipeline segment or manhole to the indicated depth. 

2. Perform low‐pressure air tests, using equipment specifically designed and manufactured 

for the purpose of testing sewer pipelines using low‐pressure air. Test is to conform to 

procedure described in ASTM F1417 except for testing times. The following test times 

are required: 

Pipe Diameter 

(inches) 

Minimum Time 

(seconds) 

Length for 

Minimum Time 

(feet) 

Time for 

Long Length 

(seconds) 

6 340 398 0.855 (L) 

8 454 298 1.520 (L) 

10 567 239 2.374 (L) 

12 680 199 3.419 (L) 

15 850 159 5.342 (L) 

18 1020 133 7.693 (L) 

21 1190 114 10.471 (L) 




5/28/2012

24 1360 100 13.676 (L) 

27 1530 88 17.309 (L) 

30 1700 80 21.369 (L) 

33 1870 72 25.856 (L) 

a. Provide the equipment with an air regulator valve or air safety valve set to an 

internal air pressure in the pipeline that cannot exceed 6 psig. 

b. Pass air through a single control panel. 

c. Provide pneumatic plugs that have a sealing length equal to or greater than the 

circumference of the pipe to be tested. 

d. Provide pneumatic plugs that resist internal test pressures without requiring 

external bracing or blocking. 

e. Provide an air compressor of adequate capacity for charging the system. 

3. Perform air test only on lines less than 36 inch diameter. Air tests for pipes larger than 

36 inch may be air tested at each joint. 

4. Check connections for leakage with a soap solution. Release the air pressure, repair the 

leak, and retest with soap solution until results are satisfactory, before resuming air test 

if leaks are found,. 

5. Determine the shortest allowable time for the pressure to drop from 3.5 pounds per 

square inch to 2.5 pounds per square inch by the following formula: 

0.0850 

 

Equation 

Term 

T 

Represents 

Time for the pressure to drop 1.0 

pound per square inch gauge 

Measure 

seconds 

K Factor equal to 0.000419DL, but not less than 1.0 

D 

L 

Q 

Average inside diameter of the 

inches 

pipe 

Length of line of the same pipe 

feet 

size 

Rate of loss. Use 0.0015 cubic feet per minute per 

square foot of internal surface 

E. AIR TEST FOR INDIVIDUAL JOINTS 

1. Lines 36 inch and larger may be tested at individual joints. 

2. The shortest allowable time for the pressure to drop from 3.5 pounds per square inch 

gauge to 2.5 pounds per square inch gauge is 10 seconds for all pipe sizes. 

F. DEFLECTION TESTING FOR PIPE 

1. Perform deflection tests on flexible and semi‐rigid pipe in accordance with TCEQ 

Requirements. 




5/28/2012

a. The maximum allowable deflection of pipe measured as the reduction in vertical 

inside diameter is 5.0 percent unless specified otherwise. 

b. Conduct test after the final backfill has been in place a minimum of 30 days. 

c. Thoroughly clear the lines before testing. 

2. Perform test by pulling a properly sized mandrel through the line. Measure deflection 

from the inside the pipe. 

3. Excavate and repair pipe with deflections in excess of the maximum allowable 

deflection. 

G. MANHOLE TESTING 

Test manholes for leakage separately and independently of the wastewater lines by 

hydrostatic exfiltration testing, vacuum testing or other approved methods acceptable to 

TCEQ. Test manholes after installation with all connections (existing and/or proposed) in 

place. Plug lift holes with an approved non‐shrink grout prior to testing. Install dropconnections 

and gas sealing connections prior to testing. 

1. Vacuum Test – Temporarily plug lines entering the manhole with the plugs braced to 

prevent them from being drawn into the manhole. Install plugs in the lines beyond 

drop‐connections, gas sealing connections, etc. Place the test head inside the frame at 

the top of the manhole and inflate in accordance with the manufacturer’s 

recommendations. Draw a vacuum of 10 inches of mercury, then turn off the vacuum 

pump. Read the level of vacuum after the required test time with the valve closed. The 

manhole will pass the test if the drop in the level is less than 1 inch of mercury (final 

vacuum greater than 9 inches of mercury). The required test time for 48 inch, 60 inch, 

and 72 inch manholes with depths up to 30 feet is two minutes. Test times for 

manholes of greater size and depths will be determined by the Engineer. 

2. Manhole Repairs – Manholes will be accepted in accordance with the criteria above. 

Repair any manhole which fails the initial test with non‐shrink grout or other suitable 

material as determine for the material from which the manhole is constructed. Retest 

the manhole as described above until a successful test is achieved. Remove all 

temporary plugs and grout after a successful test. 

H. TESTS FOR PLUMBING DRAINAGE AND VENT SYSTEMS 

1. Plug openings as necessary. 

2. Test drainage and venting systems by filling piping with water to the level of the highest 

vent stack for 30 minutes. 

3. Make the examination for leakage at joints and connections. 

4. Test fail if there is any drop in water level. 

3.06 ELECTRICAL TESTING 

A. Qualifications 

1. Perform testing using qualified personnel with a minimum of five years' experience 

installing and testing electrical equipment and machinery, unless otherwise specified. 

2. Use testing firms or individuals to perform tests that have not provided services or 

materials used on the Project or are otherwise related or affiliated with other CMARs or 

Suppliers for this project unless permitted by the CMAR/Owner. 

B. Report Forms 




5/28/2012

Complete appropriate test report neatly and in ink for the items being tested. Note listed 

data that is not applicable or cannot be obtained as "N/A" or document with an explanation 

for the omission. Incomplete test forms will not be witnessed by the CMAR. Repeat tests 

not accepted. Substitute forms recording similar data and test equipment as that specified 

may be used if approved by the CMAR. 

C. Test Equipment 

1. Provide test equipment and materials necessary to perform the requested tests. 

2. Test equipment and apparatus shall be appropriate for the full range and duration of 

the test to be performed. 

3. Demonstrate that the test equipment is functioning properly, prior to the 

commencement of the test. Suspend the test and repair or replace the equipment if 

test equipment fails during any portion of a test. Repeat the test in its entirety or as 

otherwise required by the CMAR. 

4. Provide a copy of the test equipment calibration certificate to the CMAR prior to the 

commencement of the test. Provide test equipment that has been calibrated with six 

months of the date of the test using methods approved by the National Institute of 

Standards and Technology. 

D. Execution 

1. Make appropriate repairs or replacements if the circuit, equipment or machinery being 

tested does not pass. Repeat test as directed by the CMAR. 

2. The more rigid requirement prevail if test procedures or equipment conflicts occur 

between the various sections and/or Supplier’s recommendations. 

E. Electrical Cable 

1. Communication Cable And Conductors ‐ Submit test forms to the Owner's for approval 

prior to performing the following tests: 

a. Test shielded pair, telephone, paging, signaling and computer cables for continuity, 

short circuits and grounds with a low voltage source, not to exceed the insulation 

rating of the conductors or jacket. 

b. Test fiber‐optic cable between terminating ends for each circuit per the Supplier’s 

recommendation. Cables, splices (where permitted), and connectors shall be tested 

for continuity, band width (maximum), and attenuation losses. 

2. 600 Volt Cable And Conductors: 

a. Test power and control conductors rated at 600 volts with an insulation resistance 

tester at 1,000 volts, with respect to ground, and at 1,000 volts with respect to all 

other conductors in each circuit. 

b. Verify suitable ground connections are provided and maintained throughout the 

test. 

c. Perform tests and record results as required by the "600 Volt Cable Test Report" or 

form provided by the CMAR/Engineer. 

d. Test each circuit and record the results for continuity between terminating ends 

with a low voltage source. 

3. 5kv Cable And Conductors: 




5/28/2012

a. Perform insulation resistance test on 5KV cable for insulation resistance tested at 

2,500 volts with respect to ground and at 2,500 volts with respect to all other 

conductors in each circuit. 

b. H‐Pot test 5KV cables incrementally to 25 KVDC for 15 minutes per ANSI/IEE STD 

400. Record leakage current in the spaces provided, at the time intervals shown, on 

the "Medium Voltage Cable Test Report." Do not exceed the cable Supplier’s 

maximum test values or procedures. 

c. Perform Individual conductor resistance tests and recorded results. Test each 

circuit for continuity between terminations ends and record the test results. 

Provide additional tests and checks as requested by the Supplier. 

4. 15kv Cable And Conductors: 

a. Perform insulation resistance test on 15KV cable at 2500 volts with respect to all 

other conductors in each circuit. 

b. H‐Pot test 15KV cable incrementally to 55KVDC for 15 minutes per ANSI/IEE STD. 

400. Record leakage current at the time interval, shown, on the "Medium Voltage 

Cable Test Report." Do not exceed the cable Supplier's recommended maximum 

test values or procedures. Perform individual conductor resistance tests and record 

the results. Test each circuit for continuity between terminating ends and record 

the results. Provide additional tests and checks as required by the Supplier. 

F. Switchgear 

1. Test electrical switchgear and electrical devices and controls mounted on or in the 

switchgear in accordance with the "Switchgear Test Report" form. 

2. Record the following information and attach to the test report: 

a. Resistance reading across joints of each horizontal and vertical bus. 

b. Verify proper operation of electrical, mechanical and keyed interlocking systems. 

c. Operate devices at both their open and closed states. Operate stored energy 

devices mechanically and electrically as applicable. Operate remotely controlled 

devices from their remote location. 

d. Verify proper operation of draw‐out circuit breakers and switches. Remove and reinstall 

each unit. Verify proper operation of shutters and barriers. 

e. Disconnect electrical and electronic sensing and protective devices not rated to 

withstand insulation resistance test potentials. Reconnect the devices before 

energizing the switchgear. 

f. Perform insulation resistance tests at the test voltages shown below for the 

following equipment. Do not exceed the Supplier's recommended maximum test 

values or procedures. 

Equipment Rating 

Test Voltage 

0‐250 VOLTS 500 VOLTS 

251‐600 VOLTS 1,000 VOLTS 

601‐5,000 VOLTS 2,500 VOLTS 

5,001‐15,000 VOLTS 2,500 VOLTS 

15,001‐39,000 VOLTS 5,000 VOLTS 

g. Provide additional tests and checks as recommended by the Supplier before 

energizing. 




5/28/2012

h. Energize switchgear. Measure and record instrument indications for no load and 

connected load conditions. 

G. Transformers 

1. Test single and three phase, liquid filled and dry transformers rated 5KVA and larger in 

accordance with the "Transformer Test Report," form. 

2. Record the following information and attach to the test report. 

a. Verify proper operation of all fans, alarms, and other auxiliary and monitoring 

devices. 

b. Verify "tap changer" operation, if applicable, in all positions. Set and secure "tap 

changer" to position recommended by the Engineer or Engineer. 

c. Obtain insulating liquid sample from all liquid filled transformers. Submit sample to 

testing laboratory, approved by the Owner for analysis. Perform standard insulating 

liquid tests as required by the Engineer or Engineer. Deliver test results to the 

Owner within 30 days after sampling. 

d. Perform insulation resistance tests at the test values shown below for the following 

equipment. 

e. Perform tests from each winding to ground and winding to winding. Primary and 

secondary sections shall be tested separately. 

f. Do not exceed the Supplier's recommended maximum test values or procedures. 

H. Motors 

Transformer Coil Rating 

Test Voltage 

0‐600 VOLTS 1,000 VOLTS 

601‐5,000 VOLTS 2,500VOLTS 

5,001‐15,000VOLTS 

5,000 VOLTS 

15,001‐39,000 VOLTS 10,000 VOLTS 

g. Provide additional tests and checks as recommended by the Supplier before 

energizing. 

h. Energize transformer. Measure and record primary and secondary volts and amps 

under no load and connected load conditions. 

1. Test electric motors in accordance with the "Motor Start‐Up Report" form. 

2. Check and record motor winding continuity phase to phase with a low voltage source. 

3. Check and record motor winding insulation resistance, each phase with respect to 

ground, at the test values shown below for A.C. induction motors per REF. IEEE Standard 

43. 

4. Do not exceed the Supplier's recommended maximum test values or procedures. 

Motor Voltage Rating (Volts) 

Test Voltage 

250V and below 500 

above 250 V 1,000 

2,360 Volt ‐ 3 Phase Per Manufacturer’s start‐up 

instructions or as otherwise directed 





5/28/2012

4,160 Volt ‐ 3 Phase Per Manufacturer’s start‐up 

instructions or as otherwise directed 


5. Check and record motor circuit voltage before starting motor. 

6. Verify operation of motor space heater if applicable. 

7. Provide additional tests and checks as recommended by the Supplier before energizing. 

8. Start motor and verify immediately correct shaft rotation. 

9. Check and record motor running volts and amps. 

10. Verify correct operation of all interlocking and protective devices. 

4.00 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS 

4.01 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes 

1. Quality control and control of installation. 

2. Tolerances. 

3. References. 

4. Labeling. 

5. Testing and inspection services. 

6. Electrical Testing 

7. Manufacturers' field services. 

8. Examination. 

9. Preparation. 

4.02 QUALITY CONTROL AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATION 

A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, 

and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. 

B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. 

C. When manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification 

from Engineer before proceeding. 

D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more 

stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more 

precise workmanship. 

E. Perform Work by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. 

F. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings or as instructed by 

manufacturer. 

G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand 

stresses, vibration, physical distortion, or disfigurement. 




5/28/2012

4.03 TOLERANCES 

A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable 

Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. 

B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. When manufacturers' tolerances conflict with 

Contract Documents, request clarification from Engineer before proceeding. 

C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 

4.04 REFERENCES 

A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, 

comply with requirements of standards, except when more rigid requirements are specified 

or are required by applicable codes. 

B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Owner‐Contractor 

Agreement, except where specific date is established by code. 

C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections. 

D. When specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification 

from Engineer before proceeding. 

E. Neither contractual relationships, duties, nor responsibilities of parties in Contract or those 

of Engineer shall be altered from Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in 

reference documents. 

4.05 LABELING 

A. Attach label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction for products, assemblies, 

and systems required to be labeled by applicable code. 

B. Label Information: Include manufacturer's or fabricator's identification, approved agency 

identification, and the following information, as applicable, on each label. 

1. Model number. 

2. Serial number. 

3. Performance characteristics. 

4.06 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES 

A. Employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency or laboratory acceptable to 

Owner to perform specified testing. 

1. Prior to or at the Pre‐Construction meeting, submit testing laboratory name, address, 

and telephone number, and names of full‐time registered Engineer and responsible 

officer. 




5/28/2012

2. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by Materials Reference 

Laboratory of National Bureau of Standards during most recent inspection, with 

memorandum of remedies of deficiencies reported by inspection. 

B. The independent firm will perform tests, inspections, and other services specified in 

individual specification sections and as required by Engineer. 

1. Laboratory: Authorized to operate at Project location. 

2. Laboratory Staff: Maintain full‐time specialist on staff to review services. 

3. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy 

traceable to National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical 

constants. 

C. Testing, inspections and source quality control may occur on or off project site. Perform 

off‐site testing as required by Engineer or Owner. 

D. Reports will be submitted by independent firm to Engineer, Contractor, and authority 

having jurisdiction, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating 

compliance or non‐compliance with Contract Documents. 

1. Submit final report indicating correction of Work previously reported as non‐compliant. 

E. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, 

tools, storage, safe access, and assistance by incidental labor as requested. 

1. Notify Engineer and independent firm 48 hours prior to expected time for operations 

requiring services. 

2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and tests 

required for Contractor's use. 

F. Testing and employment of testing agency or laboratory shall not relieve Contractor of 

obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. 

G. Re‐testing or re‐inspection required because of non‐conformance to specified 

requirements shall be performed by same independent firm on instructions by Engineer. 

Re‐testing will be at Contractor’s expense. 

H. Agency Responsibilities: 

1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor. 

2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Engineer and Contractor in 

performance of services. 

3. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified 

standards. 

4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 

5. Promptly notify Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or non‐conformance 

of Work or products. 

6. Perform additional tests required by Engineer. 

7. Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings. 




5/28/2012

I. Agency Reports: After each test, promptly submit one copy of report to Engineer, 

Contractor, and authority having jurisdiction. When requested by Engineer, provide 

interpretation of test results. Include the following: 

1. Date issued. 

2. Project title and number. 

3. Name of inspector. 

4. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 

5. Identification of product and specifications section. 

6. Location in Project. 

7. Type of inspection or test. 

8. Date of test. 

9. Results of tests. 

10. Conformance with Contract Documents. 

J. Limits On Testing Authority: 

1. Agency or laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of 


2. Agency or laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 

3. Agency or laboratory may not assume duties of Contractor. 

4. Agency or laboratory has no authority to stop the Work. 





5/28/2012

Temporary Facilities and Controls

01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 

1.00 GENERAL 


A. Furnish temporary facilities, storage sheds, and temporary utilities needed to complete the 

Work. 

B. Cost for Temporary Facilities and Controls as described in this section and provided by 

Suppliers and Subcontractors as described in this section are to be included in the BIDDER’s 

proposal. BIDDER efforts are included in the Bid Package #8 proposal. 


A. Arrange transportation, loading, and handling of temporary buildings and sheds. 


A. Locate buildings and sheds at the job site as indicated or as approved by the Owner. 

B. Prepare the site by removing trees, brush, or debris and performing demolition or grubbing 

needed to clear a space adequate for the structures. 

C. Pay for the utilities used by temporary facilities during construction. 

D. Provide each temporary service and facility ready for use at each location when the service 

or facility is first needed to avoid delay in the performance of the work. Maintain, expand as 

required, and modify temporary services and facilities as needed throughout the progress of 

the work. 

E. Remove services and facilities when approved by the CMAR/Engineer. 

F. Operate temporary facilities in a safe and efficient manner. 

1.04 OPTIONS 

1. Restrict loads on temporary services or facilities to within their designed or designated 

capacities. 

2. Provide sanitary conditions. Prevent public nuisance, or hazardous conditions from 

developing or existing at the site. 

3. Prevent freezing of pipes, flooding, or the contamination of water. 

4. Maintain site security and protection of the facilities. 

A. Field offices may be prefabricated buildings on skids or mobile trailers. 

B. Storage sheds may be prefabricated buildings on skids or truck trailers. 

1.05 TEMPORARY OFFICE AND STORAGE BUILDINGS 

A. Furnish office and storage buildings of adequate size to store any materials or equipment 

delivered to the site that might be affected by weather. 

Temporary Facilities and Controls –Bid Package #8 01 50 00-1 



5/24/2012

1.06 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES 

A. Provide sanitary facilities at the job site from the commencement of the project until project 

conclusion. Maintain these facilities in a clean and sanitary condition at all times, and 

comply with the requirements of the local health authority. On large sites, provide portable 

toilets at such locations that no point in the site shall be more than 600 feet from a toilet. 

B. Use these sanitary facilities. Do not use rest rooms within existing or Owner - occupied 

buildings. 

1.07 TEMPORARY HEAT 

A. Provide heating devices needed to protect the building during construction. 

1. Provide fuel needed to operate the heating devices. 

2. Attend heating devices at all times they are in operation, including overnight 

operations. 

1.08 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 

A. Provide the temporary utilities for administration, construction, testing, disinfection, and 

start-up of the Work, including electrical power, water, and telephone. Pay all costs 

associated with furnishing temporary utilities. 


1. Provide a source of temporary electrical power of adequate size for the construction 

procedures as applicable. 

2. Provide temporary water. Obtain potable water as required. Non-potable water may 

be used for hydraulic testing of basins. Pay all water costs for construction, testing, 

disinfection, and start-up of the Work. 

2.01 LOCATION OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES 

A. Locate all temporary facilities in areas approved by the Owner/Engineer. Construct and 

install signs at locations approved by the Owner. Install informational signs so they are 

clearly visible. 

2.02 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS 

2.03 TEMPORARY LIGHTING 

A. Provide temporary lighting inside the building once buildings are weatherproof. 

B. Lighting shall be adequate to perform work within any space. 

1. Lights shall be left in position in such a manner that every space has temporary light at 

all times. 

2. Temporary lights may be removed once the permanent lighting is in service. 

C. Provide portable flood lights at any time that work will be performed outside the structure 

at night. Provide adequate lighting to provide sufficient light at any location work is being 

performed. 




5/24/2012

D. Work outside the hours or 7:00 am. to 6:00 pm. will not normally be permitted. Obtain 

prior authorization from the Owner and Resident Project Representative for any night work 

required for Critical Work items identified in Section 01 35 00, Special Procedures. 

2.04 DRINKING WATER 

A. Provide field offices with potable water for BIDDER's employees. 

B. Pay for services and maintain daily. 

2.05 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES 

A. Remove temporary buildings, sheds, and utilities at the conclusion of the project and 

restore the site to original condition or finished in accordance with the drawings. 

B. Remove informational signs upon completion of construction. 

C. Remove project identification signs, framing, supports, and foundations upon completion of 

the project. 





5/24/2012

Temporary Controls

01 57 00 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 

1.00 GENERAL 


A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to construct temporary 

facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove 

temporary facilities when no longer needed. 

B. Construct temporary impounding works, channels, diversions, furnishing and operation of 

pumps, installing piping and fittings, and other construction for control of conditions at the 

Site. Remove temporary controls at the end of the Project. 

C. Provide a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan in accordance with TCEQ General Permit 

TXR150000, file required legal notices and obtain required permits prior to beginning any 

construction activity. 

D. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to prevent storm water 

pollution for the duration of the Project. Provide and maintain erosion and sediment 

control structures as required to preventive sediment and other pollutants from the Site 

from entering any storm water system, including open channels. Remove pollution control 

structures when no longer required to prevent storm water pollution. 

E. Cost for Temporary Controls as described in this section and provided by Suppliers and 

Subcontractors as described in this section are to be included in the Cost of Work. BIDDER’s 

efforts are include in the Bid Proposal. 


A. Construct and maintain temporary controls with adequate workmanship using durable 

materials to provide effective environmental management systems meeting the 

requirements of the Contract Documents and requiring minimal maintenance that will 

disrupt construction activities while providing adequate protection of the environment. 

B. Periodically inspect systems to determine that they are meeting the requirements of the 


1.03 SUBMITTALS 

A. Provide copies of notices, records and reports required the Contract Document or 

regulations as Record Data in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures. 

B. Provide documents requiring approval by the Owner, CMAR or Engineer as Shop Drawings in 

accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures. 


A. Provide a storm water pollution prevention plan that complies with Laws and Regulations. 

Comply with all requirements of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality General 

Permit (TXR150000) for storm water discharges from construction activities under the Texas 

Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) program. 

Temporary Controls –Bid Package #8 01 57 00-1 



5/24/2012

B. Perform Work to comply with “Best Practice” as established by the North Central Texas 

Council Of Governments (NCTCOG) integrated Storm Water Management (iSWM) Design 

Manual for Construction or the local agency of jurisdiction. 

1.05 PERMITS 

A. Submit the following to the TCEQ and the Operator of any Municipal Separate Storm Sewer 

System (MS4) receiving construction site discharge from the Site: 

a. Notice of Intent (NOI) at least 48 hours prior to beginning construction activity. 

Construction activity may commence 24 hours after the submittal of an electronic NOI. 

b. Notice of Change (NOC) letter when relevant facts or incorrect information was 

submitted in the NOI, or if relevant information in the NOI changes during the course of 

construction activity. 

c. Notice of Termination (NOT) when the construction project has been completed and 

stabilized. 

B. Post a copy of the NOI at the construction site in a location where it is readily available for 

viewing by the general public and Local, State, and Federal authorities prior to starting 

construction activities and maintain the posting until completion of the construction 

activities. 

C. Maintain copies of a schedule of major construction activities, inspection reports, and 

revision documentation with the storm water pollution prevention plan (SWPPP) required 

under the TPDES General Permit (TXR150000) for Storm Water Discharges from 

Construction Activities for all projects. 

1.06 STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL 

A. Comply with the current requirements of TPDES General Permit No. TXR15000 (General 

Storm Water Permit) set forth by the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality for the 

duration of the Project: 

1. Develop a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan meeting all requirements of the 

General Storm Water Permit. 

2. Submit of a Notice of Intent to the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality. 

3. Develop and implement appropriate Best Management Practices as established by local 

agencies of jurisdiction. 

4. Provide all monitoring and/or sampling required for reporting to the Texas Commission 

on Environmental Quality 

5. Submit reports to the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality as required as a 

condition of the permit 

6. Submit copies of the reports to the Construction Manager as Record Data in accordance 

with Section 01300 Submittals 

7. Retain copies of these documents on site at all times for review and inspection by the 

Owner or regulatory agencies. Post a copy of the permit as required by regulations. 

8. Pay all costs associated with complying with the provisions of the General Storm Water 

Permit. Assume solely responsible for implementing, updating, and modifying the 

General Storm Water Permit per regulatory requirements the Storm Water Pollution 

Prevention Plan and Best Management Practices. 




5/24/2012

B. Use forms required by the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality to file the Notice of 

Intent. Submit the Notice of Intent at least two days prior to the start of construction. 

Develop the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan prior to submitting the Notice of Intent. 

Provide draft copies of the Notice of Intent, Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan, and any 

other pertinent Texas Commission on Environmental Quality submittal documents to Owner 

for review prior to submittal to the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality. 

C. Return any property disturbed by construction activities to either specified conditions or 

pre-construction conditions as set forth in the Contract Documents. Provide an overall 

erosion and sedimentation control system that will protect all undisturbed areas and soil 

stockpiles/spoil areas. Implement appropriate Best Management Practices and techniques 

to control erosion and sedimentation and maintain these practices and techniques in 

effective operating condition during construction. Permanently stabilize exposed soil and fill 

as soon as practical during the Work. 

D. Assume sole responsibility for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures 

for furnishing, installing, and maintaining erosion and sedimentation control structures and 

procedures and overall compliance with the General Storm Water Permit. Modify the 

system as required to effectively control erosion and sediment. 

E. Retain copies of reports required by the General Storm Water Permit for three years from 

date of final completion. 

1.07 POLLUTION CONTROL 

A. Prevent the contamination of soil, water or atmosphere by the discharge of noxious 

substances from construction operations. Provide adequate measures to prevent the 

creation of noxious air-borne pollutants. Prevent dispersal of pollutants into the 

atmosphere. Do not dump or otherwise discharge noxious or harmful fluids into drains or 

sewers, nor allow noxious liquids to contaminate public waterways in any manner. 

B. Provide equipment and personnel and perform emergency measures necessary to contain 

any spillage. 

1. Contain chemicals in protective areas and do not dump on soil. Dispose of such 

materials at off-Site locations in an acceptable manner. 

2. Excavate contaminated soil and dispose at an off-Site location if contamination of the 

soil does occur. Fill resulting excavations with suitable backfill and compact to the 

density of the surrounding undisturbed soil. 

3. Provide documentation to the Owner/CMAR/Engineer which states the nature and 

strength of the contaminant, method of disposal, and the location of the disposal Site. 

4. Comply with local, State and Federal regulations regarding the disposal of pollutants. 

C. Groundwater or run-off water which has come into contact with noxious chemicals, sludge, 

or sludge-contaminated soil is considered contaminated. Contaminated water must not be 

allowed to enter streams or water courses, leave the Site in a non-contained form or enter 

non-contaminated areas of the Site. 

1. Pump contaminated water to holding ponds constructed by the BIDDER for this 

purpose, or discharge to areas on the interior of the Site, as designated by the 

CMAR/Engineer. 




5/24/2012

2. Construct temporary earthen dikes or take other precautions and measures as required 

to contain the contaminated water and pump to a designated storage area. 

3. Wash any equipment used for handling contaminated water or soil within contaminated 

areas three times with uncontaminated water prior to using such equipment in an 

uncontaminated area. Dispose of wash water used to wash such equipment as 

contaminated water. 

1.08 EARTH CONTROL 

A. Remove excess soil, spoil materials and other earth not required for backfill at the time of 

generation Control stock pile material to eliminate interference with CMAR and Owner's 

operations. 

B. Dispose of excess earth off the Site. Pay cost for disposal unless otherwise noted. Provide 

written approval by the property owner for all disposal on private property, and approval by 

the Owner if such disposal affects the use of Site or other easements. 

1.09 MANAGEMENT OF WATER 

A. Manage water resulting from rains or ground water at the Site. Maintain trenches and 

excavations free of water at all times. 

B. Lower the water table in the construction area by acceptable means if necessary to maintain 

a dry and workable condition at all times. Provide drains, sumps, casings, well points, and 

other water control devices as necessary to remove excess water. 

C. Provide continuous operation of water management actions. Maintain standby equipment 

to provide proper and continuous operation for water management. 

D. Ensure that water drainage does not damage adjacent property. Divert water into the same 

natural watercourse in which its headwaters are located, or other natural stream or 

waterway as approved by the Owner. Assume responsibility for the discharge of water from 

the Site. 

E. Remove the temporary construction and restore the Site in a manner acceptable to the 

Engineer and to match surrounding material at the conclusion of the Work, 

2.00 PRODUCTS 


A. Provide materials meeting regulatory requirements. 


3.01 CONSTRUCTING, MAINTAINING AND REMOVING TEMPORARY CONTROLS 

A. Construct temporary controls in accordance with regulatory requirements. 

B. Maintain controls in accordance with regulatory requirements were applicable, or in 

accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 




5/24/2012

C. Remove temporary control when no longer required, but before the Project is complete. 

Correct any damage or pollution that occurs as the result of removing controls before the 

point where they are no longer required. 





5/24/2012

Product Requirements

01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 

1.00 GENERAL 


A. Provide products for this project that comply with the requirements of this section. Specific 

requirements of the detailed equipment specification govern in the case of a conflict with 

the requirements of this Section. 

B. Comply with applicable specifications and standards. 

C. Comply with size, make, type, and quality specified or as modified per Section 01 31 13, 

Project Coordination. 


A. Design Criteria 

1. Assume responsibility for the design of the products to include structural stability and 

operational capability. 

2. Design members to withstand all loads imposed by installation, erection, and operation 

of the product without deformation, failure, or adversely affecting the operational 

requirements of the product. Size and strength of materials for structural members are 

specified as minimums only. 

3. Design mechanical and electrical components for all loads, currents, stresses, and wear 

imposed by start-up and normal operations of the equipment without deformation, 

failure, or adversely affecting the operation of the unit. Mechanical and electrical 

components specified for equipment are specified as the minimum acceptable for the 

equipment. 

B. Coordination 

1. Provide coordination of the entire project, including verification that structures, piping, 

and equipment components to be furnished and installed for this project are 

compatible. 

2. Determine that the equipment furnished for this project is compatible with the Contract 

Document requirements and with the equipment and materials furnished by others. 

3. Electrical components provided for equipment shall comply with all provisions of the 


4. Protective coatings and paints applied to equipment shall be fully compatible with the 

final coatings to be field applied in accordance with the Contract Documents. 

C. Adaptation Of Equipment 

1. Drawings and specifications are prepared for the specified products. Make 

modifications to incorporate the products into the project at no cost to the Owner, if a 

substitution for a product is requested and approved in accordance with Section 01 31 

13, Project Coordination. 

2. Do not provide a product with a physical size that exceeds the available space. 

Consideration may be given to the acceptance of these products or equipment if the 

Product Requirement – Bid Package #8 01 60 00-1 



5/24/2012


Bidder assumes all costs necessary to incorporate the item and the CMAR/Engineer 

approves such revisions. 

3. Coordinate electrical requirements for the products to be installed in the project, 

including revisions in electrical equipment components wiring and other factors 

necessary to incorporate the component. 

A. Provide Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures, and shall 

include: 


1. Certificates of Adequacy of Design, as described in Section 01 33 00, Submittal 

Procedures; 

2. Equipment Installation Reports per Section 01 75 00, Starting and Adjusting; 

3. Other documentation as required by detailed equipment specifications. 

A. The applicable industry standards referenced in Specifications shall apply as if written here 

in its entirety. 

B. Except where otherwise indicated, structural and miscellaneous fabricated steel used in 

items of equipment shall conform to the Standards of the American Institute of Steel 

Construction. 

1.05 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES 

A. Guarantee and or Warranty products furnished by the Bidder under this contract against: 

1. Faulty or inadequate design, 

2. Improper assembly or erection, 

3. Defective workmanship or materials, 

4. Leakage, breakage, or other failure. 

B. Guarantee and or Warranty the products installed under this contract, including products 

furnished by the Owner, against leakage, breakage, or other failure due to improper 

assembly or erection and against improper installation of the equipment. The guarantee 

and or warranty period shall be as defined in the General Conditions. Individual specification 

sections may have more stringent warranty requirements than stated in the General 

Conditions The most stringent warranty will be required in the event of any difference in the 

two aforementioned locations. 

2.00 PRODUCTS 


A. Design, fabricate, assemble, deliver and install according to normally accepted engineering 

and shop practices, except where a higher standard of quality is required by the Contract 

Documents. 

B. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gages. Like parts are to be 

interchangeable. 




5/24/2012

C. Two or more items of the same kind are to be identical and made by the same Supplier. 

D. Provide products suitable for the intended service. 

E. Adhere to the equipment capacities, sizes, and dimensions indicated by the Contract 

Documents. 

F. Do not use products for any purpose other than that for which it is designed. 

G. Provide new products unless previously used products are specifically allowed in the 


H. Equipment shall not have been in service at any time prior to delivery, except as required by 

tests. 

I. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions. 

J. Iron castings shall be tough, close-grained gray iron free from blowholes, flaws, or excessive 

shrinkage and shall conform to ASTM A48. 

K. Structural members shall be considered as subject to shock or vibratory loads. 

L. Unless otherwise indicated, steel which will be submerged, all or in part, during normal 

operation of the equipment shall be at least 1/4 inch thick. All edges are to be chamfered to 

preclude any sharp exposed edges. 

2.02 ELECTRIC MOTORS 

A. Unless otherwise required by the detailed equipment specifications, motors furnished with 

equipment shall comply with the following requirements: 

1. Motors shall be designed and applied in compliance with NEMA, ANSI, IEEE, and AFBMA 

standards and the NEC for the specific duty imposed by the driven equipment. 

2. Where frequent starting occurs, motors shall be designed for frequent starting duty 

equivalent to the duty service required by the driven equipment. 

3. Unless recognized and defined by the standards and codes for intermittent duty as a 

standard industry practice, motors shall be rated for continuous duty at 40 degrees C 

ambient. Motor temperature rise above 40 degrees C ambient on continuous operation 

at nameplate horsepower shall not exceed the NEMA limit. 

4. Motors shall be designed to start with appropriate starter or variable speed drive.. 

5. Motor bearing life shall be based upon the actual operating load conditions imposed by 

the driven equipment. 

6. Motors shall be sized for the altitude at the location where the equipment is to be 

installed. 

7. Motors with 1.0 service factor shall not be loaded more than 87 percent of the 

nameplate horsepower. Motors with a 1.15 service factor shall not be loaded more 

than 100 percent of the nameplate horsepower. 

8. Where the detailed specifications call for encapsulated motor windings, the following 

process shall be used: 

a. After stator assembly, the stator assembly shall be sealed vacuum-pressure 

impregnation (VPI) of epoxy resin. The stator shall receive two VPI treatments, each 

treatment consisting of a dip followed by an oven bake. After the final cure, the 

stator assembly shall receive a final (third) coating of a durable epoxy varnish to 




5/24/2012

further protect against dust, moisture, and a chemical degradation. The windings 

shall comply with the latest applicable provisions of NEMA MG1. 

9. Motors shall have a clamp-type grounding terminal inside the motor conduit box. 

10. Motors with external conduit boxes shall have oversized conduit boxes. 

11. Maximum starting current shall be per NEMA MG1, Class H. 

12. Efficiency shall be per NEMA MG1 for Premium efficiency motors. 

13. Minimum insulation shall be Type F. 

14. Motors shall be random wound with copper coils. 

15. Motors located in a hazardous location shall be rated for the appropriate classification. 

B. It is intended that the Supplier use his standard motor on integrally constructed motor 

driven equipment such as appliances, hand tools, etc., which would otherwise require 

redesign of the complete unit in order to provide a motor having the specified features. 

C. Unless otherwise required by the detailed equipment specifications, motors within the 

horsepower ranges indicated below shall be rated and constructed as follows: 

1. Below 1/2 HP: 

a. 115 volt, 60 hz, single-phase. 

b. Dripproof in clean and dry locations; TEFP in all other locations. 

c. Permanently lubricated sealed bearings. 

d. Built-in manual-reset thermal protector; or furnished with integrally mounted 

stainless steel enclosed manual motor-overload switch. 

2. 1/2 to 1 HP: 

a. 230/460 volt, 60 hz, three phase. 

b. Dripproof in clean and dry locations; TEFC in all other locations. 

c. Permanently lubricated sealed bearings. 

3. 1-1/2 HP and Above: 

a. 230/460 [208] volt, 60 hz, three phase. 

b. Dripproof in clean and dry locations; TEFC in all other locations. 

c. Oil or grease lubricated anti-friction or oil lubricated sleeve bearings. 

d. Vertical motors shall have fifteen year average life thrust bearings. 

D. Motors with horsepower ratings of 15 horsepower or greater shall be provided with space 

heaters to operate on 120 volt single-phase service. 

2.03 EQUIPMENT APPURTENANCES 

A. Cover belt or chain drives, fan blades, couplings, and other moving or rotating parts on all 

sides by a safety guard. 

1. Fabricate safety guards from 16 USS gage or heavier galvanized or aluminum-clad sheet 

steel or 1/2" mesh galvanized expanded metal. 

2. Design guards for easy installation and removal. 

3. Provide galvanized supports and accessories for each guard. 

4. Provide stainless steel bolts and hardware. 

5. Provide safety guards in outdoor locations designed to prevent the entrance of rain and 

dripping water. 

2.04 ANCHOR BOLTS 




5/24/2012

A. Provide suitable anchor bolts for each product. 

B. Provide anchor bolts, with templates or setting drawings, sufficiently early to permit setting 

the anchor bolts when the structural concrete is placed. 

C. Provide two nuts for each bolt. 

D. Provide anchor bolts for products mounted on baseplates that are long enough to permit 1 - 

1/2" of grout beneath the baseplate and to provide adequate anchorage into structural 

concrete. 

E. Provide stainless steel anchor bolts, nuts, and washers. 

2.05 SPECIAL TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES 

A. Furnish tools, instruments, lifting and handling devices, and accessories necessary for proper 

maintenance and adjustment that are available only from the Supplier or are not commonly 

available. 

2.06 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION PLAQUES 

A. Provide a plaque for each piece of equipment in accordance with Section 40 05 53, 

Identification For Process Piping And Equipment. 

2.07 LUBRICATION SYSTEMS FOR EQUIPMENT 

A. Provide equipment lubricated by systems which: 

1. Require attention no more frequently than weekly during continuous operation. 

2. Do not require attention during start-up or shutdown. 

3. Do not waste lubricants. 

B. Provide lubricants to fill lubricant reservoirs and to replace lubricant consumed during 

testing, start-up, and operation prior to acceptance of equipment by the Owner. 

2.08 INSULATION OF PIPING 

A. Insulate all piping on or related to equipment as required to prevent freezing under any 

condition. Insulate piping per the Supplier's written instruction or per Section 23 07 19- 

HVAC Piping whichever is more stringent. 


3.01 LUBRICATION 

A. Lubricate all products provided or installed for this Bid Proposal, including products 

furnished by the Owner, per the Supplier's written recommendations until the product is 

accepted by the Owner. 





5/24/2012

Execution and Closeout 

Requirements

01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 

1.00 GENERAL 


Comply with requirements of the General Conditions and specified administrative procedures in 

closing out the Construction Contract. 


Submit affidavits and releases on forms Provided by the CMAR/Engineer. 

1.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 

A. Submit written notification that the work or designated portion of the work is substantially 

complete to the CMAR when the work is considered to be substantially complete per the 

General Conditions. Include a list of the items remaining to be completed or corrected 

before the project will be considered to be complete. 

B. CMAR/Engineer shall visit the project site to observe the work within a reasonable time 

after notification is received to determine the status of completion. 

C. CMAR shall issue notification to the Bidder that the work is either substantially complete or 

that additional work must be performed before the project may be considered substantially 

complete. 

1. CMAR shall notify the Bidder in writing of items that must be completed before the 

project can be considered substantially complete. 

a. Correct the noted deficiencies in the work. 

b. Issue a second written notice with a revised list of deficiencies when work has been 

completed. 

c. CMAR/Engineer shall revisit the site and the procedure shall begin again. 

2. Engineer shall issue a tentative Certificate of Substantial Completion to the Owner when 

the project is considered to be substantially complete. Certificate shall include a 

tentative list of items to be corrected before final payment. 

a. Owner will review and revise the list of items and notify the CMAR/Engineer of any 

objections or other items that are to be included in the list. 

b. Engineer shall prepare and send to the CMR a definite Certificate of Substantial 

Completion with a revised tentative list of items to be corrected or completed. 

c. Review the list and notify the CMAR/Engineer in writing of any objections within 10 

days of receipt of Certificate of Substantial Completion. 

1.04 FINAL INSPECTION 

A. Submit written certification in the form provided by the Engineer when the project is 

complete and: 

1. Contract Documents have been reviewed. 

2. Work has been completed in compliance with the Contract Documents. 

3. Equipment and systems have been tested per Contract Documents and are fully 

operational. 

Execution and Closeout Requirements - Bid Package #8 01 70 00-1 


Ward County Water Supply Expansion Project – North well Field 

5/24/2012

4. Final Operations and Maintenance Manuals have been provided to the Owner and all 

operator training has been completed. 

5. Specified spare parts and special tools have been provided. 

6. Work is complete and ready for final inspection. 

B. CMAR/Engineer shall make an inspection with the Owner and appropriate regulatory 

agencies to determine the status of completeness within a reasonable time after the receipt 

of the Certificate. 

C. CMAR shall issue notice that the project is complete or notify the Bidder that work is not 

complete or is defective. 

1. Submit the request for final payment with closeout submittals described in Paragraph 

1.07 if notified that the project is complete and the work is acceptable. 

2. Upon receipt of notification from the CMAR/Engineer that work is incomplete or 

defective, take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies. Send a second 

certification to the CMAR when work has been completed or corrected. 

3. CMAR/Engineer shall re-visit the site and the procedure will begin again. 

1.05 REINSPECTION FEES 

A. Pay fees to the Owner to compensate the Engineer for reinspection of the work required by 

the failure of the work to comply with the claims of status of completion made by the 

Biodder. 

B. CMAR may withhold the amount of these fees from the Bidder's final payment. 

C. Cost for additional inspections will be billed to the Bidder by the CMAR for the actual hours 

required for the inspection and preparation of related reports in accordance with the rates 

provided in the Supplemental Conditions. 

1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS TO THE CMAR 

A. Record Drawings per Section 01 31 00, Project Coordination. 

B. Keys and keying schedule. 

C. Warranties and bonds. 

D. Evidence of payment or release of liens on the forms provided by the Engineer and as 

required by the General Conditions. 

E. Consent from Surety to Final Payment. 

F. Equipment installation reports on equipment. 

G. Shop Drawings, record data, operations and maintenance manuals, and other submittals as 

required by the Contract Documents. 

H. Specified spare parts and special tools. 

I. Certificates of occupancy, operating certificates, or other similar releases required to allow 

the Owner unrestricted use of the work and access to services and utilities. 

J. Evidence of final, continuing insurance, and bond coverage as required by the Contract 

Documents. 




5/24/2012

1.07 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT REQUEST 

A. Submit a preliminary final Application for Payment. This application is to include 

adjustments to the Contract Amount for: 

1. Approved Change Orders 

2. Allowances not previously adjusted by Change Order 

3. Unit prices 

4. Deductions for defective work that has been accepted by the Owner 

5. Penalties and bonuses 

6. Deductions for liquidated damages 

7. Deductions for reinspection payments per Paragraph 1.05 

8. Other adjustments 

B. CMAR shall prepare a final Change Order, reflecting the approved adjustments to the 

contract amount which have not been covered by previously approved Change Orders. 

C. Submit the final application for payment per the General Conditions, including the final 

Change Order. 

1.08 WARRANTIES, BONDS, AND SERVICES AGREEMENTS 

A. Provide warranties, bonds, and service agreements required by Section 01 33 00, Submittal 

Procedures or by the individual sections of the specifications. 

B. The date for the start of warranties, bonds, and service agreements is established per the 

General Conditions. 

C. Compile warranties, bonds, and service agreements and review these documents for 

compliance with the Contract Documents. 

1. Each document is to be signed by the respective Supplier or Subcontractor. 

2. Each document is to include: 

a. The product or work item description 

b. The firm, with the name of the principal, address, and telephone number 

c. Scope of warranty, bond or services agreement 

d. Date, duration, and expiration date for each warranty bond and service agreement 

e. Procedures to be followed in the event of a failure 

f. Specific instances that might invalidate the warranty or bond 

D. Submit two copies of each document to the CMAR/Engineer for review and transmittal to 

the Owner. 

1. Submit duplicate sets. 

2. Documents are to be submitted on 8-1/2" x 11" paper, punched for a standard threering 

binder. 

3. Submit each set in a commercial quality three-ring binder with a durable and cleanable 

plastic cover. The title "Warranties, Bonds, and Services Agreements", the project name 

and the name of the Bidder/CMAR are to be typed and affixed to the cover. 

E. Submit warranties, bonds and services agreements: 

1. At the time of final completion and before final payment. 




5/24/2012

2. Within 10 days after inspection and acceptance for equipment or components placed in 

service during the progress of construction. 

1.09 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 

Claims and disputes must be resolved prior to recommendations of final Application for 

Payment. Acceptance and final payment by the Bidder will indicate that any outstanding claims 

or disputed issues have been resolved to the full satisfaction of the Bidder. 





5/24/2012

Final Cleaning

01 74 23 FINAL CLEANING 

1.00 GENERAL 

1.01 This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for final cleaning at 

Substantial Completion. 


A. Perform a thorough cleaning of the site, buildings, or other structures prior to Owner 

occupancy of the buildings, and prior to final completion. Leave the project clean and ready 

for occupancy. 


A. Provide data for maintenance per Section 01 78 23, Operation And Maintenance Data. 

1.04 QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Use experienced workmen or professional cleaners for final cleaning. 

2.00 PRODUCTS 


A. Furnish the labor and products needed for cleaning and finishing as recommended by the 

Manufacturer of the surface material being cleaned. 

B. Use cleaning products only on the surfaces recommended by the Supplier. 

C. Use only those cleaning products which will not create hazards to health or property and 

which will not damage surfaces. 


3.01 FINAL CLEANING 

A. Thoroughly clean the entire site and make ready for occupancy. 

1. Remove construction debris, boxes, and trash from the site. 

2. Remove construction storage sheds and field offices. 

3. Restore grade to match surrounding condition and remove excess dirt. 

4. Sweep all drives and parking lots clean of dirt and debris. Use water truck or hose down 

paved site to like new appearance. 

B. Clean floors and inspect for damage. 

1. Remove oil, grease, paint drippings, and other contaminants from floors, then mop 

repeatedly until thoroughly clean. Replace damaged flooring. 

C. Clean and polish inside and outside glass surfaces. Wash with window cleaner and water, 

apply a coat of high quality glass polish and wipe clean. Do not scratch or otherwise mar 

glass surfaces. 

Final Cleaning – Bid Package #6 01 74 23-1 


Ward County Water Supply Expansion Project – Pump Stations 

2/2/2012

D. Clean wall surfaces to remove dirt or scuff marks. Spot paint nicks and other damage. If 

spot-painting does not blend into the existing color and texture of the surrounding surfaces, 

repaint wall from inside corner to inside corner. Touch up damaged surfaces on factory 

finished equipment using special paint furnished by the Manufacturer. 

E. Remove dirt, oil, grease, dust and other contaminants from floors, equipment and 

apparatus in mechanical and electrical rooms with vacuum. 

F. Inspect exterior painted surfaces. Spot paint any damaged surfaces. 

G. Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters on heating, ventilating, and air 

conditioning systems. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters 

during construction. 

H. Clean roof areas of debris; flush roof drainage systems with water until clear. 

I. Broom clean exterior paved surfaces and rake clean other surfaces of the grounds. 

J. Clean and polish all electrical equipment and exposed conduits. Remove paint overspray. 

Provide a blemish free appearance on all exposed equipment and conduits. 


Final Cleaning – Bid Package #6 01 74 23-2 


Ward County Water Supply Expansion Project – Pump Stations 

2/2/2012

Starting and Adjusting

01 75 00 STARTING AND ADJUSTING 

1.00 GENERAL 


A. Provide step-by-step procedures for starting provided systems, including equipment, pumps 

and processes. 

B. Provide pre-start up inspections by equipment manufacturers. 

C. Provide instruction and demonstration of operation, adjustment, and maintenance of each 

system and the component parts. 

D. Place each system in service and operate the system to prove performance and to provide 

for initial correction of defects in workmanship, calibration, and operation. 

E. Provide for initial maintenance and operation. 

F. Cost for Starting and Adjusting provided by Suppliers and Subcontractors as described in this 

section are to be included in the Bidder’s Proposal. Bidder’s efforts are include in the 

Bidder’s Proposal. 


A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures, and shall 

include: 


1. A Plan of Action for testing, checking, and starting major equipment and process piping 

systems. Submit reports as required by this specification. 

2. Equipment Installation Reports on form shown in Section 01 31 13.13, Forms per 

Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures. 

3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals per Section 01 78 23, Operation And Maintenance 

Data. 

Comply with any standards associated with the testing or start-up of equipment, as listed in the 

various sections of the specifications. 

1.04 SPECIAL JOB CONDITIONS 

A. Do not start or test any apparatus until the complete unit has been installed and thoroughly 

checked. 

B. A representative of the Supplier shall be in attendance of tests and start-up procedures 

when required by these specifications. 

2.00 PRODUCTS 

2.01 TESTING INSTRUMENTATION 

Furnish any instrumentation or other testing devices needed to conduct tests. 


Starting and Adjusting – Bid Package #8 01 75 00-1 



5/24/2012

3.01 SERVICES OF SUPPLIER'S' REPRESENTATIVES 

A. The Supplier's representative for inspection, supervision of installation, and training must be 

an experienced and competent technical (not sales) representative of the manufacturer or 

Supplier. 

B. Perform installation, adjustment, and testing of the equipment under the direct supervision 

of the Supplier's representative where specified. 

C. The Supplier's representative is to instruct the Owner or his authorized personnel on 

operational procedures and maintenance requirements. 

D. Include the cost of the services of the Supplier's representative in the equipment price. 

3.02 INSPECTION AND START-UP 

A. Inspect equipment prior to placing any equipment or system into operation. Make 

adjustments as necessary for proper operation. 

1. Check for adequate and proper lubrication. 

2. Determine that parts or components are free from undue stress from structural 

members, piping or anchorage. 

3. Adjust equipment for proper balance and operations. 

4. Determine that vibrations are within acceptable limits. 

5. Determine that equipment operates properly under full load conditions. 

6. Determine that the equipment is in true alignment. 

B. Have the Supplier's representative present when the equipment is placed in operation. 

1. The Representative is to be on site as often as necessary for proper and trouble free 

operation. 

2. Ensure that the proper procedure is employed in start up of systems. 

C. Provide Equipment Installation Reports for Equipment on the form indicated by Engineer. 

1. Certify that the equipment and related appurtenances have been thoroughly examined 

and approved for start-up and operation. 

2. Include the date when Owner's personnel were instructed in the proper operation and 

maintenance of the equipment in the report. 

3.03 STARTING REQUIREMENTS 

Refer to the individual sections of the specifications for specific start up procedures. 

3.04 INITIAL OPERATION 

A. Start, test, and place equipment and systems into operation for 30 days to allow the Owner, 

CMAR and Engineer to observe the operation and overall performance of the equipment 

and to determine that controls function as intended. 

B. Equipment which operates on a limited or part-time basis shall be operated in the presence 

of the CMAR and Engineer to demonstrate that controls function as specified. 

C. Perform acceptance test as specified in individual specification sections. Demonstrate that 

equipment and systems meet the specified performance criteria. 




5/24/2012

D. Unless specifically stated otherwise in the individual equipment specifications, equipment 

and systems are not substantially complete until the end of this initial operation period. If 

an exception to this requirement is specifically noted in an individual equipment 

specification, the exception shall only apply to that particular piece of equipment and not to 

the remaining components provided under the project. 

3.05 OPERATOR TRAINING 

A. Provide instruction and demonstration of the care and operation of the equipment to the 

Owner's personnel. Instruction is to include classroom and hands-on training. 

B. Provide training in adequate detail to ensure that the trainees who complete the program 

will be qualified and capable of operating and maintaining the equipment, products, and 

systems provided. 

C. Operations Training is to include but not be limited to: 

1. Orientation to provide an overview of system/subsystem configuration and operation 

2. Terminology, nomenclature, and display symbols. 

3. Operations theory. 

4. Equipment appearance, functions, concepts, and operation. 

5. Operating modes, practices and procedures under normal, diminished, and emergency 

conditions. 

6. Start-up and shutdown procedures. 

7. Safety Precautions. 

8. On-the-job operating experience for monitoring functions, supervisory, or command 

activities. Include functions and activities associated with diminished operating modes, 

failure recognition, and responses to system/subsystem and recovery procedures. 

9. Content and use of Operation and Maintenance manuals and related reference 

materials. 

D. Provide training for performing on-site routine, preventive, and remedial maintenance of 

the equipment, product, or system. Maintenance training is to include but not be limited 

to: 

1. Orientation to provide an overview of system/subsystem concept, configuration, and 

operation. 

2. Operations theory and interfaces. 

3. Instructions necessary to ensure a basic theoretical and practical understanding of 

equipment appearance, layout and functions. 

4. Safety precautions. 

5. Use of standard and special tools and test equipment. 

6. Adjustment, calibration, and use of related test equipment. 

7. Detailed preventive maintenance activities. 

8. Troubleshooting, diagnostics, and testing. 

9. Equipment assembly and disassembly. 

10. Repair and parts replacement. 

11. Parts ordering practices and storage. 

12. Failure and recovery procedures. 

13. Cabling and/or interface connectors. 




5/24/2012

14. Content and use of Operation and Maintenance manuals and related reference 

materials. 

15. Procedures for warranty repairs. 

16. Lubrication. 

17. Procedures, practices, documentation, and materials required to commence system 

maintenance. 

E. Provide a training plan that indicates the schedule and sequence of the training programs. 

The training plan is to include for each course: 

1. Number of hours for the course. 

2. Agenda and narrative description, including the defined objectives for each lesson. 

3. Draft copy of training handbooks. 

4. A descriptive listing of suggested reference publications. 

5. Audio-visual equipment required for training. 

6. Type and number of tools or test equipment required for each training session. 

F. Provide and use training aids to complement the instruction and enhance learning. 

1. Provide training handbooks for use in both the classroom and the hands-on phases of 

training for each course. 

2. Instructional materials shall include references to the Operation and Maintenance 

Manuals and identify and explain the use of the manual. 

3. Provide a copy of all audio/visual training materials used in the presentations. 

G. Provide qualified instructors to conduct the training. 

1. Instructors must have knowledge of the theory of operation and practical experience 

with the equipment, product, or system. 

2. Instructors must have successfully conducted similar training courses. 

H. Training may be recorded by the Owner or its consultants for use in future training. Provide 

legal releases or pay additional fees required to allow training by the manufacturer to be 

recorded. 

I. Schedule for training is to be approved by Owner. 

1. Schedule training and start-up operations for no more than one piece of equipment or 

system at a time. 

2. Owner may require re-scheduling of training if operations personnel are not available 

for training on a scheduled date. 

3. Provide a minimum of two weeks' notice if training must be rescheduled. 

4. Training is to be limited to 24 hours per week 

5. Time required for training is to be considered in the development of the project 

schedule. 

J. Schedule and coordinate training for equipment, products, or systems which depend upon 

other equipment or systems for proper operation so that trainees can be made familiar with 

the operation and maintenance of the entire operating system. 

K. Conduct a training course for the equipment products and systems provided for the Bid 

Proposal. Training is to be adequate to meet the training objectives described above. Cost 

for training and start up will be included in the Cost of Work for each Bid Proposal package. 




5/24/2012

3.06 INITIAL MAINTENANCE 

A. Maintain equipment until the project is accepted by the Owner. 

1. Insure that mechanical equipment is properly greased, oiled, or otherwise cared for as 

recommended by the Supplier. 

2. Operate air handling equipment only when filters are in place and are clean. Change 

filters weekly during construction. 

B. Service equipment per the Supplier's instructions immediately before releasing the 

equipment to the Owner. 

1. Replace replaceable filters and clean permanent filters associated with air handling units 

or other packaged equipment. 

2. Remove and clean screens at strainers in piping systems. 

3. Clean insects from intake louver screens. 





5/24/2012

Operation and Maintenance 

Data

01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 

1.00 GENERAL 


A. Prepare a complete and detailed Operation and Maintenance Manual for each type and 

model of equipment or product furnished and installed under this Bid Proposal. 

B. Prepare the manuals in the form of an instruction manual for the Owner. The manual is to 

be suitable for use in providing operation and maintenance instruction as required by 

Section 01 75 00, Starting And Adjusting. 

C. Provide complete and detailed information specifically for the products or systems provided 

for this Project. Include the information required to operate and maintain the product or 

system. 

D. Manuals are to be in addition to any information packed with or attached to the product 

when delivered. This information is to be taken from the product and provided as an 

attachment to the manual. 

E. Cost for O&M Manuals provided by Suppliers and Subcontractors as described in this section 

are to be included in the Bid Proposal. Costs for Bidder’s efforts are to be include in the Bid 

Proposal. 


A. Submit manuals in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures. Attach to each 

manual a copy of the Operation and Maintenance Manual Review Form as shown in Section 

01 31 13.13, Forms with pertinent information completed. 

1.03 GUARANTEES 

A. Provide copies of the Manufacturer's warranties, guarantees, or service agreements in 

accordance with Section 01 70 00, Execution And Closeout Requirements. 

2.00 PRODUCTS 


A. Print manuals on heavy, first quality paper. 

1. Paper shall be 8 1/2 inch X 11 inch paper. 

a. Reduce drawings and diagrams to 8 1/2 inch X 11 inch paper size. 

b. When reduction is not practical, fold drawings and place each separately in a clear, 

super heavy weight, top loading polypropylene sheet protector designed for ring 

binder use. Provide a typed identification label on each sheet protector. 

2. Punch paper for standard three-ring binders. 

B. Place manuals in Wilson Jones 385 Line D-Ring Dubllock Presentation Binders. 

1. Binders are to have clear front, back, and spine covers. 

2. Sheet lifters are to be provided. 

3. Minimum size is 2 inch capacity. Maximum size is 3 inch capacity. 

Operation and Maintenance Data – Bid Package #8 01 78 23-1 



5/24/2012

C. Provide tab indexes for each section of the manual. 

1. Indexes are to be constructed of heavy-duty paper with a reinforced binding edge and 

punched with 9/32 inch holes to fit the binders. 

2. Index is to have clear insertable tabs for a typed insert. 

2.02 ELECTRONIC MANUAL FORMAT 

A. Manual contents to be provided on compact disc (CD). 

1. Minimum CD storage capacity is 700MB. 

2. CD to have read/write capability. 

B. Provide individual electronic files for each manual. 

1. Maximum file size is 5MB. If manual is greater than maximum allowable file 

size, provide individual files for each major section of manual. 

2. Acceptable file types for written documents are Portable Document File (PDF) or 

Microsoft Word formats. Acceptable file types for drawing files are PDF 

formats. All files shall be compatible with the latest software version available. 

3. Filename shall identify the plant site, plant area, equipment manufacturer, and 

date equipment placed in service. i.e. WWTP-PC1-Manufacturer-200503.pdf. 

4. Each electronic file shall contain a table of contents at the beginning of the file 

which includes hypertext links or bookmarks to navigate the file contents per 

section/chapter. 

5. Scanned images of written documents are not acceptable. Document must 

allow character selection. Text within a file shall be transferable to other 

documents. 

6. Drawing files shall have the ability to turn on/off drawing layers within the file. 

7. Submit a preliminary version of the electronic format of the manual for review. 

Upon approval of the preliminary submittal, the CMAR shall provide three 

copies of the electronic manual to the Owner. 


3.01 MANUAL ORGANIZATION AND CONTENTS 

A. Provide a Table of Contents listing each section of the manual for each product or system. 

1. Identify each product or system using the nomenclature shown in the Contract 

Documents. 

2. Assign a number and letter to each section in the manual. 

a. Assign a number to each product or system. The number is to correspond to the 

Owner's equipment numbering system or other system designated by the Engineer. 

b. A cross reference is to be provided for the Owner's numbering system and 

designations for equipment indicated in the Contract Documents. 

c. The letter assigned will represent the part of the manual, consistent with the 

manual contents as required by Paragraphs 3.02, 3.03, and 3.04. 

3. Provide index tabs for each section in the manual. 

4. The designation on each index tab is to correspond to the number and letter assigned in 

the Table of Contents. 




5/24/2012

B. Include only the information that pertains to the product described. Annotate each sheet 

to: 

1. Clearly identify the specific product or component installed. 

2. Clearly identify the data applicable to the installation. 

3. Delete reference to inapplicable information. 

C. Supplement manual information with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate relations of 

component parts of equipment and systems, and control and flow diagrams. 

D. Identify each manual by placing a printed cover sheet in the front cover of the binder and as 

the first page in the manual. The first page is to be placed in a clear polypropylene sheet 

protector. The information on first page and the cover page are to include: 

1. Name of Owner 

2. Project Name 

3. Volume number 

4. The Table of Contents for that volume 

E. Insert the Table of Contents into the spine of each manual. 

F. Manuals for several products or systems may be provided in the same binder. 

1. Sections for each product or system must be included in the same binder. 

2. Sections must be in numerical order from volume to volume. 

G. Correlate the data into related groups when multiple binders are used. 

H. Fill binders to only three fourths of its indicated capacity to allow for addition of materials to 

each binder by the Owner. 

3.02 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS MANUAL CONTENT 

A. Manual shall provide the following information: 

1. A description of the unit and component parts. 

2. Operating instructions for startup, normal operations, regulation, control, shutdown, 

emergency conditions, and limiting operating conditions. 

3. Maintenance instructions including assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and 

checking instructions. 

4. Lubrication schedule and lubrication procedures. Include a cross reference for 

recommended lubrication products. 

5. Troubleshooting guide. 

6. Schedule of routine maintenance requirements. 

7. Description of sequence of operation by the Control Manufacturer. 

8. Warnings for detrimental maintenance practices. 

9. Parts lists including: 

a. Part numbers for ordering new parts, 

b. Assembly illustrations showing an exploded view of the complex parts of the 

product 

c. Predicted life of parts subject to wear 

d. List of the Manufacturer's recommended spare parts, current prices with effective 

date and number of parts recommended for storage 




5/24/2012

e. Directory of a local source of supply for parts with company name, address, and 

telephone number 

f. Complete nomenclature and list of commercial replacement parts. 

10. Outline, cross section and assembly drawings, engineering data, test data, and 

performance curves. 

11. Control schematics and point to point wiring diagrams prepared for field installation, 

including circuit directories of panel boards and terminal strips. 

12. List of identification nameplates installed on equipment and valve identification per the 


13. Other information as may be required by the individual sections of the specifications. 

3.03 ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS SYSTEMS MANUAL 


1. A description of the systems and component parts. 

2. Control schematics and point to point wiring diagrams prepared for field installation. 

Include circuit directories of panel boards and terminal strips and as installed color 

coded wiring diagrams. 

3. Operating procedures, maintenance procedures, and the Manufacturer's printed 

operating and maintenance instructions. 

4. List of the Manufacturer's recommended spare parts, current prices with effective date, 

and number of parts recommended for storage. 

5. Other information as may be required by the individual sections of the specifications. 

3.04 ARCHITECTURAL PRODUCTS MANUAL 


1. Information required for ordering replacement products. 

2. Instructions for care and maintenance. 

3. List of the Manufacturer's recommended lubricants. 

4. The Manufacturer's recommendations for types of cleaning agents and methods. 

5. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods that are detrimental to the product. 

6. Recommended maintenance and cleaning schedule. 

B. Final balancing reports for mechanical systems. 

C. Other information as may be required by the individual sections of the specifications. 

3.05 LIST OF SERVICE ORGANIZATIONS 

A. Provide a directory of authorized service organizations with company name, address, 

telephone number, email address, and the contact person for warranty repair. 





5/24/2012

Appendix A 

Contract Documents for 

Raw Water Well Sites – Ward 

County North Well Field 

(Daniel B. Stephens & 

Associates, Inc. and Freese and Nichols) 

May 2012

This page intentionally left blank.

Raw Water Supply Well Sites 

Ward County North Well Field 

Technical Specifications 

Table of Contents 

Specification 

Number 

Description 

Division 03 

Concrete 

03 10 00 Concrete Formwork 

03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement 

03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete 

Division 05 

Metals 

05 05 10 Anchors, Inserts, and Epoxy Dowels 

Division 11 

Equipment 

11 97 00 Submersible Pumps and Installation 

Division 22 

Plumbing 

22 05 23 General-Duty Valves for Plumping Piping 

22 05 53 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 

22 07 00 Plumbing Insulation 

22 10 00 Plumbing and Piping 

Division 26 

Electrical 

26 01 26 Testing of Electrical Systems 

26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 

26 05 19 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables 

26 05 26 Grounding & Bonding for Electrical Systems 

26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 

26 05 33.01 Conduits 

26 05 33.02 Wireways 

26 05 33.03 Outlet Boxes 

26 05 33.04 Pull and Junction Boxes for Electrical Systems 

26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 

26 05 73.01 Electrical Power System Studies 

26 24 16.02 Lighting and Branch Panelboards 

26 27 26 Wiring Devices 

26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 

26 29 13 Enclosed Controllers 

May 18, 2012 

Revision 0 


Table of Contents




Table of Contents 

(continued) 

Specification 

Number 

Division 31 

Earthwork 

Description 

31 11 00 Clearing and Grubbing 

31 23 13 Subgrade Preparation 

31 23 33 Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting 

Division 32 

Exterior Improvements 

32 31 13 Chain Link Fences and Gates 

Division 40 

Process Integration 

40 90 01 Instrumentation 

40 90 01.01 Instrumentation – Flow Meters 

40 90 02.01 Installation of Pre-Purchased SCADA Equipment 

Appendix A 

Appendix B 

Oncor Electric Delivery Requirements 

SCADA Pre-Purchase Contract Specifications 

May 18, 2012 

Revision 0 


Table of Contents

Division 03





SECTION 03 10 00 

CONCRETE FORMWORK 

PART 1 GENERAL 

1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Formwork for cast-in-place concrete, with shoring, bracing, and anchorage. 

2. Openings for other affected work. 

3. Form accessories. 

4. Stripping forms. 

B. Related Sections 

1. Division 01 - General Requirements 

2. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcement 

3. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete 


A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 

1. ACI 301-89 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 


A. Construct and erect concrete formwork in accordance with ACI 301. 


A. General: Follow provisions of Section 01 33 00. 

B. Product Data: Submit product data for all proprietary materials proposed for this work 

including but not limited to form ties, form release agent, and dovetail anchor slots. 

PART 2 PRODUCTS 

2.1 FORM MATERIAL 

A. Plywood: American plywood association (AA) B-B Plyform Class I, ¾-inch minimum 

thickness; sound, undamaged sheets with straight edges. 

B. Steel: Minimum 16 gage sheet, well matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of 

concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished surfaces. 

May 18, 2012 

Concrete Formwork 

Revision 0 03 10 00 - 1




2.2 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES 

A. Form Ties: Removable or snap-off type of adjustable length; to leave no metal within 

1 inch of concrete surface and no holes larger than 1 inch in diameter in surface of 

concrete. 

B. Form Release Agent: Colorless material which will not stain concrete, absorb moisture, 

or impair bonding capability of finishes or coating on concrete. 

C. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Minimum 16 gage galvanized steel; longest possible length with 

alignment splines for joints; release tape sealed slots; securable to concrete formwork. 

D. Fillets for Chamfered Corners: Clear wood or rigid plastic, ¾ inch x ¾ inch; furnished in 

maximum possible lengths. 

PART 3 EXECUTION 

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. Formwork design and fabrication, as well as its construction, are the responsibility of the 

Contractor. 

B. Formwork shall be used to confine the concrete and to shape it to the required shapes, 

lines, and dimensions. 

C. Formwork shall have sufficient strength to resist the loads that result from the placing and 

vibration of concrete and shall have sufficient rigidity to maintain the dimensions of the 

concrete within the specified tolerances. 

D. Except at inside faces of turned-down slabs, earth cuts shall not be used as forms for 

vertical surfaces. 

3.2 FORM CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION 

A. Forms shall be adequately braced and securely fastened before any concrete is placed. 

Arrange exposed joints symmetrically. Make joints tight to prevent mortar leakage. 

Design forms to be removed without damage to concrete in place. Used form material 

can be used subject to approval by the Engineer if clean and undamaged. 

B. Except as otherwise shown, specified, or permitted, forms may be constructed of wood or 

steel. 

C. Provide openings and recesses required for Work under this contract. 

D. Provide ¾-inch chamfer at exposed exterior corners and edges except as otherwise 

shown. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 03 10 00 - 2




E. Set forms and screeds for floors and slabs to provide uniform slope to drains and positive 

drainage of exterior slabs and steps. 

F. Construct formwork so that the finished concrete will conform to the tolerance 

requirements specified in Section 03 30 00: Cast-in-Place Concrete. Set and maintain in 

an undisturbed condition sufficient control points and bench marks to be used for 

reference purposes to check tolerances. 

3.3 FORM COATING APPLICATION 

A. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Apply to form surfaces before placing reinforcement or embedded items. 

C. Do not use on surface scheduled to receive special finishes or coatings that may be 

affected by agent. Soak surfaces of untreated forms with clean water and keep wet until 

concrete is placed. 

3.4 FORM REMOVAL 

A. Minimum time before removal after placing concrete, unless permitted otherwise. 

1. Side forms for footings: 24 hours. 

2. Side forms for walls, columns and beams: 48 hours. 

3. Soffit forms for beams and slabs: When concrete has reached not less than 100% 

of its specified 28-day strength. Subject to prior approval by the Engineer, 

reshoring may be used to support beams and slabs until specified concrete 

strength has been reached. When reshoring is permitted or required, conform to 

requirements of Section 4.6 of ACI 301. 

B. Remove formwork without prying against concrete. Repair all surface defects as 

specified in Section 03 30 00: Cast-in-Place Concrete. 


May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 03 10 00 - 3






CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Reinforcing steel bars, welded wire fabric, and accessories for reinforcement for 

cast-in-place concrete. 



2. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Formwork 

3. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete 


A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 

1. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete 

Reinforcement, including Supplementary Requirements. 

2. ASTM A185 - Welded Steel Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. 

B. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 

1. ACI 301-89 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 

2. ACI 315-80/86 - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement. 

3. ACI 318-89 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 

C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI): 

1. Manual of Standard Practice. 

a. CRSI 63 - Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars. 

b. CRSI 65 - Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports 

Specifications, and Nomenclature. 


A. Submit mill test certificates for reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric, indicating 

physical and chemical analysis. 

B. Submit product data for all proprietary items or materials proposed for use in the project. 

C. Shop Drawings. Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of 

concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 “Details and Detailing of Concrete 

Reinforcement” and ACI 315R “Manual of Engineering and Placing Drawings for 

Reinforced Concrete” showing bar and “Placing Drawings for Reinforced Concrete” 

showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement of concrete 

May 18, 2012 

Concrete Reinforcement 

Revision 0 03 20 00 - 1




reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required at openings through concrete 

structures. 

D. In accordance with Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures. 


2.1 MATERIAL STANDARDS 

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, deformed, Grade 40 for beam stirrups and column ties; 

Grade 60 for other uses. 

B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185, furnished in flat sheets or standard rolls. 


3.1 DETAILING 

A. Except as shown otherwise in the details on the Drawings or required by the applicable 

provisions of the current edition of ACI 318, reinforcement shall be detailed in 

accordance with ACI 315. 

3.2 FABRICATION 

A. Except as otherwise shown on the drawings or specified in this section or other sections 

of these specifications, fabrication of reinforcing steel shall be in accordance with the 

CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. 

B. All reinforcing steel shall be bent cold to the required configurations. 

C. Except as specifically shown otherwise on the Drawings, all reinforcing steel shall be 

shop fabricated. 

D. Do not weld reinforcing bars without specific prior approval of the Engineer. 

3.3 INSTALLATION 

A. General: Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready for the beginning of 

installation of reinforcement and other embedded items. Do not begin installation until 

all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

B. Except as otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified in this section or other sections 

of these Specifications, install reinforcing steel in accordance with CRSI 63. 

C. Prior to placing reinforcement, remove scale, loose or flaking rust, dirt, grease, and other 

coatings that may prevent or impair bond. Protect reinforcement from contaminants after 

placement. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 03 20 00 - 2




D. Install reinforcing steel in correct position by use of preformed bolsters, chairs, and 

spacers. Solid concrete blocks of appropriate size may be used to position bars in 

concrete placed on grade. Legs of steel supports that are in contact with form work shall 

be stainless steel or plastic tipped. 

E. All steel shall have a 2-inch minimum cover of concrete. 

F. Space bars properly and tie securely in position before placing concrete. Tack welding to 

keep reinforcing in place is not permitted. The spacings shown on the drawings for 

reinforcement and other embedded items are maximums. Provide and install a sufficient 

number of items so that the spacings shown are not exceeded. Locate the first and last 

items in a run of uniformly spaced items at not more than one-half the typical spacing nor 

12 inches from the end of a structural element. 

G. Locate reinforcement and other items to avoid conflict with the work of other trades. 

Provide additional reinforcement around openings as shown. Do not cut or remove 

reinforcement for any reason without the prior approval of the Engineer. 

H. Continuity of Vertical Reinforcement: No splices are permitted except as shown. 

Provide dowels from footings to walls or columns at all vertical bars in walls or columns. 

Except as otherwise shown, dowels shall have standard 90-degree ACI hooks with 

12-inch horizontal extensions and vertical legs of sufficient length to provide ACI 

Class B tension lap splices with the vertical bars. 

I. Continuity of Horizontal Reinforcement. 

1. Footings, walls, turned-down slab edges: Bars shall be lapped not less than 

32 bar diameters or 24 inches except where larger splices lengths are shown. 

Except where bar lengths are given, reinforcement is to be continuous for full 

length or width of member less required concrete covers. Do not splice 

transverse footing bars. Additional reinforcement shall be provided at corners, 

intersections, and other discontinuities as shown on the drawings. 

2. Concrete slabs-on-grade: Welded wire fabric shall be lapped not less than one 

and one-half meshes or 8 inches on all sides. 

3. Elevated slabs, beams: No splices except as shown. 


May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 03 20 00 - 3





SECTION 03300 

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Cast-in-place concrete foundations. 

2. Slabs on grade. 

3. Control, and expansion and contraction joint devices associated with concrete 

work. 

4. Equipment pads. 



2. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Formwork: Formwork and accessories. 

3. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcement. 


A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 

1. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings. 

2. ACI 302 - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. 

3. ACI 304 - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and 

Placing Concrete. 

4. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting. 

5. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting. 

6. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete. 

7. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 

1. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates. 

2. ASTM C94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete. 

3. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement. 

4. ASTM C260 - Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 

5. ASTM C494 - Chemicals Admixtures for Concrete. 

6. ASTM D994 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for 

Concrete (Bituminous Type) 

7. ASTM D1752 - Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and 

Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural 

Construction 

8. ASTM D2628 - Standard Specification for Preformed Polychloroprene 

Elastomeric Joint Seals for Concrete Pavements 

May 18, 2012 

Cast-in-Place Concrete 

Revision 0 03 30 00 - 1





A. Product Data: Provide data on joint devices, attachment accessories, admixtures, cement 

types to be used, and final concrete mixture ratios. 

B. Testing: Submit slump test results and 28-day strength testing results of concrete 

cylinders. 

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and interface 

required with adjacent Work. 

D. In accordance with Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures. 


A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301. 

B. Acquire cement and aggregate from same source for all work. 

C. Conform to ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. 

D. Conform to ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. 


A. Coordinate the placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and 

placement of form accessories. 


2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS 

A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I - Normal, Type II - Moderate, Portland type. All cement 

shall be from the same manufacturer unless approved by the Engineer. 

B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33, Size No. 67 (maximum 3/4-inch). 

C. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 

2.2 ADMIXTURES 

A. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260. 

B. Chemical: ASTM C494, Type A - Water Reducing; Type B - Retarding; Type C - 

Accelerating; Type D - Water Reducing and Retarding; Type E - Water Reducing and 

Accelerating admixture. 

C. Fly Ash: Not allowed. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 03 30 00 - 2




2.3 JOINT MATERIALS 

A. Waterstops: flat dumbbell type not less than 3 / 16 -inch for widths up to 5-inches and made 

of rubber in accordance with ASTM D1752 or preformed polychloroprene elastomeric 

joint seals in accordance with ASTM D2628. 

B. Expansion joints: not less than ½-inch and placed between new and existing concrete slab 

construction. 

1. Provided by placing asphalt, coal-tar saturated felt, or equivalent material in 

accordance with ASTM D994. 

2. Continuously sealed utilizing a sealant approved by the manufacturer of the 

expansion joint materials. 

2.4 CONCRETE MIX 

A. Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94, Alternative No. 2 and 3. 

B. Select proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 301 Method 1, 

Method 2 and Method 3. 

C. Provide concrete to the following criteria: 

1. Compressive Strength (28 days): 3,000 psi. 

2. Slump: 3 to 5 inches. 

3. Air: 4.5 to 7.5 percent. 

4. Water to cement ratio: 0.50. 

D. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Engineer. 

E. Add air entraining agent to normal weight concrete mix. 


3.1 EXAMINATION 

A. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement. 

B. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete 

are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in placing 

concrete. 

3.2 PREPARATION 

A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding 

agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

3.3 PLACING CONCRETE 

A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 03 30 00 - 3




B. Notify Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of operations. 

C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joint fillers are not disturbed 

during concrete placement. 

3.4 CONCRETE FINISHING 

A. Provide formed concrete surfaces to be left exposed with smooth surfaces free of 

honeycombs, aggregate breakout, and fins. 

B. Steel trowel and brush top surfaces of slabs. 

3.5 CURING AND PROTECTION 

A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or 

cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. 

B. Cure concrete in accordance with ACI 308, Standard Practice for Curing Concrete. 

C. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for a 

minimum of three (3) days for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. 

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Field inspection and testing will be performed in accordance with ACI 301. 

B. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm. 

C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to Engineer for review prior to 

commencement of Work. 

D. Tests of cement and aggregates may be performed by Owner to ensure conformance with 

specified requirements. 

E. Four concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 100 or less cubic yards of each class 

of concrete placed or as determined by the Engineer. 

F. One additional test cylinder may be taken during cold weather concreting, cured on job 

site under same conditions as concrete it represents. 

G. One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken. 

3.7 PATCHING 

A. Allow Engineer to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms. 

B. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Engineer 

upon discovery. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 03 30 00 - 4




C. Patch imperfections as directed. 

3.8 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE 

A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, 

tolerances or specified requirements. 

B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Engineer. 

C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express 

direction of Engineer for each individual area. 

D. Defective concrete work shall be repaired or replaced at Contractor’s expense. 

3.9 SCHEDULE - CONCRETE TYPES AND FINISHES 

A. All concrete - 3,000 psi, 28 day compressive strength, Type 1 cement, maximum water to 

cement ratio is 0.50. 


May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 03 30 00 - 5


Division 05






ANCHORS, INSERTS, AND EPOXY DOWELS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to provide epoxy 

grouted anchors bolts, threaded rod anchors, adhesive anchors to be installed in 

hardened concrete and masonry. 

2. Adhesive for the adhesive anchors is specified herein. 



1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 

A. Provide the size, type, and length of anchor shown on the drawings or, if not shown, as 

specified in the detailed sections of these specifications. 

B. When the size, length or load carrying capacity of an anchor bolt, expansion anchor, 

toggle bolt, or concrete insert is not shown or specified, provide the size, length and 

capacity required to carry the design load times a minimum safety factor of 4. 

C. For equipment anchors, if the design load is not specified by the manufacturer, provide 

anchors of diameter no less than the diameter of the hole minus 3/16 inch. 


A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval copies of manufacturer's specifications, load tables, 

dimension diagrams and installation instructions for the devices. 


A. Expansion anchors and inserts shall be ICC approved. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Anchor bolts and Nuts shall be carbon steel anchors unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Threaded Rod Anchors and Nuts shall be carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. 

May 18, 2012 

Anchors, Inserts, and Epoxy Dowels 

Revision 0 05 05 10 - 1




C. In buried, submerged, or wet locations, provide AISI Type 304 stainless steel anchors, 

nuts and washers complying with ASTM A320. Other AISI types may be used, subject to 

Engineer's approval. 

2.2 ADHESIVE ANCHORS (FOR CONCRETE AND GROUT FILLED MASONRY) 

A. Provide adhesive anchors where specifically shown and where adhesive anchors are 

allowed. 

B. Adhesive shall be two-component liquid epoxy adhesive for threaded rod anchors. 

C. Vinylester resin anchors are NOT allowed. 

D. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 

1. HIT RE 500, as manufactured by Hilti, Incorporated. 

2. C-6, as manufactured by ITW Ramset/Red Head. 

3. SET as manufactured by Simpson Strong-Tie, Inc. 

4. Or equal. 



A. Drilling equipment used and installation of post-installed anchors shall be in accordance 

with manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Assure that embedded items are protected from damage and are not filled in with 

concrete. 

C. Anchor bolts, threaded rod anchors, and adhesive anchors that are to be epoxy grouted 

shall be clean and fee of coatings that would weaken the bond with epoxy. 

D. Two nuts and a washer shall be furnished for anchor bolts, threaded rod anchors, and 

adhesive anchors. 

1. Anti-seize thread lubricant shall be liberally applied to projecting, threaded 

portions immediately before final installation and tightening of the nuts. 

E. Unless otherwise shown, provide the following minimum embedment, where “d” is the 

nominal anchor diameter: 

1. Cast-in-place anchors: 12d. 

2. Adhesive anchors and epoxied dowels: 8d. 

3. Wedge anchors: 8d. 

F. Unless otherwise shown, provide a minimum edge distance equal to six times the bolt 

diameter and a bolt spacing equal to twelve times the bolt diameter. 

G. For the adhesive and expansion anchors and adhesive material, Contractor shall comply 

with the manufacturer's installation instructions on the hole diameter and depth. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 05 05 10 - 2




H. Contractor shall properly clean out the hole utilizing a wire brush and compressed air to 

remove all loose material from the hole, prior to installing adhesive or expansion anchor. 

3.2 GROUT INSTALLATION 

A. Shim bearing plates and equipment supports to proper elevation, snug tighten anchor 

bolts. 

B. Fill void under bearing surface with grout. Install and pack grout to remove air pockets. 

C. Moist cure grout. 

D. Remove forms after grout is set. Trim grout edges to from smooth surface, splayed 

45 degrees. 

E. Tighten anchor bolts after grout has cured for a minimum of 3 days. 


May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 05 05 10 - 3


Division 11






SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS AND INSTALLATION 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: 

1. Installation of submersible pumping units, complete in place. Includes column 

pipe, column check valve, casing pipe spacers, surface plate, discharge head, and 

appurtenances. 

2. Pump procurement: per the contract specified in the Summary of Work. Includes 

pump, motor, power cable, startup services, testing (manufacturing and field), 

and appurtenances. 



2. Division 26 - Electrical 

3. Division 40 - Process Integration 


A. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 

1. AWWA A100 - Standard for Water Wells 

2. AWWA C654 - Disinfection of Wells 

B. Texas Administrative Code (TAC): 

1. Title 30, Part 1, Chapter 290 - Public Drinking Water 


A. Product Data: 

1. Column pipe: Submit manufacturer’s catalog information on pipe materials and 

fittings. Submit mill test certificates indicating physical and chemical analysis. 

2. Column check valve: Submit manufacturer’s catalog information with valve data 

and ratings for each service. 

3. Submit manufacturer’s catalog information for related products as specified in 

related sections. 

1.4 STARTUP AND DEMONSTRATION 

A. The Owner reserves the right to operate each submersible pumping unit, after installation, 

for a period of thirty (30) days before final acceptance. During such period, the 

Contractor, or his field service technician, shall make such adjustments as may be 

deemed necessary to improve the operating performance of the equipment. 

May 18, 2012 

Submersible Pumps and Installation 

Revision 0 11 97 00 - 1




1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts lists and maintenance procedures in 

accordance with Section 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements. 


A. Perform Work in accordance with drawings and specifications. 

1.7 WARRANTY 

A. Furnish minimum 1-year manufacturer warranty for all materials. 


2.1 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS 

A. Vertical Turbine Submersible Pumping Units: provided per separate procurement 

contract with the Owner. Make and model of pump and motor to be provided to 

Contractor on award of this Contract or soon thereafter. 

B. Supplier: Clowe & Cowan Of El Paso, Pedro Rascon, 915-593-8833. 

2.2 COLUMN PIPE 

A. Column pipe: carbon steel, high strength, with a minimum grade of API-5L X-42. Yield 

shall be a minimum of 42,000 psi and tensile shall be a minimum of 60,000 psi. Heat 

numbers will be exposed on the pump column matching the Mill Test Reports. Column 

pipe shall be minimum schedule 40 wall thickness. 

B. Column pipe diameter and length: as indicated in Attachment A, this section. As well 

installation and aquifer testing will be concurrent with award of this Contract, column 

pipe diameters and lengths are subject to revision by the Engineer. Contractor to confirm 

diameters and lengths with Engineer prior to procurement of materials. 

C. The method of threading the pump column shall be with Computer Numeric Controlled 

(CNC) equipment to ensure consistently precise threads. No oil based threading coolant 

will be used in the manufacturing of the pump column. The column pipe shall an 8-V, 

¾ taper thread and couplings. 

2.3 COLUMN CHECK VALVE 

A. Manufacturers: 

1. Flomatic Series 80 DI. 

2. Substitutions: Permitted with Engineer’s Approval. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 11 97 00 - 2




B. 2 inches and Larger: Drop check valve with factory-installed knockout plug, ductile iron 

body, threaded female by female connection, Buna-N seals, stainless steel spring and 

fasteners, ductile iron poppet. 

C. Appurtenances: Contractor to provide one additional knockout plug for each valve 

installation. 

2.4 SURFACE PLATE AND DISCHARGE HEAD 

A. Surface Plate: 

1. Sized to accommodate well casing and column pipe diameters indicated in 

Attachment A, this section. 

2. Support the total weight of the pump, motor, and column pipe when filled with 

water. 

B. Discharge Head: Long radius, 90-degree elbow with 150 pound flange having an outlet 

size equal to that of the aboveground discharge piping as indicated on the drawings. 

C. Sanitary Seal: Provide between the surface plate and well casing flange as indicated on 

the drawings. 

2.5 CASING SPACERS 

A. Manufacturers: 

1. APS, model CI 


B. Casing Spacers: 

1. Polyethylene with stainless steel hardware (nuts and bolts) suitable for 

continuous submergence. 

2. Sized to fit within ½ inch of the inside diameter of the well casing pipe. Spacers 

not meeting this size will be rejected. 

3. NSF-approved. 



A. Install submersible pumps and appurtenances complete in place, to provide for a fully 

functioning water supply well. Install pump and motor in accordance with manufacturer's 

written instructions. 

B. Installation depths listed in Attachment A are subject to revision by the Engineer. 

Contractor to confirm depths in writing prior to installation of equipment associated with 

the submersible pump. 

C. Pump Installation: 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 11 97 00 - 3




1. Contractor shall verify that the well casing, screen, and sump are free of 

sediment. If sediment has accumulated, clean by bailing or other Engineerapproved 

method. 

2. Prior to installation of pumping equipment, Contractor to ensure pump outside 

diameter is at least one (1) inch less than the inside diameter of the well casing to 

the pump installation depth. 

D. Power cable: supported on the column pipe by means of cable clamps and stainless steel 

bands. Cable clamps shall be suitable for continuous submergence and carry an NSF seal 

if not stainless steel. Place cable clamps every 20 feet, minimum. 

E. Column check valves: Install less than 20 feet above the pump and thereafter in 

conformance with manufacturer suggested spacing. In no case shall the distance between 

valves and the surface plate be equal. Unequal distances are essential to prevent harmonic 

valve hammer. 

F. Surface plate: Install per manufacturer’s installation instructions and as indicated on the 

drawings. 

3.2 DISINFECTION 

A. Disinfection of Wells: per AWWA C654. 

B. The Contractor is advised that all wells were previously disinfected after construction and 

were found to be absent of coliform. Three consecutive days of testing were performed 

during the step-drawdown test. However, disinfection will be required following 

submersible pump installation. 

C. Contractor shall disinfect each well to satisfy the requirements of TCEQ Water Hygiene 

(Drinking Water) rules (TAC Chapter 290). Official testing for coliform will be 

conducted after the permanent pump has been installed. A minimum of 10 casing 

volumes shall have been evacuated prior to obtaining the official samples for testing. 

D. Forms of Chlorine: Disinfectant used for the wells shall be in liquid form. Solid tablets or 

powders will not be allowed. A simple chlorine solution will not be satisfactory. 

E. Well chlorination: 

1. Water in the well casing shall be treated with chlorine so that an average chlorine 

residual of 50 milligrams per liter (mg/L) is in the entire volume of water in the 

well casing. Chlorinated water shall rest in the well casing for at least 12 hours, 

but no more than 24 hours. 

2. Following the rest period, circulate the chlorinated water by pumping, wasting 

some of the water and returning some to the well, periodically testing for chlorine 

residual. When zero chlorine residual is measured, continue pumping the well to 

waste for at least 15 minutes or 10 casing diameters, whichever is greater. The 

Contractor shall then sample the well for bacteriological evaluation. 

3. Testing for chlorine residual shall be performed by the Contractor or his 

approved testing laboratory. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 11 97 00 - 4




F. Bacteriological evaluation: performed by a Texas Department of Health approved 

laboratory for the presence of coliform in accordance with Standard Methods of the 

Examination of Water and Wastewater. If any of the samples show the presence of 

coliform, the Contractor shall repeat the process or modify (as approved by Engineer) 

until testing indicates zero coliform. Repeat disinfecting and testing shall be completed at 

no additional cost to the Owner. 

G. Contractor responsible for safe disposal of heavily chlorinated water. 

H. Cost for disinfection and testing required by this specification, including alternate 

pumping equipment if required, shall be incidental to the Work and included in the most 

applicable bid item. 


A. Contractor to coordinate field quality control with submersible pump manufacturer’s 

representative for items specified in pump procurement contract. 


May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 11 97 00 - 5


Specification Section 11 97 00, Attachment A 

Vertical Turbine Submersible Pumping Units 


Pump Assumptions a 

Assumed c Column Pipe Projected Water Depth Pump Well Friction Pipeline Head Loss b Assumed c Static Nominal Top of Bottom of Total Column Conveyance Motor 

Well Pumping Flow Velocity Level Depth During to be Set Head Loss and Delivery Pressure TDH Calculated c Nominal c Water Level Casing Screen Screen Well Depth Pipe Pipe Voltage 

ID Rate (gpm) (ft/s) Pumping (ft bgs) (ft bgs) (feet) (feet) (feet) Input Hp Hp (ft bgs) Dia. (in) (ft bgs) (ft bgs) (ft bgs) Size (in) Size (in) (volts) 

D-1 400 4.5 215 290 5 88 308 39 50 198 16 342 680 690 6 8 480 

D-2 660 7.5 235 310 14 75 324 68 75 180 16 280 540 550 6 8 480 

D-3 500 5.7 250 325 9 85 344 54 75 182 16 449 687 697 6 8 480 

D-4 400 4.5 152 227 4 143 299 38 50 129 16 218 446 456 6 8 480 

D-5 540 6.1 195 270 8 95 298 51 75 164 16 332 804 814 6 8 480 

D-6 360 4.1 210 285 4 135 349 40 50 138 16 285 673 683 6 8 480 

D-7 580 6.6 250 325 11 158 419 77 100 124 16 406 714 724 6 8 480 

D-8 770 8.7 226 301 18 119 364 88 100 112 16 256 672 682 6 8 480 

D-9 900 10.2 183 258 21 145 349 99 125 122 12 264 594 604 6 8 480 

D-10 1,600 10.2 178 253 16 143 337 170 175 126 16 280 788 798 8 10 480 

D-11 800 5.1 226 301 5 117 347 88 100 153 16 302 750 760 8 8 480 

D-12 900 10.2 178 253 21 153 352 100 125 120 12 275 488 498 6 8 480 

D-13 1,600 10.2 164 239 15 158 337 170 175 116 16 278 646 656 8 10 480 

D-14 1,600 10.2 165 240 15 155 335 169 175 120 16 301 720 730 8 10 480 

D-15 400 4.5 171 246 4 146 321 41 50 132 12 236 752 762 6 8 480 

D-17 1,600 10.2 156 231 14 169 339 171 175 108 16 250 549 559 8 10 480 

D-18 600 6.8 222 297 11 144 377 72 75 134 12 304 659 669 6 8 480 

D-19 700 7.9 179 254 13 142 334 74 100 132 16 260 724 734 6 8 480 

D-22 950 10.8 183 258 24 182 389 117 125 118 12 300 736 746 6 8 480 

D-23 1,600 10.2 148 223 14 177 339 171 175 116 16 260 678 688 8 10 480 

D-24 1,600 10.2 162 237 15 163 340 172 175 125 16 301 730 740 8 10 480 

Total 19,060 GPM Legend / Notes: Conversion Factors Assumptions 

Total 27,446,400 GPD = Indicates well installation and aquifer test complete 7.5 gallons per cubic foot 80% minimum overall efficiency 

Total 27.45 MGD 

a Well characteristics (pumping rates, dimensions, pump requirements, etc.) 60 seconds per minute 25% increase due to minor losses 

subject to revision pending well installation. 550 ft*lbf/s/hp 62.4 lb/ft 3 , unit weight of water 

gpm = gallons per minute 

b Pipeline head loss modeled by Freese & Nichols for pumping 12 inches per foot 32.2 ft/s 2 , acceleration of gravity 

ft/s = feet per second directly to Base 21 (Scenario B). 2.31 feet water per psi 1.2E-05 ft 2 /s, kinematic viscosity 

ft bgs = feet below ground surface 

c TDH and Pumping Rates take priority in pumping unit sizing. 

1.E-03 relative roughness 

TDH = total dynamic head The Calculated Input Hp and Nominal Hp displayed on the table 20 psi, delivery pressure 

Hp = horsepower are for reference purposes and are based on minimum overall 75 feet below pumping level 

in = inches pump and motor efficiency. 

5/14/2012 

Revision 0


S:\Projects\CRMWD\WR11.0143_CRMWD_Ward_Co_Groundwater_Supply_Phase_1\GIS\MXD\Site_maps\Well_field_pipeline_design.mxd 

D-2 

D-1 

D-3 

D-5 

D-8 

D-9 

D-6 

D-11 

D-4 

D-10 

C-5 

C-1 

D-15 

D-12 

C-18 

D-13 

D-14 

D-19 

D-18 

D-7 

D-17 

D-24 

M-6 

D-23 

D-22 

N 

0 1,500 3,000 Feet 

Figure A-1 

Explanation 

Proposed wells 

Ward north well 

Well field boundary 

Pipeline alignments (FNI) 

Well field pipeline 

Source: 2011 aerial photograph provided by Freese & Nichols, Inc. 


2/22/2012 

JN WR11.0143.00 

CRMWD WARD COUNTY NORTH WELL FIELD 

Well Field Layout


Division 22






GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Gate valves. 

2. Check valves. 

3. Air Release valves. 

B. Related Sections: 


2. Section 22 07 00 - Plumbing Insulation. 

3. Section 22 10 00 - Plumbing and Piping. 


A. ASTM International: 

1. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) 

Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 

2. ASTM D4101 - Standard Specification for Propylene Injection and Extrusion 

Materials. 

B. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 

1. MSS SP 70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 

2. MSS SP 80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves. 

C. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 

1. AWWA C508 - AWWA Standard for Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks 

Service 

2. AWWA C512 - AWWA Standard for Air-Release, Air/Vacuum, and 

Combination Air Valves for Waterworks Service 


A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. 

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for 

each service. 

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit hanging and support methods, joining 

procedures. 

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 

May 18, 2012 

General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping 

Revision 0 22 05 23 - 1





A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals. 

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves. 

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit installation instructions, spare parts lists, 

exploded assembly views. 


A. For drinking water service, provide valves complying with NSF 61. 

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS 

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section 

with minimum three years documented experience. 

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three 

years documented experience. 

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 

A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, 

storing, and protecting products. 

B. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. 

C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. 

1.8 WARRANTY 

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for warranties. 

B. Furnish five year minimum manufacturer warranty for valves excluding packing. 

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS 

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for extra 

materials. 

B. Furnish two packing kits for each size valve. 


2.1 GATE VALVES 

A. 3 inches and Smaller: 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 22 05 23 - 2




1. Manufacturers: 

a. Crane, Series 437 Gate Valves 

b. Milwaukee Valve, 105 Series Gate Valves 

c. Watts Water Technologies, GV Series Gate Valves 

d. Substitutions: Permitted with Engineer’s Approval. 

2. MSS SP 80, Class 125 bronze body, bronze trim, threaded bonnet, non-rising 

stem, hand-wheel, inside screw with back-seating stem, solid wedge disc, 

threaded ends. 

B. 3-1/2 inches and Larger: 


a. Mueller Co., Series 2360 Resilient Wedge Gate Valves. 

b. American Cast Iron Company, Series 2500 Resilient Wedge Gate Valves 

c. M&H AWWA C509 Resilient Wedge Gate Valve, Model 4067-02-HW. 

d. Substitutions: Not Permitted. 

2. MSS SP 70, NSF 61/AWWA C509, cast iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet 

with o-ring, non-rising stem, hand-wheel, outside screw and yoke, solid wedge 

disc with bronze seat rings, flanged ends. Furnish valves with universal position 

indicators. 

2.2 CHECK VALVES 

A. Horizontal Swing Check Valves: 


a. APCO Series 6000 Cushion Swing Check Valve. 

b. Mueller Co., Model A-2602-06BB. 

c. Substitutions: Not Permitted. 

2. 2-1/2 inches and Larger: AWWA C508 compliant, cast iron body, bolted cap, 

bronze or cast iron disc, flanged ends. 

2.3 AIR RELEASE VALVES 

A. Air Release Valve for Vertical Turbine Submersible Pumps: 


a. APCO Model 144DAT (1,450 gpm max at no head pump capacity) 

b. APCO Model 146DAT (3,500 gpm max at no head pump capacity) 

c. Substitutions: Not Permitted. 

2. Valves shall meet applicable requirements of AWWA C512. 

3. Cast iron body and cover, stainless steel center-guided float, Buna-N seat, brass 

water diffuser, and throttling device. 

4. Contractor to confirm well flow rate and valve model prior to procuring valves. 

Contractor assumes full responsibility and expense for purchases made prior to 

Engineer approval. 

B. Air Release Valves: 


a. APCO Model 50 

b. Substitutions: Not Permitted. 

2. Valves shall meet applicable requirements of AWWA C512. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 22 05 23 - 3




3. Cast iron body and cover, stainless steel center-guided float, Buna-N needle, 

3/32-inch-orifice. 



A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. Confirm valve sizes with Engineer. 

B. Verify piping system is ready for valve installation. 


A. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. 

B. Install valves with clearance for installation of insulation and allowing access. 

C. Refer to Section 22 07 00 for insulation requirements for valves. 

D. Refer to Section 22 10 00 for piping materials applying to various system types. 

3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS 

A. Install shut-off valves at locations indicated on Drawings in accordance with this Section. 

B. Install gate valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. 

C. Install gate valves in water systems for shut-off service. 


May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 22 05 23 - 4





IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Tags. 

2. Pipe markers. 



2. Section 22 10 00 - Plumbing and Piping 


A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 

1. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 


A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. 

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. 

C. Shop Drawings: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for 

mechanical identification and valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, 

location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. 


A. Record Drawings: furnish two sets of plan-view drawings showing valves installed under 

this Contract, accurately located and labeled. Drawings shall be neat and easily readable. 

B. Valve Chart: provide a valve chart, typed neatly on 8½- x 11-inch sheets, listing the well 

location, valve number, size, and normal operating position on each valve installed under 

this Contract. 


A. Conform to ASME A13.1 for color scheme for identification of piping systems and 

accessories. 


A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 

May 18, 2012 

Plumbing Identification 

Revision 0 22 05 53 - 1





2.1 TAGS 

A. Each process system valve shall be provided with a stamped metal tag secured to the 

valve. This tag shall indicate the well location, valve number, service, and function of 

each valve. 

B. Tags shall be stamped brass 1½-inch diameter with finished edges, and secured to valves 

by heavy copper figure eight hooks, braided stainless steel wire anchor, or other approved 

means. 

2.2 PIPE MARKERS 

A. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1. 

B. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: 


a. Mifab Manufacturing. 

b. Almetek Industries 

c. Brimar Industries, Inc. 

d. Substitutions: Permitted with Engineer’s approval. 

2. Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed 

markings. 

C. Plastic Underground Pipe Markers: 

1. Bright colored continuously printed detectable plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 

inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service. 



A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. 


A. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting. 

B. Install labels with sufficient adhesive for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. 

For unfinished canvas covering, apply paint primer before applying labels. 

C. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly 

above buried pipe. 

D. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic tape pipe markers. Use tags on piping 

3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service and flow direction. Install in clear view 

and align with axis of piping. Locate identification spacing not to exceed 20 feet on 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 22 05 53 - 2




3.3 SCHEDULES 

straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of 

penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. 

A. Identification: 

1. Well Field Raw Water Piping. 

a. Identification Type: Raw Water 

b. Background Size: 24-inch length 

c. Background Color: Safety Green 

d. Lettering Size: 2½ inches 

e. Lettering Color: White 

B. Valve Tags: 

1. Well Field Raw Water Piping. 

a. Tag Material: Brass 

b. Tag Size: 1½-inch diameter 

c. Tag Shape: Round 


May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 22 05 53 - 3






PLUMBING INSULATION 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Plumbing heat trace, insulation, jackets and accessories for exterior, aboveground 

piping. 



2. Section 22 05 23 - General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping 

3. Section 22 10 00 - Process Plumbing and Piping 


A. ASTM International: 

1. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating 

Cement. 

2. ASTM C449/C449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic- 

Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement. 

3. ASTM C450 - Standard Practice for Fabrication of Thermal Insulating Fitting 

Covers for NPS Piping, and Vessel Lagging. 

4. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation. 

5. ASTM C585 - Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal 

Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System). 

6. ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact 

with Austenitic Stainless Steel. 

7. ASTM C1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor 

Retarders for Thermal Insulation 

8. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) 

Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 

9. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of 

Building Materials. 


A. Product Data: Submit product descriptions, thermal characteristics, and material 

thickness for each service, and location. 

B. Samples: Submit two samples, of representative size, illustrating each insulation type. 

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer's published literature 

indicating proper installation procedures. 

May 18, 2012 

Plumbing Insulation 

Revision 0 22 07 00 - 1




D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed the specified 

requirements. 


A. Test pipe insulation for maximum flame spread index of 25 and maximum smoke 

developed index not exceeding 450, in accordance with ASTM E84. 

B. Pipe insulation manufactured in accordance with ASTM C585 for inner and outer 

diameters. 

C. Factory fabricated fitting covers manufactured in accordance with ASTM C450. 

D. Maintain 2 copies of each document onsite. 


A. Manufacturer: A company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this 

section, with a minimum of 3 years of experience. 

B. Applicator: A company specializing in performing the Work described in this section, 

with a minimum of 3 years of experience. 


A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's 

identification, including product density and thickness. 

B. Protect materials from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemicals, and 

damage, by storing in original wrapping and in a dry storage area. 

1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. Install insulation only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions are within the 

range recommended by the manufacturer. 

B. Maintain the temperature before, during, and after installation, for a minimum period of 

24 hours. 


A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 

1.9 WARRANTY 

A. Furnish 1-year manufacturer warranty for insulation and jacketing. 

B. Furnish 1-year manufacturer warranty for heat trace. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 22 07 00 - 2





2.1 MANUFACTURERS 

A. Heat Trace Manufacturers: 

1. Thermon FLX. 

2. Chromalox SRF. 


B. Manufacturers for Insulation and Jacketing Products: 

1. CertainTeed. 

2. Knauf. 

3. Johns Manville. 


2.2 HEAT TRACE 

A. Heat trace shall conform to the following: 

1. Traced surface type: metallic piping. 

2. Outer jacket chemical resistance: 

a. Aqueous inorganic chemical: (modified polyolefin outer jacket). 

b. Organic chemicals or corrosives: (flouropolymer outer jacket). 

3. Voltage: 120V AC 

4. Minimum expected ambient temperature: minus 10°F. 

5. Maximum operating temperature: 150°F. 

6. Ground-fault protection required. 

7. Bus wire size: 16 AWG. 

B. Self-regulating heat trace shall be low temperature and have a tinned copper braid. 

Thermostat shall be line sensing electronic thermostat. Installations shall include a splice 

and tee for each cut in the wire and be covered to protect against corrosion. 

C. Furnish appurtenances recommended by manufacturer for a fully functioning heat trace 

system on exposed piping, including attachment tape, cable end terminations, and 

“Electric Heat Tracing” labels. 

2.3 PIPE INSULATION 

A. Product Description: ASTM C547, molded glass fiber pipe insulation. Conform to 

ASTM C795 for application on Austenitic stainless steel. 

1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.23 at 75°F. 

2. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 850°F. 

3. Vapor Barrier Jacket: ASTM C1136, Type I, factory applied reinforced foil kraft 

with self-sealing adhesive joints. 

4. Jacket Temperature Limit: minus 20 to 150°F. 

5. Minimum thickness: 1-1/2 inch. 

2.4 PIPE INSULATION JACKETS 

A. PVC Plastic Pipe Jacket: 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 22 07 00 - 3




1. Product Description: ASTM D1785, One piece molded type fitting covers and 

sheet material, off-white color. 

2. Thickness: 30 mil. 

3. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive. 

B. Field Applied Glass Fiber Fabric Jacket System: 

1. Insulating Cement/Mastic: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool. 

2. Glass Fiber Fabric: 

a. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight. 

b. Blanket: 1.0 lb/cu ft density. 

c. Weave: 10 x 10. 

3. Indoor Vapor Retarder Finish: 

a. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight. 

b. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color. 

2.5 PIPE INSULATION ACCESSORIES 

A. Adhesives: Compatible with insulation. 

B. Piping 1½-inch-diameter and smaller: Galvanized steel insulation protection shield. MSS 

SP-69, Type 40. Length: Based on pipe size and insulation thickness. 

C. Piping 2-inch-diameter and larger: Wood insulation saddle, hard maple. Inserts length: 

not less than 6 inches long, matching thickness and contour of adjoining insulation. 

D. Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation Pipe Hanger: Polyurethane insert with aluminum 

single piece construction and self adhesive closure. Thickness to match pipe insulation. 

E. Tie Wire: 0.048-inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12-inch centers. 

F. Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement: 

ASTM C449/C449M. 



A. Verify piping has been tested before applying insulation materials per Section 22 10 00 - 

Plumbing and Piping. 

B. Verify surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed. 

3.2 INSTALLATION - HEAT TRACE 

A. Heat Trace: install on all exterior pipes beneath pipe insulation according to manufacturer 

instructions. 

B. Heat Trace Exposed to View in Outdoor Finished Spaces: Locate heat trace and cover 

seams in least visible locations. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 22 07 00 - 4




C. Heat trace shall be labeled in order to identify and warn of heat trace location. 

D. Gland entry kit shall be used to transition heat trace into a junction box when making 

connections of a pipe or tank. It may be used for power splice or tee connections. 

3.3 INSTALLATION - PIPING SYSTEMS 

A. Exterior Piping: Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and 

thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor retarder cement. 

Cover with jacket with seams located at 3 or 9 o’clock position on side of horizontal 

piping with overlap facing down to shed water or on bottom side of horizontal piping. 


May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 22 07 00 - 5






PLUMBING AND PIPING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Pipe and pipe fittings. 

2. Piping specialties. 

B. Related Work: 


2. Section 22 05 00 - Plumbing Identification 

C. References 

1. ASTM A53/A53M 

2. American Water Works Association (AWWA) C-205 - Standard for Cement- 

Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe―4 In. (100 mm) and 

Larger―Shop-Applied 

3. AWWA C900: AWWA Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe 

and Fabricated Fittings, 4 In. Through 12 In. (100 mm Through 300 mm), for 

Water Transmission and Distribution 

4. AWWA C210: AWWA Standard for Liquid-Epoxy Coating Systems for the 

Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines 

5. AWWA C601: AWWA Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains 

6. AWWA Manual of Water Supply Practices M23: PVC Pipe - Design and 

Installation 


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog information with sizes, capacities, and 

finishes. 

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions for material and 

equipment. 

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 

D. Coatings: 

1. Manufacturer's color charts and product data for each proposed coating system. 

2. Reference samples showing the color and texture of the final paint to be applied. 

3. Letter from the Coatings Manufacturer approving and endorsing Coatings 

Installer. 

May 18, 2012 

Plumbing and Piping 

Revision 0 22 10 00 - 1





A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts lists and maintenance procedures. 

1.4 WARRANTY 

A. Furnish minimum one year manufacturer warranty for all materials. 


2.1 PLUMBING AND PIPING 

A. Water Piping, above Grade: 

1. Steel Pipe (Cold Water Only Sizes 4 inch and Larger): ASTM A53/A53M, Grade 

B, Schedule 40 with cast iron fittings. 

a. Shall be cement-mortar lined in accordance with the most recent version 

of AWWA C205. 

b. The exterior of the pipe shall be epoxy coated in accordance with the 

most recent version of AWWA C210. 

B. Water Piping, below Grade: 

1. PVC Pipe: AWWA C900, DR18 

2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES 

A. Flanges, Unions, and Couplings: 

1. Pipe Size 2 inches and Under: Malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous piping; 

bronze unions for copper pipe, soldered joints. 

2. Pipe Size Over 2 inches: Forged steel flanges for ferrous piping; bronze flanges 

for copper piping; preformed neoprene gaskets. 

3. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings: Malleable iron housing, C-shape 

elastomer composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers. 

4. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, 

copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. 



A. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated. 


A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. 

B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside piping before assembly. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 22 10 00 - 2




C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 

3.3 INSTALLATION - PIPING SYSTEMS 

A. Install dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. 

B. Route piping to maintain gradient. 

C. Install piping to maintain headroom. Group piping to conserve space. Group piping 

whenever practical at common elevations. 

D. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or 

connected equipment. 

E. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. 

F. Install piping system allowing clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves 

and fittings. 

G. Install identification on piping systems including underground piping in accordance with 

Section 22 05 00. 

H. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing 

sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. 

3.4 DISINFECTION AND HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF WATER PIPING SYSTEM 

A. Leakage and hydrostatic testing of the lines shall be performed in accordance with 

AWWA M23, specifically: 

1. The lines shall be tested at 150 pounds, or 1.5 times the normal working pressure 

of the line, whichever is greater, for not less than two hours. 

2. The quantity of make-up water required to maintain a given pressure must be less 

than that defined by Equation 8-1 in AWWA M23 for the line to pass the leakage 

test. 

B. Disinfection of the line shall be performed in accordance with AWWA C651, and shall 

occur after hydrostatic testing. 


May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 22 10 00 - 3


Division 26






TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 



A. Furnish labor, material, equipment and incidentals of a NETA certified independent 

testing agency. Testing shall be inclusive of all low voltage equipment including 

conductors for the pump station. Testing shall include all relay protective schemes and 

operation of the medium and low voltage equipment. 


A. Independent testing agency shall be NETA certified. 


Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, “Submittal Procedures” and shall 

include: 

A. ELECTRICAL TESTING REPORT 

1. 60 days prior to any testing taking place, Contractor shall submit to the 

Owner/Engineer the name of the testing agency; a list of all tests to be conducted 

shall also be submitted at this same time. 

2. A written report shall be submitted by the testing agency performing installation 

checks, operation and testing of the low voltage equipment. This report shall 

certify that 1) the equipment has been properly installed, 2) is in accurate 

alignment, 3) meets the acceptance testing specifications of NETA and the 

equipment manufacturer, and 4) NETA certification of the testing agency. 

Provide a detailed list of all tests that were performed and the test results as part of 

the Electrical Testing Report. 

3. Electrical Testing Report shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at least 4 

weeks before start-up. 

1.4 STANDARDS 

A. The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their 

entirety: 

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 

2. American Standards for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 

3. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 

4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 

5. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) 

May 18, 2012 

Testing of Electrical Systems 

Revision 0 26 01 26-1





2.1 GENERAL 

A. All testing shall be witnessed by the Owner’s Representative. Types of equipment 

required to be tested by these specifications shall include but not be limited to the 

following: 

1. The following tests shall be conducted by the Contractor: 

a. Low Voltage Cables. 

b. Grounding. 

B. All testing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations for 

energization and start-up of the equipment. 

C. Testing shall include a complete functionality testing of electrical equipment under all the 

different operating parameters identified by the OWNER and ENGINEER. 

D. The following is a listing of the major equipment test to be performed. 

1. Low Voltage Cables 

a. Insulation – resistance heat. 

E. Perform testing as indicated in section 01 40 00 “Quality Requirements”. Refer to the 

following attachments for the associated forms. 

1. 600 Volt Cable Test Report 

2. Motor Start-up Report 

3. Switchgear Test Report 

4. Transformer Test Report 

2.2 POWER SYSTEM TESTING 

A. CONTRACTOR shall test the operation of the power distribution system, i.e. 

transformers, disconnect switches, etc., for the various possible system configurations 

under load conditions. 

B. CONTRACTOR shall submit a detailed testing plan of the different configurations to be 

tested for the Owner’s and Engineer’s approval. 


May 18, 2012 

Testing of Electrical Systems 

Revision 0 26 01 26-2

PROJECT: 

OWNER: 

CONTRACTOR: 

ENGINEER: 

INSTALLED BY: 

DESCRIPTION: 

REPORT NO.: 

SPEC. NO.: 

600V. CABLE TEST REPORT 

(4.74 / ) 

PROJECT NUMBER: 

RESISTANCE TESTER: 

MFGR. MODEL SERIAL NO. DATE OF LAST CALIBRATION_________ 

RANGE MEGOHMS MAXVOLTAGE VDC 

Ambient Temp. F. %RH 

Duct Temp. F. Date 

Insulation Resistance 

(Megohms after 15 sec.) 

Station 

From To 

Sleeve 

Identification 

Cable 

Size 

Cable 

Insulation 

Cable 

Mfgr. 

Raceway 

Cond.* Phase A Phase B Phase C 

Retest 

Req'd 

*RACEWAY CONDITIONS: 

Test By: 

A. ABOVE GROUND CONDUIT D. JACKETED CABLE Date: 

B. BELOW GROUND CONDUIT E. ARMORED CABLE (ABOVE GROUND) 

C. TRAY CABLE F. ARMORED CABLE (BELOW GROUND) Witness By: 

Date: 

T:\specs\Well Sites -Elect Package\ReBid 05.2012\Div 26 Electrical\26 01 26.01 600 VOLT CABLE TEST.doc 

Page 1 of 2

600V CABLE TEST REPORT 

CHECK LIST 

1. Check exposed cable for physical damage. 

2. Check terminations of exposed cable where applicable. 

3. Observe ground lead of insulation tester to be solidly connected to grounding source. Re-check continuity of ground lead to source each 

time ground lead is moved. 

4. Check cable tested for size, type, phasing, wire tags and terminations per plans, specifications and wiring diagrams. 

Please list discrepancies noted on above items. 

COMMENTS 

T:\specs\Well Sites -Elect Package\ReBid 05.2012\Div 26 Electrical\26 01 26.01 600 VOLT CABLE TEST.doc 

Page 2 of 2

PROJECT: 

OWNER: 

CONTRACTOR: 

ENGINEER: 

MOTOR START UP REPORT 

(4. / ) 


REFERENCE DATA: 

Report No.: Description: 

Specification Section No.: Page No.: Par. No.: 

Sheet No.: Entitled: 

Detail Designation: 

Drawing Attached (Y/N) 

EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION: 

Name (From Drawings): Identification No.: Unit No.: . 

Motor Manufacturer: . 

Motor Model No.: Serial No.: . 

Installed by: . 

LOCATION: 

Structure: 

N/S Coord.: E/W Coord.: Station: Elev.: 

H.P.: R.P.M.: Frame: Volts: 

F.L. Amps: 

Encl.: 

Name Plate Data: 

Other (Name Plate Data): 

Starter Size: 

Heaters: 

Breaker Size: Megohmmeter Max.Voltage Output**: VDC 

Control CKT Insulation Readings: 

Motor Insulation Readings T 1 : T 2 : T 3 : 

Continuity Check T 1 & T 2 : 

Motor Rotation Checked: 

Continuity Check T 1 & T 2 

Motor Ground Checked: 

Control Check: 

Interlock Checked: 

Motor Amps T 1 : T 2 : T 3 : 

Demonstrate Operation of Safety Devices: 

Remarks: 

Test by: Date: Witness by: Date: 

**SHALL NOT EXCEED: 500 VDC for 2300 V, 3φ Motors; 250 VDC for 480 V, 3φ Motors; 

100 VDC for 240 V, 3φ Motors; 100 VDC for 240 V, 1φ Motors; 100 VDC for 120 V, 1φ Motors 

T:\specs\Well Sites -Elect Package\ReBid 05.2012\Div 26 Electrical\26 01 26.02 MOTOR STARTUP REPORT.doc Page 1 of 2

MOTOR START UP REPORT 

CHECK LIST 

1. Check motor for physical damage. 

2. Check motor for correct size and type per plans and wiring diagram. 

3. Check for adequate ventilation, lighting and clearance per N.E.C. and manufacturer's recommendations. 

Note discrepancies. 

4. Check for appropriate chain, belt or shaft guards. 

5. Check wiring and mounting of motor accessories such as: mag. pick-ups, vibration sensors, safety 

switches. 

T:\specs\Well Sites -Elect Package\ReBid 05.2012\Div 26 Electrical\26 01 26.02 MOTOR STARTUP REPORT.doc Page 2 of 2

PROJECT: 

OWNER: 

CONTRACTOR: 

ENGINEER: 

SWITCHGEAR TEST REPORT 

(4. / ) 



Report No.: Description : 

Specification Section No. : Page No.: Par No.: 

Sheet No. : 

Entitled: 


Drawing Attached: Yes No 


Name (From Drawings): 

Identification No.: 

Manufacturer: 

Model No.: 

Installed by: 

Unit No.: 

Serial No.: 

Date: 

LOCATION: 

Structure: 

N/S Coord. E/W Coord. Station Elev. 


Mfgr. Model No.: Serial No. 

Range Megohms MaxVoltage 

Date Last Calibrated 

Comments 

WEATHER: F %RH DATE 

NAME PLATE DATA: 

TYPE AND RATING 

VOLTAGE CURRENT PHASE 

FAULT CURRENT RATING 

Insulation Resistance (Megohms after 15 seconds) 

Phase A Phase B Phase C 

Performance: 

Witnessed: 

Date: 

T:\specs\Well Sites -Elect Package\ReBid 05.2012\Div 26 Electrical\26 01 26.03 SWITCHGEAR TEST REPORT.doc 

Page 1 of 2

SWITCHGEAR TEST REPORT CHECKLIST 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Check equipment internally and externally for physical damage. 

Check switches, circuit breakers and fuses for correct rating and setting per Plans and wiring diagrams. Check 

adjustable setting for compliance with short- circuit cord study. 

Check all switches and circuit breakers for proper mechanical operation (open & closure). Check metering 

switches for proper operation. 

Check all Adraw-out@ switches for proper withdrawal and insertion. 

Check all Astored energy@ circuit breakers and switches for proper operation. 

Adequate ventilation, lighting and clearance per N.E.C. and manufacturer=s 

recommendations. Note discrepancies. 

RECOMMENDED ADDITIONAL TESTS 

(Test Potentials, Duration and Conditions per ANSI, IEEE and NEMA recommendations.) 

Insulation tests at 

volts (determined by switchgear rating) as follows: 

Phase to Phase 

Phase to Ground 

Across Open Poles 

Ground Bus continuity-equipment grounded 

Key interlocking system where applicable 

Bus-Tie Phasing internally and with external service & load 

Overpotenial test per ANSI/IEEE for type and rating of tested equipment. 

Demonstrate ground fault relay operation by activating Atest@ circuit. 

Demonstrate ground fault relay operation of AShunt trip@devices where applicable. 

Demonstrate proper operation of al electrically operated circuit breakers. 

T:\specs\Well Sites -Elect Package\ReBid 05.2012\Div 26 Electrical\26 01 26.03 SWITCHGEAR TEST REPORT.doc 

Page 2 of 2

PROJECT: 

OWNER: 

CONTRACTOR: 

ENGINEER: 

TRANSFORMER TEST REPORT 

(4. / ) 



Report No.: 

Description: 

Specification Section No.: Page No.: Par. No.: 

Sheet No.: 

Entitled: 


Drawing Attached (Y/N) 


Name (From Drawings): 

Unit No.: 

Manufacturer: 

Model No.: 

Installed by: 

Serial No.: 

Date: 

Identification No.: 

LOCATION: 

Structure: 

N/S Coord.: E/W Coord.: Station: Elev.: 


Mfgr.: Model No.: Serial No.: 

Range: Megohms: MaxVoltage: vdc Date Last Calibrated: 

WEATHER: F %RH 

NAMEPLATE DATA: 

KVA: 

PRIMARY VOLTAGE 

TYPE: 

Primary Insulation Resistance 

(Megahoms after 15 sec) 

PHASE: 

SECONDARY VOLTAGE 

HZ: 

Secondary Insulation Resistance 

(Megahoms after 15 sec) 

Phase A Phase B Phase C Phase A Phase B Phase C 

Test By: 

Witness By: 

Date: 

Test by: 

Witness by: 

Date: 

T:\specs\Well Sites -Elect Package\ReBid 05.2012\Div 26 Electrical\26 01 26.04 TRANSFORMER TEST REPORT.doc Page 1 of 2

TRANSFORMER TEST 

CHECK LIST 

1. Check transformer for physical damage. 

2. Check nameplate for correct rating and type per plans and wiring diagrams. 

3. Check all mechanical components (doors, latches, tap switches, etc.) for proper operation. 

4. Check for adequate ventilation, lighting, clearance and personnel protection per N. E. C. and manufacturer's 

recommendations. Note discrepancies. 

RECOMMENDED ADDITIONAL TESTS 

1. Take transformer oil sample and send to approved laboratory for analysis. Test report to include: 

a. Dielectric strength 

b. Color 

c. Interfacial tension 

d. Acid. 

Test results to be sent to the engineer and owner for review and records. 

2. Demonstrate operation of temperature switches, pressure switches and other protective devices. 

3. Perform overpotential tests per ANSI/IEEE for type and rating of transformer tested. 

4. Demonstrate operation of cooling fans if any. 

5. Record primary and secondary voltages, current, (under load), and tap settings, if applicable. 

T:\specs\Well Sites -Elect Package\ReBid 05.2012\Div 26 Electrical\26 01 26.04 TRANSFORMER TEST REPORT.doc Page 2 of 2





COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 



A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary for complete and 

operational electrical systems, as specified herein. 

B. This Section, as well as Division 1, concerns all other Sections in Division 26, and shall 

be considered a part of each of those Sections as if written in their entirety. 


A. Electrical Contractors' Qualifications 

1. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen, trained and experienced in their crafts, 

and who are familiar with the specifications and methods of performing the work 

in this Division. A licensed Journeyman shall be on site at all times when 

electrical work is being performed. Electrical work shall be performed under the 

direct supervision of a Master Electrician who holds a valid license in the State of 

Texas. The Contractor shall provide a monthly report to the Owner/Engineer for 

review stating that the Master Electrician has been to the job site and thoroughly 

reviewed the work. The report shall be signed by the Master Electrician and 

include the data and time the Master Electrician was on site. 

B. Workmanship 

1. Work shall be performed in accordance with quality, commercial practices. The 

appearance of finished work shall be of equal importance with its operation. 

Materials and equipment shall be installed based upon the actual dimensions and 

conditions at the project site. Locations for materials or equipment requiring an 

exact fit shall be field measured. Conduit and motors shall be isolated to avoid 

unacceptable noise levels from objectionable vibrations from all systems. 


A. Submittals shall be separated by specification section and shall not be combined with any 

submittals for a separate specification section. Submittals shall be in accordance with 

Section 01 33 00, “Submittal Procedures” and shall include: 

1. Component catalog number and manufacturing data sheet, indicating pertinent 

data and identifying each component by the item number and nomenclature as 

specified. 

2. Component drawings showing dimensions, mounting, and external connection 

details in AutoCAD format. 

May 18, 2012 

Common Work Results for Electrical 

Revision 0 26 05 00-1




3. Complete interconnection and point to point wiring diagrams in AutoCAD format 

for all field control and instrumentation wiring between instruments, electrical 

equipment, starters, VFDs, etc.. A hard copy shall be submitted to the Engineer 

for approval prior to the final AutoCAD files being submitted. 

Interconnection/wiring diagrams shall include cable numbers, wire tags, actual 

equipment terminal strip numbers, etc. 

4. Operation and maintenance manuals shall contain the shop drawings, submittals, 

spare part lists, schematics, final wiring diagrams with any changes made during 

start-up and maintenance procedures. 

5. Unless other additional information is required by the detailed equipment 

specifications, the following information shall be included for motors: 

a. Motor identification number and nomenclature as specified 

b. Make and motor type 

c. Brake horsepower of the motor 

d. Locked rotor current at full load 

e. Motor efficiency at full load (3-phase motors only) 

f. Starting torque 

g. Method of insulating and impregnating motor coils (3-phase only) 

h. Speed of the motor at full torque 

i. Full load current 

j. Service factor 

k. Motor temperature rise measured by resistance over 40 degrees C ambient 

6. The Contractor shall provide a monthly report to the Owner/Engineer for review 

stating that the Master Electrician has been to the job site and thoroughly 

reviewed the work. The report shall be signed by the Master Electrician and 

include the data and time the Master Electrician was on site. 

a. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a copy of the Master electrician’s 

license and Journeyman’s license who will be working on the project. 

This information shall be submitted as a formal submittal prior to 

beginning any work. 

7. The Contractor shall: 

a. Prepare, and keep up-to-date, the Record Drawings and detailed 

construction drawings; 

b. Record the exact locations of each of these differences, sizes and details 

of the Construction Work as executed, with cross-references to and other 

requirements on the Record Drawings. 

c. Keep the Record Drawings on the Work Site; 

d. Upon completion of the Work, or at such other time as may be determined 

by the Engineer, submit the Record Drawings and copies to the Owner’s 

Representative in accordance with the Owner’s Requirements. 

e. Underground Interference drawing showing all underground duct banks, 

ground rods, ground conductors, pipes, piers, vaults, manholes, pull 

boxes, etc. that clearly identifies the location and routing of these systems. 

All interferences shall be brought to the Engineer’s attention. 

f. Provide revised drawings in AutoCAD noting any changes made to 

equipment during start-up. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 05 00-2




1.4 STANDARDS 

8. The Contractor shall provide a 11x17 copy of the one-line diagram in the RTU 

Cabinet (cabinet provided by others) as follows: 

a. The one-line shall reflect all changes made including but not limited to 

changes made during construction. The one-line diagram shall include a 

color copy of the 11x17 finalized one-line diagram as specified in section 

26 05 73.01, “Electrical Power System Studies”. 

b. The copy shall be laminated 

A. Electrical work shall be executed in accordance with local, State and national codes, 

ordinances and regulations which have jurisdiction or authority over the work. If the 

standards and codes conflict with each other, the most stringent shall apply. The 

applicable provisions of the following standard shall apply as if written here in their 

entirety: 

1. National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA) 

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 

4. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) 

5. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 

6. National Electrical Code (NEC) 

7. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) 

8. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 

9. Uniform Building Code (UBC) 

10. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 

11. Local utility companies 

12. Local Electrical Ordinance 

13. Rural Electrification Association (REA) 

14. Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA) 

15. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) 

16. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) 

17. Association Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC) 

B. Electrical work shall be performed under the direct supervision of a Master Electrician 

who holds a valid license in the State of Texas. 


A. Follow the Manufacturer's directions for the delivery, storage and handling of equipment 

and materials. Tightly cover equipment and materials and protect it from dirt, water, 

chemical or mechanical injury and theft. Major electrical equipment shall be stored 

indoors and space heaters energized where applicable, no exceptions. Equipment that will 

be stored indoors for an extended period of time and that do not have space heaters shall 

have a 100 watt incandescent light placed in it and energized to eliminate the build-up of 

condensation in the equipment. Coordinate with equipment manufacturer for storage 

requirements. Damaged equipment shall not be acceptable. Upon installation, protect the 

materials until the work is completed and accepted by the Owner. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 05 00-3





A. Permits, licenses and inspections shall be secured and paid for as required by law for the 

completion of the work. Certificates of approval shall be secured, paid for, and delivered 

to the Owner before receiving the final acceptance of the work. 

B. The location of materials, equipment, devices and appliances indicated are approximate 

and subject to revisions at the time the work is installed. Final location shall be as 

proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. 

C. Should project conditions require any rearrangement of work, or if equipment or 

accessories can be installed to a better advantage than the general arrangement of work on 

the plans, the Contractor shall before proceeding with the work prepare and submit plans 

of the proposed rearrangement for the Engineer's review and approval. 

D. Motor Horsepower ratings identified are anticipated ratings. If the actual equipment is a 

different size, the contractor shall provide the appropriate wiring, conduit, over current 

protection, starters and accessories for a complete and working system at no cost to the 

owner. 

E. All enclosures for equipment unless specifically identified otherwise shall be NEMA 4X, 

304 stainless steel. 

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) 



A. Maintain the waterproof integrity of conduit penetrations through the roof, exterior walls 

and floors. 

B. Install stainless steel sleeves for each conduit passing through floors. Extend sleeves 1- 

1/2" above the floor slab and grout watertight. The sleeve sizes shall permit the 

subsequent insertion of a properly sized conduit or raceway. 

C. Submit location drawings and obtain Engineer approval prior to installing conduit 

penetrations through slabs, beams, and walls. Install stainless steel pipe sleeves around 

the conduit and raceway which pass through concrete beams or walls and masonry exterior 

walls. The inside diameter of the sleeves shall be at least 1/2" greater than the outside of 

the service pipes. After the pipes are installed into these sleeves, fill the annular space 

between the pipes and sleeves with mastic. The complete installation shall be watertight 

and the fire rating of penetrations through walls, floors and ceilings shall be maintained. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 05 00-4




D. Install steel reinforced concrete foundations below floor mounted switchboards, 

panelboards, motor control centers, transformers, and other floor mounted electrical 

equipment. Concrete foundations shall not be less than 4" high. Neatly chamfer top 

edges. Concrete foundations shall be 6" wider and 6" longer than the base of the 

equipment being installed. Concrete shall be in accordance with Division 03, and shall be 

reinforced with a minimum of 6" x 6" #6 welded wire mesh. 

E. Route all conduits parallel to building lines, columns, or steel route conduits near to 

columns and roof beams. 

3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING 

A. Provide adequate support during cutting operations to prevent any damage to the affected 

masonry. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, provide lintels or structural 

supports to protect the remaining masonry. The cutting of structural members shall not be 

permitted without the specific written approval of the Engineer. 

3.3 PAINTING 

A. Maintain the original factory finish on material and equipment installed, unless 

specifically indicated on the plans or specifications. If the finish is marred in transit or 

during installation, re-finish to a neat, workmanlike appearance. Leave equipment and 

raceway systems clean and free of grease, dirt, rust, and in a suitable condition for 

painting. 

3.4 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING 

A. Prior to any excavation or trenching, notify the Owner’s representative, utility companies 

and Owner’s facilities department. Allow sufficient time for utilities to be located prior to 

excavation to avoid disruption of services. Provide a minimum of 72 hours written notice 

to the Owner prior to trenching or excavation. Do not proceed with trenching or 

excavation until authorized by the Owner. Utilities or services which are damaged, which 

are identified prior to excavation or trenching, or where confirmation by utility companies 

has not been obtained verifying that utilities are marked, shall be repaired to operable 

condition immediately, at no cost to the Owner. 

B. Barricade open trenches and excavations for the entire duration of the project. Barricades 

for excavations shall have warning lights maintained during hours of darkness. Trenches 

shall be marked with warning tape, or access to trenches shall be prohibited with readily 

identifiable sawhorses, warning tape or other acceptable means. Barriers shall be 

illuminated or recognizable during hours of darkness. Barriers and tape shall be properly 

maintained at all times. 

C. Protect all adjacent work, structures and properties. Damage to adjacent work, structures 

or properties shall be repaired, or the cost of repair reimbursed in full. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 05 00-5




D. All construction areas shall be finally graded as indicated on the contract documents or to 

the conditions of the site prior to construction. Grading shall bring the site back to the 

existing conditions as close as practical. Turfed areas shall be sodded, or hydro-mulched 

with matching turf. Landscaping shall be replaced with identical shrubbery, ground cover, 

or plants as existed. Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining water on new turf 

and landscaping until established. If new turf and landscaping is impractical due to 

weather conditions, contractor shall provide satisfactory arrangements to have turf and 

landscaping furnished and installed at the earliest opportunity thereafter. Provide a 90-day 

year warranty on new turn and landscaping. 

E. Determine if irrigation systems exist prior to trenching and excavation. Obtain record or 

as-built drawings and locate control wiring and pressure main branches and devices. 

Determine by actual operation that systems are functional and repair or replace damaged 

systems to their original condition prior to beginning construction. 

3.5 LOCKING OF ELECTRICAL FACILITIES 

A. Install locks immediately upon the installation of the electrical facility. Provide padlocks 

for exterior electrical facilities subject to unauthorized entry. Furnish the Owner with two 

(2) keys per lock up to a quantity of 10 keys. Key all locks alike. The Owner will provide 

permanent locks for the facility. 

3.6 ACCESS DOORS 

A. Wherever access is required in walls, ceilings, or soffits to concealed junction boxes, pull 

boxes or other electrical equipment, provide and install access doors. Install panels in 

locations approved by the Engineer. Paint as directed. 

3.7 CLEAN AND ADJUST 

A. Remove shipping labels, dirt, paint, grease, and stains from equipment. Remove debris as 

it accumulates. Upon completion of work, clean electrical equipment and the entire 

electrical installation. 


May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 05 00-6





LOW VOLTAGE ELECTICAL POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES 



A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install and test 600 volt 

wires and cables. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, 

“Common Work Results for Electrical”. 

B. Work shall include building wire, cable, wiring connections and terminations, and 

modular wiring systems. 

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE: TESTING 

A. Megger test circuits for continuity and ground. Verify phasing at connection points. 

Torque test conductor connections and terminations to the Manufacturer's recommended 

values. Megger tests shall be performed by a testing company with a minimum of 10 

years’ experience. 


Submittals for 26 05 19, “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables” shall not be combined 

with any other submittals. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, “Submittal 

Procedures” and shall include: 

A. Shop Drawings: 

1. Low voltage wire 

2. Ground wire 

3. Shielded cable 

4. Terminations and Connections 

1.4 STANDARDS 


entirety: 

ICEA S-19-81/NEMA WC-3 

ICEA S-61-402/NEMA WC-5 

NFPA 70 

ANSI/TIA/EIA 606A 

UL 83 

Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission 

and Distribution of Electrical Energy 

Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the 

Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy 

National Electrical Code 

Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructure 

Thermoplastic Insulated Wires and Cables 

May 18, 2012 

Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables 

Revision 0 26 05 19-1


UL 1063 

ASTM B3 

STM B8 

Machine Tool Wires and Cables 

Soft or Annealed Copper Wires 



Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, 

Medium, Hard, Soft 


A. Deliver cable and wire to the project site in the original packages. Conductors with 

damaged insulation or exposed nylon jacketing shall not be permitted. 

B. Where cut lengths are specified, mark reel footage accordingly. Each reel shall contain 

one continuous length of cable. 

C. Check for reels not completely restrained, reels with interlocking flanges or broken 

flanges, damaged reel covering or any other indication of damage. Provide impact 

protection by wood lagging or suitable barrier across the traverse of the reel. 

D. Do not drop reels from any height. 

E. Unload reels using a sling and spreader bar. Roll reels in the direction of the arrows 

shown on the reel and on surfaces free of obstructions that could damage the wire and 

cable. 

F. Store cable on a solid, well drained location. Cover cable reels with plastic sheeting or 

tarpaulin. Do not lay reels flat. 

G. Provide moisture protection by using manufacturer’s standard procedure or heat 

shrinkable self-healing end caps applied to both ends of cable. Do not remove end caps 

until cables are ready to be terminated. 


2.1 GENERAL 

A. Wires and cables shall be soft-drawn, annealed copper with a conductivity of not less 

than that of 98% pure copper, UL83 and UL1063 listed, rated 600 volts and certified for 

continuous operation at maximum conductor temperature of 90 Celsius in dry locations 

and 75 Celsius in wet locations 

B. Conductors #8 or larger shall be stranded and conductors #14 shall be stranded. Utilize 

single conductors. 

C. Except for control, signal and instrumentation circuits and as specifically indicated on the 

plans the minimum conductor permitted is #12. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 05 19-2




2.2 WIRE MARKING 

A. Wire marking shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code Article 310 and 

shall be printed on the wire insulation at 2 foot intervals. The printing method used shall 

be permanent and the color shall sharply contrast with the jacket color. 

B. Wire marking shall include the U.L. label and necessary identification, including the 

Manufacturer, the number of conductors, size, conductor insulation type, sun-resistance, 

and other pertinent information. 

2.3 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 

A. SINGLE CONDUCTOR CABLES: Conductor with thermoplastic insulation rated at 600 

volts and insulated with type XHHW-2 insulation. Wire shall be water tank tested and 

approved as machine tool wire, in accordance with National Machine Tool Builders 

Association. Wire in light fixture channels and other special locations shall be as 

specifically noted for temperature in NEC Article 300. Conductors 38 or larger and 

conductors #14 shall be stranded. Wire shall be manufactured by Southwire, Okonite, 

Encore, General Cable, or Houston Wire & Cable. 

B. GROUND WIRE: Ground wire shall be Class B stranded tin-plated conductor without 

insulation in all cases where a single ground wire is indicated to be installed in a conduit 

with no other conductors in the conduit, or where the ground wire is directly buried in 

earth or concrete. In all other cases, insulate ground wire with green insulator as 

specified for low voltage wire. 

C. PAIRED SHIELDED CABLE: Individually and overall shielded 18 gauge, 7/28 

stranded, tinned copper conductors with .021" extruded PVC; .004" nylon insulation 

twisted into pairs, stranded into a core and enclosed by a non-hygroscopic core tape, 

100% coverage, helically wound, aluminum foil shield, drain wire, and .050" minimum 

extruded PVC jacket. Pairs shall be black/red or black/white numbered. Cables shall be 

600 volts in accordance with NEC-725 and IEEE 383 and shall be suitable for wet 

location and cable tray rated. Cables shall be manufactured by Alpha, Okonite, General 

Cable, Southwire, Belden, or Houston Wire & Cable. 

2.4 WIRE CONNECTIONS AND DEVICES 

A. CONNECTORS, COMPRESSION, COPPER, 600 VOLT: As manufactured by Burndy, 

Thomas & Betts, or Ideal Industries; of the appropriate hole sizes and spacing which are 

in accordance with NEMA standards; two (2) holes in the tongue for use on conductor 

sizes 250 kcmil or larger; not required for connections to the circuit breakers in the 

lighting and/or receptacle panels. All compression connectors shall be long-barrel type, 

no exceptions. 

B. 600 VOLT PLASTIC TAPE: Minnesota Mining & Manufacturing Company, No. 35. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 05 19-3




C. WIRENUTS: Silicone-based pre-filled spring wire connecting devices with plastic 

covering; UL listed for damp and wet locations. Wirenut shall meet requirements of UL 

486D for Sealed Wire Connector Systems and shall be manufactured by Ideal Industries, 

Inc model 63, or as manufactured by ITT or Panduit. Wirenut shall be spring insulated, 

properly sized and resistant to vibration may be used for No.12 through No.10 solid 

gauge conductor for lighting and branch circuits only. 

D. SPLIT BOLTS: Kearney, Burndy, or Ilsco; shall be usable for connecting conductors 

which are both copper, both aluminum or one copper and one aluminum. Split bolts shall 

have a spacer between the two conductors, which it connects. 

E. MECHANICAL SET SCREW CONNECTOR: Blackburn HPS, ADR-ALCUL, GP or 

GT, Burndy or Ilsco; consisting of an aluminum body which has openings on opposite 

ends for insertion of the conductors. Conductors inserted into these holes shall each be 

clamped by two set screws. Connectors shall be suitable for use with copper conductors. 

F. RUBBER TAPE: Scotch 2210. 

G. VINYL TAPE: Scotch 88. 

H. ARC PROOFING TAPE: 3M “Scotch 77 Fire and Electric Arc Proofing Tape”. 

Fireproofing shall be done with a half-lapped layer of arc proofing tape, anchored at each 

end with a double wrap of 3M “Scotch 69 Glass Cloth Electrical Tape”. 

I. INSULATING RESIN: Scotch 3576, 3577, or 3578. 

J. POWER DISTRIBUTION BLOCKS: Ferraz Shawmut, Ilsco or Allen-Bradley; rated for 

600 VAC and termination of copper conductors. Individual poles shall be constructed of 

tin plated aluminum and mounted on an insulating base. 



A. Completely swab raceway system before installing conductors. Do not use cleaning 

agents and lubricants which have a deleterious effect on the conductors or their 

insulation. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 05 19-4





A. GENERAL 

1. Install raceway first as a complete system without conductors. Do not install pull 

wires and conductors until the raceway system is in place in accordance with the 

NEC and these specifications. Exception: Only flexible connections to motors 

shall be permitted to be installed after the installation of the remainder of the 

raceway system. The installation of these conductors shall be limited to exposure 

to damage for a maximum of one (1) week prior to installing flexible connection 

and making final terminations. Any conductors exposed to damage (i.e. not 

installed in raceway) longer than one (1) week shall be subject to rejection by the 

Owner and/or Engineer. If rejected, the cables shall be removed, discarded, 

replaced, reinstalled and retermination at the Contractor’s expense. 

2. Installed unapproved wire shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s 

expense. 

3. Grouping conductors together into one conduit shall not be allowed where the 

plans indicate the conductors to be placed in separate conduits. Each home run 

shown on the plans shall be in its own conduit. 

4. Neatly train wiring inside boxes, equipment and panelboards. Pull conductors 

into a raceway at the same time and use U.L. listed, wire pulling lubricant for 

pulling No. 4 AWG and larger wire. 

5. Except for hand-pulled conductors into raceways, all wire and cable installation 

shall be installed with tension-monitoring equipment. Where conductors are 

found to have been installed without tension-monitoring, the conductors and 

cables shall be immediately removed from the raceways, permanently identified 

as rejected material, and removed from the jobsite. New conductors and cables 

shall be reinstalled, tagged and raceways resealed, all at the Contractor’s 

expense. 

6. Do not exceed cable manufacturer’s recommendations for maximum pulling 

tensions and minimum bending radii. Where pulling compound is used, use only 

UL listed compound compatible with the cable outer jacket and with the raceway 

involved. 

7. All wire and cable installed in cable trays shall be UL Listed as Type TC, for 

cable tray use. 

8. Where single conductors and cables in manholes, hand holes, vaults, cable trays, 

and other indicated locations are not wrapped together by some other means such 

as arc and fireproofing tapes, bundle throughout their exposed length all 

conductors entering from each conduit with nylon, self-locking, releasable, cable 

ties placed at intervals not exceeding 4 inches on center. 

9. Properly support cables in accordance with the NEC and manufacturer’s 

recommendations in all raceways. Provide strain relief as required. 

10. Arrange wiring in cabinets and panels neatly cut to proper length, remove surplus 

wire, and bundle and secure in an acceptable manner. Identify all circuits 

entering motor control centers or other control cabinets in accordance with the 

conductor identification system specified herein and in specification section 26 

05 53, “Identification For Electrical Systems.” 

11. Cap spare conductors and conductors not terminated, with the UL listed end caps. 

12. Where conductors pass through holes or over edges in sheet metal, remove all 

burrs, chamfer all edges, and install bushings and protective strips of insulating 

material to protect the conductors. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 05 19-5




13. For conductors that will be connected by others, provide at least 6 feet spare 

conductors in free standing panels and at least 2 feet spare in other assemblies. 

Provide additional spare conductor in any particular assembly where it is obvious 

that more conductor will be needed to reach the termination point. 

B. SPLICES 

1. Power Conductors: Splice in junction boxes or at outlets only for lighting and 

receptacle branch circuits. Splices for all other circuits shall be disallowed. All 

splices are subject to the Engineer’s approval. Obtain approval from Engineer 

before installing any splices. 

a. For existing installations, splices of 120V circuits shall use twist-on wire 

nuts. 

b. For splices of existing 480V circuits, the Contractor shall terminate the 

existing and new conductors using power distribution blocks mounted in 

a junction box. 

2. Control and Instrumentation Conductors: No splicing of control and 

instrumentation conductors shall be permitted between terminal points except as 

specifically indicated on the plans. 

3. No splicing of conductors shall be performed in any below ground structure. 

4. Condulet type fittings shall not contain splices. Under no condition shall 

conductors of a different color be spliced together. 

5. For No. 10 and smaller, connect conductors with a twist-on spring wirenut. If a 

splice or tap is below 3' above the final grade, fill the spring connectors with an 

electrical insulating resin so that the resin encapsulates conductor and spring 

materials. Conductor splices and taps inside the MCC, VFDs, panels, etc. shall 

be on the terminal strips or power distribution blocks. 

6. For No. 8 and larger, connect conductors with a split bolt type of connector or a 

mechanical, set screw type connector. Wrap splices and taps with a single halflapped 

layer or rubber tape followed by successive layers of vinyl tape until a 

vinyl tape layer thickness of twice the original conductor insulation thickness is 

achieved. If splice or tap is below 3' above the finished grade, the tape or splice 

shall have a final outer coating or insulating resin. 

C. TERMINATIONS 

1. Conductors terminated on a screw termination shall have a crimp on type spade 

connector applied on the wire end, Panduit PanTerm or approved equal. 

2. Furnish and install power distribution blocks as required for tapping conductors 

at their load connection point with conductors of smaller size. Install power 

distribution blocks with the number of poles and sizes needed for connecting the 

phase, neutral, and ground conductors. 

3. Tighten all screws and terminal bolts using torque type wrenches and/or drivers 

to tighten to the inch-pound requirements of the NEC and UL. 

4. Use crimp connectors on all stranded conductors. 

5. Soldered mechanical joints insulated with tape will not be acceptable. 

6. SINGLE CONDUCTORS: Sufficient wire shall be left at outlets to make 

connections to equipment without straining. Light switches and receptacles shall 

be connected with pig-tails and crimp-on connectors. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 05 19-6




7. PAIRED SHIELDED AND TRIAD SHIELDED CABLE: Ground paired 

shielded and triad shielded cables at the instrument panel or starter end only and 

insulate from ground elsewhere. The shield shall be continuous for the entire 

run. The paired shielded and triad shielded cable shall not be laced with or 

placed in the same conduit with power cables and digital control cables. Each 

termination of paired shielded or triad shielded cable shall be coated with silicone 

jelly after termination. The shield of pair shielded cable and triad shielded cable 

shall only be broken when the conductors are terminated on terminal strips. Each 

conductor and shield shall be landed on its own terminal. Sharing of shield shall 

not be allowed. 

D. GROUNDING 

1. Conduits and other raceway shall contain an equipment grounding conductor 

whether the raceway is metallic or not. Conduits, motors, cabinets, outlets, and 

other equipment shall be properly grounded in accordance with National 

Electrical Code requirements. Where ground wire is exposed to mechanical 

damage, install wire in rigid aluminum conduit. Make connections to equipment 

with solderless connections. All connections to ground rods shall be of the fused 

type utilizing an exothermic welding process. 

2. Ground metallic material, including but not limited to metallic raceway, metallic 

boxes and metallic enclosures. Where metallic material is not connected by 

raceway to a solid ground, connect the metallic material to the largest equipment 

grounding conductor, which it houses. Clean the metal surface under the 

grounding lug to bright metal. Grounding connections to motors shall be to the 

grounding stud, which shall be threaded into the stationary frame; Use Burndy 

KC Servit, or approved equal. The ground wire shall not be lugged to a 

mounting bolt. 

3. Ground wire shall be uninsulated tin plated copper sized as shown on the plans in 

all cases where a single ground wire is indicated to be installed in a conduit with 

no other conductors in the conduit, or where the ground wire is directly buried in 

earth or concrete. In all other cases, insulate ground wire with green insulation as 

specified for low voltage wire. Provide and size bonding conductors in 

accordance with the National Electrical Code. 

4. Provide a bare uninsulated ground wire to run the entire length of all cable trays. 

The contractor shall bond to each section and to every enclosure served by 

conductors routed through the cable tray system 

E. TESTING 

1. Testing: All testing required shall be per Specification Section 26 01 26, 

“Testing of Electrical Systems”. 

2. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports and submit to the 

Owner/Engineer prior to final inspection. Test reports shall be submitted as 

required by Specification Section 26 01 26, “Testing of Electrical Systems”. All 

test reports shall be submitted in one binder under Specification Section 26 01 

26, “Testing of Electrical Systems”. 

3. Tests and Inspections: 

a. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has 

been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 

b. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical tests stated 

in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with 

test parameters. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 05 19-7




c. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 

days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in 

cables and conductors No.3 AWG and larger. Remove box and 

equipment covers so terminations are accessible to portable scanner. 

1) Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up 

infrared scan of each termination 11 months after date of 


2) Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to 

measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from 

normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 

3) Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that 

identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. 

Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, 

and observations after remedial action. 

d. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 

1) Test procedures used 

2) Test results that comply with requirements. 

3) Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective 

action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. 

e. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 


May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 05 19-8





GROUNDING & BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 



A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install a complete 

grounding system in strict accordance with Article 250 of the National Electrical Code 

(NEC) as shown on the drawings or as specified herein. Electrical work shall be in 

accordance with Section 26 05 00 “Common Work Results for Electrical”. 


Submittals for 26 05 26, “Grounding & Bonding for Electrical Systems” shall not be combined 

with any other submittals. Submittal shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal 


A. Grounding materials, equipment and processes. 

B. Product Data: For each type of product supplied. 

C. Field quality-control test reports. 


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in 

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, 

and marked for intended use. 

B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. 


A. Measure the ground grid resistance with the earth test megger and install additional 

ground rods and conductors as required until the resistance to the ground conforms to 

National Electrical Code requirements. Ground resistance measurement shall not exceed 

5 ohms. Add ground rods as required to bring resistance to 5 ohms and connect to 

grounding system. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. GROUND RODS: Copper-clad having a diameter of 3/4" and a minimum length of 10'. 

May 18, 2012 

Grounding & Bonding for Electrical Systems 

Revision 0 26 05 26 - 1




B. GROUND CABLES: Stranded, bare tinned copper of 98% conductivity. Ground wire 

shall be Class B stranded tin-plated conductor without insulation in all cases where a 

single ground wire is indicated to be installed in a conduit with no other conductors in the 

conduit, or where the ground wire is directly buried in earth or concrete. In all other 

cases, insulate ground wire with green insulator as specified for low voltage wire. 

C. CONDUIT GROUND FITTINGS: Fittings for bonding ground cable to the conduit shall 

be FCI Burndy Corp., type NE or Thomas & Betts No. 3951 series. 

D. GROUND ROD BOXES: Precast Box with cast iron lid. Lid shall read “ground rod” on 

lid. Brooks Precast Model. “3-RT” or approved equal. Ground rod boxes located in 

driveway areas shall have an AASHO HS-20 rating. 

E. GROUND PLATE ELECTRODES: 20 gauge copper with terminated two (2) foot 

welded pigtail connection. 

F. EXOTHERMIC WELDING PROCESS: CADWELD MATERIALS – as manufactured 

by ERICO products or approved equal. 

2.2 PROCESSES 

A. All grounding system connections to building steel and ground rods shall be 

exothermically welded including all cable connections, and cable steel terminations. The 

use of mechanical type connectors is not acceptable. 

B. All materials involved must be from the same sources to insure compatibility. 

Connections made from this process shall meet the requirements of IEEE Standards 80 

and 837 and as listed in MIL 419 and other standards, National Electrical Code, etc. 

GROUNDING SYSTEM 

C. Provide a grounding system that includes all connections and the testing of ground rods, 

ground cables, ground buses, conduits, fittings, anchor supports, thermite process 

materials and equipment and other materials required for a complete installation. 

Grounding system shall be installed and sized in accordance with the National Electrical 

Code. 



A. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted/clamp type 

connectors. 

2. Underground Connections: Exothermically welded connectors, except at test 

wells and as otherwise indicated. 

3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Exothermically welded connectors. 

4. Connections to Structural Steel: Exothermically welded connectors. 

B. Ground electrical work in accordance with NEC Article 250 and local codes. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 05 26 - 2




C. Install ground cables in conduits above grade or directly buried in earth to a depth of not 

less than 12" below grade. Installation to provide sufficient mechanical protection so as 

not to break ground cables or connections. 

D. Install ground cables continuously between connections. Splices shall not be permitted, 

except where indicated on the plans. Where ground cables pass through floor slabs, 

buildings, etc., and when not in metallic enclosures, provide a sleeve of approved, nonmetallic 

materials. 

E. Install a green-colored, equipment grounding conductor in raceways. Size conductors in 

accordance with NEC Article 250. 

F. Where ground wire is directly buried in earth or concrete, use standard bare tinned copper 

cable, in all other cases install a green-colored insulation, equipment grounding 

conductor. Size conductors in accordance with NEC Article 250. Provide grounding 

conductors as required per the NEC. 

G. Metal conduits stubbed up into switchgear, motor control center or other electrical 

equipment shall be terminated with insulated grounding bushings and connected to the 

equipment ground bus. Size the grounding wire in accordance with applicable sections of 

the National Electrical Code. 

H. Provide exothermic weld connection for extension to existing stub-up ground conductors. 

I. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and 

maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 

1. Provide grounding and bonding jumpers as required per the NEC. 

2. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to 

penetrate any adjacent parts. 

3. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: 

Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 

4. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type 

connection is required, use a bolted clamp. 

J. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in 

conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main 

metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to 

main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a 

lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. 

Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor 

on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to 

conductor at each end. 

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass 

water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from 

equipment shutoff valve. 

K. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors 

of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install a copper bonding 

jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 05 26 - 3




L. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit in sizes 1-1/2” or larger shall have bonding jumpers. 

Bonding jumpers shall be external, run in parallel (not spiraled) and fastened with plastic 

tie wraps. Contractor shall provide bonding jumpers sized in accordance with the 

National Electrical Code. 

M. All equipment enclosures, motor and transformer frames, conduit systems, cable armor, 

exposed structural steel and all other equipment and materials required by the NEC to be 

grounded, shall be grounded and bonded in accordance with the NEC. Provide 

grounding and bonding jumpers as required per the NEC. 

N. Ground transformer neutrals to the nearest available grounding electrode with a 

conductor sized in accordance with NEC article 250. 

O. Run a grounding cable the full length of each cable tray section and bond to each cable 

tray section. Provide #4/0 bare copper in cable tray. 

P. Where exothermic bonding is used, molds shall be of the appropriate size for the wire and 

rod used. All bonds shall remain exposed for inspection of the Owner’s Representative. 

Q. Ground rod shall be installed such that the top of the ground rod is 6” below grade and 

enclosed by a ground rod box. 

R. Install #4/0 AWG bare tinned copper ground cable that follows the route of the 

underground duct banks on top of the duct bank envelop, but in no case is embedded in 

the concrete. Run ground through the manholes. Tie ground cable to pump station main 

grounding system at both ends. 

S. At each convenience outlet, install a grounding clip attached to the outlet box and leave a 

sufficient length of #12 wire with green-colored insulation to connect to the grounding 

terminal at the receptacle. 

3.2 INSPECTION 

A. Inspect the grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and 

proper installation. 

B. Use Biddle Direct Reading Earth Resistance Tester or equivalent to measure resistance to 

ground of the system. Perform testing in accordance with the test instrument 

manufacturer’s recommendation using the fall of potential method. 

C. All test equipment shall be provided under this section and approved by the Engineer. 

D. Resistance to ground testing shall be performed during dry season. Submit test results in 

the form of a graph showing the number of points measured (12 minimum) and the 

numerical resistance to ground. 

E. Testing shall be performed before energizing the distribution system. 

F. A separate test shall be conducted for each building or system. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 05 26 - 4




G. Notify the Engineer immediately if the resistance to ground for any building or system is 

greater than five ohms. Provide additional ground rods and conductors as required to 

bring the resistance to five ohms. 


May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 05 26 - 5






HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 


1.1 Work Included 

A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install hangers and 

supports for electrical equipment and systems. Electrical work shall be in accordance 

with Section 26 05 00, “Common Work Results for Electrical”. 

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of 

supported systems and its contents. 

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of 

supported equipment and connected systems and components. 


A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, “Submittal Procedures” and 

shall include Record Data. 


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural 

Welding Code - Steel." 

B. Comply with NFPA 70. 


A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. 

Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. 


2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS 

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components 

for field assembly. 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by 

one of the following: 

a. Allied Tube & Conduit. 

b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 

c. ERICO International Corporation. 

d. GS Metals Corp. 

e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 

May 18, 2012 

Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 

Revision 0 26 05 29-1




f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. 

g. Wesanco, Inc. 

2. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester 

coating applied according to MFMA-4. 

3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. 

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. 

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: 304 stainless steel hangers, clamps, and associated 

fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. 

D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, 

shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. 

E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items 

or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 

1. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel, for use in 

hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities 

appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. 

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 

products by one of the following: 

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 

2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 

3) Hilti Inc. 

4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 

5) MKT Fastening, LLC. 

2. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to 

MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 

3. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable 

for attached structural element. 

4. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with 

ASTM A 325. 

5. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 

6. Hanger Rods: Threaded stainless steel. 


3.1 APPLICATION 

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for 

electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. 

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space 

supports for RIGID METAL CONDUIT as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size 

shall be 1/4 inch in diameter. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 05 29-2




C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with stainless steel 

slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future 

without exceeding specified design load limits. 

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps 

using spring friction action for retention in support channel. 

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION 

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in 

this Article. 

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, RIGID 

METAL CONDUIT may be supported by openings through structure members, as 

permitted in NFPA 70. 

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so 

strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading 

limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of 

supported components plus 200 lb. 

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and 

fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following 

methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 

2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 

3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and 

expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 

4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 

5. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with 

MSS SP-69. 

6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 

7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount 

cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction 

boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to 

substrate. 

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid 

reinforcing bars. 

3.3 CONCRETE BASES 

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both 

directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters 

from edge of the base. 

B. Concrete shall be in accordance with Section 03 30 00, “Cast-In-Place Concrete” for 

3000 psi concrete. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 05 29-3




C. Anchor equipment to concrete base. 

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's 

setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with 

items to be embedded. 

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported 

equipment. 

3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 


May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 05 29-4




SECTION 26 05 33.01 

CONDUITS 




conduit system for each type of electrical system. Electrical work shall be in accordance 

with Section 26 05 00, “Common Work Results for Electrical”. 


A. Submittals for 26 05 33.01, “Conduits” shall not be combined with any other submittals. 

Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, “Submittal Procedures” and 

shall include: 

1. Shop Drawings to include cut sheets of each material to be used on the project. 

1.3 STANDARDS 


entirety: 

ANSI C80.1 Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc-Coated 

ANSI/NEMA FB 1 Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and 

Cable Assemblies 

NEMA RN 1 

NEMA TC 2 

NEMA TC 3 

PVC Externally-Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and 

Electrical Metallic Tubing 

Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80) 

PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing 


2.1 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS 

A. FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT: 

1. LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE ALUMINUM CONDUIT: Single strip, helically 

wound, interlocking, aluminum, in accordance with U.L. 1. Liquid tight conduit 

shall have an extruded, polyvinyl jacket over the flexible metal. Acceptable 

product shall be Anaconda Type U.A. 

B. RIGID ALUMINUM CONDUIT: Heavy wall, aluminum alloy 6063; low temper 

number, tube, free from defects and manufactured in accordance with ANSI C80.5 

standards and U.L. listed. Acceptable manufacturers shall be VAW, Western, and 

Alumax. 

May 18, 2012 

Conduits 

Revision 0 26 05 33.01 - 1




C. RIGID STEEL CONDUIT: Heavy wall, mold steel tube with metallic, corrosion 

resistant coating on interior and exterior, hot dipped galvanized steel, free from defect; 

manufactured in accordance with FED. Spec. WW-C-581, ANSI C80.1 standards, and 

U.L. listed. Acceptable manufacturers shall be Allied, Triangle, and Wheatland. 

D. PVC COATED RIGID ALUMINUM: Meeting the requirements of rigid aluminum 

conduit; 40 mil PVC exterior coating and 2 mil urethane interior coating, U.L. 6A listed. 

Acceptable Manufacturers shall be Rob Roy Plastibond Red, Ocal and Perma-Cote. 

E. PVC COATED RIGID STEEL: Heavy wall, mild steel tube with metallic, corrosionresistant 

coating on interior and exterior, hot-dipped, galvanized steel, free from defects 

rigid steel conduit; 40 mil PVC, exterior coating and 2 mil urethane interior coating; 

manufactured in accordance with Fed. Spec. WW-C-581, ANSI C80.1 standards, and 

U.L. listed. Acceptable Manufacturers shall be Rob Roy Plastibond Red, Ocal and 

Perma-Cote. 

F. RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT: Schedule 40 high impact, polyvinylchloride, in 

accordance with Fed. Spec. W-C-1094 and U.L. listed. Acceptable manufacturers shall 

be Carlon, Cantex, and Certainteed. 

G. FITTINGS AND CONDUIT BODIES: 

1. RIGID METAL CONDUIT: Threaded type material to match the conduit, in 

accordance with ANSI/NEMA FB1 and as manufactured by Appleton Form 35, 

Killark "O" Series, Crouse Hinds, OZ Gedney, or RACO. 

2. FLEXIBLE AND LIQUID TIGHT FITTINGS: In accordance with 

ANSI/NEMA FB1; cadmium-plated, malleable iron body and nut; aluminum 

ferrule; insulated throat; integrally-cast, external ground lugs, as manufactured by 

Appleton "ST" series, Hubbel, OZ Gedney Type 4QL, or RACO. 

3. PVC CONDUIT: Solvent-welded, slip-on joints, in accordance with NEMA 

TC3, as manufactured by Carlon, CertainTeed. 

4. CONDUIT SEALS: Explosion-proof, rigid metal conduit fitting as defined by 

NEC Article 500, and as manufactured by Crouse Hinds fitting with Chico "X" 

Fiber and Chico "A" compound or Appleton fitting with Apelco fiber and 

compound. Seal shall be same material as conduit. 

H. ELBOW AND BENDS: Rigid, nonmetallic conduit system shall use PVC-coated rigid 

steel for conduits 2" and larger for all bends greater than 45 degrees. Meeting the 

requirements of rigid steel conduit; 40 mil PVC, exterior coating and 2 mil urethane 

interior coating. Acceptable Manufacturers shall be Rob Roy Plastibond Red, Ocal and 

Perma-Cote. Other conduit systems shall use the same material as the conduit with 

which they are installed. 

I. BUSHINGS: High impact, thermosetting, phenolic insulation; 150 degrees C.; as 

manufactured by Appleton "BBUH", Blackburn, or OZ Gedney type A. 

J. GROUNDING BUSHINGS: Conduit grounding bushings shall consist of an aluminum, 

insulated throat conduit bushing with an attached aluminum set screw lug. Grounding 

bushing shall comply with Fed. Spec. W-F-408b and W-W-C-581d, UL Standards 514B 

and 467, and shall be Crouse Hinds Lazy Lug or approved equal. 

May 18, 2012 

Conduits 

Revision 0 26 05 33.01 - 2




K. LOCKNUTS: Aluminum as manufactured by Appleton "BL", OZ Gedney, RACO, or 

Steel City. 

L. HUBS: 

1. ALUMINUM CONDUIT: Cast aluminum, with broad flat surfaces with 

gripping teeth on both sides of conduit entry. Hub portion on exterior side of 

entry shall contain "O" ring for watertight seal of conduit entry. Hubs shall be 

Meyers Hub, Appleton or Efcor. 

M. CONDUIT THROUGH-WALL AND FLOOR SEAL: Malleable iron body with 

oversized sleeves, sealing ring, pressure clamp and rings and sealing grommet; hex head 

cap screw, as manufactured by OZ Gedney, type FSK. 

N. END BELLS: Hot-dipped, galvanized, threaded, malleable iron, as manufactured by OZ 

Gedney type TNS. 

O. EXPANSION FITTINGS: Aluminum with aluminum bonding jumpers. Linear 

expansion fittings shall be OZ Gedney Zx for rigid, use with aluminum conduit or 

Appleton "XJ" series. Combination linear and deflection expansion fittings shall be OZ 

Gedney type AXDX. 

P. THREADED NIPPLES: As manufactured by Allied or Triangle. Aluminum Conduit 

nipples shall have two (2) independent sets of threads. Running threads shall not be used. 

Utilize the conduit union when joining two (2) fixed conduits in a continuous run. 

Q. ACCESSORIES: Reducers, washers, etc., shall be cadmium-plated, malleable iron. 

R. CONDUIT DRAINS: Conduit drains shall be 316 stainless steel as manufactured by 

Crouse Hinds ECD Universal, or approved equal. 

S. DUCT BANK SPACERS: Interlocking module spacers as manufactured by Formex, or 

approved equal. 

T. LINK SEAL: Link seal shall be modular, mechanical type, consisting of inter-locking 

synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the space between the conduit and the 

wall opening. Link seal shall be suitable for use in a core-drilled and pre-cast wall 

openings and shall be manufactured by Pipeline Seal & Insulator, Inc. or approved equal. 


3.1 CONDUIT INSTALLATION SCHEDULE 

A. Conduit types shall be installed in accordance with the following schedule: 

1. BURIED CONDUIT: PVC Schedule 40 or PVC coated rigid steel unless noted 

otherwise. 

2. ABOVE GRADE CONDUIT: Rigid Aluminum unless noted otherwise. 

3. PVC COATED RIGID ALUMINUM CONDUIT: Shall be used for all 

underground conduit bends 45° or more where the conduit ultimately terminates 

to aluminum conduit; and for conduit stub-ups through concrete and concrete 

wall penetrations. 

May 18, 2012 

Conduits 

Revision 0 26 05 33.01 - 3




3.2 GENERAL 

4. PVC COATED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT: All instrumentation cables – 4- 

20mA cables, or manufactured supplied cables – those that are associated with 

the level transmitters, flow meters, etc. shall be routed in rigid steel conduit in 

underground duct banks. 

5. RIGID ALUMINUM CONDUIT: May be used in all locations. PVC coated rigid 

aluminum conduit shall be used in corrosive environments or where in contact 

with concrete. 

6. RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT: May be used in non-hazardous locations, 

installed single or grouped either underground or encased in concrete. 

7. LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT: Shall only be used to 

equipment in non-hazardous locations not subject to physical damage or 

excessive temperatures, requiring vibration isolation unless otherwise indicated, 

6’-0” maximum length. The bending radius shall be in accordance with Chapter 

9, Table 2 of the NEC and shall not deform or alter the flex jacket. 

A. Size conduits as required by the National Electrical Code for the number and sizes of 

wires to be drawn into the conduit. Above grade conduit less than ¾” shall not be used 

unless specified otherwise. Below Grade conduit shall not be less than 1”. 

B. Conduit stubbed up under free standing enclosures, such as motor control centers shall be 

PVC, stubbed up 1" above the finished floor level, and shall have a PVC bell terminator 

solvent welded onto each conduit end. 

C. Underground conduit from the service entrance disconnect switch to the equipment rack 

disconnect shall be concrete encased, all other underground conduit shall be concrete 

capped. Straight runs of conduit which is below the finished grade shall be rigid PVC. 

Unless otherwise indicated, all other conduit shall be rigid aluminum. 

D. At the transition from underground and or from concrete, protect PVC conduit from 

mechanical damage by extending PVC coated rigid aluminum conduit a maximum of 

12" and a minimum of 4" into the earth or concrete at the transition. For installations 

where the conduit does not penetrate concrete, provide a 12” wide housekeeping pad 

around conduit for transitions from underground to exposed conduit. 

E. Aluminum conduit, straps, and struts shall not be in direct contact with concrete or CMU 

walls, painted or not. Provide a rubber washer between the two materials. 

F. Aluminum conduit which penetrates into concrete shall be factory-coated with 0.20" of 

polyvinylchloride, per Spec. MIL-P-15147. 

G. Conduit extending into concrete shall not be closer than 3" from adjacent conduit and 

shall not be closer than 1" from any reinforcement bars. 

H. PVC conduit shall not be installed above grade level, above concrete slab level, or for 

any exposed installations unless specified. Conduit shall not be placed horizontally in a 

concrete floor slab or a beam without the Engineer's written approval. 

May 18, 2012 

Conduits 

Revision 0 26 05 33.01 - 4




I. Flexible metal conduit used for connecting light fixtures, i.e., fixture whips, shall be 1/2" 

as a minimum. Fixture whips shall contain only three conductors: one hot, one neutral, 

and one equipment grounding conductor. Other conduit types shall be 3/4" as a 

minimum. The inside surface of the conduit shall be reamed smooth after it has been cut. 

J. Provide conduit sizes as shown on the plans. Where hash marks are used to indicate the 

number of conductors in a conduit without indicating the conduit size, provide a 3/4" 

conduit for up to nine #12 conductors, and a 1" conduit for ten to 20 #12 conductors. 

K. Where conduits stub up through a floor slab from below finished floor level for multilevel 

structures, install a threaded fitting with PVC plug so that the top of the fitting is 

flush with the concrete or finished floor surface. 

L. Conduit system shall be swabbed clean prior to installation of conductors. 

M. Ground conduits in accordance with the National Electrical Code and Specification 26 05 

26, “Grounding & Bonding For Electrical Systems”. 

N. Contractor shall properly tape PVC coated aluminum conduit where it transitions to PVC 

conduit in underground concrete encased duct banks so that no aluminum conduit is in 

contact with concrete encasement. Tape shall be manufactured by Scotch or approved 

equal. Coordinate with tape manufacturer for type of tape to use for the installation. 

O. Conduit shall not penetrate the top of NEMA 3R and NEMA 4X enclosures. 

3.3 UNDERGROUND 

A. Underground conduit from the service entrance disconnect switch to the equipment rack 

disconnect shall be concrete encased, all other underground conduit shall be concrete 

capped. 

B. Bury underground conduit a minimum of 18" deep for low voltage duct banks to the top 

of the concrete cap/encasement, and as shown on the plans, whichever is greater. 

Backfill buried conduit banks with material which is free from large rock, paving 

material, or large angular substance. Install underground conduit with the conduit duct 

bank dimensions shown on the plans. Adhere to conduit spacing by using spacers at 

intervals to ensure that proper spacings are maintained. The concrete shall be red in 

color. Red dye for duct bank shall be mixed with concrete or the top of the duct bank 

shall be painted red. 

C. For installation of conduits to be used by Oncor Electric Delivery, coordinate with the 

utility for exact requirements 

D. Grade underground and outdoor conduits to drain free of condensation and moisture. 

Provide for automatic draining at lowpoints. Install horizontal runs of conduit to provide 

a natural drain for condensation without pockets or traps where moisture may collect. 

E. Underground conduits shall drain to an underground structure with a floor drain, such as 

a manhole or a building basement. 

May 18, 2012 

Conduits 

Revision 0 26 05 33.01 - 5




F. Install conduit drain assemblies in outside or underground conduits to provide for 

draining. 

G. Underground conduit bends shall have a minimum 2' bend radius for conduits 3” and 

smaller and a minimum 3’ bend radius for conduits 4” or greater in size. Underground 

conduit bends which are 45 degrees or more shall utilize PVC factory-coated rigid steel 

bends. 

H. Minimum size for underground conduits outside the building is 2”. 

I. Contractor shall install duct bank spacers a minimum of every 8 feet. 

J. Conduit shall slope uniformly at not less than 4” per 100’, or more than 60” per 100’ 

unless indicated otherwise on the plans or approved by the Engineer. Arrange duct banks 

to drain into manholes with no low pockets in the duct runs. The electrical contractor 

shall coordinate with the Contractor and the plans on the proposed grades for the site. 

3.4 ROUTING AND SUPPORT 

A. Use the conduit route where shown on the plans. Route conduits that do not have a 

specified route in the most direct path between the two points, i.e. home runs shown with 

an arrow symbol. Route conduits parallel to building lines. Concealed conduits on the 

plans shall be below grade, within walls, or above ceilings. 

B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible. 

Otherwise, route conduit through the roof with pitch pocket. Conduit shall not penetrate 

ductwork. Exposed conduit shall not be installed on the roof without the Engineer's prior 

approval. 

C. Install conduit at elevations which maintain headroom, and at locations which avoid 

interference with other work requiring grading of pipe, the structure, finished walls, etc. 

Avoid crossing other work. Conduits shall not be placed in close proximity to 

equipment, systems, and service lines. Maintain a minimum of 3" separation, except in 

crossing which shall be a minimum of 1". Conduits shall not be installed/concealed in 

water bearing walls. 

D. Conduits in buildings shall be exposed on unfinished ceilings and basements, as shown 

on the plans. Rigidly support conduits to the building structures using hardware bolted or 

screwed to the structure. The mounting hardware shall not mount the conduit directly on 

concrete walls and ceilings, but shall space the conduit away from the surfaces using 

mineralac-type hardware, strut channel clamps, or one hole straps with clamp backs. 

E. Provide expansion fittings at expansion, construction and seismic joints. Provide 

combination expansion/deflection fittings where conduits are concealed at these joints. 

F. Group conduit in parallel runs where practical. Use a conduit rack constructed of 

channels with conduit straps or clamps. Provide space for an additional 25% conduit. 

May 18, 2012 

Conduits 

Revision 0 26 05 33.01 - 6




G. Parallel runs of conduit shall have bends and offsets made at the same point such that the 

angle of bend is the same in each conduit and the conduits remain parallel throughout the 

run. Conduits not installed in this manner shall be removed and reinstalled at the 

Contractor’s expense. Conductors that are installed shall be removed and replaced at the 

Contractor’s expense. 

H. Conduits installed in parallel shall be arranged such that crossings are eliminated. 

I. Rigid aluminum conduit systems shall utilize aluminum straps, clamps and strut channel. 

Coated rigid steel conduit shall utilize PVC factory coated or fiberglass straps, clamps 

and thread rods, etc. as manufactured by Robroy. 

J. Nuts, bolts, concrete anchor bolts and other metallic fasteners shall be stainless steel. 

K. Install conduit other than PVC with threaded couplings and other threaded fittings. 

Threadless, or clamp type fittings shall not be used on metallic conduit. Rigid aluminum 

conduit shall have each set of threads coated with an oxidation inhibitor, Ilsco, De-Ox, 

ITT Noalox, Blackburn Contax or approved equal. 

L. Use PVC coated, rigid steel, factory elbows for bends in PVC conduit unless indicated 

otherwise. 

M. Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against entry of dirt and moisture. 

N. Use watertight hubs to fasten conduit to metal boxes, etc. in wet or damp locations per 


O. Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against entry of dirt and moisture. 

P. Use watertight hubs to fasten conduit to metal boxes, etc. in wet or damp locations per 


Q. Install a pulling string in empty (spare) conduit, except sleeves and nipples, and leave for 

future pulling as applicable. 

3.5 TERMINATIONS 

A. Use threaded hubs for termination of conduits. Locknut termination of conduits shall not 

be used on this project. 


May 18, 2012 

Conduits 

Revision 0 26 05 33.01 - 7





SECTION 26 05 33.02 

WIREWAYS 




wireway system. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, 

“Common Work Results for Electrical”. Contractor shall size wireways in accordance 

with the National Electrical Code. 



shall include Record Data for: 

1. Wireways 

PART 2 PRODUCT 

2.1 MATERIALS 

A. WIREWAY: Provide as manufactured by Hoffman or equal. 

B. WIREWAY ENCLOSURES, SUPPORTS AND ASSOCIATED FITTINGS: NEMA 

4X, 304 stainless steel, lay-in wireway, quick release cover latches, continuously welded 

seams, oil resistant gasket. Hoffman Lay-In-Type NEMA 4X wireway or equal. NEMA 

4X, 304 stainless steel for all locations. 

2.2 FABRICATIONS 

A. WIREWAYS: Complete wireway system with enclosures, supports, and associated 

fittings, having the form and dimension suited to the application, and as manufactured by 

Hoffman or approved equal. 



A. Provide systems of wireways of sufficient size where indicated. 

B. Size wireway cross-sectional area and length based upon conductor fill and equipment 

served as required by NEC and local codes. 

C. Install types based on environmental conditions to which exposed. 


May 18, 2012 

Wireways 

Revision 0 26 05 33.02-1





SECTION 26 05 33.03 

OUTLET BOXES 



A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install outlet boxes. 

Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, “Common Work Results 

for Electrical”. 

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE - ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 

A. Steel City Series 600 


A. No submittals required for Section 26 05 33.03, “Outlet Boxes”. 

1.4 STANDARDS 


entirety: 

ANSI/NEMA OS 1 


Sheet steel outlet boxes, device boxes, covers and box supports. 

Non-metallic outlet boxes, device boxes, covers and box 

supports. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. GENERAL: Provide boxes with plaster ring where required. Boxes for installation in 

masonry walls shall be special square corner masonry type. Furnish boxes with proper 

covers and device plates. Boxes shall be non-metallic in accordance with ANSI/NEMA 

0S 2. 

B. CAST BOXES: Cast feralloy metal, deep type, gasketed cover, threaded hubs. Use cast 

boxes for damp and outdoor installation. Boxes shall be manufactured by Crouse-Hinds, 

Appleton or approved equal. 


3.1 PREPARATION; COORDINATION OF BOX LOCATIONS 

A. Provide electrical boxes in the locations shown on the Plans, and as required for splices, 

taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and code compliance. 

May 18, 2012 

Outlet Boxes 

Revision 0 26 05 33.03-1




B. Electrical box locations shown on Contract Drawings are approximate unless 

dimensioned. Verify locations of boxes and outlets prior to rough-in. Outlet locations 

may be modified to accommodate changes in door swings, space changes or to clear 

other interferences that arise or from job modifications. Make such modifications at no 

cost to the Owner as a matter of job coordination. Coordinate job conditions and notify 

the Engineer of discrepancies before proceeding with the installation of the work. Set 

wall boxes in advance of wall construction blocked in place, and secured. Set wall boxes 

flush with the finish. Install extension sleeves as required to extend boxes to finished 

surfaces. 

C. Unless otherwise noted, location of outlet boxes shall be as follows: 

Equipment or Outlets 

Toggle switches 

Receptacles 

Equipment or Outlets 

Flow/Level Transmitters 

Circular Chart Recorder 

Motor starters 

Control stations 

Manual starters 

Thermostats 

Telephone outlets 

Circuit protective devices 

* Above Finished Floor. 

Elevation *(A.F.F.) 

4'0" 

1'6" 

Elevation *(A.F.F.) 

5'5" 

5'5" 

5'0" 

4'0" 

5'0" 

4'0" 

1'6" 

6'6" to top of enclosure 

D. Locate and install boxes to allow access. Where installation is inaccessible, coordinate 

locations and sizes of required access doors in accordance with other sections of the 

specifications. 


A. Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide minimum 6" separation, except 

provide minimum 24" separation in acoustic-rated walls. 

B. Locate boxes in masonry walls to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. 

Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat openings for boxes. 

C. Provide knockout closures for unused openings. 

D. Use multiple-gang boxes where more than one (1) device is installed together; do not use 

sectional boxes. Provide barriers to separate wiring of different voltage systems. 

E. Install boxes in walls without damaging wall insulation. 

F. Provide recessed outlet boxes in finished areas; secure boxes to interior wall and partition 

studs, position to allow for surface finish thickness. Use stamped steel stud bridges for 

flush outlets in hollow stud wall, and adjustable steel channel fasteners for flush ceiling 

outlet boxes. 

May 18, 2012 

Outlet Boxes 

Revision 0 26 05 33.03-2




G. Align wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats and similar devices. 

H. Aluminum conduit shall use cast aluminum boxes. Cast aluminum boxes shall not be in 

direct contact with concrete or CMU walls, painted or not. 

I. Drilling through the back of the outlet box for mounting purposes is not allowed. 

J. Wall mounted outlet boxes shall be installed with an air gap behind the boxes. 


May 18, 2012 

Outlet Boxes 

Revision 0 26 05 33.03-3





SECTION 26 05 33.04 

PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 



A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install pull and junction 

boxes. The contractor shall be responsible for sizing all pull boxes and junction boxes 

per the National Electrical Code (NEC) Article 314 and all other relevant sections of the 

NEC. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, “Common Work 

Results for Electrical”. 


A. Appleton 

B. Bryant 

C. Crouse Hinds 

D. Hoffman 

E. Hubbell 

F. O Z Gedney 

G. Raco 

H. Rob Roy 



include the following: 

A. Shop Drawings 

1. Pull and Junction Boxes 

2. Pull and Junction Boxes Sizing Calculations: Detailed calculations shall be 

submitted to the Engineer with the pull and junction boxes’ initial submittal. 

Submittals submitted without sizing calculations shall not be accepted. 

1.4 STANDARDS 


entirety: 

NEMA 250 


NEC 

Enclosure for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum) 

Sheet steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box 

Supports 


May 18, 2012 

Pull and Junction Boxes for Electrical Systems 

Revision 0 26 05 33.04-1





2.1 MATERIALS 

A. GENERAL: Exposed wall recessed pull and junction boxes shall be 304 stainless steel. 

Pull boxes in floors shall be of galvanized malleable cast iron, with gasketed covers. 

Exposed pull boxes or junction boxes installed outdoors, per NEMA 250 shall be 

weatherproof and shall be provided with watertight gasketed covers fastened with 

stainless steel screws. 

B. NEMA 4X, 304 stainless steel for all other locations. 

C. PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES: Metal construction conforming to National Electrical 

Code and ANSI/NEMA OS 1. Provide hinge type for sheet metal boxes of 12" or larger 

in any dimension. 

D. FLUSH-MOUNTED PULL BOXES: Provide overlapping covers with flush-head cover 

retaining screws. 



A. Use separate pull boxes and junction boxes for electric power, control and 

communication systems. 

B. Install pull boxes and junction boxes where required by the National Electrical Code and 

wherever required to overcome mechanical difficulties. 

C. Install pull boxes in interior conduit at not more than 100' apart when conduit runs are not 

broken by junction or outlet boxes. 

D. Pull and junction boxes shall be accessible and not buried. 

E. Do not install boxes back to back in walls and provide a minimum of 6" separation, 

except in acoustic-rated walls, provide 24" separation. 

F. Support boxes independently of conduit except for cast boxes that is connected to two 

rigid metal conduits, both supported within 12" of box. 

G. Junction boxes shall have terminal strips/distribution blocks for splicing conductors 

where approved by the Engineer or as shown/specified on the plans. Terminal strips shall 

be 600V, NEMA rated manufactured by Allen-Bradley, Phoenix Contact or approved 

equal. Distribution blocks shall be per Section 26 05 19.01, “Low Voltage Electrical 

Power Conductors and Cables”. 


May 18, 2012 

Pull and Junction Boxes for Electrical Systems 

Revision 0 26 05 33.04-2





IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 



A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary 

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 

B. Section Includes: 

1. Identification for raceways. 

2. Identification of power and control cables. 

3. Identification for conductors. 

4. Underground-line warning tape. 

5. Warning labels and signs. 

6. Instruction signs. 

7. Equipment identification labels. 

8. Miscellaneous identification products. 




1. Product Data to include cut sheets for each electrical identification product to be 

used on the project. 

2. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and 

system components used in identification signs and labels. 


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1. 


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. 

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. 

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and 

inks used by label printers are not acceptable. 


2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS 

A. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: 

1. Black letters on an white field. 

2. Legend: Indicate voltage. 

May 18, 2012 

Identification for Electrical Systems 

Revision 0 26 05 53-1




B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V: 

1. Black letters on an orange field. 

2. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- 

(75-mm-) high letters on 20-inch (500-mm) centers. 

C. Tape and Stencil for Raceways Carrying Circuits More Than 600 V: 4-inch- (100-mm-) 

wide black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers diagonally over orange background that 

extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches (300 mm) wide. Stop stripes at 

legends. 

D. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped 

legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener. 

E. Identify each circuit with non-ferrous metal or fiber tags in manholes and junction boxes 

and at terminations. 

F. Circuits shall be tagged at terminations (both ends), in pull boxes, cabinets, and 

enclosures as follows: 

1. Tags relying on adhesives or tapes-on markers are not acceptable. 

2. Provide conductor tags for conductors No. 10 AWG and below with legible 

permanent sleeve of yellow or white PVC with machine printed black marking, 

Raychem TMS sleeves or approved equal. 

3. Provide tags for cables and for conductors No. 8 AVWG and larger consisting of 

permanent nylon marker plates with legible designations hot stamped on the 

plate. Attach these marker plates to conductors and cables with plastic wire 

wraps. Tags shall be Raychem TMS-CM cable markers or approved equal. 

4. Tags shall be imprinted with panelboard and panelboard position number (e.g. 

LA3-23) for conductors fed from panelboards. Other conductors shall have tags 

imprinted with the MCC which feeds the conductors (e.g. MCC 1). 

5. Switchlegs shall have the designation described above on their tags, plus an “S” 

suffix. Travelers shall have the designation described above on their tags, plus a 

“T” suffix. 

6. Where more than one neutral is present with a group of conductors, a tag shall be 

applied to each neutral indicating which phase conductors are served by each 

neutral (e.g. HA-2, 4, 6). 

2.2 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS 

A. Color-coding conductor Tape: 

1. Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide. 

2.3 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE 

A. Tape: 

1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to 

identify and locate underground electrical and communications lines. 

2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial 

operations. 

3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading 

when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found 

in soils. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 05 53-2




B. Color and Printing: 

1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. 

2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE. 

3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, 

OPTICAL FIBER CABLE. 

2.4 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS 

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. 

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive 

labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless 

otherwise indicated. 

C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: 

1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, 

and size required for application. 

2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. 

3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm). 

D. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK 

HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA 

IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR 

FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM)." 

2.5 INSTRUCTION SIGNS 

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for 

signs up to 20 sq. inches (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes. 

1. Engraved legend with white letter on black face. 

2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 

3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable 

equipment. 

2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS 

A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw 

mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 

inch (10 mm). 



A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. 

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient 

viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 05 53-3




C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. 

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials 

and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. 

E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with stainless steel 

mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. 

F. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous 

underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) 

below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a 

common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall. 

G. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for 

surface preparation and paint application. 

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE 

A. Concealed Raceways, Duct Banks, More Than 600 V, within Buildings: Tape and 

stencil 4-inch- (100-mm-) wide black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers over orange 

background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches (300 mm) wide. 

Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- 

(75-mm-) high black letters on 20-inch (500-mm) centers. Stop stripes at legends. Apply 

to the following finished surfaces: 

1. Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches (300 

mm) of a floor that is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space. 

2. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall. 

3. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, 

exposed in the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings. 

B. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction 

and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring 

system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 

1. Emergency Power. 

2. Power. 

3. UPS. 

C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull 

and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify 

the phase. 

1. Color-Coding for Phase Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below 

for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors. 

a. Color shall be field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG. 

b. Colors for 120/240-V Circuits: 

1) Phase A: Black. 

2) Phase B: Red. 

3) Neutral: White 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 05 53-4




c. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: 

1) Phase A: Black. 

2) Phase B: Red. 

3) Phase C: Blue. 

4) Neutral: White 

d. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: 

1) Phase A: Brown. 

2) Phase B: Orange. 

3) Phase C: Yellow. 

e. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped 

turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points 

and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape 

with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid 

obscuring factory cable markings. 

D. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull 

and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use nonmetallic plastic tag holder with 

adhesive-backed phase tags, and a separate tag with the circuit designation. 

E. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded 

conductors using adhesive-film-type labels. 

F. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach type-on tags to conductors and list 

source. 

G. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, 

control, and signal connections. 

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, 

terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with 

system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. 

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, 

and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. 

H. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for 

power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. 

1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables. 

2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in 

raceway. 

I. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: 

Self-adhesive warning labels. 

1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 

2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 

3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 

4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of 

equipment including, but not limited to, the following: 

a. Power transfer switches. 

b. Controls with external control power connections. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 05 53-5




J. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and 

maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction 

signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment 

operation. 

K. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation 

label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and 

Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, 

central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of 

each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, 

monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 

1. Labeling Instructions: 

a. Indoor Equipment: Stainless steel screws and nuts, engraved and 

laminated acrylic nameplates. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a 

single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- 

(38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 

inches (50 mm) high. 

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. 

c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those 

appropriate for viewing from the floor. 

d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels 

with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or 

NRTL rating of the enclosure. 

2. Equipment to Be Labeled: 

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided 

by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be 

laminated acrylic or melamine label placed in a clear plastic sleeve. 

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. 

c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. 

d. Switchgear/Switchboards 

e. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings 

for the transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by 

the secondary. 

f. Substations. 

g. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. 

h. Motor Control Centers. 

i. Enclosed switches. 

j. Enclosed circuit breakers. 

k. Enclosed controllers. 

l. Variable Frequency Drives/ Soft Starters 

m. Push-button stations. 

n. Power transfer equipment. 

o. Contactors. 

p. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. 

q. Monitoring and control equipment. 

r. UPS equipment. 

s. Pull and Junction Boxes 

t. Exposed Conduits. 


May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 05 53-6




SECTION 26 05 73.01 

ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 


1.1 DESCRIPTION 

General: This section specifies that the CONTRACTOR prepare a short circuit and protective 

device coordination study, load flow and motor starting study, and an arc flash hazard analysis for 

the electrical power system as shown on the plans for each Well Site. 

NO EQUIPMENT IS TO BE ENERGIZED UNTIL THE POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 

HAVE BEEN APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER, THE PROTECTIVE RELAYS AND 

BREAKERS HAVE BEEN SET PER THE SHORT CIRCUIT AND RELAY 

COORDINATION STUDY AND THE ARC FLASH LABELS HAVE BEEN INSTALLED 

ON THE EQUIPMENT. NO EXCEPTIONS. 

Short Circuit and Protective Device Coordination Study, Arc Flash Analysis, Load Flow 

Study, and Motor Starting Study 

The studies shall provide an evaluation of the electrical power system and the model numbers and 

settings of the protective relays or devices and metering or motor monitoring devices for setting 

by the CONTRACTOR. The Studies shall include settings for all protective relays and electric 

system monitoring. The Contractor shall obtain any needed data or information for the electrical 

equipment from Contract Documents, various suppliers, and from conducting his own field 

investigations. 

A. Scope: 

1. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for providing all pertinent information 

necessary for the successful completion of the Short Circuit and Relay 

Coordination Study, Load Flow and Motor Starting Study, and Arc Flash 

Analysis. All cable and raceway data, data from all new Switchgear, motor 

control centers, transformers, panelboards, and separately mounted fuses, starters 

or circuit breakers shall be obtained by the CONTRACTOR. Obtain all existing 

or new protective device information to include all present settings. The 

CONTRACTOR shall obtain any needed data or information from Contract 

Documents, various suppliers, the Electric Utility and from conducting his own 

field investigations. The data obtained shall be organized and submitted to the 

ENGINEER to show that all the necessary data gathering work has been done. 

2. Calculations shall utilize actual X/R and three phase short circuit values obtained 

by the CONTRACTOR from the Electric Utility. The use of infinite bus fault 

current calculation is not acceptable. 

May 18, 2012 

Electrical Power System Studies 

Revision 0 26 05 73.01-1




3. Provide a complete short circuit study. Include three phase and phase-to-ground 

calculations. Provide an equipment interrupting or withstand evaluation based on 

the actual equipment and model numbers provided on this project. Generic 

devices are not acceptable. Normal system operating method, alternate 

operation, and operations that could result in maximum fault conditions shall be 

thoroughly addressed in the study. The study shall assume all motors operating at 

rated voltage with the exception that motors identified as "standby" shall not be 

included. Electrical equipment bus impedance shall be assumed zero. Short 

circuit momentary duties and interrupting duties shall be calculated on the basis 

of maximum available fault current at the electrical equipment busses. The 

Study shall be performed using actual available short circuit currents available 

and system impedances as obtained from the Electric Utility. An assumption of 

infinite bus for the purposes of the Study is not acceptable. Study shall use actual 

motor X/R and subtransient reactance data obtained from equipment suppliers. 

4. A protective device coordination study shall be performed to determine 

appropriate relay settings. The study shall include all electrical equipment 

provided under this contract and any up-stream equipment that has an impact on 

the coordination study. The study shall show transformer damage curves, 

generator damage curves, cable short circuit withstand curves and motor curves. 

Include all medium and low voltage switchgear, distribution switchboards, motor 

control centers, starters, and panelboards main circuit breakers. Complete the 

short circuit study down to the main breaker or main lugs on all panelboards. 

Panelboard branch circuit devices need not be considered. The phase over 

current and ground-fault protection shall be included as well as settings for all 

other adjustable protective devices. All motor monitoring relays and protective 

or monitoring devices that are a part of a supplier’s equipment (such as soft 

starters, switchgear) shall be in included. Include the last protective device in the 

Electric Utility’s system feeding each facility being considered. 

5. Provide Time-Current Curves on 11X17 log-log paper. Do not put more than 

one branch of protective devices on any one coordination curve. Include a oneline 

diagram and the names of each protective device in the branch. Use the 

names designated in the Contract Documents. Include motor and transformer 

damage curves, and cable short circuit withstand curves. Coordination study 

time-current curves (11x17 log-log type) including the instrument transformer 

ratios, model numbers of the protective relays, and the relay settings associated 

with each breaker. Organize the curves as specified here in. Ground fault time 

current curves shall be on a separate sheet. 

6. An equipment evaluation study shall be performed to determine the adequacy of 

the fault bracing of all bus from the panelboard level up to the main Switchgear 

or protective device. Include circuit breakers, controllers, surge arresters, 

busway, switches, and fuses by tabulating and comparing the short circuit ratings 

of these devices with the available fault currents. 

7. Provide arc flash hazard analysis in accordance with the applicable NFPA, ANSI, 

and IEEE standards. 

8. The studies shall be performed, sealed and signed by a Registered Professional 

Engineer licensed in the state of Texas. 

9. Any problem areas or inadequacies in the equipment shall be promptly brought to 

the ENGINEER's attention. 

10. Use industry standard short circuit software, SKM CAPTOR and DAPPER or an 

equal approved by the ENGINEER. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 05 73.01-2





11. The report shall include a comparison of short circuit duties of each bus to the 

interrupting capacity of the equipment that is protecting that bus. 

12. The report shall include all data that was used as input to the report. This data 

shall include cable impedance, conduit type, source impedance, equipment 

ratings, motor X/R and subtransient reactance data, etc. 

13. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the Utility, Oncor Electric Delivery. 

Utility Contact: Cliff Snell (432) 620-6251 for electrical data required for the 

studies. 

14. The studies shall include and model the different operating configurations that 

may be encountered at the pump station. 

A. This Section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this 

Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this 

Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. 

Reference 

IEEE 141 

Title 

Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution for Industrial 

Plants 

IEEE 242 

NFPA 70E 

IEEE 1584 

NEC 

Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial 

and Commercial Power Systems 

Handbook for Electrical Safety in the Workplace 

IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations 


1.3 SCHEDULE 

A. THE REPORT SHALL BE PROVIDED TO THE ENGINEER NO LATER THAN 60 

DAYS BEFORE THE EQUIPMENT IS SHIPPED TO THE WORK SITE. SHIPMENT 

AND DELIVERY OF EQUIPMENT WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED AT THE JOBSITE 

UNTIL THE STUDY HAS BEEN COMPLETED, SUBMITTED AND APPROVED BY 

THE ENGINEER. 


Submittals for 26 05 73.01, “Electrical Power System Studies” shall not be combined with any 

other submittals. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, “Submittal 



1. Short Circuit and Protective Device Coordination Study. Time current curves 

shall be on 11x17 log-log type paper. The CONTRACTOR can provide time 

current curves on 8 ½ x 11 log-log type paper as a supplement but not as a 

replacement. 

2. Load Flow Study 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 05 73.01-3




3. Motor Starting Study 

a. Contractor shall coordinate with the motor manufacturer and the Soft 

Starter & VFD manufacturers for all data required to perform the motor 

starting analysis. The preliminary starting analysis shall determine the 

maximum inrush allowed when starting the motor to not drop out the 

loads under the worst operating conditions. 

4. Arc Flash Hazard Analysis 

a. Provide a color copy of project specific Arc Flash labels for each 

panelboard, switchboard, switchgear, disconnect, Motor Control Center, 

VFDs, starters, transfer switches, including all existing electrical 

equipment – switchgear, starters, motor control center, panelboards, 

starters, etc. 

b. Provide a copy of the one-line diagram color-coded to show the incident 

ranges & clothing classifications at each bus. The one-line shall be on 

11x17 paper and shall be separated out across three (3)-11x17 sheets. 

1) Provide a table indicating the color coding used for each incident 

range & clothing classification. The one-line shall also include 

the information specified in section 2.03 below. The following 

is a recommended color coding for the following Hazard/Risk 

Category numbers: 

a) Green to indicate a Category 0 

b) Blue to indicate a Category 1 

c) Brown to indicate a Category 2 

d) Yellow to indicate a Category 3 

e) Orange to indicate a Category 4 

f) Red to indicate Above a Category 4 

B. Provide six (6) bound color copies of the completed studies to be submitted to the 

ENGINEER for approval. Each hard copy of studies shall be bound in a 3-ring binder. 

C. After the report and one-line has been approved, provide a color copy in PDF format of 

the finalized 11x17 one-line diagram to the Contractor for the Contractor’s use to frame 

in the electrical room as specified in section 26 05 00, “Common Work Results for 

Electrical”. The one-line shall reflect all changes made including but not limited to 

changes made during construction 

D. The Contractor shall redo the Power System Studies if any changes are made during the 

field testing checkout and/or start-up. The Contractor shall submit the Power System 

Studies for Engineer Approval. The Studies shall include an updated copy of the color 

copy Arc Flash Labels. 

E. A CD with all SKM input files and a PDF of all output files is required for both the 

preliminary and final power system studies submittals. 

1. Two Software copies of actual power systems computer program project data 

files burned in on a CD. The CONTRACTOR shall provide an electronic copy 

on a CD-ROM of all files used to develop the electrical system model in the 

power system analysis program and all files for the written study analysis and 

summary data tables. For instance if SKM software is used for the power system 

studies, then the SKM files shall be burned in on a CD-ROM and provided to the 

OWNER/ENGINEER. This shall include any library files used for circuit 

breakers, fuses, etc. for the power system analysis. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 05 73.01-4





2.1 GENERAL 

A. Provide a short-circuit and relay coordination study load flow and motor starting study, 

and arc flash hazard analysis on the electrical power distribution system, as specified. 

The studies shall be performed in accordance with IEEE Standards 141 and 242, IEEE 

1584, ANSI, and the NEC and shall utilize the ANSI method of short circuit analysis in 

accordance with ANSI C37.010. The studies shall be performed using actual equipment 

data for all equipment. The coordination studies shall use the data from the manufacturer 

of protective devices. 


A. The studies shall be performed by the by an electrical manufacturer/consultant 

service/electrical testing agency who is regularly engaged in power system studies. A 

Licensed Professional Engineer with proficiency in electrical power engineering shall 

conduct the studies and shall seal and sign the studies. The Professional ENGINEER 

shall be licensed to practice engineering in the State of Texas. A study submitted without 

a Professional ENGINEER’s seal will not be reviewed and returned Not Approved, 

Revise & Resubmit. 

2.3 SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY 

A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for obtaining and verifying all data needed to 

perform the study. 

B. As a minimum, each short circuit study shall include the following: 

1. One-Line Diagram: 

a. Location and function of each protective device in the system, such as 

relays, direct-acting trips, fuses, etc. 

b. Type designation, current rating, range or adjustment, manufacturer's 

style and catalog number for all protective devices. 

c. Power and voltage ratings, impedance, primary and secondary 

connections of all transformers. Use the ratings (ie. Impedance, X/R, 

etc.) of the actual transformers being provided where available. 

d. Type, manufacturer, and ratio of all instrument transformers energizing 

each relay. 

e. Nameplate ratings of all motors and generators with their subtransient 

reactances. Transient reactances of synchronous motors and generators 

and synchronous reactances of all generators. Obtain data on the actual 

equipment being provided. Generic or average data numbers are not 

acceptable. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 05 73.01-5




f. Sources of short circuit currents such as utility ties, generators, 

synchronous motors, and induction motors. Provide short circuit studies 

using each source of power separately. The study shall determine if 

there is sufficient short circuit current to adequately cause interruption of 

a protective device using the weaker power source (typically local 

generation), and shall determine if the equipment can safely interrupt the 

fault if the greater power source is connected. Additional short circuit 

calculations shall include emergency as well as normal switching 

conditions as well as normal and emergency power sources described 

here in. 

1) Show short circuit calculations listing short circuit levels at each 

bus. Provide the same data in tabular from. 

g. All significant circuit elements such as transformers, cables, breakers, 

fuses, reactors, etc. shall be included. 

h. The time-current setting of existing adjustable relays and direct-acting 

trips, if applicable. 

i. One-Line showing available fault current at each bus all the way down to 

the 208Y/120V panelboards. 

2. Impedance Diagram: 

a. Available MVA or impedance from the utility company. 

b. Local generated capacity impedance. 

c. Bus impedance. 

d. Transformer and/or reactor impedances. 

e. Cable impedances. 

f. Equipment impedances. 

g. System voltages. 

h. Grounding scheme (resistance grounding, solidly grounding, or no 

grounding). 

i. Motor contribution assuming the new and existing motors as shown on 

the plans all running at the same time. 

3. Calculations: 

a. Determine the paths and situations where short circuit currents are the 

greatest. Assume bolted faults and calculate the 3-phase and line-toground 

short circuits of each case. 

b. Calculate the maximum and minimum fault currents. 

c. A discussion section evaluating the adequacy or inadequacy of the 

equipment method of calculation and formulas used such that all 

calculations can be verified manually by the ENGINEER, with 

recommendations as required for improvements to the system. 

d. Any inadequacies shall be called to the attention of the ENGINEER and 

recommendation made for improvements. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 05 73.01-6




2.4 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 

A. As a minimum, the coordination study for the power distribution system shall include the 

following on 5-cycle, log-log graph paper: 

1. The time-current coordination analysis shall be performed with aid of a digital 

computer. 

a. Time-current curves for each device shall be positioned to provide for 

maximum selectivity to minimize system disturbances during fault 

clearing, but still maintain a low incident energy level. Where selectivity 

cannot be achieved, the ENGINEER shall be notified as to the cause. 

2. Time-current curves for each device shall be positioned to provide for maximum 

selectivity to minimize system disturbances during fault clearing. Where 

selectivity cannot be achieved, the ENGINEER shall be notified as to the cause. 

3. Time-current curves and points for cable and equipment damage. 

4. Circuit interrupting device operating and interrupting times. 

5. Indicate maximum fault values on the graph. 

6. Sketch of bus and breaker arrangement. 

2.5 ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 

A. The study shall be performed in accordance with the NEC and all applicable OSHA, 

ANSI, and IEEE standards. 

B. The CONTRACTOR shall adjust all adjustable time-current devices such that the trip 

settings lower the arc flash exposure and minimizing the clearing time. However, the 

CONTRACTOR shall adjust the time-current devices to avoid nuisance tripping. 

C. The CONTRACTOR shall utilize fault current values from the short circuit analysis to 

determine the Incident energy, limited approach boundary, restricted approach boundary, 

prohibited approach boundary and appropriate PPE required. 

D. The CONTRACTOR shall provide project specific arc-flash labeling. The arc-flash 

labeling shall be placed on the outside of the cover of the switchgear, motor control 

centers, combination motor starters, panelboard, switchboard, distribution panel, and all 

electrical panels, etc. such that it can be read without opening the electrical equipment. 

Mount arc-flash labels a maximum of 6’-6” AFF, include the housekeeping pad in the 

mounting height. The CONTRACTOR shall provide arc-flash labeling on all existing 

panelboards, switchboards, distribution panel, etc. where breakers are added or work is 

performed in or on the electrical equipment. 

E. Arc Flash Labels shall be chemical resistant, UV resistant, water resistant, scratch 

resistant, and made of 3.0 mil vinyl tape as manufactured by DuraLabel, Brady or 

approved equal. The lettering shall be performed by thermal transfer print. 

1. Arc Flash labels and label lettering shall be sized large enough to be legible at a 

distance outside the hazard area. 

2. Arc Flash Labels shall be placed on the door(s) of the room if the hazard area 

reaches or extends beyond the electrical room door(s). 

3. The arc flash label shall include a DANGER header when the incident energy is 

above 40cal/cm 2 , and a WARNING header for all other incident energy levels. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 05 73.01-7




F. To ensure a safe workplace, and that the labeling meets NEC, OSHA, IEEE, and NFPA 

requirements, use specialized arc flash software to calculate protection boundaries. These 

protection boundaries shall include the Flash Protection Boundary, Limited Approach 

Boundary, Restricted Approach Boundary and the Prohibited Approach Boundary. 

G. The arc-flash analysis shall be based on calculated fault from the Short Circuit Study at 

each respective bus. The arc-flash software program shall be used to calculate the 

available arcing fault at each bus in the system, the resultant flash protection boundary 

based on the applicable protective device operating times and the associated incident 

energy that workers may be exposed to at the specified working distances. 

H. The report shall include the following information: Arc-flash evaluation table, arc-flash 

and shock hazard label definitions, arc-flash evaluation information, arc-flash and shock 

hazard labels and definitions of terms used in the arc-flash hazard analysis. 

I. Arc Flash labels shall be similar to the following example: 

2.6 LOAD FLOW STUDY 

A. SCOPE: Determine the active and reactive power, voltage, current, and power factor 

throughout the electrical system. Provide an analysis of all possible operating scenarios. 

B. PROCEDURE: The load flow study shall be performed in accordance with the 

recommended practices and procedures set forth in IEEE 399. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 05 73.01-8




C. STUDY REPORT: Results of the load flow study shall be summarized in a final report 

containing the following items: 

1. Basis, description, purpose, and scope of the study. 

2. Tabulation of data used to model the system components and a corresponding 

one-line diagram. 

3. Description of scenarios evaluated and the basis of each. 

4. Tabulation of power and current flow versus equipment ratings. The tabulation 

shall identify percentage of rated load and the scenario for which the percentage 

is based. Overloaded equipment shall be clearly noted. 

5. Tabulation of system voltage versus equipment ratings. The tabulation shall 

identify percentage of rated voltage and the scenario for which the percentage is 

based. Voltage levels outside the ranges recommended by equipment 

manufacturers, IEEE C84.1 or other appropriate standards shall be clearly noted. 

6. Tabulation of system real and reactive power losses with area of concern clearly 

noted. 

7. Provide One-line showing voltage at major busses. 

8. Conclusions and recommendations. 

2.7 MOTOR STARTING STUDY 

A. The motor starting study shall provide an evaluation of the electrical power system when 

starting the motors for all operating scenarios. The motor starting study shall evaluate all 

different possible operating scenarios under the worst case starting conditions. The 

CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the electrical equipment manufacturers and obtain 

all information required to perform the motor starting analysis. The preliminary starting 

analysis shall determine the maximum inrush allowed when starting the motors to not 

drop out the site loads under the worst operating conditions. 

B. Scope: 

1. CONTRACTOR shall provide a motor starting/load flow study for the work 

performed at the site. The study shall evaluate all possible operating scenarios. 

See electrical plans for detailed one-line diagram of the electrical distribution 

system. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the Local Utility and 

OWNER for all voltage flicker requirements and is responsible for obtaining all 

pertinent data from the Local Utility/OWNER and other equipment 

manufacturers to perform the study. 

2. CONTRACTOR shall obtain any information required for the motor starting/load 

flow study including utility available fault current, utility system impedance, 

motor data (i.e., sub transient reactance, etc.), transformer data (i.e. impedance, 

X/R, etc.), cable data, etc. 

3. The study shall be submitted to the ENGINEER and approved prior to final 

approval of the electrical equipment shop drawings and release of any electrical 

equipment for manufacturing. 

4. The study shall include as a minimum the following: 

a. Single line diagram showing voltage at all major busses. 

b. Bus Voltage and power flow 

c. Information on the computer program used for the study and also shall 

include a general discussion of the procedure, items, and data considered 

in preparing the study. 

d. Description and analysis of all results. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 05 73.01-9




e. Suggested changes to the equipment selection that will result in 

improved system performance. 

5. The study shall be performed, sealed and signed by a Registered Professional 

Engineer licensed in the state where the electric equipment is to be installed. 


May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 05 73.01-10




SECTION 26 24 16.02 

LIGHTING AND BRANCH PANELBOARDS 



Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install lighting and branch 

panelboards. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, “Common Work 

Results for Electrical”. 


A. Mini Power Station shall comply with the specifications and shall be by the following 

Manufacturers: 

1. Eaton 

2. Square D 

3. No Approved Equal 


Submittals for 26 24 16.02, “Lighting and Branch Panelboards” shall not be combined with any 




1. Bill of Material 

2. Front Elevation with dimensions 

3. Assembly ratings including short circuit ratings, continuous current and voltage 

4. Cable terminal sizes 

5. Cut sheet on circuit breakers and surge protective devices 

1.4 STANDARDS 

Circuit breakers, molded case, and branch circuit shall be in accordance with the applicable 

provisions of the following standards as if written here in their entirety: 

A. Fed. Spec. W-C-375 

B. NEMA AB1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and their application. 

C. NEMA PB1 Panelboards 


A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s 

instructions. Equipment shall be protected from damage. 

1.6 WARRANTY 

A. The manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects. 

May 18, 2012 

Lighting and Branch Panelboards 

Revision 0 26 24 16.02 - 1





A. Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 or later certified. 

B. Manufacturer shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of 

five (5) years. When requested by the engineer, an acceptable list of installations with 

similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. 


2.1 PANELBOARDS 

A. Panelboards shall consist of a box, front, interior and circuit protective devices and shall 

be manufactured in accordance with NEMA PB1 and bearing the applicable U.L. labels. 

B. Panelboards shall be suitable for unistrut mounting. 

C. Panelboards shall contain sequence style busing and full capacity neutral, composed of an 

assembly of bolt-on, molded case, automatic breakers with thermal and an instantaneous, 

magnetic trip in each pole and a trip-free position separate from either the "On" and the 

"Off" positions. Two (2) and three (3) pole circuit breakers shall simultaneously open all 

poles. Circuit breakers, molded case and branch circuits shall be in accordance with Fed. 

Spec. W-C-375. 

D. The voltage rating, phase, number of wires and ampere rating shall be as indicated and 

scheduled on the plans. 

E. The panelboard box shall be fabricated of code gauge, galvanized sheet steel in 

accordance with U.L. standards and have turned edges around the front for rigidity and 

frontal clamping. Provide standard knockouts on the panel enclosures. 

F. The panelboard front shall be fabricated of sheet steel and finished with a baked on gray 

enamel over a rust inhibitor. Each front shall have a door mounted on semi-concealed 

hinges with a cylinder lock, an index card and a card holder. Panelboard locks shall be 

master keyed, with two (2) keys furnished for each panel board. Index cards shall be 

properly typewritten. 

G. The interior of the panelboard shall consist of a factory-assembled, rigid frame 

supporting the rectangular bus, the mains and the neutral bar. 

H. All busings shall be tin-plated copper and arranged for sequential phasing throughout. 

The bus bar shall be sized so that the temperature rise is limited in accordance with 

NEMA standards. The insulated neutral bar shall be located at the opposite end of the 

structure from the mains. 

I. Panelboards shall have either solderless lugs or a main circuit protective device as 

scheduled. Each enclosure shall have grounding lugs and uninsulated equipment 

grounding terminals. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 24 16.02 - 2




2.2 MINI POWER STATION 

A. Mini power station shall be in a NEMA 3R, 316 stainless steel enclosure. Mini power 

station shall include: 

1. a 10KVA, 480V-120/240V step-down transformer. Transformer shall have 

copper windings. 

2. A 120/240V, single phase panelboard with a main circuit breaker and feeder 

breakers. Circuit breakers shall be of bolt-on type. Refer to plans for additional 

information. 

B. Mini power station panel shall have an interrupting capacity of not less than 18,000 

Amps, RMS symmetrical. 

C. Mini power station shall be as manufactured by Square D Catalog model no. 

MPZB10S40FSS or by Eaton Catalog model no. P48G11S10SS, no equal. 

2.3 CIRCUIT BREAKERS 

A. Panelboards shall be equipped with circuit breakers. 

B. Circuit breakers shall be molded case, bolt in type. Series rating of breakers is not 

acceptable. 

C. Single pole circuit breakers serving fluorescent lighting loads shall have the SWD 

marking. Circuit breakers serving air conditioning branch loads shall be U.L. listed as 

type HACR. 

D. Each circuit breaker used in 208Y/120 Volt and 120/240V Panelboards shall have an 

interrupting capacity of not less than 18,000 Amps, RMS symmetrical. Each circuit 

breaker used in 480V Panelboards shall have an interrupting capacity of not less than 

65,000 Amps, RMS symmetrical. 

E. Circuit breakers shall be manufactured by the panelboard manufacturer. 

F. The panelboard and circuit breaker interrupting capacities and rating shall be equal to or 

greater than the fault currents available to each panelboard. Series rating of breakers 

shall not be permitted. 

G. Circuit breakers installed in existing equipment shall match make and manufacturer of 

existing equipment where being installed. 

2.4 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 

A. For Electrical Equipment Rack 

1. Surge Protection Device Description: IEEE C62.41-compliant, externally 

mounted, wired-in, solid-state, parallel-connected, modular (with fieldreplaceable 

modules) type, with sine-wave tracking suppression and filtering 

modules, UL 1449, third edition Type 2, short-circuit current rating matching or 

exceeding the panelboard short-circuit rating, and with the following features and 

accessories: 

a. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 24 16.02 - 3




b. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. 

c. Redundant suppression circuits. 

d. Redundant replaceable modules. 

e. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and 

ground bus. 

f. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 

g. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has 

failed. 

h. Four-digit, transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges. 

i. Integral disconnect. 

2. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 120kA per mode. 

3. Withstand Capabilities: 12,000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 kA), 8-by-20- 

mic.sec. surges with less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage. 

4. Protection modes and UL 1449 3rd edition VPR for 240/120-V, three-phase, 

four-wire circuits with high leg shall be as follows: 

a. Line to Neutral: 800 V, 1200 V from high leg. 

b. Line to Ground: 800 V. 

c. Neutral to Ground: 800 V. 

5. Protection modes and UL 1449 3rd edition VPR for 480V, three-phase, threewire 

circuits shall be as follows: 

a. Line to Line: 1800 V for 480 V. 

b. Line to Ground: 1800 V for 480 V. 

B. For Mini Power Station Panel 

1. Surge Protection Device Description: IEEE C62.41-compliant, externally 

mounted, wired-in, solid-state, parallel-connected, modular (with fieldreplaceable 

modules) type, with sine-wave tracking suppression and filtering 

modules, UL 1449, third edition Type 2, short-circuit current rating matching or 

exceeding the panelboard short-circuit rating, and with the following features and 

accessories: 

a. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity. 

b. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. 

c. Redundant suppression circuits. 

d. Redundant replaceable modules. 

e. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and 

ground bus. 

f. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 

g. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has 

failed. 

h. Four-digit, transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges. 

2. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 100kA per mode. 

3. Withstand Capabilities: 12,000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 kA), 8-by-20- 

mic.sec. surges with less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage. 

4. Protection modes and UL 1449 3rd edition VPR for 240/120V, single-phase, 

two-wire circuits with high leg shall be as follows: 

a. Line to Line: 600 V 

b. Line to Ground: 600 V 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 24 16.02 - 4






A. Install the panelboard in accordance with applicable codes at each location indicated on 

the plans. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in the panelboard. All labeling shall be 

in accordance to Section 26 05 00, “Common Work Results for Electrical”. 


May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 24 16.02 - 5






WIRING DEVICES 



A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install wiring devices. 




A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through 

one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring 

devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source. 

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in 

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, 

and marked for intended use. 

C. Comply with NFPA 70. 

D. Products shall comply with the specifications and shall be by the following 


1. Hubbell 

2. Leviton 

3. Pass & Seymour 




1. Shop Drawings for Wiring Devices: Cut sheets of all devices indicating model 

being provided, NEMA configuration, rating, color, etc. 

1.4 STANDARDS 

A. The applicable provisions of the following standard shall apply as if written here in its 

entirety: 

NEMA WD-1 General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices 

NEMA WD-6 

UL 943 

NFPA 70 

Wiring Devices – Dimensional Requirements 

Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters 


May 18, 2012 

Wiring Devices 

Revision 0 26 27 26-1






A. WALL SWITCHES: For general use, totally enclosed industrial type, specification 

grade, rated for 120/277 VAC and 20 amps. Approved wire connection to switches shall 

consist of inserting wire into back wiring hole and tightening terminal screw until wire is 

tightly griped by clamping mechanism inside switch body. Side wiring shall not be 

allowed. Switches installed in hazardous areas shall be explosion proof type in 

accordance with the NEC. 

B. MOTOR RATED SWITCHES: HP rated switches approved for motor control or 

disconnect service when controlling or disconnecting motor loads in excess of 1/4 HP; 20 

amp switches for loads exceeding 10 amps. 

C. WEATHERPROOF SWITCHES: Fitted with a single switch as specified, and 

weatherproof cover with spring door cover; gray in color for all areas. 

D. RECEPTACLES: For general use shall be U.L. approved, hospital grade heavy duty 

duplex grounding type 20 ampere 125 volt heavy duty phosphor bronze contacts. 

Terminal screws shall be large head, deep slotted #8-32 brass, backed out, color coded 

for polarity identification, and shall accept up to 10 AWG wire. Side wiring shall not be 

allowed. 

1. GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTING, INDOOR: GFCI receptacle 

shall include visible indication of ground fault condition. Feed-through feature 

shall not be used. Install GFCI device at each location indicated. GFCI circuit 

breaker shall not be permitted. 

2. ISOLATED-GROUND RECEPTACLES: Isolated-ground receptacles shall be 

listed and labeled as isolated-ground type. Receptacle body shall be orange in 

color. Isolation-ground shall be integral to the receptacle construction and not 

dependent on removable parts. 

3. WEATHER RESISTANT RECEPTACLES: Weather resistant receptacles shall 

be listed as weather resistant type in accordance with the National Electrical 

Code. 

4. WEATHERPROOF RECEPTACLES: 

a. Weatherproof receptacles shall be hospital grade, 20 ampere, 125 volt 

and shall be listed as weather resistant type in accordance with the 

National Electrical Code and shall include a weatherproof device cover. 

1) Weatherproof Duplex Receptacle: Provide GFCI duplex 

receptacle with weatherproof cover. 

2) Weatherproof Single Receptacle: Provide a cast box fitted with 

a single receptacle and threaded cap with a weatherproof cover. 

b. Weatherproof device covers shall have a NEMA 3R rating while 

receptacle is in use rating with die cast metal construction as 

manufactured by Taymac Corporation, Tempe, Arizona or Thomas & 

Betts 

E. SWITCH AND RECEPTACLE COVER PLATES: The cover plate color shall be gray 

for all areas, unless otherwise indicated or required by the NEC. Screw heads shall have 

color to match plate, 302/304 stainless steel. Provide telephone cover plates which are 

the same as above, except with a single bushed pole for the telephone cable. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 27 26-2






A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless 

otherwise noted. 

B. Coordination with Other Trades: 

1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall 

finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers 

that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes. 

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, 

concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway 

system, conductors, and cables. 

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross 

a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. 

C. Conductors: 

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or 

terminated on devices. 

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the 

purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded 

wire. 

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of 

NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. 

D. Install receptacles and switches only in electrical boxes which are clean, free from excess 

building materials, dirt and debris. 

E. Install switches, wall-mounted duplex receptacles and telephone outlets at the heights 

specified in Section 26 05 33.03, “Outlet Boxes”, unless indicated otherwise on the plans. 

F. Switches installed at one (1) location shall be ganged together under one (1) cover plate. 


A. Test wiring devices to insure electrical continuity of grounding. Energize the circuit to 

demonstrate compliance with the requirements. 

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 108 to 132 V. 

2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not 

acceptable. 

3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 

4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 

5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 27 26-3




6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at 

the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective 

devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning 

units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above. 


May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 27 26-4





ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 



A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install disconnects. 




Disconnects shall comply with the specifications and shall be by the following Manufacturers: 

A. Eaton 

B. General Electric 

C. Square D 


Submittals for 26 28 16, “Enclosed Switches & Circuit Breakers” shall not be combined with 

any other submittals. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, “Submittal 



1. Bill of Material 

2. Equipment data sheets showing weights, dimensions, etc. for each type of 

disconnect and size being provided. 

1.4 STANDARDS 

The applicable provisions shall apply as if written here in their entirety: 

A. ANSI/UL - 198E 

B. NEMA RS1 

C. Fed. Spec. FS-WS-865 



A. DISCONNECT SWITCHES: Class "R" or non-fusible; of the required ampere rating, or 

as indicated on the plans; heavy duty, quick-make, quick-break, 3-phase, 3-pole switches, 

unless otherwise indicated. 

May 18, 2012 

Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 

Revision 0 26 28 16-1




B. ENCLOSURES: NEMA 4X, 304 stainless steel for all locations. Furnish enclosures 

with interlocking covers with maintenance defeat feature and external front-operated 

flange-mounted switch levers. Disconnects shall have provisions for the use of three (3) 

safety padlocks in the "Off" position. Furnish horsepower rated switches for motor 

circuits. The fuse interrupting rating shall be 65,000 rms amperes. 



A. Install disconnect switches as required by the National Electrical Code. Install fuses in 

fusible disconnect switches. 


May 18, 2012 

Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 

Revision 0 26 28 16-2





ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 



A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals to install combination motor starters. 


for Electrical”. Section includes the following enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less. 


Enclosed Controllers shall comply with the specifications and shall be by the following 


A. Allen Bradley 

B. Eaton 

C. General Electric 

D. Square D 


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in and 

marked for intended location and application. 


C. Coordinate with equipment suppliers for actual motor data – HP, voltage, amps, etc, to 

properly size controller (starter) and overloads. 


Submittals for 26 29 13, “Enclosed Controllers” shall not be combined with any other submittals. 


include: 

A. Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller. 

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, details, and required 

clearances and service spaces around controller enclosures. 

2. Catalog cut sheets of major components. Include manufacturer's technical data on 

features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and enclosure types and 

finishes. Data sheets shall clearly identify the make and model number of the 

equipment being provided. 

3. Drawings shall show the following: 

a. Each installed unit's type and details. 

May 18, 2012 

Enclosed Controllers 

Revision 0 26 29 13 - 1




b. Factory-installed devices. 

c. Nameplate legends. 

d. Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit. 

e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual 

overcurrent protective devices in combination controllers. 

f. Project specific wiring diagrams/control schematics: For power, signal, 

and control wiring. Labels on the control schematic for control relays, 

timing relays, level instruments, indication lights, etc. shall correspond to 

equipment tag/labels indicated on the Pump Control Panel Control 

Schematic included in the plans. Include a label above each timing relays 

indicating the range and set points for that timing relay. 

g. Project specific layout of front of controller clearly identifying the 

location of all panel mounted devices, and clearly indicating the 

maximum mounting height of devices on doors. 

h. Terminal strip layout clearly showing all field connections. The terminal 

strip layout shall also include a label next to each connection indicating 

signal description. 

i. Conduit entry and exit locations. Conduit entry and exit points clearly 

showing dimensions of entry and exit points. Provide a detailed view 

showing how conduit penetrate the bottom/side of panel. 

j. Installation weights. 

k. Cable terminal sizes. 

l. Internal component layout diagrams showing the front view of inside the 

panel (with the doors off) clearly identifying all devices and power 

equipment. 

4. Complete bill of materials with model numbers listed for individual components. 

5. Data sheets of miscellaneous electrical equipment clearly identifying make and 

model being provided. 

6. Warranty Information. 

7. Spare Parts List. 

8. Any deviations from the specifications should be slearly identified on a separate 

sheet of paper in the shop drawing submittal. 

1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: 

A. Operation and maintenance manuals shall contain the shop drawings, submittals, spare 

parts lists, schematics, and maintenance procedures. 

B. Manuals shall also incorporate appropriate final certified shop drawings. Manuals may 

be manufacturer's standard instructions, but shall be supplemented as necessary to cover 

any special feature not included in standard material. 

C. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming reducedvoltage 

solid-state controllers. 

D. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed, 

and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load 

currents. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 29 13 - 2




E. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors 

have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor running 

overload protection suit actual motors to be protected. 


A. Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to 

prevent condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, 

corrosive substances, and physical damage. 

B. If stored in areas subject to weather, cover enclosed controllers to protect them from 

weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing 

and flammable materials from inside controllers. 

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS 

A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the 

following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not 

exceeding 122 deg F (50 deg C). 

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 3300 feet. 

B. HORSEPOWER RATING: 

1. The 175HP (222 FLA) motor size indicated on the Plans is the maximum size 

horsepower expected at all the sites. The Contractor shall furnish properly sized 

motor control equipment suitable for use with the maximum expected motor 

horsepower. Field verify exact motor horsepower for each site and properly size 

overloads and MCP accordingly. If actual motor horsepowers differ from the 

Plans, the Contractor shall obtain assistance from the Engineer in determining 

whether or not hardware and wiring changes are necessary. The Contractor shall 

provide all components and wire of the proper size. 

C. OPERATING VOLTAGE: The equipment shall be designed and arranged for operation 

on 480 Volt, 3 phase, 60 Hertz or 120V, 60 Hertz. See plans for more details. 

D. CONTROL POWER: Control power shall be 120 VAC from a control transformer 

located in each combination starter. Extra control transformer VA capacity shall be 

furnished for powering the motor space heater in the motor which the combination starter 

serves. This extra VA capacity shall be in addition to the VA required for the other 

control components powered by the control transformer. The following is the amount of 

extra VA capacity which shall be furnished: 

COMBINATION 

CONTROL TRANSFORMER 

NEMA SIZE 

EXTRA VA CAPACITY 

size 1 100 

size 2 200 

size 3 300 

size 4 500 

size 5 750 

size 6 1000 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 29 13 - 3




This extra VA capacity shall be furnished in each combination starter regardless of where the 

motor space heater received its power and regardless of whether the motor has a space heater 

or not. 

E. INTERRUPTING RATING: Both circuit breakers and combination starters as complete 

units shall be rated for 65,000 Amps Interrupting Capacity (AIC). 

F. ENCLOSURES: NEMA 4X, 304 stainless steel for all locations. 


A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction 

including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required 

workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. 

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast 

anchor-bolt inserts into bases. 

C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. 

1.9 SPARE PARTS 

A. Furnish spare parts that match products installed and that are packaged with protective 

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 

1. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and 

type, but no fewer than two of each size and type. 

2. Indicating Lights: One of each type and color installed. 

3. Five spare relays and timers of each type used. 


2.1 COMBINATION STARTER 

A. The combination starter shall include a motor circuit protector (MCP) type circuit breaker 

or a thermal magnetic type circuit breaker as indicated on the Plans. MCP's shall be 

magnetic trip only with adjustable magnetic trip limited to 1300% of motor nameplate 

full load current to comply with NEC requirements. Devices shown on the schematic and 

not specifically designated as being elsewhere shall be installed inside the combination 

starter. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 29 13 - 4




B. Combination starter doors shall be interlocked mechanically with the circuit breaker 

operator mechanism to prevent unintentional opening of the door while the circuit 

breaker is in the closed position. The circuit breaker operator mechanism shall be 

mounted on the stationary part of the enclosure and not on the door of the enclosure. The 

circuit breaker operator mechanism shall indicate "ON" and "OFF" with the door open or 

closed. The circuit breaker shall be manually operated, resettable after trip from the 

operator mechanism handle. The operating handle shall clearly indicate whether the 

circuit breaker is "ON" or "OFF", or "TRIPPED". Means shall be provided to lock each 

operator mechanism handle in the "OFF" position and to close the door. Means shall be 

provided for releasing the interlock for intentional access to the interior at any time and 

intentional application of power, if desired, while door is open. Padlocking arrangements 

shall permit locking the disconnect device "OFF" with at least three padlocks with door 

closed or open. 

C. The combination starter shall have a magnetic starter contactor. The magnetic starter 

contactor shall be NEMA rated and NEMA 1 magnetic starter contactors shall be the 

minimum size allowed. Magnetic starter contactors shall have renewable contacts and a 

renewable coil which shall allow each to be replaced without replacing other parts of the 

magnetic starter contactor. Magnetic starter contactors shall have a maximum pick up 

voltage of 71% of nominal coil voltage and a maximum drop out voltage of 59% of 

nominal coil voltage. 

D. Each magnetic starter shall have three (3) external manual reset thermal overload relays 

of either the bimetallic type or the melting alloy type. Overload relays shall be either 

ambient compensated or ambient insensitive. Overload relay heaters shall be Class 10 for 

submersible pump motors and hermetically sealed motors and shall be Class 20 for all 

other motors. Overload relay heaters shall be selected to produce an overload trip at no 

more than the following percent of the motor nameplate full load current rating: 

Motors with a marked service factor not 

less than 1.15 125% 

Motors with a marked temperature rise of 

not over 40°C 125% 

All other motors 115% 

E. Overload relays shall be reset from outside the enclosure with an insulated bar or button. 

Auxiliary contacts shall be furnished on the circuit breaker operating mechanism, the 

starter contactor and on the overload sensing unit as shown on the plans. 

F. Controls and lights shall be heavy duty oil tight construction. Devices installed in the 

combination starter or on the door of the combination starter shall be completely factory 

wired with connections to external devices brought to a terminal strip installed in the 

starter. No field wiring shall be permitted except for connections to remote devices from 

the terminal strip. A physical wiring diagram shall be provided on each enclosure door 

and shall be protected to remain intact and legible for the service life of the equipment. 

Control devices shall be identified as to type and manufacturer. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 29 13 - 5




G. Control relays, timing relays, control transformers, control circuit fuse blocks, etc., shall 

be grouped in the corresponding combination starter with control wiring kept as short as 

possible. Ample space shall be allowed between devices so that each component is 

completely accessible without removing any other device. 

H. Wiring in the combination starter shall terminate on numbered terminal strips or power 

distribution blocks. No other wire connecting devices, including but not limited to 

wirenuts and split bolts, shall be allowed in the combination starter. Each combination 

starter shall be provided with an individual terminal strip for control wiring. Terminal 

strip metallic materials shall be tinned copper. Power distribution blocks shall be tinned 

copper which is rated for termination of copper conductors. 

I. Combination starter control wiring shall be 14AWG. Power wiring shall have black 

insulation and control wiring shall have purple insulation for ungrounded conductors and 

white insulation for grounded conductors. Combination starter wiring shall have copper 

conductors with MTW insulation only. 

J. Where control transformers are indicated and unless shown otherwise, each starter shall 

contain a 480 to 120 volt fused control transformer with sufficient capacity for all the 

devices shown in the schematic. The control transformer shall have two (2) primary 

fuses, one in each primary lead and one secondary fuse in one of the secondary leads. 

The unfused secondary lead shall be grounded. 

K. Each combination starter shall have an engraved plastic nameplate fastened to the outside 

of the unit door. Engraved plastic nameplates shall have .33" high white letters on a 

black background and attached with stainless steel screws. Wiring diagrams shall be 

provided on the inside of each compartment door and shall be protected so that they 

remain attached and legible for the service life of the equipment. 

L. If any circuit breaker operating handle is more than 6'6" above the floor surface 

immediately in front of the combination starter, a supplementary operating device shall 

be attached to the operating handle. This supplementary device shall require a person to 

reach no more than 6'6" above the floor surface at any point of opening or closing the 

circuit breaker 

2.2 FULL-VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS 

A. General Requirements for Full-Voltage Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general 

purpose, Class A. 

B. Magnetic Controllers: Full voltage, across the line, electrically held. 

1. Configuration: Nonreversing. 

2. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type with coil transient suppressors. 

3. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltage rating, 

manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage. 

4. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break, silver-cadmium oxide; 

assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load 

wiring. 

5. Control Circuits: 120V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and 

secondary fuses of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely 

located pilot, indicating, and control devices. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 29 13 - 6




6. CPT Spare Capacity: 100 VA minimum. 

7. Bimetallic Overload Relays: 

a. Inverse-time-current characteristic. 

b. Class 20 tripping characteristic. 

c. Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual 

protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. 

d. Ambient compensated. 

e. Automatic resetting. 

8. Solid-State Overload Relay: 

a. Switch or dial selectable for motor running overload protection. 

b. Sensors in each phase. 

c. Class 10/20 selectable tripping characteristic selected to protect motor 

against voltage and current unbalance and single phasing. 

d. Class II ground-fault protection, with start and run delays to prevent 

nuisance trip on starting. 

e. Analog communication module. 

f. External overload reset push button. 

C. Combination Magnetic Controller: Factory-assembled combination of magnetic 

controller, overcurrent protective device, and disconnecting means. 

1. MCP Disconnecting Means: 

a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to 

comply with available fault currents, instantaneous-only circuit breaker 

with front-mounted, field-adjustable, short-circuit trip coordinated with 

motor locked-rotor amperes. 

b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in 

closed position. 

c. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCP handle. 

d. Current-limiting module to increase controller short-circuit current 

(withstand) rating to 65 kA. 

2.3 ACCESSORIES 

A. General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory 

installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated. 

B. IEC or dual rated NEMA/IEC equipment shall not be acceptable. 

C. CONTROL RELAYS: Industrial type; contacts rated for 10 amps at 600 VAC; Square D 

Class 8501 Type X, Allen-Bradley Bulletin 700 type PK, or approved equal. Relays shall 

have the capability of having contact decks added in the field. Contacts shall be field 

convertible to normally open or normally closed. Coils and contacts shall each be 

replaceable without replacing any other part of the relay. Where control relays are 

indicated on the Plans, industrial control relays shall be furnished whether the relay coil 

is operated with 120 VAC or 24 VDC. 

D. ELAPSED TIME METER: Yokogawa Type 240, or approved equal. The meter shall be 

of the non-reset type for totalizing of hours and operating on 120 or 240 VAC, 60 Hertz. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 29 13 - 7




E. INDICATING LIGHTS, SWITCHES AND PUSHBUTTONS: Heavy duty and oil tight, 

Square D Class 9001 (30.5 mm) or approved equal. Devices shall match or exceed the 

rating of the enclosure. Indicating lights shall be push-to-test (LED type) and shall be 

Square D SKT or approved equal. 

F. CONTROL TRANSFORMER: Included in combination starter units with sufficient VA 

capacity for powering the devices shown in the control schematic; 480 to 120 volt 

transformer with a fuse in each primary leg and one (1) fuse in the secondary leg. The 

unfused secondary leg shall be grounded. 

G. PHASE FAILURE RELAY: Phase failure relay shall be a 480VAC, 3-phase and be able 

to detect phase loss, low voltage and phase reversal with an automatic reset and output 

contacts. The phase failure relay shall be as manufactured by Time Mark model 258 or 


H. Space heaters, with N.C. auxiliary contacts, to mitigate condensation in Type 4X 

enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and 

temperature swings. Space heaters shall be thermostatically controlled and be power 

from internal power inside the enclosure. 



A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers, with Installer present, for 

compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 

B. Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are 

wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Make electrical connections to equipment specified. Install equipment in accordance 

with the Manufacturer's recommendations and the plans. If neither are available, install 

the equipment using the best practices of the electrical industry and trade. 

B. Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniform 

height unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight 

structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding 

racks complying with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical 

Systems." 

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets 

and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. 

D. Install heaters in thermal overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate fullload 

amperes after motors have been installed. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 29 13 - 8




E. Comply with NECA 1. 

3.3 IDENTIFICATION 

A. Identify enclosed controllers, components, and control wiring in accordance with Section 

26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems”. 

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; 

provide warning signs. 

2. Label each enclosure with engraved nameplate. 

3. Externally visible, permanent nameplates shall be provided to identify each 

switch, indicating light, etc. Equipment and terminal blocks shall be suitably 

identified. This shall include items on the back side of doors and panel mounted 

items. Nameplates shall be black with white lettering and attached with stainless 

steel screws. 

3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION 

A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers and remote devices. 

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures. 

C. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where 

applicable. 

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control 

devices that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position. 

2. Connect selector switches with enclosed-controller circuit in both manual and 

automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and highpressure 

cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors. 


A. Upon completion of the installation, perform continuity tests and functional checkout to 

assure the proper operation of all equipment. 

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting 

supply, feeder, and control circuit. 

2. Test continuity of each circuit. 

C. Tests and Inspections: 

1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. 

Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment. 

2. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed-controller element, component, 

connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits. 

3. Test continuity of each circuit. 

4. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus or minus 10 percent of 

motor nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify 

Contractor/Owner before starting the motor(s). 

5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 29 13 - 9




6. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in 

NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test 

parameters. 

7. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate 

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 

D. Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 

E. Prepare test and inspection reports including a certified report that identifies enclosed 

controllers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, 

remedial action taken and observations after remedial action. 

3.6 ADJUSTING 

A. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overloadrelay 

pickup and trip ranges. 

B. Adjust overload-relay heaters or settings if power factor correction capacitors are 

connected to the load side of the overload relays. 

C. Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable 

instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load 

ampere ratings and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool down 

between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until 

motors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 

11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum 

settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Owner/Contractor before increasing 

settings. 

D. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges. 

3.7 PROTECTION 

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to 

manufacturer's written instructions until enclosed controllers are ready to be energized 

and placed into service. 

B. Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to 



May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 26 29 13 - 10

Division 31






CLEARING AND GRUBBING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Clearing and/or grubbing, including the disposal of materials, for all areas within 

the limits designated on the plans or as required by the Engineer. 



2. Section 31 23 33 - Trenching, Backfilling, and Compaction 


A. Ensure that only those trees, shrubs, and debris that are within the designated 

construction limits are removed. 

B. Do not allow equipment outside of designated construction areas. 


2.1 EQUIPMENT 

A. Provide equipment in sufficient size and quantity to perform Work in safe and efficient 

manner. 

B. Maintain site in workmanlike order as work progresses. 

C. Maintain safety precautions necessary for safe operation of equipment. 


3.1 CLEARING 

A. Definition: 

1. The cutting and removal of all trees, stumps, brush, logs, and hedges. 

2. The removal of fences and other loose or projecting material from the designated 

areas. 

3. The grubbing of stumps and roots will not be required. 

B. Classification of Trees: 

May 18, 2012 

Clearing and Grubbing 

Revision 0 31 11 00 - 1




3.2 GRUBBING 

1. Clearing, when so designated, shall consist of the cutting and removal of groups 

of trees as shown on the Drawings within the limits of clear areas. 

2. The cutting of all the trees of this classification shall be in accordance with the 

requirements for the particular area being cleared, or as directed by the Engineer. 

A. Definition: 

1. Clearing the surface of the ground of designated areas of all trees, stumps, 

downed timber, logs, snags, brush, undergrowth, hedges, heavy growth of grass 

or weeds, fences, structures, debris, and rubbish of any nature. 

2. Clearing the surface of other natural obstructions or material that, in the opinion 

of the Engineer, is unsuitable for the foundation of footings, pavements or other 

required structures, including: 

a. Grubbing of stumps, roots, matted roots and foundations. 

b. The disposal from the Project of all spoil materials resulting from 

clearing and grubbing by burning or otherwise. 

3.3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS 

A. General: 

1. The areas denoted on the Drawings to be cleared and/or grubbed under this item 

shall be staked on the ground by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. 

2. The clearing and grubbing shall be done at a satisfactory distance in advance of 

the grading operations. 

B. All spoil materials removed by clearing and/or grubbing shall be disposed of by removal 

to approved disposal areas. 

C. Waste Concrete and Masonry: 

1. As far as is practicable, waste concrete and masonry shall be placed on slopes of 

embankments or channels. 

2. When embankments are constructed of such material, this material shall be 

placed in accordance with requirements for formation of embankments. 

3. Any broken concrete or masonry that cannot be used in construction, and all 

other materials not considered suitable for use elsewhere, shall be disposed of by 

the Contractor. 

4. In no case shall any discarded materials be left in windows or piles adjacent to or 

within the Project limits. 

5. The manner and location of disposal of materials shall be subject to the approval 

of the Engineer and shall not create an unsightly or objectionable view. 

6. When the Contractor is required to locate a disposal area outside the property 

limits at his own expense, he shall obtain and file with the Engineer permission 

in writing from the property owner for the use of private property for this 

purpose. 

D. If the Drawings or the Specifications require the saving of merchantable timber, the 

Contractor shall trim the limbs and tops from designated trees, saw them into suitable 

lengths and make them available for removal by other agencies. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 31 11 00 - 2




E. Any necessary blasting shall be done at the Contractor's responsibility, and the utmost 

care shall be taken not to endanger life or property. 

F. Existing Structures: 

1. The removal of existing structures and utilities required to permit orderly 

progress of work shall be coordinated by the Contractor and accomplished in 

conjunction with the local agencies affected unless otherwise shown on the 

Drawings. 

2. Whenever a telephone or telegraph pole, pipeline, conduit, sewer, roadway, or 

other utility is encountered and must be removed or relocated, the Contractor 

shall advise the Engineer, who will notify the proper local authority or owner and 

attempt to secure prompt action. 

G. The Contractor shall clear the staked or indicated area of all objectionable materials. 

H. Protection and Clearing of Trees: 

1. Trees unavoidably falling outside the specified limits must be cut up, removed, 

and disposed of in a satisfactory manner. 

2. In order to minimize damage to trees that are to be left standing, they shall be 

felled toward the center of area being cleared. 

3. The Contractor shall preserve and protect from injury all trees not to be removed. 

4. The trees, stumps and brush shall be cut to a height of not more than 6 inches 

above the ground. 

5. When isolated trees are designated for clearing, they shall be classed in 

accordance with the butt diameter size as measured at a point 18 inches above the 

ground level or at a designated height specified in the proposal. 

I. Fences: 

1. Fences shall be removed and disposed of when directed by the Engineer. 

2. Fence wire: 

a. Fence wire shall be neatly rolled. 

b. Wire and posts stored on the project if they are to be used again. 

c. Stored at a designated location if the fence is to remain the property of a 

local owner or of a civic authority. 

J. Structural Fill Areas: 

1. In areas designated as structural fill areas, all stumps, roots, buried logs, brush, 

grass and all unsatisfactory materials shall be removed. 

2. Roots and other projections over 1½ inches in diameter shall be grubbed out to a 

depth of at least 8 inches below the existing grade or slope elevation. 

K. Miscellaneous Structures: 

1. Any buildings and miscellaneous structures that are shown on the Drawings to be 

removed shall be demolished or removed. 

2. All materials therefrom shall be disposed of by removal from the site. 

3. Reuse of Materials: 

a. Any broken concrete, blocks, or other objectionable material that cannot 

be used in backfill shall be removed and disposed of. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 31 11 00 - 3




b. The holes shall be backfilled with acceptable material and properly 

compacted. 

L. Treatment of Remaining Holes: 

1. All holes remaining after the grubbing operation in structural fill and 

embankment areas shall: 

a. Have the sides broken down to flatten out the slopes. 

b. Be filled with acceptable material, moistened, and properly compacted in 

layers to the density required in Section 31 23 16. 

2. The same construction procedure shall be applied to all holes remaining after 

grubbing in excavation areas where the depth of holes exceeds the depth of the 

proposed excavation. 


May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 31 11 00 - 4





SUBGRADE PREPARATION 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Preparing the completed subgrade under all areas of construction prior to 

placement of Engineer's select fill, base course, or concrete to the grade and 

dimensions indicated on the Drawings. 



2. Section 31 23 33 - Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting 

3. Section 32 11 23 - Crushed Aggregate Base Course 


A. American Society for Testing and Materials: 

1. ASTM D698: Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard 

Effort. 

2. ASTM D1556: Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method. 

3. ASTM D2216: Laboratory Determination of Moisture Content of Soil. 

4. ASTM D2922: Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods 

(Shallow Depth). 

5. ASTM D3017: Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear 

Methods (Shallow Depth). 


A. Contractor shall provide material testing for quality control during subgrade preparation. 

B. Test Frequencies: 

1. One modified proctor for each material encountered or mixed material created. 

2. One field-density and moisture-content test for every 1,250 square feet of area 

prepared. 

3. One field-density and moisture-content test under all isolated slabs less than 200 

square feet in area. 

4. At locations designated by the Engineer. 

May 18, 2012 

Subgrade Preparation 

Revision 0 31 23 13 - 1





2.1 SUITABLE MATERIALS 

A. Suitable materials shall consist of materials obtained on- or off-site and approved by the 

Engineer for the purpose of subgrade preparation. 

B. Remove all grass and other vegetation prior to preparing to a depth of 6 inches prior to 

preparing subgrade. 

C. Any underlying soft or otherwise unsuitable material shall be removed and replaced with 

suitable material. 

2.2 WASTE 

A. Disposal of excavated materials shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 



A. Excavations and embankments for site grading shall be finished to the shapes, 

dimensions, and elevations shown on the Drawings. 

B. Perform clearing operations prior to beginning excavation, grading, and embankment 

operations. 

C. Scarify, water, and compact subgrade to not less than 95% of standard Proctor density 

(ASTM D-698) at optimum moisture content ±3%, to a depth of 6 inches minimum. 

D. If construction occurs over an existing drilling mud pit, over-excavate one foot below 

bottom of pit. Replace and compact using suitable native backfill materials (not drilling 

mud). 

3.2 GRADING 

A. Provide uniform slopes and rounded changes in slope, free of low spots. 

B. Drainage: 

1. Provide and maintain positive surface water drainage around and away from 

open excavations. 

2. Keep opened excavations dry. 

3. Remove free water in excavation promptly. 


May 18, 2012 

Subgrade Preparation 

Revision 0 31 23 13 - 2





TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTION 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Trenching, backfilling, and compacting for buried pipes. 

2. Bedding of buried pipes. 



2. Section 33 23 13 - Subgrade Preparation 

3. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete 


A. American Society for Testing and Materials: 

1. ASTM D698: Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard 

Effort. 

2. ASTM D2321: Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and 

Other Gravity-Flow Applications 

3. ATSM D2774: Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pressure Piping. 

B. ANSI C150/AWWA A21.50. 

C. ANSI C151/AWWA A21.51. 


A. Testing laboratory results on bedding materials to demonstrate compliance with 

Specifications. 


A. All trenching is unclassified. 

B. Protect adjacent structures and surrounding areas. 

C. Work to remain within available easements. 

D. Weather: 

1. No backfill placement during freezing weather. 

2. No frozen materials, ice, or snow in backfill or fill. 

3. No backfill or fill on frozen surfaces. 

May 18, 2012 

Trenching, Backfilling, and Compaction 

Revision 0 31 23 33 - 1





2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Bedding Materials: 

1. Bedding materials are those materials located a maximum of 8 inches below 

bottom of pipe to bottom or spring line of pipe, depending on bedding class or 

condition required. 

2. Material to be defined and required by applicable ASTM standard for installation 

for bedding class/type required or scheduled. 

3. Those materials requiring Engineer's approval should have prior written 

approval. 

4. Concrete in accordance with Section 03 30 00. 

B. Initial Backfill Materials: 

1. Initial backfill material is that material placed above the bedding material, around 

and over the pipe to 12 inches over the top of the pipe. 

2. Material to be defined and required by applicable ASTM standard for installation 

for bedding class/type required or scheduled. 

3. In no case shall initial backfill material contain particles with any dimension 

greater than ¾ inch. 

4. Natural material: 

a. Use excavated material (natural ground) from the trench unless gradation 

requirements cannot be met. 

b. Same as bedding material if natural is unacceptable. 

C. Backfill Materials: 

1. Backfill materials are those materials placed in the trench between the initial 

backfill material and the top of the trench. 

2. Material to be as defined and required by applicable ASTM standard for 

installation for bedding class/type required or scheduled. 

3. Natural material: 

a. Use excavated material (natural ground) from the trench unless gradation 

requirements cannot be met. 

b. Same as bedding material if natural is unacceptable. 

D. Materials Not Allowed: 

1. All pipe bedding and backfill material shall be clean and free of any 

contaminants that could endanger public health. 

2. Mine tailings shall not be used for pipe bedding or backfill material. 


3.1 INSPECTION 

A. Field-verify location and invert elevation of existing underground utilities and 

obstructions. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 31 23 33 - 2




3.2 DEWATERING 

A. Provide and maintain adequate dewatering equipment to remove and dispose of surface 

and groundwater entering excavations, trenches, and other parts of the work. 

B. Protect excavation during subgrade preparation and continually thereafter, until the 

structure to be built or the pipe to be installed is completed, to the extent that no damage 

from hydrostatic pressure, flotation, or other cause will result. 

C. Dewater excavations extending to or below groundwater by lowering and keeping the 

groundwater level at least 12 inches below the bottom of the excavation. 

D. Divert or otherwise prevent surface water from entering excavated areas or trenches, to 

the extent practical, without damaging adjacent property. 

E. Pipe Condition: 

1. Contractor is responsible for the condition of any pipe or conduit used for 

drainage. 

2. All drainage pipes, ditches, etc. shall be left clean and free of sediment. 

3.3 BLASTING 

A. Obtain Engineer and Owner approval prior to any blasting. 

B. Comply with all laws, regulations, and ordinances relative to the handling, storage, and 

use of explosives and the protection of life and property. 

C. Confine all materials lifted by blasting to limits of excavation or trench area. 

D. Repair any damage caused by blasting. 

E. Separate rock that cannot be handled and compacted as earth from other excavated 

matter; do not mix with backfill or embankment materials. 

3.4 SHEETING 

A. Use when necessary to protect facilities adjacent to work areas. 

B. If used, cut off at top of pipe and leave in place unless removal is specifically approved 

by Engineer. 

C. Cost for sheeting or shoring to be included as part of trench excavation unless a specific 

line item is in the Bid Proposal. 

3.5 STABILIZATION 

A. Thoroughly compact and consolidate trench bottoms so they remain firm, dense, and 

intact during required construction activities. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 31 23 33 - 3




B. Remove all mud and muck during excavation. 

C. Reinforce trench bottom with crushed rock or gravel if it becomes mucky during 

construction activities. 

D. Allow no more than ½ inch depth of mud or muck to remain on trench bottoms when 

pipe bedding material is placed thereon. 

E. Where trench bottoms out in rock, rock is to be removed to 8 inches below bottom of 

pipe and replaced with bedding material. 

3.6 TRENCH EXCAVATION 

A. Do not open more trench in advance of pipe being laid than is necessary to expedite the 

work (not to exceed 600 feet). 

B. All trenching left open overnight must have temporary fence that completely encircles the 

work zone and be secured from entry. 

C. Except where jacking and boring is indicated on the Drawings, or is specified or 

permitted by Engineer, excavate trenches by open cut from the surface. 

D. Alignment, grade, and minimum cover: 

1. Establish alignment and grade or elevation from offset stakes. 

2. Excavate trenches so pipes can be laid straight at uniform grade, without dips or 

bumps, between the terminal elevations indicated on the Drawings. 

3. Comply with pipe specification sections regarding vertical and horizontal 

alignment and maximum joint deflection. 

4. Water lines to have minimum bury as shown on the Drawings. 

5. In general, grade shall follow surface contours unless otherwise shown on the 

Drawings. 

E. Limiting trench widths: 

1. Excavate to a width able to provide adequate working space and pipe clearances 

for proper pipe installation, jointing and embedment. 

2. If needed to reduce earth loads to prevent sloughing, cut banks back on slopes 

extending not lower than 1 foot above the top of the pipe. 

3. Minimum trench widths and minimum clearances between installed pipe and 

trench wall: 

a. Minimum pipe size 18 inches or less: 

1) Minimum trench width: outside diameter plus 12 inches. 

2) Minimum clearance: 6 inches. 

b. Minimum pipe size larger than 18 inches: 

1) Minimum trench width: outside diameter plus 24 inches. 

2) Minimum clearance: 12 inches. 

F. Mechanical excavation: 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 31 23 33 - 4




1. Do not use where its operation would damage trees, buildings, culverts, or other 

existing property, structures, or utilities aboveground or below ground; only hand 

excavate in such areas. 

2. Use mechanical equipment of a type, design, and construction operated so that: 

a. Rough trench bottom elevation can be controlled. 

b. Uniform trench widths and vertical sidewalls are obtained from 1 foot 

above the top of the installed pipe to the bottom of the trench. 

c. Trench alignment is such that pipe is accurately laid to specified 

alignment and is centered in the trench with adequate clearance between 

pipe and trench sidewalls. 

3. Do not undercut trench sidewalls. 

G. Cuts in Surface Construction: 

1. No larger than necessary to provide adequate working space. 

2. Cut a clean groove not less than 1½ inches deep along each side of trench or 

around perimeter of excavation area. 

3. Remove pavement and base pavement to provide shoulder not less than 6 inches 

wide between cut edge and top edge of trench. 

4. Do not undercut trenches that would result in bottom trench width being greater 

than top width. 

5. Make pavement cuts to and between straight or accurately marked curved lines 

parallel to trench centerline or limits of excavation. 

6. Where the trench crosses drives or other surface construction, remove and 

replace the surface construction between saw cuts as specified for pavement. 

H. Excavation Below Pipe Standards: 

1. Except as otherwise required, excavate trenches below the underside of pipes, as 

indicated on the Drawings, to provide for installation of granular embedment 

pipe foundation material. 

2. Where in earth: 

a. Trench bottoms for 6-inch and smaller pipe may be excavated below 

pipe subgrade and granular embedment provided. 

b. Trench may be graded to provide uniform and continuous support 

(between bell boles or end joints) of the installed pipe. 

c. Contractor's option. 

I. Bell Holes: 

1. Excavate to provide adequate clearance for tools and methods of pipe 

installation. 

2. Do not allow any part of bells or couplings to contact the trench bottom, walls, or 

granular embedment when pipe is joined. 

3.7 PIPE BEDDING 

A. Class I or II per ATSM D2321. 

B. Provide uniform and continuous support to pipe barrel except at bell holes in all cases; no 

bridging will be allowed. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 31 23 33 - 5




3.8 TRENCH BACKFILL 

A. Material as defined by applicable reference for installation for type of pipe used. 

B. Traveled Areas: 

1. Compact to 90% ASTM D-698. 

2. Top 12 inches below finish grade, 95% ASTM D-698. 

C. Untraveled Areas: 

1. Compacted to at least undisturbed natural density. 

2. Not less than 90% ASTM D-698. 

D. Water-settled backfill; use only where permitted by Engineer. 

1. Where permitted, apply to obtain effective settlement with a minimum of water. 

2. Do not permit trench to overflow. 

3. Do not settle by water puddling until after trench has been backfilled to ground 

surface. 

4. Introduce water above the pipe embedment, through a long pipe nozzle, so 

disturbance of granular embedment or compacted material is held to an absolute 

minimum. 

5. Add backfill material to compensate for settlement below surface grade and 

settled during puddling operations. 

E. Upper 12 inches of trench shall contain no particles larger than 6 inches in any 

dimension. 

F. Surface Finish: 

1. For placement of paving or gravel surfacing, subgrade where applicable. 

2. Match existing and surrounding contours. 

3. Graded finished appearance. 


A. One proctor and gradation for each backfill material. 

B. One field density for each 500 linear feet of trench per lift. 

C. Maximum lift thickness: 12 inches compacted thickness. 


May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 31 23 33 - 6

Division 32






CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Fence fabric and posts. 

2. Excavation for post bases. 

3. Concrete anchorage for posts. 

4. Gates and related hardware. 



2. Section 31 23 33 - Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting. 

3. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 


A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. 

B. Clearly indicate plan layout, grid, spacing of components, accessories, fittings, and 

anchorage. 


A. Contractor personnel to have completed ten equivalent installations. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Framework: 

1. ASTM A120. 

2. Schedule 40, butt weld, standard weight, hot dip galvanized to 2.0 oz/ft² coating, 

white. 

B. Concrete: 3,500 psi, 2- to 3-inch slump, Section 03 30 00. 

2.2 SYSTEM COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS 

A. Line Posts: 2⅜-inch outside diameter. 

B. Corner and Terminal Posts: 2⅞-inch outside diameter. 

May 18, 2012 

Chain Link Fences and Gates 

Revision 0 32 31 13 - 1




C. Gate Posts: Sliding gate posts shall be the same as specified for terminal posts. Gate 

posts for swing gates shall be as follows: 

1. Gate leaf width 6 feet or less, gate post dimensions 2⅞ inches O.D., 4.64 lb/ft. 

2. Gate leaf width 6 to 12 feet, gate post dimensions 4 inches O.D., 6.56 lb/ft. 

3. Gate leaf width 12 to 18 feet, gate post dimensions 6⅝ inches O.D.,18.02 lb/ft. 

4. Gate leaf width 18 to 24 feet, gate post dimensions 8⅝ inches O.D., 27.12 lb/ft. 

D. Top and Brace Rail: 1⅝ inches O.D. sleeve coupled. 

E. Gate Frame: 2⅜ inches O.D. 

F. Caps: 

1. Cast or pressed steel or malleable iron. 

2. Hot dip galvanized, sized to post dimension. 

G. Extension Arms: To accommodate three strands of barbed wire sloped 45°. 

H. Fittings: Sleeves, bands, clips, rail ends, tension bars, fasteners, and fittings: steel 

galvanized. 

I. Fabric: 

1. 2-inch diamond mesh, interwoven. 

2. 9-gauge top selvage twisted tight. 

3. Bottom selvage knuckle end closed. 

J. Bottom Tension Wire: 7-gauge steel single strand, galvanized. 

K. Barbed Wire: 

1. 12½ gauge wire. 

2. Three strands, four points, 14-gauge round barbs at 5 inch o.c. 

3. Zinc-coated steel. 

L. Gate Hardware: 

1. Gate center rest. 

2. Two-piece drop latch. 

3. Chain gate holdback. 

4. Gate hinge 180° male-and-female, fork latch and latch catch, drop bolt, hardware 

for padlock. 

5. Padlocks at the completion of construction will be provided by the Owner. 



A. General: 

1. Install line posts, corner posts, top rails, barbed wire arms, fabric, and gates to 

provide a rigid structure for fence of height as indicated on Drawings. 

2. Use manufacturer's standard fittings, fasteners and hardware. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 32 31 13 - 2




3. Slope barbed wire arms outward. 

B. Maximum Spacing of Posts: 10-foot maximum spacing, uniform spacing or as shown on 

Drawings. 

C. Install line, corner and terminal posts plumb, set in concrete footings as specified in 

CLFMA standard. 

D. Set post to within 6 inches from bottom of concrete footing. 

E. Position bottom of fabric 2 inches above finished grade with tension wire stretched taut 

between posts. 

F. Pass top rail through line post tops to form continuous bracing. 

G. Install 7-inch-long couplings midspan at pipe ends. 

H. Bracing: 

1. Brace each gate and corner post back to adjacent line post with horizontal center 

brace rail. 

2. Install brace rail one bay from end and gate posts. 

3. Install center and bottom brace rail on corner and gate leaves 

I. Fasten fabric to top rail, line posts, braces and bottom tension wire with wire ties 

maximum 15-inch centers. 

J. Attach fabric to end, corner and gate posts with tension bars and tension bar clips. 

K. Stretch fabric between terminal posts or at intervals of 100 feet maximum, whichever is 

the least dimension. 

L. Install three strands of barbed wire on arms, tensioned and secured. 

M. Gates and Hinges: 

1. Install gates using fabric and barbed wire overhang to match fence. 

2. Install three hinges per leaf, latch, catches, drop bolt, retainer, and locking clamp. 

N. Provide concrete center rest and drop bolt retainers at center of double gate openings. 

3.2 SCHEDULE 

A. As shown on the Drawings. 


May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 32 31 13 - 3


Division 40






INSTRUMENTATION 



A. 

B. 

C. 

D. 

E. 

Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install all equipment for 

complete instrumentation and controls. Contractor's work shall include but not be limited 

to the following: 

1. Instrumentation and Level Relay Panel 

2. Installation of equipment furnished under this contract. 

3. Interconnections between equipment furnished under this contract. 

4. Interconnection between equipment furnished under this contract and the existing 

instrumentation and control equipment or that furnished and installed under other 

contracts. 

The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that instrumentation is an integrated 

system and as such shall be furnished by one vendor or system integrator who shall 

provide all the equipment and appurtenances, regardless of manufacture, and be 

responsible to the Contractor for satisfactory operation of the entire system. 

Supervision, labor, tools, and materials necessary for installation of the instrumentation 

equipment and material furnished herein and their interconnection shall be provided by 

the Contractor. Installation work shall conform to applicable city, state, and national 

building and electrical codes. 

Coordinate the work of the system manufacturer's service personnel during construction, 

testing, calibration and acceptance of the instruments. 

Provide equipment as shown in the specifications and on the drawings. 


A. 

B. 

GENERAL: Equipment shall be the Manufacturer's latest and proven design. 

Specifications and drawings call attention to certain features, but do not purport to cover 

all details entering into the design of the instrumentation system. The completed system 

shall be compatible with the functions required and the equipment furnished by the 

Contractor. 

OPERATING VOLTAGE: Electrical components of the system shall operate on 120 

volt, single-phase, 60 Hertz, except as otherwise noted in the specifications. 

May 18, 2012 

Instrumentation 

Revision 0 40 90 01- 1




C. 

D. 

E. 

F. 

G. 

POWER SUPPLIES: The drawings and specifications indicate the energy sources that 

will be provided. Any other devices or power supplies necessary to obtain proper 

operation of the instrument system from these energy sources shall be furnished with the 

instrumentation. 

PROTECTION 

1. The instrumentation system supplier shall be responsible for input-output 

isolation of all incoming and outgoing signals. 

2. Each 4-20 mA DC process measurement current loop installed on this contract 

shall be protected by insertion of a 1/16 amp fuse, Buss Type MKB. Fuses shall 

be installed in standard fuse blocks. 

3. The necessary fuses or switches required by the Instrumentation Manufacturer 

for his equipment shall be provided with the equipment. The instruments 

requiring an internal power supply shall have an internal ON-OFF switch. 

INPUT/OUTPUT 

1. In general and unless specifically stated otherwise, inputs and outputs involving 

instrumentation systems shown shall be 4-20 mA DC process measurement 

signals. Current loop isolators, current repeaters, or other signal isolators shall be 

furnished and installed as required to meet instrument specifications and to make 

instrumentation system fully operational. 

2. Pair shielded cable, as specified in Section 26 05 19 “Low Voltage Electrical 

Power Conductors and Cables” shall be used for all 4-20 mA DC loops. 

HARDWARE CHECKOUT 

1. Contractor shall be responsible for checkout and calibration of all field 

instrumentation up to and including the terminal (RTU) cabinets. Contractor 

shall provide a checkout of all I/O points under the supervision of the Engineer. 

Checkout shall be scheduled two weeks in advance of the date with the Engineer. 

Contractor shall provide a schedule of checkout and procedures to be used to the 

Engineer two weeks in advance of the test date for the Engineer's approval. 

2. I/O points and sequence of operations shall be judged Pass/Fail by the Engineer. 

If a point fails, the Contractor shall move on to the next point and resubmit a new 

test schedule to the Engineer. The Contractor shall run a rehearsal of the test 

procedure to be witnessed by the Engineer prior to the test date as field 

modifications of equipment during the testing for a failed point shall not be 

allowed. Testing shall simulate actual field conditions and reflect the sequence 

of operations expected when in use. 

EQUIPMENT WARRANTY 

1. All equipment shall be warrantied for a period of one (1) year after final 

acceptance. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 40 90 01- 2





Submittals for 40 90 01, “Instrumentation” shall not be combined with any other submittals. 


include: 

A. 

B. 

C. 

Shop Drawings 

1. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before fabrication 

or shipment to the job. Equipment shall not be fabricated or shipped to the job 

before receipt of approved shop drawings from the Engineer. Submittals for 

approval shall include (1) component manufacturing data sheet indicating 

pertinent data and identifying each component by item number and 

nomenclature, (2) component drawing showing dimensions, mounting, and 

external connection details, (3) a system piping schematic and wiring schematic 

each on a single drawing with full description of operation, (4) complete 

schematic diagram of each piece of electrical and electronic equipment including 

electrical valves and tolerances for each component. Component identification 

on the schematic shall be as described above. 

2. Following approval, the manufacturer shall be responsible for preparation of the 

required sets of these drawings for distribution as indicated in Division 0 and 

Division 1 specifications. 

3. Shop drawings submitted for all equipment furnished under this section of the 

specifications, shall be submitted at the same time in the same package. Partial 

submittals will not be reviewed. 

4. Level Relay Panel 

a. Data sheets for miscellaneous electrical equipment. 

b. Project specific panel layout, elevations, schematics, details, bill of 

materials, etc. for the panel 

Sales bulletins and other general publications are not acceptable as submittals for 

approval. 

Equipment installation Report. Contractor shall provide an Equipment Installation 

Report for each instrument (flow meter, level transmitter, etc.) to the Engineer/Owner for 

approval. The equipment installation report shall include documentation stating that the 

instrument was installed and properly calibrated per the manufacturer’s recommendations 

by an Authorized representative of the instrument manufacturer. All parameters required 

for programming of the instrument shall be provided in a hard copy format as part of the 

equipment installation report. Documentation stating that the person performing the 

calibration and start-up is an authorized representative shall be provided as well. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 40 90 01- 3




D. 

E. 

Operation and Maintenance Manuals 

1. Operating instructions shall incorporate a functional description of the entire 

system including the system schematics which reflect "as-built" modifications. 

Wiring diagrams shall be furnished as a part of the Operation and Maintenance 

Manuals which clearly show terminal numbers and wire numbers as they actually 

are in the instrumentation system. Instrument panel wiring shall be such that 

each wire installed has its own number designation at each end and such that no 

number is repeated. Instrument panel wire tagging instructions as specified in 

Section 26 05 19 “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables” shall 

be followed. 

2. Special maintenance requirements particular to the system shall be clearly 

defined along with special calibration and test procedures. 

Contractor shall provide point to point interconnection diagrams for all 

control/instrumentation connections between the RTU cabinet and field devices including 

instruments, motor starters, switchgear, motor control center, VFDs, soft starters, etc. 

Point-to-point diagrams shall be provided for all control/instrumentation wiring between 

field devices and panels, i.e. motor starters, switchgear, motor control centers, VFDs, soft 

starters, etc. Contractor shall provide AutoCad files of interconnection diagrams to the 

Owner. Interconnection diagrams shall include cable no., terminal block no., instrument 

no., panel no., etc. Hard copies of the Interconnection drawings shall be submitted to the 

Engineer for approval as an official submittal prior to the final AutoCAD files being 

submitted. 

1.4 STANDARDS 

The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their 

entirety: 

ASTM A-126 Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fittings 

ASTM B-61 Specification for Steam and Valve Bronze Castings 


A. 

SPECIAL TOOLS: Furnish a kit which contains special size wrenches and other types of 

tools, not normally available, which are necessary for assembling, disassembling, 

aligning, and calibrating each piece of equipment. In addition, any piece of equipment 

(meter, test set, etc.) required by the Manufacturer to align, adjust, or otherwise calibrate 

any item under this section of the specification shall be furnished, including software. 


2.1 ENCLOSURES/PANELS 

A. 

Enclosures and panels as indicated on the plans and in this specification shall be 

furnished, installed, and wired. Enclosures shall be NEMA 4X, 304 stainless steel for all 

locations, unless specifically stated otherwise. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 40 90 01- 4




2.2 LEVEL RELAY PANEL 

A. 

B. 

C. 

D. 

E. 

F. 

Enclosure: It shall have lifting eyes and a front door provided with a key locking handle. 

All switches, fuses, terminal blocks, etc., shall have permanent nameplates or labels for 

identification. All wiring shall be identified with wiring markers with alphanumeric 

characters. The identification of each wire shall be the same as that shown on the 

electrical schematic. Each wire shall be so identified at each end. Each end of every 

wire shall be provided with a heat shrinkable or equivalent sleeve-type wire markerlabeled 

in accordance with the electrical schematic. Use of adhesive and clip-on type 

markers is prohibited. 

Panel wiring shall be as follows: 

1. Each conductor terminated under a screw head shall have a crimp on spade 

terminal applied to its end prior to its termination. 

2. Each conductor has its own number and no number is used more than once. 

3. The number of each wire is placed at both ends of the wire next to its end 

according to wire tagging instructions as specified in 26 05 19, “Low Voltage 

Electrical Power Conductors and Cables”. 

4. The wire numbers, as actually installed, match the numbers on the shop 

drawings, O&M manuals, wiring diagrams and interconnection diagrams for this 

instrument panel. 

5. Conductors run open shall be bundled and bound at regular intervals not to 

exceed 6" with nylon ties, or approved equal. Wires within a bundle are to be 

run parallel to one another and not twisted. Bundles shall have a uniform 

appearance, circular cross section, and shall be securely fastened to the panel 

framework. Conductors carrying different voltages that are from the same source 

may occupy the same wireway provided all are insulated for the maximum 

voltage of any conductor in the wireway. Wiring carrying voltages that originate 

at different source shall not run in the same wireway. 

6. A separate 120VAC Terminal Block and circuit breaker shall be provided for the 

cabinet. 

Provide a print pocket pouch with the control schematic drawings on the inside of the 

Panel door. The control schematic drawings shall be the final version of the drawings 

and shall include any field revisions made during start-up. 

All relays and pushbuttons shall be NEMA rated, heavy duty type. IEC or dual 

IEC/NEMA rated equipment shall not be acceptable. 

Terminal strips shall be 600V, NEMA rated manufactured by Allen-Bradley, Phoenix 

Contact or approved equal. Distribution blocks shall be per Section 26 05 19, “Low 

Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables”. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 40 90 01- 5




G. 

H. 

I. 

CONTROL RELAYS: Industrial type; contacts rated for 10 amps at 600 VAC; Allen- 

Bradley Bulletin 700 Type PK, Square D Class 8501 Type X, or approved equal. Relays 

shall have the capability of having contact decks added in the field. Contacts shall be 

field convertible to normally open or normally closed. Coils and contacts shall each be 

replaceable without replacing any other part of the relay. Where control relays are 

indicated on the Plans, industrial control relays shall be furnished whether the relay coil 

is operated with 120 VAC or 24 VDC. General purpose “plug-in” type relays shall not 

be acceptable. 

INDICATING LIGHTS, SWITCHES, PUSHBUTTONS: Heavy duty and oil tight (30 

mm); Square D Class 9001 or approved equal. Pilot lights shall be push to test (LED 

type) and shall be Square D SK or approved equal. 

Acceptable RTU cabinet manufacturers: 

1. Hoffman 

2. Hammond 

3. Rittal 

2.3 TUBING 

A. 

B. 

Instrument tubing shall be Stainless Steel tubing conforming to Fed. Spec. WW-T-799b, 

and ASTM B-88 for seamless copper tubing for use with or flared fittings. Hydraulic 

connections to instruments shall be made with separable flared fittings so that fittings 

may be separated and reassembled without reflaring tubing ends and without incurring 

any leaks. 

Tubing shall be ¼" trade size (OD= .375", ID= .315", wall thickness =.030"), shall be 

rated for 810 psi working pressure at 150°F and shall be manufactured by Halstead or 

approved equal. Flared fittings shall be brass flared fittings as manufactured by Parker or 


2.4 DIAPHRAGM SEALS FOR PRESSURE INSTRUMENTS: 

A. 

Provide diaphragm seals for all pressure measuring instruments. This includes, but is not 

limited to pressure gauges and transmitters, differential pressure gauges and transmitters, 

pressure switches and differential pressure switches. 

2.5 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 

A. 

B. 

Pressure indicating transmitter shall be of the two wire capacitance sensing solid state 

electronic type having a 4-20 mA DC output signal proportional to the calibrated pressure 

range. The transmitter shall allow the 4-20mA DC output to be scaled to any user 

defined unit (e.g. 0-2ft). The instrument shall allow the digital output of the pressure 

instrument to be scaled to any user defined unit. 

The transmitter display shall be LCD type. It shall display the numeric value and also 

have a 0-100% scale bar graph corresponding to the analog output. The display will 

show all alarms and alerts. It shall be possible to remote mount electronics with a LCD 

display up to 100ft from the pressure sensor. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 40 90 01- 6




C. 

D. 

E. 

F. 

G. 

The transmitter shall allow custom user-centered digital alerts for both high and low 

values for the pressure reading. The digital alert will not affect the analog output. The 

transmitter shall also measure sensor temperature and allow custom user digital alerts. 

The digital alert will not affect the analog output. Hardware/Software failure alarms shall 

be selectable as high, low, or custom defined values. It is possible to verify the complete 

configuration of the pressure transmitter without using a communicator. On powering 

up, the LCD should sequence through the configuration set-up. 

Digital communication with the pressure instrument shall be via open protocols HART 

Foundation compatible. Pressure instrument shall communicate with hand held 

communicators. Pressure instrument shall allow full configuration of the instrument via a 

hand held communicator. The instrument shall allow field upgrading of communication 

protocols and the addition of advanced instrument software without changing the 

pressure sensor. 

The transmitter shall have 316 stainless steel wetted parts and stainless steel 316 

diaphragm. The transmitter shall have 1/4 NPT on flange process connection. The unit 

shall function over an ambient temperature of -40°F to 150°F (-40°C to 65°C) and 

relative humidity of 100%, condensing. 

The transmitters shall have an externally adjustable span and zero, an integral junction 

box and an accuracy of+/- 0.15% of span, +/- 0.125% stability of upper range limit. 

Pressure transmitter shall be provided with pressure indication. Range limits of 

transmitter shall be adjustable 0-50 to 0-200 psig. 

Each transmitter shall have an internal transient protector conforming to IEEE standard 

587, category B and IEEE standard 472. Each transmitter shall be furnished with a 3- 

valve manifold with NORMAL, ZERO, BLOCK, CALIBRATE and BLOWDOWN 

functions. Transmitter shall have local indication of pressure. Transmitter shall be as 

manufactured by Siemens model SITRANS P300 or as manufactured by Foxboro, no 


Quantity Tag Service Range 

21 PIT-____* Pressure 

Range: 0-120 psig 

Max: 150psig 

*See following table for equipment tag associated with each well site 

Well 



Tag 

Tag 

Site 

Site 

Site 

Tag 

D1 PIT-4010 D8 PIT-4080 D15 PIT-4150 

D2 PIT-4020 D9 PIT-4090 D17 PIT-4170 

D3 PIT-4030 D10 PIT-4100 D18 PIT-4180 

D4 PIT-4040 D11 PIT-4110 D19 PIT-4190 

D5 PIT-4050 D12 PIT-4120 D22 PIT-4220 

D6 PIT-4060 D13 PIT-4130 D23 PIT-4230 

D7 PIT-4070 D14 PIT-4140 D24 PIT-4240 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 40 90 01- 7




2.6 PRESSURE TYPE LEVEL TRANSDUCER 

A. 

B. 

C. 

Provide submersible hydrostatic transducer and cable as required. The liquid level of the 

well shall be sensed by a submersible hydrostatic transducer. The transducer shall be a 

loop powered type to produce an instrumentation signal in direct proportion to the 

measured level in the well to generate a 4-20mA signal to be sent to the Level Relay 

Panel. The sensor shall be stainless steel 

1. Accuracy: 0.1% of full scale 

2. Ambient Operating Temperature: 5 to 30 Celsius (41 to 86 degrees F) 

Provide the required amount of manufacturer’s supplied interconnecting cable from the 

hydrostatic transducer to the level relay panel. See plans for location of the panel. Refer 

to section 11 97 00 “Submersible Pumps and Installation, Attachment A” for well depth. 

Contractor shall verify well depth with Engineer in writing prior to procuring transducer 

cable. Manufacturer’s supplied cable shall be one continuous cable. No splicing 

allowed. Cable shall be vented to compensate for barometric fluctuations. 

The sensor shall be mounted as shown on the Drawings. The submersible hydrostatic 

transducer shall be as manufactured by In-Situ model PXD, or approved equal. 

Quantity Tag Service Range 

21 LPE-____* Well Level 

0-100 psig 

(0-230 feet) 

*See table below for equipment tag associated with each well site 




Tag 

Tag 

Site 

Site 

Site 

Tag 

D1 LPE-4010 D8 LPE-4080 D15 LPE-4150 

D2 LPE-4020 D9 LPE-4090 D17 LPE-4170 

D3 LPE-4030 D10 LPE-4100 D18 LPE-4180 

D4 LPE-4040 D11 LPE-4110 D19 LPE-4190 

D5 LPE-4050 D12 LPE-4120 D22 LPE-4220 

D6 LPE-4060 D13 LPE-4130 D23 LPE-4230 

D7 LPE-4070 D14 LPE-4140 D24 LPE-4240 

2.7 CURRENT LOOP ISOLATORS 

A. 

Current isolators shall accept an input of 4-20 mA DC and produce a linearly 

proportional 4-20 mA DC output signal. Accuracy shall be ±0.1% of scale. Isolators 

shall operate on 115 VAC, 60 Hz. Output load capability shall be a minimum of 1500 

ohms. Current isolators shall be Acromag Model 816 or approved equal. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 40 90 01- 8






A. 

Wire each device requiring power so that when wires are removed from any one device, 

power is not be disrupted to any other device. Ground the case of each device either by 

mounting directly on a steel frame or by a third wire. 


A. 

B. 

C. 

The supervisory service of a factory-trained service engineer who is specifically trained 

on the type of equipment herein specified shall be provided during construction to assist 

the Contractor in the location of sleeves; methods of installing conduit and special cable; 

mounting, piping, and wiring one of each type of device, and the methods of protecting 

all of the equipment prior to placing it into service. Upon completion of the installation, 

the services of the above service engineer shall be provided for calibration and startup of 

the equipment and for instructing the operating personnel. The Manufacturer shall 

provide sufficient service to place the system in satisfactory operation. 

Check out and calibrate the system upon completion of the installation. 

Prior to the Owner turning on any form of energy to the system, the Contractor shall 

provide the Engineer with a certified statement of approval of the installation including 

his supplier's authorization for turning on energy to the system. 


May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 40 90 01- 9

This page intentionally left blank




SECTION 40 90 01.01 

INSTRUMENTATION - FLOW METERS 



A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install all flow meter 

instrumentation equipment as shown in the specifications and on the drawings. 

Contractor's work shall include but not be limited to the installation of equipment 

furnished under this contract. 

B. The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that flow meter instrumentation is an 

integrated system and as such shall be furnished by one vendor or system integrator who 

shall provide all the equipment and appurtenances, regardless of manufacture, and be 

responsible to the Contractor for satisfactory operation of the entire system. 

C. Supervision, labor, tools, and materials necessary for installation of the flow meter 

instrumentation equipment and material furnished herein and their interconnection shall 

be provided by the Contractor. Installation work shall conform to applicable city, state, 

and national building and electrical codes. 

D. Coordinate the work of the system manufacturer's service personnel during construction, 

testing, calibration and acceptance of the instruments. 

E. Provide equipment as shown in the specifications and on the drawings. 


A. GENERAL: Equipment shall be the Manufacturer's latest and proven design. 

Specifications and drawings call attention to certain features, but do not purport to cover 

all details entering into the design of the instrumentation system. The completed system 

shall be compatible with the functions required and the equipment furnished by the 

Contractor. 

B. OPERATING VOLTAGE: Electrical components of the system shall operate on 120 

volt, single-phase, 60 Hertz, except as otherwise noted in the specifications. 

C. POWER SUPPLIES: The drawings and specifications indicate the energy sources that 

will be provided. Any other devices or power supplies necessary to obtain proper 

operation of the instrument system from these energy sources shall be furnished with the 

instrumentation. 

May 18, 2012 

Instrumentation Flow Meters 

Revision 0 40 90 01.01-1




D. PROTECTION 

1. The instrumentation system supplier shall be responsible for input-output 

isolation of all incoming and outgoing signals. 

2. Each 4-20 mA DC process measurement current loop installed on this contract 

shall be protected by insertion of a 1/16 amp fuse, Buss Type MKB. Fuses shall 

be installed in standard fuse blocks. 

3. The necessary fuses or switches required by the Instrumentation Manufacturer 

for his equipment shall be provided with the equipment. The instruments 

requiring an internal power supply shall have an internal ON-OFF switch. 

E. INPUT/OUTPUT 

1. In general and unless specifically stated otherwise, inputs and outputs involving 

instrumentation systems shown shall be 4-20 mA DC process measurement 

signals. Current loop isolators, current repeaters, or other signal isolators shall be 

furnished and installed as required to meet instrument specifications and to make 

instrumentation system fully operational. 

F. HARDWARE CHECKOUT 

1. Contractor shall be responsible for checkout and calibration of all field flow 

meter instrumentation up to and including the terminal (RTU) cabinets (provided 

under a separate bid package). Contractor shall provide a checkout of all I/O 

points under the supervision of the Engineer. Checkout shall be scheduled two 

weeks in advance of the date with the Engineer. Contractor shall provide a 

schedule of checkout and procedures to be used to the Engineer two weeks in 

advance of the test date for the Engineer's approval. 

2. I/O points and sequence of operations shall be judged Pass/Fail by the Engineer. 

If a point fails, the Contractor shall move on to the next point and resubmit a new 

test schedule to the Engineer. The Contractor shall run a rehearsal of the test 

procedure to be witnessed by the Engineer prior to the test date as field 

modifications of equipment during the testing for a failed point shall not be 

allowed. Testing shall simulate actual field conditions and reflect the sequence 

of operations expected when in use. 

G. EQUIPMENT WARRANTY 

1. All equipment shall be warrantied for a period of one (1) year after final 

acceptance. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 40 90 01.01-2





Submittals for 40 90 01.01, “Instrumentation – Flow Meters” shall not be combined with any 



A. Shop Drawings 

1. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before fabrication 

or shipment to the job. Equipment shall not be fabricated or shipped to the job 

before receipt of approved shop drawings from the Engineer. Submittals for 

approval shall include (1) component manufacturing data sheet indicating 

pertinent data and identifying each component by item number and 

nomenclature, (2) component drawing showing dimensions, mounting, and 

external connection details, (3) a system piping schematic and wiring schematic 

each on a single drawing with full description of operation, (4) complete 

schematic diagram of each piece of electrical and electronic equipment including 

electrical valves and tolerances for each component. Component identification 

on the schematic shall be as described above. 

2. Following approval, the manufacturer shall be responsible for preparation of the 

required sets of these drawings for distribution as indicated in Division 0 and 

Division 1 specifications. 

3. Shop drawings submitted for all equipment furnished under this section of the 

specifications, shall be submitted at the same time in the same package. Partial 

submittals will not be reviewed. 

B. Sales bulletins and other general publications are not acceptable as submittals for 

approval. 

C. Equipment installation Report. Contractor shall provide an Equipment Installation 

Report for each flow meter instrument to the Engineer/Owner for approval. The 

equipment installation report shall include documentation stating that the instrument was 

installed and properly calibrated per the manufacturer’s recommendations by an 

Authorized representative of the instrument manufacturer. All parameters required for 

programming of the instrument shall be provided in a hard copy format as part of the 

equipment installation report. Documentation stating that the person performing the 

calibration and start-up is an authorized representative shall be provided as well. 

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 

1. Operating instructions shall incorporate a functional description of the entire 

system including the system schematics which reflect "as-built" modifications. 

Wiring diagrams shall be furnished as a part of the Operation and Maintenance 

Manuals which clearly show terminal numbers and wire numbers as they actually 

are in the instrumentation system. Instrument panel wiring shall be such that 

each wire installed has its own number designation at each end and such that no 

number is repeated. 

2. Special maintenance requirements particular to the system shall be clearly 

defined along with special calibration and test procedures. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 40 90 01.01-3




1.4 STANDARDS 

The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their 

entirety: 

ASTM A-126 Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fittings 

ASTM B-61 Specification for Steam and Valve Bronze Castings 


A. SPECIAL TOOLS: Furnish a kit which contains special size wrenches and other types of 

tools, not normally available, which are necessary for assembling, disassembling, 

aligning, and calibrating each piece of equipment. In addition, any piece of equipment 

(meter, test set, etc.) required by the Manufacturer to align, adjust, or otherwise calibrate 

any item under this section of the specification shall be furnished, including software. 


2.1 ELECTROMAGNETIC FLOW TRANSMITTER 

A. Flow element shall be of the electromagnetic type utilizing the pulsed DC type coil 

excitation principle with high preamp input impedance. The flow measuring system, 

consisting of low element, transmitter, and appurtenances, shall have an overall accuracy 

of ±.25% of rate with a 10:1 turndown for all flows resulting from pipe velocities of 1' to 

31' per second. Stream fluid meter size and flow range shall be as noted. Unit shall have 

zero stability feature thereby eliminating the need to stop flow to check zero alignment. 

B. The flow element shall be of water-tight, NEMA 6 construction for submersible 

applications. Meter shall consist of a 304 stainless steel meter tube, 150 pound ANSI 

carbon steel raised-face flanges, ebonite hard rubber liner, and Hastelloy electrodes, 

unless otherwise noted. Electrodes shall be either flush or bullet nose type. Suitable 

covers shall be provided for flow elements ends to protect the tube liner during shipment. 

Liners for magnetic flow meters shall be neoprene. 

C. Flow transmitter shall be enclosed and water-tight, NEMA 4X construction for outdoor 

installation and mounted on the flow meter. The transmitter output shall be a 4-20 mA 

DC signal in linear proportion to flow and shall dive loads with impedances in the range 

of 0 to 800 ohms without load adjustments for a 24V DC supply. Output span and zero 

shall be manually adjustable. Both transmitter and primary element shall be powered 

from the same 120 volt, 60 Hz source. 

D. Provide an isolation kit for the flow meter. 

E. The flow meter shall come with the required amount of manufacturer’s supplied cable for 

routing the signal from the flow element to the transmitter. See plans for location of flow 

meter and transmitter. Manufacturer’s supplied cable shall be one continuous cable. No 

splicing allowed. Special cables shall be installed in conduit. Cable(s) shall facilitate 

both signal and power for the flow element (120 volt, 60 Hz power will be made 

available at the transmitter). 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 40 90 01.01-4




F. Electromagnetic flow meter shall be Siemens Sitrans F M MAG 5100W flanged meter 

with Siemens MAG transmitter 6000 with MODBUS RS485 module and sunshield, no 


G. Calibrations of all instruments shall be performed by the instrument manufacturer's 

factory technicians only. 

Quantity 

15* 

6* 

Service 

Well Site 

Discharge 

Flow 

Well Site 

Discharge 

Type of 

Water 

Pressure Range Line Size 

Raw Water 0-150 psig 0-3 MGD 8” ** 

Raw Water 0-150 psig 0-3 MGD 10” 

Flow 

* See table below for equipment tag associated with each well site. Coordinate with 

Contractor for final pipe line size associated with each well site. 

** In the event changed conditions are encountered, including flow rates exceeding 1,100 

GPM and as directed by the Engineer, 10” piping and flow meter will be substituted 

for 8” listed. Coordinate final pipe line size with Contractor. 

Well Line 



Tag 

Tag 

Site Size 

Site Size 

Site Size 

Tag 

D1 8” LPE-4010 D8 8” LPE-4080 D15 8” LPE-4150 

D2 8” LPE-4020 D9 8” LPE-4090 D17 10” LPE-4170 

D3 8” LPE-4030 D10 10” LPE-4100 D18 8” LPE-4180 

D4 8” LPE-4040 D11 8” LPE-4110 D19 8” LPE-4190 

D5 8” LPE-4050 D12 8” LPE-4120 D22 8” LPE-4220 

D6 8” LPE-4060 D13 10” LPE-4130 D23 10” LPE-4230 

D7 8” LPE-4070 D14 10” LPE-4140 D24 10” LPE-4240 



A. Wire each device requiring power so that when wires are removed from any one device, 

power is not be disrupted to any other device. Ground the case of each device either by 

mounting directly on a steel frame or by a third wire. 


A. The supervisory service of a factory-trained service engineer who is specifically trained 

on the type of equipment herein specified shall be provided during construction to assist 

the Contractor in the location of sleeves; methods of installing conduit and special cable; 

mounting, piping, and wiring one of each type of device, and the methods of protecting 

all of the equipment prior to placing it into service. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 40 90 01.01-5




B. Upon completion of the installation of the pumps, the services of the service engineer 

indicated above shall be provided for calibration and startup of the equipment and for 

instructing the operating personnel. The Manufacturer shall provide sufficient service to 

place the system in satisfactory operation. 

C. Check out and calibrate the system upon completion of the installation. 

D. Prior to the Owner turning on any form of energy to the system, the Contractor shall 

provide the Engineer with a certified statement of approval of the installation including 

his supplier's authorization for turning on energy to the system. 


May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 40 90 01.01-6




40 90 02.01 

INSTALLATION OF PRE-PURCHASED SCADA EQUIPMENT 



A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, tools, equipment and machinery necessary to 

receive, inspect, unload, and install completely in proper operating condition, the 

equipment pre-purchased by the Owner and assigned to the Contractor for installation. 

Upon acceptance of the equipment, Contractor accepts all responsibility for its condition 

and proper operation. 

B. The Contractor shall also furnish all incidental items not supplied with the equipment that 

may be required for complete installation, such as concrete pad, bolts, wiring, conduit, 

grounding, and other appurtenances as necessary. The Contractor shall refer to Appendix 

B for the Antenna Tower concrete base requirements. 

C. The equipment pre-purchased by the Owner consists, in general, of the following items 

for each of the 21 well sites: 

1. RTU 

2. Antenna Tower 

3. Radio Antenna 

D. General details of the equipment are provided herein. Technical Specifications for the 

pre-selection or pre-purchase of Goods and Special Services are included in Appendix B. 


A. Inspect the condition of all equipment accepted for installation and promptly advise the 

Owner in writing as to any defects or damage that may have occurred during shipment. 

B. Provide the services of the Seller’s representative to assist in installation of the equipment 

in accordance with the specifications included in appendices and Section 01 70 00 

“Execution and Closeout Requirements.” Provide an equipment installation report as 

required by Section 01 70 00 “Execution and Closeout Requirements.” 

C. The service of the SCADA System Supplier’s representative is available to assist in 

installation and start-up of the equipment in accordance with the specifications included 

in Appendix B. Contractor shall schedule and request the representative to be available 

when needed, to assist and instruct in the proper installation and adjustment of the 

equipment. All work and adjustments shall be done in accordance with the SCADA 

System Supplier’s recommendations and instructions of their representative. 

May 18, 2012 

Installation of Pre-Purchased SCADA Equipment 

Revision 0 40 90 02.01-1




D. The Contractor shall work with the Vendors in scheduling delivery and dates that the 

SCADA System Supplier’s representatives should be available to assist in installation, 

adjusting and start-up of the equipment, all as if the Contractor himself had selected and 

purchased the equipment. The specifications in Appendix B indicate the minimum 

amount of time that the Vendors are required to furnish a technician for field services. If 

additional technician time is required, it shall be paid for by the Contractor at no 

additional cost to the Owner. 


2.1 OWNER PRE-PURCHASED PRODUCTS 

A. Products are described in the referenced appendices. Obtain clarification from the 

Engineer in the case of a disagreement between the above list and those specified 

elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 

B. Payment for the equipment will be made directly by the Owner per the Agreement 

between Owner and Seller/Supplier. 

C. Include all other costs associated with the installation, startup and initial operation of the 

equipment in the Contract Price. 

2.2 SUPPLIERS 

A. Contact Supplier a minimum of five (5) business days prior to when equipment needs to 

be delivered to the site and prior to when the Supplier needs to be on site. 

B. The Suppliers and primary contact persons for the Owner pre-purchased SCADA 

equipment are as follows: 

SCADA System Supplier Contact Name 

Contact 

Number 

Prime Controls Scott Ogletree 972-221-4849 


3.1 GENERAL 

A. Coordinate delivery schedule and dates that the SCADA System Supplier’s 

representatives should be available to assist in installation and adjusting of the equipment 

with Suppliers. 

B. Arrange for delivery of the equipment to be furnished and furnish personnel and 

equipment as needed to carefully unload the items and set them in place. The Contractor 

shall be fully responsible for unloading all equipment at the job site. The Contractor shall 

be required to provide appropriate lifting equipment to unload and set the equipment in 

place. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 40 90 02.01-2




C. Provide the labor, tools, equipment and appurtenances necessary to receive, inspect, 

install, and place in operating conditions all equipment pre-purchased by the Owner and 

assigned to the Contractor. 

D. Assemble equipment disassembled for shipping. Determine the extent of assembly that 

will be required and include the cost of this assembly in the Contract Price. 

E. Furnish all incidental items not supplied with the goods that may be required for 

complete installation. Include the cost for these items in the Contract Price. 

F. Provide the services of the Supplier’s representative to assist in installation of the 

equipment in accordance with the specifications included in appendices and Section 01 

70 00 “Execution and Closeout Requirements.” Schedule the representative to be 

available when needed to assist and instruct in the proper installation and adjustment of 

the equipment. All work and adjustments shall be done in accordance with the SCADA 

System Supplier’s recommendations and instructions of their representative. Provide an 

Equipment Installation Report as required by Section 01 70 00 “Execution and Closeout 

Requirements.” 

G. Provide installation as required in the Contract Documents for the pre-purchased 

equipment and as required by these Contract Documents. 

3.2 DELIVERY SCHEDULE AND STORAGE 

A. At a minimum, all electrical equipment shall be stored indoors in a clean, dry, climate 

controlled heated and air conditioned environment that is free from dust, No Exceptions. 

Store equipment indoors in a dry space with uniform temperature to prevent 

condensation. Protect equipment from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive 

substances and physical damage. 

B. 100 watt incandescent lamps shall be placed in the equipment enclosure sections as 

required and energize to prevent the buildup of condensation during extended storage 

periods. 

C. In the event that the equipment is delivered prior to the time the Contractor is ready to 

install it, the equipment shall be stored in strict accordance with the SCADA System 

Supplier’s written instructions for temporary storage. All equipment shall be wrapped in 

heavy plastic for protection and shall be stored in a location such that it will not be prone 

to damage. 

D. All equipment stored off-site shall be kept in a secure, bonded warehouse facility. A 

bailment agreement will be required and a copy provided to the Owner. 

E. All routine maintenance required by the SCADA System Supplier while the equipment is 

held in temporary storage shall be performed by the Contractor in accordance with the 

SCADA System Supplier’s instructions. 

F. All costs for temporary storage, transport of the items to and from temporary storage 

(once delivered) and costs for unloading equipment for initial storage and at the job site 

shall be borne completely by the Contractor with no additional compensation from the 

Owner. 

May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 40 90 02.01-3




3.3 Installation 

A. Install the equipment in accordance with the drawings and SCADA System Supplier’s 

written instructions. 

B. Make sure that each piece of equipment is securely anchored to supports and its 

foundations. 

C. The equipment shall be electrical hard wired at the locations shown on the drawings. 


May 18, 2012 


Revision 0 40 90 02.01-4

Appendix A


Electric Service Guidelines 

July 2010 

TSN 449260 

Oncor Electric Delivery Company


ELECTRIC SERVICE 

GUIDELINES 

These Electric Service Guidelines supersede all prior issues of Electric Service 

Guidelines issued by Company and become effective with all construction on or after 

July 1, 2010. For more information call the Company at 1-888-313-6862 or visit our 

website at 

http://www.oncor.com 

For underground cable locates call 811. 

Copyright 2010 Oncor Electric Delivery Company. All rights reserved.


FOREWORD 

Page 4 

SECTION 100 

GENERAL INFORMATION 

Page 5 

SECTION 200 

CLEARANCES 

Page 13 

SECTION 300 

OVERHEAD SERVICE 

Page 19 

SECTION 400 

UNDERGROUND SERVICE 

Page 30 

SECTION 500 

METERING AND ASSOCIATED 

EQUIPMENT 

Page 39 

SECTION 600 

TEMPORARY SERVICE 

Page 62 

CONNECTOR APPLICATION TABLES 

Page 65 

Copyright 2010 Oncor Electric Delivery Company. All rights reserved 

3


FOREWORD 

This booklet is issued by Oncor Electric Delivery Company (Company) for use by 

Customers and their agents. 

This booklet should be used as a guide in planning the installation of electrical 

equipment and methods of receiving electrical power and energy from the electrical 

delivery system of Company. 

If service methods other than the examples discussed in this booklet are 

required, the Customer is to obtain written Company approval prior to letting bids 

and installing equipment. 

Where local inspection authority is not involved, meter installations should be wired in 

accordance with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code or Company 

specifications when the Company specifications exceed those of the National Electrical 

Code. 

The information presented herein will be revised periodically to reflect changes which 

may develop. It is the Customer’s responsibility for obtaining the latest revision. 

The latest revision can be obtained at: 

http://www.oncor.com/electricity/construct/guidelines/const_guide.aspx 

NOTE: Revisions are highlighted in yellow on this Internet copy only. 


4


SECTION 100 – GENERAL INFORMATION 

100.01 Definitions 

100.01.01 Company 

Oncor Electric Delivery Company and its officers, agents, employees, 

successors, and assigns. 

100.01.02 Connected Load 

The combined electrical requirement (i.e., the sum of the capacities and/or 

ratings) of all motors and other electric power consuming devices installed 

on the Customer’s premises. 

100.01.03 Current Transformer (CT) 

A transformer used in metering applications which reduces, by a definite 

ratio, the value of primary current to a value usable by the meter. 

100.01.04 CT Enclosure (also known as CT Can) 

See instrument transformer enclosure. 

100.01.05 CT Socket 

A meter socket used only with external instrument transformers. 

100.01.06 Customer 

An end use customer who purchases electric power and energy and 

ultimately consumes it. When used in the context of construction services, 

the term Customer also includes property owners, builders, developers, 

contractors, governmental entities, or any other organization, entity, or 

individual that is not a Competitive Retailer making a request for such 

services to the Company. 

100.01.07 Delivery Service 

The service performed by Company for the delivery of electric power and 

energy. Delivery Service comprises delivery system services and 

discretionary services. 

100.01.08 Demand 

The rate at which electric energy is used at any instant or averaged over 

any designated period of time and which is measured in KW or KVA. 

100.01.09 Demand Interval 

The specified interval of time on which a demand measurement is based. 

The Company demand interval is normally 15 minutes. 

100.01.10 Energy 

The measure of how much electric power is provided over time for doing 

work. The electrical unit is the watt-hour, or kilowatt-hour. 


5

100.01.11 Facility Extension Agreement 

The service agreement that must be executed by Company and Customer 

requesting certain construction services before Company can provide such 

construction services to the requesting entity. 

100.01.12 Good Utility Practice 

The term will have the meaning ascribed thereto in PUC Substantive Rules, 

Section 25.5, Definitions, or its successor. 

100.01.13 Inspection Authority 

Generally an incorporated City or Town, but may be an agency of the 

County, State, or Federal Government. 

100.01.14 Instrument Transformer (IT) 

See Current Transformer and Voltage Transformer. Current transformers 

and voltage transformers are collectively called instrument transformers. 

100.01.15 Instrument Transformer (IT) Enclosure (also known as CT Can or CT 

Enclosure) 

A metal cabinet which houses the Company’s instrument transformers when 

a transocket is not feasible. 

100.01.16 Maximum Available Fault Current 

The amount of current that will flow due to a direct short circuit from one 

conductor to ground or from one conductor to another. 

100.01.17 Meter 

A device or devices for measuring the amount of electric power and energy 

delivered to a particular location. 

100.01.18 Meter Socket 

A receptacle of weatherproof construction used for mounting a socket type 

meter. 

100.01.19 Point of Delivery (POD) 

The point at which electric power and energy leaves the delivery system. 

100.01.20 Raceway 

Tubular or rectangular channel or conduit for containing electrical 

conductors, which may be exposed, buried beneath the surface of the earth, 

or encased in a building or structure. 

100.01.21 Secondary Service 

Non-residential delivery service at any one of Company’s standard service 

voltages listed in 100.05.02, page 11. 


6

100.01.22 Service Agreement 

Any commission approved agreement between Company and Customer 

which sets forth certain information, terms, obligations and/or conditions of 

delivery service pursuant to the provisions of the Tariff for Retail Delivery 

Service. 

100.01.23 Service Availability Statement 

A statement from the Company designating the acceptable location of the 

Customer’s service entrance conductors, the proper location of meters and 

metering equipment, the type of service available or which will be made 

available to the specific location under consideration, and the capacity of the 

service to be provided. 

100.01.24 Service Drop 

Overhead conductors that extend from Company’s overhead delivery 

system to the point of delivery (POD) where connection is made to 

Customer’s electrical installation. 

100.01.25 Service Enclosure 

A connection enclosure used for the purpose of connecting the service 

lateral to Customer’s electrical installation. 

100.01.26 Service Entrance Conductors 

Conductors provided by Customer extending from Customer’s electrical 

equipment to the point of delivery (POD) where connection is made. 

100.01.27 Service Equipment 

The necessary equipment, usually consisting of (a) circuit breaker(s) or 

switch(es) and fuse(s) and their accessories, connected to the load end of 

service conductors to a building or other structure, or an otherwise 

designated area, and intended to constitute the main control and cutoff of 

the supply. 

100.01.28 Service Lateral 

Conductors, usually underground but sometimes in raceway above ground, 

that extend from Company’s delivery system to the point of delivery or from 

Customer’s electrical installation to the point of delivery. 

100.01.29 Service Point 

See Point of Delivery. 

100.01.30 Secondary Enclosure 

A padmounted connection enclosure located adjacent to transformer used 

to connect Customer’s service conductors that are in excess in number 

and/or size than can normally be accommodated by transformer. 


7

100.01.31 Suitable Space 

The required amount of cleared space after vegetation and other 

obstructions have been removed in order to access, install, operate, 

maintain and replace Company facilities. Contact Company for details. 

100.01.32 Tariff for Retail Delivery Service 

The document filed with, and approved by, the PUC pursuant to which 

Company provides delivery service. It is comprised of Rate Schedules, 

Riders, and service rules and regulations. The service rules and regulations 

include definitions, terms and conditions, policies, and Service Agreements. 

100.01.33 Transocket 

A metal enclosure which includes instrument transformers and meter 

socket. 

100.01.34 Voltage Transformer (VT, also known as Potential Transformer or PT) 

A transformer used in metering applications which reduces, by a definite 

ratio, the value of primary voltage to a value usable by the meter. 

100.02 Codes Governing Electrical Installations 

100.02.01 National Electrical Safety Code 

The National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) is the code that Company 

follows in design and construction of electric supply lines whether overhead 

or underground. 

100.02.02 National Electrical Code 

The National Electrical Code (NEC) is published by the National Fire 

Protection Association (NFPA). The current edition of the NEC is the code 

that electrical contractors follow for wiring Customer’s electrical installations. 


8

100.02.03 Inspection and Approval of Customer’s Electrical Installation 

In those locations where an ordinance requires the Customer to obtain a 

certificate of inspection and acceptance or a permit, Customer will obtain all 

necessary permits and certificates of inspection covering its electrical 

installation. Company will not interconnect its distribution facilities with 

Customer’s electrical installation until Company receives notification of 

approval of Customer’s electrical installation by the proper authority. 

Company does not assume any duty of inspecting Customer’s lines, wires, 

switches, grounding electrodes, or other equipment. Without limiting the 

foregoing sentence, Company may decline to interconnect its delivery 

system facilities with any of Customer’s electrical installation that is known 

to be hazardous under applicable codes or that is of such character that 

satisfactory delivery service cannot be provided consistent with good utility 

practice, or where a known dangerous condition exists and for as long as it 

exists. The providing of delivery service by Company does not 

indicate that Company has inspected Customer’s electrical installation 

and pronounced it safe or adequate. If service methods other than the 

examples outlined in this booklet are required, the Customer is to 

obtain written Company approval prior to letting bids or installing 

equipment. 

100.03 Company Service Area 


9

100.04 Security and Safety 

100.04.01 Radio and Television Antennas 

Antennas for radio, radio transmitter (including citizen band or amateur), or 

televisions shall not be erected over or under Company’s overhead electric 

lines, nor shall they be attached to Company’s poles or other equipment. 

Antennas should be located as far as practicable from Company’s lines and 

in a place where they may not accidentally fall into energized wires. To do 

otherwise may result in serious accidents, damage to property or poor radio 

or television reception. The attachment of antenna guying systems to poles 

carrying Company’s conductors is prohibited. Such attachments will be 

removed immediately upon discovery by Company. 

100.04.02 Attachments to Company Facilities 

Company does not permit any attachments (such as wires, ropes, signs, 

banners, or radio equipment) to Company facilities by others except when 

authorized in writing by Company. 

Company may without notice and without liability remove 

unauthorized attachments to Company facilities. 

100.04.03 Company’s Locks or Seals 

It is standard practice by Company to install locks or seals on all meters, 

service enclosures, padmount transformers, padmount switchgear, 

unmetered service wireways, or other equipment. Only Company agents 

and authorized persons shall remove a seal or lock. 

100.04.04 Tampering 

Tampering with a meter or metering equipment or using any method which 

permits the flow of unmetered energy to a premise violates the laws of the 

State of Texas and may lead to disconnection of service, prosecution, or 

both. Company shall not be liable to Customer for any injuries that 

result from such tampering. 

100.05 Standard Delivery Service 

100.05.01 General 

Company provides delivery service at the Company’s standard voltages in 

accordance with Company’s facilities extension policy, and not all standard 

voltages are available at every location. If Customer requests a voltage 

which is non-standard or not available for a specific load or location, such 

voltage may be provided by Company at the Company’s discretion and at 

the expense of the requesting party. Company does not guarantee that 

facilities providing non-standard service (e.g. transformers) are readily 

available and extended outages may result. 


10

100.05.02 Standard Secondary Voltages 

Single Phase 

Three Phase 

120 2W --- 

--- 120/208 4W, Y 

120/240 3W 120/240 4W, Δ 

240 2W 240 3W, Δ 

240/480 3W 240/480 4W, Δ 

--- 277/480 4W, Y 

480 2W 480 3W, Δ 

2400 2W 2400 3W, Δ 

2400/4160 4W, Y 

4160 3W, Y 

100.05.03 Request for Ungrounded 3 Wire, 3 Phase Service 

3 wire, 3 phase service at 240V, 480V and 2400V, shall be grounded unless 

the Customer requests, in writing, that the service be ungrounded (i.e. one 

service conductor is grounded at the distribution transformer and at the 

Customer’s premises grounding electrode system). See 500.06.07, page 

41 for meter sockets used on ungrounded services. Contact Company for 

details. 

3 wire, 3 phase service at 240V and 480V is only available from overhead 

transformers. 3 wire, 3 phase service at 2400V is available from overhead 

and padmounted transformers in limited size ranges. New Customers or 

existing Customers adding load should check with the appropriate Company 

representative on availability of service at 2400 volts from overhead or 

padmounted transformers. 

100.05.04 120/208 V, Single Phase, 3 Wire Network Service (Non-Standard) 

Existing Secondary Service Customers served 120/208 volt, single phase, 3 

wire from an underground network distribution system are limited to a 

service entrance capacity of 60 amperes to prevent unbalanced current 

conditions. For services greater than 60 amperes, the Customer must 

wire for full 4 wire, wye service. See Figure 5-H, page 59. 

Three phase 120/208 volt service from padmounted transformation that will 

be later split up into single phase used in either residential or commercial 

applications shall be treated as a commercial service. The point of delivery 

will be at the secondary terminals of the transformer. 

100.05.05 Point of Delivery (POD) 

Customer’s electrical installation must be arranged so that the location of 

the point of delivery allows Company to provide safe and reliable delivery 

service, taking into consideration the location of existing Company facilities 

and construction needed to connect Customer’s electric installation to 

Company system. 


11

Any change from the Company designated point of delivery is subject to 

payment by Customer based on any added costs to reach the new 

designated point. 

100.05.06 Easements, Rights-of-Way and Space Requirements 

Customer must grant to or secure for Company, at Customer’s expense, 

any rights-of-way or easements on property owned or controlled by 

Customer necessary for Company to install delivery system facilities for the 

sole purpose of delivering electric power and energy to Customer. 

Customer must provide, without cost to Company, suitable space on 

Customer’s premises for the installation of delivery system facilities 

necessary to deliver electric power and energy to Customer and for 

installation of Company’s metering equipment and the meter. To obtain 

standards on suitable space requirements, contact Company. 

Company may inspect Customer provided space before installing electric 

facilities. 

100.05.07 Loads Exceeding 3000 Amperes 

Standard delivery service at 600 volts and less may be limited to 3000 

amperes of load through a single Customer owned service entrance. 

Company may require loads exceeding 3000 amperes to be served with two 

or more adjacent services at one POD with totalized metering. 

100.05.08 Customer’s Electrical Load 

Customer must take reasonable actions to control the use of electric power 

and energy so that Customer’s electrical load at the point of delivery is in 

reasonable balance. 

100.05.09 Sensitive Equipment Protection 

Customers planning the installation of electric equipment such as 

computers, communication equipment, electronic control devices, motors, 

etc, the performance of which may be adversely affected by voltage 

fluctuations, distorted 60 hertz wave forms, or single phase events are 

responsible for providing and installing the necessary facilities, including 

protective equipment, to limit these adverse effects. 

100.05.10 4 Wire, 120/240V, 3 Phase Service 

Service at 120/240 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire delta is available from overhead 

transformers. Availability of this service voltage from padmounted 

transformers is very limited. New Customers or existing Customers adding 

load should check with Company on availability of service at this voltage 

from a padmount transformer. 


12

SECTION 200 – CLEARANCES 

200.01 Texas Law & OSHA Regulations 

To ensure safety and the protection of the public, Chapter 752 of the Texas 

Health and Safety Code makes it unlawful for unauthorized persons to 

move or be placed or bring any part of a tool, equipment, machine, or 

material within six (6) feet of live overhead high voltage lines. Contractors 

and owners are legally responsible for the safety of construction workers 

under this law. This law carries both criminal and civil liability. 

Additionally, OSHA Regulations restrict unauthorized persons from 

approaching or operating any equipment or machines within ten (10) 

feet of live overhead high voltage lines. 

For lines to be turned off, moved, or other arrangements, call your Retail 

Electric Provider. 

200.02 Local Codes 

Some local Electrical Codes require structures to be located a safe distance 

away from live overhead high voltage lines as defined by the National 

Electrical Safety Code. 

200.03 Clearances for Service Drop 

See Figure 2-A, page 14. 

200.04 Clearances of Swimming Pools from Overhead Facilities 

Before installation of a pool, contact Company to review clearances to 

overhead facilities. See Figure 2-B, page 15. 

200.05 Clearances of Swimming Pools from Underground Facilities 

Before installation of a pool, contact Company to review clearances to 

underground facilities. See Figure 2-C, page 16. 

200.06 Clearances of Padmounted Transformers from Buildings 

Padmounted transformers shall be installed to meet the spatial separations 

to buildings set forth in Figure 2-D, page 17. No transformers shall be 

installed within the drip line of a building unless installed in a 

transformer vault meeting the requirements of Article 450 of the 

National Electrical Code. 

200.07 Screening Clearances Around Padmounted Equipment 

See Figure 2-E, page 18. 


13

CLEARANCES FOR SERVICE DROP 

FIGURE 2-A 


14

CLEARANCE OF SWIMMING POOLS 

FROM OVERHEAD FACILITIES 

FIGURE 2-B 

REQUIREMENT 

OVERHEAD 

GUYS OR 

NEUTRAL 

BUNDLED OR 

CABLED 

SECONDARY 

OR SERVICE 

OPEN WIRE 

SECONDARY 

OR SERVICE 

POLE LINE OR 

PRIMARY 

CONDUCTOR 

A 27’ 26.5’ 28’ 30’ 

B 19’ 18.5’ 20’ 22’ 

C 20’ 19’ 21.5’ 23.5’ 

D 10’ 10’ See Dim. A or See Dim. A or 

B above B above 

The above clearance values are based upon the requirements of the National 

Electrical Safety Code with allowances for worst case conditions. Actual 

clearance requirements vary with conductor size and type, ambient air temperature, and 

other factors. The values shown above are meant to be a guideline. When clearances 

are less than indicated in the above table, the Customer should contact Company 

for exact requirements based on field conditions. 

A - Clearance in any direction from the water level, edge of pool, base of diving 

platform, or anchored raft. 

B - Clearance in any direction to diving platform, tower, water slide or other fixed, pool 

related structure. 

C - Vertical clearance over adjacent land. 

D - Horizontal clearance from edge of pool, base of diving platform, or anchored raft. 

Any distance less than the horizontal clearance requires clearances “A” and/or “B” 

to be met. Any distance greater than the horizontal clearance requires only 

clearance “C” to be met. 

Note: Local codes and ordinances may not permit conductors to pass over pools or 

adjacent equipment or fixtures. 


15

CLEARANCE OF SWIMMING POOLS FROM 

UNDERGROUND FACILITIES 

FIGURE 2-C 

NOTES: 

1. A swimming pool or its auxiliary equipment or water pipes shall not be installed 

within 5 feet of direct buried cables. 

2. Where a swimming pool must be installed within 5 feet of the direct buried service, 

the service shall be installed in a conduit from the service connection point to the 

meter. 

3. Padmounted equipment shall be located 10 feet or more from the water’s edge. 

4. Local requirements may require greater clearances. 

5. For swimming pool clearances to overhead facilities, see Figure 2-B, page 15. 


16

CLEARANCES OF PADMOUNTED TRANSFORMERS 

FROM BUILDINGS 

FIGURE 2-D 

Notes 

1. Clearance from building walls shall comply with the clearance table. All dimensions are minimal dimensions. 

2. Where there are building eaves or overhangs within 25’-0”above ground, clearance shall be measured 

horizontally beginning from the edge of the eave or overhang. 

3. Fire resistive building walls include brick and masonry structures that have a 2 hour fire rating. 

4. Clearance to building doors, windows, vents and fire escapes to be measured radially. 

5. Liquid flow if area surrounding transformer should be away from building. Where ground is flat or slopes 

toward building, a dike sufficient to contain all transformer oil for transformers 500 KVA and larger shall be 

provided. 

6. Clearances are measured from pad edge to building wall, opening, overhang or fire escape unless a 

containment dike is utilized. If a containment dike is utilized, clearance is measured from the dike. 

7. Clearances from windows and vents above transformer are measured radially from closest point on 

transformer. 

8. Padmounted transformers shall be positioned such that hotstick use is not required on the side facing the 

building. If hotstick use is required on the building side, clearances shown in Figure 2E, page 18 shall be 

maintained. 

9. There should not be any above ground obstructions, such as shrubs, cooling towers, gas meters, fencing, etc. 

within 5’-0” of pad or overhangs above pad facilities. Reference Figure 2-E, page 18 for screening clearances 

around padmounted equipment. 

10. There should not be any piping or conduit under the pad. (Exception: Mutually agreed upon communication 

conduits other that those entering the transformer). 

11. Transformers shall not obstruct fire lane. 

12. It is the owner’s responsibility to comply with any insurance regulations affecting the premises. 


17

SCREENING CLEARANCES AROUND 

PADMOUNTED EQUIPMENT 

FIGURE 2-E 

NOTES: 

1. Clearances to building walls shall be the greater of (1) the clearances listed in 

Figure 2-D, page 17 for oil filled equipment, (2) 10 feet if hot stick use is required on 

this side of equipment, or (3) 5 feet if hot stick use is not required on this side of 

equipment. Contact Company for determination of hot stick usage. 

2. A minimum of 5 feet clearance is allowed if hot stick use is not required at this 

location. 

3. Gate shall open outward and the width shall be no less than 10 feet. 

4. Where ground is flat or slopes toward building, a dike sufficient to contain all oil for 

transformers 500 kVA and larger shall be provided. Contact Company for details. 

5. When transformers are installed, screening walls shall provide adequate ventilation. 


18

SECTION 300 – OVERHEAD SERVICE 

300.01 General 

Company provides, installs, and maintains service drop to point of delivery 

approved by Company. Customer provides point of attachment which is 

acceptable to Company so that service drop meets requirements of all 

applicable codes. 

300.02 Typical Permanent Service Drop 


300.03 Overhead Service Attachments 

See Figure 3-B, page 22. 

300.04 Maximum Service Drop Length for Residential Services 

See Figure 3-C, page 23. 

300.05 Overhead Service to a Service Mast 

See Figure 3-D, page 24. 

300.06 Overhead Service to a Permanent Meter Pole 


300.07 Overhead Service to a Wall Mount Meter 

See Figure 3-F, page 26. 

300.08 Overhead Service to Two or Three Meters 

See Figure 3-G, page 27. 

300.09 Overhead Service to Four or More Secondary Service Meters 

See Figure 3-H, page 28. 

300.10 Overhead Three Wire Delta Services 

See Figure 3-I, page 29. 


19

300.11 Overhead Service to Mobile or Manufactured Homes 

Overhead service to a mobile home shall be made in a manner as depicted 

in Figure 3-E, page 25 with a permanent meter pole. The meter socket shall 

not be mounted directly to the mobile home. 

Manufactured homes, if equipped with factory installed service equipment, 

may be connected directly if all three of the following requirements are met. 

(1) The manufactured home is secured to a permanent foundation by an 

approved anchoring system. Compliance with this requirement may be 

evidenced with one of the following: 

(a) the manufactured home structure is included in the real property 

deed, 

(b) the foundation and anchoring system is designed by a Texas 

licensed engineer or Texas licensed architect, or 

(c) an affidavit from a home inspector is provided verifying that the 

foundation and anchoring system meets the Texas Administrative 

Code foundation and anchoring requirements for Manufactured 

Housing (TAC Title 10, Part 1, Chapter 80). 

(2) The service equipment complies with Article 230 of the National 

Electrical Code (NEC). 

(3) Bonding and grounding comply with Article 250 of the NEC. 

Manufactured home installations that meet the above requirements may be 

served as depicted in Figure 3-D, page 24. Service mast shall be of 

sufficient strength to support service drop. 

Contact Company prior to installation of mobile or manufactured homes to 

determine service method. 

300.12 Other Overhead Services 

For any situation that is not addressed, please contact Company for specific 

instructions. 

Note: For temporary overhead service, see Section 600, page 62 and 

Figure 6-A, page 63. 


20

TYPICAL PERMANENT SERVICE DROP 

FIGURE 3-A 

NOTES: 

1. Service drop (conductors, service grips and service connectors) owned, installed 

and connected to service entrance conductors by Company. 

2. See Figure 3-C, page 23 for maximum length of residential service drop. For all 

other services contact Company for maximum service lengths. Reduced distance or 

higher attachment point may be required for large service or to maintain minimum 

clearances. 

3. Customer installs service drop attachment of adequate strength for attachment of 

Company’s service drop conductors. See Figure 3-B, page 22. 

4. Service entrance conductors (minimum # 8 CU or # 6 Al) provided and installed by 

Customer, shall extend 24” or the minimum length required by local ordinance 

outside the service head for connection to service drop. Phase conductors to have 

black insulation. Neutral conductor to be marked white or bare. 

5. Service raceway and service entrance conductors to be owned, maintained, and 

installed by Customer. 

6. Meter socket shall be provided, installed and maintained by Customer. 

7. Customer’s installation to meet the requirements of all applicable codes and local 

ordinances. 

8. Customer’s grounding electrode conductor (#6 Cu min.) shall originate in the service 

entrance equipment and extend to an approved ground electrode. The grounding 

electrode conductor is permitted to be routed through the meter socket enclosure but 

shall not terminate within. Company reserves the right to refuse installation of 

service upon observing an unsafe Customer connection. 

9. Insulated conduit bushings are required for raceways terminating in the meter 

socket. 

10. The use of flexible metallic conduit, liquid tight flexible metallic conduit, and liquid 

tight flexible non-metallic conduit for service entrance raceway is prohibited, unless 

approved by the local inspecting authority. 

11. Not for 3 wire delta services. See Figure 3-I, page 29. 


21

OVERHEAD SERVICE ATTACHMENTS 

FIGURE 3-B 

NOTES: 


Company’s service drop conductors. 

2. Screw-in type service attachments are not allowed. 

3. Service mast supporting service drop to be minimum 2” rigid steel or 2 ½” IMC 

conduit with no coupling above top conduit clamp. EMT is not acceptable for service 

mast. 

4. See Figure 3-I, page 29 for 3 wire delta services. 


22

MAXIMUM SERVICE DROP LENGTH 

FOR RESIDENTIAL SERVICES 

FIGURE 3-C 

FOR # 2 AL TRIPLEX SERVICE CABLE NOTE 2 

GROUND 

MAXIMUM LENGTH (FT) 

CLEARANCE 

ATTACHMENT HEIGHT (FT) 

REQUIRED (FT) 

12 11 

NOTES 3,5 

10.5 

10 NOTE 3 100 95 85 


14 13 12 

12 95 85 65 


17 16 15 

15 85 75 50 

NOTES: 

1. See Figure 2-A, page 14 for required clearance for single phase 120/240 volt service 

drop. 

2. Distances based on #2 aluminum triplex service drop. Contact Company for 

requirements on larger or longer services. 

3. Prior approval by Company is required before the exceptions on Figure 2-A, page 14 

may be used. 

4. Contact Company on commercial services or any service over 100 feet in length. 

5. Attachment height of 10.5 feet is based on 6 inch allowance of drip loop below 

attachment point and the drop loop maintaining 10 foot clearance requirement. 


23

OVERHEAD SERVICE TO A SERVICE MAST 

FIGURE 3-D 

NOTES: 

1. Service drop provided and installed by 

Company. 

2. Customer installs service drop attachment 

of adequate strength for attachment of 

Company’s service drop conductors. See 

Figure 3-B, page 22. 

3. Meter socket shall be provided, installed 

and maintained by Customer. Transockets, 

when required, shall be provided by 

Company and installed and maintained by 

Customer. Socket must be securely 

anchored to wall. 

4. Service mast shall be of sufficient height for 

the service drop to meet minimum 

clearances (see Figure 2-A, page 14). A 2” 

rigid steel or 2 ½” IMC conduit minimum 

with no coupling above top conduit clamp is 

required. EMT is not acceptable for service 

mast. Service mast to be of sufficient 

strength to support service drop. 

5. Mast roof kit installed by Customer. 

6. Install a 2” X 6” between rafters to reinforce roof decking for additional mast support. 

7. Install a conduit hanger above meter socket for mast support. 

8. Service entrance conductors (minimum # 8 Cu or # 6 Al) provided and installed by 

Customer, shall extend 24” or the minimum length required by local ordinance 

outside of service head for connection to Company service drop. Phase conductors 

to have black insulation. Neutral conductor to be marked white or bare. 

9. Customer’s installation to meet requirements of all applicable codes and local 

ordinances. 



electrode conductor is permitted to be routed through the meter socket enclosure, 

but shall not terminate within. Company reserves the right to refuse installation of 

service upon observing an unsafe Customer connection. 

11. Insulated conduit bushings are required for raceways terminating in the meter 

socket. 

12. Customer shall install additional mast support (guying or other suitable support) to 

support the tension of the service drop cable if the service drop attachment (item 2) 

is more than 5’ above the roof line. 






24

NOTES: 

OVERHEAD SERVICE TO A 

PERMANENT METER POLE 

FIGURE 3-E 

1. Service drop provided and installed by Company. 

2. Customer installs service drop attachment of 

adequate strength for attachment of Company’s 

service drop conductors. See Figure 3-B, page 22. 

3. Meter socket shall be provided, installed and 

maintained by Customer. Transockets, when 

required, shall be provided by Company and 

installed and maintained by Customer. Socket must 

be securely anchored. 

4. Service entrance conductors (minimum #8 Cu or #6 

Al) and service raceway provided and installed by 

Customer, shall extend 24” or the minimum length 

required by local ordinance outside service head 

for connection to Company service drop. Phase 

conductors to have black insulation. Neutral 

conductor to be marked white or bare. 

5. Customer to provide and install support for service 

attachment and meter socket. Creosote pole (or 

equal) to be 5” minimum diameter at top. Steel pipe 

to be 4.5” minimum outside diameter and a 

minimum thickness of 0.237”. Steel tube to be 4” 

square and a minimum thickness of 0.25”. Support 

to be sufficient height for the service drop to meet 

minimum clearances (see Figure 2-A, page 14). 

6. Wood pole to be set in 4 feet of concrete where soil conditions are less than rock. 

Steel pipe or tube to be set in 4 feet of concrete. 

7. Weatherproof service switch or breaker panel to be provided and installed by 

Customer. 



electrode conductor is permitted to be routed through the meter socket enclosure but 

shall not terminate within. Company reserves the right to refuse installation of service 

upon observing an unsafe Customer connection. 

9. Customer’s installation to meet the requirements of all applicable codes and local 

ordinances. 

10. Insulated conduit bushings are required for raceways terminating in the meter socket. 

11. The use of flexible metallic conduit, liquid tight flexible metallic conduit, and liquid tight 

flexible non-metallic conduit for service entrance raceway is prohibited unless 


12. The use of Schedule 40 or 80 PVC for service mast not supporting service drop is 

allowed unless prohibited by the local inspecting authority. 

13. For overhead service to mobile homes, see Section 300.11, page 20. 



25

OVERHEAD SERVICE TO A 

WALL MOUNTED METER 

FIGURE 3-F 

NOTES: 

1. Service drop provided and installed by 

Company. 

2. Customer installs service drop attachment 

of adequate strength for attachment of 

Company’s service drop conductors. See 

Figure 3-B, page 22. 

3. Meter socket shall be provided, installed 

and maintained by customer. Transockets, 

when required, shall be provided by 

Company and installed and maintained by 

Customer. Socket must be securely 

anchored to wall. 

4. Service entrance conductors (minimum #8 

Cu or #6 Al) and service raceway provided 

and installed by Customer, shall extend 24” 

or the minimum length required by local 

ordinance outside service head for 

connection to service drop. Phase 

conductors to have black insulation. 

Neutral conductor to be marked white or 

bare. 

5. Customer’s grounding electrode conductor 

(#6 Cu min.) shall originate in the service 

entrance equipment and extend to an 

approved grounding electrode. The 

grounding electrode conductor is permitted 

to be routed through the meter socket 

enclosure, but shall not terminate within. 

Company reserves the right to refuse 

installation of service upon observing an 

unsafe Customer connection. 

6. Customer’s installation to meet all requirements of all applicable codes and local 

ordinances. 

7. Two or more conduit straps shall be provided to support conduit. Socket must be 

securely anchored to wall. 



flexible non-metallic conduit for service entrance raceway is prohibited, unless 






26

OVERHEAD SERVICE TO 

TWO OR THREE METERS 

FIGURE 3-G 

NOTES: 

1. Meter sockets shall be provided, installed and maintained by the Customer. Transockets, 

when required, shall be provided by Company and installed and maintained by Customer. 

Sockets must be securely attached to wall. Customer installs service drop attachment of 

adequate strength for attachment of Company’s service drop conductors (see Figure 3-B, 

page 22). Service landing must provide service drop clearances required in Figure 2-A, 

page 14. For multifamily installations, see Figure 5-E, page 56. 

2. Service head, service raceway and service entrance conductors provided, installed and 

maintained by Customer. 

3. Two inch rigid steel conduit minimum for service mast supporting service drop. No 

coupling in the mast may be at or above the roof line. Service mast shall be of sufficient 

strength to support the service conductors. 

4. Service entrance conductors to extend from weatherhead to service landing, but in no 

case less than 36” minimum. Service head shall be located within 3’ of service landing 

attachment. 

5. It is Customer’s responsibility to meet requirements of all applicable codes and 

ordinances. 

6. For 240 volt four wire delta services, the “power leg” must be connected to the right hand 

terminals in meter sockets and be identified by orange insulation or painted orange at the 

weatherhead and in meter sockets. 

7. Service heads must be grouped for service drop. 

8. No more than three meter sockets (with a maximum of six service masts total) will be 

served in this manner. See Figure 3-H, page 28 for installations exceeding these 

requirements. 

9. Insulated conduit bushings are required for raceways terminating in the meter base. 


flexible non-metallic conduit for service entrance raceway is prohibited unless approved 

by the local inspecting authority. 



12. Each socket must be clearly and permanently marked as indicated in Section 500.11, 

page 43. 



27

OVERHEAD SERVICE TO FOUR OR 

MORE SECONDARY SERVICE METERS 

FIGURE 3-H 

NOTES: 

1. A service enclosure (see 500.08, 

page 43), installed by Customer on 

outside wall of building, is required 

for Secondary Service installations 

through 2500 amperes with four or 

more meter sockets. See Figure 

3-G, page 27 for installations of less 

than four meter sockets. Contact 

Company for determination of 

service enclosure requirements. For 

multifamily installations, see Figure 

5-E, page 56. 

2. Service head, service raceway and main service entrance conductors provided, installed 

and maintained by Customer. Line side conductors from weatherheads are to contact 

the center of bus bars. Load conductors to meter sockets to be connected equally on 

both ends of bus bars to obtain full current rating. 

3. Conductors and raceways provided, installed and maintained by Customer. 

4. Meter sockets shall be provided, installed and maintained by the Customer. 

Transockets, when required, shall be provided by Company and installed and 

maintained by Customer. Sockets must be securely attached to wall. 

5. For use on service voltages through 480 volts. 

6. Service entrance conductors to be continuous from meter sockets to service enclosure. 

7. Customer provides all connectors and makes all connections in the enclosure. 

Approved connectors, plated 3/8” minimum diameter bolts, belleville washers, and 

oxide inhibitor are required for connections to plated aluminum bus. 

8. See Figure 2-A, page 14 for service drop clearances. 

9. Service switches, when installed near the service enclosure, should not interfere with 

service to an occupancy. 

10. Service entrance conductors to extend from weatherhead to service landing, but in no 

case less than 36” minimum. Service head(s) shall be located within 3’ of service 

landing attachment. No more than six service masts allowed without prior Company 

approval. 

11. Customer installs service drop attachment of adequate strength for Company’s service 

drop conductors. See Figure 3-B, page 22. 

12. Insulated conduit bushings are required for raceways terminating in the meter base. 




14. Each socket must be clearly and permanently marked indicated in Section 500.11, page 

43. 





28

OVERHEAD THREE WIRE DELTA SERVICES 

FIGURE 3-I 

NOTES: 

1. Service drop conductor (quadraplex) provided, installed, and connected by Company. 


Company’s service drop conductors. See Figure 3B, page 22. 

3. Service mast shall be of sufficient height for the service drop to meet minimum 

clearances (see Figure 2-A, page 14). A 2” rigid steel or 2 ½” IMC conduit minimum 

with no coupling is required. EMT is not acceptable for service mast. Service mast to 

be of sufficient strength to support service drop. 

4. Customer to install conduit grounding clamp for bonding service drop messenger to 

service raceway. Company shall connect service messenger to the neutral at the 

transformer pole, ground at every intermediate pole, and connect to the conduit 

grounding clamp at the service raceway. 

5. Meter base enclosure and service raceways shall be connected to the grounded 

system conductor or to the grounding electrode conductor as per the NEC. 


29

SECTION 400 – UNDERGROUND SERVICE 


Underground service is provided to Customer who meets Company requirements 

set out herein and pays to Company any amount due. Cash payments or other 

arrangements satisfactory to Company are made by Customer prior to Company’s 

beginning construction. All underground facilities included in the cost estimates 

are provided, installed, owned and maintained by Company. 

Where Company provides delivery service underground, Company retains the 

right to limit delivery service to such underground, network, and/or dual feed 

distribution systems. 

400.02 Underground Service Lateral for Underground Residential Customers and 

Secondary Service Customers Served from Overhead Transformation 

The Company owns and maintains the service lateral conductor and raceway. 

The Company installs the service lateral conductor. The Customer has the option 

of installing the raceway connecting the Company’s distribution system to 

Customer’s point of delivery (reference Figure 5A, pages 44 & 45). Where 

Customer installs or plans to install obstructions (asphalt or concrete walk, 

driveway, retaining wall, paved parking lot, etc.) in the path of Company’s service 

lateral, Company will require Customer to provide and install raceway for 

Company’s service lateral to Company specifications. Should Customer not 

install necessary raceway for service lateral prior to the installation of obstructions 

or should Customer’s service route change after the installation of obstructions 

where no raceway exists for new service lateral location, Customer must make the 

necessary raceway installations prior to service lateral installations. Contact 

Company for details. 

Customer is to establish final grade before service lateral can be installed. Any 

change in final grade which results in the lowering or raising of service lateral 

raceway or associated equipment is at the expense of the Customer. 

When installed by Company, service lateral will be run in a straight line. A clear 

path wide enough to permit passage of excavation equipment is required. It is the 

Customer’s responsibility to clear all obstructions before service lateral installation 

starts. Customer is also responsible for marking or exposing any plumbing. The 

Company will not be responsible for damaging private plumbing. 

Company owned service lateral raceways are to be located on the exterior of the 

building. 


30

400.03 Underground Services to Secondary Service Customers Fed from 

Padmounted Transformers, Handholes, or Service Pedestals 

Secondary Service Customers fed from padmounted transformers, handholes, or 

service pedestals are to furnish, install, own and maintain the service lateral 

conductors including raceway(s) to the device terminals. Customer will furnish 

and Company will install connectors and connect to terminals. Where fed from 

padmounted transformers, 3 or 4 wire delta service is not available, and 

Customer conductor size shall be limited to 1000 kCMIL. See Figure 5A, pages 

44 & 45 for Company-Customer responsibility. 

400.04 Underground Service, Self Contained Meter Wiring 


400.05 Underground Service, One Residential Meter 

See Figure 4-B, page34. 

400.06 Underground Service, One Secondary Service Meter 

See Figure 4-C, page 35. 

400.07 Underground Service, Two or More Secondary Service Meters With Service 

Enclosure 

See figure 4-D page 36. 

400.08 Underground Service, Two of More Secondary Service Meters With 

Meterpack 


400.09 Underground Service, Meter Pedestal 

See figure 4-F, page 38. 

400.10 Underground Service to Mobile or Manufactured Homes 

Underground service to a mobile home shall be made in a manner as depicted in 

Figure 4-F, page 38. The meter socket shall not be mounted directly to the mobile 

home. 

Manufactured homes, if equipped with factory installed service equipment, may 

be connected as depicted in Figure 4-B, page 34 if all three of the following 

requirements are met. 

(1) The manufactured home is secured to a permanent foundation by an 

approved anchoring system. Compliance with this requirement may be 

evidenced with one of the following: 

(a) the manufactured home structure is included in the real property deed, 

(b) the foundation and anchoring system is designed by a Texas licensed 

engineer or Texas licensed architect, or 

(c) an affidavit from a home inspector is provided verifying that the 

foundation and anchoring system meets the Texas Administrative 

Code foundation and anchoring requirements for Manufactured 

Housing (TAC Title 10, Part 1, Chapter 80). 


31

(2) The service equipment complies with Article 230 of the National Electrical 

Code (NEC). 

(3) Bonding and grounding comply with Article 250 of the NEC. 

Contact Company prior to installation of mobile or manufactured homes to 

determine service method. 

400.11 Other Underground Services 

For any situation that is not addressed, please contact Company for specific 

instructions. 

Notes: 

1. For temporary underground service, see Section 600, page 62 and Figure 

6-B, page 64. 

2. For underground line locating services, please call 811. 


32


SELF CONTAINED METER WIRING 

FIGURE 4-A 

NOTES: 

1. Company owned service lateral conductors are installed by Company and line side 

(top) connections made up by Company. Customer’s service conductors are 

installed and connected in socket by Customer. Customer’s load conductors for 

self contained meter sockets may not exit top half of meter socket enclosure. 

2. Meter socket shall be provided, installed, and maintained by the customer. 

3. An insulated conduit bushing is required for raceways terminating in the meter 

socket. 

4. Customer’s grounding electrode conductor (#6 Cu min.) shall originate in the 

service entrance equipment and extend to at approved ground electrode. The 

grounding electrode conductor is permitted to be routed through the meter socket 

enclosure, but shall not terminate within. Company reserves the right to refuse 

installation of service contingent upon inspection of Customer’s grounding 

connections. 

5. Reference section 400.02, page 30 for Company or Customer responsibility for 

service lateral raceway installation. Schedule 80 PVC or Schedule 40 PVC (if 

permitted by local code) is required for underground service lateral raceway. Rigid 

steel, IMC, or EMC is not allowed. 




7. Two 2-hole straps may be required by the inspecting authority. 


33


ONE RESIDENTIAL METER 

FIGURE 4-B 

Notes: 

1. Company owned service lateral conductors 

are installed by Company and line side 

(top) connections made up by Company. 

Customer’s service conductors are installed 

and connected in socket by Customer. 

2. Meter socket shall be provided, installed, 

and maintained by the Customer. 

Transockets, when required, shall be 

provided by Company and installed and 

maintained by Customer. Customer load 

conductors may not exit top half of 

meter socket enclosure. 

3. An insulated conduit bushing is required for 

raceways terminating in meter socket. 




approved ground electrode. The grounding 

electrode conductor is permitted to be 

routed through the meter socket enclosure, 

but shall not terminate within. Company 

reserves the right to refuse installation of 

service contingent upon inspection of 

Customer’s grounding connections. 

5. Reference section 400.02, page 30 for 

Company or Customer responsibility for 

service lateral raceway installation. 

Schedule 80 PVC or Schedule 40 PVC (if 

permitted by local code) is required for 

underground service lateral raceway. Rigid 

steel, IMC, or EMT is not allowed. 

Contact Company prior to installation to 

determine service lateral raceway size (two 

inch is minimum). 

6. The use of flexible metallic conduit, liquid 

tight flexible metallic conduit, and liquid tight 

flexible non-metallic conduit for service 

entrance raceway is prohibited, unless 


7. Two 2-hole straps may be required by the 

inspecting authority. 


34


ONE SECONDARY SERVICE METER 

FIGURE 4-C 

Notes: 

1. See Figure 5A, pages 44 & 45 for 

Company-Customer responsibility of source 

and load conductors and connection of 

these conductors. 

2. Meter socket shall be provided, installed, 

and maintained by the Customer. 

Transockets, when required, shall be 

provided by Company and installed and 

maintained by Customer. All meter sockets 

(excluding transockets) require the line side 

conductors to be connected to the top 

meter socket terminals. Customer load 

conductors for self contained meter 

sockets may not exit top half of meter 

socket enclosure. 

3. An insulated conduit bushing is required for 

raceways terminating in meter socket. 




approved ground electrode. The grounding 

electrode conductor is permitted to be 

routed through the meter socket enclosure, 

but shall not terminate within. Company 

reserves the right to refuse installation of 

service contingent upon inspection of 

Customer’s grounding connections. 

5. Reference section 400.02, page 30 and 

400.03, page 31 for Company or Customer 

responsibility for service lateral raceway 

installation. 

6. Schedule 80 PVC is required for Company 

owned underground service lateral 

raceways. Rigid steel, IMC, or EMT is not 

allowed. 

7. The use of flexible metallic conduit, liquid 

tight flexible metallic conduit, and liquid tight 

flexible non-metallic conduit for service 

entrance raceway is prohibited unless 


8. Two 2-hole straps may be required by the 

inspecting authority. 


35

UNDERGROUND SERVICE, TWO OR MORE SECONDARY 

SERVICE METERS WITH SERVICE ENCLOSURE 

FIGURE 4-D 

NOTES: 

1. A service enclosure (see 500.08 page 43) for Secondary Service installations through 

2500 amperes and two or more meter sockets, is required. Service enclosure shall be 

installed by Customer on outside wall of building. Contact Company for determination 

of service enclosure requirements. For multi-family installations, see Figure 5-E, page 

56. 

2. Load conductors to meter sockets to be connected equally on both ends of bus bars to 

obtain full current rating of bus bars. Line conductors shall be connected to center of 

bus bars. 

3. Conductors, gutters and raceways provided, installed and maintained by Customer. 

4. Meter sockets shall be provided, installed and maintained by Customer. Transockets, 

when required, shall be provided by Company and installed by Customer. 

5. For use on service voltages through 480 volts. 

6. Service entrance conductors to be continuous from meter sockets to service enclosure. 

7. Refer to Figure 5-A, pages 44 & 45 for connector/conductor responsibility in service 

enclosures. Approved connectors, plated 3/8” minimum diameter bolts, belleville 

washers, and oxide inhibitor are required for connections to plated aluminum bus. 

8. Meter disconnect switch as allowed by local inspection authority. Verify acceptance 

prior to installation. 

9. For service lateral installation refer to 400.02, page 30. 

10. For underground services, the bottom section of the enclosure shall be reserved for the 

line side conductors. Load side conductors are not permitted to exit bottom. 





13. Schedule 80 PVC is required for Company owned underground service lateral 

raceways. Rigid steel, IMC, or EMT is not allowed. 


page 43. 


36

UNDERGROUND SERVICE, TWO OR MORE 

SECONDARY SERVICE METERS WITH METERPACK 

FIGURE 4-E 

NOTES: 

1. A meterpack, installed by Customer on outside wall of building for Secondary Service 

installations for two or more meter sockets, may be installed in lieu of a service 

enclosure. Contact Company for approval of meterpacks prior to letting bids and 

installing equipment. For multi-family installations, see Figure 5-E, page 56. 

2. Meterpacks provided, installed, and maintained by Customer. 

3. Refer to Figure 5-A, page 45 for connector/conductor responsibility in meterpack. 

4. When utilizing meterpacks to serve Secondary Service Customers, lever operated 

bypass mechanisms are required for each individual meter socket. 

5. For service lateral installation refer to 400.02, page 30. 

6. Meterpacks with meter stacks up to 5 will be permitted under certain conditions. 

Contact Company for details. 




8. Schedule 80 PVC is required for Company owned underground service lateral 

raceways. Rigid steel, IMC, or EMT is not allowed. 

9. It is the Customer’s responsibility to determine local code requirements 

concerning meterpacks with main switches or main circuit breakers prior to 

installing equipment. 


page 43. 


37


METER PEDESTAL 

FIGURE 4-F 

NOTES: 

1. Precast foundation provided by Company. 

2. Above ground meter pedestal provided, installed and maintained by Customer. 

Customer provides anchor clips and bolts with meter pedestal. 

3. Service lateral or source conductors provided and installed as per 400.02, page 30. 

4. Four feet clearance is required from meter side of pedestal to any obstruction or 

structure. 

5. Customer service equipment may be installed on meter pedestal in accordance with all 

applicable codes. 

6. Customer may connect grounding electrode conductor to duplex connector on neutral 

bus. The grounding electrode conductor (#6 Cu min.) shall connect to an approved 

ground electrode. Company reserves the right to refuse installation of service 

contingent upon observing an unsafe Customer connection. 

7. Alternate Design- Customer shall obtain Company approval of any alternate design 

prior to installation. 


38

SECTION 500 - METERING AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT 


Meter sockets shall be provided, installed and maintained by Customer. When the 

ratings of meter sockets are exceeded, transockets shall be used. Transockets, 

when required, shall be provided by Company and installed and maintained by 

Customer. See Figure 5-A, pages 44 & 45 for conductor, connector and 

connection details. 

500.02 Work on Meter Installations 

Electricians and electrical contractors, prior to removing self contained 

meters (excluding 480 V self contained meters) and disconnecting power 

must contact the Company’s electrician voice mailbox at 1-800-518-2374 and 

provide requested information. The information required is provided on 

page 70. 

500.03 Sequence of Connecting Facilities 

The standard sequence for connecting equipment to Company’s existing delivery 

system facilities is as follows: 

COMPANY’S ELECTRICAL DELIVERY SYSTEM 

│ 

POINT OF DELIVERY 

│ 

METERING EQUIPMENT 

│ 

CUSTOMER’S SERVICE EQUIPMENT 

│ 

CUSTOMER’S ELECTRICAL LOAD 

A sequence of facilities other than illustrated here should be done only with prior 

approval of the Company. 

500.04 Location of Meter 

Consistent with good utility practice, a meter and its associated equipment shall be 

installed in a location that facilitates the provision of safe and reliable delivery 

service and accurate measurement and that provides clear working space on all 

sides. The center of the socket opening shall be not less than four feet and 

not more than six feet above the finished grade. All meter locations should be 

as near as possible to the point of delivery. The Company shall have direct, 

unobstructed access to all meter locations. Meter locations likely to become 

obstructed in the future shall be avoided. 

The Company’s electrical delivery system and the metering equipment shall be 

located outside the building. If the Customer requires a location other than outside 

the building or if service conductor and conduit must pass under permanent 

structures, foundations or structure slabs, the Customer shall install and own the 


39

electric service conductors from a Company designated point of delivery outside of 

the building (either secondary transformer terminals or service enclosure) to the 

metering equipment location. See Figure 5-A for typical point of delivery (P.O.D.) 

locations. Metering equipment locations other than outside the building are nonstandard 

and require Company approval prior to installation of the meter. 

Meterbases and transockets are not to be installed on Company poles. This 

applies to both overhead and underground services. 

500.05 Meter Work Space 

Sufficient space in front of, above, below and on each side of meter sockets, 

service enclosures, meterpacks and transockets is necessary for work space for 

connecting and the reading of meters. No obstruction shall be within four feet in 

front of the meter. See NEC Article 110.26 for working spaces. 

500.06 Meter Sockets 

The Customer will provide, install, and maintain self contained meter sockets. 

Transockets, when required, will be provided by Company and installed and 

maintained by Customer. These sockets are to be used exclusively for metering. 

The Company reserves the right to refuse service if the incorrect socket is installed 

or if the socket is not wired correctly. Each connector provided in the meter 

socket is rated for a single aluminum or copper conductor. The number of 

Customer conductors shall not exceed the number of connectors (shall not 

double lug). See Figure 5-B, pages 46-50. Aluminum conductors require wire 

brushing to remove oxide film and an application of oxide inhibitor immediately 

before installation. 

500.06.01 Meter Socket Ratings 

Meter sockets are specified by their continuous current rating and are designed 

for short term (three hours or less) overloads of 125%. Electrical panels are 

specified by their maximum rating and any continuous loads (three hours or 

more) are limited to 80% of this maximum. A 320 ampere meter socket has a 

continuous rating of 320 amperes and a maximum rating of 400 amperes. A 

400 ampere panel has a maximum rating of 400 amperes and a continuous 

rating of 320 amperes. Even though these two items are referred to by different 

numbers, their capabilities are identical and a 320 ampere socket is adequate 

to serve a 400 ampere panel. 

500.06.02 Ganged Meter Socket Assemblies 

Ganged meter socket assemblies are for multi-family residential installations 

and are 120/240 volt, three wire, single phase. Each of the ganged meter 

socket assemblies must be clearly and permanently marked to indicate each 

location to be served prior to the connection of service. See Figures 5-B, 

pages 46-50 and 5-E, page 56 for typical dimensions, examples of layouts, and 

terminal configurations. 


40

500.06.03 Meterpacks 

Meterpacks for multi-family residential and Secondary Service installations will 

be subject to approval by Company. Where the Company owns the service 

lateral conductors to main circuit breaker meterpacks, Company will only 

connect to those main circuit breakers with external connectors and not directly 

to main circuit breakers. Each meter socket must be clearly and permanently 

marked prior to connection of service as indicated in Section 500.11, page 43. 

Contact Company for approval of meterpacks prior to letting bids and 

installing equipment. It is the Customer’s responsibility to determine 

local code requirements concerning meterpacks with main switches or 

main circuit breakers prior to installing equipment. 

500.06.04 Line Side (Source) Connections 

All meter sockets (excluding transockets), whether served overhead or 

underground, require the line-side conductors to be connected to the top meter 

socket terminals. For transocket connections, see 500.06.11, 

page 42. 

500.06.05 Meter Sockets – Secondary Service Less than 200 Amperes 

200 ampere meter sockets specified for use on Secondary Service Customers 

are equipped with a lever operated bypass mechanism to permit installation 

and removal of meters without causing interruption of service. Use of this 

socket is primarily intended to prevent disruption of service to loads typically 

found in many Secondary Service accounts. However, in special cases, a 

non-lever bypass socket (similar to Company number 301399 and 301401) 

may be substituted instead. Contact Company prior to acquiring and 

installing meter socket for more information. See Figure 5-B, pages 46-50. 

When utilizing meterpacks to serve Secondary Service Customers, lever 

operated bypass mechanisms are required for each individual meter socket. 

Contact Company for approval of meterpacks prior to letting bids and 

installing equipment. 

500.06.06 Power Leg for 240 Volt Delta Service 

The phase that is commonly called the “power leg”, “high leg”, “freak leg”, or 

“wild phase” shall always be connected to the right hand meter socket 

terminals including prewired transockets and shall be effectively identified in 

accordance with NEC 230.56 (marked by orange tape or paint). The “power 

leg” shall be connected to the center bus in service enclosures. See Figure 

5-J, page 61. 

500.06.07 Ungrounded Delta – Meter Socket & Transocket Case Ground 

Requirements (Page 48 & 49) 

In addition to grounding requirements established by the National Electrical 

Code and local ordinances, the metal enclosures of meter sockets and 

transockets shall be connected to an eight foot auxiliary ground rod located 

within sight of and as close as practicable to the meter socket. These 

additional grounding requirements are the responsibility of the Customer. 

Customer must remove any ground jumpers or ground straps on the 


41

center (unmetered) phase of the meter socket or transocket to ensure the 

service remains ungrounded. 

500.06.08 Company – Customer Responsibility 

See Figure 5-A, pages 44 & 45. 

500.06.09 Meter and Socket Application Guide 

See Figure 5-B, pages 46-50 or visit: 

http://www.oncor.com/electricity/metering/approvedmeters.aspx 

500.06.10 Meter Socket Connections and Voltages 

See Figure 5-F, page 57; Figure 5-G, page 58; Figure 5-H, page 59; Figure 5-I, 

page 60; and Figure 5-J, page 61 for details. 

500.06.11 Transockets 

When the voltage and/or current limitations of a self-contained meter socket are 

exceeded, the transocket is standard equipment for installations 480 volt and 

less (see Figure 5-B, pages 46-50 for maximum socket ampacity). Transockets 

are not interchangeable; it is critical that the correct transocket be installed for 

each application. Company designers will determine the need for a transocket 

and will order the correct unit. Any transocket can be wired for top or bottom 

feed. If service is underground, the line conductors must enter the bottom of 

the transocket and connect to the bottom terminals. For overhead service, the 

line conductors will enter the top of the transocket and connect to the top 

terminals. Load conductors will always exit opposite the line conductors; no 

conductors will be allowed to cross inside the transocket. The conductor 

entrance and exit location notes of Figure 5-C, page 53 must be followed. Any 

meter wiring modifications necessary to accommodate source location will be 

performed by Company prior to the meter installation. Caution: removing the 

meter from a transocket does not disconnect the service. 

500.06.12 Transocket Configurations and Connection Details 

See Figure 5-C, pages 51-53. 

500.07 Instrument Transformers (C.T.s & V.T.s) 

For installations requiring instrument transformers (I.T.s), the standard methods of 

metering are (1) the transocket or (2) metering at the pad transformer with the I.T.s 

installed in the pad transformer. When the Customer’s service requirements 

exceed the capacity of the transocket and metering at the pad transformer is not 

feasible, the preferred metering method is to use I.T.s installed in a Company 

approved enclosure. Company will provide the I.T.s and, when necessary, the 

enclosure. Customer may be required to install the enclosure and I.T.s. If I.T.s 

should need to be replaced, Customer may be required to install the Company 

provided replacement I.T.s. Where I.T.s are installed in Customer owned 

switchgear, the Customer shall be responsible for having the switchgear 

manufacturer install acceptable I.T.s. Customer must contact Company to 

determine ratio, burden, and accuracy of requirements and must provide certified 

test reports of I.T. performance. 

42 

Copyright 2010 Oncor Electric Delivery Company. All rights reserved

500.08 Service Enclosures (Distribution Can, Terminal Box, Tap Can, Connection 

Box) 

Company may require the use of service enclosures for certain configurations of 

multiple meters. Use of gutters or troughs as connection enclosures is 

discouraged. Service enclosures will be provided by Company and installed by 

Customer. See Figure 3-H, page 28; Figure 4-D, page 36; Figure 5-D, pages 54- 

55; and Figure 5-E, page 56 for details. 

500.09 Padmounted Secondary Enclosures (Connection Enclosures) 36 In. X 36 In. 

(TSN 463082) & 54 In. X 54 In. (TSN 463081) 

Company shall require the use of secondary enclosures for installations where the 

Customer is installing a number of conduits and/or secondary conductors in excess 

of the maximum quantity allowed for the transformer per Construction Standard 

209-420. See Figure 5-A, page 45. 

500.10 Totalizing of Multiple P.O.D.s 

Meters serving installations not considered a single point of delivery shall not be 

totalized. 

500.11 Meter Socket Identification at Multi-Metered Locations 

Meter sockets to multi-metered locations shall be clearly and permanently 

marked on the exterior and interior of the meter socket to indicate each 

apartment or location served. Engraved or stamped metal, weather resistant 

placards shall be used on the exterior of the meter socket and be 

permanently affixed. Permanent marker or other acceptable method shall be 

used to mark the apartment or location on the inside of the meter socket (at a 

location other than the cover) where it can be easily read. 


43

COMPANY – CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITY 

FIGURE 5-A 

METER 

SOCKET 

APPLICATION 

Overhead 

Underground 

Residential 

Underground 

Secondary 

Service 

served from 

Overhead Xfmr 

Underground 

Secondary 

Service 

served from 

Padmounted 

Xfmr 

Underground, 

Apartments, 6 

meters or less 

per service 

lateral 

COMPANY-CUSTOMER SERVICE RESPONSIBILITY 

AT SINGLE METER SOCKET LOCATIONS 

TYPICAL 

P.O.D. (1) REFERENCE 

CONDUCTORS TO AND 

FROM METER SOCKET 

METER SOCKET 

CONNECTIONS 

LOCATION 

LOCATION OWNERSHIP MADE BY 

Service 3-D, 3-E, Source Customer Customer 

Head 3-F, 3I Load Customer Customer 

Meter 

Source Company Company 

Socket 4-B Load Customer Customer 

Meter 

Socket 4-C 

Xfmr 

Terminals 4-C 

Source Company (3) Company 

Load Customer Customer 

Source Customer Customer 

Load Customer Customer 

AT RESIDENTIAL MULTI-FAMILY METER LOCATIONS 

Ganged 

Meter 

Socket or 

Meterpack (4) 

5-E Company furnishes and installs service lateral and 

makes connections on source terminals of ganged 

meter socket or meterpack (4). 

Underground, 

Apartments, 7 

meters or more 

with service 

enclosure (2) 

Service 

Enclosure or 

Meterpack 

(4) 

5-E 

Customer furnishes and installs conductors 

between sockets and service enclosure and makes 

connections in sockets and on load terminals of 

service enclosure. 

Company furnishes and installs service lateral and 

makes connections on source terminals of service 

enclosure or meterpack (4). 

(1) P.O.D. = Point of Delivery as defined in 100.01.19, page 6. 

(2) If 7 meters or more are served, a service enclosure may be used or Company may run 

multiple service laterals if permitted by local code. 

(3) Customer may install raceway as provided for in 400.02, page 30. 

(4) Contact Company for approval of meterpacks prior to letting bids and installing 

equipment. 


44

COMPANY – CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITY (CONTINUED) 

FIGURE 5-A 

COMPANY-CUSTOMER SERVICE RESPONSIBILITY 

FOR SECONDARY SERVICE GROUPED METER LOCATIONS 

METER 

SOCKET 

APPLICATION 

TYPICAL 

P.O.D. (1) 

LOCATION 

REF. COMPANY-CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITY AT METER 

SOCKET AND SERVICE ENCLOSURES 

Overhead 

Secondary Service 

with 2 or more 

meters served 

from 

Overhead Xfmr. 

Service 

Head 

3-G, 

3-H 

Customer furnishes, installs, and connects conductors from 

service head(s) to service enclosure and from service enclosure 

to meter sockets. 

Customer furnishes and installs connectors in service enclosure 

as required. 

Underground 



meters served 

from 

Overhead Xfmr 

Service 

Enclosure or 

Meterpack (3) 

4-D, 

4-E, 

5-D 

Customer furnishes and installs conductors between meter 

sockets and service enclosure, supplies connectors when 

required, and makes connections in meter sockets and service 

enclosure. 

Company furnishes and installs service lateral conductor and 

connectors and makes connections on source terminals of 

service enclosure or meterpack (3). 

Underground 



meters served 

from 

Padmounted Xfmr 

Xfmr 

Terminals 

4-D, 

4-E, 

5-D 

Customer furnishes and installs conductors between meter 

sockets and service enclosure or meterpack (3) and transformer; 

supplies connectors when required; and makes connections in 

meter sockets, service enclosure and meterpack (3). 

Customer furnishes connectors. Company attaches connectors 

at source end and makes connections on transformer terminals. 

AT LOCATIONS OTHER THAN METERS FOR SECONDARY SERVICE LOCATIONS 

LOCATION 

Service 

Head 

Padmount 

Transformer 

Secondary 

Compartment 

Padmount 

Secondary 

Enclosure at 

Transformer Pad 

Company 

Handhole or 

Pedestal 

Secondary 

Service, 

I.T. Enclosure 

TYPICAL 

P.O.D. (1) 

LOCATION 

Service 

Head 

Pad Xfmr. 

Terminals 

Secondary 

Enclosure 

REF. 

3-D, 3-E, 

3-F, 3-G, 

3-H, 3I 

__ 

__ 

CONDUCTORS 

LOCATION 

OWNERSHIP 

CONNECTORS 

PROVIDED BY 

CONNECTIONS 

MADE BY 

Source Company Company Company 

Load Customer Company Company 

Terminals Company ___ ___ 

Load Customer Customer Company 



Handhole 


or __ 

Pedestal 


Source Customer (2) Customer Customer 

Pad Xfmr. 

Terminals __ Load Customer Customer Customer 

(1) P.O.D. = Point of Delivery as defined in 100.01.19, page 6. 

(2) For Customers served from an overhead transformer bank, the source side service lateral 

conductors will be provided by the Company and the P.O.D. will be the I.T. Enclosure. 

(3) Contact Company for approval of meterpacks prior to letting bids and installing 

equipment. 


45

46 

APPLICATION 

WIRES PHASE VOLTS SERVICE 

TYPE 

120 SECONDARY 

2 1 OR SERVICE 

240 OR TEMP 

2 1 

120 

OR 

240 

RESIDENTIAL 

OR SECONDARY 

SERVICE 

2 1 480 SECONDARY 

SERVICE 

SECONDARY 

3 1 120/240 SERVICE & 

TEMP 

METER AND SOCKET APPLICATION GUIDE 

FIGURE 5-B * 

MAX 

AMPS 

0-60 

0-150 

0-200 

0-60 

3 1 120/240 RESIDENTIAL 0-150 

3 1 120/240 SECONDARY 

SERVICE 

60-200 

3 1 120/240 RESIDENTIAL 150-200 

3 1 120/240 RESIDENTIAL 0-200 

INSTALLATION 

TYPE 

SELF- 

CONTAINED 

OH ONLY 

SELF- 

CONTAINED 

OH ONLY 

MINI 

TRANSOCKET 

OH OR UG 

SELF- 

CONTAINED 

OH ONLY 

SELF- 

CONTAINED 

OH ONLY 

SELF- 

CONTAINED 

OH OR UG 

SELF- 

CONTAINED 

OH OR UG 

SELF- 

CONTAINED 

OH OR UG 

STOCK 

NO. 

METERSOCKET 

MANUFACTURER 

CATALOG 

NUMBER 

MAX 

HUB 

SIZE 

312720 ANCHOR U1000-634-SR2 ONE 1” 

301399 

CUTLER-HAMMER 

DURHAM 

LANDIS & GYR 

MIDWEST ELECTRIC 

MILBANK 

SIEMENS 

SQUARE D 

UT-RS502B-CH 

UT-RS502B 

UAT314-OG 

UT-RS502B-MEP 

U7262-RL 

SUAT314-OG 

UT-RS502B-SQD 

ONE 2.75” 

320797 DURHAM 105777A ONE 2.75” 

312720 ANCHOR U1000-634-SR2 ONE 1” 

301399 

312727 

301401 

323754 

CUTLER-HAMMER 

DURHAM 

LANDIS & GYR 


MILBANK 

SIEMENS 

SQUARE D 

CUTLER-HAMMER 

DURHAM 

LANDIS & GYR 


MILBANK 

SIEMENS 

SQUARE D 

CUTLER-HAMMER 

DURHAM 

LANDIS & GYR 


MILBANK 

SIEMENS 

SQUARE D 

CUTLER-HAMMER 

DURHAM 


SQUARE D 

UT-RS502B-CH 

UT-RS502B 

UAT314-OG 

UT-RS502B-MEP 

U7262-RL 

SUAT314-OG 

UT-RS502B-SQD 

UT-H4213B-CH 

UT-H4213B 

40404-025 

UT-H4213B-MEP 

U9801-XL 

S40404-025 

UT-H4213B-SQD 

UT-RS212B-CH 

UT-RS212B 

UAT417-XG 

UT-RS212B-MEP 

U7040-XL 

SUAT417-XG 

UT-RS212B-SQD 

UT-RS213-8B-CH 

UT-RS213-8B 

UT-RS213-8B-MEP 

UT-RS213-8B-SQD 

*Manufacturer name and part number subject to change without notice. Copyright 2010 Oncor Electric Delivery Company. All rights reserved 

ONE 2.75” 

ONE 2.75” 

ONE 2.75” 

ONE 2.75” 

MAX # CONDUCTORS, TYPICAL 

MIN/MAX CONDUCTOR SIZES, 

TYPICAL DIMENSIONS ** 

SOURCE: ONE # 12 - # 1/0 

LOAD: ONE # 12 - # 1/0 

7” DIAMETER (ROUND) 

SOURCE: ONE # 2 - 250 

LOAD: ONE # 2 - 250 

8.5” X 12.5” X 3.25” 

NOTE: 2W SERVICE IS LIMITED TO 

100 A 


LOAD: ONE # 6 - 250 

13” X 24” X 9” 

SOURCE: ONE # 12 - # 1/0 

LOAD: ONE # 12 - # 1/0 

7” DIAMETER (ROUND) 


LOAD: ONE # 2 - 250 

8.5” X 12.5” X 3.25” 


LOAD: ONE # 2 - 350 

13” X 19” X 5” 

NOTE: EQUIPPED WITH LEVER 

BYPASS 


LOAD: ONE # 2 - 250 

8” X 12” X 3.25” 

SOURCE: ONE # 1/0 - 350 

LOAD: TWO # 1/0 - 250 

13” X 20” X 5” 

**Actual dimensions will vary.

47 

APPLICATION 

WIRES PHASE VOLTS 

3 1 120/240 

3 1 120/240 

3 1 120/240 

METER AND SOCKET APPLICATION GUIDE (CONTINUED) 

FIGURE 5-B * 

SERVICE 

TYPE 

RESIDENTIAL 

OR SECONDARY 

SERVICE 

MAX 

AMPS 

200-320 

RESIDENTIAL 

OR SECONDARY 320-600 

SERVICE 

RESIDENTIAL 


SERVICE 

3 1 120/240 MOBILE HOME 

SINGLE 

POSITION 

3 1 120/240 MOBILE HOME 

2 GANG 

VERTICAL 

3 1 120/240 

3 1 120/240 

APARTMENT 

2 GANG 

HORIZONTAL 

APARTMENT 

3 GANG 

HORIZONTAL 

INSTALLATION 

TYPE 

SELF- 

CONTAINED 

OH OR UG 

MED. 

TRANSOCKET 

OH OR UG 

MAXI- 

TRANSOCKET 

OH OR UG 

0-200 SELF- 

CONTAINED 

UG ONLY 

0-200 SELF- 

CONTAINED 

UG ONLY 

0-150 

0-150 

SELF- 

CONTAINED 

OH OR UG 

SELF- 

CONTAINED 

OH OR UG 

STOCK 

NO. 

301402 

301417 

302775 

METERSOCKET 

MANUFACTURER 

CUTLER-HAMMER 

DURHAM 

LANDIS & GYR 


MILBANK 

SIEMENS 

SQUARE D 

MILBANK 

DURHAM 

MILBANK 

DURHAM 

MAX 

HUB 

SIZE 

CATALOG 

NUMBER 

UT-H4336-9T-CH 

UT-H4336-9T 

48104-02CH 

UT-H4336-9T-MEP ONE 4” 

U1797-X-K3/K2 

S48104-02CH 

UT-H4336-9T-SQD 

S2690-XT 

1004790A TWO 2.75” 

S3487-4X 

1005014A FOUR 2.75” 

307392 MILBANK U8567-0 N/A 

307393 MILBANK U8667-0 N/A 

301408 

301403 

CUTLER-HAMMER 

DURHAM 

LANDIS & GYR 


MILBANK 

SIEMENS 

SQUARE D 

CUTLER-HAMMER 

DURHAM 

LANDIS & GYR 


MILBANK 

MILBANK 

SIEMENS 

SQUARE D 

UT-2R5332B-CH 

UT-2R5332B 

UA2313-OG 

UT-2R5332B-MEP 

U1252-X 

SUA2313-OG 

UT-2R5332B-SQD 

UT-3R5632B-CH 

UT-3R5632B 

UA3313-OG 


U9353-XL 

U1253-XL 

SUA3313-OG 



ONE 3” 

TWO 2.75” 





LOAD: TWO # 2 - 350 

15” X 26” X 5” 

NOTE: EQUIPPED WITH LEVER BYPASS 

SOURCE: TWO # 2 - 600 

LOAD: TWO # 2 - 600 

18” X 30” X 12” 

SOURCE: FOUR # 2 - 600 

LOAD: FOUR # 2 - 600 

30” X 42” X 14” 


LOAD: ONE # 6 - 250 

12” X 42” X 8” 

NOTE: USE WITH BASE TSN 310447 


LOAD: ONE # 6 - 250 

12” X 42” X 8” 

NOTE: USE WITH BASE TSN 310447 


LOAD: ONE # 2 - 250 PER POSITION 

25” X 14” X 5” 



33” X 14” X 5” 


48 

APPLICATION 


TYPE 

3 1 120/240 

3 1 120/240 

3 1 120/240 


FIGURE 5-B * 

APARTMENT 

4 GANG 

HORIZONTAL 

APARTMENT 

5 GANG 

HORIZONTAL 

APARTMENT 

6 GANG 

HOROZONTAL 

3 1 240/480 SECONDARY 

SERVICE 

3 NETWORK 120/208 

RESIDENTIAL 

OR SECONDARY 

SERVICE 

3 3Δ 240 SECONDARY 

SERVICE 


SERVICE 

MAX 

AMPS 

0-150 

0-150 

0-150 

0-200 

0-200 

0-200 

200-600 

INSTALLATION 

TYPE 

SELF- 

CONTAINED 

OH OR UG 

SELF- 

CONTAINED 

OH OR UG 

SELF- 

CONTAINED 

OH OR UG 

MINI 

TRANSOCKET 

OH OR UG 

SELF- 

CONTAINED 

OH OR UG 

SELF- 

CONTAINED 

OH OR UG 

MED 

TRANSOCKET 

OH OR UG 

STOCK 

NO. 

301404 

301405 

301406 

METERSOCKET 

MANUFACTURER 

CUTLER-HAMMER 

DURHAM 

LANDIS & GYR 


MILBANK 

MILBANK 

SIEMENS 

SQUARE D 

CUTLER-HAMMER 

DURHAM 

LANDIS & GYR 


MILBANK 

SIEMENS 

SQUARE D 

CUTLER-HAMMER 

DURHAM 

LANDIS & GYR 


MILBANK 

SIEMENS 

SQUARE D 

CATALOG 

NUMBER 

UT-4R5632B-CH 

UT-4R5632B 

UA4313-OG 


U9354-XL 

U1254-XL 

SUA4313-OG 


UT-5R5632B-CH 

UT-5R5632B 

UA5719-KPQG 


U1255-X 

SUA5719-KPQG 


UIT-6R5352U-CH 

UIT-6R5352U 

UA6719-KPQG 

UIT-6R5352U-MEP 

U1256-X 

SUA6719-KPQG 

UIT-6R5352U-SQD 

MAX 

HUB 

SIZE 

TWO 2.75” 

TWO 2.75” 

TWO 2.75” 

320797 DURHAM 1005777A ONE 2.75” 

301392 

301392 

CUTLER-HAMMER 

DURHAM 

LANDIS & GYR 


MILBANK 

SIEMENS 

SQUARE D 

CUTLER-HAMMER 

DURHAM 

LANDIS & GYR 


MILBANK 

SIEMENS 

SQUARE D 

MILBANK 

DURHAM 

UT-H5213B-ND-CH 

UT-H5213B-ND 

9804-8592 

UT-H5213B-ND-MEP ONE 2.75” 

U9581-XL 

S9804-8592 

UT-H5213B-ND-SQD 

UT-H5213B-ND-CH 

UT-H5213B-ND 

9804-8592 

UT-H5213B-ND-MEP ONE 2.75” 

U9581-XL 

S9804-8592 

UT-H5213B-ND-SQD 

S2690-XT 

1004790A TWO 2.75” 


301417 






41” X 14” X 5” 



49” X 14” X 5” 



57” X 14” X 5” 


LOAD: ONE # 6 - 250 

13” X 24” X 9” 


LOAD: ONE # 2- 350 

13” X 19” X 5” 



LOAD: ONE # 2 - 350 

13” X 19” X 5” 



LOAD: TWO # 2 - 600 

18” X 30” X 12” 


49 

APPLICATION 

WIRES PHASE VOLTS 


FIGURE 5-B * 

SERVICE 

TYPE 

MAX 

AMPS 


SERVICE 

600-1600 

SECONDARY 

3 3Δ 480 SERVICE 0-200 

3 3Δ 480 

4 3Δ 120/240 

4 3Δ 120/240 

4 3Δ 120/240 

4 3Δ 120/240 

4 3Δ 120/240 

SECONDARY 

SERVICE 200-600 

RESIDENTIAL 

OR SECONDARY 

SERVICE 

RESIDENTIAL 

OR SECONDARY 

SERVICE 

RESIDENTIAL 

OR SECONDARY 

SERVICE 

0-200 

200-320 

200-320 

RESIDENTIAL 


SERVICE 

RESIDENTIAL 


SERVICE 

INSTALLATION 

TYPE 

MAXI 

TRANSOCKET 

OH OR UG 

MINI 

TRANSOCKET 

OH OR UG 

MED 

TRANSOCKET 

OH OR UG 

SELF- 

CONTAINED 

OH OR UG 

SELF- 

CONTAINED 

OH ONLY 

SELF- 

CONTAINED 

OH OR UG 

MED 

TRANSOCKET 

OH OR UG 

MAXI 

TRANSOCKET 

OH OR UG 

STOCK 

NO. 

302775 

312125 

301419 

301394 

312883 

397389 

301418 

301422 

METERSOCKET 

MANUFACTURER 

MILBANK 

DURHAM 

MILBANK 

DURHAM 

MILBANK 

DURHAM 

CUTLER-HAMMER 

DURHAM 

LANDIS & GYR 


MILBANK 

SIEMENS 

SQUARE D 

CUTLER-HAMMER 

DURHAM 

LANDIS & GYR 


MILBANK 

SIEMENS 

SQUARE D 

CUTLER-HAMMER 

DURHAM 

LANDIS & GYR 


MILBANK 

SIEMENS 

SQUARE D 

MILBANK 

DURHAM 

MILBANK 

DURHAM 


MAX 

HUB 

SIZE 

CATALOG 

NUMBER 

S3487-4X 

1005014A FOUR 2.75” 

S3228-DL 

1004941B ONE 2.75” 

S3184-XT 

1004786C TWO 2.75” 

UT-H7213T-HL-CH 

UT-H7213T-HL 

40407-025FL 

UT-H7213T-HL-MEP ONE 4” 

U9701-X 

S40407-025FL 

UT-H7213T-HL-SQD 

UT-H7306-9T-HL-CH 

UT-H7306-9T-HL 

47707-02FL 

UT-H7306-9T-HL-MEP ONE 4” 

U3936-R 

S47707-02FL 

UT-H7306-9T-HL-SQD 



44707-02FL 


U4013-X 

S44707-02FL 


S2674-XT 

1004785A TWO 2.75” 

S2811-4X 

1004788A FOUR 2.75” 





LOAD: FOUR # 2 - 600 

30” X 42” X 14” 


LOAD: ONE # 2 - 250 

13” X 24” X 9” 


LOAD: TWO # 2 - 600 

18” X 30” X 12” 


LOAD: ONE # 6 - 350 

13” X 19” X 5” 


BYPASS 

SOURCE: ONE # 2 – 600 OR 

LOAD: TWO # 2 - 350 

13” X 19” X 5” 


BYPASS 


LOAD: TWO # 2 - 350 

20” X 34” X 6” 


BYPASS 


LOAD: TWO # 2 - 600 

18” X 30” X 12” 


LOAD: FOUR # 2 - 600 

30” X 42” X 14” 



FIGURE 5-B * 

50 

APPLICATION 


TYPE 

4 3Y 120/208 



RESIDENTIAL 

OR SECONDARY 

SERVICE 

RESIDENTIAL 

OR SECONDARY 

SERVICE 

RESIDENTIAL 

OR SECONDARY 

SERVICE 

MAX 

AMPS 

0-200 

200-320 

200-320 

INSTALLATION 

TYPE 

SELF- 

CONTAINED 

OH OR UG 

SELF- 

CONTAINED 

OH ONLY 

SELF- 

CONTAINED 

OH OR UG 

STOCK 

NO. 

301394 

312883 

397389 

METERSOCKET 

MANUFACTURER 

CUTLER-HAMMER 

DURHAM 

LANDIS & GYR 


MILBANK 

SIEMENS 

SQUARE D 

CUTLER-HAMMER 

DURHAM 

LANDIS & GYR 


MILBANK 

SIEMENS 

SQUARE D 

CUTLER-HAMMER 

DURHAM 

LANDIS & GYR 


MILBANK 

SIEMENS 

SQUARE D 

MILBANK 

DURHAM 

MAX 

CATALOG HUB 

NUMBER SIZE 

UT-H7213T-HL-CH 

UT-H7213T-HL 

40407-025FL 

UT-H7213T-HL-MEP ONE 4” 

U9701-X 

S40407-025FL 

UT-H7213T-HL-SQD 



47707-02FL 


U3936-R 

S47707-02FL 




44707-02FL 


U4013-X 

S44707-02FL 


S2674-XT 

1004785A TWO 2.75” 





LOAD: ONE # 6 - 350 

13” X 19” X 5” 


BYPASS 

SOURCE: ONE # 2 – 600 

LOAD: TWO # 2 - 350 

13” X 19” X 5” 


BYPASS 


LOAD: TWO # 2 - 350 

20” X 34” X 6” 


BYPASS 

RESIDENTIAL 


MED 

TRANSOCKET 301418 

4 3Y 120/208 SERVICE 

OH OR UG 

RESIDENTIAL 

MAXI 

MILBANK 

S2811-4X 

4 3Y 120/208 OR SECONDARY 600-1600 TRANSOCKET 301422 DURHAM 

1004788A FOUR 2.75” 

SERVICE 

OH OR UG 

RESIDENTIAL 

MINI 

MILBANK 

S3027-XL 

4 3Y 277/480 OR SECONDARY 0-200 TRANSOCKET 301421 DURHAM 

1004926B ONE 2.75” 

SERVICE 

OH OR UG 

RESIDENTIAL 

MED 

MILBANK 

S3183-XT 


1004791C TWO 2.75” 

SERVICE 

OH OR UG 

RESIDENTIAL 

MAXI 

MILBANK 

S2777-4X 


1004787A FOUR 2.75” 

SERVICE 

OH OR UG 

ANY APPLICATION >1600 CONSULT COMPANY FOR SERVICE ENCLOSURE AND/OR INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMER ENCLOSURE OPTIONS. 

*Manufacturer name and part number subject to change without notice. Copyright 2010 Oncor Electric Delivery Company. All rights reserved **Actual dimensions will vary. 


LOAD: TWO # 2 - 600 

18” X 30” X 12” 


LOAD: FOUR # 2 - 600 

30” X 42” X 14” 


LOAD: ONE # 2 - 250 

13” X 24” X 9” 


LOAD: TWO # 2 - 600 

18” X 30” X 12” 


LOAD: FOUR # 2 - 600 

30” X 42” X 14”

TRANSOCKET CONFIGURATIONS 

AND CONNECTION DETAILS 

FIGURE 5-C 

GENERAL INFORMATION 

The five basic wiring configurations for transockets are shown in the following figures. 

Transockets are available in three ampacity ranges: 0-200 amps, 201-600 amps, and 

601-1600 amps. “Lay in” type connectors are provided on “MINI” transockets (0-200 

amp). Double barrel, set screw type connectors are supplied on the “MEDIUM” (201- 

600 amp) and “MAXI” (601-1600 amp) transockets. See Figure 5-B, page 46-50 for 

connector specifications, the TSN, and other selection data. 

TSN 301417 TSN 301418 

APPLICATION 

120/240 V, 3 wire, 1Ø 

120/208 V, 3 wire, network 

240 V, 3 wire, delta 

APPLICATION 

120/208 V, 4 wire, 3Ø wye 

120/240 V, 4 wire, 3Ø delta 

“Power Leg” of 4 wire delta 

shall connect to right-hand 

C.T. and be identified by an 

outer finish that is orange in 

color. 


51

TRANSOCKET CONFIGURATIONS 

AND CONNECTION DETAILS (CONTINUED) 

FIGURE 5-C 

TSN 301421 

TSN 312125 

APPLICATION 

277/480 V, 4 wire, 3Ø wye 

APPLICATION 

480 V, 3 wire, 3Ø delta 

For ungrounded service see 

Section 100.05.03, page 11 and 

Section 500.06.07, page 41. 

TSN 320797 

APPLICATION 

480 V, 2 wire, 1Ø 

240/480 V, 3 wire, 1Ø 

(200 amp max.) 


52

TRANSOCKET CONFIGURATIONS AND 

CONNECTION DETAILS (CONTINUED) 

FIGURE 5-C 

Integrity of Connections- When 

installing conductors in transockets, it is 

the responsibility of the installer to 

ensure that all line and load connections 

are tight, including the connections 

between the CT bus bar and the 

connector. 

Transocket- Overhead Service 

1. For overhead installations, line 

conductors must enter the 

transocket’s top, top back, or top 

sides and connect to transocket’s top 

terminals. 

2. Load conductors must connect to the 

transocket’s bottom terminals and 

exit through the transocket’s bottom, 

bottom back, or bottom sides. 

Transocket- Underground Service 

Permissible Entrance and Exit Locations 

For Transocket Conductors 

1. For underground installations, line 

conductors must enter through the 

transocket’s bottom, bottom back, or 

bottom sides and connect to the 

transocket’s bottom terminals. 

2. Load conductors must connect to the 

transocket’s top terminals and exit 

through the top, top back, or top 

sides. 

3. Reserve adequate space beneath 

the transocket for service raceway. 


53

TYPICAL SERVICE ENCLOSURES 

FIGURE 5-D 

AMPACITY APPLICATION 

3 Wire, 1Ø 

600 Wall mount 

1100 3 Wire, 1Ø 

Wall mount 

1200 1 4 Wire, 3Ø 

Wall mount 

2500 1 4 Wire, 3Ø 

Padmount 

BUS 

ARRANGEMENT 

Accommodates two 600 kcmil 

(line) and four 250 kcmil (load) 

conductors per phase 

3 horizontal connector bus bars 

with eight #10-350 kcmil 

integrated, set screw connectors 

per bus. Add extra connector 

bar (TSN 320781) to convert to 4 

wire, 3 Ø. 

3 vertical connector bus bars, 

one horizontal, with twenty-four 

#10-350 kcmil integrated set 

screw connectors per bar and 11 

sets of 2 hole NEMA spaced 

holes/bar. 

4 horizontal tin plated aluminum 

bus bars with 30 integral 

#10-250 kcmil set screw 

connectors and 18 pairs of 

2 hole NEMA spaced holes/bar. 

HUB OPENINGS 

4” Hub, max. 

(Order hubs 

Separately) 

Typical 

WxHxD 

Inches 

COMPANY 

STOCK 

NUMBER 

One 16x24x6 312726 

Two 12x50x8 312723 

Four 30x42x14 310935 

Six 44x52x24 300313 

1. Source conductors must connect in the center of bus bars for full ampacity rating. 


54

TYPICAL SERVICE ENCLOSURES 

(CONTINUED) 

FIGURE 5-D 


55

GANG METER SOCKETS 

MULTIFAMILY 

TYPICAL LAYOUTS 

FIGURE 5-E 

NOTES: 

1. Each socket must be clearly and permanently marked as indicated in 

Section 500.11, page 43. 

2. Service enclosure (when required) to be provided by Company and 

installed by Customer. See 500.08, page 43 for details. 

3. Contact Company for approval of layouts other than those shown 

above prior to installation. 

4. Contact Company for approval of meterpacks prior to letting bids 

and installing equipment. See 500.06.03, page 41 for details. 

5. It is the Customer’s responsibility to determine local code 

requirements concerning meterpacks with main switches or main 

circuit breakers prior to installing equipment. 

6. Meterpacks with meter stacks up to 5 will be permitted under certain 

conditions. Contact Company for details. 


56

METER SOCKET CONNECTIONS 

AND VOLTAGES 

FIGURE 5-F 

APPLICATION: 

2 WIRE, 120 VOLT, 1Ø SELF-CONTAINED 

NOTE: 

1. Jumper must be installed between neutral connector and upper right terminal. 


57


AND VOLTAGES 

FIGURE 5-G 

APPLICATION: 

3 WIRE, 120/240 VOLT, 1Ø SELF-CONTAINED 


58


AND VOLTAGES 

FIGURE 5-H 

APPLICATION: 

3 WIRE NETWORK 120/208 VOLT, 1Ø SELF-CONTAINED 

NOTE: 

For existing Secondary Service Customers or service entrances not exceeding 

60 amperes. See Section 100.05.04, page 11. 


59


AND VOLTAGES 

FIGURE 5-I 

APPLICATION: 

4 WIRE WYE, 120/208, 3Ø SELF-CONTAINED 


60


AND VOLTAGES 

FIGURE 5-J 

APPLICATION: 

4 WIRE DELTA, 120/240 VOLT, 3Ø SELF-CONTAINED 

NOTES: 

1. On a 4 wire delta connection, the phase having the highest voltage to 

ground (high leg, wild leg, or freak leg) must be connected to the right 

hand terminals of the meter socket. In other locations such as service 

enclosures, disconnects, etc, the “high leg’ is connected to the center 

terminal. 


61

SECTION 600 – TEMPORARY SERVICE INSTALLATION 


To initiate temporary service for construction or other purposes, 

contact Oncor Electric Delivery Company at 1-888-222-8045. 

Customer must choose a Retail Electric Provider in order to have a 

meter installed for temporary service to be delivered (energized). 

600.02 Temporary Service from Overhead Secondary 


600.03 Temporary Service from Underground Secondary 

See Figure 6-B, page 64. 


62

TEMPORARY SERVICE POLE 

FROM OVERHEAD SECONDARY 

FIGURE 6-A 

NOTES: 

1. Temporary service pole provided and 

installed by Customer. Pole must provide 

sufficient height for the service drop to meet 

minimum clearances given in Figure 2-A, 

page 14 (12 ft. minimum). Pole to be a 

minimum 4” X 4” X 16 ft. unspliced or 5” 

minimum diameter creosote pole. 

2. Service pole must be within maximum 

distance as specified on Figure 3-C, page 23. 

Reduced distance may be required for larger 

services to maintain minimum clearances. 

3. Service drop conductors, service grips and 

service connectors owned and installed by 

Company. 

4. Service entrance conductors (minimum # 8 

Cu or # 6 Al), provided and installed by 

Customer, shall extend 24 inches or the 

minimum length required by local ordinance 

outside of the service head for connection to 

Company service drop. Phase conductors to 

have black insulation and neutral conductor 

to be marked white or bare. 

5. Service head and raceway provided and 

installed by Customer to protect service 

entrance conductors. Two or more conduit 

straps shall be provided to support conduit. 

6. Service attachment and meter socket 

provided, installed and maintained by 

Customer. Customer installs service drop 

attachment of adequate strength for attachment of Company’s service drop 

conductors. See Figure 3-B, page 22. 

7. Weatherproof service switch or breaker panel provided and installed by Customer. 

8. Customer’s grounding electrode conductor (#6 Cu minimum) shall originate in the 

service entrance equipment and extend to an approved ground electrode. The 

grounding electrode conductor shall not terminate within the meter socket. 

Company reserves the right to refuse installation of service contingent upon 

observing an unsafe Customer connection. 

9. All other materials provided and installed by the Customer. 

10. Customer shall not allow pole to be moved or tampered with as long as Company’s 

service conductors are attached. 


63

TEMPORARY SERVICE POLE 

FROM UNDERGROUND SECONDARY 

FIGURE 6-B 

NOTES: 

1. Service support to be 4” X 4” minimum wood pole, unspliced, and set a minimum 3’ 

deep. Pole should be installed 6 feet from any alley, sidewalk, or drive. 

2. Customer shall not allow pole to be moved or tampered with as long as Company’s 

service wires are attached. 

3. Service entrance equipment and pole will be provided, installed, and maintained by 

the Customer. Customer shall provide, install, and maintain meter socket. 

4. Conduit and wire will be furnished by Customer from line side meter terminals to the 

point of connections at the transformer pad, pedestal, or handhole. Customer will 

trench within 2 feet of right front side of transformer pad or within 2 feet of pedestal 

or handhole. Company will make final trenching and connections. 

5. Customer furnished wiring from line side terminals of meter socket to connections at 

pad transformer, pedestal, or handhole may be direct buried where installed with 

2’-0” of earth cover. 

6. Where exposed aboveground, conductors shall be installed in rigid metallic or 

flexible metallic conduit. 

7. Customer’s grounding electrode conductor shall originate from service entrance 

equipment and shall not terminate in the meter socket. Customer’s grounding 

electrode conductor shall be # 6 Cu. minimum and connected to an approved 

ground electrode (pole butt wrap is not an approved ground electrode). Company 

reserves the right to refuse installation of service contingent upon observing an 

unsafe Customer connection. 


64

TWO HOLE COMPRESSION LUGS FOR TERMINAL CONNECTIONS 

Reference Figure 5A, pages 44 & 45 for Company- Customer Responsibility. When 

required, the Customer is to furnish the following connectors or their approved 

equivalents at padmounted transformers and connection enclosures for connection of 

Customer’s conductors at the point of delivery. 

Copper Conductor 

Aluminum Conductor 

Wire Size Manufacturer Company 

TSN 

Manufacturer’s 

Catalog # 

Company 

TSN 


Catalog # 

#4 Anderson 306142 BCL-016-B 

Blackburn 

LCN4-12 

Burndy 

YA4C-2N 

Ilsco 

CRB-4L2-12-134 

Penn Union 

BBLU-4-D1 

#2 Amp 306130 CKLL22NTN 305360 

Anderson 

VAUL-1-12-BN 

Blackburn LCN2-12 AL584 

Burndy YA2C-2N YCA-2RL-2N 

ESP/ CMC 

ALM-2A-BN 

Homac 

SA2-N 

Ilsco 

CRC-2L2 

Kearney 36918 

Penn Union BBLU-2-D1 FKLA-C2-D 

Utilco 

CRC-2L2 

#1 Anderson 310481 BCL-019-B 

Burndy 

YA1C-2N 

Ilsco 

CRC-1L2 

Penn Union 

BBLU-1-D2 

#1/0 Amp 306143 CKLL102NTN 305354 

Anderson BCL-021-B VAUL-1/0-12BN 

Blackburn LCN10 AL586 

Burndy YA25-2N YCA25R-2N 

ESP/ CMC 

ALM-1/0-BN 

Homac L1/0-N AL 1/0-N 

Ilsco CRC-1/0L2 2IACL-1/0 

Kearney 104741-2 

Penn Union BBLU-1/0-D3 FKLA-010-D 

Utilco 

CRC-1/0L2 

#2/0 Amp 306144 CKLL202NTN 305355 

Anderson VHCL-2/0-12BN VAUL-2/0-12BN 

Blackburn LCN20 ALS8 


ESP/ CMC 

ALM-2/0-BN 

Homac L2/0-N SA2/0-N 

Ilsco CRA-2/0L2 2IACL-2/0 

Kearney 36234 

Penn Union BBLU-2/0-D FSLA-013-D 

Utilco 

CRA-2/0L2 


65


(CONTINUED) 

Copper Conductor 

Aluminum Conductor 


TSN 


Catl. # 

Company 

TSN 


Catl. # 

#3/0 Anderson 306131 VHCL-3/0-12BN 311220 VAUL-3/0-12BN 


Burndy 

YA27-2N 


Ilsco CRB-3/0L2 2IACL-3/0 

Kearney 48212 


Thomas & Betts 

54864BE 

Utilco CRB-3/0L2 2UCL3/0-TP2 

#4/0 Amp 306145 CKLL402NTN 305356 

Anderson VHCL-4/0-12BN VAUL-4/0-12BN 



ESP/ CMC CHL-4/0-BN ALM-4/0-BN 


Ilsco CRB-4/0L2 2IACL-4/0 

Kearney 48160 


Utilco CRB-4/0L2 2UCL-4/0 

250 kcmil Anderson 306132 VHCL-250-12BN 300504 

Blackburn 

AL16 

Burndy YA29-2N YCAK29A-2G1 

ESP/ CMC 

CHL-250-BN 

Homac L250-N AL250-NTN 

Ilsco CRA-250L2 2IACL-250 

Penn Union BBLU-025-D FSLA-025-D 


54868BE 

300 kcmil Anderson 306133 VHCL-300-12BN 312080 

Blackburn 

AL16 


ESP/ CMC 

CHL-300-BN 

Homac L300-N AL300-N 


Penn Union BBLU-030-D FULA-030-D 


54870BE 

Utilco 

CRA-300L2 

350 kcmil Anderson 306134 VHCL-35012BN 300554 VAUL-350-12BN 

Blackburn 

AL-18 


ESP/ CMC CHL-350-BN ALM-360-BN 



Kearney 36238 



54872BE 

Utilco 

CRA-350L2 


66


(CONTINUED) 

Copper Conductors 

Aluminum Conductors 


TSN 


Catl. # 

Company 

TSN 


Catl. # 

400 kcmil Anderson 306135 VHCL-400-12BN 312082 VAUL-400-12BN 

Blackburn 

AL20 


ESP/ CMC CHL-400-BN ALM-450BN 



Kearney 36239 



54874BE 

Utilco 

CRA-400L2 

500 kcmil Anderson 287798 VHCL-500-12BN 305358 VAUL-500-12BN 

Blackburn LCN500 ALS24 





Kearney 36950 


Utilco CRA-500L2 2UCL-500 

600 kcmil Anderson 306137 VHCL-600-12BN 312083 VAUL-600-12BN 







Penn Union BBLU-060-D KVL-060-D2 

750 kcmil Anderson 306138 CHL-750-BN-TT 300514 VAUL-800-12BN 

Blackburn 

AL44 

Burndy 

YA392NG5 

ESP/ CMC 

ALM-800BN 

Homac L750-N AL800-N-608 

Ilsco 

2IACL-750 


Penn Union 

BBLU-075-D9 

Utilco 

2UCL750 

1000 kcmil Anderson 312088 VHCL-1000-12BN 305363 VAUL-1000-12BN 

Blackburn 

AL60 

Burndy 

YCAK44A-2G2 

ESP/ CMC 

ALM-1000BN 

Homac L1000-NT SAL-1000-N 

Ilsco 

2IACL-1000 



67

ONE HOLE COMPRESSION LUGS FOR SUBMERSIBLE MOLE 

CONNECTIONS 

Reference Figure 5A, pages 44 & 45 for Company- Customer Responsibility. When 

required, the Customer is to furnish the following connectors or their approved 

equivalents at subsurface secondary/ service boxes for connection of Customer’s 

conductors at the point of delivery. 

Aluminum or Copper Conductor 

Wire Size Manufacturer Company TSN Manufacturer’s Catalog # 

#6 Anderson 311219 VAUL-6-12 

Burndy 

YRA6CU-1 

Homac 

SA6-48 

Penn Union 

FKLA-W4-S 


Burndy 

YRA4CU-1 

Homac 

SA4-48 

Penn Union 

FKLA-W2-S 

Utilco 

UCL-4 


Blackburn 

AL583 

Burndy 

YRA1CU-1 

Homac 

SA2-48 

Penn Union 

FKLA-C2-S 

Utilco 

UCL-2 

#1/0 Anderson 300648 VAUL-1/0-12 

Blackburn 

AL-585 

Burndy 

YRA25U 

Homac 

SA1/0-48 

Penn Union 

FKLA-010-S 

Utilco 

UCL-1/0 

#2/0 Anderson 300649 VAUL-2/0-12 

Blackburn 

AL7 

Burndy 

YRA26U 

Homac 

SA2/0-48 

Penn Union 

FSLA-013-S 

Utilco 

UCL-2/0 

#3/0 Anderson 300502 VAUL-3/0-12 

Blackburn 

AL-9 

Burndy 

YRA27A 

Homac 

SA-3/0-48 

Penn Union 

FSLA-017-S 

Utilco 

UCL-3/0 

#4/0 Anderson 300553 VAUL-4/0-12 

Blackburn 

ALS11 

Burndy 

YRA28A 

Homac 

SA4/0-48 

Penn Union 

FSLA-025-S 

Utilco 

UCL-4/0 

250 kcmil Anderson 300650 VAUL-4/0-12 

Blackburn 

ALS13 

Penn Union 

FSLA-025-S 


68

ONE HOLE COMPRESSION LUGS FOR SUBMERSIBLE MOLE 

CONNECTIONS (CONTINUED) 

Aluminum or Copper Conductor 

Wire Size Manufacturer Company TSN Manufacturer’s Catalog # 

300 kcmil Blackburn 300509 ALS15P 

Burndy 

YA30A-1 

Homac 

SA300-48 

Penn Union 

FSLA-030-S 

350 kcmil Anderson 300651 VAUL-360-12 

Blackburn 

ALS17 

Homac 

SA350-48 

400 kcmil Blackburn 300511 ALS19 

Homac 

SA400-48 

Penn Union 

FULA-R033-S 

500 kcmil Anderson 311221 VAUL-500-12 

Penn Union 

FULA-050-S 


69


Information to be Supplied by Electricians to Pull Meters 

On Self-Contained Meter Bases 

Template for information required when calling the electrician voice mailbox at 800-518-2374. See 

500.02, page 39. 

Electrical Contractor’s Company ___________________________________ 

Employee’s Name ______________________________________________ 

Address where work is to be done __________________________________ 

City __________________________________________________________ 

Work to be done 

_____________________________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________________________ 

Will work require an electrical inspection? Yes No 

Date meter will be pulled _______________________ 

Date meter will be replaced _____________________ 

Contact phone number for clarifying information _____________________________ 


70


DO YOU KNOW THE LAW? 

Texas Law & OSHA Regulations 

To ensure safety and the protection of the public, Chapter 752 of the Texas Health and 

Safety Code makes it unlawful for unauthorized persons to move or be placed or 

bring any part of a tool, equipment, machine, or material within six (6) feet of live 

overhead high voltage lines. Contractors and owners are legally responsible for the 

safety of construction workers under this law. This law carries both criminal and civil 

liability. 

Additionally, OSHA Regulations restrict unauthorized persons from approaching or 

operating any equipment or machines within ten (10) feet of live overhead high 

voltage lines. 

For lines to be turned off, moved, or other arrangements, call your Retail Electric 

Provider. 

Some local Electrical Codes require structures to be located a safe distance away from 

live overhead high voltage lines as defined by the National Electrical Safety Code.


Appendix B


40 90 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 

1.00 GENERAL 

1.01 SCOPE 

A. General Requirements for Instrumentation and Control. 

1. There are two areas of work in the Instrumentation Work in this project as described 

below: 

a. The Instrumentation System Integrator Contractor shall provide all hardware, 

software, and configuration and integration associated with the PLC based 

Instrumentation and Process Control system. Provide a complete and operational 

system in accordance with these Contract Documents: 

1) Provide instrumentation, hardware, conductors and raceway required for a 

complete and operable system that is above that specified in the Contract 

Documents. Provide all labor and materials specified in the Contract 

Documents. 

b. Provide all required labor, materials and PLC programming and system 

configuration and integration to interconnect the I/O as required per the project to 

the RTUs (provided under this contract) at the: 

1) Transmission Pump Station (TPS), 

2) Odessa Pump Station (OPS), 

3) Well Field Pump Station (WPS) 

4) Big Spring Pump Station (BPS) 

5) And 21 Well Field stations Sites: Sites D1, D2, D3, D4, D6, D8, D9, D10, D11, 

D12, D13, D14, D15, D16, D17, D18, D20, D21, D22, D23 & D24 

6) For the locations listed above: 

a) Provide all required software and programming in each of the PLCs and 

existing computer system for a complete and operational system in 

accordance with these Contract Documents. 

b) Coordinate and fully cooperate with the OWNER to provide all required 

hardware and PLC hardware and PLC programming necessary to interface 

with the existing system. 

c) Provide personnel to check out, test and commission the system. 

d) Provide factory trained personnel to train the OWNER's staff as specified. 

e) Provide software programming to create new screens and modify existing 

screens on the Graphic User Interface located at each RTU Panel as 

specified. 

f) Provide the required drivers, if required, to receive and transmit data over 

the specified radio system to fully communicate with the PLC systems. 

1 

Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems 40 90 00-1 

CMD11269 – Ward County Transmission System Expansion – Contract C – Above Slab TPS, OPS, and WPS


A. GENERAL: Should there be a conflict between various standards, codes, specifications, and 

contract drawings, bring the matter immediately to the attention of the OWNER's 

Representative. 

B. REFERENCE STANDARDS: 

1. American Society of Testing Materials: 

A269 

Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for 

General Service 

B 68 

Seamless Copper Tube 

D 1047 

Polyvinyl Chloride Jacket for Wire and Cable 

A 36 

Specification for Structural Steel 

Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware 

2. Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints (RCRBSJ). 

3. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC). 

4. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): Painting Specifications for weather exposure. 

5. American Welding Society (AWS): Welding Code D 1.1-75. 

6. Federal Specifications: Primer, Paint Zinc, Chromate, Alkyd Type, Fed. Spec. TT-P-645a. 

7. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 

8. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): National Electrical Code (NEC), 1990 

edition. 

9. Instrument Society of America (ISA): 

RP 3.1-1960 Flow Meter Installations, Seal and Condensate 

Chambers 

S5.1-1973 

Instrumentation Symbols and Identification 

RP7.1-1956 

Pneumatic Control Circuit Pressure Test 

S7.3-1975 

Quality Standard for Instrument Air 

RP18.1-1965 

Specifications and Guides for the Use of General 

Purpose Annunciators 

S5.4-1976 

Instrument Loop Diagrams 

S8.1-1968 

Instrument Enclosures for Industrial Environments 

RP12.1-1960 

Electrical Instruments in Hazardous Atmospheres 

RP20.1, 20.2 

Specification Forms for Instruments 

S39.1-1972 

Control Valve Sizing Equations 

S39.2-1972 

Control Valve Capacity Test Procedures 

S51.1 Process Instrumentation Terminology 

10. American Petroleum Institute (API): 

API RP 550 

Manual on Installation of Refinery Instruments and 

Control Systems 

API RP 520 

Recommended Practice for the Design and Installation 

of Pressure-Relieving Systems in Refineries 

11. Scientific Apparatus Makers Association (SAMA): 

PM 20.1-1973 

Process Measurement and Control Terminology 

RC5-10-1963 

Resistance Thermometers 



1.03 GUARANTEE 

12. Underwriters' Laboratory (UL): Subject 13, Subject 1227. 

13. Factory Mutual (FM). 

14. American National Standard Institute (ANSI): 

15. Supplement to C37.90-1971, Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power 

Apparatus (IEEE Std. 313-1971), C37.90a-1974. 

16. National Bureau of Standards (NBS). 

17. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): Tray Fire Tests, IEEE 383. 

A. GUARANTEE PERIOD: The CONTRACTOR shall provide guarantees as defined hereunder for 

a period of one year after final acceptance by the OWNER. 

B. GUARANTEE REQUIREMENTS FOR ANALOG DEVICES: Each device shall perform its intended 

function within the specified operating accuracy and repeatability without more than 12 

adjustments for any consecutive period of 12 months. The availability of each device shall 

be not less than 98.0 percent for any consecutive period of six months. Downtime of 

analog devices affecting more than 8 loops shall be considered a system failure. 

1.04 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATIONS 

A. The Instrumentation System Integrator Contractor's personnel shall have a minimum of ten 

years of prior experience in furnishing, installation, testing, programming, debugging, startup, 

and training for systems at least as large and similar to the one in this Contract. The 

system installer shall have employees who are qualified technicians for the duration of the 

contract located in the project area. The CONTRACTOR shall submit for evaluation within 

one week of Notice to Proceed, his instrumentation systems installer's company resumes 

complete with company history, project lists, locations, OWNER, costs, type of system 

installed, and references with phone numbers. Installers not meeting these qualifications 

shall not be accepted. As a part of this contract, the instrumentation system installers shall 

assume complete system responsibility, including coordination and interfacing with all 

subsystems and equipment suppliers and manufacturers. The CONTRACTOR shall actively 

be involved in control system integration industry for the last five years. The CONTRACTOR 

shall not act as a broker for the project; he shall provide and be responsible for all 

hardware, interfacing software, training, testing, and extended warranties. 

1.05 DEFINITIONS 

A. The terms used in this specification conform to definitions in ISA S51.1, SAMA PMC 20.1- 

1973 and RC 5-10-1963, except as modified below. 

1. Device: An electronic or mechanical apparatus designed to perform a specific 

measurement or control function. 

2. Equipment: The machinery used in a process, e.g., pumps, fans, etc. 

3. Interchangeability error: The algebraic difference between the indication and true 

value of the measured variable as a result of exchanging a device with a replacement. 

4. Loop: Any combination of interconnected transmitters, receivers, switches, alarms, 

indicators, controllers, computers, or final control elements. 




5. Operating accuracy: Conformity of indicated value to accepted standard value or true 

value throughout specified operating conditions with a confidence level of 95 percent 

includes, but is not limited to, hysteresis, linearity, and operating influence of 

temperature, pressure, supply voltage, and transmitter power supply. Operating 

accuracy for loop is defined as root-mean-square (RMS) of individual device operation 

accuracies. 

6. Process: A progressively continuing operation that consists of a series of controlled 

actions systemically directed toward a particular result, e.g., a process to mix, filter, 

heat, and/or cool air to a particular condition. 

7. Response: The results of the act, or process of measuring the time difference between 

the time of a change in an input signal or a measured variable, and the time when the 

output, display, and final control element in the loop has changed to at least 60 percent 

of the change which should result from the input change. 

8. Subsystem: A discrete subdivision of a system and an assemblage of parts, devices, or 

software modules designed to perform one or more of the specific tasks required for 

the system to accomplish its functions. 

9. System: An assemblage of sometimes diverse parts, devices, or software modules 

serving a common set of measurement or control functions. 

10. Time resolution: The result of the act or process of rendering distinguishable events 

occurring at nearly the same time. Expressed as a measurement of time in seconds. 

11. Unit: Any combination of equipment items interconnected in a predetermined manner, 

performing one or more controlled actions toward a particular result. A discrete 

subdivision of a process. 

12. Concealed - Accessible: Out of general sight, but can be easily reached by removing 

panels or access doors. 

13. Concealed - Inaccessible: Out of general sight and cannot be easily reached except by 

removing a permanent part of the building or using special tools. 

14. Exposed: Open to general view without removing panels, access doors, or a permanent 

part of the building. 

15. Field termination point: Termination of a run of raceway from an instrument panel to 

the vicinity of a field instrument. Field termination point is usually within five horizontal 

feet from the field instrument. 

16. Analog device: Any sensor, transmitter, indicator, recorder, controller, computing relay, 

or control valve which transmits or receives an analog signal. Excludes the analog 

portion of a digital system or I/O subsystems. 

A. SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA: 

1. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, “Submittal Procedures”. 

2. Detail: Give sufficient detail to permit system configuration, installation, and wiring 

without reference to design drawings. Refer to Division 1 - General Requirements. 

3. As a minimum, shop drawings shall include a bill of materials with original 

manufacturer's name and catalog number (re-labeled component information is not 

acceptable), original manufacturer's catalog cut sheets, front views, assembly drawings, 

nameplate schedules, electrical schematics, and electrical connections diagrams. 



4. Electrical and interconnection diagrams shall show all terminations of equipment, 

complete with conduit, cable, and equipment designations, and shall include terminal 

identification information. 

5. Include size of all conduits, pipe, cables, and conductors. 

6. Physical arrangement drawings shall include operating and servicing clearance 

requirements, cooling requirements, electrical power requirements, and cabling 

information. 

7. Logic drawer drawings shall show used space and expansion space. 

8. Show appropriate tag numbers on all product data. 

9. Software specifications for all software provided in addition to existing standard 

software. 

a. Include fully annotated source listings, input-output requirements, memory 

requirements, timing and sequencing requirements, flow chart showing functions 

performed, operating sequences and decision points, required system 

configuration, list of known or anticipated limitations of software modules, list of 

malfunction procedures to be followed for recovering from operator error or other 

malfunction, and description of how each module interfaces with calling and called 

programs. 

b. Provide proposed screen layouts showing modifications to existing screens, and 

new screens: Show all displays, inputs, outputs, recorders, alarms and indications 

along with the associated signal tag number. OWNER shall review and approve 

screen layouts. 

B. TECHNICAL MANUALS: 

2.00 PRODUCTS 

1. Supply six (6) sets of technical manuals with software specifications to OWNER's 

Representative no later than the equipment shipment date. Each set shall be bound in 

a standard size, three-ring, loose-leaf, vinyl plastic, hard-cover binder suitable for 

bookshelf storage. Binder ring size shall not exceed 2.5 inches. 

2. Each set of technical manuals shall include a general and detailed description, a theory 

of operation description, detailed schematic drawings, specifications, and installation, 

connection, calibration, operating, troubleshooting, preventive maintenance, and 

overhaul instructions in complete detail with a clear and specific description of the 

steps the operators must take to perform each of the tasks and modes of operating 

specified. These manuals shall provide the OWNER with comprehensive information on 

all systems and components to enable operation, service, maintenance and repair. 

Exploded or other detailed views of all instruments, assemblies, and accessory 

components shall be included together with complete parts lists and ordering 

instructions. These manuals are in addition to all applicable requirements of Division 01 

- General Requirements. 

2.01 INFORMATION ON DRAWINGS 

A. The following information is indicated on the drawings: 

1. Loop diagram on flow sheet for each control loop. Diagrams are schematic in nature 

and intended only as a guide to work to be performed. 



2. Approximate location of primary elements, instrument panels, and final control 

elements. 

3. Location of electrical distribution panel boards for instrument electrical power. 

4. Location of equipment having alarms and equipment status contacts. 

5. Location of equipment being controlled by system. 

B. The following information is not shown on drawings, but shall be the responsibility of the 

CONTRACTOR to determine, furnish, and coordinate with other divisions based upon 

systems specified. Show this information on project record drawings. 

1. Instrument loop drawings per ISA S5.4 minimum, desired and optional items. 

2. Location of electrical distribution panel boards supplying power to any device supplied 

under this Contract. 

3. Detailed enclosure and instrument panel layouts, PLC enclosure layouts, fabrication 

details, and wiring diagrams. 

4. Detailed system configuration. 

5. Raceway and cable routing for instrumentation wiring. 

2.02 OPERATING CONDITIONS 

A. AMBIENT CONDITIONS: Provide equipment suitable for ambient conditions specified. 

Provide system elements to operate properly in the presence of radio frequency fields 

produced by portable RF transmitters with output of five watts operated at 24 inches from 

instruments in the presence of plant telephone lines, power lines, and electrical equipment, 

and in the presence of digital data transmission systems. 

B. FIELD LOCATIONS: Field equipment may be subjected to ambient temperatures from -5 to 

50°C with direct radiation and relative humidity from 45 to 95 percent with condensation. 

C. POWER SUPPLY: Power supply will be 117 volts a-c, single-phase, 60-hertz commercial 

power. Voltage variations will be at least plus or minus 8 percent. Certain loops shall have 

integral power supply as specified in the Contract Documents. Power supplies shall be 

provided in the panels as specified in the Contract Documents or required for a complete 

system, plus one spare. 

2.03 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 

A. Provide equipment of solid-state construction utilizing second source semiconductors, 

unless otherwise specified. Derate components to assure dependability and long-term 

stability. Provide printed or etched circuit boards of glass epoxy, hand or wave soldered, of 

sufficient thickness to prevent warping. Coat printed circuit boards in field-mounted 

equipment with two mils of solderable conformal coating complying with MIL-I-46058B. 

Alignment and adjustments shall be noncritical, stable with temperature changes or aging, 

and accomplished with premium grade potentiometers. Do not insert components of 

specially selected values into standard electronic assemblies to meet performance 

requirements. Use parts indicated in instruction manuals, replaceable with standard 

commercial components of the same description without degrading performance of 

completed assembly. 



B. Use test equipment and instruments to simulate inputs and read outputs suitable for 

purpose intended and rated to an accuracy of at least five times greater than the required 

accuracy of device being calibrated. Such test equipment shall have accuracies traceable to 

the National Bureau of Standards as applicable. 

2.04 SPECIAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 

A. As a part of this Contract, the instrumentation systems CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with 

the Owner and with all the sub-systems suppliers and manufacturers, during bidding, 

construction, testing, installation and start-up phases of the project. The coordination is to 

assure that the instruments and sub-systems are in compliance with the Contract 

Documents and that the necessary tie-ins and interface signals with the existing system are 

provided as specified or required. 

B. The instrumentation system CONTRACTOR shall provide the OWNER's staff with all required 

training and operating procedures, at no extra cost to the OWNER, in addition to the SCADA 

training specified in Section 40 90 02, “Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 

System”. The training schedule shall be coordinated with the OWNER's Representative. 

Training shall include operating, testing, calibration and programming of the system, and 

simple troubleshooting of the system. The training shall include manuals which are 

specifically written for the system provided as described in Division 1 - General 

Requirements of these Specifications. 

C. The calibration, testing, and start-up of all the instruments whether existing or provided 

new, shall be done by the manufacturer's field technician/ENGINEER in the presence of the 

OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a list of all manufacturers whose technicians will 

perform this work. The CONTRACTOR shall also provide a certified calibration report stating 

that each instrument shown or specified in the Contract Documents has been installed, 

tested and calibrated per manufacturer's recommendations and per these Contract 

Documents. 

D. Follow-up Services: After the acceptance of the system, the CONTRACTOR shall make two 

(2) trips to the project site for calibration and adjustment of all the instruments and devices, 

including the SCADA system. The first trip shall be three months after acceptance of the 

complete system, and thereafter every three months for a total of four trips. These trips 

are in addition to all warranty items, and shall be at no extra cost to the OWNER. The 

CONTRACTOR shall provide the services of a trained technician for each trip with 

appropriate calibration and testing instruments. All defects shall be immediately remedied. 

The trips shall be coordinated with the OWNER. 



E. All control software developed for this contract shall be delivered to the OWNER stored on 

electronic media in a format suitable for installing on the existing equipment and new 

equipment installed under this contract. This includes all source code, complied code, link 

libraries, run-time libraries or other modules necessary to recreate an operational system in 

the event of a catastrophic failure or cessation of business by any of the Contractors. In 

addition, copies of all data bases and necessary associated files as configured after the final 

test shall be supplied on the same medium. 




1 

40 90 02 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA) SYSTEM 

1.00 GENERAL 

1.01 SCOPE 

A. This section specifies furnishing, installing, testing, and start-up operations of a complete 

control sub-system as indicated in the Plans and as specified herein. The system shall be 

totally integrated with the existing SCADA system. The system shall be configured to 

operate as a Distributed Control System having an open system architecture. 

B. The SCADA System Integrator Contractor shall provide all hardware, software, and 

configuration and integration associated with the PLC based Instrumentation and Process 

Control system at the plant. Provide a complete and operational system in accordance with 

these Contract Documents: 

1. Provide instrumentation, hardware, conductors and raceway required for a complete 

and operable system that is above that specified in the Contract Documents. Provide all 

labor and materials specified in the Contract Documents. 

2. Transmission Pump Station (TPS): 

a. Provide one (1) PLC. The PLC shall be located at the Pump Station instrumentation 

room in a RTU cabinet. The PLC shall be connected to the existing Base 21 SCADA 

system via multi-mode fiber optic cable. 


configuration and integration to interconnect the new PLC via multi-mode fiber 

optic cable to the existing SCADA system at Base 21 and at the computer system 

at the OWNER’s main control room at the Water Treatment Plant. 

3. Odessa Pump Station (OPS): 

a. Provide one (1) PLC. The PLC shall be located at the Pump Station electrical room in 

a RTU cabinet. The PLC shall be connected to a ProSoft 2.4GHz radio via RS232 

cable. The radio shall be connected to a Yagi antenna via 1/2” coaxial cable. The 

radio shall transmit/receive data from CRMWD’s existing main control station, via 

the Penwell site. 


configuration and integration to interconnect the new PLC via the 2.4GHz Radio 

System to the existing computer system at the OWNER’s main control station at 

the Water Treatment Plant. 

4. Well Field Pump Station (WPS): 

a. Provide one (1) PLC. The PLC shall be located at the Electrical Building in a RTU 

cabinet. The PLC shall be connected to an Ubiquiti Bullet2 ethernet radio via 

RS232 cable. The cable shall be connected to the existing antenna at the C-Well 

Tank via 1/2” coaxial cable. The radio shall transmit/receive data from CRMWD’s 

existing main control station. 

1 

Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System 40 90 02-1 


1 


configuration and integration to interconnect the new PLC via the ethernet Radio 



5. Big Spring Pump Station (BPS): 

a. Provide one (1) PLC. The PLC shall be located at the Pump Station building in a RTU 

cabinet. The PLC shall be connected to a ProSoft 2.4GHz radio via RS232 cable. 

The cable shall be connected to a Yagi antenna via 1/2” coaxial cable. The radio 

shall transmit/receive data from CRMWD’s existing main control station. 


configuration and integration to interconnect the new PLC via the 2.4GHz Radio 



6. Well Sites Stations (typ. of 21 sites): 

a. Provide one (1) PLC. The PLC shall be located in a RTU cabinet at the site. The PLC 

shall be connected to an Ubiquiti Bullet2 ethernet radio via RS232 cable. The 

cable shall be connected to a Yagi antenna via 1/2” coaxial cable. The radio shall 

transmit/receive data from CRMWD’s existing main control station, via the Well 

Field Pump Station site. 


configuration and integration to interconnect the new PLC via the ethernet Radio 



c. The RTU Cabinet at each well site shall be installed by others under a separate Bid 

Package (the Well Site Contractor). 

7. Modify existing PLCs at the Owner’s main site as required. 

8. Provide all required software and programming in the PLCs and existing computer 

system for a complete and operational system in accordance with these Contract 

Documents. 

9. Coordinate and fully cooperate with the Owner to provide all required hardware and 

PLC hardware and PLC programming necessary to interface with the existing system. 

10. Provide personnel to check out, test and commission the system. 

11. Provide personnel to train the Owner's staff as specified. 

12. Provide software programming to create new screens and modify existing screens on 

the existing computer system as specified. 

13. Provide the required drivers to receive and transmit data over the specified Radio 

System to fully communicate with the PLC system. Provide the required drivers at TPS 

and Base 21 to receive and transmit data over the specified fiber optic cable system to 

fully communicate with the PLC System. The fiber optic system shall be as specified in 

Section 27 15 23 “Communications Optical Fiber Horizontal Cabling”. 



C. System Components: The system will consist of the following major components and 

subsystems: 

1. Transmission Pump Station: 

a. One (1) PLC Modicon Quantum. The PLC shall be located in a NEMA 1, 14 gauge 

steel enclosure. 

1) One (1) Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) 

2) One (1) Touch screen 

3) Yagi antenna Fiber Optic Transceivers 

4) 2.4 GHz Radio Fiber Optic Patch Panels provided under Section 27 15 23 1 

“Communications Optical Fiber Horizontal Cabling”. 

5) One (1) Level Relay Panel in a NEMA 1, 14 gauge steel enclosure. 

6) One (1) Discharge Line Isolation Valve Relay Panel in a NEMA 1, 14 gauge steel 

enclosure. 

2. Base 21 Pump Station: 

a. Fiber Optic Transceivers 

b. Fiber Optic Patch Panels provided under Section 27 15 23 “Communications 

Optical Fiber Horizontal Cabling”. 

3. Odessa Pump Station: 





3) Yagi antenna 

4) 2.4 GHz Radio 

5) One (1) Level Relay Panel in a NEMA 1, 14 gauge steel enclosure. 

4. Well Field Pump Station: 





3) Yagi antenna Level Relay Controls in RTU Cabinet 

4) 2.4 GHz Radio Ethernet Radio 

5. Big Spring Pump Station: 

a. One (1) PLC Modicon Quantum. The PLC shall be located in a NEMA 1 NEMA 12, 14 

gauge steel enclosure. 





6. Well Field Sites (typ. of 21 sites): 

a. One (1) PLC Modicon Quantum Momentum. The PLC shall be located in a NEMA 

4X, 304 stainless steel enclosure. 

1) One (1) Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) Ethernet Radio 




CMD11269 – Ward County Transmission System Expansion – Contract C – Above Slab TPS, OPS, and WPS 

2

7. Software 

8. Spare Parts 

2 

1 

9. Miscellaneous 

a. Provide an approximately 30ft tall self-supporting monopole or lattice type 

radio tower with antenna at each of the following sites: Big Spring Pump 

Station and the 21 Well Sites. Height of antenna is approximate only and shall 

be verified once radio path study is complete. Acceptable lattice supporting 

tower manufacturers is Trylon, Andrew, Microflect, Fort Worth Tower or Rohn. 

The tower shall be designed for 90MPH wind loading and 2” radial ice load. 

Refer to sheet TPS E-7 for additional information. 

b. Base 5 Pump Station & Big Spring Pump Station: At Base 5, provide a 5.8GHz 

antenna and mount to the existing antenna tower at the site to communicate 

with the Big Spring Pump Station site. The antennas at Base 5 and Big Spring 

Pump Station shall be Ubiquiti Air Grid M 5.8GHz 17”x24” antenna, no 


c. Penwell: Provide a 15 dB gain yagi antenna and 2.4GHz radio. Mount the 

antenna to the existing antenna tower at the site to communicate with the 

Odessa Pump Station site. 

D. Software Requirements - The SCADA System Integrator Contractor shall work with Owner, 

to provide as a minimum the following software modifications: 

1. Program the PLC(s) provided under this section. PLC shall be programmed using 

ProWorx NXT software. A copy of all programming shall be provided to the Owner. 

2. Program the graphic user interface touchscreens at each RTU Panel at TPS, OPS, WPS 

and BPS site. 

E. Onsite Requirements - The SCADA System Integrator Contractor shall have technical staff on 

site as required to provide a complete and operating system and shall include as a 

minimum: 

1. Preliminary Site Visit – Fifteen (15) days. 

2. Programming System Upgrades –Four (4) weeks. 

3. Startup Site Visit – Four (4) weeks. 

F. Reference Standards: 

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Institute of Electrical and Electronic 

Engineers (IEEE): 

a. C37.90.1, IEEE Standard Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests for Protective 

Relays and Relay Systems. 

b. C37.90.2, Trial Use Standard Withstand Capability of Relay Systems to Radiated 

Electromagnetic Interference from Transceivers. 

c. Electronic Industries Association (EIA): 

d. RS-232-C, Interface Between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Communication 

Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange. 

e. RS-422-A, Electrical Characteristics of Balanced Voltage Digital Interface Circuits. 

2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 

a. ICS 1, General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems. 



. ICS 1.1, Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid 

State Control. 

c. ICS 4, Terminal Blocks for Industrial Use. 

d. ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. 

e. Publication No. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V maximum). 

3. National Electrical Code. 

4. ISA Standards 

5. IEC 2 KV Isolation test 

6. IEEE472/ANSI C37-90A Surge withstand capability test. 

7. IEEE 802.3 

G. Lightning/Surge Protection 

1. Lightning/Surge protection shall be provided to protect the Supervisory Control & Data 

Acquisition system from induced surges propagating along the communications, signal 

and power supply lines. The protection systems shall not interfere with normal 

operation, but shall be lower than the surge withstand level for the device they are 

protecting and be maintenance free and self-restoring. 

2. All wiring, hardware, and connections means shall comply with the National Electrical 

Code and/or applicable local codes. 

3. Lightning/Surge protection devices shall be mounted as close to the equipment they are 

protection as possible. Mounting guidelines will be followed as indicated in installation 

instructions provided by the manufacturer. Wires shall be attached by means of a 

cable-clamping terminal block activated by a screw. Connections shall be gas-tight, and 

the terminal block shall be fabricated on non-ferrous, non-corrosive materials. All 

wiring points and plug connections shall be “touch safe” with no live voltages that can 

make contact with a misplaced finger. 

4. Panel mounted Lightning/Surge protection devices shall consist of two parts; a base 

terminal block and a plug protection module. Base shall directly connect to DIN rail. 

Replacing a plug shall not require the removal of any wires nor shall it interrupt the 

signal. Base and plug shall have the ability to be coded to accept only the correct 

voltage plug. Field mounted Lightning/Surge protection devices shall be contained in 

NEMA 4X housings. 

H. Path Study for Radio Communications 

1. Odessa Pump Station 

a. Prior to purchasing any equipment associated with the Odessa Pump Station SCADA 

system, the Contractor shall do a path study to determine the exact antenna height 

required for a clear line of sight and good reliable communication path year around 

between the Pump Station yagi antenna and Pinwheel Penwheel site. 

b. A radio propagation study shall be included. The study shall include physically 

transmitting a calibrated radio signal from the existing Penwell Plant site to the 

Pump Station site. The transmitting antenna shall exhibit the same overall gain as 

the proposed system locating the antenna in its proposed location and height. 

c. The results of the study shall be submitted to the Owner/Engineer as an official 

submittal for approval prior to purchasing any equipment. 

1 



1 

d. Any interferences shall be noted in path study. 

2. Big Spring Pump Station 

a. Prior to purchasing any equipment associated with the Big Spring Pump Station 

SCADA system, the Contractor shall do a path study to determine the exact antenna 

height required for a clear line of sight and good reliable communication path year 

around between the Pump Station yagi antenna and the existing Central SCADA 

computer station at the Water Treatment Plant. 


transmitting a calibrated radio signal from the existing Plant site to the Pump 

Station site. The transmitting antenna shall exhibit the same overall gain as the 

proposed system locating the antenna in its proposed location and height. 




3. Well Field Sites (Typ. of 21 sites) 

a. Prior to purchasing any equipment associated with the Pump Station each Well 

site’s SCADA system, the Contractor shall do a path study to determine the exact 

antenna height required for a clear line of sight and good reliable communication 

path year around between the station’s Well Site’s yagi antenna and the existing 

antenna at the C-Well site. 


transmitting a calibrated radio signal from the existing Plant C-Well site to the 

Pump Station site. The transmitting antenna shall exhibit the same overall gain as 

the proposed system locating the antenna in its proposed location and height. 




1.02 SUBMITTAL 

A. Submittals shall conform to the requirements set forth in section 01 33 00, “Submittal 

Procedures”. Submittals for 40 90 02, “Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 

System” shall not be combined with any other submittals. Submittals shall be organized by 

site, and each sheet shall be labeled with the site name. Each site shall have a notebook 

divider with its name clearly printed. 

B. Pre and Post Shop Drawing submittal meeting: SCADA Installer shall include in his bid the 

cost of attending a one-day pre-submittal meeting and a one-day post-submittal meeting 

in the offices of Freese and Nichols, in Fort Worth, Texas. The Project Manager for the 

SCADA System Installer must be present. A sales person may attend, but not as a 

substitute for the Project Manager. SCADA System Installer shall determine the number 

of people attending the meeting and cover each person’s cost. 



C. Post-submittal Sample Screens for Graphic User Interface (GUI) Touch Screen meeting: 

SCADA Installer shall include in his bid the cost of attending a one-day post-submittal 

meeting to go over the Sample Screens for the Touchscreens in the offices of Freese and 

Nichols, in Fort Worth, Texas or at the CRMWD office in Big Spring, Texas (location to be 

determined at the Pre-Submittal Shop Drawing meeting). The Project Manager for the 

SCADA System Installer must be present. A sales person may attend, but not as a 

substitute for the Project Manager. SCADA System Installer shall determine the number 

of people attending the meeting and cover each person’s cost. 

D. Loop diagrams shall be prepared according to ISA Standard ISA-S5 and using loop numbers 

provided. 

E. Shop Drawings: 

1. Schematic ladder diagrams shall include all terminal blocks, hardware devices, software 

interlocks, software data links, and control. 

2. Drawings, Diagrams & Schematics shall be on 11x17 paper 

a. PLC panel layout, plans, elevations, sections, details, etc. 

b. A schedule defining all I/O, database reference, and point of origin or destination, 

and PLC system internal address. 

c. I/O Drawings shall show where the signal originates from the left side with the 

destination on the right. For example, PLC input cards shall be on the right side 

with the field device on the left. All I/O associated with a I/O card shall be shown 

on the a single sheet. Each field device shall be identified by instrument tag, loop 

number, and instrument range (if applicable). 

d. Elevation drawings shall include mounting heights of panel mounted devices 

including but not limited to the HMI Touchscreen, indication lights, switches, etc. 

3. Software manuals shall be provided to configure the central system and technical 

review information. Provide sample program documentation from previous projects. 

4. Hard Copy of software program including programs and rung comments 

5. UPS Battery Sizing Calculations 

6. Radio Path Study Results 

a. The radio path study shall include a summary page indicating the findings and 

recommendations. The radio path study shall include information from both the 

software path study and from the physical radio path study test. 

b. The radio path study shall include screen shots from the radio path software study. 

7. Sample screens for the graphic user interface Touch Screens shall be submitted to the 

Owner/Engineer for approval. 

1 



F. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 

1. Operating instructions shall incorporate a functional description of the entire system 

including the system schematics which reflect "as-built" modifications. Wiring diagrams 

shall be furnished as a part of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals which clearly 

show terminal numbers and wire numbers as they actually are in the instrumentation 

system. Instrument panel wiring shall be such that each wire installed has its own 

number designation at each end and such that no number is repeated. Instrument 

panel wire tagging instructions as specified in Section 26 05 19, “Low Voltage Electrical 

Power Conductors and Cables” shall be followed. 

2. Special maintenance requirements particular to the system shall be clearly defined 

along with special calibration and test procedures. 

3. A schedule defining all I/O, database reference, and point of origin or destination, and 

PLC system internal address. 

4. Submit written description of functions, loops, and logic. 

5. Submit all SAMA Logic and Wiring Diagrams and ISA Logic Diagrams for all equipment 

requiring programming at the PLCs, with all set points and ranges indicated. 

6. One software copy of actual program files burned on a CD/DVD with a PDF copy of 

program with descriptions and rung comments. 

7. Provide hardcopy of PLC programming logic in O&M Manuals. 

8. Provide a hard copy of the “as-built” “as-built” wiring diagrams, panel layout, 

elevations, sections, details, and associated drawings in a separate binder. 

9. One PDF copy and one AutoCAD (.dwg) copy of the “as-built” wiring diagrams, panel 

layout, elevations, sections, details, and associated drawings burned on a CD. 

a. Maximum file size is 5MB. If manual is greater than maximum allowable file size, 

provide individual files for each major section of manual. 

b. All files shall be compatible with the latest software version available. 

c. Filename shall identify the plant site, plant area, equipment manufacturer, and date 

equipment placed in service. i.e. WWTP-PC1-Manufacturer-200503.pdf. 

d. Provide a master Table of Contents which includes links to navigate to all the files 

on the CD. The chapter labels shall identify the information included in that chapter 

as well as its file name, i.e.: RTU Panel Layout. 

e. Each PDF file shall contain a table of contents at the beginning of the file which 

includes hypertext links or bookmarks to navigate the file contents per 

section/chapter. The chapter labels shall identify the information included in that 

chapter as well as its file name, i.e.: RTU Panel Layout. 

f. Scanned images of written documents are not acceptable. Document must allow 

character selection. Text within a file shall be transferable to other documents. 

g. Submit a preliminary version of the electronic format of the manual for review. 

Upon approval of the preliminary submittal, the Contractor shall provide 3 copies of 

the electronic manual to the Owner. 

G. Factory Test Reports 

H. Equipment Installation Report 




A. Suppliers Qualifications: The complete system shall be configured, programmed, and 

installed by one qualified system supplier who is regularly engaged and qualified in 

designing and building instrument control systems. The system suppliers shall assume 

complete systems responsibility, including coordination and interfacing with all subsystems 

and equipment suppliers and manufacturers. The installation supervisor shall have had 

experience in overseeing installation and start-up of at least three similar installations. The 

bidder shall submit, upon ENGINEER's request, complete company history, resumes of full 

time project manager for this project, other key full-time system analysts, programmers, 

technicians, and submit project list with costs, OWNER, contact person, phone number, etc. 

B. Tests: The complete system shall be assembled and tested at the job site. The OWNER'S 

representative and the ENGINEER'S presence will be required at the time of final testing at 

the system supplier's facilities. 

C. Standards: All applicable NEC, ISA, IEEE, NEMA, UL, ANSI, IEC, FCC, FM standards shall 

apply. All equipment shall be new and UL listed and labeled. 

D. Assembly, Storage, & Handling: Once assembled and tested, the system shall be stored in 

air-conditioned and heated rooms. Ship the unit to job site only after the control room has 

been built and its HVAC system is in operation. 

1. The Owner may approve partial payment for SCADA equipment ready to be onsite but 

is stored off site. Partial payment may be disallowed by the Owner. 

a. For partial payment, the Owner shall receive as a minimum a sales receipt, lien 

release, proof of insurance and the Owner’s name shall be stenciled on the 

equipment being paid for. 

E. Acceptable PLC Manufacturers: 

1. Modicon 

2. No Approved Equal 

F. Acceptable SCADA Installers: 

1. Prime Controls (972)221-4849 

2. Richardson Logic (972)542-7375 

3. UMC Automation (432)524-2456 

4. No Approved Equal. 

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 

A. Furnish and install a programmable controller-based supervisory control and data 

acquisition system configured as a distributed processing network as defined by the 

Contract Documents. Control functions shall include digital logic control, PID control, and 

setpoint control. 



B. Include all hardware, firmware, software, and application programming and configuration, 

as necessary, to make the system completely functional and operational in accordance with 

the Contract Documents. All necessary components and equipment which are not 

specifically described in the Contract Documents, but which are necessary to configure an 

operational distributed control system as described herein, shall be identified, furnished, 

and installed by the CONTRACTOR. The system provided shall be the vendor's standard; a 

prototype system will not be accepted. 

C. Each programmable controller (PLC) along with all associated equipment shall be housed in 

its own separate cabinet. This includes mounting the UPS in the PLC cabinet. 

D. Contractor shall coordinate with Owner for information to be read over Ethernet and RS485 

data highways. 

1 

E. Contractor shall coordinate with Owner information to be read over Operator Interface 

Terminal (OIT) the graphic user interface (GUI) touch screens at each Pump Station and 

what all control functions the Owner wants to reside in the OIT GUI. 

1. GUI at Transmission Pump Station (TPS) 

a. The graphic user interface touch screen at TPS shall display all data identified in 

the loop diagrams for TPS. The Touch screen shall also display as a minimum the 

level of the existing tank at Base 21. The Touchscreen shall not be programmed to 

display nor control the existing Base 21 site. 

2. GUI at Odessa Pump Station (OPS) 

a. The graphic user interface touch screen at OPS shall display all data identified in 

the loop diagrams for OPS. 

3. GUI at Well Field Pump Station (WPS) 

a. The graphic user interface touch screen at WPS shall display all data identified in 

the loop diagrams for WPS. The Touch screen shall also display all data identified 

in the loop descriptions and I/O list for the 21 Well Sites and the existing C-Well 

site. 

4. GUI at Big Spring Pump Station (BPS) 

a. The graphic user interface touch screen at BPS shall display all data identified in 

the loop descriptions and I/O list for BPS. 

1.05 SPARE PARTS, TOOLS, AND SUPPLIES 

A. As a minimum, provide the following compatible spare parts, tools, and supplies as a part of 

this CONTRACT: 

1. Two (2) each I/O modules for analog and discrete input/output signals. Each module to 

have 8 I/O points for analog, 16 I/O points for discrete. 

2. Two (2) pushbuttons and five (5) pilot lights of each type furnished. 

3. In addition to above, provide the manufacturer's recommended spare parts for each 

piece of equipment furnished. 

4. One (1) spare PLC CPU of each type furnished. 



1.06 WARRANTY 

5. Two (2) spare PLC power supplies and I/O cards of each type furnished. 

6. Two (2) spare 24 V. DC power supplies of the type furnished. 

7. One (1) spare UPS unit of each size furnished. 

8. Two fiber optic network interface modules (PLC) of the type furnished. 

A. The Equipment supplier and the CONTRACTOR shall warrant to the OWNER that the 

equipment delivered with reference to this specification complies with this specification. 

B. The equipment supplier and the CONTRACTOR shall warrant the equipment as to defects in 

material and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance of the 

project. Vendor shall include a copy of his special equipment warranty with the shop 

drawings. The warranty specified by this specification shall be exclusive, and in lieu of all 

other warranties whether written, implied, orally presented, or statutory. 

C. Warranty for equipment shall be through the equipment manufacturer and shall include the 

option to purchase additional service agreements/extended warranties after the initial 

warranty for up to five years. 

2.00 PRODUCTS 

2.01 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 

A. PLC components at the site shall consist of the following: 

1. For TPS, OPS, WPS and BPS: Modicon Quantum PLC with ethernet and RS485 

connections 

2. For the 21 Well Sites: Modicon Momentum PLC with RS 485 connections (model 171- 

CCC-980-20 M1 Controller with 170-ANR-120-90 1/0 Base). 

1 

2 



B. The control system shall be configured using microprocessor-based programmable 

controllers for local process control functions. The control system shall be equipped with 

power supplies and individual uninterruptible power supply (UPS) to perform logic control 

functions based on the program stored in memory and the status of inputs and outputs. 

Memory will be required such that there is a minimum of 100 percent spare memory 

capacity and 100 percent spare data capacity installed. The spare capacity shall be 

documented by submitting to the ENGINEER, during factory testing, a statement indicating 

the amounts of memory of all types being utilized and the total amount available. The 

statement shall include an estimate of the total program and data memory necessary, 

including spare capacity, based on the I/O hardware for the system, and previous 

programming experience. Control functions such as register loading, register reading, and 

diagnostics may be downloaded from the central computer system programming. 

Automatic shutdown feature shall be selectable such that the desired field condition will be 

the default condition in the event of power loss or system failure. Power supplies shall be 

provided for the process controller as required with built-in protection against shortcircuits, 

overcurrent, and overvoltage. One communication port shall be provided for each 

programmable controller. 

C. The programmable controller shall be capable of complete control, including PID control, 

digital logic control, batch, and setpoint control. 

D. The entire PLC system shall immediately shut down and annunciate the occurrence of any 

of the following abnormal circumstances: 

1. Memory parity error. 

2. Loss of signal communication between CPU and I/O's. 

3. Loss of logic power to any portion of the system. 

4. Halt or interruption of memory scan. 

5. Detection of any incomplete relay ladder rungs in memory. 

E. The PLC system shall accomplish the control requirements of the loop descriptions, and 


F. The design application and installation of the PLC system shall conform to NEMA ICS 1.1. 

G. PLC programming shall be documented annotated in detail, and factory tested. 

H. Human-machine interface (HMI) at the main control room shall utilize existing system CRT 

displays and keyboard(s). Interface functionality shall include: 

1. Indication of process variables 

2. Configuration of control loop parameters 

3. Adjustment of controller output 

4. Display of real time and historical process trends 

5. Push button station controls 

6. System and process status indicators 

7. Graphic representation of plant operations with interactive status and measurement 

symbols 

8. Annunciation 

I. The PLC system shall operate in ambient conditions of 32 to 140°F temperature and 0 to 95 

percent relative humidity without the need for purging or air conditioning. 



J. Utilize a power turn-on time delay circuit when powering up or down DC power supplies to 

ensure power supply output voltage has reached the proper value prior to application of 

power to solid state logic and output circuits. PLC shall report a loss of power and 

operation from UPS to the Operators Work Station at the main control room. 

K. Environmental Controls: 

1. Furnish circulation fans in solid state control system enclosures. 

2. Over-temperature switches shall be utilized to provide special cooling if required to 

maintain operating temperatures within the manufacturer's specified range. 

3. Air conditioning applications shall include means of preventing moisture condensation. 

L. Input/Output Connection Requirements: 

1. Outputs shall be fused: 

a. External fusing shall be provided if output module does not possess internal fusing. 

b. Fuses provided external to output model shall: 

(ii) Be in accordance with module manufacturer's specifications. 

(ii) Be installed at terminal block. 

2. Install bleeding resistors across input from field devices which leak current sufficiently 

to flicker input status light. 

3. Make connections to I/O subsystem by terminating all field wiring on terminal blocks 

within the I/O enclosure. 

4. Prewire I/O modules to terminal blocks. 

5. Provide terminal blocks with continuous marking strip. 

6. Size terminals to accommodate all active data base points and spares. Terminal strips 

shall be provided to accommodate future I/O points associated with future equipment 

(motors, pressure transmitters, etc.) plus 20% spare. Provide a minimum of 20% spare 

I/O of all actual I/O points provided under this contract. Spare I/O shall be wired to 

spare terminal blocks. 

7. Provide terminals for individual termination of each signal shield. Stripping back 

twisted shielded pair and twisting together all the shields is not acceptable. 

8. Field wiring shall not be disturbed when removing or replacing an I/O module. 

M. Where the PLC is utilized to control multiple trains of equipment, the PLC components (I/O 

modules, power supplies, etc.) shall be assigned so that the failure of one component does 

not affect equipment on all trains. I/O modules shall be segregated on a train basis unless 

required otherwise for safety reasons. 

N. All PLC control system components shall be capable of meeting or exceeding 

electromagnetic interference tests per ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2. 

O. Incorporate the following minimum safety measures: 

1. Master Safety Relay: 

a. Cuts off power to I/O devices upon de-energization 

b. Multiple Master Safety Relays shall be available as required to provide ability to 

control separate designated blocks of the control program. 

2. External Watchdog Function to Monitor: 

a. Internal processor clock failure 

b. Processor memory failure 

c. Loss of communication between processor and I/O modules 

d. Processor ceases to execute logic program 



3. Safety Function Wiring: 

a. Emergency shutdown switches shall not be wired into the controller. 

4. An emergency power disconnect shall be placed in the power circuit feeding the power 

supply as a means of removing power from the entire PLC system. 

a. Capacitor shall be placed across the disconnect to protect against current outrush 

through trails. 

5. Safe Wiring: 

a. Equipment failure mode shall be selected so that the loss of power or control signal 

to the equipment will result in the equipment either shutting down or operating 

safely. 

b. Activation of alarms and stopping of equipment shall result from the deenergization 

of control circuits, rather than the energization of control circuits. 

c. Low voltage control signal wires: 

1) Place in conduit segregated for that purpose only 

2) Twisted shielded wire pair 

Not located in the same conduit or bundle with power wiring 

6. Initial Safety Conditions: 

a. Utilize program module to dictate output states in a known and safe manner prior 

to running of control program. 

b. Utilize program each time PLC is re-initiated and the control program activated. 

7. PLC Fault Relay: 

a. Placed in series with any other emergency stop conditions 

b. Opening of PLC Fault Contact: 

1) Upon unsafe or undesirable system operation, including: 

c. Loss of memory 

d. Processor fault 

e. Power supply fault 

f. Isolation failure 

g. Communications failure 

h. Isolation failure 

i. Communications failure 

j. Scan time overrun 

k. Module failure 

l. Scan time overrun 

m. Module failure 

8. Monitoring of Internal Faults and Display: 

a. Internal PLC system status and faults shall be monitored and displayed. Monitored 

items shall include: 

1) Memory ok/loss of memory 

2) Processor ok/processor fault 

3) Battery ok/battery low 

4) Power supply ok/power supply fault 

5) Isolation failure 



6) High CPU temperature 

7) Scan time overrun 

8) Module failure 

9. Control of Programs: 

a. Protect access to PLC program loading with locked, key operated selector switches. 

10. Effects of Failure: 

a. PLC system shall incorporate safe responses to the following failure effects: 

1) Power losses, interruptions, excursions, dips, and transients. 

2) Loss or corruption of memory 

3) Information transfer corruption or loss 

4) "Fail on" or "Fail off" of inputs or outputs 

5) Unreadable signals 

6) Addressing errors 

7) Processor faults 

11. Design PLC system with high noise immunity to prevent occurrence of false logic signals 

resulting from switching transients, relay and circuit breaker noise or conducted and 

radiated radio frequency interference. 

12. Incorporate noise suppression and inductive load suppression design into input, output, 

and logic modules 

13. Operator Intervention: 

a. Logic system failure shall not preclude proper operator intervention 

b. Safety shutdown of equipment or a system shall require manual operator 

intervention before the equipment or system operation may be reestablished. 

2.02 COMPONENTS 

A. PLC System Central Processor Unit (CPU): 

1. Completely solid state CPU designed to provide: 

a. Digital relay logic 

b. Analog loop control 

c. Other required control functions: 

1) Counting 

2) Floating point math computations 

3) Timing 

2. To provide communications with other control systems and man-machine interfaces as 

specified. 

3. To use electrical ladder diagram style programming for discrete logic applications. 

4. Memory: 

a. Battery-backed RAM 

5. Memory battery backup shall be capable of 60 days memory retention with fresh 

battery. 

a. Provide visual indication of battery status and alarm low battery voltage. 



. Memory battery backup shall be capable of 14 days memory retention after the 

"Battery Low" indicating LED is on. 

6. Plug-in card design to allow quick field replacement of fault devices. 

a. Provide unit designed for field replacement and expansion of memory without 

requiring rewiring or use of special tools. 

7. 100 percent minimum spare useable memory capacity after all required programming is 

in place and operating. 

8. Capable of executing all control functions required by the Contract Drawings including 

digital and analog loops. 

9. Built-in three-mode (proportional-integral-derivative) control capabilities. 

a. As directly selectable algorithms requiring no user knowledge of programming 

languages. 

10. On line reconfigurable. 

11. Lighted status indicators for "RUN" and "FAILURE." 

12. Capable of manual or automatic control mode transfer from the HMI system or from 

within the control strategy. Transfer shall be bumpless and balanceless. 

13. Modbus ports shall be provided for RS485 data highway associated with Multilin relays. 

See Plans for more details. 

B. Input/Output (I/O) Modules 

1. Provide plug-in modular-type I/O racks in each PLC enclosures if required, with cables to 

connect to all other required PLC system components. 

2. Provide I/O system with: 

a. I/O solid state boards with status lights indicating I/O status and board failure. 

b. Electric isolation between logic and field device. 

c. Individually fused outputs with blown fuses indication. 

d. Interchangeable boards for similar I/O type to allow substitution of operating 

boards for failed units by the operator. 

e. Capability of withstanding low energy common mode transient to 1500 V without 

failure. 

f. Incorporate noise suppression design. 

g. Capable of meeting or exceeding surge-withstand capability tests, per ANSI/IEEE 

C37.90.1. 

h. Capable of meeting or exceeding electrical noise tests, NEMA ICS1-109.60-109.66. 

i. Capable of being removed and inserted into the I/O rack under power, without 

affecting any other I/O modules in the rack. 

3. Discrete I/O Modules: 

a. Interface to ON/OFF devices 

b. I/O status indicator module front 

c. Voltage rating to match circuit voltage 

d. Output module current rating: 

1) Match maximum circuit current draw 

2) Minimum 1.5 A/point for 120 V AC applications 

e. Isolated modules for applications where one module interfaces with devices 

utilizing different sources of power. 

f. Individually fused with blown fuse indication. 



4. Analog I/O Modules: 

a. Input modules to accept signals indicated on Drawings or Specifications 

b. Minimum 12 bit resolution 

c. I/O chassis supplied power for powering connected field devices 

d. Isolated (differential) inputs and outputs 

e. User configurable for desired fault response state 

f. Provide output signals as indicated on Drawings and Specifications 

g. Individual D/A converter for each output module 

h. Individual A/D converter for each input module 

5. Spare I/O Modules: Each PLC shall have a minimum of 20 percent spare analog and 20 

percent spare discrete I/O points installed and wired to terminal blocks, isolates, surge 

devices, and relays inside the PLC. 

C. Power Supply Units: 

1. Provide regulated power units: 

a. Designed to operate with PLC system and shall provide power to: 

1) All components of PLC system 

2) Two-wire or four-wire field instruments 

3) Other devices as indicated on Drawings or Specifications 

4) Power supplies shall be summable type. 

b. Capable of supplying PLC system when all of the specified spare capacity is utilized 

c. Each power supply shall be sized such that it will carry no more than 75 percent of 

capacity under normal loads. 

2. Electrical service to PLC system is 105 to 125 V, 60 HZ, +1 percent, 1 phase power. 

3. Separate AC circuit breakers shall be provided for each power supply. 

4. If the PLC system is field expandable beyond the specified spare capacity, and if such 

expansion requires power supply modification, note such requirements in the 

submittals and allow room in the PLC system enclosure. 

5. Provide integral battery backup to maintain 60 seconds upon loss of all AC power. This 

is required to ensure transient power surges and dips do not affect the operation of the 

PLC system. 

6. Capable of meeting or exceeding electrical noise tests, NEMA ICS1-109.60-109.66. 

7. Capable of meeting or exceeding surge-withstand capability tests per ANSI/IEEE 

C37.90.1. 

8. Power Distribution: 

a. Immune to transients and surges resultant from noisy environment. 

b. Shall provide constant voltage level DC distribution to all devices. 

D. Programming Software 

1. The PLC shall be programmed using Modicon ProWorx NXT programming software. 

2. Provide a copy of all required programming software to Colorado River Municipal Water 

District (CRMWD). The software shall be licensed to Colorado River Municipal Water 

District, and shall be delivered to them at the end of this contract. 

2.03 HMI CENTRAL CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM 

A. All modifications to the CRMWD main HMI system at their control room will be done by 

CRMWD. 



2.04 COAXIAL CABLE 

A. Coaxial cable shall meet the following requirements: 

Characteristic impedance: 

Outer Conductor: 

Inner Conductor: 

Dielectric: 

Seal: 

50 ohms 

Copper, annularly corrugated 

Copper 

Closed cell low loss foam 

Connector o-rings to seal out moisture 

1. Coaxial cable shall be Times Microwave LMR type or approved equal. 

2. Diameter of coaxial cable shall be sized as indicated on the drawings and so that 

feedline loss from the antenna-side of the coaxial surge suppressor to the antenna does 

not exceed 1dB for directional antennas and 2 dB for omni-directional antennas. 

Feedline losses shall be calculated at the operating radio frequency and shall include 

losses in cable and connectors. The minimum size coaxial cable provided from the 

panel to the antenna shall be ½” diameter unless larger size is shown on drawings. 

3. All coaxial connectors shall be Type-N connectors. Connectors shall be manufactured 

by the same cable manufacturer which furnishes the coaxial cable. Connectors shall be 

Andrews Corporation Heliax cable connectors, or approved equal. All connectors shall 

be constructed of brass or be silver plated as recommended by manufacturer. 

Connectors shall have o-ring seal. 

4. All connections shall be weatherproofed using 3M-brand cold shrink weatherproofing 

kit or approved equal cold shrink weather proofing kit. 

5. Provide a pre-made cable assembly of Times Microwave LMR coaxial cable to connect 

from the radio antenna port to the radio-side of the coaxial surge suppressor. Provide 

straight or angled N-type connectors as necessary to route cable assembly within panel 

without exceeding manufacturer’s recommended bend radius. The pre-made cable 

shall be assembled by the coaxial cable manufacturer and shall be shipped with a 

certification of assembly and testing. 

6. Cable hangers shall be Andrews Hanger Model 42396A-5 for 7/8” cable or 43211A for 

½” cable with Andrews Round Member Adapter Model 31670, or approved equal. The 

use of plastic tie wraps is not acceptable. 

2.05 COAXIAL GROUNDING KIT 

A. Grounding straps shall be solid copper for high current handling. Construction shall be of 

the non-braided type. Grounding cable shall have field attachable grounding lug with a twopart 

tape system for weatherproofing. Grounding kit shall be Andrew Corporation or 




2.06 SURGE SUPPRESSOR 

A. Surge suppressor for AC power circuits shall be UL listed or recognized. Suppressor shall be 

designed to withstand a maximum 10 kA test current of a 8/20 µS waveform according to 

ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C Area. Suppressor shall consist of a multistage hybrid circuit 

with staging inductors or resistors to properly coordinate the components. Surge 

protection modules shall have a visual indication of circuit integrity. Devices shall include a 

SPDT contact rated for at least 120 VAC, 1 Amp, for remote failure indication. AC power 

surge suppressor shall be Phoenix Contact Mains-Plugtrab Series or approved equal. 

B. Surge suppressors for analog, discrete and data signals shall be UL listed or recognized. 

Suppressors shall be designed to withstand a maximum 10 kA test current of a 8/20 µS 

waveform according to ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C Area. Suppressors shall consist of a 

multistage hybrid circuit with staging inductors or resistors to properly coordinate the 

components. Analog, discrete and data signal surge suppressors shall be Phoenix Contact 

Plugtrab Series or approved equal. 

C. Surge suppressors for field protection of analog signals shall consist of a multistage hybrid 

circuit utilizing only diodes and/or gas discharge tubes but no metal oxide varistors (MOV). 

Suppressors shall be designed to withstand a maximum 10 kA test current of a 8/20 µS 

waveform according to ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C Area. Surge protection shall not have 

a cutoff frequency less than 400 kHz (for a 600 Ohm system) to allow HART protocol and 

other superimposed smart digital signals to function. 2-wire analog field surge suppressor 

shall be Phoenix Contact Pipetrab Series or approved equal. 4-wire analog field surge 

suppressor shall be Phoenix Contact Boxtrab or approved equal. 

D. Surge suppressor for antenna shall have multi-strike capability and low strike throughput 

energy. Suppressor shall be metal housed and surface mounted. Connectors shall be N 

type. Suppressor shall be designed to withstand a maximum 10 kA test current of a 8/20 µS 

waveform according to ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C Area. Clamping (turn-on) voltage shall 

be 600 VDC ±20%. Response (turn-on) time shall be < 100ns as tested. VSWR shall be ≤1.1 

to 2.0 with an impedance of 50Ω. Insertion loss shall be ≤0.1dB over frequency range. 

Operating temperature shall be -25°C to 80°C. Antenna surge suppressor shall be Phoenix 

Contact COAXTRAB, Polyphaser Corporation or approved equal 

2.07 POWER SUPPLY 

A. The power supply shall be fully enclosed and provide screw terminations by means of a 

cable clamping terminal block activated by a screw. Connections shall be gas-tight, and the 

terminal block shall be fabricated of non-ferrous, non-corrosive materials. All wiring points 

shall be touch safe with no live voltages that can make contact with a misplaced finger. 

Power supply shall have integral metal mounting feet to attach to 35-mm DIN-rail. 

B. The power supply shall conform to UL 508C standards allow use at the full rated current. 

The power supply shall have a visual indicator for applied power. Operating temperature 

range shall be -25°C to 70°C. Power supply shall have means of limiting DC current in case 

of short circuit and shall automatically reset when fault is corrected. Power supply shall be 

able to be run in parallel mode without external circuitry to provide redundancy. Residual 

ripple shall not exceed 150 mV peak to peak. 

C. Power supply shall be Phoenix Contact, Power-One or approved equal. 



1 

2.08 RTU CABINET 

A. TPS, OPS and WPS: Furnish and install the RTU cabinet at the location indicated. Cabinet 

shall be a NEMA 1, freestanding enclosure and shall have a hinged front door with key 

interlocking handle. The enclosure shall be made of 14 gauge steel with a 11 gauge 

mounting panel inside. The enclosure shall be minimum 72”H x 60”W x 24” D. The PLC 

with its UPS, shall be housed in the RTU cabinet. 

1. Mount the touch screen to the RTU enclosure. The touchscreen shall be mounted at a 

maxiumum elevation of 5’-0”AFF, include the housekeeping pad in the mounting height. 

B. BPS: Furnish and install the RTU cabinet at the location indicated. Cabinet shall be a 

NEMA 12, suitable for wall mounting enclosure with a hinged front door with key 

interlocking handle. The enclosure shall be made of 14 gauge steel, with a 11 gauge 

mounting panel inside. The PLC with its UPS, shall be housed in the RTU cabinet. 

1. Mount the touch screen to the RTU enclosure. The touchscreen shall be mounted at a 

maxiumum elevation of 5’-0”AFF, include the housekeeping pad in the mounting 

height. 

C. Well Sites (typical of 21 sites): Furnish the RTU cabinet at the location indicated. The RTU 

Cabinet shall be mounted on a unistrut rack by others under a separate Bid Package (the 

Well Site Contractor). Cabinet shall be a NEMA 4X, 304 stainless steel, suitable for 

unistrut mounting enclosure with a hinged front door with key interlocking handle. The 

enclosure shall include a 11 gauge mounting panel inside. The PLC shall be housed in the 

RTU cabinet. 

D. All discrete inputs/outputs shall have interposing relays. Interposing relays contained in this 

cabinet shall be 3PDT, shall have 24 VDC coils, shall each have a pilot light indicating 

energized coil, and shall each be mounted in a plug in socket with relay retainer clip and 

screw terminals. Relays shall be Square D KU13M1P14 or approved equal. 

E. Instrument panel wiring shall be as follows: 

1. Single conductor wire shall be stranded, tinned 16 AWG and MTW insulation, as 

manufactured by American Insulated Wire or approved equal. Color-coding shall be 

purple for ungrounded conductors and white for grounded conductors. 

2. Pair shielded cable for 4-20 mA DC loops shall be as specified in 26 05 19, “Low Voltage 

Electrical Power Conductors and Cables”. 

3. Each conductor terminated under a screw head shall have a crimp on spade terminal 

applied to its end prior to its termination. 

4. Each conductor has its own number and no number is used more than once. 

5. The number of each wire is placed at both ends of the wire next to its end according to 

wire tagging instructions as specified in 26 05 19, “Low Voltage Electrical Power 

Conductors and Cables”. 

6. The wire numbers, as actually installed, match the numbers on the shop drawings, 

O&M manuals, wiring diagrams and interconnection diagrams for this instrument panel. 



7. Wiring shall be run enclosed in plastic wireway wherever possible. Wireways shall be 

installed as required to enclose panel wiring. Where the use of plastic wireway is not 

practical, conductors shall be bundled and run open. Conductors run open shall be 

bundled and bound at regular intervals not to exceed 6" with nylon ties, or approved 

equal. Wires within a bundle are to be run parallel to one another and not twisted. 

Bundles shall have a uniform appearance, circular cross section, and shall be securely 

fastened to the panel framework. Conductors carrying different voltages that are from 

the same source may occupy the same wireway provided all are insulated for the 

maximum voltage of any conductor in the wireway. Wire ducts shall be insulated for 

the maximum voltage of any conductor in the wire duct . Wiring carrying voltages that 

originate at different source shall not run in the same wireway. Wire ducts shall be 

color coded as follows: 

a. 24VDC shall be routed in a Wire duct with a Light Grey Color cover. 

b. 48VDC shall be routed in a Wire duct with a Blue Color cover. 

c. 120VAC shall be routed in a Wire duct with a White Color cover. 

d. 480VAC shall be routed in a Wire duct with a Black Color cover. 

8. Terminal blocks shall be installed for wire terminations and shall be capable of 

mounting on a 35mm DIN-rail. Terminal blocks shall have a method of labeling for easy 

identification. Typewritten labels shall denote terminal block numbers and shall match 

numbers shown on shop drawings, O&M manuals and wiring diagrams. 25 percent 

additional terminals shall be provided for OWNER’s use. Terminal blocks shall be 

available with screw clamp technology and be made of a non-corrosive material. The 

metal body shall contain a serrated pressure plate that will provide a gas-tight 

connection with the conductor. All terminal block wiring points shall be “touch safe” 

with no live voltages that can make contact with a misplaced finger. Terminal blocks 

shall be rated 600V and shall be Phoenix Contact UT Series, Allen Bradley 1492-H1 

Series or approved equal. 

9. A separate 120VAC Terminal Block and circuit breaker shall be provided for RTU 

cabinet. 

F. A print pocket shall be provided in the panel and shall contain an 11" x 17" wiring diagrams, 

panel elevations and drawings. The wiring diagram shall contain all wire numbers, device 

names and terminal numbers. Drawings shall be laminated in clear plastic for preservation 

of the drawings. 

G. Enclosure shall be provided with an enclosed switched fluorescent light and 120 volt 

grounded duplex receptacle. Switch for light shall be mounted on inside of cabinet, easily 

accessible. 

H. Enclosure at TPS, OPS and WPS shall be provided with a fold down table for laptop pull 

out/up laptop tray that is located adjacent to the graphic user interface touchscreen. The 

laptop tray when pulled out/up shall be a minimum of 18”W x 18”D. Fold down table 

laptop tray shall be mounted at an elevation of 4’-0” 3’-0” AFF including the housekeeping 

pad height in the mounting height. The laptop tray shall be painted to macth the RTU 

enclosure. 

I. All equipment shall be mounted in such a manner that all maintenance may be 

accomplished with easy access through the RTU cabinet doors. 

1 

1 



J. Acceptable RTU cabinet manufacturers: 

1. Hoffman 

2. Hammond 

3. Rittal 

2.09 LEVEL RELAY PANEL (TPS, OPS, WPS) & DISCHARGE LINE ISOLATION VALVE RELAY PANEL (TPS) 

A. Enclosure: The Level Relay Panels at TPS & OPS and the Discharge Line Isolation Valve 

Relay Panel at TPS shall be housed in a NEMA 1, 14 gauge steel enclosure. It shall have 

lifting eyes and a front door provided with a key locking handle. The Level Relay controls at 

WPS shall be located within the WPS RTU Cabinet. 

B. All switches, fuses, terminal blocks, etc., shall have permanent nameplates or labels for 

identification. All wiring shall be identified with wiring markers with alphanumeric 

characters. The identification of each wire shall be the same as that shown on the 

electrical schematic. Each wire shall be so identified at each end. Each end of every wire 

shall be provided with a heat shrinkable or equivalent sleeve-type wire marker-labeled in 

accordance with the electrical schematic. Use of adhesive and clip-on type markers is 

prohibited. 

C. Provide a print pocket pouch with the control schematic drawings on the inside of the Panel 

door. The control schematic drawings shall be the final version of the drawings and shall 

include any field revisions made during start-up. 

D. All relays and pushbuttons shall be NEMA rated, heavy duty type. IEC or dual IEC/NEMA 

rated equipment shall not be acceptable. 

E. Terminal strips shall be 600V, NEMA rated manufactured by Allen-Bradley, Phoenix Contact 

or approved equal. Distribution blocks shall be per Section 26 05 19.01, WIRE 

CONNECTIONS AND DEVICES. 

F. CONTROL RELAYS: Industrial type; contacts rated for 10 amps at 600 VAC; Allen-Bradley 

Bulletin 700 Type PK, Square D Class 8501 Type X, or approved equal. Relays shall have the 

capability of having contact decks added in the field. Contacts shall be field convertible to 

normally open or normally closed. Coils and contacts shall each be replaceable without 

replacing any other part of the relay. Where control relays are indicated on the Plans, 

industrial control relays shall be furnished whether the relay coil is operated with 120 VAC 

or 24 VDC. General purpose “plug-in” type relays shall not be acceptable. 

1 

G. INDICATING LIGHTS, SWITCHES, PUSHBUTTONS: Heavy duty and oil tight (30 mm); Square 

D Class 9001 or approved equal. Pilot lights shall be push to test (LED type) and shall be 

Square D SK or approved equal. 

H. Each relay panel shall include a 120VAC terminal block and circuit breaker. 

I. Acceptable RTU Relay Panel cabinet manufacturers: 

1. Hoffman 

2. Hammond 

3. Rittal 



2.10 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (TPS, OPS, WPS, BPS) 

A. The system supplier shall provide an Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) for the 

programmable controllers and its associated RTU cabinet. The systems supplier shall size 

the UPS for the connected load plus 100% spare capacity. UPS shall also be provided at 

each PLC and at each of the remote I/O locations. Utilize Gel-cell type batteries housed in 

their own enclosure inside the RTU cabinet. The UPS shall be equal to Liebert, Topaz, APC, 

MGE or approved equal, and shall have capacity to supply power for a period not less than 

one hour continuously for the processing units (PLC), wireless I/O modules, 12VDC, 24VDC 

power supplies, and loop powered instruments connected to the PLC and I/O modules. 

2.11 SERIAL RADIO 

A. The transceiver shall be full duplex and designated for operation in the 2.4 – 2.4835 GHz 

frequency band, be entirely solid state, state-of-the-art design in RF and IF filtering to 

minimize interference from other systems operating in the same frequency range. Radio 

shall contain an internal modem as a standard feature. All adjustments shall be made from 

the front of the radio. All modules and fuses shall be replaceable from the front of the 

radio. Transceiver shall feature a programmable microprocessor. 

B. The following functions shall be indicated: 

1. AC power - on 

2. Transmitter - active 

3. Receiver – active 

C. The unit shall meet the following requirements: 

1. Security: 128 bit AES Encription 

2. Network Topology: Point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, store and forward repeater 

3. Error Detection 

4. Transmit Power: 10mW to 1W 

5. Programmable data rates 

6. Receiver Sensitivity: -106 at 230kbps 

7. Serial Data Port: RS-232 and RS485 

8. Operating Temperature: -40°C to +75°C 

9. External Power: 10VDC to 24VDC 

D. Serial radio shall be ProSoft Technology model Radio Linx RLX-IFH24S. No approved equal. 



2.12 SERIAL RADIO ANTENNAS 

A. Yagi: Antenna shall be specifically designed for 2.4/2.5 GHz SCADA band. The antenna shall 

Mounting casting shall permit horizontal or vertical polarization. Internal balun, coax feed 

and connectors shall be sealed in a foam potting system which prevents moisture 

penetration. Antenna shall be a ProSoft model number RadioLinx A2410NJ-DY. Antenna 

shall have a wind rating of 125 mph. 

1. Frequency range: 2.4 to 2.5 GHZ (Broadband) 

2. Gain (over dipole): 10 dBi 

3. VSWR: 1.5:1 Maximum 

4. Impedance: 50 ohms 

5. Front-to-back ratio: 20 dB minimum 

6. Input power rating: 100 watts 

7. Polarization: H or V 

8. Termination: N female 

B. Omnidirectional: Antenna shall be specifically designed for 2.4 – 2.5 GHz (Broadband). The 

antenna shall be fabricated from fiberglass. The antenna shall be provided with a 3 dB gain, 

vertically polarized, 50 ohm impedance. Antenna shall be manufactured by ProSoft, 

Kathrein –SCALA Corporation, Max Rad Inc., Antenna Specialist, Celwave RFS or approved 

equal. 

C. Contractor shall verify exact antenna requirements after results of radio path study are 

obtained and provide type of antennas required for a clear communications signal between 

the different sites. 

2.13 ETHERNET INTERFACE RADIO 

A. Ethernet interface radio shall be manufactured by Ubiquiti Networks, Bullet2 model. There 

is no approved equal. 

B. The Ethernet radio shall meet the following requirements: 

1. Networking Interface: 1x 10/100 BASE-TX (CAT5, RJ-45) Ethernet Interface 

2. Antenna: Integrated antenna array 

3. Power supply: Power Over Ethernet (POE) up to 24VDC. 

4. Operating Temperature: -20°C to +70°C 

5. RF Connector: N-type Make jack 

6. Enclosure shall be outdoor UV stabilized plastic 

C. Contractor shall field verify exact antenna requirements for Ethernet interface radio system 

after results of radio path study. 



2.14 GIGABIT ETHERNET 3-PORT SWITCH 

A. The ethernet switch shall transmit and receive 1000 Mbs data over fiber optic cable for a 

maximum distance of 5 miles. The unit shall utilize LED’s to display POWER STATUS, 

TRANSMIT DATA STATUS and RECEIVE DATA STATUS. The unit shall have an operating 

voltage of 24VDC. The unit shall have a mean time between failures (MTBF) greater than 

100,000 hours. 

B. The ethernet switch shall operate in ambient conditions of 0 to 50°C temperature and 10 to 

95 percent relative humidity, non-condensing. 

C. The unit shall be as manufactured by Industrial Fiber Systems, Inc. 

2.15 MANAGED INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET SWITCH 

A. The managed industrial Ethernet Switch with gigabit-ethernet (1000 Mbit/s), a minimum of 

two (2) ports for single mode fiber optic fiber and a minimum of fourteen (14) ports for 

CAT5e cable. The unit shall utilize LED’s to display POWER STATUS, LINK STATUS, DATA, and 

ERROR. The unit shall have an operating voltage of 24VDC and include a redundant power 

supply. The unit shall a mean time between failures (MTBF) greater than 200,000 hours 

B. The Ethernet Switch shall operate in ambient conditions of 0 to 50°C temperature and 10 to 

95 percent relative humidity, non-condensing. The switch shall be suitable for DIN-rail 

mounting. 

C. The unit shall be an industrial managed Ethernet Mice as manufactured by Hirschmann. 

2.16 GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) TOUCH SCREENS (TPS, OPS, WPS, BPS) 

A. Touch screens shall be 14-inch LCD terminals with full touch screen capabilities as 1 

manufactured by Allen Bradley PanelView Plus or approved equal. Each unit will be 

programmed to provide up to a minimum of five local control displays to monitor and 

control the functions assigned to the PLC’s. Automatic and local control interfaces shall be 

provided. 

B. One copy of the manufacturers touch screen development software will be included under 

this specification. The license for the software shall be registered to the Owner. 

C. Touch screen shall be mounted to the RTU enclosure at a maximum elevation of 5’-0” AFF, 

include the housekeeping pad in the mounting height. 

D. The Contractor shall provide all programming and all required interconnection cables for a 

complete and operational system. 





A. All work shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended practices. Care shall be 

exercised to avoid damage to equipment during installation. Damaged equipment shall be 

replaced by Contractor at no expense to the Owner. 

B. System equipment shall be installed where indicated in the Contract Documents. Power 

and signal connections between components shall provide the specified functions. Install 

according to equipment manufacturer's instruction. 

C. The system Supplier Contractor shall utilize their own printers, monitors, and computers for 

programming, testing, and start-up. The use of the OWNER's computers, monitors, or 

printers shall not be acceptable until the entire system has been installed, debugged, 

programmed, and operated to ENGINEER's satisfaction. 

3.02 PROGRAMMING 

A. The loop descriptions and diagrams shown in the Contract Documents are functional only 

and do not attempt to specify detail program coding that may be required. The 

CONTRACTOR shall utilize this functional information to develop complete application 

programming for the PLC equipment provided under this CONTRACT. Programs shall be 

designed to provide fail-safe operation of equipment in case of PC logic or power supply 

failure. Fail-safe shall be defined as "stopped" for all drives and "closed" for valves, unless 

otherwise specified. Up to fifty (50) graphic pages shall be required for the operatorinterface, 

and will be developed via a menu-driven color graphics editor. Interrupting logic 

between the PLC and central computer system shall be required as per system sequence of 

operation. An additional 15 graphics shall be developed in the field in coordination with the 

OWNER and the ENGINEER. The graphics shall be sufficiently detailed to include all 

equipment, pipes, valves, solenoids, meters, switches, etc. Graphics shall include 

equipment tag numbers and display the current flow rates, levels, quantities, status, 

elapsed time of equipment, etc. All such work shall be done at no extra cost to the OWNER. 

Before programming the graphics, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish a set of drawings for 

ENGINEER’S AND OWNER’S review. 

3.03 DOCUMENTATION 

A. Following delivery to the site, the equipment manufacturer, in the presence of the 

ENGINEER, shall demonstrate operation of the complete system. 

B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide documentation for all application software. 

Documentation system shall be diagrams in ladder-rung format, and shall show all input 

devices to the left of the left "power rail" and all outputs to the right of the right "power 

rail." The diagrams shall show all device codes and functional description used in the 

project manual, and shall also show PLC address codes, element codes, and I/O assembly 

codes, modules numbers, and terminal numbers. 



3.04 TESTS 

A. All elements of the SCADA system, both hardware and software, shall be tested to 

demonstrate that the total system satisfies all of the requirements of the Specifications. 

B. The Contractor shall furnish and install the field instruments, PLC, remote input/output 

(RI/O), and interface equipment in a schedule to meet the construction sequencing. 

C. As a minimum, the testing shall include the following: 

1. Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) 

2. Software Acceptance Tests (SAT) 

3. Operational Readiness Tests (ORT) 

4. Functional Demonstration Tests (FDT) 

5. 30-Day Acceptance Test 

D. Each test shall be in the cause and effect format. The person conducting the test shall 

initiate an input (cause) and, upon the system's or subsystem's producing the correct result 

(effect), the specific test requirement will have been satisfied. 

E. All tests shall be conducted in accordance with Engineer-approved procedures and 

documented. Each specific test to be performed shall be described and a space provided 

after it for signoff by the appropriate party after its satisfactory completion. 

F. Copies of signoff test procedures, forms, and checklists will constitute the required test 

documentation. 

G. Provide all special testing materials and equipment. Wherever possible, perform tests using 

actual process variables, equipment, and data. Where it is not practical to test with real 

process variables, equipment, and data, provide suitable means of simulation. Define these 

simulations techniques in the test procedure. 

H. Coordinate all testing with other Contractors, the OWNER, and the Engineer. 

I. The OWNER and/or ENGINEER will actively participate in many of the tests. The OWNER 

and/or ENGINEER reserves the right to test or retest any and all specified functions whether 

or not explicitly stated in the approved test procedures. The OWNER and/or ENGINEER 

reserves the right to observe and/or inspect the work during any phase. 

J. The Engineer's decision shall be final regarding the acceptability and completeness of all 

testing. 

3.05 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST (FAT) 

1 

A. The SCADA Contractor shall provide a factory acceptance test for all controls. The factory 

acceptance test shall be witnessed by the Owner/Engineer. Notify the ENGINEER and 

OWNER in writing a minimum of 14 days in advance of the proposed starting date for the 

Factory Acceptance Test. 



B. Testing shall include the following: 

C. Loop/Component Inspections and Tests: The system shall be checked for proper 

installation, calibrated, and adjusted on a loop-by-loop and component-by-component 

basis to ensure that it is in conformance with related submittals and these specifications. 

Actual real-time signals generated from the field devices shall be used. Simulation of field 

signals shall not be permitted. This test is intended to actually operate the entire process 

and to find and correct all real-time operational deficiencies. 

1 

1. The Loop/Component Inspections and Tests shall be implemented using forms and 

checklists. 

a. Each loop shall have a Loop Status Report to organize and track its inspection, 

adjustment, and calibration. These reports shall include the following: 

1) Project name 

2) Loop number 

3) Tag number for each component 

4) Check offs/sign offs for each component 

a) Tag/identification 

b) Installation 

c) Termination - wiring 

d) Termination - tubing 

e) Calibration/adjustment 

5) Check offs/ sign offs for the loop 

a) Panel interface terminations 

b) I/O interface terminations 

c) I/O signal operation 

d) Inputs/outputs operational: received/sent, processed, adjusted 

e) Total loop operational 

6) Space for comments 

7) Space for signoff by Contractor 

b. Each active analog subsystem element and each I/O module shall have a 

Component Calibration Sheet. These sheets shall include the following: 



3) Component tag number or I/O module number 

4) Component code number analog system 

5) Manufacturer (for analog system element) 

6) Model number/serial number (for analog system) 

7) Summary of functional requirements, for example: 

a) For indicators and recorders: Scale and chart ranges 

b) For transmitters/converters: Input and output ranges 

c) For computing elements: Function 

d) For controllers: Action (direct/reverse) control modes (PID) 

e) For switching elements: Unit range, differential (fixed/adjustable), reset 

(auto/manual) 

f) For I/O modules: Input or output 

8) Calibrations; for example: 



a) For analog devices: Required and actual inputs and outputs at 0, 10, 50, 

and 100 percent of span, rising and falling 

b) For discrete devices: Required and actual trip points and reset points 

c) For controllers: Mode settings (PID) 

d) For I/O modules: Required and actual inputs or outputs of 0, 10, 50, and 

100 percent of span, rising and falling 


10) Space for signoff by the Contractor 

2. Maintain the Loop Status Reports and Component Calibration Sheets at the jobsite 

and make them available to the Engineer and Owner upon request. 

D. Any deficiencies found shall be corrected. 

3.06 SOFTWARE ACCEPTANCE TEST (SAT) 

A. Prior to the start of the witnessed Software Acceptance Test (SAT), the entire system shall 

be installed on site, inspected and tested to ensure that it is fully operational and ready for 

the SAT demonstration testing. 

B. All panels and assemblies of the subsystem shall be completely installed except I/O signals 

to field elements or devices shall not be connected. The system shall be inspected and 

tested to verify that they are in conformance with related submittals and the Contract 

Documents. 

C. The PLC and subsystem primary elements, shall be interconnected and tested to ensure 

that the system is fully operational. The system shall be operated without signals leaving or 

entering from the field elements or devices for at least one week to verify that it is capable 

of continuous operation. Outputs to and inputs from the excluded primary elements shall 

be simulated. 

D. The system shall be tested, installed on site to demonstrate that it is operational and in 

conformance with the Contract Documents. 

E. Notify the Engineer and OWNER in writing a minimum of 30 days in advance of the 

proposed starting date for the Software Acceptance Test. At the time of notification, 

submit any revisions to the detailed test procedure previously approved by the Engineer in 

the Project System Plan. 

F. The purpose of the test shall be to witness and verify the functionability, performance, and 

stability of the hardware and software. The system must operate continually for 24 hours 

without failure before the test shall be judged successful. Successful completion of this test 

shall be the basis for approval of the system. 

G. The Software Acceptance tests shall be performed on all the equipment installed including 

the HMI system, PLC panels and subsystems. The SAT shall be a two-part text procedure; 

Part I shall include the PLC sub-system to verify all I/O addresses and proper step sequence 

for all features. Part II shall add the HMI to verify all screen displays, addressing and report 

generation. 



H. Where hardware items are of standard manufacture and in current production, the 

manufacturer shall certify that applicable tests have been performed and met, in 

accordance with IEEE and ISA Standards, and be prepared to supply copies of data to 

Engineer upon request. Such statements shall accompany the equipment submittals called 

for in SUBMITTALS of this Section. Any assemblage of devices together with operating 

programs shall be tested together as provided herein. 

I. The various tests performed during Software Acceptance Test shall be designed to 

demonstrate that the hardware and software fulfill all the requirements of the Contract 

Documents. The test conditions shall resemble, as closely as possible, actual conditions. 

Any additional hardware or software that may be required to successfully verify system 

operation shall be supplied at no cost to the OWNER. 

J. Some of tests to be performed shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 

1. Building and loading the system database. 

2. Conduct online modifications to the database. 

3. Demonstrate operability of the interfaces (hardware and software). 

4. Demonstrate operability of the data communication network. 

a. Fiber Optic Communications 

b. Radio Modem Communications (To Be Used by Owner as a backup if Fiber 

Communications Fail) 

5. Demonstrate all system software functions specified. 

6. Verify the displays and interactive capabilities of an operator's console. 

7. Simulate selected normal and abnormal operating conditions to verify the performance 

of the monitoring and control functions. 

8. Simulate every I/O point by opening or shorting digital inputs, inject appropriate signals 

into every analog input point, and measure the output signal from each analog output 

point. 

K. All deficiencies identified during these tests shall be corrected and retested prior to 

completing the Software Acceptance Test. 

L. The following documentation shall be made available to the Engineer at the test site both 

before and during the Software Acceptance Test. 

1. All drawings and specifications, addenda, and change orders. 

2. Master copy of the test procedure. 

3. List of the equipment to be tested including make, model, and serial number. 

4. Design-related hardware submittals applicable to the equipment being tested. 

5. Preliminary software documentation submittal. 

M. The daily schedule during these tests shall be as follows: 

1. Testing and meetings: Nominally 8 hours per day; 24 hours per day if required to meet 

schedule. 

2. Morning meetings to review the day's test schedule. 



3. Evening meetings to review the day's test results and to review or revise the next day's 

test schedule. 

N. All test data and procedures followed during testing shall be logged, and certified copies of 

the logs shall be provided to the Engineer and OWNER. 

O. The Engineer will observe each test once on a pass-fail basis. The Engineer alone has the 

authority to determine if a test passes or fails. Only four (4) fifteen minute windows per 

day will be allowed during the test procedure to make corrections to software and 

successfully pass a re-test. Otherwise, that test will be declared a failure. If a test fails, it 

will be put on a retest schedule. If other tests to follow rely on a particular test passing, 

then the following tests will also be placed on a retest schedule even though they were not 

tested before. Retesting shall not interrupt the test schedule. The CONTRACTOR may 

schedule retest days during the testing period, but not more than two per week. All 

retesting shall only occur on a day designated in the schedule or at the end of testing. 

P. All time and expense incurred by the Engineer and/or OWNER’S staff for all retests shall be 

borne by the CONTRACTOR and paid to the OWNER. Time and expense incurred shall be on 

a time and material basis tracked by the Engineer and OWNER for their own staff and 

presented to the CONTRACTOR on a periodic basis. 

Q. The CONTRACTOR shall expedite the correction of any deficiency discovered during testing. 

The CONTRACTOR shall have personnel from each trade to standby during the test period to 

immediately correct, or adjust any item of software or hardware or equipment causing a 

test to fail. 

3.07 OPERATIONAL READINESS TEST (ORT) 

A. General: Prior to start-up, the installed system shall be certified (inspected, tested, and 

documented) that it is ready for operation. Download all database on job computers from 

this test onwards. The OWNER and ENGINEER shall be notified when ORT starts. Copies of 

ORT forms that have been signed off by the CONTRACTOR shall be copied and sent to the 

OWNER and ENGINEER on a daily basis for record purposes only. No signature by the 

ENGINEER or OWNER is required for ORT forms. 

B. Loop/Component Inspections and Tests: The system shall be checked for proper 

installation, calibrated, and adjusted on a loop-by-loop and component-by-component basis 

to ensure that it is in conformance with related submittals and these specifications. Actual 

real-time signals generated from the field devices shall be used. Simulation of field signals 

shall not be permitted. This test is intended to actually operate the entire process and to 

find and correct all real-time operational deficiencies. 

1. The Loop/Component Inspections and Tests shall be implemented using Engineerapproved 

forms and checklists. 

a. Each loop shall have a Loop Status Report to organize and track its inspection, 

adjustment, and calibration. These reports shall include the following: 





3) Tag number for each component 

4) Checkoffs/signoffs for each component 

a) Tag/identification 

b) Installation 

c) Termination - wiring 

d) Termination - tubing 

e) Calibration/adjustment 

5) Checkoffs/signoffs for the loop 

a) Panel interface terminations 

b) I/O interface terminations 

c) I/O signal operation 

d) Inputs/outputs operational: received/sent, processed, adjusted 

e) Total loop operational 

f) Space for comments 

g) Space for signoff by Contractor 

b. Each active analog subsystem element and each I/O module shall have a 

Component Calibration Sheet. These sheets shall include the following: 



3) Component tag number or I/O module number 

4) Component code number analog system 

5) Manufacturer (for analog system element) 

6) Model number/serial number (for analog system) 

7) Summary of functional requirements, for example: 

a) For indicators and recorders: Scale and chart ranges 

b) For transmitters/converters: Input and output ranges 

c) For computing elements: Function 

d) For controllers: Action (direct/reverse) control modes (PID) 

e) For switching elements: Unit range, differential (fixed/adjustable), reset 

(auto/manual) 

f) For I/O modules: Input or output 

8) Calibrations; for example: 

a) For analog devices: Required and actual inputs and outputs at 0, 10, 50, and 

100 percent of span, rising and falling 

b) For discrete devices: Required and actual trip points and reset points 

c) For controllers: Mode settings (PID) 

d) For I/O modules: Required and actual inputs or outputs of 0, 10, 50, and 100 

percent of span, rising and falling 


10) Space for signoff by the Contractor 

2. Maintain the Loop Status Reports and Component Calibration Sheets at the jobsite and 

make them available to the Engineer and Owner upon request. 

3. These inspections and tests do not require witnessing. However, the Engineer will 

review the Loop Status Reports and Component Calibration Sheets and spot-check their 

entries periodically and upon completion of the Operational Readiness Test. Any 

deficiencies found shall be corrected. 



3.08 FUNCTIONAL DEMONSTRATION TEST (FDT) 

A. Once ORT has been completed and operational readiness has been confirmed, a witnessed 

Functional Demonstration Test shall be performed on the complete system to demonstrate 

that it is operating and in compliance with the Contract Documents. Each specified function 

shall be demonstrated on a paragraph-by-paragraph, loop-by-loop, and component-bycomponent 

basis. This test shall be scheduled and conducted only after all new pipeline 

construction is complete and the new pipeline and metering construction is completed and 

operational. 

B. Loop-specific and non-loop-specific tests shall be the same as specified under SOFTWARE 

and OPERATIONAL READINESS TESTS except that the entire installed PICS shall be tested 

and all functions demonstrated. 

C. Simulation of field signals, or simulation of the response of the process, or the response of 

individual components, or the functions being monitored or controlled, shall not be 

permitted. Simulation may be permitted with the express permission of the ENGINEER. 

The decision to simulate is the ENGINEER's alone. The CONTRACTOR shall include in the 

Contract Price the time necessary to wait for all process responses. 

D. Updated versions of the documentation called for under SOFTWARE and OPERATIONAL 

READINESS TESTS shall be made available to the Engineer at the jobsite both before and 

during the test. In addition, one copy of the approved Instrumentation O&M Manual shall 

be made available to the Engineer at the jobsite both before and during testing. The 

approved schedule shall be followed strictly on an item-by-item basis. Combining of test 

items shall be at the discretion of the ENGINEER alone. The CONTRACTOR shall include in 

the Control Price adequate time necessary to complete each test item one at a time. 

E. The daily schedule called for under SOFTWARE and OPERATIONAL READINESS TESTS shall 

also be followed during the Functional Demonstration Test. 

F. The Engineer will observe each test once on a pass-fail basis. The Engineer alone has the 

authority to determine if a test passes or fails. Only one (1) fifteen minute window per day 

will be allowed during the test procedure to make corrections to software or to field 

equipment and successfully pass a re-test; otherwise, that test will be declared a failure. If 

a test fails, it will be put on a retest schedule. If other tests to follow rely on a particular 

test which has failed, then the following tests will also be placed on a retest schedule even 

though they were not tested. Retesting shall not interrupt the test schedule. The 

CONTRACTOR may schedule retest days during the testing period, but not more than two 

per week. All retesting shall only occur on a day designated in the schedule or at the end of 

testing. 

G. All time and expense incurred by the Engineer and/or OWNER’S staff for all retests shall be 

borne by the CONTRACTOR and paid to the OWNER. Time and expense incurred shall be on 

a time and material basis tracked by the Engineer and OWNER for their own staff and 

presented to the CONTRACTOR on a periodic basis. 



H. The CONTRACTOR shall expedite the repair or correction of any deficiency discovered 

during testing. The CONTRACTOR shall have personnel representing each trade to standby 

during the test period to immediately correct, repair, or adjust any item of hardware, 

software or field equipment causing a test to fail. 

I. The system shall operate continuously for 100 hours without failure before this test will be 

considered successful. 

3.09 30-DAY ACCEPTANCE TEST 

A. All database errors must be corrected prior to the start of the 30-Day Acceptance Test. The 

30-Day Acceptance Test will not be considered successful until all databases are correct. 

B. Any malfunction during the test shall be analyzed and corrections made by the Contractor. 

The Engineer and Owner will determine whether any such malfunctions are sufficiently 

serious to warrant a repeat of the test. The cost of a retest shall be borne by the 

CONTRACTOR as specified. 

C. After completion of the Functional Demonstration Test and Plant Start-up, the Contractor 

shall be responsible for operation of the entire System for a period of 30 consecutive days, 

under conditions of full plant process operation, without single non-field repairable 

malfunction. 

D. During this test, Contractor personnel shall be present as required. The Contractor shall 

provide personnel for this test who have an intimate knowledge of the hardware and 

software of the system and also are familiar with the overall plant process. The Supplier 

shall be on-site a minimum of 8 hours a day and be on call for the rest of the day, during the 

entire 30-Day Acceptance Test. During the rest of the test period the supplier shall be 

available and on the job site within 48 hours of any failure. 

E. While this test is proceeding, the Owner shall have full use of the system. Only plant 

operating personnel shall be allowed to operate equipment associated with live plant 

processes. 

F. Any malfunction, during this 30 consecutive day test period, which cannot be corrected 

within 24 hours of occurrence by the Contractor's personnel, or more than two similar 

failures of any duration, will be considered as a non-field-repairable malfunction. 

G. Upon completion of repairs, by the Supplier, the test shall be repeated as specified herein. 

H. In the event of rejection of any part or function, the Supplier shall perform repairs within 5 

days or replacement within 30 days. 

I. Upon successful completion of the 30-Day Acceptance Test, approval of all as-built drawing 

and O&M Manuals, completion of all related Owner training, and delivery of all spare, 

expendable, and test equipment, the systems shall be considered substantially complete 

and the warranty period shall commence. 



3.10 TRAINING 

A. Provide an integrated training program for the Owner's personnel, both at the Supplier's 

factory or training center and at the jobsite. The Contractor shall submit a detailed training 

schedule and syllabus for approval. Tailor the training program to meet the specific needs 

of the Owner's personnel. Include training sessions, classroom and field, for managers, 

engineers, operators, and maintenance personnel. 

B. The training shall be carried out by technically competent and experienced instructors. 

C. An "instructor week" shall consist of 40 hours of actual instruction time. An "instructor day" 

shall consist of 8 hours of actual instruction time. Provide instruction on any or all three 

working shifts as needed to accommodate the Owner's personnel schedule. The actual 

1 

training schedule shall be coordinated with thee the Owner. 

D. The Contract shall hire a professional firm regularly engaged in video tape and/or film 

productions to video tape of all of the factory and on-site training sessions. The video tape 

and all rights there to shall become the property of the Owner. The Owner may re-use or 

distribute the video tape at their discretion. 

3.11 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING 

A. O&M training for each subsystem shall be in accordance with the requirements specified 

under the related Instrumentation specification sections. 

B. All training shall be given using only equipment identical to the equipment provided on this 

Contract or currently owned by the Owner. 

C. Unless otherwise specified, hardware maintenance training shall be suitable for instrument 

technicians who have at least a 2-year associate engineering or technical degree, or 

equivalent education and experience in electronics, instrumentation, or digital systems. 

3.12 ON-SITE SUPERVISION 

The Supplier shall provide, on-site, an experienced resident engineering manager to supervise 

and coordinate all of the on-site activities. This resident engineering manager shall be on-site as 

required during the total period to affect all the activities relating to the PICS. 

3.13 START-UP AND TESTING TEAM 

A. The Supplier shall provide, on-site, a team of experienced engineering, technician, trades 

personnel, and software/configuring personnel during the total construction period to: 

1. Thoroughly check the installation, termination, and adjustment of all the subsystems 

and their components. 

2. Perform and complete all on-site tests. 



3. Provide start-up assistance. 





Ward County Transmission System Expansion - Contract C - Above Slab TPS, OPS, and WPS 

Points List for Well Sites 

The following I/O list is shown for Well Site D1, but it is typical for all 21 sites. 

Well Site Loop Number Well Site Loop Number 

D1 4010 D13 4130 

D2 4020 D14 4140 

D3 4030 D15 4150 

D4 4040 D16 4160 

D6 4060 D17 4170 

D8 4080 D18 4180 

D9 4090 D20 4200 

D10 4100 D21 4210 

D11 4110 D22 4220 

D12 4120 D23 4230 

D24 4240 

Isolated/ 

Point Type Equipment Tag Loop 

Area 

Equipment Description 

Function I/O Char. Loop To RTU at 

DI Pump D1 4010 Well Site D1 Run Status Status Well Site D1 

DI Pump D1 4010 Well Site D1 Stop Status Status Well Site D1 

DI Pump D1 4010 Well Site D1 Auto Enabled Status Well Site D1 

DI Pump D1 4010 Well Site D1 E.Stop Enabled Alarm Well Site D1 

DI Pump D1 4010 Well Site D1 Overload Trip Alarm Well Site D1 

DI Pump D1 4010 Well Site D1 Motor Seal Failue Alarm Well Site D1 

DI Pump D1 4010 Well Site D1 Motor Over Temperature Alarm Well Site D1 

DI Pump D1 4010 Well Site D1 Common Alarm Alarm Well Site D1 

DI Pump D1 4010 Well Site D1 Low Level Alarm Alarm Well Site D1 

DO Pump D1 4010 Well Site D1 SCADA Start Control Well Site D1 

DO Pump D1 4010 Well Site D1 SCADA Stop Control Well Site D1 

AI LIT-4010 4010 Well Site D1 Level Indication 4-20mA Isolated Well Site D1 

AI PIT-4010-1 4010 Well Site D1 Supply Side Pressure Indication 4-20mA Isolated Well Site D1 

AI PIT-4010-2 4010 Well Site D1 Discharge Pressure Indication 4-20mA Isolated Well Site D1 

Data Hwy FIT-4010 4010 Discharge Flow at D1 RS485 Data Highway to Discharge Flow Meter Well Site D1 

Points List for Well Sites 

CMD11269 - Ward County Transmission System Expansion - Contract C - Above Slab TPS, OPS, and WPS 40 90 02.15-1




Appendix B 

Project Manual for Vertical 

Turbine Submersible Pumping 

Units Ward County North Well 

Field 

(Daniel B. Stephens & 

Associates, Inc.) 

March 2012

Project Manual for 

Vertical Turbine 

Submersible Pumping Units 


. 


Texas Registered Engineering Firm F-286 

4030 West Braker Lane, Suite 325 • Austin, Texas 78759 

March 2012 

400 East 24 th Street | P.O. Box 869 | Big Spring, Texas 79720 

432-267-6341 | www.crmwd.org | Fax 432-267-3121




Project Manual 

Contract Documents 

Section 00520 

Agreement Between Buyer and Seller for Procurement Contracts 

Exhibit A-1: Assignment of Contract; Consent to and Acceptance of Assignment 

Exhibit A-2: Agreement to Assignment by Seller’s Surety 

Exhibit B: Seller’s Bid 

Exhibit C: Qualification Statement 

Exhibit D: Certificate of Liability Insurance 

Section 00610 

Section 00615 

Section 00700 

Section 00800 

Performance Bond 

Payment Bond 

Standard General Conditions for Procurement Contracts 


Bid Addendum 1 

Bid Addendum 2 


Table of contents provided following the Contract Documents


Contract Documents


AGREEMENT BETWEEN 

BUYER AND SELLER 

FOR PROCUREMENT CONTRACTS 

Prepared by 

and 

Issued and Published Jointly by 

AMERICAN COUNCIL OF ENGINEERING COMPANIES 

______________________ 


_______________________ 

ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA 

______________________ 


A Practice Division of the 


EJCDC P-520, Agreement Between Buyer and Seller for Procurement Contracts. 

Copyright © 2010 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, 

American Society of Civil Engineers, and Associated General Contractors of America. All rights reserved. 

Page i

Copyright © 2010: 


1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314-2794 

(703) 684-2882 

www.nspe.org 

American Council of Engineering Companies 

1015 15th Street, N.W., Washington, DC 20005 

(202) 347-7474 

www.acec.org 


1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191-4400 

(800) 548-2723 

www.asce.org 

Associated General Contractors of America 

2300 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 400, Arlington, VA 22201-3308 

(703) 548-3118 

www.agc.org 

The copyright for EJCDC P-520 is owned jointly by the four EJCDC sponsoring organizations listed 

above. The National Society of Professional Engineers (NSPE) is the Copyright Administrator for the 

EJCDC documents; please direct all inquiries and requests regarding EJCDC copyrights to NSPE. 

NOTE: EJCDC publications may be purchased at www.ejcdc.org, or from any of the four sponsoring 

organizations above. 




Page ii


Article 1 – GOODS AND SPECIAL SERVICES ...................................................................................... 1 

Article 2 – THE PROJECT ......................................................................................................................... 1 

Article 3 – ENGINEER .............................................................................................................................. 1 

Article 4 – POINT OF DESTINATION ..................................................................................................... 1 

Article 5 – CONTRACT TIMES ................................................................................................................ 1 

Article 6 – CONTRACT PRICE................................................................................................................. 2 

Article 7 – PAYMENT PROCEDURES .................................................................................................... 3 

Article 8 – INTEREST................................................................................................................................ 4 

Article 9 – SELLER’S REPRESENTATIONS .......................................................................................... 4 

Article 10 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ................................................................................................. 4 

Article 11 – MISCELLANEOUS ............................................................................................................... 6 




Page iii

AGREEMENT 

THIS AGREEMENT is by and between Colorado River Municipal Water District (“Buyer”) 

and Clowe & Cowan of El Paso LLC (“Seller”). 

Buyer and Seller hereby agree as follows: 

ARTICLE 1 – GOODS AND SPECIAL SERVICES 

1.01 Seller shall furnish the Goods and Special Services as specified or indicated in the Contract 

Documents. 

ARTICLE 2 – THE PROJECT 

2.01 The Project, of which the Goods and Special Services may be the whole or only a part, is 

identified as follows: 

Vertical Turbine Submersible Pumping Units, Ward County North Well Field 

ARTICLE 3 – ENGINEER 

3.01 The Contract Documents for the Goods and Special Services have been prepared by Daniel 

B. Stephens & Associates, Inc. ("Engineer"), which is to act as Buyer's representative, 

assume all duties and responsibilities, and have the rights and authority assigned to Engineer 

in the Contract Documents in connection with Seller’s furnishing of Goods and Special 

Services. 

ARTICLE 4 – POINT OF DESTINATION 

4.01 The Point of Destination is designated as: a 50-mile radius around the Town of Wickett, 

Texas. The Seller shall clarify the Point of Destination with the Engineer prior to shipment 

of Goods. 

ARTICLE 5 – CONTRACT TIMES 

5.01 Time of the Essence 

A. All time limits for Milestones, if any, including the submittal of Shop Drawings and 

Samples, the delivery of Goods, and the furnishing of Special Services as stated in the 

Contract Documents, are of the essence of the Contract. 

5.02 Milestones 

A. Days for Submittal of Shop Drawings and Samples: Seller shall submit all Shop 

Drawings and Samples required by the Contract Documents to Buyer for Engineer’s 

review and approval within seven calendar days after the date when the Contract Times 

commence to run as provided in Paragraph 2.04 of the General Conditions. I t is the 




Page 00520-1

intent of the parties that (1) Engineer conduct such review and issue its approval, or a 

denial accompanied by substantive comments regarding information needed to gain 

approval, within seven calendar days of Seller's submittal of such Shop Drawings and 

Samples; and ( 2) resubmittals be limited whenever possible. If more than one 

resubmittal is necessary for reasons not the fault and beyond the control of Seller, then 

Seller shall be entitled to seek appropriate relief under Paragraph 7.02.B of the General 

Conditions. 

B. Days to Achieve Delivery of Goods: The Goods are to be delivered to the Point of 

Destination and ready for Buyer’s receipt of delivery within twelve weeks of each written 

order for Goods placed by the Engineer. Seller shall not furnish Goods without a written 

request from the Engineer.days (but not earlier than ____ days) after the date when the 

Contract Times commence to run as provided in Paragraph 2.04 of the General 

Conditions. 

5.03 Buyer's Final Inspection 

A. Days to Achieve Final Inspection: Buyer shall make its final inspection of the Goods 

pursuant to Paragraph 8.01.C of the General Conditions within 90 days after Buyer's 

acknowledgement of receipt of delivery of the Goods and Seller's completion of 

furnishing Special Services, if any. 

5.04 Liquidated Damages 

A. Buyer and Seller recognize that Buyer will suffer financial loss if the Goods are not 

delivered at the Point of Destination and ready for receipt of delivery by Buyer within the 

times specified in Paragraph 5.02 above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in 

accordance with Article 7 of the General Conditions. The parties also recognize that the 

timely performance of services by others involved in the Project is materially dependent 

upon Seller’s specific compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 5.02. Further, they 

recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving the actual loss suffered 

by Buyer if complete acceptable Goods are not delivered on time. Accordingly, instead 

of requiring such proof, Buyer and Seller agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but 

not as a penalty) Seller shall pay Buyer $100.00 for each calendar day that expires after 

the time specified in Paragraph 5.02.B for delivery of acceptable Goods. 

ARTICLE 6 – CONTRACT PRICE 

6.01 Buyer shall pay Seller for furnishing the Goods and Special Services in accordance with the 

Contract Documents as follows: 

A. The prices stated in Seller’s Bid, attached hereto as an exhibit. 




Page 00520-2

ARTICLE 7 – PAYMENT PROCEDURES 

7.01 Submittal and Processing of Payment 

A. Seller shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 10 of the 

General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by Engineer as 

provided in the General Conditions. 

A.B. Seller shall submit Applications for Payment for items covering insurance, bonds, 

and related costs at 100 percent of the Contract Price upon delivery of the first written 

order for Goods placed by the Engineer. 

7.02 Progress Payments; Retainage 

A. Buyer shall make progress payments on a ccount of the Contract Price on t he basis of 

Seller’s Applications for Payment as follows: 


1. Upon receipt of the first Application for Payment submitted in accordance with 

Paragraph 10.01.A.1 of the General Conditions, as modified by the Supplemental 

Conditions, a Purchase Order will be issued to Seller. Statutory requirements prevent 

Buyer from making initial progress payments.and accompanied by Engineer’s 

recommendation of payment in accordance with Paragraph 10.02.A of the General 

Conditions, an amount equal to 30 percent of the Contract Price, less such amounts as 

Engineer may determine in accordance with Paragraph 10.02.A.3 of the General 

Conditions. 

2. Upon receipt of the second such Application for Payment accompanied by Engineer’s 

recommendation of payment in accordance with Paragraph 10.01.A.2 of the General 

Conditions, an amount sufficient to increase total payments to Seller to 90 percent of 

the Contract Price, less such amounts as Engineer may determine in accordance with 

Paragraph 10.02.A.3 of the General Conditions. 

A. Upon receipt of the final Application for Payment accompanied by Engineer’s 

recommendation of payment, Buyer shall pay Seller the amount recommended by 

Engineer, less any sum Buyer is entitled to set off against Engineer's recommendation, 

including but not limited to liquidated damages. 




Page 00520-3

ARTICLE 8 – INTEREST 

8.01 All monies not paid when due as provided in Article 10 of the General Conditions shall bear 

interest at the statutory rate. 

ARTICLE 9 – SELLER’S REPRESENTATIONS 

9.01 In order to induce Buyer to enter into this Agreement, Seller makes the following 

representations: 

A. Seller has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related 

data identified in the Bidding Documents, as applicable to Seller's obligations identified 

in Article 1 above. 

B. If required by the Bidding Documents to visit the Point of Destination and site where the 

Goods are to be installed or Special Services will be provided, or if, in Seller’s judgment, 

any local condition may affect cost, progress, or the furnishing of the Goods and Special 

Services, Seller has visited the Point of Destination and site where the Goods are to be 

installed or Special Services will be provided and become familiar with and is satisfied as 

to the observable local conditions that may affect cost, progress, and the furnishing of the 

Goods and Special Services. 

C. Seller is familiar with and is satisfied as to all Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, 

progress, and the furnishing of the Goods and Special Services. 

D. Seller has carefully studied, considered, and correlated the information known to Seller; 

information commonly known to sellers of similar goods doing business in the locality of 

the Point of Destination and the site where the Goods will be installed or where Special 

Services will be provided; information and observations obtained from Seller’s visits, if 

any, to the Point of Destination and site where the Goods are to be installed or Services 

will be provided; and any reports and drawings identified in the Bidding Documents 

regarding the Point of Destination and the site where the Goods will be installed or where 

Special Services will be provided, with respect to the effect of such information, 

observations, and documents on t he cost, progress, and performance of Seller's 

obligations under the Contract Documents. 

E. Seller has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or 

discrepancies that Seller has discovered in the Contract Documents, and the written 

resolution (if any) thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Seller. 

F. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of 

all terms and conditions for furnishing Goods and Special Services. 

ARTICLE 10 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 

10.01 Contents 

A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 




Page 00520-4

1. This Agreement (pages 00520-1 to 00520-9, inclusive); 

2. Performance Bond (pages 00610-1 to 00610-4, inclusive); 

3. Payment Bond (pages 00615-1 to 00615-3, inclusive); 

4. Other bonds 

5. General Conditions (pages 00700-1 to 00700-30, inclusive); 

6. Supplementary Conditions (pages 00800-1 to 00800-8, inclusive); 

7. Specifications as listed in table of contents of the Project Manual; 

8. Drawings, consisting of a cover sheet and sheets numbered through , 

inclusive, with each sheet bearing the following general title: 

9. Addenda (Numbers 1 to 2, inclusive); 

10. Exhibits to this Agreement (enumerated as follows): 

a. Exhibit A-1: Assignment of Contract; Consent to and Acceptance of Assignment; 

b. Exhibit A-2: Agreement to Assignment by Seller’s Surety; 

c. Exhibit B: Seller’s Bid, solely as to the prices set forth therein (pages 00400-1 to 

00400-8, inclusive); 

d. Exhibit C: Documentation submitted by Seller prior to Notice of Award 

(Qualification statement dated February 6, 2012); 

e. Exhibit D: Certificate of liability insurance. 

11. The following which may be delivered or issued on or after the Effective Date of the 

Agreement and are not attached hereto: 

a. Notice to Proceed; 

b. Change Order(s); 

c. Work Change Directive(s). 

B. The documents listed in Paragraph 10.01.A are attached to this Agreement (except as 

expressly noted otherwise above). 

C. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 10. 

D. The Contract Documents may only be amended, or supplemented as provided in 

Paragraph 3.04 of the General Conditions. 




Page 00520-5

ARTICLE 11 – MISCELLANEOUS 

11.01 Terms 

A. Terms used in this Agreement will have the meanings indicated in the General 

Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions. 

11.02 Assignment of Contract 

A. Buyer has the right to assign this Contract for furnishing Goods and Special Services, but 

only to a person or entity with sufficient ability to satisfy all of Buyer's obligations under 

this Contract, and Seller hereby consents to such assignment. Buyer intends to exercise 

this right. Forms documenting the assignment of the Contract, and consent of Seller’s 

surety to the assignment, have been executed by Buyer, Seller, and Seller's surety, and 

are attached as exhibits to this Agreement. 

1. The Contract will be executed in the name of Buyer initially, and will be assigned to a 

construction contractor designated by Buyer. Multiple Purchase Orders will be issued 

to the selected Seller. It is the intent of the Buyer to assign these Purchase Orders to 

the construction contractor designated by Buyer. Such construction contractor's 

responsibilities will include the installation of the Goods. The assignment will occur 

on the effective date of the agreement between Buyer and the construction contractor, 

which is expected to occur on or about May 13, 2012. As of the date of acceptance of 

assignment by the construction contractor, all references in the Contract Documents 

to Buyer shall mean the designated construction contractor. 

2. The assignment of the Contract shall relieve the assignor from all further obligations 

and liabilities under this Contract. A fter assignment, Seller shall become a 

subcontractor or supplier to the assignee and, except as noted herein, all rights, duties, 

and obligations of Buyer under the Contract shall become the rights, duties, and 

obligations of the assignee. The construction contractor will be assigned all 

responsibility for scheduling, receiving, inspecting, unloading, protecting, installing, 

and paying the selected Seller for the equipment. The construction contractor will 

supply performance and payment bonds and will make payments to the Seller. The 

Seller shall coordinate delivery, installation, startup, and testing with the construction 

contractor. 

3. After assignment: 

a. All performance warranties, guarantees, and indemnifications required by the 

Contract Documents will continue to run for the benefit of assignor and, in 

addition, for the benefit of the assignee. However, if assignor and assignee make 

the same warranty or guarantee claim, then Seller shall only be liable once for 

such claim. 

b. Except as provided in this Paragraph 11.02.A.3.b, all rights, duties, and 

obligations of Engineer to assignee and Seller under this Contract will cease. 




Page 00520-6

1) Engineer will review Seller’s Applications for Payment and make 

recommendations to assignee for payments as provided in Paragraphs 10.02 

and 10.06 of the General Conditions. 

2) Upon the written request of either the assignee or Seller, Engineer will issue 

with reasonable promptness clarifications or interpretations of the Contract 

Documents pursuant to the terms of Paragraph 9.02.A of the General 

Conditions. 

3) Engineer will continue to place written orders for Goods and determine actual 

quantities as provided for in the Contract Documents. 

B. No other assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract 

Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the 

party sought to be bound. Specifically but without limitation, moneys that may become 

due and moneys that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the 

extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by Laws and Regulations). Unless 

specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to such an assignment, such an 

assignment will not release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility 

under the Contract Documents. 

11.03 Successors and Assigns 

A. Buyer and Seller each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns, and legal 

representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns, and legal 

representatives in respect to all covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the 


11.04 Severability 

A. Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be void or unenforceable under 

any Law or Regulation shall be deemed stricken, and all remaining provisions shall 

continue to be valid and binding upon Buyer and Seller. The Contract Documents shall 

be reformed to replace such stricken provision or part thereof with a valid and 

enforceable provision that comes as close as possible to expressing the intention of the 

stricken provision. 

11.05 Seller’s Certifications 

A. Seller certifies that it has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive 

practices in competing for or in executing the Contract. F or the purposes of this 

Paragraph 11.05: 

1. “corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of any thing of 

value likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process or in the 

Contract execution; 

2. “fraudulent practice” means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to 

influence the bidding process or the execution of the Contract to the detriment of 




Page 00520-7

11.06 Limitations 

Buyer, (b) to establish Bid or Contract prices at artificial non-competitive levels, or 

(c) to deprive Buyer of the benefits of free and open competition; 

3. “collusive practice” means a scheme or arrangement between two or more Bidders, 

with or without the knowledge of Buyer, a purpose of which is to establish Bid prices 

at artificial, non-competitive levels; and 

4. “coercive practice” means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly, 

persons or their property to influence their participation in the bidding process or 

affect the execution of the Contract. 

A. Buyer and Seller waive against each other, and against the other’s officers, directors, 

members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors, any and all claims 

for or entitlement to incidental, indirect, or consequential damages arising out of, 

resulting from, or related to the Contract. Upon assignment the terms of this Paragraph 

11.06.A shall be binding upon the assignee with respect to Seller and assignor. The terms 

of this mutual waiver do not apply to or limit any claim by either Buyer or Seller against 

the other based on a ny of the following: (a) contribution or indemnification, (b) costs, 

losses, or damages attributable to personal or bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or 

to injury to or destruction of the tangible property of others, (c) intentional or reckless 

wrongful conduct, or (d) rights conferred by any bond provided by Seller under this 

Contract. 

B. Mutual Limitation of Liability: Buyer and Seller further agree that the total liability of 

each party to the other for claims, costs, losses, and damages arising from this Contract 

shall be limited to the amount established in this Agreement as the Contract Price. 

B.C. Upon assignment the terms of this Paragraph 11.06.CB shall be binding upon both 

the assignor and assignee with respect to Seller's liability, and upon Seller with respect to 

both assignor's and assignee's liabilities. The terms of this mutual limitation do not apply 

to or limit any claim by either Buyer or Seller against the other based on a ny of the 

following: (a) contribution or indemnification with respect to third-party claims, losses, 

and damages; (b) costs, losses, or damages attributable to personal or bodily injury, 

sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of the tangible property of others, 

(c) intentional or reckless wrongful conduct, or (d) rights conferred by any bond provided 

by Seller under this Contract. 




Page 00520-8

RESOLUTION 

VERTICLE TURBINE SUBMERSIBLE PUMPING UNITS, WARD COUNTY NORTH WELL FIELD 

WHEREAS, the Partners of Clowe & Cowan of EI Paso LLC In EI Paso, Texas on December 01, 2010, 

approved the President, Richard De La Torre, and Ray Salas CFO, with all the necessary authorizations 

required to represent the Partnership and to execute and manage the Project. 

NOW THEREFORE, be it resolved by the Partners of Clowe & Cowan of EI Paso LLC that: 

1. Richard l. De La Torre as President Is the representative for the project and Is authorized to 

submit, on behalf of Clowe & Cowan of EL Paso LLC any documents pertaining to the project to 

appropriate acencles and ol'lanlzatlons and to act as the point ofcontact, and Is the SIG NATORY 

AUTHORITY for any such documents. 

2. Ray Salas asCFO Is the representative for the project and is authorize to submit, on behalf of 

Clowe " Cowan of EI Paso LLC any documents pertaining to the project to appropriate Bgencles 

and 0l'lanlzatlons and to act as the point of contact, and Is the SIGNATORV AUTHORITY for any 

such documents. 

PASSED ,APPROVED, and adopted this 10th day of December, 2010. 

BOARD OF PARTNERS OF Clowe & Cowan of EI Paso LLC 

~ ::6£//. 

. . ~~ 

Richard L. De La Torre-President Principal 

Jo ~rlnt;:~ 

Mllil i Office 

11221 Rojas Drlve, EI Paso, Texas, USA. 79935 800.937.8833 T 915.593.8833 F 915.593.8872 E saleS@ccelp.com W ctelp.com

~L 

Ed Patterson-Principal 

M.U'i~.dO-P'incipai




VENDOR COMPLIANCE TO STATE LAW 

The 1985 Session of the Texas Legislature passed House Bill 620 relative to the award of Contracts to 

non-resident Bidders. This law provides that, in order to be awarded a Contract as low Bidder, nonresident 

Bidders (out-of-state contractors whose corporate offices or principal place of business are 

outside of the state of Texas) bid projects for construction, improvements, supplies or services in Texas at 

an amount lower than the lowest Texas resident Bidder by the same amount that a Texas resident Bidder 

would be required to underbid a non-resident Bidder in order to obtain a comparable Contract in the state 

in which the non-resident's principal place of business is located. The appropriate blanks in Section A 

must be filled out by all out-of-state or non-resident Bidders in order for the Bid to meet specifications. 

The failure of out-of-state or non-resident Bidders to do so will automatically disqualify that Bidder. 

Resident bidders must check the blank in Section B. 

A. l\Jon-resident vendors in (give state), our principal place of business, are required to be 

___ percent lower than resident bidders by state law. A copy of the statute is attached. 

Non-resident vendors in 

underbid resident bidders. 

(give state), our principal place of business, are not required to 

B. ~ur principal place of business or corporate office is in the State of Texas: 

BIDDER: 

c.lt:>v..>e.. ~ ~l:Ln 0+£' ~ LLc. 

Company 

By: j2c.h~ D -&Lt:,,-/ote-~ 

(please print) 

\ \2...2-1 I20J ¢.s cv- 

Signature: ~kt: 

Tx Title: -Bes/ l:>~-r 

City State Zip (please print) 

THIS FORM MUST BE RETURNED WITH YOUR BID 

00400-Exhibit A·1

CONFLICT OF INTEREST QUESTIONNAIRE 

For vendor or other person doing business with local governmental entity 

FORM CIQ 

1hl'8 qll

Brown and Caldwell Engineering: Horacio Juarez, PE (915) 545-4400 

‣ Furnish submersible pumps with 40 Hp to 125 Hp for the “Acueducto Valle de Verano” 

in Parral Chihuahua Mexico 

o Amount of pumps: 19 

o Project awarded in 2011 

o Contact: 

Ingeniero Jaime Lara / Grupo CYC (52 614) 426-1060 

‣ Furnish brand new submersible pumps for “Acueducto Conejos Medanos Project” 


o Project awarded in 2010 

o Owner: Grupo Carso 

o Contact: 

Gilda Anais Solis Gonzalez / Purchasing (52 555) 333-4600 xt 2643 

‣ Town of Clint Water Well for EPCWD # 1 

o Amounts of pumps: 1 

o Project Awarded: 2009 

o EPCWD engineering 

o Contact: 

Brown and Caldwell Engineering: Horacio Juarez, PE (915) 545-4400 

‣ Furnish brand new pumps for the town of Clint for EPWCID # 1 


o Project: 2010 status: delayed because of drought last year 

o EPCWD 

Project delayed, thus no further reference of work performed, but if 

desired contact is: El Paso County Water Improvement District # 1 (915) 

872-4000 

‣ Town of Berino Water Wells (New Mexico) 


o Project Awarded: 2006 

o Bath Engineering 

Contact: Abraham Marinelarena (915) 313-7200 

Wholesalers & Distributors 

Industrial & Municipal Supplies 

11221 Rojas Drive El Paso, TX 79935 (915)593-8833 Fax (915)593-0940 TOLL FREE 1-800-937-8833

Service Information: 

The areas where these pumps can be serviced in case of warranty repair, or simple repair after 

warranty has expired can be done through Clowe and Cowan of El Paso, LLC at 11221 Rojas Dr, 

El Paso, Texas 79935 which is 250 miles. Another service and warranty repair location would be 

the actual manufacturer of the pumps Goulds Pumps in Lubbock, Texas which is located in 4608 

Bradley Street Lubbock, TX 79415-2752 (806) 763-2361 and is at 180 miles from Monahans, 

Tx. Finally there are several other contacts in Odessa, Tx and Midland, Tx that could work on 

these pumps should there be any problems and we can provide there references upon request. As 

an additional note we service the MOV’s and valves of the Colorado River Municipal Water 

District on a continuous basis, and we visit their main office in Big Springs, Tx quite often. Our 

contact there is John Cantrell who works with Leo Effenberger, PE the General Manager of 

Paso-Tx Industries a subsidiary of Clowe and Cowan of El Paso, LLC 

Should you have any questions please do not hesitate to contact us. 

Standard terms and conditions of sale and/or Clowe and Cowan of El Paso, LLC will apply. 

Taxes or retainages of any kind are not included and must be added by the buyer. All pricing is 

FOB the factory with full freight allowed to the jobsite. Start-up service of one trip for one day is 

included for each section unless otherwise specified. The parties to any resulting contract agree 

that the manufacturer and/or Clowe and Cowan of El Paso, LLC are “Suppliers” and neither a 

“contractor” nor a “sub-contractor”, as those terms may be used in the purchase contracts of 

others. The sole obligation is to furnish equipment in conformance with the quotation and 

submittal drawings which have been approved by the consultant. 

Best regards, 

Pedro Alberto Rascon 

Sales Engineer 

Ph. (915) 593-8833 EXT. 311 

Fax (915) 593-8872 

Mob (915) 731-4781 

Wholesalers & Distributors 

Industrial & Municipal Supplies 

11221 Rojas Drive El Paso, TX 79935 (915)593-8833 Fax (915)593-0940 TOLL FREE 1-800-937-8833



STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS 


Prepared by 

and 

Issued and Published Jointly by 

AMERICAN COUNCIL OF ENGINEERING COMPANIES 

______________________ 


_______________________ 

ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA 

______________________ 


A Practice Division of the 


EJCDC P-700, Standard General Conditions for Procurement Contracts. 



Page i

Copyright © 2010: 


1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314-2794 

(703) 684-2882 

http://www.nspe.org 

American Council of Engineering Companies 

1015 15th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005 

(202) 347-7474 

http://www.acec.org 


1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191-4400 

(800) 548-2723 

http://www.asce.org 

Associated General Contractors of America 

2300 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 400, Arlington, VA 22201-3308 

(703) 548-3118 

www.agc.org 

The copyright for EJCDC P-700 is owned jointly by the four EJCDC sponsoring organizations listed 

above. The National Society of Professional Engineers (NSPE) is the Copyright Administrator for the 

EJCDC documents; please direct all inquiries and requests regarding EJCDC copyrights to NSPE. 

NOTE: EJCDC publications may be purchased at www.ejcdc.org, or from any of the four sponsoring 

organizations above. 




Page ii


Page 

ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY......................................................................... 1 

1.01 Defined Terms............................................................................................................................ 1 

1.02 Terminology.............................................................................................................................. . 4 

ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS ........................................................................................... 5 

2.01 Delivery of Bonds ...................................................................................................................... 5 

2.02 Evidence of Insurance ................................................................................................................ 5 

2.03 Copies of Documents ................................................................................................................. 5 

2.04 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed............................................................ . 5 

2.05 Designated Representatives....................................................................................................... . 5 

2.06 Progress Schedule ...................................................................................................................... 5 

2.07 Preliminary Conference............................................................................................................. . 6 

2.08 Safety ...................................................................................................................................... 6 

ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT AND AMENDING......................................... . 6 

3.01 Intent.......................................................................................................................................... . 6 

3.02 Standards, Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations......................................................... . 6 

3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies .................................................................................... 7 

3.04 Amending and Clarifying Contract Documents........................................................................ . 8 

ARTICLE 4 - BONDS AND INSURANCE ........................................................................................... 8 

4.01 Bonds......................................................................................................................................... . 8 

4.02 Insurance .................................................................................................................................... 9 

4.03 Licensed Sureties and Insurers.................................................................................................. . 9 

ARTICLE 5 - SELLER’S RESPONSIBILITIES................................................................................... . 9 

5.01 Supervision and Superintendence .............................................................................................. 9 

5.02 Labor, Materials and Equipment............................................................................................... . 9 

5.03 Laws and Regulations .............................................................................................................. 10 

5.04 Or Equals................................................................................................................................. . 10 

5.05 Taxes ........................................................................................................................................ 11 

5.06 Shop Drawings and Samples................................................................................................... . 11 

5.07 Continuing Performance .......................................................................................................... 13 

5.08 Seller’s Warranties and Guarantees ......................................................................................... 13 

5.09 Indemnification ........................................................................................................................ 14 

5.10 Delegation of Professional Design Services ............................................................................ 15 

ARTICLE 6 - SHIPPING AND DELIVERY....................................................................................... . 15 

6.01 Shipping ................................................................................................................................... 15 

6.02 Delivery................................................................................................................................... . 15 

6.03 Risk of Loss............................................................................................................................. . 16 

6.04 Progress Schedule .................................................................................................................... 16 

ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES: SCHEDULE AND DELAY ...................................................................... 16 

7.01 Changes in the Goods and Special Services............................................................................ . 16 

7.02 Changing Contract Price or Contract Times ............................................................................ 

17 




Page i

ARTICLE 8 - BUYER’S RIGHTS....................................................................................................... . 17 

8.01 Inspections and Testing........................................................................................................... . 17 

8.02 Non-Conforming Goods or Special Services.......................................................................... . 19 

8.03 Correction Period ..................................................................................................................... 20 

ARTICLE 9 - ROLE OF ENGINEER.................................................................................................. . 20 

9.01 Duties and Responsibilities ...................................................................................................... 20 

9.02 Clarifications and Interpretations............................................................................................ . 20 

9.03 Authorized Variations .............................................................................................................. 21 

9.04 Rejecting Non-Conforming Goods and Special Services ........................................................ 21 

9.05 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents............................................................... . 21 

9.06 Claims and Disputes................................................................................................................ . 21 

ARTICLE 10 - PAYMENT.................................................................................................................. . 22 

10.01 Applications for Progress Payments ........................................................................................ 22 

10.02 Review of Applications for Progress Payments...................................................................... . 23 

10.03 Amount and Timing of Progress Payments............................................................................. . 23 

10.04 Suspension of or Reduction in Payment .................................................................................. 24 

10.05 Final Application for Payment ................................................................................................. 24 

10.06 Final Payment.......................................................................................................................... . 24 

10.07 Waiver of Claims ..................................................................................................................... 25 

ARTICLE 11 - CANCELLATION, SUSPENSION, AND TERMINATION..................................... . 25 

11.01 Cancellation............................................................................................................................. . 25 

11.02 Suspension of Performance by Buyer ...................................................................................... 25 

11.03 Suspension of Performance by Seller...................................................................................... . 25 

11.04 Breach and Termination.......................................................................................................... . 26 

ARTICLE 12 - LICENSES AND FEES............................................................................................... . 27 

12.01 Intellectual Property and License Fees..................................................................................... 27 

12.02 Seller’s Infringement............................................................................................................... . 27 

12.03 Buyer’s Infringement ............................................................................................................... 28 

12.04 Reuse of Documents................................................................................................................ . 28 

12.05 Electronic Data........................................................................................................................ . 28 

ARTICLE 13 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION........................................................................................... . 29 

13.01 Dispute Resolution Method..................................................................................................... . 29 

ARTICLE 14 - MISCELLANEOUS.................................................................................................... . 29 

14.01 Giving Notice ........................................................................................................................... 29 

14.02 Controlling Law ....................................................................................................................... 30 

14.03 Computation of Time ............................................................................................................... 30 

14.04 Cumulative Remedies .............................................................................................................. 30 

14.05 Survival of Obligations ............................................................................................................ 30 

14.06 Entire Agreement ..................................................................................................................... 

30 




Page ii

STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS 


ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 

1.01 Defined Terms 

A. Whenever used in the Biddin g Requirements or Contract Docum ents and printed with initial 

capital letters, the terms listed below will have the meanings indicated which are applicable to 

the singular or plural thereof. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital 

letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the 

titles of other documents or forms. 

1. Addenda—Written or graphic instrum ents issued prior to the openin g of Bids whic h 

clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirem ents or the proposed Contract 

Documents. 

2. Agreement—The written instrument signed by both Buyer and Seller covering the Goods 

and Special Services and which lists the Contract Documents in existen ce on the 

Effective Date of the Agreement. 

3. Application for Payment—The form acceptable to Buyer which is used by Seller in 

requesting progress and final payments a nd which is acco mpanied by such suppo rting 

documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. 

4. Bid— The offer or proposal of a Seller submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the 

prices for the Goods and Special Services to be provided. 

5. Bidder—The individual or entity that submits a Bid directly to Buyer. 

6. Bidding Documents—The Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Docum ents 

(including all Addenda). 

7. Bidding Requirements—The advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, 

Bid security of acceptable form, if any, and Bid Form with any supplements. 

8. Buyer—The individual or entity purchasing the Goods and Special Services. 

9. Change Order—A document which is signed by Selle r and Buyer and authorizes an 

addition, deletion, or revision to the Contract Documents or an adjustment in the Contract 

Price or the Contract Tim es, issued on or af ter the Ef fective Date of the Agreem ent. 

Change Orders m ay be the result of m utual agreement by Buyer and Seller, or of 

resolution of a Claim. 

EJCDC P-700 Standard General Conditions for Procurement Contracts 

Copyright © 2010 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Society of Civil Engineers, 

American Council of Engineering Companies, and Associated General Contractors of America. All rights reserved. 

Page 00700-1

10. Claim—A demand or assertion by Buyer or Selle r seeking an adjustment of Cont ract 

Price or Contract Times, or both, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. 

A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim. 

11. Contract—The entire and integ rated written agreement between Buyer and Seller 

concerning the Goods and Special Services. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, 

representations, or agreements, whether written or oral. 

12. Contract Documents—Those items so designated in the Agreement. Shop Drawings and 

other Seller submittals are no t Contract Documents, even if accep ted, reviewed, or 

approved by Engineer or Buyer. 

13. Contract Price—The moneys payable by Buyer to Se ller for furnishing the Goods and 

Special Services in accordance with the Contract Documents as stated in the Agreement. 

14. Contract Times—The times stated in the Agreem ent by which the Goods m ust be 

delivered and Special Services must be furnished. 

15. Drawings—That part of the Contract Docum ents prepared or approved by Engineer 

which graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Goods and Special 

Services to be furnished by Seller. Shop Drawings and other Seller submittals are not 

Drawings as so defined. 

16. Effective Date of the Agreement—The date indicated in the Agreem ent on which it 

becomes effective, but if no such date is indicated, it m eans the date on which the 

Agreement is signed and delivered by the last of the two parties to sign and deliver. 

17. Engineer—The individual or entity designated as such in the Agreement. 

18. Field Order—A written order issued by Engineer which re quires minor changes in the 

Goods or Special Services but which does not involve a change in th e Contract Price or 

Contract Times. 

19. General Requirements—Sections of Division 1 of th e Specifications. The General 

Requirements pertain to all sections of the Specifications. 

20. Goods—The tangible and m ovable personal propert y that is desc ribed in the Con tract 

Documents, regardless of whether the property is to be later attached to realty. 

21. Goods and Special Services—The full scope of m aterials, equipment, other items, and 

services to be furnished by Seller, incl uding Goods, as defined herein, and Specia l 

Services, if any, as defined herein. This te rm refers to both the Goods and the Special 

Services, or to either the Goods or the Speci al Services, and to any portion of the Goods 

or the Special Services, as the context requires. 




Page 00700-2

22. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations—Any and all applicable laws, rules, 

regulations, ordinances, codes, and orders of any and all governm ental bodies, agencies, 

authorities, and courts having jurisdiction. 

23. Milestone—A principal event spe cified in th e Contract Documents relating to an 

intermediate completion date or time prior to the Contract Times. 

24. Notice of Award—The written notice by Buyer to the Successful Bidder stating that upon 

timely compliance by the Successful Bidder with the conditions precedent listed therein, 

Buyer will sign and deliver the Agreement. 

25. Notice to Proceed—A written notice given by Buyer to Seller fixing the date on which 

the Contract Times commence to run and on which Seller shall start to perform under the 

Contract. 

26. Point of Destination—The specific address of the loca tion where delivery of the G oods 

shall be made, as stated in the Agreement. 

27. Project—The total undertaking of which the G oods and Special Services m ay be the 

whole, or only a part. 

28. Project Manual—The documentary information prepared for bidding and furnishing the 

Goods and Special Services. A listing of the contents of the Project Manual is contained 

in its table of contents. 

29. Samples—Physical examples of m aterials, equipment, or workm anship that are 

representative of some portion of the Goods and Special Services and which establish the 

standards by which such portion of the Goods and Special Services will be judged. 

30. Seller—The individual or entity furnishing the Goods and Special Services. 

31. Shop Drawings—All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or 

information which are specifically prepared or assem bled by or for Seller and subm itted 

by Seller to illustrate some portion of the Goods and Special Services. 

32. Special Services—Services associated with the Goods to be furnished by Seller as 


33. Specifications—That part of the Contract Docum ents consisting of written requirem ents 

for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the 

furnishing of the Goods and Special Servi ces, and certain adm inistrative requirements 

and procedural matters applicable thereto. 

34. Successful Bidder—The Bidder submitting a responsive B id, to whom Buyer m akes an 

award. 




Page 00700-3

1.02 Terminology 

35. Supplementary Conditions—That part of the Contract Documents which am ends or 

supplements these General Conditions. 

36. Work Change Directive—A written statement to Seller iss ued on or af ter the Effective 

Date of the Agreem ent and signed by Buye r ordering an additi on, deletion, or other 

revision in the Contrac t Documents with respect to the Goo ds and Special Services. A 

Work Change Directive will not ch ange the Contract Price or the Contr act Times but is 

evidence that the p arties expect that the change ordere d or docum ented by a Work 

Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following 

negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. 

A. The words and terms discussed in Paragraphs 1.02.B and 1.02.C are not defined, but have the 

indicated meanings when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents. 

B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives: 

1. The Contract Docum ents include the term s “as allowed,” “as approved,” “as ordered,” 

“as directed” or term s of like effect or im port to autho rize an exercise of professional 

judgment by Engineer. In addition, the adjec tives “reasonable,” “suitable,” “acceptable,” 

“proper,” “satisfactory,” or adjectiv es of like effect or im port are used to describe an 

action or determination of Engineer as to th e Goods and Special Services. It is intended 

that such exercise of professional j udgment, action, or determ ination will be 

commercially reasonable and will be solely to evaluate, in general, the Goods and Special 

Services for com pliance with the requirem ents of and infor mation in the Contract 

Documents and conform ance with the design concept of the com pleted Project as a 

functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Do cuments (unless there is a 

specific statement indicating otherwise). The us e of any such term or adjective shall not 

be effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct the 

furnishing of Goods or Special Services or any duty or authority to undertak e 

responsibility contrary to any other provision of the Contract Documents. 

2. The word “non-conforming” when modifying the words “Goods and Special Services,” 

“Goods,” or “Special Services,” refers to Goods and Special Services that fail to conform 

to the Contract Documents. 

3. The word “receipt” when referring to the Goods, shall mean the physical taking and 

possession by the Buyer under the conditions specified in Paragraph 8.01.B.3. 

4. The word “day” m eans a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next 

midnight. 

5. The word "furnish," when used in connecti on with the Goods and Special Services shall 

mean to supply and deliver said Goods to the Point of Destination (or som e other 




Page 00700-4

specified location) and to perform said Special Services fully, all in accordance with the 


C. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases that have a well-known 

technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in 

accordance with such recognized meaning. 

ARTICLE 2 – PRELIMINARY MATTERS 

2.01 Delivery of Bonds 

A. When Seller delivers the ex ecuted counterparts of the Agreement to Buyer, Selle r also shall 

deliver such bonds as Seller may be required to furnish. 

2.02 Evidence of Insurance 

A. When Seller delivers the executed counterparts of the Agreement to Buyer, Seller shall deliver to 

Buyer, with copies to each additional insured identified by name in the Supplementary 

Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance which either of them or 

any additional insured may reasonably request) which Seller is required to purchase and maintain 

in accordance with Article 4. 

2.03 Copies of Documents 

A. Buyer shall furnish Seller up to five printed or hard copies of th e Contract Docum ents. 

Additional copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction. 

2.04 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed 

A. The Contract Times will commence to run on th e thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the 

Agreement or, if a Notice to P roceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A 

Notice to P roceed may be given at any tim e within 30 d ays after th e Effective Date of the 

Agreement. In no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than the sixtieth day after 

the day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreem ent, whichever 

date is earlier. 

2.05 Designated Representatives 

A. Buyer and Seller shall each designate its representative at the time the Agreement is signed. 

Each representative shall have full authority to act on behalf of and make binding decisions in 

any matter arising out of or relating to the Contract. 


A. Within 15 days after the Contract Times start to run, Seller shall submit to Buyer and Engineer 

an acceptable progress schedule of activities, including at a minimum, Shop Drawing and 

Sample submittals, tests, and deliveries as required by the Contract Documents. No progress 

payment will be made to Seller until an acceptable schedule is submitted to Buyer and Engineer. 




Page 00700-5

B. The progress schedule will be acceptable to Buyer and Engineer if it provides an orderly 

progression of the submittals, tests, and deliveries to completion within the specified Milestones 

and the Contract Times. Such acceptance will not impose on Buyer or Engineer responsibility for 

the progress schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or progress of the work nor interfere with or 

relieve Seller from Seller’s full responsibility therefor. Such acceptance shall not be deemed to 

acknowledge the reasonableness and attainability of the schedule. 

2.07 Preliminary Conference 

A. Within 20 days after the Contract Times start to run, a conference attended by Seller, Buyer, 

Engineer and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the 

parties as to the Goods and Special Services and to discuss the schedule referred to in Paragraph 

2.06.A, procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other submittals, processing Applications 

for Payment, and maintaining required records. 

2.08 Safety 

A. Buyer and Seller shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of 

persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss. 

When Seller's personnel, or the personnel of any subcontractor to Seller, are present at the Point 

of Destination or any work area or site controlled by Buyer, the Seller shall be responsible for the 

compliance by such personnel with any applicable requirements of Buyer's safety programs that 

are made known to Seller. 

ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT AND AMENDING 

3.01 Intent 

A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called 

for by all. 

B. Any labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that may reasonably be inferred 

from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to 

produce or furnish the indicated Goods and Special Services will be provided, whether or not 

specifically called for, at no additional cost to Buyer. 

C. Clarifications and interpretations of, or notifications of minor variations and deviations in, the 

Contract Documents, will be issued by Engineer as provided in Article 9. 

3.02 Standards, Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations 

A. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society, organization, 

or association, or to Laws and Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, 

shall mean the standard, specification, manual, code, or Laws and Regulations in effect at the 

time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids), 

except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. 




Page 00700-6

B. No provision of any such standard, specification, manual or code, or any instruction of a supplier 

shall be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of Buyer or Engineer, or any of their 

subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employees from those set forth in the Contract 

Documents, nor shall any such provision or instruction be effective to assign to Buyer or 

Engineer, or any of their consultants, agents, or employees any duty or authority to supervise or 

direct the performance of Seller’s obligations or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility 

inconsistent with the provisions of the Contract Documents. 

3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies 

A. Reporting Discrepancies: 

1. Seller’s Review of Contract Documents Before the Performance of the Contract: Before 

performance of the Contract, Seller shal l carefully study and com pare the Contract 

Documents and check and verify pertinent figures therein and all applicable field 

measurements. Seller shall prom ptly report in writing to E ngineer any conflict, error, 

ambiguity, or discrepancy which S eller discovers or has actual knowledge of and shall 

obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with the 

furnishing of any Goods and Special Services affected thereby. 

2. Seller’s Review of Contract Documents During the Performance of the Contract: If, 

during the performance of the Contract, Seller discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or 

discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any 

provision of any Law or Regul ation applicable to the p erformance of the Contract, any 

standard, specification, manual or code, or of any instruction of any Supplier, Seller shall 

promptly report it to En gineer in writing. Seller shall not pr oceed with the furnishing of 

the Goods and Special Services affected thereby until an amendment to or clarification of 

the Contract Documents has been issued. 

3. Seller shall not be liable to Buyer or Engineer for failure to repor t any conflict, error, 

ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Seller had actual knowledge 

thereof. 

B. Resolving Discrepancies: Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract 

Documents, the provisions of the Contract Documents shall take precedence in resolving any 

conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between the provisions of the Contract Documents and: 

1. the provisions of any standard, specification, manual, code, or instruction (whether or not 

specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents); or 

2. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the furnishing of the Goods and 

Special Services (un less such an interp retation of the provision s of the Contract 

Documents would result in violation of such Law or Regulation). 




Page 00700-7

3.04 Amending and Clarifying Contract Documents 

A. The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions, and revisions to 

the Goods and Special Services or to modify contractual terms and conditions by a Change 

Order. 

B. Buyer may issue a Work Change Directive providing for additions, deletions, or revisions to the 

Goods and Special Services, in which case (1) the Contract Price shall be equitably adjusted to 

account for any reasonable and necessary credits to Buyer for any such deletion, or for costs 

(including reasonable overhead and profit) incurred by Seller to accommodate such an addition 

or revision and (2) the Contract Times shall be equitably adjusted to account for any impact on 

progress and completion of performance. Such adjustments subsequently shall be duly set forth 

in a Change Order. 

C. The requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations and 

deviations in the Goods and Special Services may be authorized, by one or more of the following 

ways: 

1. A Field Order; 

2. Engineer’s approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 

5.06.D.3); or 

3. Engineer’s written interpretation or clarification. 

ARTICLE 4 – BONDS AND INSURANCE 

4.01 Bonds 

A. Seller shall furnish to Buyer performance and payment bonds, each in an amount at least equal to 

the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of all of Seller's 

obligations under the Contract Documents. These bonds shall remain in effect until 1) one year 

after the date when final payment becomes due or 2) completion of the correction period 

specified in Paragraph 8.03, whichever is later, except as provided otherwise by Laws or 

Regulations or by the Contract Documents. Seller shall also furnish such other bonds as are 


B. All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents except as provided 

otherwise by Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the 

current list of “Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal 

Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the 

Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. All 

bonds signed by an agent or attorney-in-fact must be accompanied by a certified copy of that 

individual's authority to bind the surety. The evidence of authority shall show that it is effective 

on the date the agent or attorney-in-fact signed each bond. 

C. If the surety on any bond furnished by Seller is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its 

right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases 




Page 00700-8

to meet the requirements of Paragraph 4.01.B, Seller shall promptly notify Buyer and Engineer 

and shall, within 20 days after the event giving rise to such notification, provide another bond 

and surety, both of which shall comply with the requirements of Paragraphs 4.01.B and 4.02. 

4.02 Insurance 

A. Seller shall provide insurance of the types and coverages and in the amounts stipulated in the 

Supplementary Conditions. 

B. Failure of Buyer to demand certificates of insurance or other evidence of Seller's full compliance 

with these insurance requirements or failure of Buyer to identify a deficiency in compliance from 

the evidence provided shall not be construed as a waiver of Seller’s obligation to maintain such 

insurance. 

C. Upon assignment of this Contract, Seller shall comply with the written request of assignee to 

provide certificates of insurance to assignee. 

D. Buyer does not represent that insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract 

necessarily will be adequate to protect Seller. 

E. The insurance and insurance limits required herein shall not be deemed as a limitation on Seller’s 

liability under the indemnities granted to Buyer in the Contract Documents. 

4.03 Licensed Sureties and Insurers 

A. All bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents to be purchased and maintained by 

Buyer or Seller shall be obtained from surety or insurance companies that are duly licensed or 

authorized in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue bonds or insurance policies 

for the limits and coverages so required. Such surety and insurance companies shall also meet 

such additional requirements and qualifications as may be provided in the Supplementary 

Conditions. 

ARTICLE 5 – SELLER’S RESPONSIBILITIES 

5.01 Supervision and Superintendence 

A. Seller shall supervise, inspect, and direct the furnishing of the Goods and Special Services 

competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and 

expertise as may be necessary to perform its obligations in accordance with the Contract 

Documents. Seller shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, 

and procedures necessary to perform its obligations in accordance with the Contract Documents. 

Seller shall not be responsible for the negligence of Buyer or Engineer in the design or 

specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure that is shown or 

indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. 

5.02 Labor, Materials and Equipment 

A. Seller shall provide competent, qualified and trained personnel in all aspects of its performance 

of the Contract. 




Page 00700-9

B. All Goods, and all equipment and material incorporated into the Goods, shall be as specified, and 

unless specified otherwise in the Contract Documents, shall be: 

1. new, and of good quality; 

2. protected, assembled, connected, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with the 

original manufacturer’s instructions; and 

3. shop assembled to the greatest extent practicable. 

5.03 Laws and Regulations 

A. Seller shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations 

applicable to the performance of its obligations in accordance with the Contract Documents. 

Except where otherwise expressly required by such Laws and Regulations, neither Buyer nor 

Engineer shall be responsible for monitoring Seller’s compliance with any Laws or Regulations. 

B. If Seller furnishes Goods and Special Services knowing or having reason to know that such 

furnishing is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Seller shall bear all claims, costs, losses, and 

damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and 

other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or 

relating to such performance. It shall not be Seller’s responsibility to make certain that the 

Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this provision 

shall not relieve Seller of Seller’s obligations under Paragraph 3.03. 

C. Changes in Laws or Regulations not known at the time of opening of Bids (or, on the Effective 

Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids) having an effect on the cost or time of performance 

shall be the subject of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times. If Buyer and Seller are 

unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment, a 

Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 9.06. 

5.04 Or Equals 

A. Whenever the Goods, or an item of material or equipment to be incorporated into the Goods, are 

specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the 

name of a particular supplier or manufacturer, the specification or description is intended to 

establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or 

description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or “or-equal” item 

is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other suppliers or 

manufacturers may be submitted to Buyer for Engineer’s review. 

1. If in Engineer’s sole discretion, such an item of material or equipment proposed by Seller 

is functionally equal to that nam ed and sufficiently similar so that no ch ange in related 

work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer as an “or-equal” item. 

2. For the purposes of this paragraph, a propos ed item of m aterial or equipment may be 

considered functionally equal to an item so named only if: 




Page 00700-10

a. in the exercise of reaso nable judgment, Engineer determ ines that: 1 ) it is at lea st 

equal in quality, durability, appearance, strength, and design characteristics; 2) it will 

reliably perform at least equally well the function imposed by the design concept of 

the completed Project as a functioning w hole; 3) it has an acceptab le record of 

performance and availability of responsive service; and 

b. Seller certifies that if approved: 1) there will b e no increase in any cost, includ ing 

capital, installation or operating costs, to Buyer; and 2) the proposed item will 

conform substantially to the detailed require ments of the item na med in the Contract 

Documents. 

B. Engineer’s Evaluation: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate 

each proposal or submittal made pursuant to Paragraph 5.04.A. Engineer will be the sole judge 

of whether to accept or reject such a proposal or submittal. No “or-equal” will be ordered, 

manufactured or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete, which will be evidenced by an 

approved Shop Drawing. Engineer will advise Buyer and Seller in writing of any negative 

determination. Notwithstanding Engineer’s approval of an “or-equal” item, Seller shall remain 

obligated to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 

C. Special Guarantee: Buyer may require Seller to furnish at Seller’s expense a special 

performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any such proposed “or-equal.” 

D. Data: Seller shall provide all data in support of any such proposed “or-equal” at Seller’s 

expense. 

5.05 Taxes 

A. Seller shall be responsible for all taxes and duties arising out of the sale of the Goods and the 

furnishing of Special Services. All taxes are included in the Contract Price, except as noted in 

the Supplementary Conditions. 

5.06 Shop Drawings and Samples 

A. Seller shall submit Shop Drawings and Samples to Buyer for Engineer’s review and approval in 

accordance with the schedule required in Paragraph 2.06.A. All submittals will be identified as 

required and furnished in the number of copies specified in the Contract Documents. The data 

shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified 

performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show Engineer the services, 

materials, and equipment Seller proposes to provide. 

B. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents, any related work 

performed prior to Engineer’s approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and 

responsibility of Seller. 




Page 00700-11

C. Submittal Procedures: 

1. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Samp le, Seller shall have determ ined and 

verified: 

a. all field m easurements (if required), quan tities, dimensions, specified perform ance 

criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information 

with respect thereto; and 

b. that all materials are suitable with respec t to the indic ated application, fabrication, 

shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the furnishing of 

Goods and Special Services. 

2. Seller shall also have reviewed and coordi nated each Shop Drawing or Sa mple with the 


3. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or include a written certification from Seller that Seller 

has reviewed the subje ct submittal and conf irmed that it is in com pliance with the 

requirements of the Contract Docum ents. Both Buyer and Engineer shall be entitled to 

rely on such certification from Seller. 

4. With each submittal, Seller shall give Buyer and Engineer specific written notice o f any 

variations that the Shop Drawing or Sam ple may have from the req uirements of the 

Contract Documents. This notice shall be both in a written communication separate from 

the submittal and by specific notation on each Shop Drawing or Sample. 

D. Engineer’s Review: 

1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples. 

2. Engineer’s review and approval will be onl y to determ ine if the Goods and Special 

Services covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Project, 

conform to the information given in the Cont ract Documents and be compatible with the 

design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole. 

3. Engineer’s review and approval shall not re lieve Seller from responsibility for any 

variation from the requirements of the Cont ract Documents unless Seller has com plied 

with the requirements of Paragraph 5.06.C.4 a nd Engineer has given written approval of 

each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying 

the Shop Drawing or S ample. Engineer’s re view and approval shall not relieve S eller 

from responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraph 5.06.C.1. 

E. Resubmittal Procedures: 

1. Seller shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required number 

of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required, new Samples for review 

and approval. Seller shall direct specific attention in writing to any revisions other than 

the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. 




Page 00700-12

5.07 Continuing Performance 

A. Seller shall adhere to the progress schedule es tablished in accordance with Paragraph 2.06.A., 

and the Goods shall be delivered an d the Special Services furnished within the Contract T imes 

specified in the Agreement. 

B. Seller shall carry on furnishing of the Goods and Special Services and adhere to the progress 

schedule during all disputes or disagreem ents with Buyer. No furnishing of Goods and Special 

Services shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreem ents, 

except as permitted by Paragraphs 11.03 or 11.04, or as Buyer and Seller may otherwise agree in 

writing. 

5.08 Seller’s Warranties and Guarantees 

A. Seller warrants and guarantees to Buyer that the title to the Goods conveyed shall be proper, its 

transfer rightful, and free from any security interest, lien, o r other encumbrance. Seller shall 

defend, indemnify, and hold Buyer harm less against any liens, claims, or demands contesting or 

affecting title of the Goods conveyed. 

B. Seller warrants and guarantees to Buyer that all Goods and Special Serv ices will conform with 

the Contract Docum ents, and with the sta ndards established by any Sa mples approved by 

Engineer. Engineer shall be entitled to rely on Seller’s warranty and guarantee. If the Contract 

Documents do not otherwise specify the character istics or the quality of the Goods, the Goods 

shall comply with the requirements of Paragraph 5.02.B. 

C. Seller’s warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by: 

1. abuse, improper modification, improper maintenance, or improper operation by persons 

other than Seller; or 

2. corrosion or chemical attack, unless corrosive or chemically-damaging conditions were 

disclosed by Buyer in the Contract Docum ents and the Contract Documents required the 

Goods to withstand such conditions; 

3. use in a m anner contrary to Seller' s written instructions for inst allation, operation, and 

maintenance; or 

4. normal wear and tear under normal usage. 

D. Seller's obligation to furnish the Goods and Special Services in accordance with the Contract 

Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Goods and 

Special Services that are non-conforming, or a release of Seller’s obligation to furnish the Goods 

and Special Services in accordance with the Contract Documents: 

1. observations by Buyer or Engineer; 

2. recommendation by Engineer or payment by Buyer of any progress or final payment; 




Page 00700-13

3. use of the Goods by Buyer; 

4. any acceptance by Buyer (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 8.02.D.1) or any failure 

to do so; 

5. the issuance of a notice of acceptance by Buyer pursuant to the provisions of Article 8; 

6. any inspection, test or approval by others; or 

7. any correction of non-conforming Goods and Special Services by Buyer. 

E. Buyer shall promptly notify Seller of any breach of Seller’s warranties or guarantees. 

F. Seller makes no implied warranties under this Contract. 

5.09 Indemnification 

A. To the f ullest extent p ermitted by Laws and Regulation s, Seller shall indemnify and hold 

harmless Buyer and Engineer, and the officers, di rectors, members, partners, employees, agents, 

consultants, contractors, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, 

costs, losses, and damages (including but not lim ited to all fees and charges of engineers, 

architects, attorneys, and other p rofessionals and all court or arbitr ation or other dispute 

resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the perform ance of Seller's obligations under the 

Contract Documents, provided that any such claim, cost, loss, or damages attributable to bodily 

injury, sickness, disease, or deat h, or to injury to or destructi on of tangible property (other than 

the Goods themselves), including the loss of use resulting therefrom, but only to the extent cause 

by any negligent act or om ission of Seller, or any individual or entity directly o r indirectly 

employed by Seller or anyone for whose acts Seller may be liable. 

B. In any and all claims against Buyer or Engineer or any of their respective assignees, consultants, 

agents, officers, directors, m embers, partners, employees, agents, consultants, contractors, or 

subcontractors, by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of 

Seller, any subcontractor, any supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed 

by any of them to furnish any of the Goods and Special Services, or anyone for whose acts any 

of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation unde r Paragraph 5.09.A s hall not be 

limited in any way by any lim itation on the amount or type of dam ages, compensation, or 

benefits payable by or for seller or any such subc ontractor, supplier, or other individual or entity 

under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. 

C. The indemnification obligations of Seller under Paragraph 5.09.A shall not extend to the liability 

of Engineer and Engineer’s officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and consultants 

arising out of: 

1. the preparation or approval of, or the failu re to prepare or approve, m aps, Drawings, 

opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs, or Specifications; or 

2. giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them , if that is the primary cause of 

the injury or damage. 




Page 00700-14

5.10 Delegation of Professional Design Services 

A. Seller will not be required to provide professional design services unless such services are 

specifically required by the Contract Documents or unless such services are required to carry out 

Seller’s responsibilities for furnishing the Goods and Special Services. Seller shall not be 

required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. 

B. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to the Goods and 

Special Services are specifically required of Seller by the Contract Documents, Buyer and 

Engineer will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Seller 

shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed professional, 

whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, 

Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other 

submittals related to the Goods and Special Services designed or certified by such professional, 

if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when submitted to 

Engineer. 

C. Buyer and Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of 

the services, certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided Buyer 

and Engineer have specified to Seller all performance and design criteria that such services must 

satisfy. 

D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 5.10, Engineer’s review and approval of design calculations and 

design drawings will be only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with 

performance and design criteria given and the design concept expressed in the Contract 

Documents. Engineer’s review and approval of Shop Drawings and other submittals (except 

design calculations and design drawings) will be only for the purpose stated in 

Paragraph 5.06.D.2. 

E. Seller shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria required by 


ARTICLE 6 – SHIPPING AND DELIVERY 

6.01 Shipping 

A. Seller shall select the carrier and bear all costs of packaging, transportation, insurance, special 

handling and any other costs associated with shipment and delivery. 

6.02 Delivery 

A. Seller shall deliver the Goods F.O.B. the Point of Destination in accordance with the Contract 

Times set forth in the Agreement, or other date agreed to by Buyer and Seller. 

B. Seller shall provide written notice to Buyer at least 10 days before shipment of the manner of 

shipment and the anticipated delivery date. The notice shall also include any instructions 

concerning special equipment or services required at the Point of Destination to unload and care 




Page 00700-15

for the Goods. Seller shall also require the carrier to give Buyer at least 24 hours notice by 

telephone prior to the anticipated time of delivery. 

C. Buyer will be responsible and bear all costs for unloading the Goods from carrier. 

D. Buyer will assure that adequate facilities are available to receive delivery of the Goods during 

the Contract Times for delivery set forth in the Agreement, or another date agreed by Buyer and 

Seller. 

E. No partial deliveries shall be allowed, unless permitted or required by the Contract Documents or 

agreed to in writing by Buyer. 

6.03 Risk of Loss 

A. Risk of loss and insurable interests transfer from Seller to Buyer upon Buyer’s receipt of the 

Goods. 

B. Notwithstanding the provisions of Paragraph 6.03.A, if Buyer rejects the Goods as nonconforming, 

the risk of loss on such Goods shall remain with Seller until Seller corrects the nonconformity 

or Buyer accepts the Goods. If rejected Goods remain at the Point of Destination 

pending modification and acceptance, then Seller shall be responsible for arranging adequate 

protection and maintenance of the Goods at Seller's expense. 


A. Seller shall adhere to the progress schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.06 as it 

may be adjusted from time to time as provided below. 

1. Seller shall submit to Engineer for acceptance (to the exten t indicated in Paragraph 2.06) 

proposed adjustments in the pr ogress schedule that will not result in changing the 

Contract Times. Such adjustm ents will co mply with any provisions of the General 

Requirements applicable thereto. 

2. Proposed adjustments in the progress schedule that will change the Contract Times shall 

be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 7. Adjustments in Contract 

Times may only be made by a Change Order. 

ARTICLE 7 – CHANGES: SCHEDULE AND DELAY 

7.01 Changes in the Goods and Special Services 

A. Buyer may at any time, without notice to any surety, make an addition, deletion, or other revision 

to the Contract Documents with respect to the Goods and Services, within the general scope of 

the Contract, by a Change Order or Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such 

document, Seller shall promptly proceed with performance pursuant to the revised Contract 

Documents (except as otherwise specifically provided). 

B. If Seller concludes that a Work Change Directive issued by Buyer affects the Contract Price or 

Contract Times, then Seller shall notify Buyer within 15 days after Seller has received the Work 




Page 00700-16

Change Directive, and submit written supporting data to Buyer within 45 days after such receipt. 

If Seller fails to notify Buyer within 15 days, Seller waives any Claim for such adjustment. If 

Buyer and Seller are unable to agree on entitlement to, or on the amount or extent, if any, of an 

adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, that should be allowed as a result of 

a Work Change Directive, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 9.06. 

C. Seller shall not suspend perform ance while Buyer and Seller are in the process of m aking such 

changes and any related adjustments to Contract Price or Contract Times. 

7.02 Changing Contract Price or Contract Times 

A. The Contract Price or Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order. 

B. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times shall be based on written 

notice submitted by the party making the Claim to the Engineer and the other party to the 

Contract in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 9.06. 

C. If Seller is prevented from delivering the Goods or performing the Special Services within the 

Contract Times for any unforeseen reason beyond its control and not attributable to its actions or 

inactions, then Seller shall be entitled to an adjustment of the Contract Times to the extent 

attributable to such reason. Such reasons include but are not limited to acts or neglect by Buyer, 

inspection delays, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God, and other 

like matters. If such an event occurs and delays Seller’s performance, Seller shall notify Buyer 

in writing within 15 days of knowing or having reason to know of the beginning of the event 

causing the delay, stating the reason therefor. 

D. Seller shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays within 

the control of Seller. Delays attributable to and within the control of Seller’s subcontractors or 

suppliers shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Seller. 

E. If Seller is prevented from delivering the Goods or furnishing the Special Services within the 

Contract Times due to the actions or inactions of Buyer, Seller shall be entitled to any reasonable 

and necessary additional costs arising out of such delay to the extent directly attributable to 

Buyer. 

F. Neither Buyer nor Seller shall be entitled to any damages arising from delays which are beyond 

the control of both Buyer and Seller, including but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, 

abnormal weather conditions, acts of God, and other like matters. 

ARTICLE 8 – BUYER’S RIGHTS 

8.01 Inspections and Testing 

A. General: 

1. The Contract Docum ents specify required insp ections and tests. Buyer shall have the 

right to perform, or cause to be performed, reasonable inspections and require reasonable 




Page 00700-17

tests of the Goods at Seller’s facility, and at the Point of De stination. Seller shall allow 

Buyer a reasonable time to perform such inspections or tests. 

2. Seller shall reimburse Buyer for all expenses, except for travel, lodging, and subsistence 

expenses of Buyer’s and Engineer' s representatives, for inspections and tests specified in 

the Contract Docum ents. If as the result of any such specified testing the Goods are 

determined to be non-confor ming, then Seller shall also bear the travel, lodging, and 

subsistence expenses of Buyer’s and Engineer' s representatives, and all expenses of reinspection 

or retesting. 

3. Buyer shall bear all expenses of inspections and te sts that are not specif ied in the 

Contract Documents (other than any re-i nspection or retesting resulting from a 

determination of non-conformity, as set forth in Paragraph 8.01.A.2 immediately above); 

provided, however, that if as the result of any such non-specified inspections or testing 

the Goods are determ ined to be non-conform ing, then Seller shall bear all expenses of 

such inspections and testing, and of any necessary re-inspection and retesting. 

4. Seller shall provide Buyer tim ely written noti ce of the readiness of the Goods for all 

inspections, tests, or approvals which the Contract Documents specify are to be observed 

by Buyer prior to shipment. 

5. Buyer will give Seller tim ely notice of all specified tests, inspections, and approvals of 

the Goods which are to be conducted at the Point of Destination. 

6. If, on the ba sis of any inspections or testi ng, the Goods appear to be confor ming, Buyer 

will give Seller prompt notice thereof. If on the basis of said inspections or testing, the 

Goods appear to be non-conf orming, Buyer will give Seller prompt notice thereof and 

will advise Seller of the remedy Buyer elects under the provisions of Paragraph 8.02. 

7. Neither payments made by Buyer to Seller prio r to any tests or inspections, nor any tests 

or inspections shall constitute acceptance of non-conforming Goods, or prejudice Buyer’s 

rights under the Contract. 

B. Inspection on Delivery: 

1. Buyer or Engineer will visually inspect the Goods upon delivery solely for purposes of 

identifying the Goods and general verificati on of quantities and obs ervation of apparent 

condition in order to provide a basis for a pr ogress payment. Such visual inspection will 

not be construed as final or as receip t of any Goods and Special Services that, as a result 

of subsequent inspections and tests, are determined to be non-conforming. 

2. Within ten days of such visual inspection, Buyer shall provide Seller with written no tice 

of Buyer’s determination regarding conformity of the Goods. In the event Buyer does 

not provide such notice, it will be p resumed that the Goods appear to be confor ming and 

that Buyer has acknowledged their receipt upon delivery. 

3. If, on the basis of the visual inspection specified in Paragraph 8.01.B.1, the Goods appear 

to be conforming, Buyer’s notice thereof to Seller will acknowledge receipt of the Goods. 




Page 00700-18

C. Final Inspection: 

1. After all of the Goods have been incorporated into the Project, tested in accordan ce with 

such testing requirements as are sp ecified, and are functioning as indicated, Buyer or 

Engineer will make a final inspection. 

2. If, on the basis of the final inspection, the Goods are conforming, Buyer’s notice thereof 

will constitute Buyer’s acceptance of the Goods. 

3. If, on the basis of the final inspection, the Goods are non-conforming, Buyer will identify 

the non-conformity in writing. 

8.02 Non-Conforming Goods and Special Services 

A. If, on the basis of inspections and testing prior to delivery, the Goods and Special Services are 

found to be non-conforming, or if at any time after Buyer has acknowledged receipt of delivery 

and before the expiration of the correction period described in Paragraph 8.03, Buyer determines 

that the Goods and Special Services are non-conforming, then Seller shall promptly, without cost 

to Buyer and in response to written instructions from Buyer, either correct such non-conforming 

Goods and Special Services, or, if Goods are rejected by Buyer, remove and replace the nonconforming 

Goods with conforming Goods, including all work required for reinstallation. 

B. Buyer’s Rejection of Non-Conforming Goods: 

1. If Buyer elects to reje ct the Goods in whole or in pa rt, Buyer’s notice to Seller will 

describe in sufficient detail the non-confor ming aspect of the Goods. If Goods have been 

delivered to Buyer, Seller shall pro mptly, and within the Contract Tim es, remove and 

replace the rejected Goods. 

2. Seller shall bear all costs, losses and damages attributable to the removal and replacement 

of the non-conforming Goods as provided in Paragraph 8.02.E. 

3. Upon rejection of the Goods, Buye r retains a security interest in the Goods to the extent 

of any payments made and expenses incurred in their testing and inspection. 

C. Remedying Non-Conforming Goods and Special Services: 

1. If Buyer elects to permit the Seller to modify the Goods to correct the non-comfor mance, 

then Seller shall prom ptly provide a schedul e for such m odifications and shall make the 

Goods conforming within a reasonable time. 

2. If Buyer notifies Seller in writing that any of the Special Services are non-conforming, 

Seller shall promptly provide conforming services acceptable to Buyer. If Seller fails to 

do so, Buyer m ay delete the Special Serv ices and reduce the Contract Price a 

commensurate amount. 




Page 00700-19

D. Buyer’s Acceptance of Non-Conforming Goods: 

Instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of non-conforming Goods discovered 

either before or after final paym ent, Buyer may accept the non-conforming Goods. Seller shall 

bear all reasonable co sts, losses, and dam ages attributable to Buyer’s evaluation of and 

determination to accept such non-conforming Goods as provided in Paragraph 8.02.E. 

E. Seller shall pay all cla ims, costs, losses, and damages, including but not lim ited to all fees and 

charges for re-inspection, retesting and for a ny engineers, architects, attorneys and other 

professionals, and all court or arbitration or ot her dispute resolution costs arising out of or 

relating to the non-conforming Goods and Special Services. Seller's obligations shall include the 

costs of the correction or rem oval and repl acement of the non-conform ing Goods and the 

replacement of property of B uyer and others destroyed by th e correction or removal and 

replacement of the non-conform ing Goods, and obt aining conforming Special S ervices from 

others. 

F. Buyer's Rejection of Conforming Goods: 

If Buyer asserts that G oods and S pecial Services are non-conform ing and such Goods and 

Special Services are determined to be conforming, or if Buyer reject s as non-conforming Goods 

and Special Services that are later determ ined to be conforming, then Selle r shall be entitled to 

reimbursement from Buyer of costs incurred by Seller in inspecti ng, testing, correcting, 

removing, or replacing the conforming Goods and Special Services, including but not lim ited to 

fees and charges of engineers, architects, atto rneys and other professionals, and all court or 

arbitration or other di spute resolution costs associated w ith the incorrect assertion of nonconformance 

or rejection of conforming Goods and Special Services. 

8.03 Correction Period 

A. Seller’s responsibility for correcting all non-conformities in the Goods and Special Services will 

extend for a period of one year after the earlier of the date on which Buyer has placed the Goods 

in continuous service or the date of final paym ent, or for such longer period of tim e as may be 

prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the te rms of any specific provisions of the Contract 

Documents. 

ARTICLE 9 – ROLE OF ENGINEER 

9.01 Duties and Responsibilities 

A. The duties and responsibilities a nd the limitations of authority of Engineer are set f orth in the 


9.02 Clarifications and Interpretations 

A. Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarif ications or interpretations of 

the Contract Documents as Engineer may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with or 

reasonably inferable from the ove rall intent of the Contract Documents. Such written 




Page 00700-20

clarifications and interpretations will be binding on Buyer and Selle r. If either Buyer or Seller 

believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price 

or Contract Times, either may make a Claim therefor. 

9.03 Authorized Variations 

A. Engineer may authorize minor deviations or variations in the C ontract Documents by: 1) written 

approval of specific variations set forth in Shop Drawings when Seller has duly noted such 

variations as required in Paragraph 5.06.C.4, or 2) a Field Order. 

9.04 Rejecting Non-Conforming Goods and Special Services 

A. Engineer will have the authority to disapprov e or reject Goods and Special Services that 

Engineer believes to be non-conform ing. Engineer will also have authority to require specia l 

inspection or testing of t he Goods or Special Services as provided in Paragraph 8.01 whether or 

not the Goods are fabricated or installed, or the Special Services are completed. 

9.05 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents 

A. Engineer will be the in itial interpreter of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability 

of the Goods and Special Services. Claim s, disputes and other ma tters relating to the 

acceptability of the Goods and Spec ial Services or the interpretation of the requirem ents of the 

Contract Documents pertaining to Seller’s performance will be refe rred initially to Engineer in 

writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance with this paragraph. 

B. When functioning as interpreter and judge under this Paragraph 9.05, Engineer will not show 

partiality to Buyer or Seller and will no t be liab le in connec tion with any in terpretation or 

decision rendered in go od faith in such capac ity. The rendering of a decision by Engineer 

pursuant to this Paragraph 9.05 with respect to any such Claim , dispute, or other matter (except 

any which have been waived by the m aking or acceptance of final paym ent as provided in 

Paragraph 10.07) will be a condition precedent to any exercise by Buyer or Seller o f such rights 

or remedies as either m ay otherwise have under the Contract Docum ents or by Laws or 

Regulations in respect of any such Claim, dispute, or other matter. 

9.06 Claims and Disputes 

A. Notice: Written notice of each Claim relating to the acceptability of the Goods and Special 

Services or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to either 

party's performance shall be delivered by the claimant to Engineer and the other party to the 

Agreement within 15 days after the occurrence of the event giving rise thereto, and written 

supporting data shall be submitted to Engineer and the other party within 45 days after such 

occurrence unless Engineer allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data. 

B. Engineer’s Decision: Engineer will review each such Claim and render a decision in writing 

within 30 days after receipt of the last submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the 

opposing party, if any. 




Page 00700-21

C. If Engineer does not render a formal written decision on a Claim within the time stated in 

Paragraph 9.06.B., Engineer shall be deemed to have issued a decision denying the Claim in its 

entirety 31 days after receipt of the last submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the 

opposing party, if any. 

D. Engineer’s written decision on such Claim or a decision denying the Claim in its entirety that is 

deemed to have been issued pursuant to Paragraph 9.06.C, will be final and binding upon Buyer 

and Seller 30 days after it is issued unless within 30 days of issuance Buyer or Seller appeals 

Engineer’s decision by initiating the mediation of such Claim in accordance with the dispute 

resolution procedures set forth in Article 13. 

E. If Article 13 has been amended to delete the mediation requirement, then Buyer or Seller may 

appeal Engineer's decision within 30 days of issuance by following the alternative dispute 

resolution process set forth in Article 13, as amended; or if no such alternative dispute resolution 

process has been set forth, Buyer or Seller may appeal Engineer's decision by 1) delivering to the 

other party within 30 days of the date of such decision a written notice of intent to submit the 

Claim to a court of competent jurisdiction, and 2) within 60 days after the date of such decision 

instituting a formal proceeding in a court of competent jurisdiction. 

F. No Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times will be valid if not submitted in 

accordance with this Paragraph 9.06. 

G. The parties agree to endeavor to avoid or resolve Claims through direct, good faith discussions 

and negotiations whenever practicable. Such discussions and negotiations should at the outset 

address whether the parties mutually agree to suspend the time periods established in this 

Paragraph 9.06; if so, a written record of such mutual agreement should be made and jointly 

executed. 

ARTICLE 10 – PAYMENT 

10.01 Applications for Progress Payments 

A. Seller shall submit to Buyer for Engineer’s review Applications for Payment filled out and 

signed by Seller and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the 

Contract Documents and also as Buyer or Engineer may reasonably require. The timing and 

amounts of progress payments shall be as stipulated in the Agreement. 

1. The first application for Payment will be su bmitted after review and approval by 

Engineer of all Shop Drawings and of all Samples required by the Contract Documents. 

2. The second Applicatio n for Payment will be submitted after receip t of the Goods has 

been acknowledged in accordance with Paragraph 8.01.B and will be accom panied by a 

bill of sale, invoice, or other docum entation reasonably satisfactory to Buyer warranting 

that Buyer has rightfully r eceived good title to the Goods from Seller and that, upon 

payment, the Goods will be free and clear of all liens. Such docum entation will include 

releases and waivers f rom all parties with via ble lien r ights. In the case of multiple 

deliveries of Goods, addition al Applications for Paym ent accompanied by the required 




Page 00700-22

documentation will be s ubmitted as Buyer acknowledges receipt of additional items of 

the Goods. 

10.02 Review of Applications for Progress Payments 

A. Engineer will, within ten days after receipt of each Application for Payment, either indicate in 

writing a recommendation of payment and present the Application to Buyer, or return the 

Application to Seller indicating in writing Engineer's reasons for refusing to recommend 

payment. In the latter case, Seller may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the 

Application. 

1. Engineer’s recommendation of payment reques ted in the f irst Application for Payment 

will constitute a r epresentation by Engineer, based on Engineer’s review of the 

Application for Paym ent and the accom panying data, th at the Shop Drawings and 

Samples have been reviewed and approved as required by the Contract Docum ents and 

Seller is entitled to payment of the amount recommended. 

2. Engineer’s recommendation of paym ent requested in th e Application for Paym ent 

submitted upon Buyer’s acknowledgm ent of r eceipt of the Goods will cons titute a 

representation by Engineer, based on Engineer ’s review of the Application for Paym ent 

and the accom panying data Seller is entitle d to payment of the a mount recommended. 

Such recommendation will not constitute a representation that Engineer has made a final 

inspection of the Goods, that the Go ods are free from non-conformities, acceptable or in 

conformance with the Contract Docum ents, that Engineer has made any investigation as 

to Buyer’s title to the Goods, that exhaustive or continuous inspections have been m ade 

to check the quality or the quantity of the Goods beyond the responsibilities specifically 

assigned to Engineer in the Contract Documents or that there may not be other matters or 

issues between the parties that m ight entitle Seller to additional paym ents by Buyer or 

Buyer to withhold payment to Seller. 

3. Engineer may refuse to recommend that all or any part of a progress payment be made, or 

Engineer may nullif y all or any p art of any paym ent previously rec ommended if, in 

Engineer's opinion, such recommendation woul d be incorrect or if on the basis of 

subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent inspections or tests Engineer considers 

such refusal or nullification necessary to protect Buyer from loss because the Contract 

Price has been reduced, Goods are found to be non-conforming, or Seller has failed to 

furnish acceptable Special Services. 

10.03 Amount and Timing of Progress Payments 

A. Subject to Paragraph 10.02.A., the amounts of the progress payments will be as provided in the 

Agreement. Buyer shall within 30 days after receipt of each Application for Payment with 

Engineer's recommendation pay Seller the amount recommended; but, in the case of the 

Application for Payment upon Buyer's acknowledgment of receipt of the Goods, said 30-day 

period may be extended for so long as is necessary (but in no event more than 60 days) for Buyer 

to examine the bill of sale and other documentation submitted therewith. Buyer shall notify 

Seller promptly of any deficiency in the documentation and shall not unreasonably withhold 

payment. 




Page 00700-23

10.04 Suspension of or Reduction in Payment 

A. Buyer may suspend or reduce the amount of progress payments, even though recommended for 

payment by Engineer, under the following circumstances: 

1. Buyer has reasonable grounds to conclude that Seller will not furnish the Goods or the 

Special Services in accordance with the Contract Documents, and 

2. Buyer has requested in writing assurances from Seller that the Go ods and Sp ecial 

Services will be d elivered or furnished in accordance with the Contract Documents, and 

Seller has f ailed to pro vide adequate assurances within ten days of Buyer’s written 

request. 

B. If Buyer refuses to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer, Buyer will 

provide Seller and Engineer immediate written notice stating the reason for such action and 

promptly pay Seller any amount remaining after deduction of the amount withheld. Buyer shall 

promptly pay Seller the amount withheld when Seller corrects the reason for such action to 

Buyer’s satisfaction. 

10.05 Final Application for Payment 

A. After Seller has corrected all non-conformities to the reasonable satisfaction of Buyer and 

Engineer, furnished all Special Services, and delivered all documents required by the Contract 

Documents, Engineer will issue to Buyer and Seller a notice of acceptance. Seller may then 

make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final 

Application for Payment will be accompanied by all documentation called for in the Contract 

Documents, a list of all unsettled Claims, and such other data and information as Buyer or 

Engineer may reasonably require. 


A. If, on the basis of final inspection and the review of the final Application for Payment and 

accompanying documentation, Engineer is reasonably satisfied that Seller has furnished the 

Goods and Special Services in accordance with the Contract Documents, and that Seller's has 

fulfilled all other obligations under the Contract Documents, then Engineer will, within ten days 

after receipt of the final Application for Payment, recommend in writing final payment subject to 

the provisions of Paragraph 10.07 and present the Application to Buyer. Otherwise, Engineer 

will return the Application to Seller, indicating the reasons for refusing to recommend final 

payment, in which case Seller shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application 

for payment. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form and 

substance, Buyer shall, within 30 days after receipt thereof, pay Seller the amount recommended 

by Engineer, less any sum Buyer is entitled to set off against Engineer's recommendation, 

including but not limited to liquidated damages to which Buyer is entitled. 




Page 00700-24

10.07 Waiver of Claims 

A. The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: 

1. a waiver of all Claims by Buyer against Seller, except Claims arising from unsettled liens 

from non-conformities in the Goods or Special Services appearing after final paym ent, 

from Seller's failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any s pecial 

guarantees specified therein, or from Seller's continuing obligations under the Contrac t 

Documents; and 

2. a waiver of all Claim s by Seller against Buyer (other than those previously m ade in 

accordance with the requirements herein and listed by Seller as unsettled as require d in 

Paragraph 10.05.A, and not resolved in writing). 

ARTICLE 11 – CANCELLATION, SUSPENSION, AND TERMINATION 

11.01 Cancellation 

A. Buyer has the right to cancel the Contract, without cause, at any time prior to delivery of the 

Goods by written notice. Cancellation pursuant to the terms of this paragraph shall not constitute 

a breach of contract by Buyer. Upon cancellation: 

1. Buyer shall pay Seller for the direct costs incurred in producing any Goods that Seller has 

specially manufactured for the Project, plus a fair and reasonable am ount for overhead 

and profit. 

2. For Goods that are not specially manufactured for the Project, Seller shall be entitled to a 

restocking charge of 10 percent of the unpaid Contract Price of such Goods. 

11.02 Suspension of Performance by Buyer 

A. Buyer has the right to suspend performance of the Contract for up to a maximum of ninety days, 

without cause, by written notice. Upon suspension under this paragraph, Seller shall be entitled 

to an increase in the Contract Times and Contract Price caused by the suspension, provided that 

performance would not have been suspended or delayed for causes attributable to Seller. 

11.03 Suspension of Performance by Seller 

A. Subject to the provisions of Paragraph 5.07.B, Seller may suspend the furnishing of the Goods 

and Special Services only under the following circumstance: 

1. Seller has reasonable grounds to conclude that Buyer will not perform its future payment 

obligations under the Contract; and, 

2. Seller has requested in writing assurances from Buyer that future payments will be made 

in accordance with the Contract, an d Buyer has failed to provide such assurances within 

ten days of Seller’s written request. 




Page 00700-25

11.04 Breach and Termination 

A. Buyer’s Breach: 

1. Buyer shall be deem ed in breach of the Contract if it fails to comply with any m aterial 

provision of the Contract Documents, including but not limited to: 

a. wrongful rejection or revocation of Buyer’s acceptance of the Goods, 

b. failure to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents, or 

c. wrongful repudiation of the Contract. 

2. Seller shall have the right to terminate the Contract for cause by declaring a breach 

should Buyer fail to com ply with any m aterial provisions of the Contract. U pon 

termination, Seller shall be entitled to all remedies provided by Laws and Regulations. 

B. Seller’s Breach: 

a. In the event Seller believes Buyer is in br each of its obligations under th e Contract, 

Seller shall provide B uyer with reasonably prompt written notic e setting forth in 

sufficient detail the reasons for d eclaring that it b elieves a breach h as occurred. 

Buyer shall have seven days from receipt of the written no tice declaring the breach 

(or such longer period of time as Seller may grant in writing) within which to cure or 

to proceed diligently to cure such alleged breach. 

1. Seller shall be deem ed in breach of the Contra ct if it fails to comply with any m aterial 

provision of the Contract Documents, including, but not limited to: 

a. failure to deliver the Goods or perform the Special Serv ices in accordance with the 

Contract Documents, 

b. wrongful repudiation of the Contract, or 

c. delivery or furnishing of non-conforming Goods and Special Services. 

2. Buyer may terminate Seller’s right to pe rform the Contract for cause by declaring a 

breach should Seller fail to comply with any material provision of the Contract 

Documents. Upon termination, Buyer shall be entitled to all rem edies provided by Laws 

and Regulations. 

a. In the event Buyer believes Seller is in br each of its obligations under th e Contract, 

and except as provid ed in Paragraph 11.04.B.2.b, Buyer shall provide Seller with 

reasonably prompt written notice s etting forth in suf ficient detail the reasons f or 

declaring that it believes a breach h as occurred. Seller shall have seven days from 

receipt of the writte n notice declaring the breach (or such longer period of tim e as 

Buyer may grant in writing) within which to cure or to proceed diligently to cure such 

alleged breach. 




Page 00700-26

. If and to the extent that Seller has provided a performance bond under the provisions 

of Paragraph 4.01, the notice and cure procedures of that bond, if any, shall supersede 

the notice and cure procedures of Paragraph 11.04.B.2.a. 

ARTICLE 12 – LICENSES AND FEES 

12.01 Intellectual Property and License Fees 

A. Unless specifically stated elsewhere in the Contract Documents, Seller is not transferring any 

intellectual property rights, patent rights, or licenses for the Goods delivered. However, in the 

event the Seller is manufacturing to Buyer’s design, Buyer retains all intellectual property rights 

in such design. 

B. Seller shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use or the 

furnishing of the Goods, unless specified otherwise by the Contract Documents. 

12.02 Seller’s Infringement 

A. Subject to Paragraph 12.01.A, Seller shall indemnify and hold harmless Buyer, Engineer and 

their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, contractors, and 

subcontractors from and against all claims, costs, losses, damages, and judgments (including but 

not limited to all reasonable fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other 

professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or 

relating to any infringement or alleged infringement of any United States or foreign patent or 

copyright by any of the Goods as delivered hereunder. 

B. In the event of suit or threat of suit for intellectual property infringement, Buyer will promptly 

notify Seller of receiving notice thereof. 

C. Seller shall promptly defend the claim or suit, including negotiating a settlement. Seller shall 

have control over such claim or suit, provided that Seller agrees to bear all expenses and to 

satisfy any adverse judgment thereof. 

1. If Seller fails to defend such suit or claim after written notice by Buyer, Seller will be 

bound in any subsequent suit or claim against Seller by Buyer by any factual 

determination in the prior suit or claim. 

2. If Buyer fails to provide Seller the opportunity to defend such suit or claim after written 

notice by Seller, Buyer shall be barred from any remedy against Seller for such suit or 

claim. 

D. If a determination is made that Seller has infringed upon intellectual property rights of another, 

Seller may obtain the necessary licenses for Buyer’s benefit, or replace the Goods and provide 

related design and construction as necessary to avoid the infringement at Seller’s own expense. 




Page 00700-27

12.03 Buyer’s Infringement 

A. Buyer shall indemnify and hold harmless Seller, and its officers, directors, partners, employees, 

agents, consultants, contractors, and subcontractors from and against all claims, costs, losses, 

damages, and judgments (including but not limited to all reasonable fees and charges of 

engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other 

dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement or alleged infringement of 

any United States or foreign patent or copyright caused by Seller’s compliance with Buyer’s 

design of the Goods or Buyer’s use of the Goods in combination with other materials or 

equipment in any process (unless intent of such use was known to Seller and Seller had reason to 

know such infringement would result). 

B. In the event of suit or threat of suit for intellectual property infringement, Seller must after 

receiving notice thereof promptly notify Buyer. 

C. Upon written notice from Seller, Buyer shall be given the opportunity to defend the claim or suit, 

including negotiating a settlement. Buyer shall have control over such claim or suit, provided 

that Buyer agrees to bear all expenses and to satisfy any adverse judgment thereof. 

1. If Buyer fails to defend such suit o r claim after written notice by Seller , Buyer will be 

bound in any subsequent suit or claim against Buyer by Seller by any factual 

determination in the prior suit or claim. 

2. If Seller fails to provide Buye r the opportunity to defend such suit or claim after written 

notice by Buyer, Seller shall be barred from any remedy against Buyer for such suit or 

claim. 

12.04 Reuse of Documents 

A. Neither Seller nor any other person furnishing any of the Goods and Special Services under a 

direct or indirect contract with Seller shall: (1) acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of 

the Drawings, Specifications, or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or 

bearing the seal of Engineer or its consultants, including electronic media versions; or (2) reuse 

any of such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on any other project 

without written consent of Buyer and Engineer and specific written verification or adaptation by 

Engineer. This prohibition will survive termination or completion of the Contract. Nothing 

herein shall preclude Seller from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record 

purposes. 

12.05 Electronic Data 

A. Unless otherwise stated in the Supplementary Conditions, copies of data furnished by Buyer or 

Engineer to Seller, or by Seller to Buyer or Engineer that may be relied upon are limited to the 

printed copies (also known as hard copies). Files in electronic media format of text, data, 

graphics, or other types are furnished only for the convenience of the receiving party. Any 

conclusion or information obtained or derived from such electronic files will be at the user’s sole 

risk. If there is a discrepancy between the electronic files and the hard copies, the hard copies 

govern. 




Page 00700-28

B. Because data stored in electronic media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently or 

otherwise without authorization of the data’s creator, the party receiving electronic files agrees 

that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within 60 days, after which the receiving party 

shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred. The transferring party will correct 

any errors detected within the 60-day acceptance period. 

C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, the transferring party makes no 

representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of documents resulting 

from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware 

differing from those used by the data’s creator. 

ARTICLE 13 – DISPUTE RESOLUTION 

13.01 Dispute Resolution Method 

A. Either Buyer or Seller may initiate the mediation of any Claim decided in writing by Engineer 

under Paragraph 9.06.B or 9.06.C before such decision becomes final and binding. The 

mediation will be governed by the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American 

Arbitration Association in effect as of the Effective Date of the Agreement. The request for 

mediation shall be submitted in writing to the American Arbitration Association and the other 

party to the Contract. Timely submission of the request shall stay the Engineer's decision from 

becoming final and binding. 

B. Buyer and Seller shall participate in the mediation process in good faith. The process shall be 

concluded within 60 days of filing of the request. The date of termination of the mediation shall 

be determined by application of the mediation rules referenced above. 

C. If the mediation process does not result in resolution of the Claim, then Engineer’s written 

decision under Paragraph 9.06.B or a denial pursuant to Paragraph 9.06.C shall become final and 

binding 30 days after termination of the mediation unless, within that time period, Buyer or 

Seller: 

1. elects in writing to invoke any dispute resolution process prov ided for in the 

Supplementary Conditions, or 

2. agrees with the other party to submit the Claim to another dispute resolution process, or 

3. if no dispute resolution process has been pr ovided for in the Supplem entary Conditions, 

delivers to the othe r party written notice of the intent to submit the Claim to a co urt of 

competent jurisdiction, and within 60 days of the termination of the mediation institutes 

such formal proceeding. 

ARTICLE 14 – MISCELLANEOUS 

14.01 Giving Notice 

A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will 

be deemed to have been validly given if: 1) delivered in person to the individual or to a member 




Page 00700-29

of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or 2) if delivered at or sent 

by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of 

the notice. 

14.02 Controlling Law 

A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Point of Destination is 

located. 

B. In the case of any conflict between the express terms of this Contract and the Uniform 

Commercial Code, as adopted in the state whose law governs, it is the intent of the parties that 

the express terms of this Contract shall apply. 

14.03 Computation of Time 

A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to 

exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on 

a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, 

such day shall be omitted from the computation. 

14.04 Cumulative Remedies 

A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies 

available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any 

way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are 

otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee, or by 

other provisions of the Contract Documents, and the provisions of this paragraph will be as 

effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular 

duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply. 

14.05 Survival of Obligations 

A. All representations, indemnifications, warranties and guarantees made in, required by, or given 

in accordance with the Contract Documents, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the 

Contract Documents, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Goods and 

Special Services and termination or completion of the Agreement. 

14.06 Entire Agreement 

A. Buyer and Seller agree that this Agreement is the complete and final agreement between them, 

and supersedes all prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or oral. This 

Agreement may not be altered, modified, or amended except in writing signed by an authorized 

representative of both parties. 




Page 00700-30

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 

These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the Standard General Conditions for Procurem ent 

Contracts, EJCDC P-700 (2010 Edition). All provisions which are not so amended or supplemented remain 

in full force and effect. 

The terms used in these Supplem entary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions. 

Additional terms used in these Supplem entary Conditions have the m eanings stated below, which are 

applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. 

The address system used in these Supplementary Conditions is the same as the address system used in the 

General Conditions, with the prefix "SC" added thereto. 

SC-1.01 

Definitions 

SC-1.01.A 

Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 1.01.A.36: 

37. Unit Price Goods and Special Services—Goods and Special Services to 

be paid for on the basis of unit prices. 

SC-4.02 

Insurance 

SC-4.02 

Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 4.02.E: 

F. Seller shall purchase and m aintain such liability and other insurance as 

is appropriate for the furnishing of Goods and Special Services and as 

will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out 

of or result from Seller’s furnishing of the Goods or Special Services 

and Seller’s other obligations under the Contract Docum ents, whether 

the furnishing of Goods and Special Services or other obligations are to 

be performed by Seller, any subcont ractor or supplier, or by anyone 

directly or indirectly em ployed by any of them to furnish the Goods 

and Special Services, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be 

liable: 

1. claims under workers’ com pensation, disability benefits, and other 

similar employee benefit acts; 

2. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness 

or disease, or death of Seller’s employees; 

3. claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or 

death of any person other than Seller’s employees; 

4. claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury 

liability coverage which are sustained: (i) by any person as a result 

Page 00800 - 1 of 8

of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such 

person by Seller, or (ii) by any other person for any other reason; 

5. claims for damages, other than to the Goods, because of injury to or 

destruction of tangible property wh erever located, including loss of 

use resulting therefrom; and 

6. claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person 

or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use 

of any motor vehicle. 

G. The policies of insurance so required by this Paragraph 4.02 to be 

purchased and maintained shall: 

1. with respect to insurance required by Paragraphs SC-4.02.F.3 

through SC 4.02.F.6 inclusive, include as additional insureds 

(subject to any custom ary exclusion in respect of professional 

liability) Buyer, Engineer, their c onsultants, and [Here list by name, 

(not Project role) other persons or entities to be included on policy as 

additional insureds] all of whom shall be listed as additional 

insureds, and include coverage for the respective officers, directors, 

partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and 

subcontractors of each and any of all such additional insureds, and 

the insurance afforded to these additional insureds shall provide 

primary coverage for all claims covered thereby; 

2. include at least the specif ic coverages and be written f or not less 

than the lim its of liability provided below or required by Laws or 

Regulations, whichever is greater; 

3. include completed operations insurance; 

4. include contractual liability insurance covering Seller’s indem nity 

obligations under Paragraphs 5.09 and 12.02. 

5. contain a provision or endorsem ent that the coverage afforded will 

not be canceled, materially changed or renewal ref used until at least 

thirty days prior written notice has been given to Buyer and Seller 

and to each other additional insured identified in these 

Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has 

been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the Seller 

pursuant to Paragraph SC-4.02.I will so provide); 

6. remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter 

when Seller m ay be correcti ng, removing, or replacing nonconforming 

Goods in accordance with Paragraph 8.03; 


7. with respect to com pleted operations insurance, and any insurance 

coverage written on a claims-made basis, remain in effect for at least 

two years after final paym ent (and Seller shall furnish Buyer and 

each other additional insured iden tified in these Supplem entary 

Conditions, to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued, 

evidence satisfactory to Buyer and any such additional insured of 

continuation of such insurance at final paym ent and one year 

thereafter); and 

8. with respect to any delegation of professional design services to 

Seller pursuant to Paragraph 5.10 of the General Conditions, include 

professional liability coverage by endorsement or otherwise. 

H. The limits of liability f or the insurance required by Paragraph SC 

4.02.F shall provide coverage for not less than the following am ounts 

or greater where required by Laws and Regulations: 

1. Workers’ Compensation, and related coverages under Paragraphs 

SC-4.02.F.1 and F.2: 

a. State: Statutory 

b. Applicable Federal 

(e.g., Longshoreman’s): 

Statutory 

c. Employer’s Liability: $1,000,000.00 

2. Seller’s General Liability under Paragraphs SC-4.02.F.3 through F.6 

which shall include com pleted operations and product liability 

coverages and eliminate the exclusion with respect to property under 

the care, custody and control of Seller: 

a. General Aggregate $1,000,000.00 

b. Products - Completed Operations 

Aggregate (per occurrence) $1,000,000.00 

c. Personal and Advertising 

1) Injury $1,000,000.00 

2) Each Occurrence 

(Bodily Injury and 

Property Damage) $1,000,000.00 

d. Property Damage liability insurance will provide 

Explosion, Collapse, and Under-ground coverages 

where applicable. 


e. Excess or Umbrella Liability 

1) General Aggregate $1,000,000.00 

2) Each Occurrence $1,000,000.00 

3. Automobile Liability under Paragraph SC-4.02.F.6: 

a. Combined Single Limit 

By Accident – Each Accident: $1,000,000.00 

I. Seller shall deliver to Buyer, with copies to each additional insured 

identified in these Supplem entary Conditions, certificates of insurance 

(and other evidence of insurance requested by Buyer or any other 

additional insured) which Seller is required to purchase and maintain. 

J. If Buyer has any objection to the coverage afforded by or other 

provisions of the insurance required to be purchased and m aintained on 

the basis of non-conform ance with the Contract Docum ents, Buyer 

shall notify Seller in writing within 10 days after receipt of the 

certificates or other evidence re quired by Paragraph SC-4.02.E. Seller 

shall provide such additional inform ation in respect to insurance as 

Buyer shall reasonably request. 

SC-5.05 

Taxes 

SC-6.17 

Add a new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 5.05.A: 

B. Buyer is exempt from payment of sales and com pensating use taxes of 

the State of Texas and of cities and counties thereof on all materials and 

equipment to be incorporated into the Project facilities. 

1. Buyer will furnish the required certificates of tax exemption to Seller 

with respect to m aterials and equipment to be incorporated into the 

Project facilities. 

2. Buyer's exemption does not apply to construction tools, m achinery, 

equipment, or other property purchas ed by or leased by Seller, or to 

supplies or materials not incorporated into the Project facilities. 

3. The Contract Price does not in clude the cost of sales or 

compensating use taxes to the exte nt such are exem pted by this 

paragraph. 


SC-5.06 Shop Drawings and Samples 

SC-5.06 

Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 5.06.E: 

F. Seller shall f urnish required subm ittals with suf ficient information 

and accuracy in order to obtain re quired approval of an item with no 

more than three subm ittals. Engineer will record Engineer’s tim e for 

reviewing subsequent submittals of Shop Drawings, samples, or other 

items requiring approval and Seller shall reim burse Buyer for 

Engineer’s charges for such time. 

G. In the event that Seller requests a change of a previously approved 

item, Seller shall reim burse Buyer f or Engineer’s charges f or its 

review time unless the need for such change is beyond the control of 

Seller. 

SC-9.07 

Determinations of Unit Price Quantities 

SC-9.07 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 9.06: 

SC-9.07 

Determinations of Unit Price Quantities 

A. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit 

Price Goods and Special Services furnished by Seller, and the written 

decisions of Engineer on such m atters will be final and binding upon 

Buyer and Seller (except as m odified by Engineer to reflect changed 

factual conditions or m ore accurate data), subject to the provisions of 

Paragraph 9.06. 

SC-10.01 

Applications for Progress Payments 

SC-10.01 

Amend Paragraph 10.01.A.1 to read as follows: 

1. The first application f or Payment will be subm itted following each 

written order for Goods placed by th e Engineer and shall encom pass 

only those items and quantities included in the order. 

SC-10.08 

Unit Price Goods or Special Services 

SC-10.08 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 10.07: 

SC-10.08 

Unit Price Goods or Special Services 

A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the furnishing 

of the Goods and Special Services is to be paid for with unit prices, 

initially the Contract Price will be de emed to include, for all Unit Price 

Goods and Special Services, an amount equal to the sum of the 

products resulting from multiplication of the unit price for each 


separately identified item of Unit Price Goods and Special Services by 

the estimated quantity of each such item as indicated in the Agreement. 

A. The estimated quantities of item s of Unit Price Goods and Special 

Services are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of 

comparison of Bids and determ ining an initial Contract Price. 

Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price 

Goods and Special Services furnished by Seller will be m ade by 

Engineer subject to the provisions of Paragraph SC- 9.07. 

B. Each unit price will be deem ed to include an am ount considered by 

Seller to be adequate to cover Se ller’s overhead and profit for each 

separately identified item. 

C. Buyer or Seller m ay make a Claim for an adjustm ent in the Contract 

Price in accordance with Paragraph 9.06 if: 

1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Goods and Special Services 

furnished by Seller differs m aterially and significantly from the 

estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement, and 

2. there is no corresponding adjustm ent with respect to any other item 

of Unit Price Goods and Special Services; and 

3. Seller believes that Seller is entitled to an increase in Contract Price 

as a result of having incurred add itional expense or Buyer believes 

that Buyer is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties 

are unable to agree as to the am ount of any such increase or 

decrease. 

SC-13 

Dispute Resolution 

SC-13.02 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 13.01: 

SC-13.02 

Arbitration 

A. All Claims or counterclaim s, disputes, or other m atters in question 

between Buyer and Seller arising out of or relating to the Contract 

Documents or the breach thereof (except for Claim s which have been 

waived by the m aking or acceptance of final payment as provided by 

Paragraph 10.07) not resolved under the provisions of Paragraph 13.01 

will be decided by binding arbitration in accordance with the rules of 

the State of Texas, subject to th e conditions and lim itations of this 

Paragraph SC-13.02. This agreem ent to arbitrate and any other 

agreement or consent to arbitrate entered into will be specif ically 

enforceable under the prevailing law of any court having jurisdiction. 


B. No demand for arbitration of any Cl aim or counterclaim , dispute, or 

other matter that is required to be ref erred to Engineer initially f or 

decision in accordance with Para graph 9.06 will be m ade until the 

earlier of: (i) the date on whic h Engineer has rendered a written 

decision, or (ii) the 31st day after th e parties have presented their final 

evidence to Engineer if a written decision has not been rendered by 

Engineer before that date. Subjec t to the provisions of SC-13.02.A, no 

demand for arbitration of any such Cl aim or counterclaim, dispute, or 

other matter will be m ade later than 30 days af ter the date on which 

Engineer has rendered a written decision in respect thereof in 

accordance with Paragraph 9.06; and th e failure to dem and arbitration 

within said 30 day period will result in Engineer’s decision being f inal 

and binding upon Buyer and Seller. If Engineer renders a decision after 

arbitration proceedings have been initiated, such decision m ay be 

entered as evidence but will not supersede the arbitration proceedings, 

except where the decision is acceptable to the parties concerned. 

C. Notice of the demand for arbitration will be filed in writing with the 

other party to the Contract and with the selected arbitrator or arbitration 

provider, and a copy will be sent to Engineer for inform ation. The 

demand for arbitration will be made within the 30 day period specif ied 

in Paragraph SC-13.02.B, and in all other cases within a reasonable 

time after the Claim or counterclai m, dispute, or other m atter in 

question has arisen, and in no event shall any such dem and be made 

after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based 

on such Claim or other dispute or matter in question would be barred 

by the applicable statue of limitations. 

D. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents shall 

include by consolidation, joinder, or in any other m anner any other 

individual or entity (including Engi neer, and Engineer’s consultants 

and the officers, directors, partners, agents, employees or consultants of 

any of them) who is not a party to this Contract unless: 

1. the inclusion of such other individual or entity is necessary if 

complete relief is to be affo rded among those who are already 

parties to the arbitration; and 

2. such other individual or entity is substantially involved in a question 

of law or fact which is com mon to those who are already parties to 

the arbitration and which will arise in such proceedings. 

E. The award rendered by the arbitrator shall be in writing and include: (i) 

a concise breakdown of the award; (ii) a written explanation of the 

award specifically citing the Contr act Document provisions deem ed 

applicable and relied on in making the award. 


F. The award will be consistent with the agreement of the parties and 

final. Judgment may be entered upon it in any court having jurisdiction 

thereof, and it will not be subject to modification or appeal. 


BID ADDENDUM 

FAILURE TO RETURN THIS BID ADDENDUM IN ACCORDANCE WITH INSTRUCTIONS 

MAY SUBJECT YOUR BID TO REJECTION ON THE AFFECTED ITEM(S)/SERVICES. 

Project Number: WR11.0143 Addendum Number: 1 

Description: Vertical Turbine Submersible Pumping Units Date: January 19, 2012 


Instructions to Bidders 

1. Acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in Paragraph 3.01.A of Section 00400, Bid Form for 

Procurement Documents. 

2. Submit this Addendum signed with the Bid Response. 

Changes to the Project Manual 

1. The following documents are included in this Addendum and hereby incorporated into the 

Project Manual: 

a. Section 00400, Bid Form for Procurement Documents, has been replaced in its entirety. 

Bid Item numbers 18 through 23 were corrected to reflect the ID numbers shown in 

Specification Section 11210, Appendix A. 

b. Section 00520, Agreement Between Buyer and Seller for Procurement Documents, has 

been replaced in its entirety. Paragraph 7.01.B has been modified to state that Bid Items 

covering bonds, insurance, and related costs will need to be invoiced upon the first 

delivery of Goods. Paragraph 7.02.A.1 has been modified to reflect the inability of the 

Seller to make initial progress payments prior to delivery and inspection. Bidders are 

reminded to review sections in the Project Manual pertaining to the intent of the Buyer to 

assign this Contract to a future construction contractor designated by the Buyer. 

Paragraphs 11.02.A, 11.02.A.1 and 11.02.A.2 have been modified to clarify this intent. 

c. Specification Section 11210, Appendix A, Preliminary Pump Assumptions, has been 

replaced in its entirety. A footnote was added to clarify the priority of pump design 

parameters, motor voltages were changed to be uniformly 480 volts, and the cable rating 

(volts) field was removed to conform with Paragraph 2.1.L of Specification Section 

11210, Submersible Vertical Turbine Pumping Units. 

2. Corrections to the Technical Specifications: 

a. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout 

i) Delete Paragraph 1.3, Final Cleaning, in its entirety. 

b. Section 11210 - Submersible Vertical Turbine Pumping Units 

i) Delete Paragraph 1.1.D in its entirety and replace with the following: 

D. Motor and pump shall be regularly coupled, manufactured and sold together for 

use in municipal potable water wells for no less than 10 years. The use of special 

adaptors, couplings, etc. to couple the motor and pump will not be acceptable and 

Page 1 of 2

BID ADDENDUM 


MAY SUBJECT YOUR BID TO REJECTION ON THE AFFECTED ITEM(S)ISERVICES. 

Project Number: WRJ 1.0143 

Description: Vertical Turbine Submersible Pumping Units 


Addendum Number: 1 

Date: January 19, 2012 

will constitute rejection of the equipment. 

ii) Delete Paragraph 1 I.E in its entirety and replace with the following: 

E. The pumping units will be started across the line at 480 V, 3 phase, 60 Hz. 

iii) Delete Paragraph 2.l.A in its entirety and replace with the following: 

A. The pump shall be a submersible deep well turbine type multistage in series 

design, complete with motor, power cable, power cable terminus to motor, 

transition piece at pump discharge, column pipe, discharge elbow and al1 

appurtenances in accordance with these specifications. The pump shall conform to 

A WW A El 02-06 except as otherwise specified herein. Pumping unit speed shall 

not exceed 1 ,800 rpm. The pump and motor shall be coupled via a positive 

locking stainless steel coupling to produce maximum performance for torque and 

thrust. 

iv) Delete Paragraph 2.1 G.l in its entirety and replace with the following: 

Execute Addendum: 

The submersible motor shall be designed to deliver continuously the necessary 

brake horse power (bhp) having a minimum 1 15 service factor The motor shaH 

be designed to operate at maximum of 1,800 rpm, at 480 V, 3 phase, 60 Hz, 

alternating current, with full voltage (across the line) starting capability with a 

maximum current inrush of 500% without use of special starting equipment. The 

motor shalt be a high reactance type design that will provide an inrush current that 

is low enough to allow across the line starting. The entire motor shall incorporate 

an insulation of Class B or better Motor shall have a NEMA code letter of E or 

less (i.e., locked motor KVA per horsepower shall be 5.0 or less). Motor 

enclosure classification shall meet or exceed IP68 requirements. 

Bidder: Q_\OJ.)e.., -~ eo\IXM C\- 1:.1 Pa..CJ.o I L LC.- 

Authorized Signature: 

# .iJ,_,.._ Ci ·lr-:1 

Name and Title (Printed): J4JYO [)... ~\COV\ {

Specification Section 11210, Appendix A 



Preliminary Pump Assumptions 

Assumed Column Pipe Projected Water Depth Pump Well Friction Pipeline Head Loss* Assumed Static Casing Top of Bottom of Total Column Pump Motor 

Pumping Flow Velocity Level During to be Set Head Loss and Delivery Pressure TDH Calculated Nominal Water Level Diameter Screen Screen Well Depth Pipe Suction Voltage 

ID Rate (gpm) (ft/s) Pumping (ft bgs) (ft bgs) (feet) (feet) (feet) Input Hp Hp (ft bgs) OD (in) (ft bgs) (ft bgs) (ft bgs) Size (in) Depth (ft bgs) (volts) 

D1 280 7.1 312 452 29 97 437 51.6 60 198 16 342 640 650 4 452 480 

D2 660 7.5 250 390 18 90 357 99.3 125 180 16 280 438 448 6 390 480 

D3 500 5.7 418 560 15 96 529 111 125 182 16 448 627 637 6 560 480 

D4 300 7.7 170 310 22 134 326 41.2 50 96 16 200 386 396 4 310 480 

D5 540 6.1 300 440 13 105 419 95.3 100 6 480 

D6 360 4.1 323 457 6 128 457 69.3 75 138 16 353 673 683 6 457 480 

D7 580 6.6 270 410 14 144 428 104.6 125 6 480 

D8 770 8.7 190 330 20 126 337 109 125 112 16 220 552 562 6 330 480 

D9 330 8.4 240 380 33 136 409 56.8 60 130 16 270 614 624 4 380 480 

D10 400 4.5 256 396 7 134 396 66.8 75 148 16 286 610 520 6 396 480 

D11 900 10.2 272 403 33 119 424 161 175 120 16 302 750 760 6 403 480 

D12 700 7.9 251 391 20 144 415 122 150 124 16 281 611 621 6 391 480 

D13 630 7.1 328 468 19 149 496 132 150 133 16 358 638 648 6 468 480 

D14 850 9.6 271 411 30 149 451 161 175 94 16 301 571 581 6 411 480 

D15 1030 6.6 206 384 10 147 363 157 175 95 12 236 752 762 8 384 480 

D17 450 5.1 220 360 8 161 388 73.6 100 109 16 250 488 498 6 360 480 

D18 1100 7.0 248 395 12 143 403 187 200 148 12 278 659 669 8 395 480 

D19 900 10.2 260 400 33 136 429 163 175 6 480 

D22 250 6.4 200 310 16 151 367 38.6 50 130 12 230 322 332 4 310 480 

D23 330 8.4 267 407 35 154 456 63.5 75 112 16 297 560 570 4 407 480 

D24 380 9.7 271 398 45 147 464 74.3 100 151 16 301 730 740 4 398 480 

Optional Supply Well Pump Designs 

P1 1400 8.9 250 400 19 470 277 300 8 480 

P2 1300 8.3 250 400 16 440 241 250 8 480 

P3 1150 7.3 250 400 13 450 218 225 8 480 

P4 1400 8.9 250 400 19 320 189 200 8 480 

Total 12,240 GPM * Pipeline head loss modeled by Freese & Nichols for pumping Conversion Factors Assumptions 

Total 17,625,600 GPD directly to Base 21 (Scenario B). 7.5 gallons per cubic foot 75% pump efficiency 

Total 17.63 MGD 60 seconds per minute 80% motor efficiency 

** TDH and Pumping Rates take priority in pumping unit sizing. 550 ft*lbf/s/hp 60% overall efficiency 

gpm = gallons per minute The Calculated Input Hp and Nominal Hp displayed on the table 12 inches per foot 25% increase due to minor losses 

ft/s = feet per second are for reference purposes and are based on assumed pump 2.31 feet water per psi 62.4 lb/ft 3 , unit weight of water 

ft bgs = feet below ground surface and motor efficiencies. 32.2 ft/s 2 , acceleration of gravity 

TDH = total dynamic head 

1.2E-05 ft 2 /s, kinematic viscosity 

Hp = horsepower 


in = inches 

20 psi, delivery pressure 

1/18/2012


BID ADDENDUM 


MAY SUBJECT YOUR BID TO REJECTION ON THE AFFECTED ITEM(S)!SERVICES. 

Project Number: WR11.0143 

Description: Vertical Turbine Submersible Pumping Units 


Addendum Number: 2 

Date: January 27, 2012 

Instructions to Bidders 

Acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in Paragraph 3.0l.A of Section 00400, Bid Form for 

Procurement Documents. 

2. Submit this Addendum signed with the Bid Response. 

Changes to the Proiect Manual 

The following documents are included in this Addendum and hereby incorporated into the 

Project Manual 

a. Responses to questions received by the Engineer as of January 25, 2012 

Execute Addendum: 

Bidder: __ 

C_'we,~'--~---~--=-:..-=--t1_0f=-+-G-=---\ ---'~'-=--'=-1-'J L=L=~::::...----- 

+jd--"""=?_J,:~:£~.,


Technical Specification Section 11210 

7. On Page 11210-1 Item 1.1 E states that motors greater than a size of 100 horsepower (Hp) will be 

operated at 2,300 volts and motors that are 100 Hp and less will be operated at 480 volts. In 

Appendix A 100 Hp pump motors are shown as operating at 2,300 volts. This difference should be 

addressed. 

Comment acknowledged. Please see Addendum 1. 

8. On Page 11210-1 Item 1.1E has text stating that motors of greater than 100 Hp will operate at 2,300 

volts. The maximum size motor specified in Appendix A is 200 Hp. We do not know why a 2,300 volt 

motor would be required for only a 200 Hp load. Normally the transition to 2,300-volt motors does not 

occur until getting in the 350 to 450 Hp range. With all of the motors operating at 460 volts, there 

would not be a need for step up transformers at some of the well facilities. 


9. 1.1.E Specification change request - Remove all 2300 V references. 


10. 1.3 A. Specification Clarification - This paragraphs refer to minimum pump and motor efficiencies 

from the contract documents. Where can we find these efficiencies in the contract documents? 

Specification section 11210, Paragraph 1.12 and Appendix A. 

11. 1.4 B Specification Clarification - Equipment is to be sequenced to coincide with well installation. Is 

there an order of well installation, or will it be driven by when we can ship? 

Well installation is planned in the following order: D24, D15, D18, D11, D23, D14, D22, D13, D4, 

D17, D6, D12, D8, D10, D5, D9, D3, D19, D1, D7, D2. Pumps orders are expected to follow 

this sequence, in groups of 4 or 5 pumps, subject to change. 

12. 1.5 B. 5 - 1.5.B.9 Specification change request - Remove dynamometer reference. Dyno Testing not 

available - Please change to “manufacture will test to specification IEC 60034” 

The use of “substitutions” and “as equal” items will be evaluated for the selected Bidder. 

13. 1.5 B. Specification clarification - This section indicates some of the factory tests will be witnessed by 

the Owner. Can you identify how many will be witnessed? 

A minimum of three factory tests are planned to be witnessed, subject to change. 

14. 1.5.C Specification correction - Correct spelling of “factor” to “factory” 

Modify Paragraph 1.5.C, Specification Section 11210, as follows: the second sentence should 

begin “A factory power cable…” 

2


15. 1.7.C Specification change request - Recommend for acceptance to start at installation to reduce 

cost to owner. 

In reference to Paragraph 1.6.C, acceptance will be maximum 90 days after delivery per 

Agreement, Paragraph 5.03. 

16. 1.8.A Specification change request - Recommend 12 months operational or 18 months from 

shipment which ever happens first to keep pricing lower to end user. 

As written, Warranty is one year after Acceptance, plus max 90 days after delivery, plus 

shipment, which ultimately will be less than 18 months from shipment (as requested). This is 

standard language. 

17. 2.1.D Specification clarification - What is interpretation of hydraulically and dynamically balanced 

(Dynamically balanced is a rotating mechanical balance, would assume if castings are done correct 

we are hydraulically balanced but could be interpreted as thrust balanced) 

The first sentence of Paragraph 2.1E regarding impeller balancing should be interpreted as a 

rotating mechanical balance. 

18. 2.1 F. - 2.1.F Specification change request - “single bearing in strainer body/interconnect.” 

Manufacture could meet this specification but price and delivery would go up. Flowserve Strainer 

Body would have only 1 Bearing. 


19. 2.1.G Specification exception - Change request - glycol / water mix should be changed to from 

50/50 to 65/35. 

Engineer assumes the prospective Bidder intended for this comment to read “changed to 50/50 

or 65/35”. The use of “substitutions” and “as equal” items will be evaluated on an individual 

basis. 

20. 2.1 G. 1. Specification change request - Remove reference to 2300 V. Manufacture could meet this 

specification in some applications but could not meet delivery. Cost would escalate. 


21. 2.1.G.1 Specification clarification - Some motors will exceed the 500% inrush limitation to 650% 


22. 2.1.G.1 Specification exception - To meet delivery requirements the spec needs to be Class Y. 

Class Y motor insulation is no longer recognized (National Electrical Manufacturer’s 

Association, 2002, “NEMA Standards Publication”). Motor shall incorporate an insulation of 

Class B or better, per the specification. 

23. 2.1.G.1 Spec exception - The motor NEMA Code should be Code Letter K or less or drop 

requirement completely. 


3


24. 2.1 G. 2 Exception to the specification. Lip seal unavailable on this product - Seals will be single 

Silicon Carbide 


25. 2.1 G. 4 Exception to the specification - Thrust bearings are not rated @ 20,000# recommend a 

safety factor of duty thrust to 2 x pump thrust to motor thrust bearing rating. 


26. 2.1.G.4 Exception to the specification - Thrust bearings are not cooled by a circulating system and 

should be eliminated. Circulation system needed if heat exchanger is used. 


27. 2.1.G.5.5 Exception to the specification - SS stator is not coated. To do so would impede cooling 


28. 2.1.G.5.6 Clarification to the specification - Unsure if manufacture’s standard meets specification. 

Please advise - Flowserve Bearings are solid Hard Carbon/Graphite with grooves. 


29. 2.1.G.5.7 Clarification note to the specification - Manufactures Standard motors are PVC insulationmanufacture 

could comply with specification with PE2+PA material, but would not be able to meet 

delivery and end user would incur much higher cost. Request Specification change to wire winding 

insulation “Manufacturers Standard” (PVC vs. PE2+PA) 


30. 2.1.G.5.9 Specification exception - Pleuger motors have top portion of shaft of duplex stainless steel 

and bottom is high surface finish. Shafts do not wear like a pump shaft will. 


31. 2.1.G.5.10 Specification exception - Could not use stock motors and could not meet delivery. 

Recommend change to balance per manufacturers standard. 


32. 2.1.H Request specification change to “Manufacture responsible to supply with manufacture splice 

+ Hi-Pot Test instead of well installer supplying. 2.1.I 


33. 2.1 I. Specification clarification - Normally the installer supplies the ss cable supports. Are these 

in the installing contractors scope of work? 

The items in 2.1 I will be in this Contract Scope of Work. 

4


34. 2.6 Specification clarification - Who supplies installation tools - Are these in the installing 

contractors scope of work? 

The intent of Paragraph 2.6 is for the pumping unit Supplier to provide any “special tools, 

devices, or gauges required”. The pump install contractor will provide the tools necessary for 

the installation minus anything special that the pumping unit might require. 

35. On Page 11210-11 Item 2.7 A there is a small typographical error where the word "spares" should be 

the work "spacers". 

Modify Paragraph 2.7.A, Specification Section 11210, as follows: the third sentence should 

read, “Spacers not meeting this size will be rejected.” 

36. 5.02 A. Specification exception - Need longer than 7 days for submittals - Request a minimum of 14 

days. 

7 days is required to maintain an expedited schedule. 

37. 5.04 A. Please clarify are liquidated damages $100 per day for each pump? Please cap Liquidated 

Damages at maximum of 5% of contract value. 

Liquidated damages will be $100 per day per order. Pumping units will be ordered as 

information becomes available on well characteristics. Pumping units are anticipated to be 

ordered in groups of 4 or 5. No cap on Liquidated Damages has been included due to emphasis 

on the expedited schedule. 

Technical Specification Section 11210, Appendix A 

38. In Appendix A Wells D11, D14, and D19 are rated to provide about 900, 850 and 900 gpm. At those 

pumping rates, suggest that 7-inch or 8-inch diameter pump column be considered in lieu of 6-inch 

diameter pump column to reduce the flow velocity and also the friction loss. Also would suggest for 

the well pumps for D9, D23 and D24 that 5-inch or 6-inch diameter pump column be considered in 

lieu of the 4-inch diameter column. 

Actual column pipe will need to be determined following field aquifer tests, which will be 

conducted after the Bid Closing Date. If an increase in column pipe is required for any reason, 

including increased flow, this will be accomplished by Change Order. 

39. Need the well diameters for wells D5, D7, D19, and P1 thru P4 

Prospective Bidders are encouraged to Bid each item assuming that the pump and 

appurtenances will fit inside the well casing. 

40. We would have nothing to offer in wells D-15, D18 because of the 12" well and 2300v requirement - 

suggest reduction to 900 GPM and allow 8” - 3600 RPM Motor. 

Comment acknowledged. Please see Addendum 1. The use of “substitutions” and “as equal” 

items will be evaluated for the selected Bidder. 

5

Technical Specifications






SECTION 01010 

SUMMARY OF WORK 


1.1 Summary 


1. Contract Description. 

2. Work by Seller. 

3. Contract Time and General Order of Construction. 

4. Approval of Equipment and Materials. 

5. Warranty. 

1.2 Contract Description 

A. The project includes furnishing twenty-one (21) deep well submersible turbine pumping 

units for use in constructed municipal potable water wells located in Ward County, 

Texas, USA for the Colorado River Municipal Water District (CRMWD). The wells have 

been previously constructed under a separate contract and their final capacities 

determined for the purpose of sizing pumping equipment. 

B. Contract Type is unit price basis for work actually performed and measured. 

C. Seller shall make every effort to sequentially deliver all equipment to the project site as 

stipulated in the Contract Documents. 

1.3 Work by Seller 

A. The Seller shall perform all the Work specified in the individual specification sections, 

including the following: 

1. Provide labor, equipment, and materials to construct and furnish submersible 

pumping units and appurtenances. 

2. Deliver specified products in a timely manner and as required by the Contract 

Documents. 

3. Provide the services of a competent factory-trained field service technical 

representative for each pump installation. Representative’s duties shall include 

assisting the installation contractor (not this Contract) with the installation of the 

equipment assuring proper alignment and coupling, testing, and instructing the 

owner on proper operation and maintenance of the equipment. 

4. Provide certified testing reports and field measurements necessary to demonstrate 

efficiency(ies) required by the Contract Documents can be validated. Other 

required testing will include shop testing of pump and motor to provide certified 

test curves prior to acceptance. 

5. With assistance from the Engineer, coordinate delivery of pumping equipment 

with the installation contractor. 

6. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01300 Submittals. 

January 2012 


Revision 0 01010 - 1




1.4 Contract Time and General Order of Construction 

A. Completion of the project within the time allotted is of the essence. The Seller shall 

commit all necessary forces and equipment to complete the project within the milestones 

specified in the Contract Documents. 

B. Manufacturing sequence of submersible pumping units will coincide with well 

installation and testing. After pumping tests have been performed for a particular group 

of wells, an order will be placed for particular pumping units. Each well will be complete 

and available to receive pumping equipment when the unit is delivered. 

1.5 Approval of Equipment and Materials 

A. All materials shall be new and shall be designed for the function and service specified 

herein. No materials shall be used in the project except those that have been approved by 

the Engineer. 

B. Approval for installation or incorporation in the project will be given only after submittal 

and subsequent examination of shop and installation drawings, manufacturer's 

specifications, test results, or other data required in the various sections of these 

specifications. Final approval and acceptance of items will be made only after such items 

are in operation and have met all specified tests. 

1.6 Warranty 

A. Seller shall warrant 100 percent of the project for one (1) year after the date of final 

acceptance of the Work. 

B. Seller shall remedy any defects in material workmanship, and pay for any and all 

damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in defects in materials and workmanship at 

no cost to the Owner. Seller will also be obligated to pay for all expenses incurred by 

Owner in notification of claim, administration, engineering, Resident Project 

Representative (RPR) services, and other warranty related expenses to Owner. 

C. Seller shall be responsible for all costs associated with pulling and reinstalling pumping 

equipment found to be defective in materials and/or workmanship within the warranty 

period. 


Not Used 


Not Used 


January 2012 






SECTION 01019 

CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS 


1.1 Summary 


1. Applications for payment. 

2. Defect assessment. 

1.2 Applications for Payment 

A. Submit three (3) copies of each application on Engineer-approved form. The Engineer 

shall prepare the pay application and send to Seller for signature. 

B. Content and Format: Utilize bid items shown in the Bid Form for listing items in the 

Application for Payment or approved schedule of values. 

C. Payment Period: Submit application for payment on or about the 26th day of each month. 

Applications for payment submitted later than previously described will be processed the 

following month. 

D. Include an updated delivery progress schedule, materials received, and manifest as 

applicable. 

E. Submit the following along with the application for final payment: 

1. Consent of Surety to Final Payment (form attached). 

2. Seller’s Certificate that all Claims Paid to Materialmen, etc. (form attached). 

3. Seller’s Affidavit of Release of Liens (form attached). 

4. Seller warranties for this job shall be signed and sealed by a Notary Public. 

5. Provide certified test reports and other specific information required by the 


6. Provide all spare parts and equipment required by the Contract Documents. 

1.3 Defect Assessment 

A. Correct any work that is found defective by the Owner or his representative in a timely 

manner. 


Not Used 


Not Used 


January 2012 

Contract Considerations 


SECTION 01019 

CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS 

ATTACHMENTS 

1) Consent of Surety to Final Payment 

2) Seller’s Certificate that all Claims Paid to Materialmen, etc. 

3) Seller’s Affidavit of Release of Liens

CONSENT OF SURETY 

TO FINAL PAYMENT 

TO OWNER: 

(Name and address) 

CRMWD 

P.O. Box 869 

400 East 24th Street 

Big Spring, TX 79720 

ENGINEER’S PROJECT NUMBER: 

. 

CONTRACT FOR: Vertical Turbine Submersible 

Pumping Units 


PROJECT: 

(Name and address) 


Well Pumping Units 

CONTRACT DATED: . 

In accordance with the provisions of the Contract between the Owner and the Seller as indicated above, 

the 

(Insert name and address of Surety) 

on bond of 

(Insert name and address of Seller) 

, SURETY, 

, SELLER, hereby 

approves of the final payment to the Seller, and agrees that final payment to the Seller shall not relieve the Surety of 

any of its obligations to 

(Insert name and address of Owner) 

Colorado River Municipal Water District (CRMWD) 

P.O. Box 869 

400 East 24th Street 

Big Spring, TX 79720 

, OWNER, 

as set forth in said Surety’s bond. 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety has hereunto set its hand on this date: 

(Insert in writing the month followed by the numeric date and year.) 

(Surety) 

Attest: . 

(Seal): 

(Signature of authorized representative) 

(Printed name and title)


SELLER'S CERTIFICATE 

THAT ALL CLAIMS PAID TO MATERIALMEN, ETC. 

THE STATE OF TEXAS 

COUNTY OF WARD 

Contract Dated: 

RE: Job No. 

Description: Vertical Turbine Submersible 

Pumping Units 


Seller: 

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: 

WHEREAS, the City of Amarillo has heretofore contracted with the undersigned Seller as to the above 

described job and contract; and 

WHEREAS, such above described job has been completed according to its terms and provisions and the 

said Seller desires payment from the City of Amarillo upon the final estimates under the contract; and 

WHEREAS, before final payment the City of Amarillo desires evidence and assurance that all outstanding 

claims have been paid by said Seller; 

NOW, THEREFORE, the undersigned hereby certifies that all claims hereunder have been paid and that 

there are no outstanding claims of labor, materialmen, subcontractors, or any other claims arising out of the 

performance of the above referred to contract, which might be asserted against the City of Amarillo. The undersigned 

does further agree and bind himself (themselves), his (theirs) heirs, executors, administrators, assigns and 

successors to indemnify and save harmless said City of Amarillo from any such claims arising out of said contract. 

IN WITNESS THEROF the undersigned has signed and sealed this instrument on the_________ day of 

__________________, A.D., 20______. 

SELLER: 

BY: ____________________________________ ATTEST: ______________________________ 

TITLE: _________________________________ 

THE STATE OF TEXAS 

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT 

COUNTY OF ____________________________ 

BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, personally appeared the above named person and before me, duly 

sworn on oath, deposed and says that he is the person above named, that he has the authority to sign such 

instrument, that he is the person and officer so stated, that he has read the foregoing certificate by him subscribed in 

his official capacity and that all matters and all things therein stated are true and correct. 

SUBSCRIBED and sworn before me this ______ day of ______________, A.D., 20______. 

Notary Public in and for 

_________________County, Texas


Seller’s Affidavit of Release of Liens 

Project: Vertical Turbine Submersible Pumping Units, Ward County North Well Field 

. 

Owner: _______________________________________________________________________________________ 

Seller: ____________________________________________________________________________________ 

The Seller, in accordance with the Contract Documents, and in consideration for the full and final payment to the 

Seller for all services in connection with the project, does hereby waive and release any and all liens, or any and all 

claims to liens which the Seller may have on or affecting the project as a result of its contract(s) for the Project or for 

performing labor and/or furnishing materials in any way connected with the construction or any aspect of the 

project. The Seller certifies and warrants that all subcontractors of labor and/or materials for the Project, except as 

listed below, have been paid in full for all labor and/or materials supplied to, for, through or at the direct or indirect 

request of the Seller prior to, through and including the date of this affidavit. 

Exceptions: 

(if none, write “NONE”. A bond acceptable to the Owner may be required for each exception.) 

Seller: 

By: _______________________________________________________________ 

Title: ______________________________________________________________ 

Subscribed and sworn to before me this day __________of , 20______ 

Notary Public: _____________________________________ Seal: 

My Commission Expires: ____________________________





SECTION 01025 

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 


1.1 Summary 

A. The unit price or lump sum price on each item, as stated in the Contract Documents, shall 

include furnishing all labor, superintendence, machinery, equipment, and materials 

necessary or incidental to complete the various items of work in accordance with the 

drawings and specifications. The quantities listed in the Contract Documents are 

estimated and not guaranteed. Payment for each item will be made for actual field 

measured quantities. Cost of work or materials shown on the drawings or called for in the 

specifications and for which no separate payment is made shall be included with the most 

applicable item(s). 

1.2 Unit Cost Items 

A. Unit cost items to be paid for at a unit cost per unit shall include all work and materials 

involved in the manufacturing, delivery and installation within the limits designated on 

the drawings. Measurement shall be made in units shown on the Bid Form. All work so 

included shall be installed, constructed or performed as shown on the drawings and/or 

specified herein. 

1.3 Lump Sum Items 

A. Lump sum items to be paid for at a lump sum price per job shall include all work and 

materials involved in the installation within the limits designated on the drawings. No 

measurement of the work or material included in such items will be made. All work so 

included shall be installed, constructed, or performed as shown on the drawings and/or 

specified herein. 

1.4 Submersible Pumping Unit, Complete 

A. No measurement will be made for furnishing a complete submersible pumping unit, 

including motor, pump, power cable, termination at motor, splices, and all incidental 

items to the end that a complete operating submersible pumping unit is provided as 

intended. 

B. Payment for furnishing the submersible pumping unit, including motor, pump, power 

cable, motor lead, termination at motor, splice (at motor lead and power cable), 

performance tests, and appurtenances, complete on site (FOB project site) as specified, 

shall be on a unit price basis as specified in the Contract Documents. 


Not Used 

January 2012 

Measurement and Payment 






Not Used 


January 2012 

Measurement and Payment 





SECTION 01040 

COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 


1.1 Summary 


1. Coordination. 

2. Meetings. 

3. Schedule of Work. 

1.2 Coordination 

A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various sections of specifications to 

assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction 

elements with provisions for accommodating items installed later. 

B. Verify that characteristics of equipment and materials to be incorporated into the project 

are compatible. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent 

responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment and 

materials. 

C. Installation contractor (to be determined and not a part of this Contract) will coordinate 

the schedule for installation of pumping equipment with the Seller. 

D. Coordinate delivery and storage of equipment with the Engineer and installation 

contractor. 

E. Coordinate startup with the Engineer and installation contractor. 

F. Coordinate field testing with the installation contractor. 

G. Prepare and document equipment installation report with the installation contractor. 

H. Complete and deliver operation and maintenance manuals following results of field 

testing. 

1.3 Meetings 

A. Participate in monthly progress meetings, as necessary, for other contracts associated 

with this project and relative to this Contract. 

1.4 Schedule of Work 

A. The Seller has full discretion in scheduling the Work. 

January 2012 

Coordination and Meetings 






Not Used 


Not Used 


January 2012 

Coordination and Meetings 





SECTION 01300 

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 


1.1 Summary 


1. Submittal procedures. 

2. Resubmittal requirements. 

3. Shop drawings. 

4. Product data. 

5. Design data. 

6. Certificates. 

7. Manufacturer instructions. 

8. Manufacturer field reports. 

9. Operation and maintenance data. 

10. Spare parts and maintenance products. 

11. Product warranties and product bonds. 

1.2 Submittal Procedures 

A. To expedite delivery of critical lead items, the Seller, upon Notice of Award, shall 

immediately transmit submittals as required by and in accordance with the Contract 

Documents. The particular equipment or materials for installation for which this early 

submittal process applies are listed below. These items are not meant to be all inclusive 

or limiting. If the Seller has other items he deems critical, he shall notify the Engineer 

and denote all critical items in his submittal schedule. 

1. Product information and engineering design for motors and pumps. 

2. Power cable and termination at motor. 

B. Submit to Engineer for review for limited purpose of checking for conformance with 

information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. 

C. Transmit each submittal with Seller's standard transmittal letter including Seller's name, 

address and phone number. 

D. Sequentially number transmittal forms using Section number or Seller’s other sequential 

numbering system. 

E. Identify Project, Seller, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing sheet and detail 

number(s); and specification Section number, appropriate to submittal. 

F. Apply Seller's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of Products 

required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information 

are in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. 

January 2012 






G. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to Engineer electronically. 

Coordinate submission of related items. 

H. Identify variations from Contract Documents and product or system limitations that may 

be detrimental to successful performance of completed Work. 

I. Allow space on submittals for Seller and Engineer review stamps. 

J. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to promptly 

report any inability to comply with provisions. 

K. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. 

L. Format 

1. Submit all submittals digitally using .pdf file extension. 

2. Submittals in any other format will be rejected. 

3. Hard copies will not be accepted. 

M. The submittal procedures described in this Article applies to any type of submittal 

transmitted to Engineer. 

1.3 Resubmittal Requirements 

A. Revise and resubmit submittals, as required, and resubmit to meet requirements as 

specified and as noted on submittal reviews. 

B. Mark as RESUBMITTAL. 

C. Reuse original transmittal number and supplement with sequential alphabetical or 

numeric suffix for each resubmittal. 

1.4 Shop Drawings 

A. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics and utility connection requirements. 

B. Printable Image Size: Minimum 8½ x 11 inches and maximum 22 x 34 inches. 

C. Draw details to a minimum scale of ½ inch equal to 1 foot. 

D. Construction Documents (electronic or paper format) issued by the Engineer cannot be 

used in any way in the creation and development of shop drawings. 

E. Under no circumstances shall a Contract Document issued by the Engineer be modified, 

changed, supplemented or amended, nor the Design Professional’s seal or title block of 

the drawing reproduced, in the creation and publication of Shop Drawings. All shop 

drawings must be original works from the Seller, subcontractors, and material suppliers. 

January 2012 






1.5 Product Data 

A. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. 

Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this Project. 

B. Include recommendations for application and use, and reference to compliance with 

specified standards of trade associations and testing agencies. 

C. Include notation of special coordination requirements for interfacing with adjacent work 

and building utilities where applicable. 

1.6 Design Data 

A. Submit for Engineer's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. 

B. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information 

given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. 

1.7 Certificates 

A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by manufacturer, 

installation/application subcontractor, or Seller to Engineer. 

B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit 

supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. 

C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be 

acceptable to Engineer. 

1.8 Manufacturer Instructions 

A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit manufacturers' printed 

instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, startup, adjusting, and finishing. 

B. Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and Contract Documents. 

C. Indicate special procedures, conditions requiring special attention and special 

environmental criteria required for application or installation. 

1.9 Manufacturer Field Reports 

A. Submit reports for Engineer’s benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. 

B. Submit report within 30 days of observation to Engineer for information. 

C. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information 

given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. 

January 2012 






1.10 Operation and Maintenance Data 

A. Submit data bound in 8½ x 11 inch (A4) text pages, three D-side ring binders with 

durable plastic covers. Submit a compatible digital copy of the entire operation and 

maintenance manual. 

B. Prepare binder cover with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE 

INSTRUCTIONS", title of project. 

C. Internally subdivide binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as 

described below, with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. 

D. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger 

drawings to size of text pages. 

E. Contents: Prepare Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system 

description identified, typed on white paper, in three parts as follows: 

1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Engineer, 

Seller, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 

2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and 

subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, 

addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors, suppliers, and nearest 

competent service representative. Identify the following: 

a. Significant design criteria. 

b. List of equipment. 

c. Part list for each component. 

d. Operating instructions for startup, routine and normal operations, 

regulation and control, shutdown, and emergency conditions. 

e. Lubrication and maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. 

f. Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning 

methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental 

agents. 

g. Guide to trouble shooting. 

h. Outline, cross section, and assembly drawings; engineering data; control 

schematics and point-to-point wiring diagrams, and reproductions of all 

equipment nameplates. 

i. Test data and performance curves, certified pump curves, etc., where 

applicable. 

j. All information supplied shall be specific to that equipment supplied for 

this product. 

3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: 

a. Shop drawings and product data. 

b. Air and water balance reports. 

c. Certificates. 

d. Equipment Installation Report (EIR). 

e. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. 

F. The above information, as applicable, shall be provided for the equipment as indicated in 

individual specification sections. 

January 2012 






G. The operation and maintenance manuals shall be in addition to any instructions or parts 

listed packed with or attached to the equipment when delivered. 

H. Manuals shall be printed on heavy, first-quality paper, 8½ x 11 inch size with standard 

3-hole punching. Drawings and diagrams shall be reduced to 8½ x 11 inches. Where 

reduction is not practicable, larger drawings shall be folded separately and placed in 

envelopes which are bound into the manual. Each envelope shall bear suitable 

identification on the outside. 

I. Two preliminary copies of each manual, temporarily bound in heavy paper covers 

bearing suitable identification, shall be submitted to the Owner at the time of submittal of 

the shop drawings. After review by the Owner, Supplier shall prepare three (3) final 

copies of each operation and maintenance manual and deliver to the Owner not later than 

90 days prior to placing the equipment into operation. The final manuals shall be bound 

in stiff artificial black leather, metal hinged binders, 2- to 3½-inch capacity, three-post 

style. 

1.11 Spare Parts and Maintenance Products 

A. Furnish spare parts, maintenance, and extra products in quantities specified in individual 

specifications sections. 

B. Deliver to Project site and place in location as directed by Owner; obtain receipt prior to 

final payment. 

1.12 Product Warranties and Product Bonds 

A. Obtain warranties and bonds executed in duplicate by responsible subcontractors, 

suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten (10) days after completion of applicable item of 

work. 

B. Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents and bonds from subcontractors, 

suppliers, and manufacturers. 

C. Verify documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. 

D. Co-execute submittals when required. 

E. Submit prior to final Application for Payment. 


Not Used 


Not Used 


January 2012 




EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REPORT (EIR) 

PROJECT NO. 

OWNER: Colorado River Municipal Water District (CRMWD) . 

PROJECT: Well Pumping Units . OWNER: CRMWD . 

CONTRACTOR: . CONTRACTOR: . 

ENGINEER: Daniel B. Stephens and Associates, Inc. . ENGINEER: . 

. EIR NO.: . 

REFERENCE DATA. 

Specification Section No.: . Page No. . Para. No. . 

Sheet No. . Entitled . 

Detail Designation . Drawing Attached (Yes/No) . 

EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION:. 

Name (from drawings) . 

Identification No. . Unit No. . 

Manufacturer . 

Capacity . 

Model No. . Serial No. . 

EQUIPMENT LOCATION:. 

Structure . 

N/S Coord. . E/W Coord. . Station . Elevation . 

OPERATOR TRAINING HAS BEEN CONDUCTED ON:. 

Operation of Equipment Routine Maintenance Trouble Shooting 

Emergency Procedures Lubrication Procedures Start-up and Shut-down 

OPERATOR TRAINING CONDUCTED:.. 

Dates: . Number of Hours . 

EQUIPMENT HAS BEEN CHECKED FOR:. 

. Installation Lubrication Alignment 

. Stress imposed by piping and/or anchor bolts . Operation under full load conditions 

. Other conditions as specified 

. 

I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I WAS PRESENT WHEN THE EQUIPMENT DESCRIBED ABOVE WAS PLACED INTO 

OPERATION AND HAVE INSPECTED, CHECKED AND ADJUSTED THE EQUIPMENT AS NECESSARY FOR ITS 

PROPER OPERATION. AS AN AUTHORIZED TECHNICAL REPRESENTATIVE OF THE EQUIPMENT 

MANUFACTURER, I APPROVE THE INSTALLATION AND AUTHORIZE OPERATION OF THE EQUIPMENT. 

BY: . DATE: . 

REPRESENTING: . 

Section 01300 Attachment





SECTION 01700 

CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 


1.1 Summary 


1. Closeout procedures. 

2. Final cleaning. 

1.2 Closeout Procedures 

A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been 

inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready 

for Engineer's inspection. 

B. Provide submittals to Engineer that are required by governing or other authorities. 

C. Provide warranties, certifications, and test analysis as specified. 

D. Provide Operation and Maintenance Manuals as specified. 

E. Provide operator training as specified. 

F. If equipment provided is to be stored verify that equipment has been properly stored and 

Owner instructed in the care of stored equipment. Provide written instruction for the 

storage of such equipment. 

1.3 Final Cleaning 

A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection. 

B. Clean site. 

C. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site and 

lawfully dispose of. 


Not Used 


Not Used 


January 2012 

Contract Closeout 






SECTION 11210 

SUBMERSIBLE VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPING UNITS 


1.1 Summary 

A. This section of the specifications provides for furnishing complete submersible pumping 

unit assemblies. The assemblies and work shall include the motor, pump, power cable, 

startup services, testing (manufacturing and field), and appurtenances resulting in a 

complete, functional pumping unit. The Seller shall provide and deliver all equipment, 

startup services, testing, training, labor, tools, superintendence, transition piece (if 

necessary) between column pipe and pump discharge case, and all incidental items 

necessary during installation. Installation of the pumping units is not a part of this 

Contract. 

B. The pumping unit shall be designed and constructed to operate continuously for the 

purpose of conveying potable water into a water collection system. 

C. Water quality testing is included in Appendix B for pumping unit manufacturer use. 

Should any constituent give cause for concerns, notify Engineer immediately. 

D. Motor and pump shall be of the same manufacturer and regularly coupled, manufactured 

and sold together for use in municipal water wells for no less than 10 years. The use of 

special adaptors, couplings, etc. to couple the motor and pump will not be acceptable and 

will constitute rejection of the equipment. 

E. The pumping units will be started across the line at 480 V, 3 phase, 60 Hz. Any motor 

size of > 100 horsepower (hp) will be operated at 2,300 V. Motors that are 100 hp will 

operate at 480 V. The 480 V starting power will be transformed to 2,300 V between the 

starting equipment and motor load for 2,300 V motors. 

F. During activities such as disinfection, pumping units will be exposed to chlorinated water 

having 100 mg/L concentration of chlorine. Submit information indicating that all 

materials exposed to the pumped product will not be harmed in any way by this 

condition. 

G. The terms “Contractor” or “Bidder” used in this section are defined as the manufacturer 

and/or supplier of the equipment and services specified herein, otherwise referred to as 

the Seller in the Contract Documents. 

1.2 References 

A. AWWA E101-88 -Vertical Turbine Pumps -Line Shaft and Submersible Types 

B. AWWA E102-06 – Submersible Vertical Turbine Pumps 

January 2012 

Submersible Vertical Turbine Pumping Units 





C. National Electric Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) 

D. National Electric Code 

E. ASTM A48 - Gray Iron Castings 

F. ASTM A276 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes 

G. ASTM B148 - Aluminum-Bronze Castings 

H. ASTM B584 - Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Application 

I. TDLR, Title 12, Chapter 1901 

J. TCEQ, Chapter 290 

K. AWWA, A100-97, Water Utilities 

L. Hydraulic Institute Standards 

1.3 Performance Requirements 

A. Minimum pump and motor efficiency have been enumerated in the Contract Documents. 

Efficiencies less than that stated shall be grounds for rejection. 

1.4 Submittals 

A. Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review and approval manufacturers cut sheets 

on equipment specified herein. Information shall include materials of construction, pump 

curves and other specified information. Certified pump curves will be required as 

stipulated in AWWA, E102-06. 

B. Include certified drawings showing all important dimensions and details of construction 

and installation, including the following: 

1. Assembly of pump/motor and all components parts 

2. Interface connection dimensions to a common location 

3. Size, weight, and lifting details of major components 

4. Details of dimensions of surfaces plate, bowl diameter including cable width, 

motor diameter and length, overall length of unit 

5. Foundation loading (static and dynamic loads) 

6. Calculations and supporting documentations for determining the break 

horsepower and input horsepower selected for each pumping unit. 

C. A complete bill of materials listing each component and its material of construction. 

D. Pump characteristic curves shall show total head in feet versus flow rate in gpm, 

efficiency, brake horsepower, and required NPSH for the entire operating range from 

shutoff to manufacturer’s maximum recommended flow rate. Separately note minimum 

and maximum recommended flow rate. 

January 2012 






E. Submit the following Manufacturer’s Certificates in accordance with Section 01300, 

Submittals: 

1. Certificate of Compliance with qualification requirements as specified herein, 

including reference list 

2. Manufacturer’s certified factory test reports 

3. Manufacturer’s certified field test reports (to follow after field testing) 

4. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance 

F. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals and Equipment Installation Report for 

pumping units. 

1.5 Quality Assurance 

A. Equipment manufacturer shall submit evidence of experience and qualifications equal to 

or greater than that required in “Instructions to Bidders”. Inability to demonstrate 

experience and qualifications shall be grounds for rejection. 

B. Factory Testing: Certified factory tests of each pumping unit will be required. The factory 

test of the pumping unit shall produce at a minimum the following information: 

1. Head capacity curve: Take at least eight (8) points at 100% speed using job 

motor to Hydraulic Institute (HI) Standards, both rated head and rated capacities 

will be considered. The Owner reserves the right to witness testing. 

Manufacturer shall notify Engineer and Owner seven (7) days in advance of 

testing allowing time to make travel arrangements. Cost of travel if witnessing 

test(s) shall be borne by Engineer and Owner that is over and above the two (2) 

to be paid for by Contractor as identified in the Bid Form. Testing results that fall 

outside HI standards will be grounds for rejecting the equipment and the 

manufacturer correcting at his own expense, retesting at his own expense and 

reimbursing Owner/Engineer to witness the pump test a second time. 

2. Shaft brake horsepower curve. 

3. Wire to water efficiency (overall efficiency, including cable loss/column loss). 

4. Water to water efficiency (pump efficiency) 

5. Motor efficiencies. Dynamometer testing shall be performed on no less than five 

(5) motors that will be permanent part of the project. 

6. Test the stator insulation resistance with a megohmeter. The minimum acceptable 

insulation resistance level shall be 8,000 megohms (in a submerged condition). 

Megohm readings are expected to be at least one and two full orders of 

magnitude higher than the list minimum. Test phase to ground and phase to 

phase of all legs. 

7. Test motor winding resistance by using a Kelvin bridge. 

8. High potential test the motor insulation system at twice operating voltage plus 

1,000 V. 

9. Calculated running speed of motor during factory testing of the pumping unit to 

demonstrate compliance with capacity and head, based on dynamometer testing 

results. 

C. The factory test shall be conducted on the actual unit(s) to be installed in the field, 

including the pump and motor. A factor power cable having a premeasured loss may be 

used in lieu of the actual pump cable. The factory test shall be conducted after the 

January 2012 






pumping unit(s) to be shipped to the field have been fully assembled (minus power cable 

and connection) and the impeller diameters have been trimmed to meet the duty head 

requirements for each pump. Field conditions are to be simulated and corrections for 

column pipe and other losses are to be calculated and included for comparison of results 

with the contract curves and field test curves. Three copies of the certified factory test 

results shall be furnished within three days after completion of all specified tests (and 

included in the operation and maintenance manuals. Should the pumping unit not meet 

contract conditions or perform unsatisfactorily in the judgment of the Engineer or Owner, 

the Contractor shall correct the deficiencies, subject to Engineer approval. In no case will 

abnormal back filing of impellers, thinning impeller cross sections, applying coatings or 

other artificial, temporary improvement be acceptable to increase efficiency of the 

pumping unit. 

D. Field Testing : After installation of the pumping units is completed, except for final 

connection to the water collection pipeline, the entire assembly will be subject to field 

testing. Field testing will be performed, as part of this Contract, to verify mechanical 

performance and efficiencies of the unit. The installation contractor (not in this Contract) 

shall install the pumping unit in accordance with the manufacturer’s field services 

technician’s instructions. The service technician shall be present during the entire time 

for the pump installation and subsequent performance testing. The field test shall be 

conducted in accordance with AWWA E101-88, Appendix A and/or revised by E102-06 

(use the more stringent of the two). The form provided in AWWA E101-88, Appendix A 

shall be completed and all tests, measurements, readings and calculations completed. Test 

results shall be submitted to the Engineer for review. Provide vibration reading taken 

nearest to the center line axis of the column pipe at the 90-degree discharge elbow. 

These readings will provide a baseline for future readings. Equipment found to be 

deficient with respect to motor and/or pump efficiency shall be corrected by Contractor at 

his sole expense. 

E. All costs for field visits by manufacturer trained technician and all other stated 

requirements of these specifications shall be included by the Contractor in his bid price 

for the pumping equipment. 

1.6 Delivery Storage and Handling 

A. Packaging of Equipment: The equipment provided in accordance with the specifications 

shall be shipped by the Contractor in such manner as to ensure arrival at destination in an 

undamaged condition with the current issue of the Consolidated Freight Classification. 

Assemble equipment in factory to largest practical components to ensure proper fit, and 

mark parts for shipment and assembly accordingly. All equipment and parts shall be 

suitably protected to ensure against breakage or damage in transit. 

B. Point of Delivery: Equipment shall be delivered by the Contractor f.o.b. motor freight 

truck to the project site with specific handling instructions. 

C. Receiving: Equipment will be examined by the installation contractor (not in this 

contract) and Owner upon delivery, and if found to be in satisfactory condition, will be 

unloaded by the installation contractor. The field examination is only for the purpose of 

determining apparent damage in transit. The installation contractor will be responsible for 

January 2012 






proper storage of the delivered equipment until it is installed. Care shall be taken in 

handling manufacturer prelubricated components to avoid inadvertent loss of fluids. 

1.7 Operation and Maintenance Manuals 

A. Provide operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 01300 

Submittals, including all required documentation. 

1.8 Warranty 

A. The specified warranty period of one (1) year will not begin until final acceptance by 

Owner. 

1.9 Project Conditions 

A. Water quality information for several of the constructed wells has been provided in 

Appendix B to the Contract. The Contractor shall use this information to determine if 

there is any component that would cause concern or require the materials of construction 

be modified. Contractor shall indicate in writing if there is concern of any constituent or 

if nothing requires change. 

1.10 System Startup, Owner’s Instructions, Commissioning 

A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of a competent, factory-trained field service 

technical representative (salesman or representative are unacceptable), who shall have 

experience (5 years minimum) in the installation, operation, and adjustment of the 

equipment so specified. This service is for the purpose of insuring proper installation and 

adjustment of the equipment, instructing operating personnel in proper operation, 

maintenance, and care of the equipment, and making recommendations for obtaining the 

most efficient use thereof. The field service technician shall render assistance to the 

installation contractor during installation. The Contractor shall budget sufficient time to 

have the approved field technician on site for the complete duration of the installation of 

each pump. No additional payment will be made for time lost due to equipment 

breakdown, weather, faulty assembly, design or fabrication of equipment by the 

manufacturer. 

B. The Contractor provided field service technician shall provide his own means of 

obtaining required field readings of voltage, ampage, flow, etc. 

C. The Owner reserves the right to operate each of the pumping units, after installation, for a 

period of thirty (30) days before final acceptance. During such period, the Contractor, or 

his field service technician, shall make such adjustments as may be deemed necessary to 

improve the operating performance of the equipment. 

D. Contractor shall provide critical motor operational characteristics to allow proper settings 

of motor protection device(s). 

January 2012 






1.11 Definitions 

A. Pumping Unit: An integral combination of a deep well vertical turbine pump and 

submersible motor including all integral parts and equipment exclusive to a functioning 

unit. This will include all equipment from the suction end of the pump through and 

including the motor up to the electrical termination at the surface, all designed for 

sustained, continuous operation. 

1.12 System Description 

A. For the purposes of bidding the project the Contractor shall use the data provided in 

Appendix A for determining pumping unit selections. Minimum acceptable pump 

efficiency shall be ≥ 75%. Minimum motor efficiency shall be ≥ 80%. 

1.13 Equipment Installation Report 

A. A written report shall be submitted by the field service technician overseeing the 

installation of the pumping units. This report shall certify that 

1. The equipment has been properly installed and lubricated. 

2. The equipment is in accurate alignment. 

3. The equipment is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping, 

equipment, or anchor bolts. 

4. The equipment has been operated under full load conditions and that it is 

operating satisfactorily. 

B. The equipment installation report shall be witnesses by a notary public and submitted in 

triplicate to the Engineer for approval. After receiving approval include copies of the 

report(s) in the corresponding Operation and Maintenance Manual(s). 


2.1 Submersible Pumping Units 

A. The pump shall be a submersible deep well turbine type multistage in series design, 

complete with motor, power cable, power cable terminus to motor, transition piece at 

pump discharge, column pipe, discharge elbow and all appurtenances in accordance with 

these specifications. The pump shall conform to AWWA E102-06 except as otherwise 

specified herein. Pumping unit speed shall be 1,800 rpm. The pump and motor shall be 

coupled via a positive locking stainless steel coupling to produce maximum performance 

for torque and thrust. 

B. The submersible pump shall have a rated capacity and total dynamic head (TDH) equal to 

that indicated in Appendix A. The design of the pump shall be such that, when operating 

at heads of approximately 20 feet above or 20 feet below the rated head, the capacity of 

the pump will not vary by more than 10% of the rated capacity. 

C. The pump bowls shall be of close-grained cast iron ASTM A 48, Class 40 Gray Iron 

Casting minimum, smooth, sound, fine-grained, high-density, and free from blow holes, 

January 2012 






sand holes, and other defects. Ductile iron bowls will also be considered. They shall be 

accurately machined and fitted to close dimensions. The finished bowls shall be capable 

of withstanding a hydrostatic pressure equal to twice the head at rated capacity or 

2.0 times the shutoff head, whichever is greater. Neither rated head nor shutoff head 

pressure shall be greater than 85% of bowl rating pressure. Provide calculations 

demonstrating same. Each pump case shall include its own shaft sleeve bearing. Extralong 

bottom case and top case bearings shall be required. Bearing material shall be 

bronze. The bowl shall have sufficient thickness to allow for installation of wear rings in 

the future. 

D. The pump shaft shall be pickled, annealed, turned, ground, and polished corrosionresistant 

ASTM A 582 416 Stainless Steel or Engineer’s approved equal. The shaft, as a 

minimum, shall be based on a diameter as listed in ANSI/AWWA E102-06. Design of the 

pump shafts shall be such that all critical speeds shall be at least 25% greater than 

operating speeds. 

E. The impellers shall be the enclosed type, one piece, of high-grade bronze, aluminumbronze 

alloy or nickel-aluminum-bronze, and shall be balanced both hydraulically and 

dynamically. The use of zinc-bronze or zinc-containing alloys is not permitted. Impeller 

shall be manufactured with sufficient thickness to allow for machining and installation of 

wear rings in the future. The impellers shall be mounted to the pump shaft and held 

rigidly in place with either stainless steel tapered collets or stainless steel split rings and 

keys and be able to transmit load under any operating conditions without distortion or 

vibration. Impellers are to be standard product of the pump manufacturers and not contain 

special workmanship, materials, thinned veins or other modifications to temporarily 

increase efficiency. The outer tips of the impeller blades shall NOT be abnormally 

feathered (back filed) and shall be of sufficient thickness to withstand considerable wear 

before affecting performance of the pump. Reducing manufacturer typical vane thickness 

to improve pump efficiency will be grounds for rejection. 

F. The pump strainer body and top case shall be of the same material as specified for the 

pump cases. The top case shall incorporate a smooth transition of flow to the discharge 

column pipe. The strainer shall have a net inlet area equal to at least three times the 

impeller inlet area. The maximum unit opening shall not be more than 75% of the 

minimum opening of the water passage through the bowl or impeller. Strainer bearings 

shall be of the double-bearing type, including a sand cap over the upper bearing. 

G. The electric motor shall be of the submersible type suitable for continuous underwater 

operation. The motor shall be completely enclosed potable water filled (or 90% potable 

water and 10% USDA approved propylene glycol), mechanically sealed, squirrel cage, 

induction type designed to mount below the pump bowl assembly. The motor shall utilize 

a single rotor and stator to achieve the necessary horsepower. The motor shall be sized 

such that the nameplate ratings will not be exceeded at any point on the rating curve. The 

motor shall not be overloaded when operating at the rated head and capacity or at any 

point on the pump curve. The motor shall conform to the design, construction and 

performance of the latest NEMA Motor Standards except as modified herein. In no case 

will the motor size utilize any portion of the service factor in its operation. 

1. The submersible motor shall be designed to deliver continuously the necessary 

brake horse power (bhp) having a minimum 1.15 service factor. The motor shall 

January 2012 






be designed to operate at 1,800 rpm, at 480 V or 2,300 V, 3 phase, 60 Hz, 

alternating current, with full voltage (across the line) starting capability with a 

maximum current inrush of 500% without use of special starting equipment. The 

motor shall be a high reactance type design that will provide an inrush current 

that is low enough to allow across the line starting. The entire motor shall 

incorporate an insulation of Class B or better. Motor shall have a NEMA code 

letter of E or less (i.e., locked motor KVA per horsepower shall be 5.0 or less). 

Motor enclosure classification shall meet or exceed IP68 requirements. 

2. The motor shall be equipped with a bellows type mechanical seal, one and/or 

two. The seal material shall be 316SS bellows, Tungsten Carbide-Nickel rotating 

face, Viton gaskets or Engineer’s approved equal. Seal(s) shall be located in the 

top of motor near where the shaft extends through the motor housing. Seals 

placed back to back are unacceptable if two are proposed. Provide lip seal on 

shaft outboard of mechanical seal. 

3. The motor design shall automatically balance the internal pressure in the motor 

with the well pressure (submergence pressure) outside the motor. Provide 

suitably sized neoprene rubber membrane/diaphragm bellows to allow for 

expansion as the internal water heats or the external pressure increases with depth 

of set. 

4. The motor shall be equipped with a pivot type bidirectional double axial thrust 

bearing capable of carrying the weight of all rotating components including the 

hydraulic thrust of the pump (up-thrust and down-thrust) of the pump at shutoff 

head. It shall be rated at no less than 20,000 pounds of thrust in either direction 

or the actual thrust plus a safety factor of 2.0 in either the up or down direction; 

whichever is greater. The pump manufacturer shall supply calculation for downthrust 

and up-thrust with their submittal and substantiate the thrust bearing 

capacity. The thrust bearings shall be lubricated and cooled by the motor internal 

circulating system. The main rotating disc of the axial thrust assembly shall be 

stainless steel 431 and rotate between two graphite or composite graphite shoe 

assemblies. Substitutions permitted with approval of the Engineer. 

5. The water cooled/lubricated motor shall also have the following properties: 

a. Aggregate materials of construction: 

1) Main frame in cast steel St-52 type construction. 

2) Bearing housing and motor base, cast iron. 

3) Rotor shaft, AISI 416 SS or better. 

4) All wetted fasteners and washers shall be 316 SS. 

5) Motor and pump shall be coated with two applications of an 

NSF-approved high performance coating system made for 

continuous submergences applied over an SSPC-SP10, 2- to 

3-mil surface preparation. Total dry film thickness shall be 

between 10 and 12 dry mils. 

6) Provide replaceable radial bearings, bronze and graphite, with 

grooved profile over graphite surface, water lubricated, with 

large surface area and length to maximize side support and 

reduce lateral movement to an absolute minimum. 

7) Winding conductor shall suitable for continuous submergence. 

At a minimum, winding conductors shall be copper with a 

January 2012 






continuous insulation of PE2+PE that will provide electrical and 

mechanical protection. 

8) Rotor laminations shall be keyed to the motor shaft. 

9) Motor shaft shall have an additional chromium surface placed at 

radial bearing interfaces to reduce friction loss and enhance 

lubrication. 

10) Balance all rotating parts in accordance with API 841 and submit 

results with equipment submittal. 

11) Substitutions permitted with approval of the Engineer. 

6. The maximum motor diameter and the minimum inside diameter of the well shall 

be in such relationship that under any operating condition the water velocity past 

the motor shall not exceed 10 feet per second (ft/s) nor be less than 0.5 ft/s or 

minimum required by manufacturer for proper cooling. 

7. Provide motor with a stainless steel shroud to achieve a 0.5 ft/s flow past the 

motor. 

H. The Contractor shall supply, in addition to the pump unit, a power cable assembly of not 

less than the rating indicated and of appropriate size and construction to meet the service 

intended. The power cable assembly shall be furnished in the proper length to extend 

from the motor terminals to the terminal points at the motor control center. The power 

cable assembly design shall include a sealing terminal plug arrangement or other 

approved method, subject to Engineer’s review and approval with metal guards for 

protection against rubbing the inside of the casing during installation. Any approved 

cable splice is to be Hy-Pot tested underwater (at pressure) at the factory by the 

pump/motor supplier and the splice corrected if found defective. Furnish test results to 

Engineer, no exceptions. Failure to provide test results shall be grounds for rejection. 

I. Contractor shall provide stainless steel cable supports that saddle the cable, reducing the 

possibility of pinching or otherwise damaging the cable. Cable saddles and 1-inch bands 

shall be premanufactured stainless steel bands with shoulders fabricated for flat cable or 

semicircle for round cable. 304 stainless cable saddles and bands shall be as supplied by 

Paige Electric Co. or equal. Optional methods of supporting the cable will be considered 

subject to Engineer review and approval. Cable clamps and saddles shall be placed every 

20 feet, maximum. 

J. All cable fittings, terminals, and approved splices shall be watertight at the pressure 

encountered in use. 

K. The cable shall be based on three (3) conductors of stranded copper. Each conductor shall 

have crossed-linked polyethylene insulation. Cable is also to include an integral ground 

lead of appropriate size. The power cable is to include an overall nitrile rubber jacket. 

Other submersible cables will be considered on a case by case basis subject to Engineer 

review and approval. In no case will fillers be allowed. 

L. The cable size shall be determined by the manufacturer with the overall wire to water 

efficiency in mind. The complete power cable assembly shall be Hy-Pot tested to twice 

rated voltage plus 1,000 V. In addition, any splices shall be submerged underwater when 

tested at the rated voltage. Power cable shall be sized to provide for no more than a 3% 

January 2012 






voltage drop under in-rush loading with across-the-line starting. Provide calculation with 

submittal demonstrating this requirement is met. 

2.2 Surface Plate (by others, not in this Contract) 

A. The surface plate assembly shall be furnished by the Contractor. This assembly shall 

consist of a heavy duty support plate designed to support the total weight of the 

pump/motor and column pipe when filled with water. The surface plate assembly shall 

also include a long radius, 90° elbow with 125 pound flange outlet having a size equal to 

that of the aboveground discharge piping. The surface plate shall be provided with the 

options indicated on the drawings. 

2.3 Suction Shroud 

A. The submersible pump manufacturer shall provide a suction shroud to aid in the cooling 

of the pump motor if field conditions and motor properties are unsatisfactory. The shroud 

configuration, materials of construction, and calculations indicating water velocities shall 

be provided with the submittal. 

B. At a minimum the suction shroud shall be constructed of SCH 10 SS pipe, NSF 

approved, and shall be securely attached to the pump bowl assembly. Provide calculation 

that shroud can withstand imposed operational loads and installation loads. The shroud 

shall be provided with centering guides in the bottom to center the shroud around the 

motor. The shroud shall be sufficient diameter to allow ample space around the motor for 

passage of the water to the pump suction. Velocities shall not exceed those recommended 

by the manufacturer. 

2.4 Column Pipe (by others, not in this Contract) 

A. The steel pipe furnished for the pump column shall be of high strength with a minimum 

grade of API-5L X-42. Yield shall be a minimum of 42,000 psi and tensile shall be a 

minimum of 60,000 psi. Mill Test Reports specifying the grade of pipe shall be furnished 

to the Engineer. Heat numbers will be exposed on the pump column matching the Mill 

Test Reports. Column pipe shall be schedule 40 or heavier wall. 

B. The method of threading the pump column shall be with Computer Numeric Controlled 

(CNC) equipment to ensure consistently precise threads. No oil based threading coolant 

will be used in the manufacturing of the pump column. The column pipe shall an 8-V, 

¾ taper thread and couplings. The overall length of the pump column pipe shall be as 

indicated on the drawings. 

2.5 Column Check Valve(s) (by others, not in this Contract) 

A. Provide column check valves of a size equal to that of the column pipe. The check valves 

shall have a neoprene tube round upper cross bar to absorb seat opening shock. The check 

valves shall be capable of supporting all the components mounted below it when filled 

with water and operating in a dynamic condition. The valves shall be a Lakewood check 

valve, all steel 1000# test or approved equivalent. Install the number of valves and 

January 2012 


Revision 0 11210 - 10




location as recommended by check valve manufacturer and pumping unit manufacturer. 

Include calculations and location in column pipe string for Engineer review and approval. 

2.6 Dedicated Tools and Devices 

A. Furnish with the equipment one set of any special tools, devices or gauges required for 

assembly, operation, and maintenance of all equipment furnished. 

2.7 Casing Pipe Spacers (by others, not in this Contract) 

A. Casing spacers shall be polyethylene with stainless steel hardware (nuts and bolts) 

suitable for continuous submergence. Spacers shall be sized to fit within ½ inch of the 

inside diameter of the well casing pipe. Spares not meeting this size will be rejected. 

Casing spacers shall be as manufactured be APS, model CI, or approved equal. Materials 

having NSF approval are desirable. 


3.1 Installation of Pumping Unit (by others, not in this Contract) 

A. The Contractor shall install the pumping units and all its component parts to provide for a 

complete installation of a fully functioning well. The pump and motor shall be installed 

in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and as directed by the field 

technician. 

B. Before placing the pump, the Contractor shall verify that the well casing, screen, and 

sump are free of sediment. If sediment has accumulated, cleaning, by bailing or other 

approved method, may be request of the Contractor as a changed condition. 

C. The well casing and screen shall be tested with a 40-foot-long segment of pipe to the 

depth that the pump is to be set before placing the pump. The gage shall have an outside 

diameter at least equal 1 inch less than the inside diameter of the well casing. If the gage 

cannot be placed to the full depth of the well, the Contractor will pull off the well and 

await further instruction. 

D. The power cable from the pump motor shall be supported on the column pipe by means 

of cable clamps and stainless steel bands. Cable clamps shall be suitable for continuous 

submergence and carry the seal of the NSF if not stainless steel. Place cable clamps every 

20 feet, minimum. 

E. Install column check valves approximately 75 feet above the pump and thereafter in 

conformance with manufacturer suggested spacing. In no case is the distance between 

valves and the surface plate to be equal. Unequal distances are essential to prevent 

harmonic valve hammer. For line shaft units, install one check valve at the suction pipe. 

F. Seal the surface plate where it contacts the well head concrete seal with an approved 

material (Sika flex or equal). The surface plate shall be bolted (in four places, minimum) 

January 2012 


Revision 0 11210 - 11




to the concrete well seal block with stainless steel expansion anchors at least 6 inches in 

length and of a diameter as recommended by the pumping unit manufacturer. 

G. The Contractor shall install the conductors in the conduit and incidental items necessary 

for installing the power cable from the wellhead junction box to the motor controller. The 

electrical work shall be done by a licensed electrician. All conduit and wiring shall be 

sized, installed, and grounded in accordance with the National Electrical Code or as 

modified in the plans or specifications. 

H. After the equipment has been installed it shall be checked for proper operation as 

indicated in Part 1, System Startup, Owner’s Instruction, and Commissioning. 

3.2 Disinfection of Well (by others, not in this Contract) 

A. The Contractor is advised that all wells were previously disinfected after construction and 

were found to be absent of coliform. Three consecutive days of testing were performed 

during the step-drawdown test. The disinfected condition of the wells is unknown and 

will be required as part of this contract after the permanent pumping equipment is set. 

B. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to disinfect the wells in such a manner as to 

comply with the requirements of TCEQ Chapter 290, Water Hygiene. Official testing for 

coliform will be conducted after the permanent pump has been installed. A minimum of 

10 casing volumes shall have been evacuated prior to obtaining the official samples for 

testing. Disinfecting the wells shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance 

with AWWA C654-97, Disinfection of Wells, including the safe disposal of high 

concentrations of chlorinated water. 

C. Merely introducing a chlorine solution into the well will not be considered satisfactory. 

The water in the well casing shall be treated with chlorine to give an average chlorine 

dose of 50 mg/L to the entire volume of water in the casing. After the chlorine has been 

applied, surge the well at least three times to improve the mixing and induce contact of 

the chlorinated water with the adjacent aquifer. Surging of the well to induce mixing of 

the disinfectant may not be possible with the permanent pumping equipment as the 

column pipe will be fitted with a check valve. It may be necessary for the Contractor to 

utilize his own auxiliary pumping equipment to achieve the required surging of the wells. 

The chlorinated water shall rest in the casing for at least 12 hours, but no more than 

24 hours. 

D. Following the rest period, circulate the chlorinated water by pumping, wasting some of 

the water and returning some to the well, periodically testing for chlorine residual. 

Testing for chlorine residual shall be performed by the Contractor or his approved testing 

laboratory. When zero chlorine residual is measured, continue pumping the well to waste 

for at least 15 minutes or 10 casing diameters, whichever is greater. The Contractor shall 

then sample the well for bacteriological evaluation. Samples shall be submitted to a 

Texas Department of Health approved laboratory for chemical analysis until three 

successive daily raw water samples are free of coliform organisms. 

E. The bacteriological evaluation shall be tested by a Texas Department of Health approved 

laboratory for the presence of coliform in accordance with Standard Methods of the 

January 2012 


Revision 0 11210 - 12




Examination of Water and Wastewater. Laboratory costs for performing the specified 

tests shall be that of the Contractor’s and included in the most applicable bid item. If any 

of the samples show the presence of coliform, the Contractor shall repeat the process or 

modify (as approved by Engineer) until testing indicates zero coliform. Repeat 

disinfecting and testing shall be completed at no additional cost to the Owner. 

F. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper disposal of the contaminants and 

saturated chlorinated water. 

G. Disinfectant used for the wells shall be in liquid form. Solid tablets or powders will not 

be allowed. 

H. Cost for disinfecting the well, including alternate pumping equipment, shall be included 

in the bid item for same. 

I. Use the form following this specification section for submitting samples to approved 

laboratories. 

3.3 Field Quality Control 

A. Manufacturer’s representative shall: 

1. Approve installation before operation. 

2. Test, operate, and adjust system in presence of Engineer and Owner’s personnel 

and provide installation certification. 

3. Verify conformance with Contract Documents. 

4. Instruct Owner’s personnel on care and maintenance. 

5. Revisit jobsite as often as necessary during 30-day operational period to correct 

deficiencies to satisfaction of Engineer and Owner. 


January 2012 


Revision 0 11210 - 13


Specification Section 11210, Appendix A 



Preliminary Pump Assumptions 

Assumed Column Pipe Projected Water Depth Pump Well Friction Pipeline Head Loss* Assumed Static Casing Top of Bottom of Total Column Pump Motor Cable 

Pumping Flow Velocity Level During to be Set Head Loss and Delivery Pressure TDH Calculated Nominal Water Level Diameter Screen Screen Well Depth Pipe Suction Voltage Rating 

ID Rate (gpm) (ft/s) Pumping (ft bgs) (ft bgs) (feet) (feet) (feet) Input Hp Hp (ft bgs) OD (in) (ft bgs) (ft bgs) (ft bgs) Size (in) Depth (ft bgs) (volts) (volts) 

D1 280 7.1 312 452 29 97 437 51.6 60 198 16 342 640 650 4 452 480 5000 

D2 660 7.5 250 390 18 90 357 99.3 125 180 16 280 438 448 6 390 2300 5000 

D3 500 5.7 418 560 15 96 529 111 125 182 16 448 627 637 6 560 2300 5000 

D4 300 7.7 170 310 22 134 326 41.2 50 96 16 200 386 396 4 310 480 5000 

D5 540 6.1 300 440 13 105 419 95.3 100 6 2300 5000 

D6 360 4.1 323 457 6 128 457 69.3 75 138 16 353 673 683 6 457 480 5000 

D7 580 6.6 270 410 14 144 428 104.6 125 6 2300 5000 

D8 770 8.7 190 330 20 126 337 109 125 112 16 220 552 562 6 330 2300 5000 

D9 330 8.4 240 380 33 136 409 56.8 60 130 16 270 614 624 4 380 480 5000 

D10 400 4.5 256 396 7 134 396 66.8 75 148 16 286 610 520 6 396 480 5000 

D11 900 10.2 272 403 33 119 424 161 175 120 16 302 750 760 6 403 2300 5000 

D12 700 7.9 251 391 20 144 415 122 150 124 16 281 611 621 6 391 2300 5000 

D13 630 7.1 328 468 19 149 496 132 150 133 16 358 638 648 6 468 2300 5000 

D14 850 9.6 271 411 30 149 451 161 175 94 16 301 571 581 6 411 2300 5000 

D15 1030 6.6 206 384 10 147 363 157 175 95 12 236 752 762 8 384 2300 5000 

D17 450 5.1 220 360 8 161 388 73.6 100 109 16 250 488 498 6 360 2300 5000 

D18 1100 7.0 248 395 12 143 403 187 200 148 12 278 659 669 8 395 2300 5000 

D19 900 10.2 260 400 33 136 429 163 175 6 2300 5000 

D22 250 6.4 200 310 16 151 367 38.6 50 130 12 230 322 332 4 310 480 5000 

D23 330 8.4 267 407 35 154 456 63.5 75 112 16 297 560 570 4 407 480 5000 

D24 380 9.7 271 398 45 147 464 74.3 100 151 16 301 730 740 4 398 2300 5000 

Optional Supply Well Pump Designs 

P1 1400 8.9 250 400 19 470 277 300 8 2300 5000 

P2 1300 8.3 250 400 16 440 241 250 8 2300 5000 

P3 1150 7.3 250 400 13 450 218 225 8 2300 5000 

P4 1400 8.9 250 400 19 320 189 200 8 2300 5000 

Total 12,240 GPM * Pipeline head loss modeled by Freese & Nichols for pumping Conversion Factors Assumptions 

Total 17,625,600 GPD directly to Base 21 (Scenario B). 7.5 gallons per cubic foot 75% pump efficiency 

Total 17.63 MGD 60 seconds per minute 80% motor efficiency 

550 ft*lbf/s/hp 60% overall efficiency 

gpm = gallons per minute 12 inches per foot 25% increase due to minor losses 

ft/s = feet per second 2.31 feet water per psi 62.4 lb/ft 3 , unit weight of water 

ft bgs = feet below ground surface 

32.2 ft/s 2 , acceleration of gravity 

TDH = total dynamic head 

1.2E-05 ft 2 /s, kinematic viscosity 

Hp = horsepower 


in = inches 

20 psi, delivery pressure 

01/05/2012


Specification Section 11210, Appendix B 



Average Water Quality 

Average 

Analyte 

Alkalinity, Total (as CaC03) 

Alkalinity, Bicarbonate (as CaC03) 

Alkalinity, Carbonate (as CaC03) 

Benzene 

Toluene 

Ethyl benzene 

m_p-Xylenes 

o-Xylene 

Total Xylenes 

Total BTEX 

Hardness (CaC03) 

Chloride 

Fluoride 

Nitrate as N 

Sulfate 

Arsenic 

Cal cium 

Magnesium 

Manganese 

Potassium 

Sodium 

Conductivity 

Total dissolved solids 

C6-C12 Gasoline Range Hydrocarbons 

C12-C28 Diesel Range Hydrocarbons 

C28-C35 Oil Range Hydrocarbons 

Total TPH 1005 

pH 

Concentration 

(mg/L, except pH) 

212 

190 

48 

ND 

0.0165 

ND 

ND 

ND 

ND 

0.0165 

337 

470 

1.86 

1.07 

226 

0.0108 

75.6 

32.4 

0.052 

13.034 

165 

3064 

1399 

ND 

ND 

ND 

ND 

7.62

Bid Package 08 North Well Field - Garney Construction

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?